- Industrial & lab equipment
- Personal safety & protection
- Fire protection
- Secutron
- MODUL-R MR-2100
- Installation manual
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal. Secutron MODUL-R MR-2100, MODUL-R MR-2200
Add to My manuals1077 Pages
advertisement
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation
Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10
Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it delivers ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.
Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).
The standard battery options available for the MR-2200 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah internal, c) 10 Ah internal, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 35 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet,
55
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal
6.1 General
The MR-2200 Control Unit displays information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit beeps three times and loses any information sent.
The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it views whatever screen was the last to be viewed. To view Screen 0, which lists all the screens that are available, press 0 <Tab> . Press <Delete> to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab> key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the
<Tab> key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.
6.2 Control Unit
Screens
The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps.
All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter n <Tab> where n is the screen number.
Those screens marked with an asterisk (*) are useful in trouble shooting the panel.
Screen Name Description
0*
1
2
3
4
Index
LCD
Misc
Battery
AC
A list of all the available screens.
Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent key board key, with the keypad <Clear> being mapped to the key board <End> . Note: The control feature does not work over a network.
A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.
Displays the current battery level, and the current status of the battery and AC power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.
Commands
<Ctrl-B>
0<Ctrl-B>
Print battery calculation
Execute a dynamic battery test once and end continuous testing if on.
9900 <Ctrl-B> Start continuous dynamic battery testing.
Display the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for report AC fail.
56
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
6
7
Screen
5*
8
9*
10*
11*
12
13*
Name Description
Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values.
Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays.
Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits
(if any).
Common Relays Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common
Disconnect hot-key.
Alarm List Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line on the terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
Miscellaneous
Troubles
Output
Supervision
Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the
STATUS/MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.
Displays the current status of each of the outputs and the aux power outputs. An asterisk is shown for each output that is assigned, if it is turned on (if applicable) and the current supervision condition. The aux power outputs show a scaled number that should be about 225. An output with a power fault has had the 24VDC power connection to the MRNC2 board disconnected.
Relay Summary Displays the installed expansion modules and which relays have been operated. The first section shows which modules have been installed in the panel. Module 0 is the main board itself. The second section shows how many of each of the MRNC2 (UA228) and MRRL4 (UA229) modules are needed and installed. The bottom section shows all the relays in the system, which ones are on and the function of each. Note that a common trouble relay is turned on when the panel has no troubles; the minus sign is a reminder of this.
Archive Displays the Archive History List. This is the list of the last 900
(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
57
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
27
29
38
49
50
Screen
14
15
16
17
18
19
26
Name
Printer
Printer Status
Network
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 6
Misc. Outputs
System Reset
Switches
Clock
Tasks
Description
A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.
Displays the current printer status.
Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays information about the primary network port. Includes the status of the panels that are and should be online.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays information about the secondary network port. A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Shows the current status ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is offline.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Shows the current status of the MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators, as well as the city tie module or dialer. Note: ID 1 is the MR-2200HS-3200 front display.
Displays the status of follow trouble, follow supervisory and aux power output types.
Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that are reset when System Reset is pressed.
Show the current on/off status of each switch and list the timer associated with each one.
Shows the status of the Daylight Savings Time option & clock calibration.
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. This screen is for factory use only.
58
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
52
61
69*
79
80*
Screen
51*
68*
81*
82
Name
FIFO
Description
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory
Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating.
Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in the system.
Displays the states of the optional LED zones on the front panel.
Memory
Local
Annunciator
Remote
Terminal
Network Verify
Addressable
Info
Totals
Displays the service terminal screens for another panel in the network. This allows for the trouble shooting of a system from a single location. This screen automatically disconnects the remote connection if memory gets low or if no communication is received for 15 seconds. The remote panel stops sending data after 15 minutes.
Commands
(id) N Display the service terminal for Panel id
<Esc> Disconnect remote connection
Displays the current status of the network verify feature.
System Settings regarding addressable settings.
Detail
Type On-Line
Displays totals for both SLCs, including items such as assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also lists current wiring supervision status for each loop.
For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands sent.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are actually on the circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
59
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
Screen Name
83 Type Assigned
84*
85
86
Errors
Alarms
Function
Description
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm,
Early Warning, Supervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and
Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
60
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
Screen Name Description
88
89
90
92
Control Modules For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the Control modules.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
Bypass & Test Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
Analog
Sensitivity
Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.
Commands
A Display next device
( address)A Display selected device at address
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
0 P
1 P
2 P
Energize both sets of terminals
Energize only B terminals
Energize only A terminals
Displays the Day/Night status, the default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots are shown for any value that is not used.
Commands
C Display next addressable circuit
93 Sensitivity List Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.
These keyboard commands are available on all screens.
Command
<Del>
<Tab>
<Backspace>
0<Tab>
Description
Clear and redisplay screen.
View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens.
61
MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual
Command
0-127<Tab>
0.0<Tab>
0.1<Tab>
A
D
(month).(date) D
(month).(date).(year) D
(hours).(minutes) T
(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T
<Ctrl-V>
(code)<Ctrl-V>
0 ?
90 ?
99 ?
<Esc>
<Enter>
Description
View Selected Screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.
TeleVideo cursor control mode.
VT100 cursor control mode.
Silence buzzer.
Print the date and time.
Enter the date.
Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to 99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a fourdigit format.
Set the time.
Set the time.
Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege.)
Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.
Print downloaded database.
Print archive.
Print configuration.
Stop Printout.
Advance printer (paper feed).
62
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
MR-2100/2200
Fire Alarm Control Unit
O
PERATOR’S
M
ANUAL
Revision C
Document #: LT-2002
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
The installer is to hand over this manual to the owner of the system upon completion of work.
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2004 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Unit Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Power Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Types of Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Status Display ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 Zone LEDs ...................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................. 2
1.7 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.8 LCD and Keypad............................................................................................................................. 6
2.0 Supplementary Information ...................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.............................................................................................. 9
2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles .................................................................................................................. 10 i
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual ii
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
1.0 Unit Operation
1.1 Power Up Sequence
The power up sequence of the MR 2100/2200 (hereafter referred to as the MR 2200) panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the main board is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.
The LCD will first display configuration information, then "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE
WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.
When the initialization is complete, the Main Menu will be displayed on the LCD. At this time the panel is fully operational.
1.2 Types of Inputs
There are a number of types of inputs that can be used in the system. Each has different uses and limitations. They are:
• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. It displays
**ALARM** in the Alarm List.
• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the
Alarm List.
• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel. This type displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List.
Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be non-silenceable.
• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED. They cannot operate bells/ strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules on a network panel.
• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output. An LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.
• Abort: This type of input can only delay the operation of a releaser type output. The Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. If there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system, an LED is required for annunciation of the abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.
• Monitor: This type of input is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.
• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The LEDs, relays and control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by Fire, Supervisory or
Abort type inputs.
1
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
1.3 Status Display
The status display is located in the middle of the main display. It consists of 8 LEDs. The alarm
(red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow), ground fault (yellow), and NAC trouble (yellow) LEDs will flash for any new condition and will be latched by the Acknowledge key. The AC LED (green) will be on while the panel has AC power applied to it. The monitor LED (green) will turn on if any monitor type input is active. The bypass LED (yellow) will turn on if any addressable device has been bypassed.
1.4 Zone LEDs
The optional zone LEDs are across the bottom of the main display. They are visible through the front door. Each zone has an alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), and trouble (yellow) LED. The alarm and supervisory LEDs will turn on as required by the inputs. The trouble LED will light for either an input trouble condition, a ground fault or if there is a bypass present. Use the LCD and keypad (see Section 1.8 below) to determine the exact condition. A new condition is shown by a flashing LED. After the Acknowledge button (see Section 1.6 below) has been pressed, the LED will be lit steadily. Note: If the buzzer is sounding on the panel, Acknowledge will silence the buzzer, but not latch the LEDs. Press Acknowledge again to latch the LEDs.
Each set of zone LEDs is programmed via the database to represent whatever logical zoning is required.
1.5 Buzzer
The buzzer gives audible indication of any conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)
The four buzzer modes are:
• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions.
• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern is 50ms on/off.
• Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.
• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern is 500ms on/off.
2
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
1.6 Operator Keys
There are 8 operator keys. In the figure below, the keys are located on the lower left and are labelled “System Controls” The LEDs associated with these keys are used to display function status. The top three keys (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and System Reset) are not userassignable. The bottom 5 keys are user-assignable for the functions listed in the following table.
The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid
(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.
INSTRUCTIONS:
SYSTEM CONTROLS
Acknowledge
Signal Silence
System Reset
User Assigned
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
TROUBLE
AC
MONITOR
BYPASS
GROUND FAULT
NAC TROUBLE
SYSTEM DISPLAY AND PROGRAMMING
ALARM SUPERV TROUBLE MONITOR
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
ENTER
CLEAR
HOME
LAMP
TEST
The keys and their functions are as follows:
Key
Action
Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The yellow LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.
Signal
Silence
Silences the bells. The yellow LED to the right will flash when Signal Silence
The bells will reactivate if the panel receives a subsequent alarm.
is available. The yellow LED to the left flashes when the bells have been silenced.
3
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
Key
System
Reset
Relay
Disconnect
Test Mode
Signal
Disconnect
Action
System Reset resets part or all of the system.
• The rightmost green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.
• The leftmost green LED flashes if the ground fault relay is activated.
Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be reactivated after 5 to 30 seconds.
Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is
0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.
Notes:
1.
The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.
2.
If both LEDs are flashing, the rightmost LED function has precedence.
3.
The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.
Causes the local function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms.
Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active.
If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Places the panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege
Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the panel annunciator becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test.
The common indicators, bells, relays are not activated, and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.
Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item.
Then select ADDRESSABLE. Then select TEST. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu.
When test mode is ended, all devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.
Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.
Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege
Level 0 or 1.
4
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
Key
Action
Common
Disconnect
General
Alarm
Switch n On
This function is configurable. It can be programmed to disable the relays or to disable a City Tie module (MRCTYB). When an MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes while the relays are disabled. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. Common disconnect also disconnects the city module MRCTY-B if present and generates a system trouble to indicate that the module is disconnected.
Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and the common alarm relay is activated. The yellow LED will flash when activated. Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow
LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
Switch n Off Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow
LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
Manual
Restart
This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.
Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Test Mode and Common
Disconnect all use the same privilege level.
1.7 Alarm List
The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. Each panel can be configured for one of three modes of operation: In Local mode, each panel only logs events generated from devices that are directly connected to it. For example, a trouble generated on
Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each archive only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains an alarm list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.
In all modes, the first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the Main Menu, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the
2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority. The LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one to three screens. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event. Also, device and panel message screens as required.
For more control in viewing the Alarm List, when the summary screen is showing press <Enter> .
Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble entries are provided. Display can begin with
5
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right
Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.
The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms:
1) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 3: description of event
Line 4: circuit/device type
The device and panel message screens, if any, show:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
See Section 2.1 for a description of Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.
The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm
List (shown).
1.8 LCD and Keypad
The LCD is located in the top centre of the front panel. The keypad is to the right of the LCD. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on when any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Pressing the Lamp Test button causes all panel LEDs to flash. Pressing Lamp Test again will stop the flashing. Timeout for this option is 30 seconds. The LCD will show Lamp Test active.
Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The Main
Menu is displayed under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered into the panel, it will be displayed on the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press
<Enter> to select. <Clear> returns to the previous menu without changing any information and
<Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.
The second line of the display is a clock which shows the current time in 24 hour format. If a privilege level other than zero has been entered, that privilege level will be shown instead of the time. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. All the digits of the clock flash if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs (Program Checksum Error,
Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.
6
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
The Main Menu has the following selections:
Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:
More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.
Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.
Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.
Addressable: This menu has the following options:
Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status
Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.
The display shows the device address in the top left corner and the current condition codes in the top right corner (see section 2.0 for a description of the condition codes).
The second line shows the headings for the third line, which contains the analog values sent from the device. Press <Enter> to view the next device or <Clear> to get the address input screen.
Print Sensors: Prints the analog value for every addressable smoke and thermal detector. This is the value of the detector at the time the command is issued.
Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.
Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration
(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to screen
14 of the service terminal.
Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are: All,
Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.
Each entry consists of one or two lines. The information provided on the first line, from the left, is:
1. Event Number
2. Time (24 Hour Clock)
3. Date (MM/DD/YY Format)
4. Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
5. Description
A second line will be printed for addressable devices if a message exists in the database.
This history is sent to the service terminal port if Screen 14 is active. Screen 14 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.
Archive: The archive is a list of the last 1000 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both
AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time
7
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as the last Left or Right arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.
The screen of a single screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
The first screen of a two screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
Line 3: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
Line 4: device type
The second screen shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:
Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu.
The date change is recorded in the history.
Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed,
<Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time entered will be sent to all units on the network, if any. A time change of greater than 5 minutes will be recorded in the archive.
8
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
2.0 Supplementary Information
53
54
60
61
64
1
65
1
66
67
69
1
80
2
Panel
Zone
0
1
2
50
51
52
2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.
Condition Code
T
U
W
P
Q
R
S
I
J
M
N
D
E
G
H
Archive Alarm List
A ALARM
B
C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort halt spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Hot Key Pressed
Illegal Addressable Device
Switch
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Releaser Halt
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Network Verify
Comlink 1
Comlink 2
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Output (bell/releaser) Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
Program Checksum
Database Checksum
AC Power
Low Battery
Program Restart
Privilege Level
Panel
Zone
86
3
87
88
1
89
1
90
1
91
1
81
82
83
84
85
1
92
1
93
1
94
1
95
1
Description
1st Stage Alarm
2nd Stage Alarm
Switch
Test Mode
Erase Configuration
Change Configuration
Passcode Tamper
Database Loaded
Time/Date Change
Hot Key Activation
Memory Overflow
Network Reboot
New Program
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required why
9
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
Notes:
1.
These zones do not restore.
2.
Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.
3.
This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit: Device Number
Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Netowork ID number
Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number
Note: Only MR-2614 Annunciators use IDs other than 000.
Comlink 6 (Zone 54): 000 to 008 - MR-2614
009 to 016 - MR-2644
239 - MR-2801
240 - MRDL
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot
001 - Watchdog
002 - Clock Monitor
003 - Illegal Instruction
004 - Unused Interrupt
005 - Orphan Interrupt
Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set
Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number
Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed
Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command
Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot
Required trouble
Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the Network
Reboot Required
001 -- network
002 -- network
003 -- port 3
006 -- negative counter
008 -- memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
10
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles
This is a list of all possible messages that can be displayed by Miscellaneous Trouble on the LCD.
Only those conditions that are in trouble will be shown. Some of the messages are always displayed if the panel is in Test Mode.
Message Description
PROGRAM checksum
EEPROM checksum
DATABASE checksum
EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings
The memory chip containing the operating program has an error in it.
Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.
The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it. Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.
The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it. Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.
The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. This requires a Level 9 passcode.
Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the
EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.
The panel has a 64k EEPROM. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.
program mismatch hardware mismatch no database loaded
The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the
EEPROM. Erasing the EEPROM requires Privilege Level 9. Erasing the
EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.
The hardware listed in the database does not match the hardware listed in the panel. Correct the database and reload.
The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.
wrong database version or database mismatch no database for this panel low battery
The database is the incorrect version for the operating program running.
Download a database with the same version number as the operating program.
The panel contains a valid database, but the database does not contain the information for this panel. Either change the panel ID to the correct value, or load a database that includes the panel's ID.
The battery needs recharging or replacement.
11
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual
Message Description
BBBBBBAA
1234567812
Network module not installed
List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits.
Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note: This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode. Bells 3-8 indicates status on the optional NAC expansion modules.
The MR22NTWR Network Board has not been installed. The network cannot be used unless this board is installed.
This Control or Annunciator Unit is not reporting in over network port 1.
This message will be repeated for each panel that is off line.
port 1 panel ?
off line port 2 off line The network communications on port 2 have stopped.
The communications on port 3 have stopped.
port 3 off line wrong port 3 program The port 3 selections in the MHI database do not match the firmware option. Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.
BBBBBBBBFFFF
123456781234ASTWGL
The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on.
Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.
B Bell Circuit 1 to 8 T Trouble Relay
F Function Relay 1 to 4 W Walk Test Relay
A Alarm Relay
S Supervisory Relay
G
L
Ground Fault Relay
LCD Back Light Relay passcode tamper watchdog disabled
There have been 3 consecutive attempts to enter an invalid passcode.
The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly.
If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not automatically reboot if it fails to operate correctly.
NETWORK REBOOT required time not set illegal addressable devices network verify ? missing
There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem.
This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network. Select PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the
LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.
The time has not been set since the panel has been Rebooted. The time displayed on the clock may be wrong. Enter the correct time.
There are addressable devices connected to the panel that are not included in the downloaded database.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not reporting in. This is indicative of a communications error.
12
MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual network verify ? illegal
Message network verify ? version addressable devices bypassed manual control modules manual function relays manual switches
MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout not enough ram
Description
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of operating program and database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.
One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
BYPASS/OFF from the LCD menu.
One or more control modules have been forced either on or off. To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.
One or more general function relays have been forced either on or off.
To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/
INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
One or more switches with timers have been forced either on or off. This is not shown for switches that do not have timers. To view which switches are forced, select PROGRAM/SWITCHES/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that an event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will have to have a Hard reboot done.
The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a
Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
The operating program requires more extend RAM then the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.
13
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECUTRON MODUL-R
™
MR-2100/2200 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
THIS SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED REGULARLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE FIRE CODES. CONSULT
THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL IF UNCERTAIN OF REQUIREMENTS.
•
•
•
•
•
•
GENERAL
A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.
A steady alarm, supervisory, or trouble light indicates an acknowledged condition.
A flashing light to the immediate left of a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.
A flashing light to the far left of a pushbutton (except SYSTEM RESET) indicates that function has been activated.
One beep when a pushbutton is pressed indicates that pushbutton is valid.
Three beeps when a pushbutton is pressed indicates the pushbutton is unavailable.
•
•
•
•
TROUBLE CONDITION
The yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE light is flashing and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY. IF
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY, IT
MAY BE UNABLE TO PERFORM ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. DO
NOT LEAVE THE PANEL IN A TROUBLE CONDITION, SINCE IT
MAY NOT WORK PROPERLY AND LIVES MAY BE LOST IN THE
EVENT OF A FIRE.
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the trouble condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the trouble condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
NORMAL CONDITION
Green AC POWER light is on. All other lights and sounding devices are off.
•
•
•
•
•
ALARM CONDITION
The red ALARM light is flashing, one or more red zone alarm lights are flashing, and alarm signals are sounding.
FOLLOW ESTABLISHED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR
NOTIFYING THE FIRE DEPARTMENT, EVACUATING THE
BUILDING, ETC.
To acknowledge the alarm and latch the flashing lights, press
ACKNOWLEDGE.
To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE.
To reset the system once the cause of the alarm has been determined and corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
AFTER THE ALARM CONDITION, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
•
•
SYSTEM RESET
The green SYSTEM RESET light will flash to indicate that the system
(or some portion of the system) can be reset.
To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals which have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.
Any alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions that still exist will not be reset, and will require separate attention.
BYPASS
Bypass allows a specific device to be ignored during service. For example, if work was being done in an area of a building and a smoke detector has been disabled, the bypass feature allows service to configure the panel to ignore troubles, alarms or supervisory indications sent from the disabled device.
NOTE: Bypass must not be used to perform the alarm silence function.
LAMP TEST
To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST. To return the system to normal, press Lamp Test again.
•
•
•
•
SUPERVISORY CONDITION
The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, one or more yellow zone supervisory lights are flashing, and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the supervisory condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
Note: Only authorized service personnel must service this equipment. For service contact:
Service Company Name: _______________________________________
Address ____________________________________________________
Phone # ____________________________________________________
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER PRIOR TO
SERVICING OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.
The AC disconnect is located at:
____________________________________________
FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL
©
2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2003 Rev. A
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECUTRON MODUL-R
™
MR-2900/2920 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
THIS SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED REGULARLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE FIRE CODES. CONSULT
THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL IF UNCERTAIN OF REQUIREMENTS.
•
•
•
•
•
•
GENERAL
A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (amber), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.
A steady alarm, supervisory, or trouble light indicates an acknowledged condition.
A flashing green light adjacent to a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.
A flashing red light adjacent to a pushbutton (except SYSTEM
RESET) indicates that function has been activated.
One beep when a pushbutton is pressed indicates that pushbutton is valid.
Three beeps when a pushbutton is pressed indicates the pushbutton is unavailable.
•
•
•
•
TROUBLE CONDITION
The yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE light is flashing and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY. IF
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY, IT
MAY BE UNABLE TO PERFORM ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. DO
NOT LEAVE THE PANEL IN A TROUBLE CONDITION, SINCE IT
MAY NOT WORK PROPERLY AND LIVES MAY BE LOST IN THE
EVENT OF A FIRE.
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the trouble condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the trouble condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
NORMAL CONDITION
Green AC POWER light is on and clock colon is flashing. All other lights and sounding devices are off.
•
•
•
SYSTEM RESET
The green SYSTEM RESET light will flash to indicate that the system
(or some portion of the system) can be reset.
To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals that have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.
Any alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions that still exist will not be reset, and will require separate attention.
•
•
•
•
•
ALARM CONDITION
The red ALARM light is flashing, one or more red zone alarm lights are flashing, and alarm signals are sounding.
FOLLOW ESTABLISHED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR
NOTIFYING THE FIRE DEPARTMENT, EVACUATING THE
BUILDING, ETC.
To acknowledge the alarm and latch the flashing lights, press
ACKNOWLEDGE.
To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE. The red
SIGNAL SILENCED light will illuminate.
To reset the system once the cause of the alarm has been determined and corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
AFTER THE ALARM CONDITION, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
LAMP TEST
To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST repeatedly to cycle through all zone alarm lamps, zone supervisory lamps, zone trouble lamps, status lamps, pushbutton lamps, and return to normal. To return the system to normal, press Lamp Test again.
Note: Only authorized service personnel must service this equipment. For service contact:
Service Company Name: _______________________________________
Address ____________________________________________________
•
•
•
•
SUPERVISORY CONDITION
The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, one or more yellow zone supervisory lights are flashing, and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY.
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the supervisory condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
Phone # ____________________________________________________
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER PRIOR TO
SERVICING OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.
The AC disconnect is located at:
____________________________________________
FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL
©
2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2004 Rev. A
M R - 2 4 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision E
Document #: LT-2005
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
HS-3400 Installation Manual
Contents
1.0 Technical Information............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Main Circuit Board ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Input Circuits...................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Output Circuits................................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 Power Supply .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.7 Enclosure........................................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit.......................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.0 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 12
4.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 14
5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 15
5.1 Battery Calculations........................................................................................................................... 16
6.0 Appendix B: UL Listed Compatible Devices ........................................................................................... 17
6.1 Notification Appliances ...................................................................................................................... 17
6.2 Auxiliary Power Devices .................................................................................................................... 29
6.3 Analog Addressable Devices............................................................................................................. 30
6.4 Releasing Devices............................................................................................................................. 31
7.0 Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment .................................................................................. 32
7.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC .......................................................................................................... 32
7.2 Silent Knight 5104 ............................................................................................................................. 33
7.3 CTM City Tie Module......................................................................................................................... 34
7.4 Keltron 3158 TTM.............................................................................................................................. 35 i
HS-3400 Installation Manual ii
HS-3400 Installation Manual
List Of Figures And Tables
Figures
Figure 1: Exploded View ................................................................................................................................ 4
Figure 2: Knockouts ....................................................................................................................................... 5
Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A) ............................................................................................................................. 5
Figure 4: Style 4 (Class B) Wiring .................................................................................................................. 6
Figure 5: M500M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7
Figure 6: M501M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7
Figure 7: M502M Wiring................................................................................................................................. 7
Figure 8: M500S Wiring For Signalling Circuits ............................................................................................. 7
Figure 9: M500R Wiring Form C Relay Use................................................................................................... 8
Figure 10: M500X Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 8
Figure 11: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit Wiring.............................................................................................. 8
Figure 12: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................. 9
Figure 13: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 9
Figure 14: Class B Releasing Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 9
Figure 15: AC Power Connection .................................................................................................................. 10
Figure 16: Relay Connections........................................................................................................................ 10
Figure 17: Auxiliary Power Connections ........................................................................................................ 10
Figure 18: HS-3434 Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 11
Figure 19: HS-2802 and HS-3644 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 11
Tables
Table 1: Maximum Wire Lengths for Addressable Circuits ............................................................................ 6
Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits .......................................................................................... 9 iii
HS-3400 Installation Manual iv
MR-2400 Installation Manual
1.0 Technical Information
1.1 General
The MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 4 Input Circuits, 6 Polarity
Reversing Bell Circuits, 2 General Purpose Form "C" Relays and 2 auxiliary power outputs as well as system operated relays for alarm and trouble indication.
The basic MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit consists of Main Circuit Board (MR-2401), Power
Supply (MR-2905), Enclosure (MR-2470).
1.2 Main Circuit Board
The Main Circuit Board (MR-2401) provides system controls and visual indications. It contains the system processor, programming port, printer port and non-volatile memory for system firmware.
Software is installed on the main board for critical functions such as programmable logic and timing functions and non-critical functions, such as custom zone and devices messages. All jumpers on the board are for diagnostic and test purposes.
The visual display consists of a series of LEDs for common system indication of alarm, supervisory, trouble and power.
The Circuit Board has an 80 character backlit alpha-numeric LCD. The display provides descriptions of inputs, display of history files, first/last device in alarm, custom messages, display of detector sensitivity, etc. The keypad is used to scroll through the display.
There is a terminal strip on the bottom of the circuit board for the termination of field wiring. Behind the terminal strip there are three connectors: an audio output jack, a 9-pin service terminal port and a 25-pin printer port. The ports are discussed below. The audio jack produces various tones in accordance with a system walk test.
Communication Ports
The Control Unit has a number communication ports available:
• The annunciator port is for connection to the MR-2614 LED Annunciator and MR-2644
Annunciator.
• The general communications port is available for a variety of purposes. Each different purpose will require a different operating program. This port requires the use of an
MR-2109-x communications board. It uses the terminal strip on the bottom of the main circuit board. Typical uses are for connection to a central station, or for connection to an
MR-2944 LCD annunciator. There are a number of versions available:
MR-2109-2 Driver for communications to MR-2944
MR-2109-4 RS-232 driver
• The service terminal port will permit the programming of custom software, such as device messages and I/O functions.
• The printer port connects to any standard parallel printer. The system will print every occurrence as it happens. It can be used for system commissioning and testing by producing a printed log of received events. This can then be checked against a log of tests performed to confirm correct operation.
1
MR-2400 Installation Manual
1.3 Front Panel
The system controls consist of 10 system switches, a 15 position alpha-numeric keypad, and a Scroll Button. The 10 system switches are factory defined for operations such as general evacuation, alarm acknowledge, signal silence and system reset. The 15 position keypad is used for technical functions, system/detector maintenance, history recall, device/circuit disarming and manual operation of addressable output modules, relay modules, releasing circuits and bell circuits. The Scroll
Button is used to view the Alarm List.
Front Panel
1.4 Input Circuits
There are two classes of input circuits supported by the Control Unit:
SCROLL
Style 6 (Class A) This is a 4 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. It requires two input circuits, one (1 or 3) for signal out and following one (2 or 4) for signal return. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.
Style 4 (Class B) This is a 2 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.
Notes:
1.
Applicable codes and standards as well as good engineering practices must be considered with regards to the number of addressable devices connected to one addressable circuit. Isolation modules (MRI-500X) should be used whenever more than one fire zone is protected by one addressable circuit.
2.
Current MR-2400 panels will change style to match the database. Older MR-2400 panels were fixed as either Style 4 or Style 6.
1.5 Output Circuits
The bell circuits are rated at 1.0A @ 24VDC. They are protected with solid state fuses. (Note:
Maximum system loading and stand-by battery power must be considered when determining actual bell loading.) A 10 k
Ω
end-of-line resistor is required for supervision of Class B wiring. Class
A bell circuits do not require any end-of-line device. The bell circuits are supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The panel will activate bell circuits in three modes: Evacuation, which activates the bells continuously or with the temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO
8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal; Alert, which activates the bells in a repeated 1½ s on and 3 s off pattern; and Coded, which sounds short "bings" to represent numbers. Through programming, bell circuits can be used for releaser and releasing type functions.
The general purpose Form "C" relay operation is program defined. The relays are rated at 0.6A @
120VAC / 2.0A @ 30VDC. The system defined Form "C" relays are for Alarm and Trouble indication. These relays are rated at 1.0A @ 24VDC / 0.5A @ 120VAC. The Trouble relay is normally energized so that loss of both AC power and battery power is indicated. The N.O. and
N.C. markings on the Trouble relay refer to this energized state.
The operation of the general purpose relays, releasing circuits and the bell circuits is totally program defined. It is possible to program the activation of circuits to any zone, group of zones, device, group of devices and to further inhibit the operation for a specifiable period of time. Any relays not programmed for use in the database are available for auxiliary power reset, ie the relay
2
MR-2400 Installation Manual will toggle for duration time when the Reset key is pressed. A duration time of zero will disable this feature.
The auxiliary power circuits are rated for 24 VDC @ 150 mA. They are supervised for shorts. Any load placed on the auxiliary power circuits must be included when calculating stand-by battery requirements.
1.6 Power Supply
The Power Supply (MR-2905) is rated at 8A unregulated, providing the system with primary DC power. It is complete with a battery charger rated at 2A and battery supervision circuitry. The power supply and battery are located in separate compartments within the control unit back box.
Battery supervision uses true dynamic supervision circuitry to simulate a load condition approximately every 90 seconds to ensure that the battery is capable of handling the system load requirements on loss of primary power.
If the battery voltage drops too low it is disconnected to protect against damage from a deep discharge.
The battery charger is temperature compensating. The constant used is -0.044V/ C.
Note: Never disconnect or reconnect the batteries while AC power is off.
1.7 Enclosure
The enclosure for MR-2400 Control Unit consists of a back box complete with door, power supply, and Main Board Assembly. The back box is fabricated from 1/16" steel. The back box provides necessary "knock out" type openings for conduit entry. The back box dimensions are 14 ½" Wide x
20 ½" High x 4 ½" Deep. A trim is available for flush mounting the enclosure.
3
MR-2400 Installation Manual
2.0 Installation
2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit
The Control Unit is shipped in two sections: the
Cabinet complete with Door, Main Board
Assembly, Power Supply and Toroidal
Transformer; and the Battery Pack. The Main
Board Assembly needs no field assembly work.
Figure 1 shows an exploded view of the unit
(door not shown).
Note:
All applicable codes and standards should be considered. Specific reference should be made to NFPA 72 (Local
Systems; formerly NFPA 72A), or CAN/
ULC-S524 and CEC Part 2 Section 32.
Figure 1: Exploded View
Preparing Mounting Surface:
1.
Choose a suitable place for mounting.
2.
Mark placement of mounting screws. Use #10 screws. Drill holes and install plugs (if necessary).
For Surface Mounting:
3.
Support back box in place while inserting screws. Ensure that the cabinet is level before tightening screws.
For Flush Mounting:
4.
The Flush Mount Trim is placed on the back box from the rear of the box. It is attached by four screws. There are slots in the sides of the back box for the trim. Do not tighten the screws all the way so that the trim's position can be changed after the enclosure is mounted.
5.
Support back box in place while inserting screws. Ensure that the cabinet is level before tightening screws. Position the Flush Mount Trim and tighten the four screws holding it in place.
Assembly of Unit:
6.
Attach AC wiring to the transformer wires. The conduit/BX must attach to the back box at one of the three knock-outs inside the AC power compartment (see AC Power
Connections and Figure 15 ). DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE UNIT UNTIL ALL
DOORS, CABLES AND WIRING ARE INSTALLED AND INSPECTED.
Note: This AC circuit must be a separately fused 15A dedicated circuit. It is recommended that the breaker be locked in the OFF position during installation.
7.
Place the batteries in the bottom of the back box. DO NOT ATTACH BATTERIES UNTIL
AFTER THE AC POWER HAS BEEN TURNED ON.
8.
Mount the Main Board Assembly on the studs. This will cover the 120 VAC compartment and the Power Supply Board.
4
MR-2400 Installation Manual
9.
Attach field wiring to the terminal strip on the bottom of the Main Board Assembly. Section
2.2 below describes how each type of circuit is to be wired. Attach conduit to the back box as required using knock-outs (see Figure 2 ) provided. It is recommended that input circuit wiring be physically separated from output circuit wiring.
10. Have the Unit inspected before applying power. The Main Board Assembly will need to be removed to allow for inspection of the
AC power connection. Replace the
Assembly after inspection. Correct and reinspect any problems found.
11. Turn on the AC power to Unit. If no problems occur other than Low Battery, attach the batteries to the wires provided, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the
Figure 2: Knockouts red wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition will remain until they are charged.
2.2 Wiring
Style 6 (Class A) Addressable Circuit
This is a 4 wire supervised Style 6 (Class A) communications circuit using addressable devices.
Maximum wire loop lengths are shown in Table 1 .
The recommended wiring is unshielded twisted pair. Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. Consult Secutron's
Applications Department for specific requirements.
Devices will be connected as in Figure 3 . Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A)
5
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Style 4 (Class B) Addressable Circuit
This is a 2 wire supervised Style 4 (Class B) communications circuit using addressable devices. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 1 . Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. The recommended wiring is unshielded twisted pair. Consult Secutron's Applications
Department for specific requirements. Devices will be connected as in Figure 4 . Use only approved devices.
Note: T-taps may NOT be allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC-S524.
Figure 4: Style 4 (Class B)
Wiring
Table 1: Maximum Wire Lengths for Addressable Circuits
Gauge
18
16
14
12
Belden No.
9571
9572
9580
9582
Distance
975m (3 200 ft)
1 400m (4 600 ft)
2 435m (8 000 ft)
3 045m (10 000 ft)
Note: All distances refer to total wire length.
6
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Addressable Modules
The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown in the following Figures.
Figure 5: MRI-M500M Wiring Figure 6: MRI-M501M Wiring
Figure 7: MRI-M502M Wiring Figure 8: MRI-M500S Wiring For Signalling
Circuits
7
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Figure 9: MRI-M500R Wiring Form C Relay Use
Figure 10: MRI-M500X Wiring
Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit
This is a 4 wire Style Z (Class A) signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices will be connected as in Figure
11 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This is the total length of the wire, from the panel to the furthest device and back to the panel. Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in separate conduit. The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1A current limit momentarily.
Figure 11: Style Z (Class A) Bell
Circuit Wiring
8
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit
This is a 2 wire Style Y (Class B) signalling
(notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 k
Ω
end-of-line resister will be connected as in Figure 12 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . Use only approved devices. The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the
1A current limit momentarily.
Figure 12: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit
Wiring
Class A Releasing Circuit
This is a 4 wire Class A releasing circuit. Devices will be connected as in Figure 13 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This is the total length of the wire, from the panel to the furthest device and back to the panel. This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A.
Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
Ω
Class B Releasing Circuit
This is a 2 wire Class B releasing circuit. Devices and the 10 k
Ω
end-of-line resister will be connected as in Figure 14 . Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2 . This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A. Use only approved devices.
Figure 13: Class A Releasing
Circuit Wiring
Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits
12 AWG
14 AWG
16 AWG
250 mA
1219m (4000 ft)
731m (2400 ft)
457m (1500 ft)
500 mA
609m (2000 ft)
365m (1200 ft)
228m (750 ft)
Figure 14: Class B Releasing Circuit
Wiring
750 mA
396m (1300 ft)
243m (800 ft)
152m (500 ft)
1.0 A
304m (1000 ft)
182m (600 ft)
114m (375 ft)
Note: All distances refer to total wire length.
Ω
9
MR-2400 Installation Manual
AC Power Connections
The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 15 .
The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series. The
Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power
Supply Board, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal.
Warning:
Never connect or disconnect the batteries while the AC power is off.
Figure 15: AC Power
Connection
Relay Connections
Unused relays are left unconnected. General Purpose Relays and System
Relays operate identically and are wired the same (see Figure 16 ).
Auxiliary Power Circuits
The auxiliary power circuits provide 24 VDC for external devices. The polarity of the circuits is shown in Figure 17 . The Control Unit does not interrupt this circuit.
Figure 16:
Relay
Connections
Figure 17:
Auxiliary
Power
Connections
10
MR-2400 Installation Manual
MR-2944 Annunciator
The MR-2944 Annunciator is connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is done as shown in Figure 18 .
More than one MR-2944 annunciator can be connected to the panel.
Figure 18: MR-2944 Wiring
MR-2614HS-2802 and MR-2644 Wiring
The MR-2614HS-2802 and MR-2644 are connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. An example of the wiring is shown in Figure
19 . Up to eight of each type of annunciator and either one dialer or one reverse polarity module can be connected to the panel. If more than one MR-2614HS-
2802 is used, the 3.9k resistor across the MR-
2614HS-2802 terminals should be removed from all but the last MR-2614HS-2802. The maximum length of communications wiring is 900m (3000 ft) using 22
AWG. The maximum length of power wiring is 300m
(1000 ft) using 18 AWG.
MR-2400
AUX
POWER
ANN
+
+
RX
TX
MR-2614
RED
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN
Figure 19: MR-2614 and MR-2644
Wiring
11
MR-2400 Installation Manual
3.0 Technical Specifications
Power
Line
Standby
Alarm
Brown Out Voltage
Battery Charger
Battery Type
120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal)
24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) plus Bell/Releasing Circuits
93 VAC (typical) normal standby
95 VAC (typical) alarm
2.3 A maximum charging current
Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah)
Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (4)
Voltage
Max. No. of Devices
Compatible Devices
20-28 VDC
99 Detectors / 99 Modules
MR Series
Note:
Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices
Total Line Capacitance 0.5
µ
F
Total Line Resistance 40
Ω
Bell (Notification Appliance) / Releasing Circuits (6)
Supervisory Current 1.0 mA, power limited
Alarm Current 1.0 A, power limited
Voltage 24 VDC, nominal, full wave rectified, unfiltered
End of Line Device 10 k
Ω
Resistor; Class B (Style Y) Only
Note:
Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices
System Relays (2)
Type
Rating
Form C, one each for Alarm and Trouble
0.5 A @ 120 VAC (resistive) / 1.0A @ 24VDC
General Purpose Relays (2)
Type
Rating
Form C
0.6A @ 120 VAC (resistive) / 2.0A @ 30VDC
Auxiliary Power Outputs (2)
Voltage
Ripple Voltage
Current
24 VDC @ 150 mA
2 Vrms, maximum
135 mA per circuit, power limited
Note: Consult Appendix B UL Listed Compatible Devices
12
MR-2400 Installation Manual
MR-2109-X Communication Boards
Transmission Type
Wire Type
Wire Gauge
Distance
Application
MR-2109-2
Opto-coupled
Twisted Pair
18-22 AWG
10 km (approximately)
Circuit
Description
Addressable
Input Circuit
Signalling
Output Circuit
Class
A
B
A
B
Style (NFPA-72A)
Z
Y
6
4
MR-2109-4
RS-232
Twisted Pair
18-22 AWG
10-20 m
No. of
Devices
99 Detectors
99 Modules
1.0 A Cct.
End of Line
No
No
Yes
13
MR-2400 Installation Manual
4.0 Parts List
Basic Control Unit
Packages
Optional Modules
Annunciators
Accessories
Replacement
Modules
Model Description
MR-2400
HS-3400B
MR-2109-2
Basic Control Unit, 2 Class A Circuits
Basic Control Unit, 2 Class B Circuits
Opto-Coupled Party Line Driver for connection to MR-2944 or SE
2000
MR-2109-4
MR-2944
RS-232 Line Driver for computer connection
Annunciator Driver
MR-2944LCD Annunciator Driver c/w 80 Character LCD
MR-2614HS-2802 LED Annunciator
MR-2614HS-
2802EH
Enhanced LED Annunciator
MR-2915
MR-2644
MR-2902
HS-2802X
LED Driver for Annunciators
LCD Annunciator
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 24 LEDs
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 8 LEDs
MHI Modul-R Human InterfaceNetwork Plus
MR-2976HS-3736 Flush Trim
End-of-Line Resistor for Class B bell circuits MRD-EOL-
10kT301-9008
MRD-
MP300T301-9091
Plate for end-of-line resistors
MR-2401 Motherboard Assembly
MR-2905HS-3035 Power Supply, included with Back Box for Basic System
14
MR-2400 Installation Manual
5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation
Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10
Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.
Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).
Note:
The MR-2400 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.
The standard battery options available for the MR-2400 Control Unit are:
• 4 Ah internal
• 7 Ah internal
• 10 Ah internal
• 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet
• 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet
• 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed)
The components of the MR-2400 Control Panel and other devices have the following typical current draws:
MR-2400
MR-2944LC
MR-2915
MR-2614HS-
2802
MR-2622HS-
2802X
MR-2644
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
MRI-2551
124 mA (includes MR-2905) MRI-3251
65 mA MRI-5551
1 mA
20 mA
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
5 mA
30 mA
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
MRI-M502M
MRI-M503ME
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500X
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
450
µ
A
The following page is a sheet suitable for battery calculations.
15
MR-2400 Installation Manual
5.1 Battery Calculations
Job: ___________________________________Date: _________
Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time
For Panels and Input Devices:
Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______
Panel/Device
MR-2400
MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors
MRI-500M/501M Monitor Modules
MRI-500R Relay Modules
MRI-500S Control Modules, supervised output
MRI-500X Isolator Modules
MRI-502M Monitor Modules
Draw (mA)
124
0.20
0.40
0.30
0.40
0.45
0.30
1
Quantity Total Power (Ah)
Total A:
Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time
For Signal Devices
Time = Alarm Time = ______
Signal Device Draw Quantity Total Power
Total Power Requirement = Total A + Total B = ____________________
Note:
5 min = 0.083 hour; 10 min = 0.167 hour; 30 min = 0.5 hour
Total B:
16
MR-2400 Installation Manual
6.0 Appendix B: UL Listed Compatible Devices
6.1 Notification Appliances
The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the
MR-2400 Control Units.
Wheelock
Model
MT-12/24-R
MT-24-WH-VN-W
MT-24-WM-VF-R
Type
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
Visual
-
78
96
-
-
EH-DL1-R
EH-EL1-R
EHS-DL1-W-VF-R
EHS-EL1-W-VF-R
EH-DL1-WS-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WS-24-VF-R
EH-DL1-WH-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WH-24-VF-R
EH-DL1-WM-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WM-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-R
AES-EL1-R
AES-DL1-WS-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WS-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-WH-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WH-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-WM-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WM-24-VF-R
Electronic Horn
Electronic Horn
Electronic Strobe Horn, Single
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Single
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual
Input
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
17
17
35 (combined)
35 (combined)
17
17
17
17
17
17
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
75
75
88
88
25
25
-
-
25
25
75
75
88
88
17
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Model
WST-24-FR
WS1T-24-FR
WS3T-24-FR
WHT-24-FR
WH1T-24-FR
WH3T-24-FR
WMT-24-FR
WM1T-24-FR
WM3T-24-FR
VLPM-24-W-VF-R
34T-24-R
7001T-24-W-FR
7002T-24-W-FR
V7001T-24-W-FR
MIZ-24-R
MIZ-24-W
MIZ-24-WS-VF-R
MIZ-24-WS-VF-W
MIZ-24-WH-VF-R
MIZ-24-WM-VF-W
CH-BF1-R
CH-BF1-WS-24-HF-R
CH-CF1-W
CH-CF1-WS-24-CF-W
CH-DF1-R
CH-DF1-WS-24-VF-R
CH-DF1-WM-24-VF-R
MB-G6-24-R
MB-G10-24-R
MBS-G6-24-W-HF-R
MBS-G10-24-W-HF-R
46T-G4-24-R
46T-G6-24-R
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Type
Mini-Horn
Mini-Horn
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Chime
Strobe Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Motorized Bell, 6 in.
Motorized Bell, 10 in.
Motorized Strobe Bell, 6 in.
Motorized Strobe Bell, 10 in.
Vibrating Bell, 4 in.
Vibrating Bell, 6 in.
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
30
30
55 (combined)
55 (combined)
63
63
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Visual
25
25
25
75
75
75
88
88
88
88
63
63 (combined)
63 (combined)
63 (combined)
15
15
40 (combined)
40 (combined)
90 (combined)
103 (combined)
-
-
-
25
88
-
25
-
25
-
-
-
-
18
Model
46T-G10-24-R
Type
Vibrating Bell, 10 in.
46T-G6-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.
46T-G10-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in.
46T-G6-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.
46T-G10-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in.
E-7025-WS-24-VF-R
E-7025-WS-24-VF-W
E-7070-WS-24-VF-R
E-7070-WS-24-VF-W
E-9025-WS-24-CF-W
E-9070-WS-24-CF-W
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
E-7025-WH-24-VF-R
E-7025-WH-24-VF-W
E-7070-WH-24-VF-R
E-7070-WH-24-VF-W
E-9025-WH-24-CF-W
E-9070-WH-24-CF-W
E-7025-WM-24-VF-R
E-7025-WM-24-VF-W
E-7070-WM-24-VF-R
E-7070-WM-24-VF-W
ET-1010-WS-24-HF-R
ET-1070-WS-24-VF-R
ET-1080-WS-24-VF-R
ET-1090-WS-24-CF-W
ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R
ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W
ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R
ET-1080-WM-24-VF-W
CSX10-24DC-R
CSXG10-24DC-R
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Explosion-Proof Bell, Indoor
Explosion-Proof Bell, Outdoor
MR-2400 Installation Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
500
500
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
63
Visual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
63
63
63
63
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
75
75
88
88
88
88
25
25
25
25
-
-
75
75
75
75
75
75
88
88
88
88
19
MR-2400 Installation Manual
AH-24
AH-24WP
Model
AS-2415W
AS-241575W
AS-2430W
AS-2475W
AS-24110W
AS-2415C
AS-2430C
AS-2475C
AS-24100C
NH-12/24
NS-2415W
NS-241575W
NS-2430W
NS-2475W
NS-24110W
NS4-2415W
NS4-241575W
NS4-2430W
NS4-2475W
NS4-24110W
MT-24-LS
MT-24-LSM
MT-24-MS
MT-24-IS
MT-24-SL
MT-24-SLM
MT4-24-LS
Type
Mini Horn, indoor
Mini Horn, indoor/outdoor
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non syne
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
76 (combined)
90 (combined)
102 (combined)
163 (combined)
195 (combined)
28
28
28
28
28
128 (combined)
163 (combined)
183 (combined)
273 (combined)
144 (combined)
186 (combined)
48
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
41
41
Visual
-
-
92 (combined)
107 (combined)
126 (combined)
186 (combined)
213 (combined)
98 (combined)
133 (combined)
252 (combined)
283 (combined)
28 -
57
72
85
140
169
80
20
Model
MT4-24-LSM
MT4 -24- MS
MT4-24-IS
MT4-24-SL
MT4-24-SLM
AMT-12/24
AMT4-l2/24
AMT-24-LS
AMT-24-LSM
AMT-24-MS
AMT-24-IS
AMT-24-SL
AMT-24-SLM
AMT4-24-LS
AMT4-24-LSM
AMT4-24-MS
AMT4-24-IS
AMT4-24-SL
AMT4-24-SLM
CH70-24
CH90-24
CH70-2415W
CH'70-243OW
CH70-2475W
Type
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Mini Horn
Mini Horn
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
MR-2400 Installation Manual
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
48
Visual
115
48
48
48
48
135
225
96
138
48
48
-
-
-
-
53
68
85
140
80
115
135
225
96
138
80
115
135
225
96
138
21
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Model
CH70-24110W
CH90-2415W
CH90-2430W
CH90-2475W
CH90-24110W
CH70-2415C
CH70-2430C
CH70-2475C
CH70-24100C
CH90-2415C
CH90-2430C
CH90-2475C
CH90-24100C
RSS-24l5W
RSS-241575W
RSS-243OW
RSS-2475W
RSS-24110W
RSSP-24110W
RSSP-241575W
RSSP-2475W
RSSP-24110W
RSS-2415C
RSS-243OC
RSS-2475C
RSS-24100C
RSSP-2415C
RSSP-2430C
RSSP-2475C
RSSP-24100C
ET70-2415W
ET70-241575W
ET70-2430W
22
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Type
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Current Draw @24 VDC
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
Audible
20
20
20
20
20
20
70
107
215
250
70
107
215
250
Visual
169
53
68
85
140
169
215
250
70
107
140
169
70
107
215
250
53
68
85
140
169
53
68RSSP-
2430W
Strobe, retrofit plate-85
53
68
85
Model
ET70 -2475W
ET70-24110W
ET90-2415W
ET90-24 30W
ET90-2475W
ET90-24110W
ET90-2415C
ET90-2430C
ET90-2475C
ET90-24100C
ET-1080- LS -24
ET-1080-LSM-24
ET-1080- MS -24
ET-1080-IS-24
ET-1080-SL-24
ET-1081- LS-24
ET-1081- LSM -24
ET-1081- MS -24
ET-1081- IS -24
ET-1081-SL-24
E70-2415W
E70-2430W
E70-2475W
E70-24110W
E70 -2415C
E70 -2430C
E70-2475C
E70 -24100C
E90 -2415W
E90 -241575W
E90 -2430W
Type
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, sync
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
Visual
140
169
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
169
70
107
215
53
68
85
140
250
53
68
85
96
138
80
115
80
115
135
225
135
225
96
138
169
70
107
215
250
53
68
85
140
23
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Model
E90 -2475W
E90-24110W
E90 -2415C
E90 -2430C
E90 -2475C
E90 -24100C
SM -12/24
DSM -12/24
Type
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe speaker
Strobe Speaker
Sync Module
Dual Sync Module
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
-
-
-
-
Visual
140
169
70
107
215
250
25 (combined)
38 (combined)
24
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Gentex
Model
GEH24
GES24-15
GES24-15/75
GES24-30
GES24-60
GES24-75
GES24-110
GEC24-15
GEC24-15/75
GEC24-30
GEC24-60
GEC24-75
GEC24-110
Type
Commander2 Horn
Commander2 Strobe 15 cd
Commander2 Strobe 15/75cd
Commander2 Strobe 30 cd
Commander2 Strobe 60 cd
Commander2 Strobe 75 cd
Commander2 Strobe 110 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 75 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 110 cd
GMH24
GMS24-15
GMS24-15/75W
GMS24-15/75C
GMS24-15/75Z
GMS24-30
GMS24-30/75
GMS24-60
GMS24-110
WGMS-4-75
Mechanical Horn
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 60 Cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 110 Cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 75cd
Weather
GX90-4
GX90S-4-15
Piezo Horn 24 Vdc
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15 cd
GX90S-4-15/75W Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Wall
GX90S-4-15/75C Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Ceiling
GX90S-4-15/75Z
GX90S-4-30
GX90S-4-30/75
GX90S-4-60
GX90S-4-110
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Sync
Piezo Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 110 cd
GXS-4-15 Strobe 15 Cd
Audible
21
-
-
-
-
-
-
Current Draw @24 VDC
Visual
-
46
57
57
82
89
102
67 (combined)
78 (combined)
78 (combined)
103 (combined)
110 (combined)
123 (combined)
38
116 (combined)
131 (combined)
153 (combined)
168 (combined)
131 (combined)
180 (combined)
153 (combined)
258 (combined)
143 (combined)
-
15
93 (combined)
108 (combined)
130 (combined)
145 (combined)
108 (combined)
157 (combined)
130 (combined)
235 (combined)
-
-
78
25
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Model
GXS-4-15/75-W
GXS-4-15/75-C
GXS-4-15/75-Z
GXS-4-30
GXS-4-30/75
GXS-4-60
GXS-4-110
Type
Strobe 15/75 Cd Wall
Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling
Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync
Strobe 30 Cd
Strobe 30/75 Cd
Strobe 60 Cd
Strobe 110 Cd
HG124
SHG24-15
SHG24-15/75-W
SHG24-15/75-C
SHG24-15/75-Z
SHG24-30
SHG24-30/75
SHG24-60
SHG24-110
Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 110 cd
SPKE4-15
SPKE8-15
SPKE4-15/75-W
SPKE8-15/75-W
SPKE4-15/75-C
SPKE8-15/75-C
SPKE4-15/75-Z
SPKE8-15/75-Z
SPKE4-30
SPKE8-30
SPKE4-30/75
SPKE8-30/75
SPKE4-60
SPKE8-60
SPKE4-110
SPKE8-110
Speaker/Strobe 4" 15 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8" 15 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Wall
Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Wall
Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Ceiling
Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Ceiling
Speaker/Strobe 4" 15/75 cd Sync
Speaker/Strobe 8" 15/75 cd Sync
Speaker/Strobe 4" 30 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8" 30 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4" 30/75 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8" 30/75 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4" 60 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8" 60 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4" 110 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8" 110 cd
ST24-15
ST24-15/75
ST24-30
Commander Strobe 15 cd
Commander Strobe 15/75 cd
Commander Strobe 30 cd
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Visual
93
115
130
93
142
115
220
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30
108 (combined)
123 (combined)
145 (combined)
160 (combined)
123 (combined)
172 (combined)
145 (combined)
250 (combined)
-
-
-
115
115
220
220
93
93
142
142
115
115
130
130
78
78
93
93
45
57
57
26
Model
ST24-60
ST24-75
ST24-110
HS24-15
HS24-15/75
HS24-30
HS24-60
HS24-75
HS24-110
Potter
Model
PBD-246
PBD-248
PBD-2410
Space Age
Model
SSU7620
SSU7625
SSU7630
SSU7521
SSU7522
SSU7526
SSU7527
SSU7531
SSU7532
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Type
Commander Strobe 60 cd
Commander Strobe 75 cd
Commander Strobe 110 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 75 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 110 cd
Vibrating Bell
Vibrating Bell
Vibrating Bell
Type
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
-
75 (combined)
87 (combined)
87 (combined)
114 (combined)
116 (combined)
140 (combined)
Visual
84
86
110
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
60
60
60
Visual
-
-
-
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Speaker/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Speaker/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Speaker/Strobe
Type
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
-
-
-
93 (combined)
-
143 (combined)
-
173 (combined)
-
Visual
80
130
160
80
130
160
27
MR-2400 Installation Manual
System Sensor
Model
P2415 (R) (W)
P241575 (R) (W)
P2475 (R) (W)
P24110 (R) (W)
P241575K
P2475K
P24110K
P241575F
S2415 (R) (W)
S241575 (R) (W)
S2475 (R) (W)
S24110 (R) (W)
S241575K
S2475K
S24110K
S241575F
H12/24
H12/24K (R) (W)
HC12/24
HC12/24K
MDL
SSM24-6
SSM24-8
SSM24-10
MA12/24D
SS24LO
SS24LOC
SS24M
SS24MC
SS24LOLA
MASS24LO
MASS24LOC
MASS24LOLA
MASS24M
Type
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn
Horn
Horn
Horn
Sync Module
Bell
Bell
Bell
Electronic Sounder
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
28
15 (combined)
30
30
30
59
59
-
-
-
-
59
-
59
59
Current Draw @24 VDC
-
-
-
-
-
-
39
-
Audible
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
-
39
39
39
39
191
64
159
191
64
60
64
159
-
-
64
-
-
Visual
60
64
159
191
64
159
191
125
80
45
45
-
45
45
125
80
125
-
-
-
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Model
MASS24MC
Type
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
PA400R (R) (W) (B) Sounder
PA400RF (R) (W) Sounder
PS24LO (R) (W) (B) add on Strobe
SS2415ADA (R) (B) Strobe
SS241575ADA (R)
(B)
Strobe
SS2475ADA (R) (B) Strobe
SS24110ADA (R) (B) Strobe
Horn/Strobe MASS2415ADA (R)
(B)
MASS241575ADA
(R) (B)
Horn/Strobe
MASS2475ADA (R)
(B)
MASS24110ADA (R)
(B)
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
SS2415ADAS
SS241575ADAS
Strobe
Strobe
MASS2415ADAS Horn/Strobe
MASS241575ADAS Horn/Strobe
59
59
59
-
-
59
-
-
Current Draw @24 VDC
Audible
59
Visual
125
12
12
-
-
-
25
120
200
245
90
120
200
245
90
59
59
-
-
125
180
125
180
RP2415ADA
RP241575ADA
RP2475ADA
RP24110ADA
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
-
-
-
-
90
120
200
245
6.2 Auxiliary Power Devices
The following Listed devices are compatible with the output of the 24 VDC auxiliary power circuits of the MR-2400. Each circuit may be loaded to a maximum of 150 mA in standby or alarm conditions.
Manufacturer
Air Products
Model
PAM-4
Type
Relay Module
Input Current at 24 VDC
29
MR-2400 Installation Manual
6.3 Analog Addressable Devices
The following Listed analog addressable smoke detectors, detector bases, monitor modules, control modules and fault isolator modules are compatible with the MR-2400 Control Panel. Up to
99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules may be connected to each addressable communications circuit. Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application.
Manufacturer
Secutron
System
Sensor
Model Type
MRI-1251
MRI-1251B
MRI-2251
MRI-2251B
MRI-2251T
Ionization type smoke detector
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
MRI-2251TB
Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element
Photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element
MRI-2251TMB Acclimate photoelectric type smoke detector w//thermal element
MRI-5251P Thermostat
MRI-5251B Thermostat
MRI-5251RP Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
MRI-5251RB
MRI-5251H
Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
High Temperature Thermostat
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
Intelligent Monitor Module
Mini Monitor Module
MRI-M502M Zone Interface Module
MRI-M500DM Dual Input Monitor Module
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500C
MRI-M500X
1251
Relay Module
Supervised Control Module
Control module
Isolator Module
Ionization type smoke detector
Installation
Instructions
D200-51-00
D200-28-00
D200-03-00
D200-29-00
D200-03-00
D200-29-00
D200-29-00
D200-88-00
D200-30-00
D200-89-00
D200-30-00
D200-30-00
M500-09-00
M500-10-00
M500-11-00
D500-42-00
M500-08-00
M500-07-00
D500-37-00
D200-51-00
1251B
1551
2251
2251B
2251T
2251TB
2251TMB
2551
Ionization type smoke detector
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element
Photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element
Acclimate photoelectric type smoke detector w/thermal element
Photoelectric type smoke detector
D200-28-00
D500-03-00
D200-03-00
D200-29-00
D200-03-00
D200-29-00
D200-29-00
D500-04-00
30
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
(cont’d)
Model
2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element
Type
Installation
Instructions
D500-04-00
3251 Combination smoke detector and thermostat
5251P Thermostat
5251B
5251RP
5251RB
5251H
Thermostat
Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
High Temperature Thermostat
5551 Thermostat
5551R Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
M500M
M501M
M502M
Monitor module, Classes A/B initiating
Mini Monitor module, Class B initiating
M500C
Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors
Classes A/B initiating
Control module
M500R
M500S
Relay module
Supervised control module
D200-57-00
D200-88-00
D200-30-00
D200-89-00
D200-30-00
D200-30-00
D500-11-00
D500-11-00
M500-05-00
M500-02-00
D500-42-00
M500-0800
M500-07-00
M500X Fault isolator module 0500-37-00
6.4 Releasing Devices
The following Listed releasing devices are compatible with the MR-2400 Control Unit.
Manufacturer
ASCO
Skinner
Model
T8210A107
R8210A107
8210A107
73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Type
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
31
MR-2400 Installation Manual
7.0 Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment
7.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC
The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram:
An addressable module may be substituted as follows for the alarm contacts: to MR-2900
4
6
MRI-500R
7
8
2071C/AC
Trouble contacts must be connected to the panel.
Note:
The Radionics 2071C and 2071AC are separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
32
MR-2400 Installation Manual
7.2 Silent Knight 5104
The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Silent Knight 5104 dialer is as shown in the following diagram:
An addressable module may be substituted as follows for alarm contacts only: to FACP
4
6
MRI-500R
1
4
2
3
5104
Trouble contacts must be connected to the panel.
Note:
The Silent Knight 5104 is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
33
MR-2400 Installation Manual
7.3 CTM City Tie Module
The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.
Ratings:
City Tie Module
Operating Voltage 24 VDC
Standby Current 2 mA
Alarm Current
UL listed
1.5 A (less than 10 milliseconds) for Model DC-2A Master Box
File S3610
City Tie Box
Series type Coil Resistance 14.5 ohms
The CTM is wired as shown below.
34
Notes:
• The CTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
• When connecting the CTM module to any of the bell (NAC) circuits, that circuit(s) must be programmed as a strobe circuit.
MR-2400 Installation Manual
7.4 Keltron 3158 TTM
The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2400 are wired together as shown below:
Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM.
Note:
The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
35
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
36
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron
Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from
Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
37
MR-2400 Installation Manual
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which
Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
38
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 4 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
P
ROGRAMMING
M
ANUAL
Revision D
Document #: LT-2006
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Contents
1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ................................................................................................... 1
Warnings: Before programming............................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Addressable Devices......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Releasing Service............................................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors ............................................................................................................... 5
2.0 Editing MHI Databases ............................................................................................................................ 6
2.1 General Programming Notes............................................................................................................. 6
2.2 System Window................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Switches Window .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.4 Groups Window ................................................................................................................................. 11
2.5 Panel Window.................................................................................................................................... 12
2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows .......................................................................................................... 24
2.7 Internal Circuits Window.................................................................................................................... 28
2.8 Relate Window .................................................................................................................................. 29
3.0 LCD Programming ................................................................................................................................... 31
3.1 General Comments ........................................................................................................................... 31
3.2 Clock.................................................................................................................................................. 32
3.3 Common Relays ................................................................................................................................ 32
3.4 Switches ............................................................................................................................................ 32
3.5 Addressable....................................................................................................................................... 33
3.6 Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 34
3.7 Archive............................................................................................................................................... 35
3.8 Relays................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.9 Ports .................................................................................................................................................. 35
3.10 Alarm List......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.11 Passcode......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.12 Memory............................................................................................................................................ 38
3.13 Buzzer ............................................................................................................................................. 38
4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers .................................................................................. 39
5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 41
5.1 Battery Calculations........................................................................................................................... 42
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal ................................................................................................................. 43
6.1 Control Unit........................................................................................................................................ 43
6.2 Addressable Module.......................................................................................................................... 47
7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes ................................................................................................... 50 i
MR-2400 Programming Manual ii
MR-2400 Programming Manual
List of Figures and Tables
Figures
Figure 1: 4-Wire Device Wiring (typical)......................................................................................................... 5
Figure 2: System Window .............................................................................................................................. 7
Figure 3: Switches Window............................................................................................................................ 10
Figure 4: Groups Window .............................................................................................................................. 11
Figure 5: Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 12
Figure 6: IDs Supervised ............................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 7: Annunciator Panel Window............................................................................................................. 14
Figure 8: Outputs Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 15
Figure 9: Options Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 16
Figure 10: Default Key Assignment ............................................................................................................... 18
Figure 11: Fixed Key Assignment .................................................................................................................. 18
Figure 12: Dialer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 20
Figure 13: Dialer Configuration 1 ................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 14: Dialer Configuration 2 ................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 15: Call Directions............................................................................................................................... 23
Figure 16: Zone Data ..................................................................................................................................... 23
Figure 17: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes .................................................................... 24
Figure 18: Circuits Window ............................................................................................................................ 24
Figure 19: Devices Window ........................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 20: Copy Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 27
Figure 21: Internal Circuits Window ............................................................................................................... 28
Figure 22: Relate Window.............................................................................................................................. 29
Figure 23: Typical Menu ................................................................................................................................ 31
Figure 24: Typical Selector ............................................................................................................................ 31
Tables
Table 1: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates ............................................................................. 36
Table 2: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes .................................................................................... 50
Table 3: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes................................................................................. 51
Table 4: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes......................................................................... 52 iii
MR-2400 Programming Manual iv
MR-2400 Programming Manual
1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts
Warnings: Before programming
1.
All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control
Unit.
2.
The Control Unit will continue to monitor input circuits and devices and will act according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.
3.
Loading a new database will erase the current database before loading the new database.
If the new database is not loaded after the erasure, the panel will not operate.
4.
The database version number must match the number required by the operating program, otherwise a Database Mismatch trouble condition is generated. This condition will disable the panel until a correct operating program is loaded.
5.
The database must be completely loaded for it to be considered valid. The program keeps track if the last database load was valid/complete or not. An invalid database load will disable the panel until a valid database load is done.
1.1 General
The control unit uses a downloaded database for input circuit programming. This database includes the addressable devices on-line, and the Bells, Releasers, Functions Relays and Control
Modules activated by the addressable devices. This database is created and downloaded from an
IBM compatible computer using the Modul-R Human Interface (MHI) program. Refer to the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for instructions on downloading the database.
Note: All communications are stopped during the database load. This will cause an off-line trouble to be recorded by the central station that communicates with the panel.
1.2 Addressable Devices
The MR-2400 uses analog/addressable devices. There are two general types of devices: sensors and modules. The following devices are supported:
Modules
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
MRI-M502M
MRI-M503M
MRI-M500DM
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500X
Sensors
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
MRI-2551
MRI-2251T
MRI-2551TH
MRI-3251
MRI-5251
MRI-5551
MRI-5251R
MRI-5551R
Monitor module
Mini monitor module
Monitor module for conventional 2-wire smoke detectors
Micro monitor module (EN54 listed only)
Dual monitor module
Relay Module
Control module
Isolator module
Ionization type smoke detector, low profile
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector, low profile
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector, low profile
Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector
Combination photo, ion and heat detector, low profile
Fixed temperature detector, low profile
Fixed temperature detector
Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector, low profile
Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector
1
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M, MRI-M502M and MRI-M503M monitor modules all appear the same to the MR-2400. This allows for the easy substitution of devices if field requirements change. The MRI-M501M and MRI-M503M modules are intended for mounting inside the back box of a conventional contact device. The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM and
MRI-M502M require back boxes for mounting.
The MRI-M500DM dual monitor module has two input circuits, both Class B (Style B). The first input is on the address dialed into the module and the second circuit uses the dialed address plus
1. That is if the dials are set for address 34, the monitor modules to be programmed into MHI are at addresses 134 and 135.
The MRI-M502M monitor module can be used for monitoring up to 20 System Sensor two-wire smoke detectors. The module requires a separate 24 VDC supply to power the smoke detectors.
Also, some external means of resetting the power must be provided since the module cannot reset the detectors. This can be accomplished with one of the general purpose relays of the MR-2900.
Do not assign any usage to the relay in the MHI database. Also, the relay must be assigned a non-zero duration. Then the relay will operate whenever the Reset hot key is pressed when it has nothing else to reset (neither LED is flashing).
The MRI-M500S control module can be used to control a supervised output, such as a bell or strobe circuit. The control module monitors the circuit wiring and troubles will be reported. The module will require a separate 24 VDC supply for the controlled circuit. When programming the database in MHI, be sure to program the control module correctly. Choose any “Control ( str )” other than “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500S module. The MR-2400 will not operate a control module if the supervised circuit is shorted. Also there are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500S control module but not the MRI-M500R relay module.
The MRI-M500R relay provides two Form C relays. Choose“Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500R module. There are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500R relay module that do not affect the
MRI-M500S control module.
The MRI-M500X isolator module is used to prevent wiring faults from affecting the entire circuit. It divides the addressable circuit into sections. The isolator has separate IN and OUT wiring. A short on one side of the isolator will not be seen on or affect the other side. Isolator modules do not use addresses. The isolator relies on a voltage threshold to determine whether it should be isolating or not. This voltage threshold is around 6.5V. All isolators in a system are in isolated mode on system power up. If there is an excess of current draw, the isolator will not close. When the short is removed, the isolator module will automatically close the circuit again. The LED on the isolator module will turn on when the module is in isolated mode, otherwise it will flash periodically. System
Sensor recommends no more than 25 devices between isolator modules since the inrush current of the devices may mimic a short condition preventing the isolator from closing. MRI-3251 detectors have an inrush current of up to 10 times that of other devices, thus only two can be placed between isolators.
The sensors all use bases for mounting. Besides the standard plain bases, there are also relay bases, isolator bases and a sounder base. The available bases are:
MRI-B501
MRI-B501B
MRI-B210LP
MRI-B501BH
MRI-B524BI
MRI-B224BI
MRI-B524RB
MRI-B224RB
Flangeless base for all sensors
Flanged base for MRI-x551 sensors
Flanged base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
Sounder base for all sensors
Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors
Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors
Relay base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
The relay and sounder bases are activated by the sensor LED. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base will activate. This requires that the MR-2400 have the LED mode set to
2
MR-2400 Programming Manual
FLASH. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
LED MODE/FLASH. The MR-2400 will only turn on the LEDs of up to 5 devices
1
per addressable circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH sounder base requires a separate 24 VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base will activate.
Isolator bases function the same as isolator modules. The sensor plugged into the base is connected to the IN wiring to the base. The isolator is between the sensor and the OUT wiring.
While both sensors and modules have rotary dials that allow for addresses from 00 to 99, modules add 100 internally to the address programmed, thus using the address range 100 to 199. Since sensors and modules come from the factory addressed as 00, we do not allow that address to be used for an installed device. Address 0 is used for indication of wiring faults on the addressable circuit.
Device Faults
The following troubles (with condition code letter) can be reported by or for addressable devices:
• Missing (M): A device listed in the database is not reporting back when polled by the panel. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been misaddressed. This error can also occur if there are any wiring faults.
• Illegal (I): A device is reporting as an address that the database shows as unused. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis-addressed. For illegal sensors, since there is no programming available, if an alarm condition is detected, the MR-2400 will operate all its bell circuits.
2
The MR-2400 will always ignore illegal modules.
• Wrong Type (U): This occurs if the device is not the type expected for the address. For example, the database lists an address to have an ion smoke detector, but a photo smoke detector has reported for the address. This error will also be used if the panel cannot determine the type of the device.
• Trouble (T): Sensors: The device is defective and needs to be replaced.
3
• Modules: The extended circuit from the module has a wiring fault. Note: Control modules that supervise their output circuit will not be operated if the output circuit is shorted
4
.
• Duplicate (D): This means that two devices are using the same address. The MR-2400 does a check every hour for duplicate devices. If either device goes into alarm, the panel operates normally. Note: Due to the method used to detect duplicate devices, it is possible for a single device to appear as duplicate devices. Generally, the device will need to be replaced.
1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs to 3.
2. BRK programs dated before 18 February 1999 always ignore illegal sensors.
3. BRK programs dated before 9 March 1999 do not report sensor troubles.
4. BRK programs dated before 10 September 1999 do not operate control modules if in any fault.
3
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Class A Inputs
The Class A Addressable Inputs uses two input circuits, out on the odd numbered circuit and in on the following even numbered circuit, for example: out on circuit 1 and in on circuit 2. Both circuits are powered by the panel from a single source, so that there is no internal isolation between the circuits. This means that a short across one circuit will affect the other circuit.
1.3 Releasing Service
The six output circuits are available for releasing service through programming. The MRI-M500S control module can also be programmed for releasing. Releasers can be programmed to be normally On (Continuous) or normally Off (Momentary). Continuous releasers will be turned off by a loss of AC power as well as by input. There can be three types of inputs to start operation:
Normal, Fast and Cross-Zoned. There are also Abort and Halt features available. Releaser operation is subject to both a delay and a duration time.
Normal operation of a releaser is as follows:
1.
An Alarm input causes the start of the releaser delay.
2.
After the delay time, the releaser is activated for the duration time.
3.
After the duration time, the releaser is returned to its normal state.
After this sequence of operation, the releaser will have to be reset before it will operate again.
The inputs that activate and control releaser operation are as follows:
• Normal Input: Causes the selected releaser to start its normal operating sequence.
• Fast Input: Causes the selected releaser to operate immediately, ignoring any delay time and will over-ride the Halt function (see below). The releaser will run for its standard duration.
• Cross-Zoned Input: These inputs allow for multiple inputs to be required before the releaser is activated. Inputs are assigned either to the “A-side” or “B-side”. If an alarm is received from both an A-side and a B-side detector, the releaser will start its normal operation.
• Halt Input: This will cause the selected releaser not to operate. The releaser will have to be reset before it will operate normally again. The Fast Input will over-ride the Halt function
(see above). Note: If used, this type of input must be controlled access to maintain UL listing.
• Abort Input: This will cause the selected releaser to stop running its timer once it reaches
10 seconds. The timer will stay at 10 seconds until the Abort input is restored. The timer will then resume.
Restrictions on Releaser Programming
1.
Normal, Cross-zoned and Fast inputs can be any of Alarm, Pull Station, Waterflow or
Supervisory functions.
2.
Abort and Halt functions can only be assigned to monitor modules.
4
MR-2400 Programming Manual
1.4 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors
4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see
Section 2.5.1). A duration of zero disables this function. Once this is done, wire the power for the device as shown in Figure 1 . A third party power supply can be used instead of the Aux Power as shown. Whenever the
System Reset operator key is pressed when neither LED is flashing, the relay will operate for the duration programmed.
Figure 1: 4-Wire Device Wiring (typical)
5
MR-2400 Programming Manual
2.0 Editing MHI Databases
2.1 General Programming Notes
The editing of a system is done through a series of input windows. Editing starts with the System
Level and progresses to the Panel Level, then to the Input Level, and finally to the Relate Level.
The Main Menu and option speed keys are not available while editing/viewing the system. While editing is being done, the word OPEN is displayed in the Status Bar. This is to remind the user that the system database is open and that the computer should not be turned off. If the computer is turned off while the database is open, it may become corrupted.
If the current database has been previously verified and you select Edit, a requester will be displayed confirming your request to edit the database. If No is chosen, then the database is displayed in View mode. Editing the database will change the database to a non-verified state and will change the Last Edit Date.
Prior to an editing session, the database will be automatically backed up. This back up copy will have the same name as the original database, but will incorporate a .BAK extension. If a database becomes corrupted, delete it and rename its .BAK backup file to have a .DBA extension. This will restore the database to the state prior to the last editing session .
Note: When upgrading from a version 17 (or earlier) system, a number of items that were programmed at the panel are now included in the database. See the file UPGRADE.TXT for a complete description of these changes. Follow these instructions to obtain the information required before upgrading your firmware:
1.
Connect your computer to the panel and open the Terminal window
2.
Select the Printer screen in the Terminal: press
14
<Tab >
3.
You should note that the title bar of the Terminal window displays the text "File logging in progress...". If this does not appear, press the button Log On .
4.
In the terminal window, type the following command: 99?
5.
The panel's configuration settings will be listed in the Terminal window and it will also be saved in the file: LOG_CONT.TXT, located in your program directory.
6.
Close the Terminal window
7.
You may now view the contents of the file using any standard word processor or the
NOTEPAD program supplied with Windows
8.
You must perform the above procedure for ALL panels in your system
Panel Types
There are a number of different types of panels that may be programmed.
• MR-2900 (mb2931) Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.
• MR-2900 (mb2921) Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.
• MR-2900 (mb2901) Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.
• MR-2200 Fire Panel: Not covered in this manual.
• MR-2400 Fire Panel: This panel has four addressable input circuits that can be programmed for either 2 Class A or 4 Class B input circuits. New MR-2400 panels will use the class set in the database. Older MR-2400 panels will need the database to match the class fixed in the panel. There are six power-reversing output circuits. These output circuits can be programmed to be used as either bells or releaser type circuits. This is a stand-alone fire panel but it can be networked to the MR-2944 or MR-2934 annunciators.
• MR-2944 Annunciator: It includes the memory required to have a database loaded into it.
This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be included. It requires the MR-2910 Network Board for communications.
• MR-2934 Annunciator: It is identical to the MR-2944 in operation. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.
6
MR-2400 Programming Manual
• MR-2924 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual.
• MR-2914 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual.
Notes:
1.
The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators can be attached to the MR-2400 panel. They are considered an extension of the panel by MHI and do not change how these panels interface with other annunciators.
2.
All products no longer produced will be supported for existing systems.
2.2 System Window
The System Window (see
Figure 2 ) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information.
The Title Bar of the window will show whether editing or viewing of the database is being performed and the name of the current database.
The text in the top left corner provides information about the database. The top line gives the date and time the database was last edited.
The next line states whether
Figure 2: System Window the current contents have been verified or not; and whether the database has been compressed or not.
The options Bell System, Subsequent Alarm, Resound, Evac and Waterflow all affect how the notification appliance circuits (NAC), hereafter referred to as bells, react to alarm conditions.
• Bell System is a drop down list for selecting how the bells and strobes will operate. This sets the base operation for the entire network. If coded bells are required, the bell codes are defined for each input individually. The following options are available:
-- Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal
Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAC timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
-- Evac: A First Stage alarm will activate selected bells in Evacuation mode. Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. There is no timeout from First to Second
Stage.
-- Alert/Evac: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Evacuation mode and all other bells on the panel in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot
Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the system will progress to Second Stage.
Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
-- Staged: The 1st alarm will activate selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or
Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the selected bells are switched to Evacuation mode and the next bells, ie the ones with the next higher number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in
Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For
7
MR-2400 Programming Manual example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode. A 2nd alarm will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
Notes:
1.
Bells must be assigned consecutive bells circuits with no Releasers assigned in between Bells. For example: circuits 1, 2, 3, 4 can be assigned as Bells but not circuits 1, 2, 4, 5 with circuit 3 a Releaser.
2.
Control modules cannot be programmed as bell or strobe if the Staged Bell system is used.
• Subsequent Alarm controls how Alert, Evac and Alert/Evac type bell systems behave when a new alarm is received while one is still active. 1st Stage has the panel repeat the
First Stage operation. 2nd Stage has the panel go immediately to Second Stage operation.
• Resound controls how the panels handle the automatic resounding of silence bells when a new alarm is received. There are two modes:
-- Local: Each panel will resound only its own silenced bells when a new alarm is received. This would be used when panels in a network are in different buildings, such as a campus.
-- Global: All panels in a network will resound silenced bells when a new alarm condition is received on any panel in the network. This is used when the panels are all in the same building, such as a large plant. (This setting is not applicable to the MR-2400
FACP as it is not networkable.)
• Evac controls whether the bell system Evacuation Mode sounds Steady (continuously) or uses a Temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency
Evacuation Signal . The pattern used ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, 1½s Off repeated.
• Waterflow controls if bells can be silenced if they are started by a waterflow type input. If
Non-Silenceable is chosen, bell circuits activated due to a waterflow input cannot be silenced until the waterflow device has restored.
Note: This setting affects the bell circuits only. It has no affect on control module operation.
• Language chooses English (default), French or Hungarian characters to be used in messages. See Appendix C Languages of the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for a description of the letters supported and the method of entering them.
• Alarm List Sequence controls which end of the Alarm List is shown automatically. If First is chosen, the first (oldest) item in the alarm list will be shown. If Last is chosen, the last
(newest) item in the alarm list is shown. Regardless of order, alarms always take precedence in being shown. Another way to think of it is that First shows where the fire started while Last shows where the fire has gotten to.
• Disconnects controls which panels the Signal Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Releaser
Disconnect and Common Disconnect hot keys affect. This option is for MR-2200 and
MR-2900 networks. For the MR-2400, choose Local.
-- Local: The Disconnect hot keys affect only the panel they are on.
-- Global: The Disconnect hot keys affect all the panels in the network.
The System Message is a text entry box for defining a message that is 3 lines by 20 characters that is used to identify the system. This message is printed at the top of printouts and shown on some service terminal screens, but it is not used in any LCD except in STATUS/IDENTIFICATION.
The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the
LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”.
8
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. This option will need to be unselected if the
MR-2400 panel does not have any MR-2614 annunciators.
The Allow Complex Releaser Definitions check box enables the extended functionality of the releaser type circuits and control modules programmed for releasing. This allows for the Fast (no delay) operation of a releaser and for the AND functioning of A and B side inputs to a releaser. See section 1.3 Releaser Programming for details.
The Enforce Group Association checking check box enables MHI to check to see if a group association has been included in the relates of inputs. This option must be enabled when using an
MRDL Dialer.
The Observe Daylight Savings Time check box enables or disables the automatic changing of the clock for Daylight Savings Time. If enable, the system will move 1 hour ahead the first Sunday of
April and fall back 1 hour the last Sunday of October (North American dates).
The Pre-alarm Buzzer , when enabled, will cause a tone to sound when an addressable device is in alarm during the Retard period. The tone that is used is a triple beep repeated every second.
Master ID defines which panel in a network will act as the Master panel. This must be set to the same ID as the MR-2400.
• Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system. Annunciators will always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages:
-- Local: Each fire panel shows only Alarm List entries that are for that panel only.
-- Global: Each fire panel shows Alarm List entries for itself and all other panels and annunciators.
-- Master: The master fire panel shows the Alarm List entries for all panels and annunciators while all other fire panels show only their own Alarm List entries.
• Common Relays controls what signals affect the common alarm, common supervisory and common trouble relays of each panel. The are two settings:
-- Local: The common relays of a panel follow the events of events on that panel only.
-- follow Alarm List Mode: The common relays of a panel will react to both events of the panel and any events listed in its Alarm List.
The System Window has the following push buttons on the right hand side:
• Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, causes the database to be saved. After an edit session, a requester will ask if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.
• Panels: Displays the Panel Window. If the system has no panels defined, the Add Panel
Box (see p12) is displayed to obtain the first control panel for the system.
• Switches: Displays the Switches Window. This window determines which devices are attached to the switches and the timers associated to each switch. See section 2.3
Switches Window .
• Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This window is used to define groups of relates.
See section 2.4 Groups Window .
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
• Settings: Defines the Verify warnings to disable and/or errors to reduce to warnings for the current database. Not all warnings/errors can be disabled/reduced. The use of this is not recommended, but provided for special circumstances.
9
MR-2400 Programming Manual
2.3 Switches Window
The Switches Window (see
Figure 3 ) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/
Night) switches. There are
16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network will keep track of its portion of the devices related to each switch. Relays,
LEDs and control modules will follow the On/Off state of the switch they are related to. Addressable sensors will use Day sensitivity while the switch is on and Night sensitivity while the switch is off. The timers can be used to have the switch change
Figure 3: Switches Window state at set times each day.
Switches can be operated manually at the panel whether they have timers or not. If the Switch is associated to a Hot Key, the Hot Key will then operate the switches, causing the related LEDs, relays and control modules to react. Changing a switch manually at one panel will cause all panels in the network to change switch state.
Notes:
1.
Addressable detectors can only be related to a single switch each.
2.
Relays, LEDs and control modules controlled by more than one switch will stay on as long as any switch operating them is on.
The title bar of the window will always list the currently highlighted switch.
The Switches Table shows all 16 possible switches and highlights the current one. Select any one to make it the current switch. List entries will show the message RELATES FOUND for switches that have related devices.
The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch will change state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, eg: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used. If an action at midnight is desired set the time to 0:01, one minute after midnight; or 23:59, a minute before midnight. MHI will sort the times into ascending order after the Switches Window is closed.
The Start Mode - On check box determines if the first time listed should turn the switch On or Off. If it is not checked, the first time turns the switch off. If it is checked, the first time turns the switch on.
The on and off indication beside each time entry will change to reflect what each time in the sorted list will do.
Use switch as custom Hot Key allows the switch to be manually controlled by the Hot Keys. A hot key can be assigned to turn the switch on and another to turn it off. These keys will be marked as
HK in the Switches Table.
Description is a 20 character message that describes the Switch usage. This is useful in that the switch now has a description of its usage that is easier to understand when assigning Switches to
Hot Keys.
10
MR-2400 Programming Manual
There are five push buttons on the right side:
• Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window.
• Reset: This will remove all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch.
• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated/controlled by the switch.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.4 Groups Window
The Groups Window (see
Figure 4 ) is used for creating and editing the
Groups of relates. The Title
Bar will show the current group.
This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates. Groups are a method of establishing zone representations. They are also used to program zone information for the MRDL
Dialer (see section 2.5.3.4
Figure 4: Groups Window
Zone Data). A zone representation may include a message and/or a group of Relates. Inputs (ie.
circuits and/or devices) may relate to a Group or number of Groups and thus acquire all Relates that are referenced by them. Inputs can also separately adopt the Group message. Making a change to a Group will affect all inputs (circuits and devices) related to the Group. This is a very powerful feature that can significantly speed up the creation of medium to large size systems as well as simplify changes. Forethought should be placed in defining appropriate Groups. Up to 250 groups may be defined.
The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database. For example, if a new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added to a Group. This single change is then automatically picked up by any inputs that are related to the Group. Since this number could be hundreds, the use of the Groups makes databases easier to maintain and decreases the chance of mistakes when items are added.
Note: Though any relationship can be selected for inclusion into a group, an input that references the group must be able to accommodate the group’s relates. For example, if a group includes relates to Bell or Strobe output, associating this group to a Supervisory type input will generate an error during verification because this type of input cannot operate Bells or Strobes. It may be advantageous to separate groups in these cases.
The Group List shows all the defined groups along with their message (if any) and if there are any relates defined for the group. The current group will be highlighted. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another group.
The Message/Description is used to enter a message for the group. This set of text-boxes allows you to enter a message describing the Group. You are allowed space for 3 lines by 20 characters.
If desired, this message may be adopted by a circuit or device by checking the Use Grp Msg
11
MR-2400 Programming Manual check-box and specifying this Group ID. This is a powerful feature if you are defining a large number of inputs that require the same message.
The following push buttons are defined:
• Exit: Close the Groups Window and return to the previous window.
• Add Group: This defines a new group ID. The new group can have any number between
1 and 250. By default, the number will be the next one available. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.
• Delete Group: This will remove the group from the list. You will be asked if you want to have references to the group automatically removed.
• Reset Group: This will remove all relates for the currently highlighted group.
• Change ID: This allows the group ID to be changed. This may need to be done if two databases are being merged together. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.
• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated by inputs related to the group. When relating inputs to groups, be sure that all relates defined by the group are allowable for the input.
• Copy Relates: Copies the relates and/or message from an input point to the current group (see Figure 20 ). The values of the panel, circuit and device are required. Most conventional circuits use a device number of 0 (zero). Press Copy to copy the information.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.5 Panel Window
The Panel Window (see Figure 5 ) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided will change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title
Bar will describe the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.
The Panel Window has the following push buttons along the right side:
• Exit: Close the
Panel Window and return to the
System Window.
• Add Panel: Add another panel to the system. A dialog box will be displayed. The default options are to use the next available panel ID and to select an
MR-2944
Figure 5: Panel Window annunciator.
Change these values as required.
• Delete: Remove the current panel from the system. This will also lose all input circuit information for the panel. Any of the panel's outputs that are referenced will become invalid and will be removed by the next verify.
12
MR-2400 Programming Manual
• Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window. See section 2.6.
• Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window. See section 2.7.
• More Info: This displays a dialog box listing basic information about the panel including the date the database was last downloaded into a panel, the number of times downloaded, etc.
• Change Type: Displays a dialog box for changing the type of the current panel. This allows for easier correction of mistakes in creating the initial database and for easier updating of the database if a panel type is changed in the field. Only certain type changes are allowed.
• Note: This can have far reaching effects on a system. Ensure that changing the panel type is required prior to doing so. Any information that is no longer valid with the new panel type will be lost.
• Change ID: Displays a dialog box for changing the ID of the current panel. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. This process could take a long time for a large database. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
The Panel List is a list-box located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both
Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system. The highlighted entry in the List is the one that is currently being edited. It’s description is also shown in the title bar of the Panel Window. If a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the
<Backspace > key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.
The Mode drop down box defines Class A or Class B operation for the addressable circuits. The panel will configure itself for this value.
Note: Older MR-2400 panels were factory set for either Class A or Class B operation. For these panels this value must match the value in the panel. If these values are different a HARDWARE
MISMATCH error will occur and the panel will not operate.
The Message is a text entry box located to the right of the Panel List. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel. This message will be displayed in Alarm
Lists with signals that are generated by this panel. It will also be included in any print-outs generated by the Master Panel of the system. This message should include enough information that it will identify the panel and its location to fire or service personnel.
The Outputs area lists the function of the outputs of the panel. Use the Outputs Button to show the
Outputs Dialog (see section 2.5.1) which allows for the programming of the Outputs and the relays.
• The Options button displays the Options Dialog (see section 2.5.2). This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc.
• Port 3 Connect sets the purpose of the Port 3 general communications port. If the operating program loaded does not support the selected setting, a wrong port 3 program trouble will be generated by the panel. The options are: none: Port 3 is not used.
Digitel Protocol 1: Sets Port 3 to use the old protocol to the SE 2000.
Digitel Protocol 2: Sets Port 3 to use the new protocol to the SE 2000.
PC Connect: Sets Port 3 to use the GRID program interface.
Voice Evac. System: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MV-2700 voice evacuation panel.
2944 connect: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MR-2944 annunciators. MHI will
13
MR-2400 Programming Manual automatically choose this option if any MR-2944 annunciators are included in the database.
The MR2614 Connect should be marked if an MR-2614 LED Annunciator is attached. It has up to
72 LED zones which are considered an extension of the panel itself. Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann. LED Cnt drop down box. The MR-2400 panel will show this number of
LED zones. Though up to eight MR-2614s can be attached to the panel, each one will show the same information.
The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the
MR-2614 and MR-2644 annunciators (see
Figure 6 ). Also, the MR-2801b-MR and MRDL
(MR-2806-MR) can be enabled on this screen.
Check those IDs that will be connected to the system. If the MR2614 Connect box is checked, IDs for MR-2614 annunciators must also be checked. When the MR-2806-MR is enabled, a button will appear next to that option called Dialer Settings (see section 2.5.3 for a description of the dialer options).
Hot Key Routing is a set of radio buttons for setting the other panels or annunciators to be controlled by the current panel. To have no other panels affected by the current panel, mark Local . To have the current panel affect all other panels on the network, mark Global . To
Figure 6: IDs Supervised choose only some panels, mark Custom . A text entry box entitled route panel ids is then displayed. Enter the panel IDs to be controlled separated by commas, eg “2, 3, 4". Each ID listed will receive Hot Key commands from the current panel whenever its Hot Keys are pressed.
Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming
(see Figure 7 ).
The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an optional alpha-numeric LCD. This setting is used by MHI only to determine if the Message Receive check box should be shown for the annunciator in the Relate Window.
This value is not sent to the annunciator. The annunciator will determine for itself if an LCD is installed or not.
Figure 7: Annunciator Panel Window
LED Count is located directly below the LCD check box. This defines the number of LED zones the annunciator will be using. A count of zero will disable the Hot LEDs and Common LED.
Hot LED is located directly below the LED Count drop down. This value defines the first of four
LED zones the annunciator will use for internal functions. Any of the zones can be chosen with the requirement that there are four consecutive zones available. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the hot key zones. These will reflect the current status of the annunciator and the panel(s) it sends commands to.
14
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing:
Zone n alarm: Acknowledge
Zone n supervisory:
Zone n trouble: Reset
Zone n+1 alarm:
Reset
available
available (green)
available (yellow)
Signal Silence active
Zone n+1 supervisory: Signal Silence available
Zone n+1 trouble: 2nd Stage Inhibit active
Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available
Zone n+2 supervisoryFuture use
Zone n+2 troubleFuture use
Zone n+3 alarmFuture use
Zone n+3 supervisoryFuture use
Zone n+3 troublePower On
Note: The Power On LED refers to the 24 VDC to the annunciator, not to any AC source.
Common LED is located directly below the Hot LED setting. This is the LED zone the annunciator will use as a common alarm, supervisory and trouble indication. It is a summation of the zone
LEDs of the annunciator. Any LED zone may be used. The zone chosen will not be available for general annunciation. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the common zone.
Outputs Dialog
The Outputs Dialog (see Figure 8 ) allows for the programming of the panel’s outputs and function relays.
The outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program.
The following output types are available:
• Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It sounds in
Alert or Evacuation mode as required. It does not sound codes.
• Strobe: This signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-silenceable and will be
Figure 8: Outputs Dialog turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset (unless the strobe duration is programmed – see Strobe Duration in section 2.5.2).
• Coded Bell: This signalling circuit will sound out the code for any input that operates it and then silence. It does not sound in Alert or Evacuation mode.
• Continuous Releaser (C. Releaser): This type of releaser remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds. Warning: Continuous releasers are also turned off when there is an AC power fail or when the panel is in its power up cycle.
• Momentary Releaser (M. Releaser): This type of releaser is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the
Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail. The
Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.
15
MR-2400 Programming Manual
• Note: Releaser type circuits can only be activated by inputs on the same panel.
• Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit will be powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. This allows for the reset of 4 wire detectors. A duration time of 0 prevents this operation. Auxiliary Power circuits will be turned off by the panel while it is in its power up cycle.
• Follow Supervisory (follow Supv): The output will sound when there is any supervisory condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.
• Follow Trouble (follow Trbl): The output will sound when there is any trouble condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.
Relay Delay is the times that the relay waits before activating. A delay of 0 causes instant operation. This can be from 0 to 60 seconds.
Relay Duration affects the time the relay is activated. For relays operated from inputs, it is the minimum time the relay will operate. The relay must stay on for this length of time before it can be reset. This is for equipment that must remain off a length of time before it can be started up again.
If no input operates the relay, it is available for the reset of 4 wire devices. If the duration is not 0
(zero), then the relay will activate for the duration time when the Reset hot key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. The duration can be from 0 to 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Options Dialog
The Options Dialog (see Figure 9 ) allows for the programming of the various panel options.
Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer will sound. Normal causes the buzzer to sound for new supervisory and trouble conditions. All causes the buzzer to sound for all new conditions.
MR-2934 Annunciators always use All .
All needs to be chosen to meet current
UL & NFPA requirements.
Bypass Priv.
sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device
Figure 9: Options Dialog bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to
Level 2 (default) or Level 1.
Disconnect sets the privilege level required for the Disconnect and Test Mode Hot Keys. These can be set to Level 1 (default) or Level 0. If Level 0 is chosen, the Disconnect Hot Keys can be operated without a passcode being entered into the panel.
Banner Mode dictates what the top line of the Main Menu of the LCD will be. There are four modes of operation:
• Status Ind.: This mode displays the lines SYSTEM NORMAL and SYSTEM OFF
NORMAL.
• Panel Ban.: This mode displays the 20 characters of text entered into the text box that appears below the drop down while this mode is selected.
• System Ban.: This mode displays the text defined by the System Banner.
• Equip. Desc.: This mode allows the panel to display its own identification text.
The AC Fail is the delay before the panel will report that it has lost AC power. The panel itself will go into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition. This can be set from 0 to 1800 minutes (30
16
MR-2400 Programming Manual hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel will use a 10 second delay. Note: Most installations will require a time of 1 minute (default) to meet required codes and standards. For panels connected to UL listed monitoring stations, normally a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required. The 30 hour time is available for those locations with long standby requirements.
Fan Delay sets the number of scans between the reset of each Control Module (relay) on an addressable circuit. This allows for the staggered restart of fans when the system is reset. This option can be enabled or disabled on each addressable circuit as required. It has no affect on
Control Modules (supervising).
Bell Inhibit is the length of time the bells must sound before they can be silenced. This time can be from 0 to 120 seconds. Coded bells will always sound out their complete code and then stop.
Bell Timeout is the length of time the panel will stay in First Stage operation before automatically progressing to Second Stage. This can be set from 2 to 10 minutes. Most codes do not allow this time to exceed 5 minutes. Check with local codes and the authority having jurisdiction for the allowable limits for this time. Both the Second Stage Inhibit and Signal Silence will prevent this timeout from occurring.
Bell Cutoff is the length of time the bells will sound before they are automatically silenced by the panel. A time of 0 disables this feature. The cutoff can be set from 5 to 30 minutes. If the cutoff is used, it must be longer than the Bell Timeout .
Coded Bell Speed sets the time interval between the bits of the codes. This speed can be 1, ¾, ½ or ¼ second. The time between digits is three times this interval. The time between rounds is seven times this interval.
Maintenance Margin sets the gap between the maintenance threshold and the alarm threshold for addressable sensors. If the sensor stays between these two values for the Maintenance Retard time, the panel will report a Maintenance Alert trouble for the sensor. The margin can be set from 0 to 500, with 0 giving no warning and 500 giving the earliest warning.
Maintenance Retard is the number of consecutive scans the addressable sensor has to stay between the maintenance and alarm thresholds to generate the Maintenance Alert trouble. This retard can be from 5 to 50 scans. Scan time can vary from 2.5 to 5 seconds with usual values from
3.5 to 4 seconds.
Smoke Detector Reset Time sets the time the MR-2900 will power off conventional 2-wire smoke detectors when they need to be reset. This time can be from 1 to 20 seconds. Current smoke detectors only need the default value of 1 second. Older smoke detectors, such as may be found in a retrofit installation, may need a longer time to reset.
Strobe Duration Time sets the time that strobe circuits will operate when activated when operated along with coded bells. The timer starts when the coded bells start. At the end of the timer, the strobes are silenced. A time of 0 (zero) disables the automatic silence. This value can be from 10 to 510 seconds.
Enable Disconnect & Test Timeout enables or disables disconnect timeouts. If the timeouts are disabled, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and
Test Mode must all be manually ended. If enabled, these functions will be automatically ended after four hours.
Trbl/Supv Output Auto Silence enables or disables the automatic silencing of the Follow Trouble and Follow Supervisory outputs during a fire condition. If enabled, the Follow Trouble and Follow
Supervisory outputs will automatically sound again once the fire bells and strobes have been silenced.
Suppress Missing Signals allows for the suppression of device missing signals for a loop that has a short or ground fault condition. If enabled, the panel will only report the short or ground fault
17
MR-2400 Programming Manual condition, but not the missing device messages. Note: This feature requires that the BRK program be dated 9 September 1999 or later (version 17.20 or later).
Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that define the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 10 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 11 . The default layout is shown in Figure 10 . The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid (unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.
18
Figure 10: Default Key Assignment
The keys and their functions are as follows::
Figure 11: Fixed Key Assignment
Key Action
Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The green LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.
Signal
Silence
Silences the bells. The green LED will flash when Signal Silence is available. There may be a silence inhibit before the bells can be silenced if they are activated by an
Alarm condition. The yellow LED flashes when the bells have been silenced. The bells will reactivate if a subsequent Alarm is received by the panel.
System
Reset
System Reset resets part or all of the system.
The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.
Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors. The yellow LED also flashes if the ground fault relay is activated. Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be re-activated after 5 to 30 seconds.
Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is 0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.
Notes:
1.
The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.
2.
If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.
3.
The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Key
Second
Stage Inhibit
Fire Drill
Lamp Test
Releaser
Disconnect
Relay
Disconnect
Test Mode
Signal
Disconnect
Action
Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For
STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage. Second
Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the red LED will flash when it has been activated.
Activates all the bell circuits, both regular and coded, in Alert mode. Press a second time to have all bell circuits sound in Evacuation mode. Press a third time to end the
Fire Drill. The red LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The Bell
Test is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.
Flashes the panel's LEDs. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.
Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation. The red
LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected, Releaser Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The red LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The red LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.
Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the
LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter > key selects the item. Then select ADDRESSABLE, then TEST. Enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear > will return to the previous menu.
When test mode is ended, all zones and devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.
Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.
Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The red LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
19
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Key
Common
Disconnect
General
Alarm
Halt
Switch
Switch n n
On
Off
Action
Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The red LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated.
Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.
Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the red LED flashes when it has been pressed.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and
LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and
LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.
Manual
Restart
Dialer Settings
The Dialer Settings dialog (see Figure 12 ) allows for the programming of various communications options.
The 1 st
, 2 nd
and 3 rd
Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:
• HEX (B)-simulates the [*] key
• HEX (C)-simulates the [#] key
• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone; must be first digit of telephone number
• HEX (E)-forces the panel to pause for 2 seconds
• HEX (F)-end of telephone number marker
Figure 12: Dialer Settings
The first number is the primary number, the second number is for a second monitoring station, and the third number is the backup number for the first number.
The 1 st
and 2 nd
Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.
20
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The 1 st
and 2 nd
# Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.
The Dialer Settings window has the following push buttons along the right side:
• Exit: Close the Dialer Settings window and return to the IDs window.
• Configuration 1: Display the Dialer Configuration 1 dialog.
• Configuration 2: Display the Dialer Configuration 2 dialog.
• Call Directions: Display the Call Directions dialog.
• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data dialog.
• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog.
Dialer Configuration 1
The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog (see Figure 13 ) contains the First
Communicator Options,
Second Communicator
Options and International
Options.
The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When
Disabled is selected, the
Figure 13: dialer will not communicate any events.
Dialer Configuration 1
The TLM One/Two Check options determine whether the dialer will test for telephone line faults on line one and line two respectively.
The Third Phone # can be programmed for two different modes of operation. When Alternate
Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third telephone numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number. When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third telephone number only if all attempts to communicate to the first telephone number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated.
When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.
The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or DTMF dialing. If All attempts Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing. If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse (rotary) dialing for the remaining attempts.
The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and
Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA
Reporting Codes.
The SIA Max Events option sets the maximum number of events the dialer will send for one SIA transmission. When 20 per Round is selected, SIA sends a maximum of 20 events per round.
When 8 per Round is selected, SIA sends maximum of 8 events per round.
21
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and
Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic
Contact ID Reporting Codes.
The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using
Telephone Lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Telephone Line 1 for transmissions. If a trouble exists on Telephone
Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.
When the Force Dialing option is set to enabled, if the first attempt by the panel to call the monitoring station fails, on every subsequent attempt the panel will dial regardless of the presence of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present.
When the Busy Tone Detection option is enabled, if busy tone is detected, the dialer will disengage the phone line and try to place the call again following the delay between dialing attempts. When
Disabled is selected, the dialer will use the standard dialing procedure for every attempt.
The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60. When 33/67 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is 33/67.
The Handshake option determines the handshake used for BPS transmissions. When 1600 Hz is selected, the dialer responds to a 1600 Hz handshake. When Standard is selected, the dialer responds to the handshake designated by the format selected (1400 or 2300 Hz).
The ID Tone can be set to 1300Hz or 2100 Hz. The panel will emit a tone at the selected frequency for 500 ms every 2 seconds when it places a call to indicate that it is a digital equipment call, not voice. When Disabled is selected, this feature will not be used.
Dialer Configuration 2
The Dialer Configuration
2 screen (see Figure 14 ) contains the Swinger
Shutdown Variables, Test
Transmission options and
Other Options.
The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone events and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The trouble or alarm will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for
Figure 14: Dialer Configuration 2
Zone Alarm and Restore, Zone Supervisory and Restore, Zone Trouble and Restore and
Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight. To disable the feature, program 000.
The Test Transmission Time of Day determines when the automatic test transmission will occur.
The entry is four digits (HH:MM). To disable the feature, program the time as [9999].
22
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions
The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals.
The Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble.
Post Dial Wait for Handshake is the amount of time the dialer will wait for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the programmed telephone number.
Call Directions
The Call Directions dialog (see
Figure 15 ) contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will be used to communicate events.
There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are
Fire Zone Alarm/Restore,
Supervisory Zone Alarm/Restore,
Zone Trouble/Restore, Maintenance
Trouble/Restore and Test
Transmissions.
Figure 15: Call Directions
Zone Data
The Zone Data dialog (see Figure 16 ) contains zone definitions and reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate events.
The Groups List is a list of all currently defined groups. Each line entry includes the Group ID and its message/description. Click on the desired group in order to program it.
The Definition specifies the identifier of the alarm or trouble being sent to the central station.
The zone types that are available are Fire, Sprinkler, Heat, Water and Untyped.
The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to
Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are: Figure 16: Zone Data
• Zone Alarm Reporting
Code
• Zone Alarm Restoral Reporting Code
• Trouble Reporting Code
• Trouble Restoral Reporting Code
• Supervisory Reporting Code
23
MR-2400 Programming Manual
• Supervisory Restoral Reporting Code
Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes
The Dialer Maintenance and
Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 17 ) contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.
The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes.
Select one to program its reporting code.
The Reporting Code are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to
Programmed, or when using
BPS formats. There are many different reporting codes in this group.
Figure 17: Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting
Codes
2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows
The Circuits Window (see Figure
18 ) allows for the defining of addressable input circuits. The
Devices Window (see Figure 19 ) allows for the defining of addressable devices. These two windows are nearly identical. Most controls on one are found on the other with some exceptions noted.
The current Circuit or Device is shown in the Title Bar of the window.
The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits Figure 18: Circuits Window for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable. The highlighted circuit is described in the title bar of the Circuits Window. Unused circuits are shown using three dashes.
Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another circuit. The
Up and Down Arrow keys change the current circuit. The Right and Left Arrow keys will change the type of the current circuit. The Plus and Minus keys will change the function of the current circuit.
24
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Device List
The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. It lists any defined addressable devices for the current addressable circuit. For addressable devices, the type of device and its function are shown for each one defined. Unused addresses are shown with three dashes. Use the
<Backspace
> key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another
Figure 19: Devices Window device. The <Up> and <Down>
Arrow keys change the current device. The <Right> and <Left Arrow> keys will change the type of the current device. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current device.
Device Type Selector
The Device Type Selector is located below Device List on the left hand side. It is shown on the
Device Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current device type. For addressable circuits, it displays all the sensors or modules that can be programmed for the current device address, sensors for addresses 1 to 99 and modules for addresses 101 to 199. If the address is unused, select not assigned. The following module types are available:
• Monitor (Class B): This is a standard monitor module using Class B (Style B) wiring and an end-of-line resistor. This must be chosen for MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M and MRI-
M503M modules.
• Monitor (Class A): This is a standard monitor module using Class A (Style D) wiring. This can be used only with the MRI-M500M and MRI-M502M modules.
• Control (supervising): This programs the MRI-M500S for use as a generic signalling circuit. It can be turned on by alarm or supervisory inputs. It will remain on until the system is reset.
• Control (relay): This is used for programming the MRI-M500R relay module.
• Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. They will silence when the Signal Silence button is pressed. It does not sound codes.
• Control (Strobe): This programs the MRI-M500S as a signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-silenceable and will be turned on continuously for both Alert and
Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset
(unless the strobe duration is programmed – see Strobe Duration in section 2.5.2).
• Control (C-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a continuous releaser which remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds.
• Control (M-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a momentary releaser which is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an
AC power fail. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to
1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.
25
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Function Type Selector
The Function Type Selector is used to display and edit the function of the current input point. The following function types are available:
• Alarm: This is a generic fire input. Displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List when activated.
• Pull Station: This is a fire input similar to Alarm. The differences are it displays **PULL
STATION** in the Alarm List and may not have a retard time programmed.
• Waterflow: This is a fire input similar to Alarm except that it displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Bell circuits can be made non-silenceable for waterflow type inputs (see section 2.2 System Window).
• Supervisory: This is used for such inputs as Low Water Pressure, Sprinkler Shut Off
Valve Closed, etc.
• Halt: This causes the related releaser outputs to not operate. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.3 Releaser Programming.
• Abort: This causes the related releaser outputs to have their associated timers to be stopped. The timers will start to run again when the input goes back to normal. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.3
Releaser Programming .
• Monitor: This is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.
• Non-reporting: This is a non-latching type of input. They can only operate LEDs, function relays and control modules. The supervisory LED will be operated. Outputs operated by a
Non-reporting input cannot be also operated by another type of input or switch.
• Trouble: This function type is used for various circuit types and for control modules.
Trouble type inputs operate LEDs only, no other outputs are allowed. This function type is assigned by MHI automatically.
Message
The Message is located in the middle of the top of the window. This 3 line by 20 character text message is displayed or printed for all signals originating from the current input point. Circuit types that use devices will have a default message created for them when defined. This message can be changed.
Use Grp Msg
The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box will appear when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered. If a group message is being used, it will be displayed in the Message area, but the message cannot be altered.
There are a number of options that can be used for each input circuit or device. Not all options apply to all inputs. MHI will only show those options that are currently usable. The following options are available:
• Retard: This is the amount of time the input must stay in an alarm state before it is treated as a valid alarm. This option is not valid with Pull Station function type inputs. Addressable devices are programmed for a number of additional consecutive scans that must be in alarm before the panel will accept the alarm. The duration of a scan varies between 2.5
and 5 seconds. Note: It is the responsibility of the person writing the database to ensure that the retard time chosen does not exceed any limits allowed by code.
It is possible to generate long retard times that are in the two to three minute range if a large number of scans is chosen. For example, UL states that the system cannot take more than 50 seconds to report a waterflow condition. One has to ensure that the total delay of the waterflow detector and the input combined does not exceed 50 seconds.
• Enable Fan Delay: Controls the staggered turning off of Control Modules (relay). If checked, Control Modules (relay) on this circuit will be turned off in sequence, from the
26
MR-2400 Programming Manual lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel
Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules
(supervising) is not affected by this setting.
• Disable Maintenance Alert: Disables the addressable smoke or heat sensor from reporting Maintenance Alert. Maintenance Alert is defined by the device staying at almost alarm threshold for an extended period of time. This is usually an indication that a smoke sensor requires cleaning. Heat sensors in high temperature areas may need the
Maintenance Alert disabled to limit nuisance troubles. Standard room temperature (20°C) will not cause a Maintenance Alert on a heat detector.
• Code Bells: Note that only coded bells will sound the codes. If coded bells are used the following options are then also shown:
-- No Restore: If checked, the panel will not sound the Code again when the input restores. If not checked, the panel will sound a single round of the Code when the input restores
-- Code: This is the sequence that will be sounded when an alarm is received on this input. It can be up to 4 digits long. Hexadecimal digits are used, thus each digit can be from 1 to F, where A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14 and F=15.
-- Round: This is the number of times the Code will be repeated. It can be between 1 and
4 times for no restore inputs, and between 2 and 4 for restore inputs.
• Night Sens. and Day Sens.: Selects the Alarm threshold sensitivity for addressable smoke sensors. Heat sensors always use Normal sensitivity. Increased sensitivity will cause alarms at lower levels of smoke. Sensors not attached to a switch always use the
Night Sensitivity. Sensors attached to a switch will use Night Sensitivity while the switch is
Off and Day Sensitivity while the switch is On. Night Sensitivity must always be equal to or more sensitive than the Day Sensitivity.
• Manual Restart: Check this to require that the control module not be reset by System
Reset but by Manual Restart . Use of this option will require that there be a Manual Restart function key assigned to the MR-2400.
The push buttons located on the right hand side are:
• Exit: Closes the window and returns to the previous window.
• Devices: Opens the Devices Window for the current circuit (Circuits Window only).
• Copy: Copies the circuit/device information, relates and message from another input to the current input
(see Figure 20 ). The current input does not have to be defined. Relates cannot be copied between conventional and addressable input points. The
Panel ID, Circuit ID and Device ID (not always shown) list the circuit/device to be copied from.
Marking Transfer Main Definition will copy the listed circuit/device type and function to the current circuit/ device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs. Marking Transfer Relates will copy the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates.
Marking Transfer Message will cause the message to be copied. Marking Transfer Devices (if shown) will copy any device definitions that the listed circuit
Figure 20: Copy Dialog Box contains. These devices will copy messages and relates as based on those settings above.
There is no check at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken.
For each database that is created, a warning about using
27
MR-2400 Programming Manual copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database.
This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.
• Relate or Trbl Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the current circuit or device. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated when the input goes into alarm. The Relate button will display all output types that are available depending on the function type of the input. The Trbl Relate button will display only LEDs that can be related. Note: All panel outputs and control modules to be operated must be defined before they can be included in the relates of an input.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human
Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.7 Internal Circuits Window
The Internal Circuits Window (see Figure
21 ) allows for the programming of outputs,
LEDs, etc. for the various internal circuits
(functions) of the Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 81 and 82 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions. All internal circuits have specific meanings and are stored in the archive of the panel. See Appendix A:
Condition Codes and Zone Numbers for a list of all the internal circuits.
Some of the internal circuits are:
• Internal Circuit 0, General
Alarm : This is the General Alarm
Figure 21: Internal Circuits Window function. General Alarm can be received from an annunciator or from an SE 2000. It can be assigned to one of the Hot
Keys of control panel. General Alarm causes all the bells and strobes on the panel to operate in Evacuation mode. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button.
• Internal Circuit 81, 1st Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in first stage by an alarm input. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.
• Internal Circuit 82, 2nd Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in the second stage mode by an alarm input or by a time-out. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.
• Internal Circuit 96, Fire Pre-alarm: This circuit is activated by any smoke detector in the auto-verify process or addressable device in alarm during the Retard period. It can be related to an LED to give a visual indication that an alarm is in the verification process.
• Internal Circuit 99, Common Trouble: This circuit is tripped by any internal circuit or trouble condition not associated with an internal circuit that turns on the Common Trouble
LED on the panel. This circuit is used to annunciate common trouble conditions at a
28
MR-2400 Programming Manual remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel.
The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel.
Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.
• Warning: Some of the internal circuits (eg. checksum) do not have restore signals associated with them. They generally relate to a condition that requires either service work or a reboot of the panel. Any relates assigned to such an internal circuit will have no way to be reset short of re-booting the entire network.
List Entries: This feature allows the user to control the information displayed. Relevant lists items applicable to the current version only. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.
The following push buttons are available:
• Exit: Closes the Internal Circuits Window and returns to the Panel Window.
• Reset: Clears all relates associated with the current internal circuit.
• Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the internal circuit. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated by the internal circuit.
• Copy Relates: Copies the relates from another input to the current internal circuit (see
Figure 20 ). The values of the panel and circuit are required. Press Copy to copy the information. If the function type of the two circuits is different, a requester is presented to confirm the copy.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.8 Relate Window
The Relate Window (see Figure
22 ) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs,
LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states. Inputs can operate bells/ strobes, LEDs, relays, control modules on any panel in the system and continuous/momentary releasers on the same panel.
Switches can operate relays, LEDs, control modules on any panel in the system and control the day/night sensitivity change of any
Figure 22: Relate Window addressable detector on any panel. The title bar describes the current input point/switch/group and current output panel or annunciator.
Groups is a comma separated list of all the groups that the point is to use for relates. Up to ten groups can be listed. These groups are assigned to the point itself and does not change as the current output panel changes. Relates that are part of the groups are not shown in the Relate
Window but can be shown on the Map Window if so desired.
29
MR-2400 Programming Manual
The Panel List is a list-box located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both
Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The highlighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input. When a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another panel.
The Outputs List shows the programmable outputs of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. It lists all outputs, along with their definition and current state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected, act if they activated by default, and n/a for not available. A blank definition is for unused outputs. Bell and Strobe outputs can only be selected for Fire Alarm type inputs. If
Complex Releasers are enabled, releasers can have three other states: Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in; *A* or *B* which allow for
AND logic. The releaser will not operate until both an A and a B input have been activated. Use the
<space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the
<Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another output.
The Relays List shows the general purpose function relays of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another relay.
The LEDs List shows the LED zones available on the panel or annunciator. This will not be shown if the panel has no LEDs. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected and n/a for not available. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace > key in order to quickly reposition the current selection to another LED. The actual number of LED zones varies depending upon the panel or annunciator.
The Device List shows the addressable devices that can be related to the current point. For system inputs and groups, it is displayed only if there are any control or relay modules defined for the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors, or any control or relay modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel.circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Devices that are not available or are invalid are not shown. Use the <space > key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections.
The Evac check box is an option for Fire Alarm type inputs only. Selecting this option will cause all
Bells and Strobes for this panel to operate in Second Stage (Evacuation) mode. If selected, Bell and Strobe type outputs for this panel will not be selectable.
The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator will receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator will not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.
The push buttons, located on the right side of the window, are:
• Exit: Closes the Relate Window and returns to the previous window.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
• View Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This is for reviewing the defined groups. No editing can be done to the groups. To edit the groups, return to the System Window. See section 2.4 Groups Window .
30
MR-2400 Programming Manual
3.0 LCD Programming
3.1 General Comments
A number of items are programmed through the LCD and keypad. This is called the LCD menu. All options are under the PROGRAM option on the Main Menu of the panel. The Main Menu can be recalled to the LCD by pressing <Home > .
Note: The only item that must be programmed from the LCD menu is the Panel ID. This must be done before the database is downloaded.
There are multiple levels of program access. Privilege Level 0 is the base level of operation.
Privilege Level 1 allows access to privileged Hot Key functions and limited programming. Privilege
Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.
While programming through the LCD menu, the panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid key is pressed. Programming is done through a series of menus and requester screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information (see Figure 23 ). Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item.
Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press <Enter > to select. In Figure 23 , pressing <Enter > will bring up the Program Menu.
Title
Menu Item
Selected Menu Item
Module-R by Secutron
12:22
>STATUS HISTORY<
>
PROGRAM PASSCODE<
Menu Item
Menu Item
Figure 23: Typical Menu
A menu option of more will display further menu options that do not fit on the current screen. All the screens of a menu will loop around continuously. The default option, ie the option next to the cursor, is the one to the upper left of the screen. Generally, but not always, more is the default option.
Selector screens (see Figure 24 ) are screens where options are toggled on or off. Options that are on are marked by an asterisk(*) while options that are off are marked with a dash (-). Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press <Enter > to change it.
Move the cursor to OK and press <Enter > to save any changes, or press <Clear > to lose any changes. In Figure 24 , both common relays are selected to be disconnected when the Common
Disconnect hot key is pressed. Pressing <Enter > will cause the alarm relay to be not selected.
Title
Options
Selections
AT
*
*
COMMON DISCONNECT
OK<
Figure 24: Typical Selector
For all screens, <Clear > returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and
<Home > returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.
31
MR-2400 Programming Manual
3.2 Clock
This menu has the following options:
• Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter > to accept date typed. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Clock Menu.
The new date will be sent to MR-2944 annunciators, if used. All units will assume this date. The date change will be recorded in the Archive.
• Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter > to accept the time typed. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Clock Menu. The new time will be sent to MR-2944 annunciators, if used. All units will assume this time.
• Calibrate: Calibrates the clock so that it keeps correct time. Calibration takes 2 to 45 days. Waiting longer will give more accurate results. The panel will function normally while calibrating. When sufficient time has passed, re-selecting this function will ask for the correct time. The calibration will then be reported. Changing the time using the Time option will abort the calibration.
3.3 Common Relays
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options:
• Disconnect: View or change the relays that can be disconnected by the Common
Disconnect hot key. Selected relays will be marked by an asterisk (*). To change the selection, move the cursor to the desired relay A(larm), or T(rouble) and press <Enter > to change. Select OK when done. <Clear > will return to Program Menu without making changes.
• Test Inhibit: View or change whether common relays are disconnected during Test Mode or not. <Clear > will return to Program Menu without making changes.
3.4 Switches
This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. View or change the status of any switches.
These switches can be set to On, Off or Auto. The Auto state only applies to switches that have a timer associated with them. The Auto state allows the switch to follow the timer settings. Any changes made are broadcast to the network so that all panels have the same state. Settings are retained by the panel if it is re-booted and the Master Unit will broadcast its settings to the network upon start up. See section 2.3 Switches Window for information on programming what the switch affects.
The menu has the following options:
• Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch will be shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown.
• All Off: Force switches into the Off mode. The number displayed is the number of timers that are switched On. This option is shown only if no switches have timers associated with them.
• All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers will go into the state dictated by the time. The number displayed is the number of switches with timers forced On or Off. This option has no effect on switches without timers. This option is not shown if no timers are associated with the switches.
32
MR-2400 Programming Manual
3.5 Addressable
The menu has the following options:
• Reset Max/Min: Clears the stored values for the maximum and minimum values returned by the addressable devices. These values are automatically cleared when the panel reboots.
• Duplicates Check: This will cause an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address. The panel automatically does this check on the hour.
• LED Mode: This controls how the LEDs on the devices are used. There are three options:
-- OFF/FLASH: The device LEDs are normally off and will flash when an alarm is reported. The flashing LED will be reset when System Reset is pressed.
-- FLASH/ON: The device LEDs flash each time they are polled. They will latch on in
Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors
1
on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.
-- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and will latch on in Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. This option will not be shown if the addressable coprocessor cannot support this mode. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first
5 detectors on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.
-- RESET : This function resets the LEDs to their off state.
• Sensitivity: This allows for the manual adjustment of the sensitivity of addressable detectors. All devices have a default sensitivity assigned in the database. The detector can be set to the database default value or to one of the pre-defined levels replacing the database values. The range of values varies with device type. These manual values are retained if the panel is re-booted.
-- SELECT: Change the manual sensitivity of addressable detectors. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter > without entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector will be displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the detector list.
-- ALL DEFAULT: Change all manual sensitivity settings to the default values set in the database. The number shown is the number of detectors that have a manual sensitivity set.
-- PRINT: Print a list of all manually set sensitivities. Any device not included in the printout is using the sensitivity set in the database.
• Monitor: This function is restricted to Privilege 2. Allows you to select between all Class A monitors and individually selected ones in MHI.
• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This selects devices to be bypassed. A bypassed device will be ignored by the system. Addressable bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Only devices included in the database can be bypassed. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble. The Bypass menu has the following options:
-- ON: Select devices to be bypassed. Enter the circuit and device number. Press <Enter > to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear > will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter > or <Clear > with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.
-- OFF: Select bypassed devices to be returned to normal operation. Each bypassed device is listed in order. Select next to keep the bypass on or select OFF to remove the
1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs on to 3 per circuit.
33
MR-2400 Programming Manual bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear > to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed.
-- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed.
• Test: Select devices to be tested. Test Mode must be active for this selection to be available. All devices selected for testing are automatically deselected when Test Mode is turned off. The Test Menu has the following options:
-- ON: Select devices for testing. Enter the circuit and device number, or enter the circuit number only to select all devices on the circuit. Press <Enter > to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear > will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter > or <Clear > with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.
-- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear > to return to the Test Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices selected for testing.
-- ALL OFF: Remove all devices being tested, if any, from the test mode. The number of devices being tested is displayed.
• Control Modules: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Allow for the manual operation of the control and relay modules included in the database. There are three states available: Automatic (controlled by device inputs) Manual On, and Manual Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted. Manually controlled modules will be annunciated by a common trouble. The menu has the following options:
-- SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of control modules. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter > without entering any number to view the first control module in the database. Each control module will be displayed in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next control module to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the control module list.
-- ALL AUTO: Change any control modules that are forced on or off back to automatic mode.
3.6 Battery
Displays the current battery status and charger calibration. The display shows:
• Line 1: Screen Title
• Line 2: AC State and Battery Charger Calibration Numbers (diagnostic use only)
• Line 3: Current State of the Battery and Menu Option (see below)
• Line 4: Menu Options (listed below)
The menu has the following options:
• OK: Return to Program Menu.
• Test: Perform a battery test.
• Calibrate: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This calibrates the Battery
Charger. The batteries must be disconnected before beginning calibration. No keypad control is provided during calibration. The calibration display will return when calibration is over. Calibration only needs to be done when the main board assembly/power supply board pair is changed, or when the configuration is erased. All Battery Chargers come calibrated from the factory.
34
MR-2400 Programming Manual
3.7 Archive
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. View and change the settings for the recording of optional entries into the history. The following items can be included or not included in the history:
• Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner. Test signals will be marked as such.
• Non-Reporting: View or change whether non-reporting signals are recorded in the history or not. Non-reporting signals are recorded by default.
• Network: View or change the type of archive events that the panel will record in the archive. The options are:
-- LOCAL: Record only panel events in the archive.
-- GLOBAL: Record all events in the archive.
3.8 Relays
This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. If Privilege Level 1 is set and Level 2 is required, access to the menu will be denied. This function allows for the manual operation of the relays.
There are three possible states: Automatic (state determined by inputs), Forced On, or Forced Off.
This mode will be retained if the panel is re-booted.
• Individual : Change the Auto/On/Off state of relay. Each relay will be shown in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next relay to be displayed. Press <Clear > to stop viewing the relay list.
• All Auto : Change any relays that are forced on or off back to automatic mode. The number following All Auto is the number of relays that are in a forced on or off state.
3.9 Ports
This menu has the following options:
• Network: Allows for the setting of parameters related to the network. If the downloaded database indicates that there is no network, the only option is Panel ID . The Network Menu has the following options:
-- Panel ID: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. Set the Network ID number.
This is between 1 and 254.
-- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the Inner Door. Each panel will record in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command.
-Verify: Enable or disable Network Verify reporting troubles. If disabled, the panel will not report a Network Verify trouble (no common trouble sequence), but will still display the error information in the Misc. Troubles.
• Port 3: These options are restricted to Privilege 2. The options available vary depending upon the Port 3 setting in the database. This port can only be disabled from the database.
2944 Connect (MR2-4A Program): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a
2944 annunciator.
-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line (Range: 1-25).
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.
35
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Table 1: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates
Baud Rate
9600
4800
2400
1200
Maximum Capacitance
100 nF
220 nF
470 nF
680 nF
Digitel Protocol 1 (MR2-4 Program): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. It has the following options:
-- ID: Select the panel ID number for the central station/city-tie connection communications port. Valid ID numbers are 1 to 16.
-- Mode: Select whether circuits 1 to 24 or LEDs 1 to 24 are transmitted. Transmitting the
LED numbers allows for zone information to be sent when addressable devices are used.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The SE
2000 will report the panel as offline.
Digitel Protocol 2 (MRZ-413 Program): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. The panel will use the Network ID for identification. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence. It has the following options:
-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the SE 2000. There are the following options:
DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation.
ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits.
GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. See Table 1 below.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The SE
2000 will report the panel as offline.
PC Connect (MR2-4G Program): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a
GRID package. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
-- Delay: Sets the length of time the panel will wait before reporting the GRID package offline. This can be set from 10 to 255 seconds.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The
GRID package will report the panel as offline.
36
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Voice Evac. System (MR2-4E Program): Allows for setting parameters related to the connection to the MV2700 voice evacuation panel.
-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the MV2700. There are the following options:
DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation.
ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits.
GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.
-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line (Range: 1-25).
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
• Port 6: Allows for setting the baud rate for the MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and
MR2806-MR. The available settings are 1200 and 4800 baud.
1
• Terminal: Select ANSI or TeleVideo protocol. Most terminals and terminal emulator programs support ANSI protocol.
3.10 Alarm List
This menu controls the operation of the Alarm List. This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. It has the following options:
• Reset: Select when entries are taken out of the Alarm List. AUTO removes entries as soon as the condition restores. MANUAL requires that Reset be pressed before they are removed. Conditions that have restored will be shown as a restored condition in the Alarm
List.
• Remote: Routes the messages for events from the panel to annunciators. The options are:
-- ALL: All messages are sent to all annunciators.
-- SELECT: Messages are sent as directed in the database.
3.11 Passcode
Allows for the changing of passcodes. The Privilege Level 2 can change both the Level 1 and 2 passcodes, while Level 1 can only change the Level 1 passcode. Passcodes are four digit numbers in the range 1000 to 9999. Type in the new passcode and press <Enter > to accept.
Asterisks will be displayed instead of digits. <Clear > will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear > will return to the Program or Passcode Menu.
The default Level 2 passcode is 2222. The default Level 1 passcode is 1111. These passcodes should be changed to prevent unauthorized access.
There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from
Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten.
1. Only MR-2614 v2.1 and up support 4800 baud. Previous versions only support 1200 baud.
37
MR-2400 Programming Manual
3.12 Memory
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options:
Erase Configuration: This will erase all initiating circuit, bell, relay, releaser and privilege values entered from the LCD and keypad, and replace them with default values. This has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database. Confirmation is asked before erasure. After the Configuration has been erased, the panel must be reset using the reboot button at the bottom of the Main Circuit Board. The following items are not erased: Serial Number, Level 1 Passcode,
Level 2 Passcode, and Clock Calibration. Note: The panel ID will need to be programmed aand the battery charger will need to be re-calibrated (see Section 3.6) after erasing the configuration.
3.13 Buzzer
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This sets the length of the Trouble Buzzer Inhibit time. This is the length of time that a new trouble will not cause the buzzer to sound after it has been silenced for a trouble. The time can be set to 0 or from 15 to 255 seconds. If 0 is chosen, the buzzer will sound for every trouble.
38
MR-2400 Programming Manual
4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.
Condition Code
T
U
W
P
Q
R
S
I
J
M
N
D
E
G
H
Archive Alarm List
A ALARM
B
C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort halt spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Hot Key Pressed
Illegal Addressable Device
Switch
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Releaser Halt
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
64
1
65
1
66
67
69
1
53
54
59
60
61
Panel
Zone
0
3
4
1
2
50
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Initiating Circuit 3
Initiating Circuit 4
Network Verify
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Addressable Modules Comlink
Output (bell/releaser) Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
Program Checksum
Database Checksum
AC Power
Low Battery
Program Restart
Panel
Zone
91
1
92
1
93
1
94
1
95
1
85
1
86
3
87
88
1
89
1
90
1
80
2
81
82
83
84
Description
Privilege Level
1st Stage Alarm
2nd Stage Alarm
Switch
Test Mode
Erase Configuration
Change Configuration
Passcode Tamper
Database Loaded
Time/Date Change
Hot Key Activation
Memory Overflow
Network Reboot
New Program
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required why
39
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Notes:
1.
These zones do not restore.
2.
Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.
3.
This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit: Device Number
Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR
Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot
001 - Watchdog
002 - Clock Monitor
003 - Illegal Instruction
004 - Unused Interrupt
005 - Orphan Interrupt
Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set
Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number
Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed
Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2400 panel
001 - CoProcessor for address loops
Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command
Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the
Network Reboot Required trouble
Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the
Network Reboot Required
001 -- network
002 -- network
003 -- port 3
006 -- negative counter
008 -- memory overflow
009 -- co-processor memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
40
MR-2400 Programming Manual
5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation
Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10
Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.
Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).
Note: The MR-2400 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.
The standard battery options available for the MR-2400 Control Unit are:
• 4 Ah internal
• 7 Ah internal
• 10 Ah internal
• 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet
• 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet
• 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed)
The components of the MR-2400 Control Panel and other devices have the following typical current draws:
MR-2400
MR-2944LC
MR-2915
MR-2614
MR-2622
MR-2644
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
MRI-2551
124 mA (includes MR-2905) MRI-3251
65 mA MRI-5551
1 mA
20 mA
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
5 mA
30 mA
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
MRI-M502M
MRI-M503ME
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500X
300
µ
A
200
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
300
µ
A
450
µ
A
The following page is a sheet suitable for battery calculations.
41
MR-2400 Programming Manual
5.1 Battery Calculations
Job: ___________________________________Date: _________
Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time
For Panels and Input Devices:
Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______
Panel/Device
MR-2400
MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors
MRI-500M/501M Monitor Modules
MRI-500R Relay Modules
MRI-500S Control Modules, supervised output
MRI-500X Isolator Modules
MRI-502M Monitor Modules
Draw (mA)
124
0.20
0.40
0.30
0.40
0.45
0.30
1
Quantity Total Power (Ah)
Total A:
Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time
For Signal Devices
Time = Alarm Time = ______
Signal Device Draw Quantity Total Power
Total Power Requirement = Total A + Total B = ____________________
Note: 5 min = 0.083 hour; 10 min = 0.167 hour; 30 min = 0.5 hour
Total B:
42
MR-2400 Programming Manual
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal
The MR-2400 Control Unit and the Addressable Input Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the Archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control
Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units will beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit will beep three times and will lose any information sent.
The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it will be viewing whatever screen was the last viewed. To view Screen
0, which lists all the screens that are available, press
0
<Tab > . Press <Delete > to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab > key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the
<Tab > key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.
The service terminal of the addressable module is available through the Control Unit's service terminal.
6.1 Control Unit
The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps, but this can be changed to values between 150 and 9600 bps.
All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter
n
<Tab > where n is the screen number.
Screen Name
0
1
Index
LCD
2
3
4
5
Misc
Battery
AC
Bells
Description
A list of all the available screens.
Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the
LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent keyboard key, with the keypad <Clear > being mapped to the keyboard <End > .
A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.
Displays the current battery level, the calibrated high and low values and the current status of the battery and ac power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.
Commands
<Ctrl-B>
0<Ctrl-B>
9900<Ctrl-B>
99<Ctrl-B>
Print battery calibration.
Execute a dynamic battery test once and end continuous testing if on.
Start continuous dynamic battery testing.
Calibrate battery charger. This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2.
Displays the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for reporting AC failure.
Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the silence inhibit, No Acknowledge, and cut-off.
43
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Screen Name
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Function
Relays
Releasers
Displays the current settings and timers for the 2 function relays.
Common
Relays
Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits (if any).
Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common Disconnect hot-key.
Alarm List
Miscellaneous
Troubles
Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the STATUS/
MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.
Output
Supervision
Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
Relay
Summary
Shows the current supervision readings and status for the releasers, bells and auxiliary power circuits. These values should be in the range
130 to 150 for Vhi, and 10 to 20 for Vlo (low gain) or around 100 for
Vlo (high gain). If the numbers are jumping all over the place, there is a hardware fault with the terminal board.
Displays which relays and functions have been activated:
Commands
Bn
A
Bell Circuits 1 to 6
Common Alarm
T
G
W
L
Common Trouble
Ground Fault
Walk Test
LCD Back light
Archive Displays the Archive History List. This is the list of the last 900
(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix 39 for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J
0 J
K
0 K
Page down
Go to the end of the list (oldest entry)
Page up
Go to the beginning of the list (newest entry)
Printer A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.
Printer Status Displays the current printer status.
44
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Screen Name
19
26
27
29
30
31
34
35
36
37
38
49
Description
Port 3
Port 6
Misc Outputs
Shows the current status, ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.
Commands
0 V Clear counters
Shows the online status of the equipment connected to the panel’s annunciator port.
Displays the status of follow trouble, follow supervisory and aux power output types.
System Reset Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that will be reset when System Reset is pressed.
Port 9 Shows the current condition of the addressable module and the communications with it. Also displays information about screen 31.
Commands
0 V Clear counters
Addressable
1..4
Addressable
Relays
Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 1 to 4. Press
<Esc > to return to the Control Panel screens.
Notes for Screen 31:
1.The keyboard commands (see below) are not available.
2.The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control
Panel's screens.
Displays the state for all the control modules on a circuit.
Commands
C Display next addressable circuit
(1-4) C Display specified addressable circuit
Sensitivity
Sensitivity List Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.
Bypass and
Test
Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.
Commands
C Display next addressable circuit
(1-4) C Display specified addressable circuit
Switches
Displays the Day/Night setting, default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots will be used for any value that is not used.
Commands
C Display next addressable circuit
(1-4) C Display specified addressable circuit
Clock
Shows the current on/off status of each switch and lists the timer associated with each switch.
Shows the status of the Daylight Savings Time option & clock calibration.
45
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Screen
50
51
52
61
Name
Tasks
FIFO
Extended
Memory
Load
Annunciator
Description
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. This screen is for factory use only.
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the
FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory Overflow trouble.
The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating. For example, if the Network task has large usage, then there are problems with the communications to the MR-2944. The task “SPI comlink” is the one that handles the addressable coprocessor.
Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in the system.
Dispalys the current status of each of the MR-2614 annunciator LEDs.
These keyboard commands are available on all screens except when the service terminal is connected to the Addressable Module (Screen 31). The exceptions to this are the first five commands listed below which are also functional from Screen 31.
<Del > Clear and redisplay screen
<Tab > View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens will be skipped
<Backspace > View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens will be skipped
0 <Tab > View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens
(0-127) <Tab > View selected screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen will be shown
0.0 <Tab > TeleVideo cursor control mode
0.1 <Tab > VT100 cursor control mode
A Silence buzzer
D Print the date and time
(month).(date) D Enter the date
(month).(date).(year) D Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to
99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a four-digit number.
(hours).(minutes) T Set the time
46
MR-2400 Programming Manual
(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T Set the time
<Ctrl-V > Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege)
(code) <Ctrl-V > Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.
0 ?
Print database
90 ?
Print archive
99 ?
Print configuration
<Esc > Stop printout
<Enter > Advance printer (paper feed)
6.2 Addressable Module
The Addressable Module's service routines can be accessed through the Control Panel's service terminal using screen 31. While the service terminal is accessing the Addressable Module, all
Control Panel Commands are unavailable. Press <Esc > to return to the Control Panel service routines.
All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, a diagnostic number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below. Note: The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel's screens.
18
19
20
Screen
0
2
10
15
Name
Index
Misc
Miscellan eous
Troubles
ComLink
21
22
23
Description
A list of all the available screens.
A list of the program date and time and other information.
Displays a list of addressable circuit module troubles.
Read Me
Debug
Totals
Detail
Type
On-Line
Type
Assigned
Displays the status of the communications between the panel and the addressable module.
List of all the keyboard commands.
Factory use only.
Lists for all circuits the number of devices assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also list loops in “Class A” Trouble, ie. broken loop, for Class A systems.
For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands set.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are actually on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit.
47
MR-2400 Programming Manual
43
50
51
Screen
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
41
42
101
118
Name Description
Errors
Alarms
Function
Control
Modules
Bypass
For a signle circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm, Early
Warning, Supvervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the
Control modules.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently bypassed.
Test Mode For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently under test.
Analog Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.
Command Factory use only.
Alarm
Latch
Factory use only.
Feedback Factory use only.
Tasks Factory use only.
FIFO Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory
Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty operating.
Factory use only.
Scan
Sequence
Fault
Masks
Factory use only.
The Addressable Module supports the following keyboard commands:
<Del > Clear and redisplay screen
<Tab > View next available screen. Unused screens will be skipped over
<Backspace > View previous available screen. Unused screens will be skipped over
0 <Tab > View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens
48
MR-2400 Programming Manual
(0-127) <Tab > View selected screen. If selected screen is unused, the next available screen will be shown
A Display Next Address
(0-199) A Display Selected Address
C Display Next Circuit
(1-24) C Display Selected Circuit
0 M Reset Minimum/Maximum Values
If Class A addressable circuits are programmed, the Addressable Module also supports the following commands:
0 P Energize All Circuits
1 P Energize Odd Circuits Only
2 P Energize Even Circuits Only
49
MR-2400 Programming Manual
7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes
The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes.
Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone point, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:
*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.
SIA Format – Level 2: The SIA format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the
SIA Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:
N Ri00 FA 01
N = New Event
Ri00 = System Event
FA = Fire Alarm
01 = Zone 1
Table 2: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes
Reporting Code Code sent when...
Dialer
Direction
*
Contact
ID Auto
Rep
Codes
SIA Auto Rep
Codes
AA See Table 3 Zone Supv./Rest.
zone goes into supervisory/ restore (2)
Zone Alarms/Rest.
zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored
Zone Trouble/
Rest.
AC Fail Trouble/
Rest.
zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored
AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC Trouble Delay
Battery Trouble/
Rest.
Ground Fault
Trouble/Rest.
NAC Trouble/
Rest.
Dialer Bus
Trouble/Rest.
Line 1 or 2 TLM
Trouble/Rest.
Dialer Bus connection is lost/ restored connection via Telephone
Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored
S/R
A/R
T/R
MA/R control panel battery is low/ battery restored
Earth Ground Fault is detected/ restored
MA/R
MA/R
NAC circuit is opened/restored MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
(1) 3A
(3) 73
(3) A1
(3) A2
(3) 1A
(3) 21
(3) 33
(3) 51
See Table 3
See Table 3
AT-000/
AR-000
YT-000/
YR-000
UT-000/
UJ-000
YA-000/
YH-000
NT-000/
NR-000
LT-XXX/
LR-XXX**
50
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Phone # 1 or 2
FTC Trouble/Rest.
Walk Test Start/
Stop communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will be sent control panel has entered/ exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated
MA/R
MA/R
(3) 54
(6) A7
YC-XXX/
YK-XXX**
TS-000/
TE-000
Test Transmission
Normal/
Off-Normal test transmission reports system normal or off-normal
(alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition
T (6) A2 RP-000/
RY-000
* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral;
S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission
** Line number/telephone number is identified (XX)
Table 3: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes
Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restorals when using the standard (i.e. not automatic)
Contact ID reporting format:
Medical Alarms
(1)A1 Emergency
(1)A2 Fail to Report In
Fire Alarms
(1)1A Fire Alarm
(1)11 Smoke
(1)12 Combustion
(1)13 Water Flow
(1)14 Heat
(1)15 Pull Station
(1)16 Duct
(1)17 Flame
(1)18 Near Alarm
Panic Alarms
(1)2A Panic
(1)21 Duress
(1)22 Silent
(1)23 Audible
General Alarms
(1)4A General Alarm
24 Hour Non Fire
(1)51 Gas Detected
(1)52 Refrigeration
(1)53 Loss of Heat
(1)54 Water Leakage
(1)55 Foil Break
(1)56 Day Trouble
(1)57 Low Bottled Gas Level
(1)4A General Alarm (1)58 High Temp
(1)43 Expansion module failure (1)59 Low Temp
(1)44 Sensor tamper
(1)45 Module Tamper
(1)61 Loss of Air Flow
51
MR-2400 Programming Manual
Table 4: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes
Zone
Definition
Fire
Sprinkler
Alarm/Rest Rep
Codes*
FA-ZZZ/FH-ZZZ
SA-ZZZ/SH-ZZZ
Supervisory/Rest. Rep
Codes*
FS-ZZZ/FR-ZZZ
SS-ZZZ/SR-ZZZ
Water WA-ZZZ/
WH-ZZZ
WS-ZZZ/WR-ZZZ
Trouble/Rest. Rep
Codes*
FT-ZZZ/FJ-ZZZ
ST-ZZZ/SJ-ZZZ
KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ
WT-ZZZ/WJ-ZZZ
UT-ZZZ/UJ-ZZZ
ZZZ = zones 01-250, 256
52
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
M R - 2 4 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
O
PERATOR’S
M
ANUAL
Revision D
Document #: LT-2007
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
The installer is to hand over this manual to the owner of the system upon completion of work.
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Unit Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Power Up Sequence.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Types of Inputs .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Status Display.................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Buzzer ............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Operator Keys ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Alarm List.......................................................................................................................................... 6
1.7 LCD and Keypad ............................................................................................................................... 8
1.8 Silent Walk Test................................................................................................................................. 10
2.0 Supplementary Information ...................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers ................................................................................................ 11
2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles..................................................................................................................... 13 i
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual ii
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
1.0 Unit Operation
1.1 Power Up Sequence
The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button underneath the terminal strip is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.
The LCD will first display "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (the buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.
Next the panel will display the message "LOADING DATABASE PLEASE WAIT". At this time, the panel will respond to key presses and communications, but not to input circuit conditions.
When the initialization is complete, the Main Menu will be displayed on the LCD. At this time the panel is fully operational.
1.2 Types of Inputs
There are a number of types of inputs that can be used in the system. Each has different uses and limitations. They are:
• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. It displays
**ALARM** in the Alarm List.
• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the
Alarm List.
• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system.
They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be nonsilenceable.
• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED if there is an annunciator with
LEDs in the system. They cannot operate bells/strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, and releasers on the same panel.
• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output. An LED if there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.
• Abort: This type of input can only delay the operation of a releaser type output. The Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. If there is an annunciator with LEDs in the system, an LED is required for annunciation of the abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.
• Monitor: This type of input is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.
• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The LEDs, relays and
1
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
1.3 Status Display
The status display is the top centre section of the front panel. It is visible through the front door. It consists of the common alarm LED, common supervisory LED, common trouble LED and
AC power LED. The LCD will show the current time.
The common alarm (red) and supervisory (amber or yellow) LEDs will flash with any new alarm or supervisory signal. The common trouble (yellow) LED will flash with any new zone trouble or a new panel trouble, such as low battery, bell trouble, etc. The AC power (green) LED is lit if AC power is on. The common trouble LED will flash rapidly if there is a condition that requires a reboot of the system, such as memory overflow, database change, database mismatch, etc. The buzzer will also beep at 2 second intervals.
The LCD will show the current time, in 24 hour format, while the Main Menu is displayed. The colon flashes to indicate that the processor is still running. The time will flash if it has not been set since the unit was last re-booted. The time will be replaced by dashes if there is a condition that requires a re-boot of the system, such as memory overflow, database change, database mismatch, etc. If the unit has a privilege entered, the privilege will be displayed instead of the time.
1.4 Buzzer
control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by Fire, Supervisory or
Abort type inputs.
The buzzer gives audible indication of any conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)
The four buzzer modes are:
• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.
• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.
• Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.
• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off.
2
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
1.5 Operator Keys
These are located below the Status Display. They are visible through the front door. There are 10 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. The individual keys are located under the rectangles marked
PRESS, not under the key description. The key assignments are assigned by the database. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 2 . The default layout is shown in Figure 1 .
The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid
(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every hotkey pressed in the archive.
Figure 1: Default Key Assignment
The keys and their functions are as follows:
Figure 2: Fixed Key Assignment
Key Action
Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The green LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.
Signal
Silence
Silences the bells. The green LED will flash when Signal Silence is available. There may be a silence inhibit before the bells can be silenced if they are activated by an
Alarm condition. The yellow LED flashes when the bells have been silenced. The bells will reactivate if a subsequent Alarm is received by the panel.
3
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Key
System
Reset
Second
Stage Inhibit
Fire Drill
Lamp Test
Releaser
Disconnect
Relay
Disconnect
Action
System Reset resets part or all of the system.
The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.
Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors. The yellow LED also flashes if the ground fault relay is activated. Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be re-activated after 5 to 30 seconds.
Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is 0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.
Notes:
1.
The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.
2.
If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.
3.
The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.
Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For
STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage. Second
Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the red LED will flash when it has been activated.
Activates all the bell circuits, both regular and coded, in Alert mode. Press a second time to have all bell circuits sound in Evacuation mode. Press a third time to end the
Fire Drill. The red LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The Bell
Test is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.
Flashes the panel's LEDs. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.
Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation. The red
LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected, Releaser Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The red LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
4
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Key
Test Mode
Signal
Disconnect
Common
Disconnect
General
Alarm
Halt
Switch n On
Switch n Off
Manual
Restart
Action
Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The red LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.
Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the
LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select ADDRESSABLE, then TEST. Enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu.
When test mode is ended, all zones and devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.
Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.
Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The red LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The red LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated.
Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.
Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the red LED flashes when it has been pressed.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and
LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The red LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and
LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.
5
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect,
Signal Disconnect , Test Mode, and Common Disconnect all use the same privilege level.
1.6 Alarm List
The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. Each panel can be configured for one of three modes of operation: In Local mode, each panel only logs events generated from devices that are directly connected to it. For example, a trouble generated on
Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each alarm list only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains a list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.
In all modes, the first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the Main Menu, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the
2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The
LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in
5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one or two screens. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event. A device message screen is shown as required.
To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the Scroll button on the keypad. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press Scroll again to view the next/ previous entry. Use the <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> to rotate between screens of the event.
One can also look at the next entry using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left
Arrow> . A summary screen will be shown when all entries have been shown. To view the summary screen directly, press <Clear> at any time.
For more control in viewing the Alarm List, when the summary screen is showing press <Enter> .
Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Non-Reporting entries are provided. The display can begin with the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and
<Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.
While viewing entries in the Alarm List, the currently displayed input can be Bypassed by pressing the <#> key on the keypad. This will cause the panel to consider the input to be in a normal condition.
Note: Bypass is a privileged function. A passcode will have to be entered in the system before a
Bypass will be accepted.
The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms:
1.
Line 1: time, sequence number, and
Condition Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
or
2.
Line 1: time, sequence number, and
Condition Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 3: description of event
Line 4: circuit/device type
6
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
The device message screen, if any, shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
See section 2.10 for a description of Condition
Codes and Zone Numbers.
The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the
Alarm List (shown) or the number of supervisory, trouble and non-reporting entries if there are non-reporting entries and no alarm entries.
1.7 LCD and Keypad
The LCD is located in the top centre of the front panel. The keypad is to the right of the LCD. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on when any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The Main
Menu is displayed under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered into the panel, it will be displayed on the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press
<Enter> to select. <Clear> returns to the previous menu without changing any information and
<Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.
The second line of the display is a clock which shows the current time in 24 hour format. If a privilege level other than zero has been entered, that privilege level will be shown instead of the time. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. All the digits of the clock flash if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs (Program Checksum Error,
Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.
The Main Menu has the following selections:
• Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:
-- More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.
-- Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.
-- Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.
-- Addressable: This menu has the following options:
Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove
7
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status
Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.
The display shows the device address in the top left corner and the current condition codes in the top right corner (see section 2.0 for a description of the condition codes).
The second line shows the headings for the third line, which contains the analog values sent from the device. Press <Enter> to view the next device or <Clear> to get the address input screen.
Print Sensors: Prints the analog value for every addressable smoke and thermal detector. This is the value of the detector at the time the command is issued.
Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.
-- Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration
(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to a printer connected to the panel's printer port. The printer port is at the bottom of the main assembly and is the one on the right.
-- Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are: All,
Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.
Each entry consists of one or two lines. The information provided on the first line, from the left, is:
1. Event Number
2. Time (24 Hour Clock)
3. Date (MM/DD/YY Format)
4. Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
5. Description
A second line will be printed for addressable devices if a message exists in the database.
This history is sent to the printer port(s) and to the service terminal port if Screen 1 is active. Screen 1 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.
• Archive: The archive is a list of the last 900 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> .
<Enter> will act as the last Left or Right arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and <Down
Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.
The screen of a single screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
The first screen of a two screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
8
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Line 3: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
Line 4: device type
The second screen shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
• Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:
-- Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock
Menu. The date change is recorded in the history.
-- Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept the time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. A time change greater than 5 minutes is recorded in the history.
• Passcode: Allows access to privileged functions. Enter the four digit passcode. Asterisk will be displayed instead of digits. A passcode of zero removes all privileges. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits have been typed, <Clear> will return to the Main
Menu. Privileged access will last two hours before the panel removes all privileges. The panel will beep once if a valid passcode is entered or three times if an invalid passcode is entered. An invalid passcode will not change the current privilege of the panel.
1.8 Silent Walk Test
The Silent Walk Test allows for single person testing of the system. This is done by providing an audio output that can be used by a radio with a microphone input. The system will produce tones through the audio output jack to give the inspector a positive indication of system behaviour. The audio jack should be connected to the Mic In or Line In of a radio. Ensure that the radio is set to automatically broadcast whenever a signal is sent to it. Alarm and supervisory conditions produce a 1500 Hz tone, trouble conditions produce a 1000 Hz tone and ground conditions produce a 500
Hz tone. Two short pulses are given for a new condition and one long pulse for a restore. Tones are generated for input circuits only. The output circuits are not part of the walk test.
To activate the walk test, first connect the radio to the audio output jack. Then activate the walk test by pressing the Test Mode key. The red LED next to Test Mode will flash while the Test Mode is active. Addressable devices will need to be chosen for testing. While selected for testing, devices will not activate relays, control modules, bells, releasers or send signals to monitoring stations on port 3. Any LEDs assigned to the test inputs will follow the device state. See the section on the Test Mode key (page 4) for more information on Test Mode. All devices not chosen for testing will operate as normal.
If a printer is attached to the printer port, a print-out of all events received by the Unit can be obtained for cross-referencing with the test procedures. Test signals will be marked as such in the print-out.
9
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
2.0 Supplementary Information
2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.
Condition Code
T
U
W
P
Q
R
S
I
J
M
N
D
E
G
H
Archive Alarm List
A ALARM
B
C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort halt spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Hot Key Pressed
Illegal Addressable Device
Switch
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Releaser Halt
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
Panel
Zone
0
54
59
60
61
64
1
65
1
66
3
4
1
2
50
53
67
69
1
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Initiating Circuit 3
Initiating Circuit 4
Network Verify
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Addressable Modules Comlink
Output (bell/releaser) Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
Program Checksum
Database Checksum
AC Power
Low Battery
Program Restart
Panel
Zone
86
3
87
88
1
89
1
90
1
91
1
80
2
81
82
83
84
85
1
92
1
93
1
94
1
95
1
Description
Privilege Level
1st Stage Alarm
2nd Stage Alarm
Switch
Test Mode
Erase Configuration
Change Configuration
Passcode Tamper
Database Loaded
Time/Date Change
Hot Key Activation
Memory Overflow
Network Reboot
New Program
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required why
10
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Notes:
1.
These zones do not restore.
2.
Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.
3.
This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit: Device Number
Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR
Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot
001 - Watchdog
002 - Clock Monitor
003 - Illegal Instruction
004 - Unused Interrupt
005 - Orphan Interrupt
Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set
Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number
Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed
Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2400 panel
001 - CoProcessor for address loops
Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command
Network Reboot Required who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot
Required trouble
Network Reboot Required why (Zone 95): Reason the panel generated the Network
Reboot Required
001 -- network
002 -- network
003 -- port 3
006 -- negative counter
008 -- memory overflow
009 -- co-processor memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
11
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles
This is a list of all possible messages that can be displayed by Miscellaneous Trouble on the LCD.
Only those conditions that are in trouble will be shown. Some of the messages are always displayed if the panel is in Test Mode.
Message Description
PROGRAM checksum
EEPROM checksum
EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings
DATABASE checksum program mismatch
The memory chip containing the operating program has an error in it.
Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error recurs, please contact Secutron Technical Support.
The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it.
Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error recurs, please contact Secutron Technical
Support.
The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Please contact Technical Support to report this error.
The panel has a 64k EEPROM. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.
The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it.
Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.
The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the EEPROM.
Erasing the EEPROM will require the operator to contact Technical Support.
no database loaded
The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.
wrong database version
or
database mismatch
The database is the incorrect version for the operating program running.
Download a database with the same version number as the operating program.
no database for this panel
CoProcessor 1..4 off line
CoProcessor 1..4 memory overflow
The panel contains a valid database, but the database does not contain the information for this panel. Either change the panel ID to the correct value, or load a database that includes the panel's ID.
The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits is not communicating with the main CPU. This is a major fault. None of the addressable devices are being monitored. If a reboot of the MR-2400 does not correct this problem, the MR-
2400 needs replacement.
The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits has had a memory overflow. A reboot of the MR-2400 should be done to correct any problems.
low battery
The battery needs recharging or replacement.
12
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Message Description
battery charger not calibrated
BBBBBBAA
12345612
........
port 3 off line
wrong port 3 program
port 6 off line
BBBBBBFF
12345612ATWGL
.............
passcode tamper
The battery charger needs to be calibrated to provide proper supervision of the batteries. To calibrate the charger, disconnect the batteries and select
PROGRAM/BATTERY/CALIBRATE from the LCD menu.
List the status of the 6 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits. Each column represents one circuit. A dot (
.
) indicates a normal condition, an
S
indicates a short, an
O
indicates an open and a
G
indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note:
This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode.
The communications on the general purpose communications port has stopped.
The port 3 selection in the MHI database does not match the firmware option.
Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.
The communications to one or more MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2806-MR or
MR-2801-MR has stopped.
The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on. Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.
B Bell Circuit 1 to 6 W Walk Test Relay
F Function Relay 1 to 2
A Alarm Relay
T Trouble Relay
G
L
Ground Fault Relay
LCD Back light Relay
There have been 3 consecutive attempts to enter an invalid passcode.
watchdog disabled illegal addressable devices
The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly. If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not be reset if it fails to operate correctly.
There are addressable devices connected to the panel that are not included in the downloaded database.
addressable devices bypassed
NETWORK REBOOT required network verify ?
missing
One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/BYPASS/
OFF from the LCD menu.
There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem. This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network. Select
PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not reporting in. This is indicative of a communications error.
13
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Message
network verify ?
illegal network verify ?
version negative counters time not set manual control modules manual function relays manual switches
MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout parallel printer off-line parallel printer out of paper coprocessor class changed hardware mismatch
Description
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not using this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of operating program and database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.
This is indicative of a network communications fault. Network Reboot
Required will automatically be generated by the unit.
The time has not been set since the panel has been Rebooted. The time displayed on the clock may be wrong. Enter the correct time.
One or more addressable control modules have been forced either on or off.
To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/
ADDRESSABLE/CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.
One or both of the general purpose relays has been forced either on or off. To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/
INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
One or more switches with timers have been forced either on or off. This is not shown for switches that do not have timers. To view which switches are forced, select PROGRAM/SWITCHES/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that the event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will require a Hard reboot to be done.
The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a Hard
Reboot to correct this problem. If the panel is connected to an MR-2944 annunciator, do a Network Reboot. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
The printer connected to the printer port is not responding to the MR-2400 panel. Ensure that the cable is not broken. If no printer is being used, reboot the panel to clear this trouble.
The printer connected to the printer port is out of paper. Add paper to it.
The new database changed the addressable loops from either Class A or B to the other. Reboot the panel to clear this trouble.
The class (A or B) programmed in the database does not match the hardware in the panel. This will occur for older MR-2400 panels that cannot change the class of the addressable loops. Correct the database and reload.
14
Message
not enough ram
MR-2400 Operator’s Manual
Description
The operating program requires more extend RAM than the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.
15
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECUTRON MODUL-R
™
MR-2400 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
THIS SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED REGULARLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE FIRE CODES. CONSULT
THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL IF UNCERTAIN OF REQUIREMENTS.
•
•
•
•
•
•
GENERAL
A flashing alarm (red), supervisory (amber), or trouble (yellow) light indicates an unacknowledged (new) condition.
A steady alarm, supervisory, or trouble light indicates an acknowledged condition.
A flashing green light adjacent to a pushbutton indicates that key is available for use.
A flashing red light adjacent to a pushbutton (except SYSTEM
RESET) indicates that function has been activated.
One beep when a pushbutton is pressed indicates that pushbutton is valid.
Three beeps when a pushbutton is pressed indicates the pushbutton is unavailable.
•
•
•
•
TROUBLE CONDITION
The yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE light is flashing and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY. IF
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY, IT
MAY BE UNABLE TO PERFORM ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. DO
NOT LEAVE THE PANEL IN A TROUBLE CONDITION, SINCE IT
MAY NOT WORK PROPERLY AND LIVES MAY BE LOST IN THE
EVENT OF A FIRE.
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the trouble condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the trouble condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
NORMAL CONDITION
Green AC POWER light is on. All other lights and sounding devices are off.
•
•
•
•
•
ALARM CONDITION
The red ALARM light is flashing, the LCD will display the affected zone(s), and alarm signals are sounding.
FOLLOW ESTABLISHED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR
NOTIFYING THE FIRE DEPARTMENT, EVACUATING THE
BUILDING, ETC.
To acknowledge the alarm and latch the flashing lights, press
ACKNOWLEDGE.
To silence the alarm signals, press SIGNAL SILENCE. The red
SIGNAL SILENCED light will illuminate.
To reset the system once the cause of the alarm has been determined and corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
AFTER THE ALARM CONDITION, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
•
•
SYSTEM RESET
The green SYSTEM RESET light will flash to indicate that the system
(or some portion of the system) can be reset.
To reset the alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals that have had their causes corrected, press SYTEM RESET.
Any alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions that still exist will not be reset, and will require separate attention.
LAMP TEST
To test all panel indicating lamps, press LAMP TEST to flash the status of the lamps/pushbutton lamps. Press Lamp Test again to end the test.
Note: Only authorized service personnel must service this equipment. For service contact:
Service Company Name: _______________________________________
•
•
•
•
SUPERVISORY CONDITION
The yellow SUPERVISORY light is flashing, the LCD will display the affected zone(s), and the panel audible device is sounding.
NOTIFY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL IMMEDIATELY.
To silence the panel audible device, press ACKNOWLEDGE.
To acknowledge the supervisory condition and latch the flashing lights, press ACKNOWLEDGE again.
To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET.
Address ____________________________________________________
Phone # ____________________________________________________
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER PRIOR TO
SERVICING OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.
The AC disconnect is located at:
____________________________________________
FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL
©
2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2008 Rev. B
M R - 2 9 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision E
Document #: LT-2010
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Contents
1.0 Technical Information............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Main Circuit Board .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Input Circuits ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Input Circuits Modules .................................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Terminal Board ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 Annunciator Strip ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.8 Power Supply.................................................................................................................................. 5
1.9 Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.10 Networking .................................................................................................................................... 5
1.11 Optional Integrated Printer............................................................................................................ 6
2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Unpacking the HS-3030.................................................................................................................. 7
2.2 Mounting and Assembling the HS-3030 ......................................................................................... 7
2.3 Internal Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.0 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 19
4.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 24
5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 24
5.2 Sample Calculation ......................................................................................................................... 25
6.0 Appendix B: ULC Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors ........................................................................... 26
7.0 Appendix C: UL Listed Compatible Devices ............................................................................................ 27
7.1 Smoke Detectors A ......................................................................................................................... 27
7.2 Smoke Detectors B ......................................................................................................................... 30
7.3 Notification Appliances.................................................................................................................... 31
7.4 Auxiliary Power Devices ................................................................................................................. 45
7.5 Analog Addressable Devices .......................................................................................................... 46
7.6 Releasing Devices .......................................................................................................................... 47
8.0 Appendix D: Interconnection to Other Equipment.................................................................................... 48
8.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC........................................................................................................ 48
8.2 Silent Knight 5104........................................................................................................................... 49
8.3 CTM City Tie Module ...................................................................................................................... 50
8.4 Keltron 3158 TTM ........................................................................................................................... 51
1
MR-2900 Installation Manual
List of Figures and Tables
Figures
Figure 1: Exploded View................................................................................................................................. 7
Figure 2: Back Box Dimension and Knockout Reference............................................................................... 9
Figure 3: AC Power Connection ..................................................................................................................... 10
Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 10
Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 10
Figure 6: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style B (Class A) Wiring ................................................................ 10
Figure 7: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style D (Class A) ........................................................................... 11
Figure 8: Normally Closed Wiring................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 9: Normally Open Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 10: Addressable Style 4(Class B) Wiring ............................................................................................ 12
Figure 11: Addressable Style 6 (Class A) Wiring ........................................................................................... 12
Figure 12: HSI-M500M Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 13
Figure 13: M501 Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 14
Figure 14: M502M Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 15: M500S Wiring for Signalling Circuits ............................................................................................. 14
Figure 16: M500R Wiring for Form C Relay Use ............................................................................................ 14
Figure 17: M500X Wiring................................................................................................................................ 15
Figure 18: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit Wiring .............................................................................................. 15
Figure 19: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit Wiring .............................................................................................. 15
Figure 20: Class B Releasing Circuit Wiring................................................................................................... 16
Figure 21: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring................................................................................................... 16
Figure 22: Relay ............................................................................................................................................. 17
Figure 23: Auxiliary Power Connections......................................................................................................... 17
Figure 24: Ribbon Cable Installation .............................................................................................................. 17
Figure 25: Standard Network Wiring .............................................................................................................. 17
Figure 26: RS-232 Network Wiring................................................................................................................. 18
Figure 27: HS-2614, HS-2644, HS-2801-HS, and HS-2806-HS Wiring ......................................................... 18
Tables
Table 1: Input Circuit Module Compatibility .................................................................................................... 4
Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Conventional Input Circuits................................................................... 11
Table 3: Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits............................................................................ 12
Table 4: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits........................................................................................... 16
Table 5: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates .............................................................................. 18 iii
MR-2900 Installation Manual iv
MR-2900 Installation Manual
1.0 Technical Information
1.1 General
The MR-2900 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 24 Input Circuits, 4 or 8 Polarity
Reversing Bell Circuits, network capabilities (with use of an MR-2910 Network Board) and 4
General Purpose Form "C" Relays as well as system operated relays for alarm, trouble and supervisory indication. If the MR-2900 is ordered with a printer, it is ordered under the panel number MR-2920.
The Control Unit can be networked to provide additional input circuits, visual zones, bell circuits and relays. Up to 254 Units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be connected to form the network.
The network is a Style 7 (Data Communications Link, Redundant (DCLR)) loop.
There are two main operating programs available for use in the Control Panel. The MR1 program only works with a stand alone panel and conventional input circuits. All programming is done through the LCD and keypad. The MR2 program handles all variations. Input circuit programming and special features, such as releasing function, day/night mode, etc., are done from an externally generated database, while system parameters are programmed from the LCD and keypad. The
LCD display is the same for the two programs except for those areas dealing with programming.
The basic MR-2900 Fire Alarm Control Unit consists of Main Circuit Board (MR-2931), Terminal
Board (MR-2926 or MR-2925), Annunciator Strip (MR-2902), Power Supply (MR-2905), Door
Assembly (MR-2972) and Back Box (MR-2971).
1.2 Main Circuit Board
The Main Circuit Board (MR-2931) provides system controls and visual indications, and contains the system processor, programming port, printer port and non-volatile memory for system firmware. Software is installed on the main board for critical functions such as programmable logic and timing functions and non-critical functions, such as custom zone and devices messages. All jumpers on the board are for diagnostic and test purposes. There are 6 LEDs in the middle of the right edge for diagnostic purposes.
The visual display consists of a series of LEDs for common system indication of power, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. An LED clock display is provided to display real time. The flashing colon of the clock provides visual indication of system processor operation. The clock also displays dashes if a major error/change occurs. When this happens, the system requires a Hard reboot. A
Hard reboot is done by pressing and releasing the button inside the top of the inner door assembly.
The Circuit Board has an 80-character alphanumeric LCD. It provides descriptions for inputs, display of archived events, first/last device in alarm, custom messages, etc. The keypad is used to scroll through the display.
There are three connectors on the bottom of the Main Circuit Board, an audio output jack, a 9-pin service terminal port and a 25-pin printer port. The ports are discussed below. The audio jack produces various tones in accordance with the system.
Communication Ports
The Control Unit has 6 communication ports available:
• Port #1- network (Proprietary)
• Port #2- network (Proprietary)
• Port #3- general purpose (Proprietary)
• Port #4- service terminal (RS232 - DB9)
• Port #5- printer interface, Parallel (IBM/Centronics - DB25)
• Port #6- serial printer interface (RS-232)
1
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Ports 1 to 3 use the terminal strip on the Terminal Board for connection. Ports 4 and 5 use the connectors mounted on the bottom of the Main Circuit Board. Port 6 uses a connector on the top of the Terminal Board. It is for the optional factory installed MR-2920 strip printer.
The system network ports, Ports 1 and 2, allow for the networking of units. Up to 254 units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be networked together. The network wiring is a Style 7 (DCLR) loop layout. An MR-2910 Series Network Board is required by each Control Unit to use these ports.
Port 3 is available for different uses depending upon the operating program loaded in the panel.
Different uses require different variants of the operating program. Typical uses are a central station connection or remote LED annunciation of system status. The operation of this port is software defined and requires the use of an MR-2109-x communications board. The MR-2109-3 Driver is for communication to MR-2614 MR-2644, and the following dialers MR28-9001, MR28-9002,
MR28-9801, MR28-9804 and MR295101 (henceforth referred to as Dialer). The MR-2109-4 Driver is for communication to the MV-2700 voice system.
The service terminal port, Port 4, permits the downloading and uploading of custom software, such as device messages and I/O functions. The default baud rate is 9600 bps. It is intended for temporary connection to provide supplementary information during servicing of the panel.
The parallel printer port, Port 5, connects to any standard parallel printer. The system prints every occurrence as it happens. It is intended for temporary connection and can be used for system commissioning and testing by producing a printed log of received events. This can then be checked against a log of tests performed to confirm operation.
The serial printer interface, Port 6, is for the optional factory installed strip printer.
Note: If either of the printers or the service terminal printer screen is stalled, it causes the other printers to stall.
1.3 Front Panel
The system controls consist of 12 system switches and a 20 position alphanumeric keypad. The 12 system switches are factory defined for operations such as alarm acknowledge, signal silence and system reset.
The 20-position keypad is used for technical functions, system/detector maintenance, history recall, and device/circuit disarming and manual operation of addressable output modules, relay modules and bell circuits.
1.4 Input Circuits
There are seven classes of conventional input circuits supported by the Control Unit. Not all classes are supported by all the Conventional Input Circuit
Modules. See Table 1 to determine which circuits are supported by each module.
• "Class A" - This is a 4 wire supervised circuit supporting normally open contact initiating devices. Two-wire smoke detectors are not supported by this type of circuit. A "Class A" circuit requires two of the input circuits, one for the high loop and one for the low loop.
• "Class B" - This is a 2 wire supervised circuit supporting only normally open contact initiating
2
MR-2900 Installation Manual devices and using a 470
Ω
End-of-Line Resistor, model T301-9020. Two-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit.
• Smoke Detector - This is a supervised circuit supporting two-wire smoke detectors only.
Both "Class B", using the Resistor (T301-9017), and "Class A" wiring is available depending upon the Input Circuit Module used (see ' 1.5 next page). Contact initiating devices cannot be used with this type of circuit. A short is reported as a trouble, not as an
Alarm.
• Smoke Detector and Contact Device - This is a supervised circuit supporting two-wire smoke detectors and normally open contact initiating devices. This circuit is wired the same as a Smoke Detector circuit. Shorts on this type of circuit are reported as Alarms, not as troubles.
• Normally Open - This is an unsupervised 2-wire circuit. Normally Open circuits are always Supervisory circuits. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.
• Normally Closed - This is an unsupervised 2-wire circuit. This circuit shall not be used to monitor fire alarm or supervisory initiating devices. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.
Note: The Control Unit shows spurious alarms and troubles due to any mismatches between the programmed circuit classes and the actual field wiring.
There are two classes of addressable input circuits supported by the Control Unit:
• "Class A" (Style 6) - This is a 4 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. It requires two input circuits, one for signal out and one for signal return. Up to
99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.
• "Class B" (Style 4) - This is a 2 wire circuit supporting addressable detectors and modules. Up to 99 detectors and up to 99 modules can be connected to the circuit.
Note: Applicable codes and standards as well as good engineering practices must be considered with regards to the number of addressable devices connected to one addressable circuit.
Isolation modules (MRI-500X) should be used whenever more than one fire zone is protected by one addressable circuit.
1.5 Input Circuits Modules
There are six types of Input Circuit Modules. Table 1 list circuit classes are supported by each conventional module.
Conventional Input Modules
• Model MR-2908 - supports five classes of conventional circuits. All circuits are current limited to 10 mA. Note: This board does not support 2-wire smoke detectors.
• Model MR-2918 - supports two wire smoke detector circuits and Normally Open circuits.
All circuits are current limited to 80 mA. Note: This board does not support “Class B” Endof-Line Resistor circuits or Normally Closed circuits.
• Model MR-2928 - supports all seven classes of conventional circuits. Smoke detector circuits are current limited to 80 mA while all other circuits are current limited to 10 mA.
Note: This board does not support 2-wire smoke detectors on a "Class A" circuit.
• Model MR-2938 - supports only "Class A" 2-wire smoke detectors circuits. All circuits are current limited to 80 mA.
3
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Table 1: Input Circuit Module Compatibility
Class A (Contact)
Class B (Contact)
Smoke Detector
Smoke Detector and
Contact Device
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Dual End-of-Line
O
O
MR-2908
O
O
O
MR-2918
Class B Only
Class B Only
O O
O
O
MR-2928
O
O
Class B Only
Class B Only
MR-2938
Class A Only
Class A Only
Addressable Input Modules
• Model MR-2909 - supports 8 addressable Style 4 (Class B) circuits.
• Model MR-2919 - supports 4 addressable Style 6 (Class A) circuits.
All Input Circuit Modules control eight of the input circuits, one of circuits 1 to 8, 9 to 16 or 17 to 24.
Any of the Input Modules can be used to control circuits 9 to 16, and circuits 17 to 24. Addressable
Input Modules do not physically fit in the location for circuits 1 to 8.
Note: The panel comes from the factory with the installed boards already programmed. The panel only allows programming of the circuit classes that each board supports.
Ground fault conditions occurring on the input circuits are indicated as to the circuit of origin.
1.6 Terminal Board
Field connections are terminated on the Terminal Board, which in addition to terminal blocks contains a portion of the circuitry for output circuits and relays. Some of this circuitry is on a plug-in board (MR-2927) on the underside of the Terminal Board. This plug-in board is factory installed.
The Terminal Board includes connections for 24 input circuits, 4 or 8 supervised polarity reversing bell circuits, 4 general purpose Form "C" relays, 3 system Form "C" relays and 2 auxiliary power outputs. There may be a ten-pin cable connector on the top of the Terminal Board for connection of the optional factory installed printer.
There are two versions of the Terminal Board. The MR-2926 Terminal Board has 8 Class B bells circuits. The MR-2925 Terminal Board has 4 Class A bell circuits. The two versions are identical otherwise.
The bell circuits are rated at 1.5 A @ 24 VDC. They are power-limited and protected with solid state fuses. ( Note: Maximum system loading and stand-by battery power must be considered when determining actual bell loading.) A 10 k end-of-line resistor, T301-9008, is required for supervision. Bell circuits are supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The panel activates bell circuits in two modes: Evacuation, which activates the bells continuously or with the temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal ;
Alert, which activates the bells in a repeated 1 2 s on and 3 s off. Through programming, bell circuits can be used for releaser and releasing type functions.
The general purpose Form "C" relay operation is program defined. The relays have a power factor of .35 and are rated at 0.6A @ 30VAC / 2.0A @ 30VDC. The system defined Form "C" relays are for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble indication. These relays have a power factor of .35 and are rated 1.0A @ 24VDC / 0.5A @ 30VAC. The Trouble relay is normally energized so that loss of both
4
MR-2900 Installation Manual
AC power and battery power is indicated. The N.O. and N.C. markings on the Trouble relay refer to this energized state.
The operation of the general purpose relays and bell/releasing circuits is totally program defined. It is possible to program the activation of circuits to any zone, group of zones, device, group of devices and to further inhibit the operation for a specifiable period of time. Any relays not programmed for use in either the database (MR2) or LCD menu (MR1) are available for auxiliary power reset, i.e. the relay toggles for a programmable time when the Reset key is pressed provided the programmed time is a value other than zero.
The auxiliary power outputs provide 24 VDC @ 135 mA each. They are supervised for shorts only.
Any load attached to the auxiliary power outputs have to be considered when calculating stand-by battery size.
1.7 Annunciator Strip
The Annunciator Board (MR-2902) contains 24 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are: Alarm (red), Supervisory (amber or yellow) and Trouble (yellow). The LEDs flash on status change and go to steady on acknowledge. The trouble LEDs turn on for both open circuit and ground fault with the specific fault indicated on the LCD.
1.8 Power Supply
The Power Supply (MR-2905) is rated at 8A unregulated, providing the system with primary DC power. It is complete with a battery charger rated at 2 A and battery supervision circuitry. The power supply and battery are located within the control unit back box.
Battery supervision uses true dynamic supervision circuitry to simulate a load condition approximately every 90 seconds to ensure that the battery is capable of handling the system load requirements on loss of primary power.
If the battery voltage drops below 18.5V it is disconnected to protect against damage from a deep discharge.
The battery charger is temperature compensating. The constant used is -0.044 V/C.
A second compartment adjacent to the power supply compartment is provided for 120 VAC terminations.
Note: Never disconnect or reconnect the batteries while AC power is off.
1.9 Enclosure
The enclosure (MR-2971/MR-2972) for MR-2900 Control Unit consists of a back box complete with power supply, inner door assembly complete with main control board, and outer door assembly. The back box and door assemblies are fabricated from 1/16 " steel. The outer door includes tempered glass window, hinge, and lock assembly. The back box provides necessary
"knock out" type openings for conduit entry. The back box dimensions are 14 2 " Wide x 27 2 "
High x 4" Deep. The outer door assembly is 16 ¾ " Wide x 21 2 " High x 1 ¼" Deep. The details and dimensions of the enclosure (MR-2973) and the MR-2900 Control Unit with integrated printer are detailed below in section 1.11.
1.10 Networking
The basic MR-2900 Control Unit can be networked to other Control Units and Annunciator Units to provide additional input circuits, relays, bells and
5
MR-2900 Installation Manual
LEDs. Up to 254 units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be networked togetherThe MR-2900 network meets UL requirements only.
The network is a Class A/Style 7 DCLR loop layout (see diagram). Each unit on the network requires the MR-2910 Network Board. Programming, servicing and testing are done at each individual unit. One Control Unit is designated, using the downloaded database, the Master
Control Unit for the network. The Master Control Unit displays the Alarm List for the entire network if configured to do so. The Alarm List is programmable such that events may be archived locally on each individual panel or the archived collectively at the Master Panel. Please see the
Programming Manual for further details.
There are four different MR-2910 boards available:
• MR-2910 Standard Version
• MR-2910-R1 Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard
• MR-2910-R2 Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232
• MR-2910-R12 RS-232 Version
Standard communications is for direct wire or fiber optic connections between units. RS-232 communications is for connection to fiber optic modems only. Refer to the MR-D1010R Installation
Instructions (579-565) for information on connecting a fiber-optic network.
1.11 Optional Integrated Printer
The MR-2900 Control Unit can be ordered integrated with the MR-2920 Printer. The MR-2920
Printer is a 20 column thermal printer. The Control Unit and Printer come in a larger cabinet
(MR-2973) with the Printer in a compartment adjacent to the Control Unit. A compartment for 10
Ah batteries is located below the Control Unit and Printer.
The printer uses thermal paper. A Paper Advance button is on the right side of the Printer
Compartment Cover. If the paper runs out, the printer stops printing. To start printing after installing paper, hold the Paper Advance button for a few seconds. Paper Out is reported to the Control
Panel.
The Terminal Board, Power Supply Board and Toroid are in the main compartment of the back box in the same locations as they are in the regular back box. The backbox dimensions for the MR-
2973 enclosure are 22 1/16” Wide x 27 ½” High x 4” Deep. The outer door dimensions are 24 5/16”
Wide x 29 High x 1 ¼” Deep.
6
MR-2900 Installation Manual
2.0 Installation
2.1 Unpacking the MR-2900
The basic MR-2900 package includes the following components:
Backbox
Outer door including:
• Lock
• Display window
• Dead front door
PRINTER
ASSEMBLY
DEAD
FRONT DOOR
TOROIDAL
TRANSFORMER
POWER
SUPPLY
Inner Door Assembly including:
• Main PCB
• Display PCB
• Operating instruction insert
• Hotkey label insert
• Wiring label
ALL CIRCUITS EXCEPT AUX. POWER
ARE SUPERVISED
OUTER DOOR WITH
GLASS PANEL (MR-2920 SHOWN)
Figure 1: Exploded View
Hardware backplate including:
• Power Supply
• Transformer
• Terminal Board
Hardware pack including:
• 8 x NAC EOL resistors
• Door keys (taped to outside of cabinet)
• Installation manual and operating manual
BACKBOX
PHONE DIALER
MODULE
ISOLATOR MODULE
INNER DOOR
AND CPU
POWER SUPPLY
COMPARTMENT COVER
MR-2900
BACKBOX
USE #10 SCREWS
FOR MOUNTING
BACKBOX TO
WALL STUDS
2.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2900
Note: All applicable codes and standards should be considered. Specific reference should be made to NFPA 72, or ULC-S524 and CEC Part 1 Section 32.
Surface and Flush Mounting
The MR-2900 can be mounted in either flush or surface mount installations. Before installing the
MR-2900 Panel the following should be considered.
1.
Determine a suitable location for mounting the FACP. Keep in mind that surrounding walls, fixtures, must not hinder access to internal components. etc.
2.
Determine the size and location of conduit entrances. The Backbox provides various knockout locations, however should it be necessary to cut additional conduit entrances the electronics must be removed to avoid metal chip contamination. Reference the “Remove
Electronics” paragraph on the following page.
Note: Removing the inner door, outer door, and plate-mounted electronics is recommended in all
MR-2900 installations.
3.
The enclosure must be mounted to provide a 135 o
(minimum) angle of rotation of the outer door to insure easy removal or assembly.
7
MR-2900 Installation Manual
4.
Mark placement of mounting hardware, drill holes and install plugs (if necessary).
5.
Secure the FACP to the wall using hardware suitable to the wall construction. Support backbox in place while inserting hardware and ensure that the backbox is level and plumb before tightening.
Note: Please see the detailed diagram (Figure 2) for location of knockout and mounting holes.
Replacing the Outer Door
1.
Unlock the Door with the key provided.
2.
Detach the (734-004) grounding strap (Qty: 2) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that are attached to the studs on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nuts
(Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.
Open the Door to approximately 135 o
and lift up to remove the outer door from the backbox, store door in a safe place.
Removing the MR-2900 Electronics
A. Removing the Dead Front
1.
Remove the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that lock down the dead front. Reattach the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.
2.
Open the dead front.
3.
Detach the (734-004) grounding strap (Qty: 1) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) that is attached to the stud on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nut (Qty: 1) to the stud to prevent it from getting lost or discarded.
4.
Open the dead front approximately 90
°
and lift up to remove the dead front, store in a safe place.
B. Removing the Inner Door
1.
Remove the four (4) flange nuts (Qty:4) and reattach to the studs after removal to prevent being lost or discarded.
2.
Detach the (734-004) ground straps (Qty: 2)
3.
Detach the two ribbon cables and remove inner door.
C. Removing the Back Plate Electronics
1.
Detach the (734-146) harness from the (565-465) Display Board.
2.
Remove the #8 flange nuts (Qty: 4) from the studs on the backbox holding onto the back plate. Remove back Plate Electronic panel and store in a safe place. Reattach the #8 flange nuts to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.
2.3 Internal Assembly
• Attach AC wiring to the AC Terminal Block. Attach green ground wire to ground screw on backplate.
Note: Do not apply power to the unit until all doors, cables and wiring are installed and inspected.
Note: This AC circuit must be a separately fused 20A dedicated circuit. It is recommended that the breaker be locked in the OFF position during installation.
• Place the batteries in the bottom right of the back box or into the battery box. DO NOT
ATTACH BATTERIES UNTIL AFTER THE AC POWER HAS BEEN TURNED ON.
• Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. Attach field wiring to the system. The section below describes how each type of circuit is to be wired. Attach conduit to the back box as required using knockouts provided. It is recommended that input circuit wiring be physically separated from output circuit wiring.
• Have the Unit inspected before applying power. Correct and re-inspect any problems found.
• Turn on the AC power to Unit. If no problems occur other than Low Battery, attach the batteries to the wires provided, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red
8
MR-2900 Installation Manual wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition remains until they are charged.
9
MR-2900 Installation Manual
14-1/2" (368 mm)
7/8" (23 mm) lip each side
21-3/4"
(552 mm)
16-1/8" (410 mm)
3" (76 mm)
3/4" (19 mm) lip top and bottom
5-1/2"
(140 mm)
26-1/2"
(673 mm)
29"
(740 mm)
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
27-1/2"
(699 mm)
8-1/2"
(216 mm)
Battery shelf
22-1/16" (560 mm)
MR2971 Back Box
7/8" (23 mm) lip each side
23-11/16" (602 mm)
EOLR
470
3" (76 mm)
VRD-EOL-470
Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring
Printer Section Control Panel Section
26-1/2"
(673 mm)
29"
(740 mm)
21-3/4"
(552 mm)
3/4" (19 mm) lip top and bottom
5-1/2"
(140 mm)
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
27-1/2"
(699 mm)
16" (406 mm)
Battery shelf
MR2973 Back Box
Figure 2: Back Box Dimension and Knockout Reference
10
MR-2900 Installation Manual
2.4 Wiring
Power Connections
The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 3.
The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series.
The Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power Supply Board, the black wire to the black
(negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal. The internal batteries are not used when an external battery box is used. The wires for connecting the power supply board to the batteries are supplied with the panel if a battery box is ordered at the same time.
Figure 3: AC Power Connection
Warning: Never connect or disconnect the batteries while the AC power is off.
Conventional Style B (Class B) Circuit
This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised Style B (Class B) initiating device circuit using conventional normally open contact devices and an end-of-line resistor. It is supported by the
MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. The end-of-line resistor is a 470
Ω
resistor (T301-9020). Devices and the end-of-line resistor are connected as illustrated in Figure 4.
Note: 2-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.
Conventional Style D (Class A) Circuit
This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style D (Class A) initiating device circuit using conventional normally open contact devices. It is supported by the
MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. Maximum wire loop lengths are shown in Table 2.
Devices are connected as illustrated in
Figure 5. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
Note: 2-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-
2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.
Smoke Detector Circuits, Style B (Class B)
This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised Class B (Style B) initiating device circuit using 2-wire smoke detectors, conventional normally open contact devices (optional) and an end-ofline device. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. The end-of-line device is
T301-9017
EOL DEVICE
Figure 6: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style B
(Class A) Wiring
11
MR-2900 Installation Manual
T301-9017 resistor. Detectors and the end-of-line device are connected as illustrated in Figure 6.
Use only smoke detectors that are listed for compatibility.
Note: This circuit is supported only by the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Input Circuit Modules. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.
Smoke Detector Circuits, Style D (Class A)
+
This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style D (Class A) initiating device circuit using 2-wire smoke detectors and conventional normally open contact devices (optional). Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. Detectors are connected as illustrated in Figure 7. Use only smoke detectors that are listed for compatibility. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
+ +
NOTE: WIRING REQUIRES
TWO CIRCUITS
Figure 7: Smoke Detector Circuit Wiring, Style
D (Class A)
Note: This circuit is supported only by the
MR-2938 Conventional "Class A" Input Circuit Module. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-
TB5.
Normally Closed Circuit
This is a 2-wire supervisory circuit. It is supported by the MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.
Devices are connected as illustrated in
Figure 8. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2.
Figure 8: Normally Closed Wiring
Notes:
• This circuit shall not be used to monitor fire alarm or supervisory initiating devices .
This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.
• All distances refer to total wire length.
Normally Open Circuit
This is a 2-wire supervisory circuit. It is supported by the MR-2908 and MR-2928 modules. This circuit is listed by UL for connection to other control equipment through less than 20 feet of conduit.
Devices are connected as illustrated in
Figure 9. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2.
Figure 9: Normally Open Wiring
Note: No fire alarm initiating devices can be connected to this class of circuit. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB1-TB5.
12
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Table 2: Maximum Wire Lengths for Conventional Input Circuits
AWG
14
16
18
22
Length
7 620m (25 000 ft)
4 846m (15 900 ft)
3048m (10 000 ft)
1524m (5 000 ft)
Addressable Style 4 (Class B) Circuit
This is a 2-wire power-limited and supervised
Style 4 (Class B) communications circuit using addressable devices. It requires the use of the
MR-2909 module. Wire capacitance and resistance affects the allowable wire length.
The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Consult Secutron's Applications
Department for specific requirements.
Maximum wire lengths are up to 10,000 ft (see
Table 3). Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 10. Use only approved devices .
Figure 10: Addressable Style 4(Class B)
Wiring
Note: T-taps may NOT be allowed by the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 and
ULC-S524. This circuit may be wired on any input circuit from 9-24 on the MR-2900 terminal boards. These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB2-TB5.
Addressable Style 6 (Class A) Circuit
This is a 4-wire power-limited and supervised Style
6 (Class A) communications circuit using addressable devices. It requires the use of the
MR-2919 module. Maximum wire loop lengths are up to 10 000 ft (see Table 3). The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Wire capacitance and resistance affects the allowable wire length.
Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements. Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 11. Use only approved devices.
Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
Figure 11: Addressable Style 6 (Class A)
Wiring
Notes:
• All distances refer to total wire length.
• This circuit may be wired on any input circuit from 9-24 on the MR-2900 terminal boards.
These circuits are located on terminal blocks TB2-TB5.
Table 3: Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits
Gauge
18
16
Belden No.
9571
9572
Distance
975m (3 200 ft)
1 400m (4 600 ft)
13
MR-2900 Installation Manual
14
12
9580
9582
2 435m (8 000 ft)
3 045m (10 000 ft)
Addressable Modules
The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown on the next page in Figures 12 -
16.
Figure 12: MRI-M500M Wiring
14
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Figure 13: MRI-M501 Wiring
S
Figure 14: MRI-M502M Wiring
Figure 15: MRI-M500S Wiring for Signalling Circuits
Figure 16: MRI-M500R Wiring for Form C Relay Use
15
MR-2900 Installation Manual
16
Figure 17: MRI-M500X Wiring
Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit
This is a 2-wire Style Y (Class B) power-limited and supervised signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 k end-ofline resister are connected as illustrated in
Figure 18. Maximum wire lengths are shown in
Table 4. Use only approved devices.
Notes:
Figure 18: Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit
Wiring
1.
This bell circuit is supported by the
MR-2926 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 8 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2926 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.
2.
The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1A current limit momentarily.
3.
In order to meet NFPA 72 requirements in section 1-5.4.7 for distinctive signals, you must mount a separate audible device in the same room as the fire alarm control panel. Audible indicating appliance circuit shall be run in conduit and loaded no more than 15ft from the fire alarm control unit.
Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit
This is a 4-wire Style Z (Class A) power-limited and supervised signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 19. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 4. This is for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel. Use only approved devices. Return wiring must be in a separate conduit.
Notes:
Figure 19: Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit
Wiring
1.
This bell circuit is supported by the MR-2925 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2925 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.
MR-2900 Installation Manual
2.
The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1.5A current limit momentarily.
3.
In order to meet NFPA 72 requirements in section 1-5.4.7 for distinctive signals, you must mount a separate audible device in the same room as the fire alarm control panel. Audible indicating appliance circuit shall be run in conduit and loaded no more than 15ft from the fire alarm control unit.
“Class B” Releasing Circuit
This is a 2-wire Class B Releasing circuit.
Polarized devices and the 10 k end-of-line resister are connected as illustrated in Figure 20.
Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 4. This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to
1.0 A. Use only approved devices. The wiring is power-limited and supervised.
Note: This releasing circuit is supported by the
MR-2926 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to
Figure 20: Class B Releasing
Circuit Wiring any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2926 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.
"Class A” Releasing Circuit
Note: All distances refer to total wire length.
This is a 4-wire Class A releasing circuit.
Polarized devices are connected as illustrated in
Figure 21. Maximum wire lengths are shown in
Table 4. This is for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest device and back to the panel.
This circuit is rated for 24 VDC and is current limited to 1.0 A. Use only approved devices.
Return wiring must be in a separate conduit. The wiring is power-limited and supervised.
Figure 21: Class A Releasing Circuit Wiring
Note: This releasing circuit is supported by the
MR-2925 Terminal Board only. It may be wired to any of the 4 Bell Circuits located on the MR-2925 terminal board, found on terminal blocks TB6 and TB7.
Table 4: Maximum Wire Lengths for Bell Circuits
12 AWG
14 AWG
16 AWG
250 mA
1219m (4000 ft)
731m (2400 ft)
457m (1500 ft)
500 mA
609m (2000 ft)
365m (1200 ft)
228m (750 ft)
750 mA
396m (1300 ft)
243m (800 ft)
152m (500 ft)
1.0 A
304m (1000 ft)
182m (600 ft)
114m (375 ft)
17
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Relay Connections
Unused relays are left unconnected. General Purpose Relays and
System Relays operate identically and are wired the same (see
Figure 22).
All relay wiring is supervised. The general purpose relays (Function
Relays 1-4) have a power factor of .35, power-limited at .6A @
30VAC/2.0A @ 30VDC and are located on terminal blocks TB7 and
TB8 on the MR-2900 terminal board. The Alarm, Supervisory, and
Trouble relays have a power factor of .35, power-limited at .5A @
30VAC/1.0A @ 24VDC and are located on terminal blocks TB8 and
TB9 on the MR-2900 terminal board.
Figure 22: Relay
Auxiliary Power Circuits
The auxiliary power circuits provide 24 VDC for external devices. The polarity of the circuits is shown in Figure 23. The Control Unit does not interrupt this circuit. For the wiring to be powerlimited and supervised an end-of-line relay (Part number 430-573) must be used. The relay is a
24VDC coil with 3A contacts.
TB6
Figure 23: Auxiliary Power Connections
Inner Door Ribbon Cables
Two ribbon cables connect the Terminal Board to the Main Circuit Board. These cables are on the hinged side of the Inner Door and are long enough that the Inner Door can be fully opened without removing the cables. Ensure that the cables are not twisted and that the cable locks are fully engaged.
These cables must be attached before the unit is powered (see Figure 24). Remove any foam on the ribbon cables after installation.
Note: Inserting or removing the ribbon cables while the unit is powered can result in damage to the unit.
Figure 24: Ribbon Cable Installation
Standard Network Wiring
Standard Network wiring uses a twisted pair of wires between each panel (see Figure 25). The
COM1 of each Unit is connected to the COM2 of the next Unit. MR-2944, MR-2934 and MR-2924
Annunciator Units are connected the same as the
Control Unit. Wiring is not polarity sensitive.
Network wiring is power-limited and supervised.
TB9
Figure 25: Standard Network Wiring
Notes:
1.
Ensure that only one COM2 is connected to each COM1. If two or more are connected, the network segment does not work.
2.
The following table shows the maximum wiring capacitance for the various baud rates supported by the Network using the standardMR-2910. The maximum allowable line resistance is 680 ohms.
18
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Table 5: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates
Baud Rate
9600
4800
2400
1200
Maximum Capacitance
100 nF
220 nF
470 nF
680 nF
Maximum Network Nodes
254
254
254
200
RS-232 Network Wiring
RS-232 Network wiring uses three (3) wires between each panel
(see Figure 26). The COM1 of each Unit is connected to the
COM2 of the next Unit. MR-2944, MR-2934 and MR-2924
Annunciator Units are connected the same as the Control Unit.
Wiring is polarity sensitive.
Notes:
1.
Ensure that only one COM 2 is connected to each COM
1. If two or more are connected, the network segment does not work.
2.
The wire length limit for RS-232 is 20 feet (6m) in conduit, in the same room. For systems using modems, this is the maximum distance between the panel and the modem.
TB9
TB9
MR-D1010R Wiring
Refer to the MR-D1010R Fiber Optic Modem Installation
Instructions (579-565).
Figure 26: RS-232 Network
Wiring
MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR,MR295104 and MR295101 Wiring
The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators, the MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity module and the MR295101MR Dialer are connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for power and 2 for communications. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. An example of the wiring is shown in Figure 27. Up to eight of each type of annunciator and either one dialer or one reverse polarity module can be connected to the MR-2900. If more than one
MR-2614 is used, the 3.9k
Ω
resistor across the MR-2614 terminals should be removed from all but the last MR-2614. The MR-2900 panel requires that the MR-2109-3 communications board be installed. The
Figure 27: MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR, and MR295102 Wiring maximum length of communications wiring is 900m (3000 ft) using 22 AWG. The maximum length of power wiring is 300m (1000 ft) using 18 AWG.
19
MR-2900 Installation Manual
MR-2801-MR and MR295101 Wiring
If the MR295104-MR Isolator is not used, then the MR-2801-MR or MR295101 are wired as shown.
RED
MR-2900
TB5
AUX 1 or
AUX 2
TB9
COMLINK3
TXD
RXD
WHITE
STRIPED
BLACK
CABLE
PROVIDED
CON1
MR-2801 or
MR-295101
Figure 28: MR-2801-MR and
MR295101 Wiring
Evax System Wiring
MR2900 BACKPLATE
MV 2700 M
CONDUIT
20’ MAX
MR2925 OR MR2926
TERMINAL BOARD
TX
RX
GND
TS3
20
COMLINK 3
TX
RX
TB9 GND
**The MR-2900 panel requires the use of the MR-2109-4 board.
Notes:
• For all EVAX installations, the maximum wiring distance from the FACP to the HMX panel is 20 feet in conduit. The two panels must be in the same room.
• MV-2700M and MV-2700D are not ULC listed.
• MV-2700M must be connected to an MV-2700D. The MV-2700M (M = Master) generates the audio signals. The MV-2700D (D = Distributed) distributes the audio signal via NACs.
• For information on connecting an MV-2700M to an MV-2700D, refer to those modules installation instructions.
MR-2900 Installation Manual
3.0 Technical Specifications
Power
Line
Standby
Alarm
Brown Out Voltage
Battery Charger
Battery Type
120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal)
24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) plus Bell/Releasing Circuits
93 VAC (typical) normal standby/95 VAC (typical) alarm
2.3 A max. charging current
Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah)
Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (24)
Conventional Addressable
Voltage
Ripple Voltage
Supervisory Current
Contact Devices
Smoke Detectors
Alarm Current
Contact Devices
Smoke Detectors
Max. No. of Devices
Compatible Devices
24 VDC
2 V p-p
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
90 mA
25 (Smoke Detectors)
MR Series
24 VDC
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
99 Detectors / 99 Modules
MR Series
Note: Consult Appendix C UL Listed Compatible Devices
End of Line Device
Contact Circuit 470
Ω
Resistor
(T301-9020)
N.A.
Smoke Detectors
Total Line Resistance
Total Line Capacitance
Total Line Length
T-Tapping
T301-9017
200
100 F
See Table 2
No
N.A.
40
0.5 F
See Table 3
Class B (Style 4) Only
Bell (Notification Appliance) / Releaser Circuits
Number & Type 8 Class B, NFPA Style Y/4 Class A, NFPA Style Z
Supervisory Current 1.0 mA, power limited
Alarm Current 1.5 A, power limited (NAC/1.0 A, power limited, Releasing)
Voltage 24 VDC, nominal, full wave rectified, unfiltered
End of Line Device Class B (Style Y) only: 10 K
Ω
Resistor, T301-9008
21
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Note: Consult Appendix C UL Listed Compatible Devices
System Relays (3)
Type
Rating
Form C, one each for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble
0.5 A @ 30VAC (resistive) / 1.0A @ 24VDC
Note:
These relays are not listed by UL for use for connection to equipment outside the same room as the Control Panel.
General Purpose Relays (4)
Type Form C
Rating 0.6A @ 30VAC (resistive) / 2.0A @ 30VDC
Auxiliary Power Outputs (2)
Voltage 24 VDC
Ripple Voltage 2 Vrms, maximum
Current 135 mA per circuit, power limited
Note: Consult Appendix C UL Listed Compatible Devices
MR-2910 Network Communication Boards
MR-2910 Network Communication Module, Both Ports Standard
MR-2910-R1 Network Communication Module, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard
MR-2910-R2 Network Communication Module, Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232
MR-2910-R12 Network Communication Module, Both Ports RS-232
Wire Type
Gauge
Distance
Application
Standard
Twisted Pair
18-22 AWG
*10 km (apr. 6 miles)
Direct Wire & Fiber
Modems
RS-232
Twisted Pair
18-22 AWG
Under 6m (20 ft)
Fiber Modems (typical)
*Using 22 AWG wire.
MR-2109-x Communication Boards
22
Battery Boxes
MR-2996
MR-2997
MR-2998
MR-2999
Model
10 Ah
24 Ah
38 Ah
48 Ah
Capacity Size
15" x 5 d " x 4 3 "
21" x 9" x 7"
21" x 9" x 7"
21" x 9" x 7"
MR-2900 Installation Manual
23
MR-2900 Installation Manual
4.0 Parts List
Model
Basic Control Unit
MR-2900
Optional Modules
MR-2908
MR-2918
MR-2928
MR-2938
MR-2909HS-3039
MR-2919
MR-2910
MR-2910-R1
MR-2910-R2
MR-2910-R12
MR-2109-3
MR-D1010R1
MR-D1010R2
Annunciators
MR-2944
MR-2944LCD
MR-2614
MR-2614EH
MR-2644
MR-2915
MR-2902
MR-2622
MR-2109-3
Accessories
MHI
T301-9020
T301-9008
T301-9021
T301-9017
Replacement Modules
MR-2931
MR-2902
Description
Basic Control Unit (with or without MR-2920 strip printer)
Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 10 mA, contact circuits only
Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 80 mA, smoke circuits only
Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, Software Selectable for 10 or 80 mA, smoke and contact circuits
Conventional Input Circuit Module, 4 Circuit, "Class A", 80 mA, smoke and contact circuits
Addressable Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, "Class B"
Addressable Input Circuit Module, 4 Circuit, "Class A"
Network Communication Module, Both Ports Standard
Network Communication Module, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard
Network Communication Module, Port 1 Standard, Port 2 RS-232
Network Communication Module, Both Ports RS-232
Driver for connection to MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and
Dialer
Fiber Optic Module, One Modem
Fiber Optic Module, Two Modem
Annunciator Driver
Annunciator Driver c/w 80 Character LCD
LED Annunciator
Enhanced LED Annunciator
LCD Annunciator
LED Driver for Annunciators
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 24 LEDs
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 8 LEDs
Port 3 Communications Board for connection to MR-2614, MR-
2644, MR-2801-MR and Dialer
Modul-R Human Interface database editor
470
Ω
End-of-Line Resistor for conventional contact circuits
10k
Ω
End-of-Line Resistor for bell circuits
Plate for End-of-Line Resistor
End-of-Line Device for conventional smoke circuits
Motherboard, included with Inner Door Assembly
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 24 LEDs
24
MR-2905
MR-2926
Model
MR-2925
MR-2927
Hardware
MR-2970
MR-2971
MR-2972
MR-2972F
MR-2973
MR-2977
MR-2978
MR-2979
MR-2994
MR-2995
MR-2996
MR-2997
MR-2998
MR-2999
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Description
Power Supply, included with Back Box for Basic System
Terminal Board, c/w Class B Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927
Board
Terminal Board, c/w Class A Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927
Board
Terminal Board Plug-in Board for MR-2926 and MR-2925
Inner Door Assembly for Basic System, c/w MR-2921, MR-2902 &
Cables
Back Box, complete with power supply
Front Door Assembly for Basic System
Front Door Assembly for Basic System, French
Back Box for MR-2900 System, complete with power supply and printer
Battery Box for 7.0 and 10 Ah batteries c/w cables, 15" x 5 d" x 4 3"
Battery Box for 24 to 48 Ah batteries c/w cables, 21" x 9" x 7"
Battery Box for 24 to 48 Ah batteries c/w V/A meter and cables
7.0 Ah Battery Pack
4.0 Ah Battery Pack
10 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 15" x 5 d" x 4 3"
24 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 21" x 9" x 7"
38 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 21" x 9" x 7"
48 Ah Battery Pack c/w Battery Box, 21" x 9" x 7"
25
MR-2900 Installation Manual
5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation
5.1 General
Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10
Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it does deliver 2 A (500 mA) for 20 hours.
A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain.
This protection necessitates certain over sizing.
Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).
Note: The MR-2900 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.
The standard battery options available for the MR-2900 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, c) 10 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, f) 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed).
The components of the MR-2900 Control Panel and other devices have the following typical current draws:
MR-2900 92 mA + 5 mA per LED (includes MR-2931,
MR-2905 and MR-2902 boards)
MR-2910
MR-2908
MR-2918
MR-2928
MR-2938
MR-2909
MR-2919
MR-2614
50 mA
14 mA
14 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm
14 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm
18 mA + 87 mA per circuit in alarm
50 mA
50 mA
20 mA
MR-2622
MR-2644
5 mA
30 mA
MR-2801-MR 20 mA stand by in municipal box mode 315 mA in alarm in reverse polarity mode 35 mA in alarm (+ load - 65mA for 3 circuits)
Dialer 40 mA stand by
60 mA in alarm
MR-2109-3
MR-2944LC
MR-2915
8 mA
65 mA
1 mA
MR-2920 125 mA
(+ 675 mA when printing)
MR-D1010R1 75mA
MR-D1010R2 150mA
MR-2690
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
10 mA
300 A
200 A
300 A
MRI-2551
MRI-3251
MRI-5551
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
200 A
300 A
200 A
300 A
300 A
MRI-M502M
MRI-M500C
MRI-M500X
200 A
300 A
450 A
26
MR-2900 Installation Manual
5.2 Sample Calculation
The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be:
Board/Device
Basic MR-2900 Panel
MR-2908 Input Module
MR-2909 Input Module
MR-2910 Network Board
MRI-1251 Smoke Detector
MRI-5551 Heat Detector
MRI-500M Monitor Module
MRI-500C Control Module
Device
MRA-MBG6 Bell
MRL-WST Strobe
Draw (mA)
0.30
0.20
0.30
0.20
74
14
50
30
Draw (mA)
22
50
Quantity
1
1
1
1
80
80
20
33
Sub-Total:
Quantity
73
21
Sub-Total:
Total:
24 hour (Ah)
0.58
0.38
0.15
0.16
5.21
1.78
0.34
1.20
0.72
5 min (Ah)
0.14
0.09
0.23
5.44
27
MR-2900 Installation Manual
6.0 Appendix B: ULC Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors
The following conventional smoke detectors are ULC listed for compatibility with the MR-2900
Control Panel using Conventional Circuit Input Modules:
Company
System Sensor
Hochiki
Cerberus Pyrotronics
Edwards
Model
1400
1451
2400
2400TH
2451
2451TH
Photoelectric
Ionization
DI-3C
DI-4
DI-4B
PEC-3
6249
6250C
6270C
73494 (Mirtone)
28
MR-2900 Installation Manual
7.0 Appendix C: UL Listed Compatible Devices
7.1 Smoke Detectors A
The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control
Panel using the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Conventional Input Circuit Modules (with compatibility identifiers MR-2918 and MR-2928, respectively). Up to 5
µ
A of smoke detector normal standby load may be connected to each MR-2918 and MR-2928 conventional initiating device circuit.
Manufacturer
Smoke
Detector
Model
Base
Identifier
Model
Standby
Identifier
System Sensor
Apollo
1400
1451
1451
2300T
2300TB
2400
2400TH
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N/A
B401
B401B
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
A
A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2451
2451
2451
2451TH
A
A
A
A
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
A
A
A
A
2451TH A B401B A
55000-250 55000-250 45681-200 45681-200
55000-250 55000-250 45681-230 45681-230
55000-250 55000-250 45681-231 45681-231
55000-350 55000-350 45681-200 45681-200
55000-350 55000-350 45681-230 45681-230
55000-350 55000-350 45681-231 45681-231
DI-3C Cerebrus
Pyrotronics DI-4
DI-4B
PEC-3
Detection Systems DS200 A MB200-2W A
Edwards
DS200HD
6250B
6270B
A
001
001
MB200-2W
6251B
6251B
A
001
001
Current
80
µ
A
80
µ
A
30
µ
A
50
µΑ
100
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
59
µ
A
80
µ
A
80
µ
A
110
µ
A
130
µ
A
130
µ
A
29
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Manufacturer
Fenwal
Smoke
Detector
Model
Base
Identifier
CPD-7023 I3FE1
CPD-7023 I3FE1
CPD-7023 I3FE1
CPD-7023 I3FE1
Model
CPD-001
CPD-002
CPD-003
CPD-005
Standby
Identifier
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
CPD-7051
PSD-7134
PSD-7134
PSD-7134
PSD-7134
PSD-7135
PSD-7135
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7155
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
PSD-7156
I3FE1
I3FE1
I3FE1
I3FE1
I3FE1
I3FE1
I3FE1
P14FE1
P14FE1
P14FE1
P14FE1
P15FE1
PSD-7135 P15FE1
PSD-7135 P15FE1
P15FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P55FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
P56FE1
2-Wire
2WRLT
2WRB
CPD-001*
CPD-002*
CPD-003*
CPD-005*
CPD-001
CPD-002
CPD-003
CPD-005
CPD-001
CPD-002
CPD-003
CPD-005
2-Wire
2WRLT
2WRB
CPD-001*
CPD-002*
CPD-003*
CPD-005*
2-Wire
2WRLT
2WRB
CPD-001*
CPD-002*
CPD-003*
CPD-005*
FE51A
FE52A
FE53A
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
FE51A
FE52A
FE53A
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
FE51A
FE52A
FE53A
FE01A
FE02A
FE03A
FE05A
* - Requires Fenwal MA-001 adapter with compatibility identifier MAFE.
Current
80
µ
A
80
µ
A
80
µ
A
80
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
60
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
70
µ
A
30
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Manufacturer
Gentex
Hochiki
Smoke
Detector
Model
224
224-25
SIF-24F
SIF-24F
Base
Identifier
-1
-1
HD-2
HD-2
Model
Standby
Identifier
N/A
N/A
HS-221D
N/A
N/A
HB-4
YBA-M221 HB-4
SIH-24F
SIH-24F
SLK-24F
SLK-24F
SLK-24FH
SLK-24FH
HD-3
HD-3
HD-3
HD-3
HD-3
HD-3
HS-221D
YBA-M221
HS-221D
YBA-M221
HS-221D
YBA-M221
HB-4
HB-4
HB-4
HB-4
HB-4
HB-4
Current
102
µ
A
102
µ
A
130
µ
A
130
µ
A
142
µ
A
142
µ
A
142
µ
A
142
µ
A
31
MR-2900 Installation Manual
7.2 Smoke Detectors B
The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control
Panel using the MR-2938 Conventional Input Circuit Module with compatibility identifier as MR-
2938. Up to 2.50 mA of smoke detector normal standby load may be connected to each MR-2938 conventional initiating device circuit.
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
Smoke
Detector
Model
1400
1451
1451
Base
Identifier
A
A
A
Model
N/A
B401
B401B
Standby
Identifier
N/A
A
A
Current
100
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
2400
2400TH
2451
2451
2451
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
2451TH
1451
2451
2451TH
4451TH
4451TH
1151
1151
2151
2151
2151
2151
5451
5451
2100AT
2100TR
2W-B
2WT-B
A
A
A
A
A
N/A
N/A
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401BH
B401BH
B401BH
B401
B401B
B401BH
B116LP
B401
B401BH
B110LP
B116LP
B401
B401BH
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N/A
N/A
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
120
µ
A
100
µ
A
100
µ
A
100
µ
A
100
µ
A
32
MR-2900 Installation Manual
7.3 Notification Appliances
The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the
MR-2900 Control Units.
Model Type
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
Wheelock
MT-12/24-R
MT-24-WH-VN-W
MT-24-WM-VF-R
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
-
78
96
EH-DL1-R
EH-EL1-R
EHS-DL1-W-VF-R
EHS-EL1-W-VF-R
Electronic Horn
Electronic Horn
17
17
Electronic Strobe Horn, Single Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Single Input
35 (combined)
35 (combined)
-
-
EH-DL1-WS-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WS-24-VF-R
EH-DL1-WH-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WH-24-VF-R
EH-DL1-WM-24-VF-R
EH-EL1-WM-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-R
AES-EL1-R
AES-DL1-WS-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WS-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-WH-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WH-24-VF-R
AES-DL1-WM-24-VF-R
AES-EL1-WM-24-VF-R
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
Electronic Strobe Horn, Dual Input
17
17
17
17
17
17
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
50 (Hi), 25 (Lo)
75
75
88
88
-
-
25
25
25
25
75
75
88
88
33
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
WST-24-FR
WS1T-24-FR
WS3T-24-FR
WHT-24-FR
WH1T-24-FR
WH3T-24-FR
WMT-24-FR
WM1T-24-FR
WM3T-24-FR
VLPM-24-W-VF-R
34T-24-R
7001T-24-W-FR
7002T-24-W-FR
V7001T-24-W-FR
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Type
MIZ-24-R
MIZ-24-W
MIZ-24-WS-VF-R
MIZ-24-WS-VF-W
MIZ-24-WH-VF-R
MIZ-24-WM-VF-W
Mini-Horn
Mini-Horn
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
Mini-Horn w/ Strobe
CH-BF1-R
CH-BF1-WS-24-HF-R
CH-CF1-W
CH-CF1-WS-24-CF-W
CH-DF1-R
CH-DF1-WS-24-VF-R
Chime
Strobe Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
34
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
75
75
88
88
25
25
25
75
88
88
63
63 (combined)
63 (combined)
63 (combined)
-
20
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
40 (combined)
40 (combined)
90 (combined)
103 (combined)
-
-
-
25
-
25
-
25
Model
CH-DF1-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Chime
Type
MB-G6-24-R
MB-G10-24-R
MBS-G6-24-W-HF-R
MBS-G10-24-W-HF-R
Motorized Bell, 6 in.
Motorized Bell, 10 in.
Motorized Strobe Bell, 6 in.
Motorized Strobe Bell, 10 in.
46T-G4-24-R
46T-G6-24-R
46T-G10-24-R
Vibrating Bell, 4 in.
Vibrating Bell, 6 in.
Vibrating Bell, 10 in.
46T-G6-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.
46T-G10-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in.
46T-G6-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in.
46T-G10-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in.
E-7025-WS-24-VF-R
E-7025-WS-24-VF-W
E-7070-WS-24-VF-R
E-7070-WS-24-VF-W
E-9025-WS-24-CF-W
E-9070-WS-24-CF-W
E-7025-WH-24-VF-R
E-7025-WH-24-VF-W
E-7070-WH-24-VF-R
E-7070-WH-24-VF-W
E-9025-WH-24-CF-W
E-9070-WH-24-CF-W
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
MR-2900 Installation Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible
20
Visual
88
30
30
55 (combined)
55 (combined)
-
-
75
75
75
75
75
75
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
75
75
-
-
-
35
MR-2900 Installation Manual
CSX10-24DC-R
CSXG10-24DC-R
AH-24
AH-24WP
AS-2415W
AS-241575W
AS-2430W
AS-2475W
AS-24110W
AS-2415C
AS-2430C
AS-2475C
AS-24100C
Model
E-7025-WM-24-VF-R
E-7025-WM-24-VF-W
E-7070-WM-24-VF-R
E-7070-WM-24-VF-W
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
ET-1010-WS-24-HF-R
ET-1070-WS-24-VF-R
ET-1080-WS-24-VF-R
ET-1090-WS-24-CF-W
ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R
ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W
ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R
ET-1080-WM-24-VF-W
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Type
Explosion-Proof Bell, Indoor
Explosion-Proof Bell, Outdoor
Mini Horn, indoor
Mini Horn, indoor/outdoor
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
Audible Strobe
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
25
25
25
25
500
500
41
41
92 (combined)
107 (combined)
126 (combined)
186 (combined)
213 (combined)
98 (combined)
133 (combined)
252 (combined)
283 (combined)
-
-
-
-
36
Model
MT-24-LS
MT-24-LSM
MT-24-MS
MT-24-IS
MT-24-SL
MT-24-SLM
MT4-24-LS
MT4-24-LSM
MT4 -24- MS
MT4-24-IS
MT4-24-SL
MT4-24-SLM
AMT-12/24
AMT4-l2/24
NH-12/24
NS-2415W
NS-241575W
NS-2430W
NS-2475W
NS-24110W
NS4-2415W
NS4-241575W
NS4-2430W
NS4-2475W
NS4-24110W
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Type
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Strobe Horn
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Mini Horn
Mini Horn
28 -
76 (combined)
90 (combined)
102 (combined)
163 (combined)
195 (combined)
28
28
28
28
28
57
72
85
140
169
48
48
48
48
128 (combined)
163 (combined)
183 (combined)
273 (combined)
144 (combined)
186 (combined)
48
48
80
115
135
225
96
138
48
48
-
-
37
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
CH70-24
CH90-24
CH70-2415W
CH70-243OW
CH70-2475W
CH70-24110W
CH90-2415W
CH90-2430W
CH90-2475W
CH90-24110W
CH70-2415C
CH70-2430C
AMT-24-LS
AMT-24-LSM
AMT-24-MS
AMT-24-IS
AMT-24-SL
AMT-24-SLM
AMT4-24-LS
AMT4-24-LSM
AMT4-24-MS
AMT4-24-IS
AMT4-24-SL
AMT4-24-SLM
38
Type
Chime
Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
48
48
48
48
48
48
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
Multitone Strobe Signal, sync
48
48
48
48
48
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
80
115
135
225
96
138
80
115
135
225
96
138
68
85
140
169
70
107
85
140
169
53
-
-
53
68
Model
CH70-2475C
CH70-24100C
CH90-2415C
CH90-2430C
CH90-2475C
CH90-24100C
RSS-24l5W
RSS-241575W
RSS-243OW
RSS-2475W
RSS-24110W
RSSP-24110W
RSSP-241575W
RSSP-2430W
RSSP-2475W
RSSP-24110W
RSS-2415C
RSS-243OC
RSS-2475C
RSS-24100C
RSSP-2415C
RSSP-2430C
RSSP-2475C
RSSP-24100C
ET70-2415W
ET70-241575W
ET70-2430W
Type
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe Chime
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe, retrofit plate
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
MR-2900 Installation Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
20
20
20
20
20
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
215
250
70
107
215
250
53
68
85
215
250
70
107
140
169
70
107
215
250
169
53
68
85
53
68
85
140
39
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
ET70 -2475W
ET70-24110W
ET90-2415W
ET90-24 30W
ET90-2475W
ET90-24110W
ET90-2415C
ET90-2430C
ET90-2475C
ET90-24100C
ET-1080- LS -24
ET-1080-LSM-24
ET-1080- MS -24
ET-1080-IS-24
ET-1080-SL-24
ET-1081- LS-24
ET-1081- LSM -24
ET-1081- MS -24
ET-1081- IS -24
ET-1081-SL-24
Type
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, non sync
Strobe Speaker, sync
E70-2415W
E70-2430W
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
40
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
140
169
53
68
85
96
138
80
115
80
115
135
225
135
225
96
138
169
70
107
215
250
53
68
85
140
Model
E70-2475W
E70-24110W
E70 -2415C
E70 -2430C
E70-2475C
E70 -24100C
E90 -2415W
E90 -241575W
E90 -2430W
E90 -2475W
E90-24110W
E90 -2415C
E90 -2430C
E90 -2475C
E90 -24100C
SM -12/24
DSM -12/24
Gentex
GEH24
GES24-15
GES24-15/75
GES24-30
GES24-60
GES24-75
GES24-110
GEC24-15
GEC24-15/75
Type
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe Speaker
Strobe speaker
Strobe Speaker
Sync Module
Dual Sync Module
MR-2900 Installation Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
85
140
169
70
107
215
250
215
250
53
68
140
169
70
107
25 (combined)
38 (combined)
Commander2 Horn
Commander2 Strobe 15 cd
Commander2 Strobe 15/75cd
Commander2 Strobe 30 cd
Commander2 Strobe 60 cd
Commander2 Strobe 75 cd
Commander2 Strobe 110 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
-
-
21
-
-
-
-
67 (combined)
78 (combined)
-
46
57
57
82
89
102
41
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
GEC24-30
GEC24-60
GEC24-75
GEC24-110
GMH24
GMS24-15
GMS24-15/75W
GMS24-15/75C
GMS24-15/75Z
GMS24-30
GMS24-30/75
GMS24-60
GMS24-110
WGMS-4-75
GX90-4
GX90S-4-15
GX90S-4-15/75W
GX90S-4-15/75C
GX90S-4-15/75Z
GX90S-4-30
GX90S-4-30/75
GX90S-4-60
GX90S-4-110
GXS-4-15
GXS-4-15/75-W
Type
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 75 cd
Commander2 Horn/Strobe 110 cd
Mechanical Horn
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 60 Cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 110 Cd
Mechanical Horn/Strobe 75cd
Weather
Piezo Horn 24 Vdc
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Wall
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Ceiling
Piezo Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd Sync
Piezo Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Piezo Horn/Strobe 110 cd
15
93 (combined)
108 (combined)
130 (combined)
145 (combined)
108 (combined)
157 (combined)
130 (combined)
235 (combined)
-
Strobe 15 Cd
Strobe 15/75 Cd Wall
-
-
78
93
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Visual Audible
78 (combined)
103 (combined)
110 (combined)
123 (combined)
38
116 (combined)
131 (combined)
153 (combined)
168 (combined)
131 (combined)
180 (combined)
153 (combined)
258 (combined)
143 (combined)
-
42
Model
GXS-4-15/75-C
GXS-4-15/75-Z
GXS-4-30
GXS-4-30/75
GXS-4-60
GXS-4-110
HG124
SHG24-15
SHG24-15/75-W
SHG24-15/75-C
SHG24-15/75-Z
SHG24-30
SHG24-30/75
SHG24-60
SHG24-110
SPKE4-15
SPKE8-15
SPKE4-15/75-W
SPKE8-15/75-W
SPKE4-15/75-C
SPKE8-15/75-C
SPKE4-15/75-Z
SPKE8-15/75-Z
SPKE4-30
SPKE8-30
SPKE4-30/75
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Type
Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling
Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync
Strobe 30 Cd
Strobe 30/75 Cd
Strobe 60 Cd
Strobe 110 Cd
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
115
130
93
142
115
220
Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 30/75 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Electronic Horn/Strobe 110 cd
30
108 (combined)
123 (combined)
145 (combined)
160 (combined)
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Wall
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Wall
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Ceiling
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Ceiling
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 15/75 cd Sync
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 15/75 cd Sync
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 30 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 30 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 30/75 cd
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
123 (combined)
172 (combined)
145 (combined)
250 (combined)
-
115
115
130
130
78
78
93
93
93
93
142
43
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Potter
PBD-246
PBD-248
PBD-2410
Space Age
SSU7620
SSU7625
SSU7630
SSU7521
Model
SPKE8-30/75
SPKE4-60
SPKE8-60
SPKE4-110
SPKE8-110
ST24-15
ST24-15/75
ST24-30
ST24-60
ST24-75
ST24-110
HS24-15
HS24-15/75
HS24-30
HS24-60
HS24-75
HS24-110
44
Type
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 30/75 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 60 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 60 cd
Speaker/Strobe 4@ 110 cd
Speaker/Strobe 8@ 110 cd
-
-
-
-
-
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
142
115
115
220
220
Commander Strobe 15 cd
Commander Strobe 15/75 cd
Commander Strobe 30 cd
Commander Strobe 60 cd
Commander Strobe 75 cd
Commander Strobe 110 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 15 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 30 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 60 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 75 cd
Commander Horn/Strobe 110 cd
-
-
-
-
-
-
75 (combined)
87 (combined)
87 (combined)
114 (combined)
116 (combined)
140 (combined)
45
57
57
84
86
110
Vibrating Bell
Vibrating Bell
Vibrating Bell
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
60
60
60
-
-
-
93 (combined)
-
-
-
80
130
160
Model
SSU7522
SSU7526
SSU7527
SSU7531
SSU7532
System Sensor
P2415 (R) (W)
P241575 (R) (W)
P2475 (R) (W)
P24110 (R) (W)
P241575K
P2475K
P24110K
P241575F
S2415 (R) (W)
S241575 (R) (W)
S2475 (R) (W)
S24110 (R) (W)
S241575K
S2475K
S24110K
S241575F
H12/24
H12/24K (R) (W)
HC12/24
HC12/24K
MDL
SSM24-6
Speaker/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Speaker/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Speaker/Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn
Horn
Horn
Horn
Sync Module
Bell
Type
MR-2900 Installation Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible
-
143 (combined)
-
173 (combined)
-
Visual
80
130
160
64
159
191
64
60
64
159
191
-
-
-
-
64
159
191
64
60
64
159
191
15 (combined)
30 -
45
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
SSM24-8
SSM24-10
MA12/24D
SS24LO
SS24LOC
SS24M
SS24MC
SS24LOLA
MASS24LO
MASS24LOC
MASS24LOLA
MASS24M
MASS24MC
PA400R (R) (W) (B)
PA400RF (R) (W)
PS24LO (R) (W) (B)
Sounder
Sounder add on Strobe
SS2415ADA (R) (B)
SS241575ADA (R) (B)
SS2475ADA (R) (B)
SS24110ADA (R) (B)
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
MASS2415ADA (R) (B) Horn/Strobe
MASS241575ADA (R) (B) Horn/Strobe
MASS2475ADA (R) (B)
MASS24110ADA (R) (B)
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
SS2415ADAS
SS241575ADAS
Strobe
Strobe
Type
Bell
Bell
Electronic Sounder
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
Electronic Sounder/Strobe
46
-
-
59
59
59
59
-
-
-
-
12
12
-
-
-
59
59
-
-
59
-
59
59
59
30
30
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible
-
-
Visual
125
80
45
45
-
45
45
125
80
125
125
-
-
25
90
120
200
245
90
120
200
245
125
180
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Model
MASS2415ADAS
MASS241575ADAS
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Type
59
59
Input Current at 24 VDC
(in mA)
Audible Visual
125
180
RP2415ADA
RP241575ADA
RP2475ADA
RP24110ADA
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
-
-
-
-
90
120
200
245
7.4 Auxiliary Power Devices
The following Listed devices are compatible with the output of the 24 VDC auxiliary power circuits of the MR-2900. Each circuit may be loaded to a maximum of 150 mA in standby or alarm conditions.
Manufacturer Model Type
Input Current at
24 VDC
Air Products PAM-4 Relay Module
47
MR-2900 Installation Manual
7.5 Analog Addressable Devices
The following Listed analog addressable smoke detectors, detector bases, monitor modules, control modules and fault isolator modules are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2909 and/or MR-2919 Addressable Input Circuit Modules. Up to 99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules may be connected to each addressable communications circuit. Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application.
Manufacturer
Secutron
Model
MRI-1251B
MRI-2251B
Type
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
MRI-2251TMB Acclimate Photoelectric type smoke Detector w/ thermal element
MRI-5251B Thermostat
MRI-5251RB Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise
MRI-5251H
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
MRI-M502M
High Temperature Thermostat
Monitor module, Classes A/B initiating
Mini Monitor module, Class B initiating
Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors to FACP
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500X
4
6
Control module
Control module
Fault isolator module
7
8
MRI-500C
2071C/AC
48
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Manufacturer Model
System Sensor 1251
1251B
1551
2251
2251B
Type
Ionization type smoke detector
Ionization type smoke detector
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector to FACP
2251TMB
2551
Acclimate Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element
Photoelectric type smoke detector
3251 Combination smoke detector and thermostat
5251P Thermostat
5251B Thermostat
4
6
5251H
MRI-500C
1
2 w/ Rate of Rise
3
High Temperature Thermostat
5104
M501M
M502M
Mini Monitor module, Class B initiating
Monitor Module for 2-wire smoke detectors Classes A/B initiating
M500R
M500S
M500X
Control module
Control module
Fault isolator module
49
MR-2900 Installation Manual
7.6 Compatible Door Holder/Releasers
The following listed door holders are compatible with the MR-2900 and MR-2400 door holder/ releaser circuits:
Manufacturer
Harrington
Model
1501-G1
1502-G1
1504-G1
1505-G1
1508-G1
1509-G1
Type
Single Door, Floor Mount
Double Door, Floor Mount
Flush Wall Munt, Large Catch Plate
Flush Wall Mount
Surface Wall Mount
Completely Flush Wall Mount
Input Current at 24 VDC
70 mA
140 mA
70mA
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
7.7 Releasing Devices
The following Listed releasing devices are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Unit.
Manufacturer
ASCO
Skinner
Model Type
T8210A107
R8210A107
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
8210A107 Solenoid Valve
73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 Solenoid Valve
50
MR-2900 Installation Manual
8.0 Appendix D: Interconnection to Other Equipment
8.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC
The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram:
An addressable module may be substituted for the alarm relay as follows:
Trouble and supervisory contacts must be connected to the panel.
Note: The Radionics 2071C and 2071AC are separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
51
MR-2900 Installation Manual
8.2 Silent Knight 5104
The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Silent Knight 5104 Dialer is as shown in the following diagram:
52
An addressable module may be substituted for the common alarm relay as follows:
An addressable module may be substituted for the common supervisory relay as follows:
4.7k
4 to FACP
5
6
6
MRI-500C
5104
Trouble contacts must be connected to the panel.
Note: The Silent Knight 5104 is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
MR-2900 Installation Manual
8.3 CTM City Tie Module
The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.
Ratings:
City Tie Module
• Operating Voltage 24 VDC
• Standby Current 2 mA
• Alarm Current
• UL listed
City Tie Box
1.5 A (less than 10 milliseconds) for Model DC-2A Master Box
File S3610
• Series type Coil Resistance 14.5 ohms
The CTM is wired as shown below.
Notes:
1.
The CTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
2.
When connecting the CTM module to any of the bell (NAC) circuits, that circuit(s) must be programmed as a strobe circuit.
53
MR-2900 Installation Manual
8.4 Keltron 3158 TTM
The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2900 are wired together as shown below:
54
Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM.
Note: The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by
AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays,
55
MR-2900 Installation Manual breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
56
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron
Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from
Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
57
MR-2900 Installation Manual
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which
Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
58
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 9 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
P
ROGRAMMING
M
ANUAL
Revision D
Document #: LT-2011
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Contents
1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General Comments......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Networks ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Addressable Devices ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Releasing Service ........................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors............................................................................................................. 8
2.0 Editing MHI Databases ............................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 General Comments......................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 System Window .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.3 Switches Window............................................................................................................................ 13
2.4 Groups Window .............................................................................................................................. 14
2.5 Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 16
2.6 Circuits and Devices Windows........................................................................................................ 30
2.7 Internal Circuits Window ................................................................................................................. 34
2.8 Relate Window................................................................................................................................ 35
3.0 LCD Programming ................................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 General Comments......................................................................................................................... 37
3.2 Clock ............................................................................................................................................... 38
3.3 Common Relays ............................................................................................................................. 38
3.4 Switches.......................................................................................................................................... 38
3.5 Battery............................................................................................................................................. 39
3.6 Conventional ................................................................................................................................... 39
3.7 Addressable .................................................................................................................................... 39
3.8 Archive ............................................................................................................................................ 41
3.9 Relays ............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.10 Ports.............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.11 Alarm List ...................................................................................................................................... 44
3.12 Passcode ...................................................................................................................................... 44
3.13 Memory ......................................................................................................................................... 44
3.14 Buzzer........................................................................................................................................... 44
4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers .................................................................................. 45
5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation ............................................................................................... 49
5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 49
5.2 Sample Calculation ......................................................................................................................... 50
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal ................................................................................................................. 51
6.1 Control Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 51
6.2 Addressable Module ....................................................................................................................... 56
7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes ................................................................................................... 59 i
MR-2900 Programming Manual ii
MR-2900 Programming Manual
List of Figures and Tables
Figures
Figure 1: Typical Network Layout ................................................................................................................... 2
Figure 2: Single Network Break...................................................................................................................... 3
Figure 3: Panel Removed From Network ....................................................................................................... 4
Figure 4: 4-Wire Device Wiring (Typical) ........................................................................................................ 8
Figure 5: System Window............................................................................................................................... 10
Figure 6: Switches Window ............................................................................................................................ 13
Figure 7: Groups Window............................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 8: Panel Window ................................................................................................................................. 16
Figure 9: IDs Supervised ................................................................................................................................ 18
Figure 10: Annunciator Panel Window ........................................................................................................... 18
Figure 11: Output Dialog ................................................................................................................................ 19
Figure 12: Options Dialog............................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 13: Default Key Assignments .............................................................................................................. 22
Figure 14: Fixed Key Assignments................................................................................................................. 22
Figure 15: Dialer Settings ............................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 16: Dialer Configuration 1.................................................................................................................... 26
Figure 17: Dialer Configuration 2.................................................................................................................... 27
Figure 18: Call Directions ............................................................................................................................... 28
Figure 19: Zone Data...................................................................................................................................... 29
Figure 20: Circuits Window............................................................................................................................. 29
Figure 21: Circuits Window............................................................................................................................. 30
Figure 22: Devices Window............................................................................................................................ 30
Figure 23: Copy Dialog Box............................................................................................................................ 33
Figure 24: Internal Circuits Window................................................................................................................ 34
Figure 25: Relate Window .............................................................................................................................. 35
Figure 26: Typical Menu ................................................................................................................................. 37
Figure 27: Typical Selector............................................................................................................................. 37
Tables
Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes ..................................................................................... 59
Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes.................................................................................. 60
Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restore Codes .......................................................................... 60 iii
MR-2900 Programming Manual iv
MR-2900 Programming Manual
1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts
Warnings: Before Programming
1.
All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control
Unit.
2.
The Control Unit continues to monitor input circuits and devices and acts according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.
3.
Loading a new database erases the current database before loading the new database. If the new database is not loaded after the erasure, the panel will not operate.
4.
The database internal revision number included must match the number required by the
MR2 program, otherwise a Database Mismatch trouble condition is generated. This condition disables the panel until a correct MR2 program is loaded.
5.
The database must be completely loaded for it to be considered valid. The program keeps track if the last database load was valid/complete or not. An invalid database load disables the panel until a valid database load is done.
1.1 General Comments
There are two different programs available for use in the Control Panel:
• The MR1 program only works with a stand alone panel and conventional input circuits. All programming is done through the LCD and keypad. This is not discussed here; see the
MR1 Programming Manual for a discussion of MR1 programming.
• The MR2 program handles all variations. Input circuit programming is done from a database, while system parameters are programmed from the LCD and keypad. The programs and their port 3 usages are: MR2-x: old SE 2000 protocol; MR2-xA: MR-2614 annunciator, MR-2644 annunciator, MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity module, and MR28-
9001, MR28-9002, MR28-9801, MR28-9804, and MR295101 Dialler. Note that these
PIDS will henceforth be referred to as Dialler; MR2-xB: new SE 2000 protocol (device level); MR2-xG: GRID; MR2-xE: MV-2700 Voice Evacuation panel. MR2-7y programs are for MR-2931 based systems and MR2-3y programs are for MR-2921 based systems.
Due to programming and hardware limitations, units using the MR-2901C and MR-2921 main circuit boards may not have some of the LCD options that are listed here.
The MR2 program uses a database for input circuit programming. This database includes the conventional circuit definitions, addressable devices on-line, and the Zone LEDs, Bells, Releasers,
Functions Relays and Control Modules activated by the conventional circuits and addressable devices. This database is created and downloaded from an IBM compatible computer using the
Modul-R Human Interface (MHI) program. Refer to the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for instructions on downloading the database.
Note: All communications are stopped during the database load. This will cause trouble to be recorded by those units that are normally communicating with the panel.
The use of Port 3 on the panel is handled by loading different versions of the operating program.
Each different protocol has its own operating program. If an incorrect operating program is detected, a Miscellaneous Trouble is generated, but the panel will continue to work except for the
Port 3 functions.
1
MR-2900 Programming Manual
1.2 Networks
General
The MR-2900 can be incorporated into a network including other MR-2900 panels, MR-2200 panels and MR-2944 annunciators. Though up to 254 panels and annunciators can be supported by the network, such a network would probably be too large to properly maintain. The network can be setup for single building or multiple building operation.
The basic layout of the network is a single loop (see Figure 1 ).
Each panel and annunciator has a unique ID. There is no requirement that the IDs be sequential or that they start with
1. The master panel can be any fire panel in the network. The panels work in a peer-to-peer fashion. This means that each panel is responsible for the programming of the inputs
Figure 1: Typical Network Layout connected to it. The master panel does not control the network, but is a central location for information. Information is exchanged over the network via two basic means: a) specific frames, which are from one panel to another, and b) broadcast frames, which are from one panel to all others.
Notes:
1.
For correct operation of the network, all panels and annunciators need to be loaded with the same version of operating programs and with the same database. If changes are made to the database, it is recommended that ALL panels and annunciators be reloaded.
2.
When panels and annunciators are first installed, the panel ID must be entered into it before loading the database.
The special functions of the master panel are: a) synchronize the clocks on the network by broadcasting the date and time at 3:30am every day; this means that only the master panel of a network requires that its clock be calibrated; b) maintain a network alarm list; c) transmit all signals from the network to a monitoring location; d) operate its common/municipal relays in accordance with the network condition.
Feature Operation
The following are the various types of frames that are sent on the network.
Commands & Restores
These specific frames are sent when a device in alarm requires operation of outputs at another unit. These commands are for the bells, relays, control modules, device messages and LEDs.
When the device itself restores, the restore commands are sent right away so that the other panels know that they can be reset. Anything operated will stay latched until the Reset key is pressed.
Hotkey and Hotkey LED Operation
If a unit has its hotkey routing set for specific panels only, it will send Acknowledge, Reset, Signal
Silence and Second Stage Inhibit to these panels as specific frames. If hotkey routing is Global in the database, these are sent as broadcast frames.
If a panel’s function keys are sent to other panels, those panels will send commands to the panel to have it turn on and off the hot key LEDs. This is so that there is indication that the key function
2
MR-2900 Programming Manual has become available. This will cause the LEDs to continue flashing after the key is pressed until the frame is received to turn off the LED.
Time/Date Change
This broadcast frame is sent by a panel or annunciator if the time or date is changed. The master panel also will send both a date and time change frame at 3:30am every day to synchronize all the clocks in the network.
Manual Switch Operation
If the state of any of the 16 software switches is changed manually at any panel, this change is broadcast to all other panels. The software switches are a system resource.
Network Reset
If a Network Reset command is initiated at a panel, it is broadcast normally and then the panel will reboot itself. Upon receiving the Network Reset command, a panel will pass it on to the next panel and then reboot itself. This has the affect of causing all the panels to reboot simultaneously.
Network Verify
Network Verify is an active process in which each panel and annunciator checks to make sure that all other panels can communicate with it. This requires that ALL PANELS in the network have same operating software and database.
Each panel sends out a Network Verify frame which is then passed around the network loop.
When the frame returns to its originating panel, it is checked to ensure it passed through the correct number of panels. Also, each panel checks the Network Verify frames from other panels to ensure that they are correct. Any errors and mismatches will be identified.
Network Communications
Information is sent across the network in frames. There are two types of frames: specific and broadcast. Specific frames are sent from one unit to another. Broadcast frames are sent from one unit to all others.
Specific Frames
Specific frames deal with information generated at one panel and required at another. It is passed from panel to panel until it reaches its destination. Each panel has a list as to which port to send frames from to reach all other panels through the fewest number of panels. Since networks will generally have all communications links running at the same baud rate, this is generally the shortest time as well.
If there is a break in the communications (see Figure 2 ), the panel that can not pass the message on will send it back the way it came.
This will cause the frame to go the long way around the network. If there are two breaks in the network loop, the frame is again reversed at the second break. When it is received by the originating panel after this second Figure 2: Single Network Break turn around, the frame is considered to be orphaned and destroyed. This generates a Network Reboot Required trouble. This will be passed on to all other panels. The reason the orphan frame is destroyed is to prevent unexpected operation when the network is finally repaired, such as a panel starts ringing its bells because of an alarm from the previous day.
3
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Broadcast Frames
Broadcast frames deal with information that affects the entire network. When a broadcast frame is created by a panel or annunciator, it is sent out both network communications ports. Each unit in turn will receive the broadcast in one port, act upon it and pass it on out the other port. Upon reaching the unit that generated the broadcast frame, that unit then disposes of it. This means that under normal circumstances, all units will receive a broadcast twice and act upon it twice.
If there is a break in a communications link (see Figure
2 ) the broadcast will be disposed of by the unit unable to pass it on.
In the situation where a unit has been removed from the loop (see
Figure 3 ), the broadcast will be passed only from com2 to com1 at the jump. In Figure 3 , panel 5 will pass the broadcast to panel 3, but panel 3 will not pass the broadcast on to panel 5 since it is supposed to be communicating to panel 4.
Figure 3: Panel Removed From Network
1.3 Addressable Devices
The MR-2900 can use analog/addressable devices. There are two general types of devices: sensors and modules. The following devices are supported:
Modules
MRI-M500M Monitor module
MRI-M501M Mini monitor module
MRI-M502M Monitor module for conventional 2-wire smoke detectors
MRI-M503M Micro monitor module (EN54 listed only)
MRI-M500DM Dual monitor module
MRI-M500R
MRI-M500S
MRI-M500X
Relay module
Control module
Isolator module
Sensors
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
MRI-2551
MRI-2251T
Ionization type smoke detector, low profile
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector, low profile
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector, low profile
MRI-2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector
MRI-3251
MRI-5251
Combination photo, ion and heat detector, low profile
Fixed temperature detector, low profile
MRI-5251H
MRI-5551
MRI-5251R
MRI-5551R
Fixed temperature, high temperature
Fixed temperature detector
Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector, low profile
Rate of Rise and fixed temperature detector
The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M, MRI-M502M and MRI-M503M monitor modules all appear the same to the MR-2900. This allows for the easy substitution of devices. The
MRI-M501M and MRI-M503M modules are intended for mounting inside the back box of a conventional contact device. The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM and MRI-M502M require back boxes for mounting.
4
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The MRI-M500DM dual monitor module has two Class (Style) B input circuits. The first input uses the address dialled into the module and the second uses that address plus 1. That is, if the dials are set for address 34, the monitor modules to be programmed into MHI are at addresses 134 and
135.
The MRI-M502M monitor module can be used for monitoring up to 20 System Sensor two-wire smoke detectors. The module requires a separate 24 VDC supply to power the smoke detectors.
Also, some external means of resetting the power must be provided since the module cannot reset the detectors. This can be accomplished with one of the general purpose relays of the MR-2900.
Do not assign any relates to the relay in the MHI database. Also, the relay must be assigned a non-zero duration with the LCD menu. Then the relay will operate whenever the Reset hot key is pressed when it has nothing else to reset (neither LED is flashing).
The MRI-M500S control module can be used to control a supervised output, such as a bell or strobe circuit. The control module monitors the circuit wiring and troubles will be reported. The module will require a separate 24 VDC supply for the controlled circuit. When programming the database in MHI, be sure to program the control module correctly. Choose any “Control ( str )” option other than “Control (Relay)” for the MRI-M500S module. The MR-2900 will not operate a control module if the supervised circuit is shorted. Also there are options in MHI that affect the
MRI-M500S control module but not the MRI-M500R relay module.
The MRI-M500R relay provides two Form C relays. Choose “Control (relay)” for the MRI-M500R module. There are options in MHI that affect the MRI-M500R relay module that do not affect the
MRI-M500S control module.
The MRI-M500X isolator module is used to prevent wiring faults from affecting the entire circuit. It divides the addressable circuit into sections. The isolator has separate IN and OUT wiring. A short on one side of the isolator will not be seen on or affect the other side. Isolator modules do not use addresses. The isolator relies on a voltage threshold to determine whether it should be isolating or not. This voltage threshold is around 6.5V. All isolators in a system are in isolated mode on system power up. If there is an excess of current draw, the isolator will not close. When the short is removed, the isolator module will automatically close the circuit again. The LED on the isolator module will turn on when the module is in isolated mode, otherwise it will flash periodically. System
Sensor recommends no more than 25 devices between isolator modules since the inrush current of the devices may mimic a short condition preventing the isolator from closing. MRI-3251 detectors have an inrush current of up to 10 times that of other devices, thus only two can be placed between isolators.
The sensors all use bases for mounting. Besides the standard plain bases, there are also relay bases, isolator bases and a sounder base. The available bases are:
MRI-B501
MRI-B501B
Flangeless base for all sensors
Flanged base for MRI-x551 sensors
MRI-B210LP Flanged base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
MRI-B501BH Sounder base for all sensors
MRI-B501BHT sounder base, temporal
MRI-B524BI Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors
MRI-B224BI Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
MRI-B524RB Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors
MRI-B224RB Relay base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile
The relay and sounder bases are activated by the sensor LED. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base will activate. This requires that the MR-2900 have the LED mode set to
FLASH. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
LED MODE/FLASH. The MR-2900 will only turn on the LEDs of up to 5 devices
1
per addressable
1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs to 3.
5
MR-2900 Programming Manual circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH and MRI-B501BHT sounder bases require a separate 24 VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base will activate.
Isolator bases function the same as isolator modules. The sensor plugged into the base is connected to the IN wiring to the base. The isolator is between the sensor and the OUT wiring.
While both sensors and modules have rotary dials that allow for addresses from 00 to 99, modules add 100 internally to the address programmed, thus using the address range 100 to 199. Since sensors and modules come from the factory addressed as 00, we do not allow that address to be used for an installed device. Address 0 is used for indication of wiring faults on the addressable circuit.
Device Faults
The following troubles (with condition code letter) can be reported by or for addressable devices:
• Missing (M): A device listed in the database is not reporting back when polled by the panel. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been misaddressed. This error can also occur if there are any wiring faults.
• Illegal (I): A device is reporting on an address that the database shows as unused. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis-addressed. For illegal sensors, since there is no programming available, if an alarm condition is detected, the MR-2900 will operate all its bell circuits.
1
In a network system, only the local panel will activate its bells. The MR-2900 will always ignore illegal modules.
• Wrong Type (U): This occurs if the device is not the type expected for the address. For example, the database lists an address to have a ion smoke detector, but a photo smoke detector has reported for the address. This error will also be used if the panel cannot determine the type of the device. If the device goes into alarm, the panel will operate normally.
• Trouble (T): Sensors: The device is defective and needs to be replaced.
2
Modules: The extended circuit from the module has a wiring fault. Note: Control modules that supervise their output circuit will not be operated if the output circuit is shorted
3
.
• Duplicate (D): This means that two devices are using the same address. The MR-2900 does a check every hour for duplicate devices. If either device goes into alarm, the panel will operate normally. Note: Due to the method used to detect duplicate devices, it is possible for a single device to appear as duplicate devices. Generally, the device will need to be replaced.
MR-2919 Class A Input Module
The MR-2919 Class A Addressable Input Module uses two input circuits, out on the odd numbered circuit and in on the following even numbered circuit, for example: out on circuit 9 and in on circuit
10. Both circuits are powered by the panel from a single source, so that there is no internal isolation between the circuits. This means that a short across one circuit will affect the other circuit.
6
1. BRK programs dated before 18 February 1999 always ignore illegal sensors.
2. BRK programs dated before 9 March 1999 do not report sensor troubles.
3. BRK programs dated before 10 September 1999 do not operate control modules if in any fault.
MR-2900 Programming Manual
1.4 Releasing Service
The eight output circuits are available for releasing service through programming. The MRI-M500S control module can also be programmed for releasing. Releasers can be programmed to be normally On (Continuous) or normally Off (Momentary). Continuous releasers will be turned off by a loss of AC power as well as by input. There can be three types of inputs to start operation:
Normal, Fast and Cross-Zoned. There are also Abort and Halt features available. Releaser operation is subject to both a delay and a duration time. These are all programmed in the database.
Normal operation of a releaser is as follows:
1.
An Alarm input causes the start of the releaser delay.
2.
After the delay time, the releaser is activated for the duration time.
3.
After the duration time, the releaser is returned to its normal state.
After this sequence of operation, the releaser will have to be reset before it will operate again.
The inputs that activate and control releaser operation are as follows:
• Normal Input: Causes the selected releaser to start its normal operating sequence.
• Fast Input: Causes the selected releaser to operate immediately, ignoring any delay time and will over-ride the Halt function (see below). The releaser will run for its standard duration.
• Cross-Zoned Input: These inputs allow for multiple inputs to be required before the releaser is activated. Inputs are assigned either to the “A-side” or “B-side”. If an alarm is received from both an A-side and a B-side detector, the releaser will start its normal operation.
• Halt Input: This will cause the selected releaser not to operate. The releaser will have to be reset before it will operate normally again. The Fast Input will over-ride the Halt function
(see above). Note: If used, this type of input must be controlled access to maintain UL listing.
• Abort Input: This will cause the selected releaser to stop running its timer once it reaches
10 seconds. The timer will stay at 10 seconds until the Abort input is restored. The timer will then resume.
Restrictions on Releaser Programming
1.
Cross-zoning and Fast operation require the use of the MR2 program and MHI.
2.
Normal, Cross-zoned and Fast inputs can be any of Alarm, Pull Station, Waterflow or
Supervisory functions.
3.
Abort and Halt functions cannot be assigned to Smoke Detector circuits or Smoke Detector and Contact Device circuits.
4.
All inputs affecting a releaser must be wired to the same panel as the releaser. This means that inputs from remote panels in a network cannot affect releasers.
7
MR-2900 Programming Manual
1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors
4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see the section Outputs Dialog ). A duration of zero disables this function.
Once this is done, wire the power for the device as shown in Figure 4 . A third party power supply can be used instead of the
Aux Power as shown Whenever the
System Reset operator key is pressed when neither LED is flashing, will cause the relay to operate for the duration programmed.
Figure 4: 4-Wire Device Wiring (Typical)
8
MR-2900 Programming Manual
2.0 Editing MHI Databases
2.1 General Comments
The editing of a system is done through a series of input windows. Editing starts with the System
Level and progresses to the Panel Level, then to the Input Level, and finally to the Relate Level.
The Main Menu and option speed keys are not available while editing/viewing the system. While editing is being done, the word OPEN is displayed in the Status Bar. This is to remind the user that the system database is open and that the computer should not be turned off. If the computer is turned off while the database is open, it may become corrupted.
If the current database has been previously verified and you select Edit, a requester will be displayed confirming your request to edit the database. If No is chosen, then the database is displayed in View mode. Editing the database will change the database to a non-verified state and will change the Last Edit Date.
Prior to an editing session, the database will be automatically backed up. This back up copy will have the same name as the original database, but will incorporate a .BAK extension. If a database becomes corrupted, delete it and rename its .BAK backup file to have a .DBA extension. This will restore the database to the state prior to the last editing session .
Note: When upgrading from a version 17 (or earlier) system, a number of items that were programmed at the panel are now included in the database. See the file UPGRADE.TXT for a complete description of these changes. Follow these instructions to obtain the required information before upgrading your firmware :
1.
Connect your computer to the panel and open the Terminal window
2.
Select the Printer screen in the Terminal: press
14
<Tab>
3.
You should note that the title bar of the Terminal window displays the text "File logging in progress...". If this does not appear, press the button Log On .
4.
In the terminal window, type the following command:
99?
5.
The panel's configuration settings will be listed in the Terminal window and it will also be saved in the file: LOG_CONT.TXT, located in your program directory
6.
Close the Terminal window
7.
You may now view the contents of the file using any standard word processor or text editor
8.
You must perform the above procedure for ALL panels in your system
Panel Types
There are a number of different types of panels that may be programmed. These are the ones covered:
• MR-2900 (mb2931) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2931 motherboard. This panel accepts all input circuit modules and has four Class A or eight
Class B power-reversing output circuits. These output circuits can be programmed to be used as either bells or releaser type circuits. This is the standard board for the MR-2900.
These panels can be used in a network configuration.
• MR-2900 (mb2921) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2921 motherboard. It is identical to the MR-2900 (mb2931) in hardware capability, but does not support all software features. This panel type is no longer produced.
• MR-2900 (mb2901) Fire Panel: This is an MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2901 motherboard. This panel accepts conventional input circuit modules only and has four bell circuits and four releaser type circuits. These circuits use different circuitry and cannot have their function changed. These panels can be used in a network configuration. This panel type is no longer produced.
• MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Panel: Can be used in a network configuration with MR-2900 control panels.
9
MR-2900 Programming Manual
• MR-2400 Fire Panel: Not discussed in this manual.
• MR-2944 Annunciator: It includes the memory required to have a database loaded into it.
This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be included. This annunciator has two communications ports. This allows the annunciator to reside in the network loop. It uses the MR-2910 Network Board. One of the network ports can be disabled. This results in the annunciator having to be linked to a Control Panel.
With one of the ports disabled, the annunciator can not be in the network loop.
• MR-2934 Annunciator: It is identical to the MR-2944 in operation. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.
• MR-2924 Annunciator: It is similar to the MR-2944 in operation. It does not have any onboard database memory, so messages are sent from the control panels. It has the network communications built onto the board instead of using the MR-2910 Network Board. This annunciator is no longer produced.
• MR-2914 Annunciator: It is similar to the MR-2924 except as follows: (a) the optional
LCD is 2x20; (b) there is only one network communication port. These annunciators are linked to a Control Panel and can not reside in the network loop. This annunciator is no longer produced.
Notes:
1.
The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators can be attached to the MR-2900 panel. They are considered an extension of the panel by MHI and do not change how these panels interface with other annunciators.
2.
All products no longer produced will be supported by MHI for existing systems.
2.2 System Window
The System Window (see
Figure 5 ) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information.
The Title Bar of the window will show whether editing or viewing of the database is being preformed and the name of the current database.
The text in the top left corner provides information about the database. The top line gives the date and time the database was last edited.
The next line states whether
Figure 5: System Window the current contents have been verified or not; and whether the database has been compressed or not.
The options Bell System, Subsequent Alarm, Resound, Evac and Waterflow all affect how the notification appliance circuits (NAC), hereafter referred to as bells, react to alarm conditions.
Bell System is a drop down list for selecting how the bells and strobes will operate. This includes both the panel outputs and any control modules programmed for bell or strobe operation. This sets the base operation for the entire network. If coded bells are required, the bell codes are defined for each input individually. The following options are available:
10
MR-2900 Programming Manual
• Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
• Evac: A First Stage alarm will activate selected bells in Evacuation mode. Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. There is no timeout from First to Second Stage.
• Alert/Evac: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Evacuation mode and all other bells on the panel in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot
Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the system will progress to Second Stage.
Second Stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
• Staged: The 1st alarm will activate selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or
Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the selected bells are switched to Evacuation mode and the next bells, ie the ones with the next higher number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in
Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to
Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode. A 2nd alarm will activate all bells in Evacuation mode.
Notes:
1.
Bells must be assigned consecutive bells circuits with no Releasers assigned in between Bells. For example: circuits 1, 2, 3, 4 can be assigned as Bells but not circuits
1, 2, 4, 5 with circuit 3 a Releaser.
2.
Control modules cannot be programmed as bell or strobe if the Staged Bell system is used.
Subsequent Alarm controls how Alert, Evac and Alert/Evac type bell systems behave when a new alarm is received while one is still active. 1st Stage has the panel repeat the First Stage operation.
2nd Stage has the panel go immediately to Second Stage operation.
Resound controls how the panels handle the automatic resounding of silenced bells when a new alarm is received. There are two modes:
• Local: Each panel will resound only its own silenced bells when a new alarm is received.
This would be used when panels in a network are in different buildings, such as a campus.
• Global: All panels in a network will resound silenced bells when a new alarm condition is received on any panel in the network. This is used when the panels are all in the same building, such as a large plant.
Evac controls whether the bell system Evacuation Mode sounds Steady (continuously) or uses a
Temporal pattern as specified in ANSI S3.41 and ISO 8201 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal .
The pattern used ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, ½s Off, ½s On, 1½s Off repeated.
Waterflow controls if bells can be silenced if they are started by a waterflow type input. If Non-
Silenceable is chosen, bell circuits activated by a waterflow input cannot be silenced until the device has restored.
Language chooses English (default), French or Hungarian characters to be used in messages.
See Appendix C Languages of the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for a description of the letters supported and the method of entering them.
Alarm List Sequence controls which end of the Alarm List is shown automatically. If First is chosen, the first (oldest) item in the alarm list will be shown. If Last is chosen, the last (newest) item in the alarm list is shown. Regardless of order, alarms always take precedence in being shown. Another way to think of it is that First shows where the fire started while Last shows where the fire has gotten to.
11
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Disconnects controls which panels the Signal Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect and Common Disconnect hot keys affect.
• Local: The Disconnect hot keys affect only the panel they are on.
• Global: The Disconnect hot keys affect all the panels in the network. This means that if a
Disconnect key is pressed on any panel, all panels in the system will be affected.
The System Message is a text entry box for defining a message used to identify the system. The message is three lines by twenty characters long. It is printed at the top of printouts and shown on some service terminal screens, but only seen on the LCD in the STATUS/IDENTIFICATION menu.
The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the
LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”.
The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. Note: The common LEDs of any panel are based upon the zone LEDs that are displayed by the panel, not based upon the inputs to the panel.
The Allow Complex Releaser Definitions check box enables extended functionality of releaser circuits and control modules programmed for releasing. This allows for Fast (no delay) operation of a releaser and for AND function using A and B side inputs to a releaser. See section 1.4 Releaser
Programming for details.
The Enforce Group Association checking check box enables MHI to check to see if a group association has been included in the relates of inputs. This option must be enabled when using an
MR-2806-MR Dialer.
The Observe Daylight Savings Time check box enables or disables the automatic changing of the clock for Daylight Savings Time. If enabled, the system will move 1 hour ahead the first Sunday of
April and fall back 1 hour the last Sunday of October (North American dates).
The Pre-alarm Buzzer , when enabled, will cause a tone to sound when a smoke detector circuit is in the auto-verify process or an addressable device is in alarm during the Retard period. The tone used is a triple beep every second.
Master ID defines which panel in a network will act as the Master panel. Only control panels may be chosen as the Master panel. The Master panel synchronizes the date and time on all panels and annunciators at 3:30am everyday.
Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system.
Annunciators will always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages:
• Local: Each fire panel shows only Alarm List entries that are for that panel only.
• Global: Each fire panel shows Alarm List entries for itself and all other panels and annunciators.
• Master: The master fire panel shows the Alarm List entries for all panels and annunciators while all other fire panels show only their own Alarm List entries.
Common Relays controls what signals affect the common alarm, common supervisory and common trouble relays of each panel. The are two settings:
• Local: The common relays of a panel follow the events of events on that panel only.
• follow Alarm List Mode: The common relays of a panel will react to both events of the panel and any events listed in its Alarm List.
12
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The System Window has the following push buttons on the right hand side:
• Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, saves the database. At this time, a requester will ask if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.
• Panels: Displays the Panel Window. If the system has no panels defined, the Add Panel
Box is displayed to obtain the first control panel for the system.
• Switches: Displays the Switches Window. This window determines which devices are attached to the switches and the timers associated to each switch. See section 2.3 for the
Switches Window .
• Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This window is used to define groups of relates.
See section 2.4 for the Groups Window .
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section Verify of the Modul-R Human
Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
• Settings: Defines the Verify warnings to disable and/or errors to reduce to warnings for the current database. Not all warnings/errors can be disabled/reduced. The use of this is not recommended, but provided for special circumstances.
2.3 Switches Window
The Switches Window (see
Figure 6 ) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/
Night) switches. There are
16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network will keep track of its portion of the devices related to each switch.
Relays, LEDs and control modules will follow the On/
Off state of the switch they are related to. Addressable sensors will use Day sensitivity while the switch is on and Night sensitivity while the switch is off. The timers are used to have the
Figure 6: Switches Window switch change state at set times each day. Switches can also be operated manually at the panel. If the Switch is associated to a Hot Key, the Hot Key will then operate the switches. Changing a switch manually at one panel will affect all panels in the network.
Notes:
1.
Each addressable detector can only be related to a single switch.
2.
Relays, LEDs and control modules controlled by more than one switch will stay on as long as any switch operating them is on.
The title bar of the window will always list the currently highlighted switch.The Switches Table shows all 16 possible switches and highlights the current one. Select any one to make it the current switch. List entries will show the message RELATES FOUND for switches that have related devices.
13
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch will change state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, eg: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used. If an action at midnight is desired set the time to 0:01, one minute after midnight; or 23:59, a minute before midnight. MHI will sort the times into ascending order after the Switches Window is closed.
The Start Mode - On check box determines if the first time listed should turn the switch On or Off. If it is not checked, the first time turns the switch off. If it is checked, the first time turns the switch on.
The on and off indication beside each time entry will change to reflect what each time in the sorted list will do.
Use switch as Custom Hot Key allows the switch to be manually controlled by the Hot Keys. A hot key can be assigned to turn the switch on and another to turn it off. These keys will be marked as
HK in the Switches Table.
Description is a 20 character message that describes the Switch usage. This is useful in that the switch now has a description of its usage that is easier to understand when assigning Switches to
Hot Keys.
There are five push buttons on the right side:
• Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window.
• Reset: This will remove all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch.
• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated/controlled by the switch.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 for Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.4 Groups Window
The Groups Window (see
Figure 7 ) is used for creating and editing the
Groups of relates. The Title
Bar will show the current group.
This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates. Groups are a method of establishing zone representations. They are also used to program zone information for the Dialler
(see the Zone Data section).
A zone representation may include a message and/or a
Figure 7: Groups Window group of Relates. Inputs (ie. circuits and/or devices) may relate to a Group or number of Groups and thus acquire all Relates that are referenced by them. Inputs can also adopt a Group message.
Making a change to a Group will affect all inputs (circuits and devices) related to the Group. This feature can significantly speed up the creation of medium to large size systems as well as simplify changes. Up to 250 groups may be defined.
14
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database. For example, if a new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added to a Group. This single change is then automatically picked up by any inputs that are related to the Group. Since this number could be hundreds, the use of the Groups makes databases easier to maintain and decreases the likelihood of mistakes when items are added.
Note: Though any relationship can be selected for inclusion into a group, an input that references the group must be able to accommodate the group’s relates. For example, if a group includes relates to Bell or Strobe output, associating this group to a Supervisory type input will generate an error during verification because this type of input cannot operate Bells or Strobes. It may be advantageous to separate groups in these cases.
The Group List shows all the defined groups along with their message (if any) and if there are any relates defined for the group. The current group will be highlighted. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another group.
The Message/Description allows you to enter a message describing the Group. You are allowed space for 3 lines by 20 characters. If desired, this message may be adopted by a circuit or device by checking the Use Grp Msg check-box and specifying this Group ID.
The following push buttons are defined:
• Exit: Close the Groups Window and return to the previous window.
• Add Group: This defines a new group ID. The new group can have any number between
1 and 250. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.
• Delete Group: This will remove the group from the list. You will be asked if you want to have references to the group automatically removed.
• Reset Group: This will remove all relates for the currently highlighted group.
• Change ID: This allows the group ID to be changed. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.
• Relate: Shows the Relate Window. Items marked *on* will be operated by inputs related to the group.
• Copy Relates: Copies the relates and/or message from an input point to the current group (see Figure 23 ). The values of the panel, circuit and device are required. Most conventional circuits use a device number of 0 (zero). Press Copy to copy the information.
• Map: Displays and updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the Modul-
R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, you will be given the option to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human Interface Database
Editor .
15
MR-2900 Programming Manual
2.5 Panel Window
The Panel Window (see Figure 8 ) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided will change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title
Bar will describe the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.
The Panel Window has the following push buttons along the right side:
• Exit: Close the
Panel Window and return to the
System Window.
• Add Panel: Add another panel to the system. A dialog box will be displayed. The default options are to use the next available panel ID and to select an
MR-2900 panel.
You will also be asked if you want
Figure 8: Panel Window
MHI to automatically set the Next ID. If allowed, this panel will have the next higher numbered panel as its Next ID and the panel with the next lower number will be set to have this panel as its Next ID. If the new panel is the highest numbered panel, it will use the lowest numbered panel as its Next ID.
• Delete: Remove the current panel from the system. All programming for that panel will be lost. Any of the panel's outputs that are referenced will become invalid and will be removed by the next verify.
• Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window. See section 2.6
• Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window. See section 2.7.
• More Info: This displays a dialog box listing basic information about the panel including the date the database was last downloaded into a panel, the number of times downloaded, etc.
• Change Type: Displays a dialog box to change the type of the current panel. This makes it easier to correct mistakes when creating a database and to update the database if a panel type is changed in the field. Only certain type changes are allowed.
Note: This can have far reaching effects on a system. Any information that is no longer valid with the new panel type will be lost.
• Change ID: Displays a dialog box for changing the ID of the current panel. MHI will automatically change all references to use the new ID. This process could take a long time for a large database. A gauge will be displayed to show the progress of the change.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, you will be given the option to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R Human Interface Database
Editor.
The Panel List is located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both Control and
Annunciator, that are defined in the system. The highlighted entry in the List is the one that is currently being edited. Its description is also shown in the title bar of the Panel Window. If a
16
MR-2900 Programming Manual different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the
<Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.
The Message is located to the right of the Panel List. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel. This message will be displayed in Alarm Lists with signals that are generated by this panel. It will also be included in any print-outs generated by the Master Panel of the system. This message should include enough information that it will identify the panel and its location to fire or service personnel.
The Outputs area lists the function of the outputs of the panel. Use the Outputs Button to show the
Outputs Dialog (see the Outputs Dialog section) which allows for the programming of the Outputs and the relays.
The Options button displays the Options Dialog (see the Options Dialog section). This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc.
The Next ID is located to the left of the push buttons at the top of the Panel Window. It is not displayed for single panel systems. It is used to define the ID of the next panel in the network loop.
Specify the panel ID of the panel to be connected to the COM 1 terminals of the current panel. See
Links for notes on programming systems that contain MR-2914 Annunciators or single-port
MR-2944, MR-2934 or MR-2924 Annunciators. Note: For MR-2924 Annunciators, this value is used by the Verify only. Each MR-2924 must be field programmed with the correct Next ID.
Links is used to enter the IDs of single port annunciators that are connected to COM 1 of the
MR-2900 panel. Any of the following can be used in this manner, the MR-2914, or the MR-2944,
MR-2934 or MR-2924 (with one comport disabled). These annunciators do not reside in the network loop, but are branches off of it.
Port 3 Connect sets the purpose of the Port 3 general communications port. If the operating program loaded does not support the selected setting, a wrong port 3 program trouble will be generated by the panel. The options are:
• none: Port 3 is not used.
• Digital Protocol 1: Sets Port 3 to use the old protocol to the SE 2000.
• Digital Protocol 2: Sets Port 3 to use the new protocol to the SE 2000.
• PC Connect: Sets Port 3 to use the GRID program interface.
• Voice Evac. System: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the MV-2700 voice evacuation panel.
• Annunciator Connect: Sets Port 3 to communicate with the Dialler, MR-2614 or MR-
2644 annunciators, or city tie module.
The MR2614 Connect is marked to enable supervision of an MR2614 annunciator. You can select the number of LEDs, up to 72 zones, which are considered an extension of the panel itself.
Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann. LED Cnt drop down box. This means that
MR-2900 panels will display up to 96 zones instead of 24, with zones 25 to 96 being zones 1 to 72 of the annunciator. Though up to eight MR-2614s can be attached to the panel, each one will show the same information.
17
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the MR-2614 and MR-
2644 annunciators (see Figure 9 ) as well as the MR-2801B-MR and Dialler. Check the IDs that will be connected to the system. If the MR2614 Connect box is checked, IDs for MR-2614 annunciators must also be checked. When the MR-2806-MR is enabled, a button will appear next to that option called Dialer
Settings (see the section on Dialer Options for a description of the dialer options).
Hot Key Routing is a set of radio buttons for setting the other panels or annunciators to be controlled by the current panel. To have no other panels affected by the current panel, mark Local .
To have the current panel affect all other panels on the network, mark Global . To choose only some panels, mark Custom . A text entry box entitled route panel ids is then displayed. Enter the
Figure 9: IDs
Supervised panel IDs to be controlled separated by commas, eg. “2, 3, 4".
Each ID listed will receive Hot Key commands from the current panel whenever its Hot Keys are pressed.
Note: MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators do not use this setting. They are field programmed.
Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming (see
Figure 10 ).
The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an alphanumeric LCD. This setting is used by MHI only to determine if the Message
Receive check box should be shown for the annunciator in the Relate
Window. This value is not sent to the annunciator.
Figure 10: Annunciator Panel Window
LED Count is located directly below the LCD check box. This defines the number of LED zones the annunciator will be using. A count of zero will disable the Hot LEDs and Common LED.
Hot LED is located directly below the LED Count drop down. This value defines the first of four
LED zones the annunciator will use for internal functions. Any of the zones can be chosen with the requirement that there are four consecutive zones available. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the hot key zones. These will reflect the current status of the annunciator and the panel(s) it sends commands to.
18
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing:
Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available
Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green) Zone n+2 supervisory Future use
Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow)
Zone n+1 alarm: Signal Silence active
Zone n+2 trouble Future use
Zone n+3 alarm Future use
Zone n+1 supervisory: Signal Silence available
Zone n+1 trouble: 2nd Stage Inhibit active
Zone n+3 supervisory Future use
Zone n+3 trouble Power On
Notes:
1.
The Power On LED refers to the 24 VDC to the annunciator, not to any AC source.
2.
MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators must be field programmed to have a Hot LED.
Common LED is located directly below the Hot LED setting. This is the LED zone the annunciator will use for common alarm, supervisory and trouble indication. It is a summation of the zone LEDs of the annunciator. Any LED zone may be used. The zone chosen will not be available for general annunciation. Entering a zone of 0 will disable the common zone. Note: MR-2924 and MR-2914 annunciators must be field programmed to have a Common LED.
Ports is located below the Common LED setting. It is not displayed for MR-2914 Annunciators.
This option enables (double) or disables (single) the COM 1 network port. If both ports are enabled, the Next ID text box will become available (see above for a description of Next ID ).
Note: MR-2924 Annunciators must be field programmed for COM 1 port operation.
Outputs Dialog
The Outputs Dialog (see Figure
11 ) allows for the programming of the panel’s outputs and function relays.
The Outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program. Once the output is selected, it is programmable for the following output types:
• Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It sounds in Alert or Evacuation mode as required. It does not sound codes.
• Strobe: This signalling circuit for use with strobes. They are non-
Figure 11: Output Dialog silenceable and will be turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation. Strobe circuits cannot be silenced until the system is reset (unless the Strobe
Duration timer is programmed – see the Options Dialog section for Strobe Duration ).
• Coded Bell: This signalling circuit will sound out the code for any input that operates it and then silence. It does not sound in Alert or Evacuation mode.
• Continuous Releaser (C. Releaser): This type of releaser remains on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then turned off after the Delay until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds. Warning: Continuous releasers are also turned off when there is an AC power fail or when the panel is in its power up cycle.
19
MR-2900 Programming Manual
• Momentary Releaser (M. Releaser): This type of releaser is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the
Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail. The
Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds. 1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.
Note: Releaser type circuits can only be activated by inputs on the same panel.
• Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit will be powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. This allows for the reset of 4 wire detectors. A duration time of 0 prevents this operation. Auxiliary Power circuits will be turned off by the panel while it is in its power up cycle.
• Follow Supervisory (follow Supv): The output will sound when there is any supervisory condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.
• Follow Trouble (follow Trbl): The output will sound when there is any trouble condition present on the panel. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the circuit.
The Output Class drop down box is for MR-2900 (mb2931) and MR-2900 (mb2921) panels only.
This selects whether there are eight Class B outputs (MR-2926 Terminal Board) or four Class A outputs (MR-2925 Terminal Board).
Relay Delay is the times that the relay waits before activating. A delay of 0 causes instant operation. This can be from 0 to 60 seconds.
Relay Duration affects the time the relay is activated. For relays operated from inputs, it is the minimum time the relay will operate. The relay must stay on for this length of time before it can be reset. This is for equipment that must remain off a length of time before it can be started up again.
If no input operates the relay, it is available for the reset of 4 wire devices. If the duration is not 0
(zero), then the relay will activate for the duration time when the Reset hot key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing. The duration can be from 0 to 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Options Dialog
The Options Dialog (see
Figure 12 ) allows for the programming of the panel and annunciator options. These settings will affect the current panel only.
Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer will sound.
Normal causes the buzzer to sound for supervisory and trouble conditions. All causes the buzzer to sound for all conditions. MR-2934, MR-
2924 and MR-2914
Annunciators always use All .
to meet NFPA 72 requirements, section 1-5.4.7
you must choose All .
Figure 12: Options Dialog
20
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Bypass Priv.
sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to Level 2 (default) or
Level 1.
Disconnect sets the privilege level required for the Disconnect and Test Mode Hot Keys. These can be set to Level 1 (default) or Level 0. If Level 0 is chosen, the Disconnect Hot Keys can be operated without a passcode being entered into the panel.
Banner Mode dictates what the top line of the Main Menu of the LCD will be. There are four modes of operation:
• Status Ind.: This mode displays the lines SYSTEM NORMAL and SYSTEM OFF
NORMAL.
• Panel Ban.: This mode displays the 20 characters of text entered into the text box that appears below the drop down while this mode is selected.
• System Ban.: This mode displays the text defined by the System Banner.
• Equip. Desc.: This mode allows the panel to display its own identification text.
The AC Fail is the delay before the panel will report that it has lost AC power. The panel itself will go into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition. This can be set from 0 to 1800 minutes (30 hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel will use a 10 second delay. Note: Most installations will require a time of 1 minute (default) to meet required codes and standards. For panels connected to UL listed monitoring stations, normally a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required.
Fan Delay sets the number of scans between the reset of each Control Module (relay) on an addressable circuit. This allows for the staggered restart of fans when the system is reset. This option can be enabled or disabled on each addressable circuit as required. It has no affect on
Control Modules (supervising).
Bell Inhibit is the length of time the bells must sound before they can be silenced. This time can be from 0 to 120 seconds. Coded bells will always sound out their complete code and then stop.
Bell Timeout is the length of time the panel will stay in First Stage operation before automatically progressing to Second Stage. This can be set from 2 to 10 minutes. Most codes do not allow this time to exceed 5 minutes. Check with local codes and the authority having jurisdiction for the allowable limits for this time. Both the Second Stage Inhibit and Signal Silence will prevent this timeout from occurring.
Bell Cutoff is the length of time the bells will sound before they are automatically silenced by the panel. A time of 0 disables this feature. The cutoff can be set from 5 to 30 minutes. If the cutoff is used, it must be longer than the Bell Timeout .
Coded Bell Speed sets the time interval between the bits of the codes. This speed can be 1, ¾, ½ or ¼ second. The time between digits is three times this speed. The time between rounds is seven times this speed.
Maintenance Margin sets the gap between the maintenance threshold and the alarm threshold for addressable sensors. If the sensor stays between these two values for the Maintenance Retard time, the panel will report a Maintenance Alert trouble for the sensor. The margin can be set from 0 to 500, with 0 giving no warning and 500 giving the earliest warning.
Maintenance Retard is the number of consecutive scans the addressable sensor has to stay between the maintenance and alarm thresholds to generate the Maintenance Alert trouble. This retard can be from 5 to 50 scans. Scan time can vary from 2.5 to 5 seconds with usual values from
3.5 to 4 seconds.
Smoke Detector Reset Time sets the time the MR-2900 will power off conventional 2-wire smoke detectors to reset them. This time can be from 1 to 20 seconds. Current smoke detectors only need the default value of 1 second. Older smoke detectors may need a longer time to reset.
21
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Strobe Duration Time sets the time that strobe circuits will operate when activated when operated along with coded bells. The timer starts when the coded bells start. At the end of the timer, the strobes are silenced. A time of 0 (zero) disables the automatic silence. This value can be from 10 to 510 seconds.
Enable Disconnect & Test Timeout enables or disables disconnect timeouts. If the timeouts are disabled, Relay Disconnect, Releaser Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and
Test Mode must all be manually ended. If enabled, these functions will be automatically ended after four hours.
Trbl/Supv Output Auto Silence enables or disables the automatic silencing of the Follow Trouble and Follow Supervisory outputs during a fire condition. If enabled, the Follow Trouble and Follow
Supervisory outputs will automatically sound again once the fire bells and strobes have been silenced.
Suppress Missing Signals allows for the suppression of device missing signals for a loop that has a short or ground fault condition. If enabled, the panel will only report the short or ground fault condition, but not the missing device messages. Note: This feature requires that the BRK program be dated 9 September 1999 or later (version 17.20 or later).
Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that control the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 2 keys, each with yellow and green LED (some keys may have red instead of yellow LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 14 . The default layout is shown in Figure 13 . The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid (unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.
Figure 13: Default Key Assignments Figure 14: Fixed Key Assignments
22
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The keys and their functions are as follows:
Key Action
Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The green LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.
Signal
Silence
Silences the bells. The green LED will flash when Signal Silence is available. There may be a silence inhibit before the bells can be silenced if they are activated by an
Alarm condition. The yellow LED flashes when the bells have been silenced. The bells will reactivate if a subsequent Alarm is received by the panel.
System
Reset
Second
Stage Inhibit
System Reset resets part or all of the system.
• The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.
• The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm, or there is a ground fault.
Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors. The yellow LED also flashes if the ground fault relay is activated. Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be re-activated after 5 to 30 seconds.
Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is 0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.
Notes:
1.
The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.
2.
If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.
3.
The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.
Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For
STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage. Second
Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the yellow LED will flash when it has been activated.
Fire Drill
Lamp Test
Releaser
Disconnect
Activates all the bell circuits, both regular and coded, in Alert mode. Press a second time to have all bell circuits sound in Evacuation mode. Press a third time to end the
Fire Drill. The yellow LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The
Fire Drill is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.
Flashes the panel LEDs in sequence starting with the zone alarm LEDs. Press
Lamp Test repeatedly to cycle through the zone supervisory LEDs, zone trouble
LEDs, system LEDs, and Lamp Test Off.
Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation.
The yellow LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected,
Releaser Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or
1.
23
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Key
Relay
Disconnect
Test Mode
Signal
Disconnect
Common
Disconnect
General
Alarm
Halt
Action
Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing.
This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.
Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the
LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select INITIATING CIRCUITS for MR1 programs, or ADDRESSABLE or
CONVENTIONAL for MR2 programs. Then select TEST. For conventional circuits, each zone will then be presented in turn for selection. Select either TEST or
NORMAL. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu. While in Test Mode, any conventional smoke detectors activated on the test circuits will be automatically reset after 30 seconds.
When test mode is ended, all zones and devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.
Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.
Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Disables the relays or a City Tie Module (MRCTYB). When a MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated.
Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.
Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the yellow LED flashes when it has been pressed.
24
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Key
Switch
Switch n n
On
Off
Action
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.
Manual
Restart
Dialer Settings
The Dialer Settings dialog (see Figure 15 ) allows for the programming of various communications options.
The 1 st
, 2 nd
and 3 rd
Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:
• HEX (B)-simulates the [*] key
• HEX (C)-simulates the [#] key
• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone
• HEX (E)-forces the panel to pause for 2 seconds
• HEX (F)-end of telephone number marker
The 1 st
and 2 nd
Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be
Figure 15: Dialer Settings programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.
The 1 st
and 2 nd
Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.
The Dialer Settings window has the following push buttons along the right side:
• Exit: Close the Dialer Settings window and return to the IDs window.
• Configuration 1: Display the Dialer Configuration 1 screen.
• Configuration 2: Display the Dialer Configuration 2 screen.
• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data screen.
• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes screen.
25
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Dialer Configuration 1
The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog
(see Figure 16 ) contains the First
Communicator Options, Second
Communicator Options and
International Options.
The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station.
When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When Disabled is selected, the dialer will not communicate any events.
Figure 16: Dialer Configuration 1
The TLM One/Two Check options determine whether the dialer will test for telephone line faults on line one and line two respectively.
The Third Phone # can be programmed for two different modes of operation. When Alternate
Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number.
When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third number only if all attempts to communicate to the first number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated. When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.
The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or DTMF dialing. If All attempts Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing. If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse dialing for the remaining attempts.
The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA Reporting Codes.
The SIA Max Events option sets the maximum number of events the dialer will send for one SIA transmission. When 20 per Round is selected, SIA sends a maximum of 20 events per round.
When 8 per Round is selected, SIA sends maximum of 8 events per round.
The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the values that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic Contact ID Reporting Codes.
The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Line 1 for test transmissions. If a trouble exists on Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.
When the Force Dialing option is set to enabled, if the first attempt by the panel to call the monitoring station fails, on every subsequent attempt the panel will dial regardless of the presence of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present.
When the Busy Tone Detection option is enabled, if busy tone is detected, the dialer will disengage the phone line and try to place the call again following the delay between dialing attempts. When
Disabled is selected, the dialer will use the standard dialing procedure for every attempt.
26
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60, and when 33/67 is selected it is 33/67.
The Handshake option determines the handshake used for BPS transmissions. When 1600 Hz is selected, the dialer responds to a 1600 Hz handshake. When Standard is selected, the dialer responds to the handshake designated by the format selected (1400 or 2300 Hz).
The ID Tone can be set to 1300Hz or 2100 Hz. The panel will emit a tone at the selected frequency for 500 ms every 2 seconds when it places a call to indicate that it is a digital equipment call, not voice. When Disabled is selected, this feature will not be used.
Dialer Configuration 2
The Dialer Configuration 2 screen (see Figure 17 ) contains the Swinger Shutdown
Variables, Other Options and
Test Transmission options.
The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The alarm or trouble will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for Zone
Alarm and Restore, Zone
Supervisory and Restore, Zone
Figure 17: Dialer Configuration 2
Trouble and Restore and Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight.
To disable the feature, program 000.
The Test Transmission Time of Day determines when the automatic test transmission will occur.
The entry is four digits (HH:MM). To disable the feature, program the time as [9999].
The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions. This is automatically set so that tests are performed daily and may not be varied.
The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals.
The Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble. The default setting is 5 attempts.
Post Dial Wait for Handshake is the amount of time the dialer will wait for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the programmed telephone number.
27
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Call Directions
The Call Directions dialog (see
Figure 18 ) contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will be used to communicate events.
There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are Fire Zone Alarm/
Restore, Supervisory Zone Alarm/
Restore, Zone Trouble/Restore,
Maintenance Trouble/Restore and
Test Transmissions.
Figure 18: Call Directions
Zone Data
The Zone Data dialog (see Figure 19 ) contains zone definitions and reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate events.
The Groups List is a list of all currently defined groups. Each line entry includes the Group ID and its message/description.
Click on the desired group in order to program it.
The Definition specifies the identifier of the alarm or trouble being sent to the central station.
The zone types that are available are Fire, Sprinkler, Heat, Water and Untyped.
The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to
Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are: Figure 19: Zone Data
• Zone Alarm Reporting
Code
• Zone Alarm Restoral Reporting Code
• Trouble Reporting Code
• Trouble Restoral Reporting Code
• Supervisory Reporting Code
• Supervisory Restoral Reporting Code
28
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The Dialer Maintenance and
Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 20) contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.
The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes.
Select one to program its reporting code.
The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to
Programmed, or when using
BPS formats. There are many different reporting codes in this group.
Figure 20: Circuits Window
2.6
Circuits and Devices Windows
The Circuits Window (see
Figure 21 ) allows for the defining of conventional and addressable input circuits. The Devices
Window (see Figure 22 ) allows for the defining of addressable devices, and for the smoke and contact type inputs of the Smoke
Detector + N/O Contact
Device circuit. These two windows are nearly identical. Most controls on one are found on the other with the few exceptions
Figure 21: Circuits Window noted. The current Circuit or Device is shown in the Title Bar of the window.
The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable. The highlighted circuit is described in the title bar of the
Circuits Window. Unused circuits are shown using three dashes. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another circuit. The <Up> and <Down> Arrow keys change the current circuit. The <Right> and <Left> Arrow keys will change the type of the current circuit. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current circuit.
The Circuit Type Selector is located below Circuit List on the left hand side. It is shown on the
Circuit Window only. It is a drop down box used to assign the current circuit type. If the circuit is unused, select not assigned. Only options supported by the Input Circuit Modules programmed for the current panel will be assignable.
29
MR-2900 Programming Manual
The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. It lists any defined addressable devices for the current addressable circuit, the two entries for a dual end-of-line circuit, and the separate smoke detector and n/o contract device for a Smoke Detector + N/O
Contact circuit. For addressable devices, the type of device and its function are shown for each one. Unused addresses are shown with three dashes. Use the <Backspace> key in order to
Figure 22: Devices Window quickly re-position the current selection to another device. The <Up> and <Down> Arrow keys change the current device. The <Right> and <Left Arrow> keys will change the type of the current device. The <Plus> and <Minus> keys will change the function of the current device.
Note: Both devices listed for Dual end-of-line and Smoke Detector + N/O Contact circuits must be defined.
The Device Type Selector is located below Device List on the left hand side. It is shown on the
Device Window only. It is used to assign the current device type. For addressable circuits, it displays sensors for addresses 1 to 99 and modules for addresses 101 to 199. If the address is unused, select not assigned. The following module types are available:
• Monitor (Class B): This is a standard monitor module using Class B (Style B) wiring and an end-of-line resistor. This must be chosen for MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M and MRI-
M503M modules.
• Monitor (Class A): This is a standard monitor module using Class A (Style D) wiring. This can be used only with the MRI-M500M and MRI-M502M modules.
• Control (supervising): This programs the MRI-M500S as a generic signalling circuit. It can be turned on by alarm or supervisory inputs. It will remain on until the system is reset.
• Control (relay): This is used for programming the MRI-M500R relay module.
• Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. It will turn off when Signal Silence is pressed.
It does not sound codes.
• Control (Strobe): This programs the MRI-M500S as a signalling circuit for use with strobes. It will be turned on continuously for both Alert and Evacuation mode operation until the system is reset (unless the strobe duration is programmed – see the Options
Dialog section for Strobe Duration ).
• Control (C-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a continuous releaser. It will remain on until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. After the Delay, the releaser is turned off until the panel is reset. The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds.
• Control (M-Releaser): This programs the MRI-M500S as a momentary releaser. It is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. After the Delay , the releaser is activated. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset. Momentary releasers function normally during an AC power fail.
The Delay can be from 0 to 180 seconds and the Duration can be up to 1800 seconds.
1800 seconds is 30 minutes. A Duration of zero (0) will cause the releaser to stay on until it is reset.
The Function Type Selector is used to program the function of the current input point. The following function types are available:
30
MR-2900 Programming Manual
• Alarm: This is a generic fire input. Displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List when activated.
• Pull Station: This is a fire input similar to Alarm. The differences are it displays **PULL
STATION** in the Alarm List and may not have a retard time programmed.
• Waterflow: This is a fire input similar to Alarm except that it displays **WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Bell circuits can be made non-silenceable for waterflow type inputs (see section 2.2 System Window ).
• Supervisory: This is used for such inputs as Low Water Pressure, Sprinkler Shut Off
Valve Closed, etc.
• Halt: This causes the related releaser outputs to not operate. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.4 Releaser Programming .
• Abort: This causes the related releaser outputs to have their associated timers to be stopped. The timers will start to run again when the input goes back to normal. The supervisory LED will be turned on by activation of this type of input. See section 1.4
Releaser Programming .
• Monitor: This is used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.
• Non-reporting: This is a non-latching type of input. They can only operate LEDs, function relays and control modules. The supervisory LED will be operated. Outputs operated by a
Non-reporting input cannot be also operated by another type of input or switch.
• Trouble: This function type is used for various circuit types and for control modules.
Trouble type inputs operate LEDs only, no other outputs are allowed. This function type is assigned by MHI automatically.
The Message is located in the middle of the top of the window. This 3 line by 20 character text message is displayed or printed for all signals originating from the current input point. Circuit types that use devices will have a default message created for them when defined. This message can be changed.
The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box will appear when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered. If a group message is being used, it will be displayed in the Message area, but the message cannot be altered.
There are a number of options that can be used for each input circuit or device. Not all options apply to all inputs. MHI will only show those options that are currently usable. The following options are available:
• Retard: This is the amount of time the input must stay in an alarm state before it is treated as a valid alarm. This option is not valid with Pull Station function type inputs nor for
Conventional Smoke Detector inputs. Conventional circuits are programmed for seconds of delay time. Addressable devices are programmed for a number of additional consecutive scans that must be in alarm before the panel will accept the alarm. The duration of a scan varies between 2.5 and 5 seconds. Note: It is the responsibility of the person writing the database to ensure that the retard time chosen does not exceed any limits allowed by code.
It is possible to generate long retard times that are in the two to three minute range if a large number of scans is chosen. For example, UL states that the system cannot take more than 50 seconds to report a waterflow condition.
One has to ensure that the total delay of the waterflow detector and the input combined does not exceed 50 seconds.
• Verify: Select to have Conventional Smoke Detector inputs verified. Verification causes the smoke detector to be reset. If the detector goes into alarm again within the verification time, the alarm is considered valid.
• Enable Fan Delay: Controls the staggered turning off of Control Modules (relay). If checked, Control Modules (relay) on this circuit will be turned off in sequence, from the lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel
31
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules
(supervising) is not affected by this setting.
• Disable Maintenance Alert: Disables the addressable smoke or heat sensor from reporting Maintenance Alert. Maintenance Alert is defined by the device staying at almost alarm threshold for an extended period of time. This is usually an indication that a smoke sensor requires cleaning. Heat sensors in high temperature areas may need the
Maintenance Alert disabled to limit nuisance troubles. Standard room temperature (20°C) will not cause a Maintenance Alert on a heat detector.
• Code Bells: Checking this option will cause only selected coded bells to sound coded signals
1
. If coded bells are used the following options are then also shown:
-- No Restore: If checked, the panel will not sound the Code again when the input restores. If not checked, the panel will sound a single round of the Code when the input restores
-- Code: This is the sequence that will be sounded when an alarm is received on this input. It can be up to 4 digits long. Hexadecimal digits are used, thus each digit can be from 1 to F, where A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14 and F=15.
-- Round: This is the number of times the Code will be repeated. It can be between 1 and
4 times for no restore inputs, and between 2 and 4 for restore inputs.
• Night Sens.
and Day Sens.: Selects the Alarm threshold sensitivity for addressable smoke sensors. Heat sensors always use Normal sensitivity. Increased sensitivity will cause alarms at lower levels of smoke. Sensors not attached to a switch always use the
Night Sensitivity. Sensors attached to a switch will use Night Sensitivity while the switch is
Off and Day Sensitivity while the switch is On. Night Sensitivity must always be equal to or more sensitive than the Day Sensitivity.
• Manual Restart: Check this to require that the control module not be reset by System
Reset but by Manual Restart . Use of this option will require that there be a Manual Restart function key assigned to the panel.
The push buttons located on the right hand side are:
• Exit: Closes the window and returns to the previous window.
• Devices: Opens the Devices Window for the current circuit (Circuits Window only).
• Copy: Copies the circuit/device information, relates and message from another input to the current input
(see Figure 23 ). The current input does not have to be defined. Relates cannot be copied between conventional and addressable input points. The
Panel ID, Circuit ID and Device ID (not always shown) list the circuit/device to be copied from.
Marking Transfer Main Definition will copy the listed circuit/device type and function to the current circuit/ device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs. Marking Transfer Relates will copy the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates. Marking Transfer Message will cause the message to be copied. Marking Transfer Devices (if shown) will copy any device definitions that the listed
Figure 23: Copy Dialog
Box circuit contains. These devices will copy messages and relates as based on those settings above.
1. Regular bells will only sound their respective Alert or Evac tones regardless of the settings chosen in this area.
32
MR-2900 Programming Manual
There is no check at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken.
For each database that is created, a warning about using copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database.
This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.
• Relate or Trbl Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the current circuit or device. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated when the input goes into alarm. The Relate button will display all output types that are available depending on the function type of the input. The Trbl Relate button will display only LEDs that can be related. Note: All panel outputs and control modules to be operated must be defined before they can be included in the relates of an input.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
2.7 Internal Circuits Window
The Internal Circuits Window (see
Figure 24 ) allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, etc. for the various internal circuits (functions) of the
Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 72,
73, 74, 75, 81, 82, and 96 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions. All internal circuits have specific meanings and are stored in the archive of the panel. MR-2944 and
MR-2934 annunciators only use internal circuits 51 and 52. See
Appendix 45) Condition Codes and
Zone Numbers for a list of all the internal circuits.
Some of the internal circuits are:
Figure 24: Internal Circuits Window
• Internal Circuit 0, General
Alarm : This is the General Alarm function. General Alarm can be received from an annunciator or from an SE 2000. It can be assigned to one of the Hot Keys of control panels. General Alarm causes all the bells and strobes on the panel to operate in
Evacuation mode. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button.
• Internal Circuit 51, Comlink #1 Supervision: This is used for communications errors on
COM1 port of the panel or annunciator.
• Internal Circuit 52, Comlink #2 Supervision: This is used for communications errors on
COM2 port of the panel or annunciator.
• Internal Circuit 71, Network Ground Fault : This indicates one of the COM1 wires is shorted to ground.
• Internal Circuit 81, 1st Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in first stage by an alarm input. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require
33
MR-2900 Programming Manual operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.
• Internal Circuit 82, 2nd Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in the second stage mode by an alarm input or by a time-out. Any additional outputs, LEDs, etc. that require operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated.
• Internal Circuit 96, Fire Pre-alarm: This circuit is activated by any smoke detector in the auto-verify process or addressable device in alarm during the Retard period. It can be related to an LED to give a visual indication that an alarm is in the verification process.
• Internal Circuit 99, Common Trouble: This circuit is tripped by any internal circuit or trouble condition not associated with an internal circuit that turns on the Common Trouble
LED on the panel. This circuit is used to annunciate common trouble conditions at a remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel.
The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel. Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.
Warning: Some of the internal circuits (eg. checksum) do not have restore signals associated with them. They generally relate to a condition that requires either service work or a reboot of the panel.
Any relates assigned to such an internal circuit will have no way to be reset short of re-booting the entire network.
List Entries: This is a set of radio buttons for a new feature that allows the user to control the information displayed. Relevant lists only items applicable to version 20. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.
The following push buttons are available:
• Exit: Closes the Internal Circuits Window and returns to the Panel Window.
• Reset: Clears all relates associated with the current internal circuit.
• Relate: Opens the Relate Window for the internal circuit. This allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, relays and control modules to be operated by the internal circuit.
• Copy Relates: Copies the relates from another input to the current internal circuit (see
Figure 16 ). The values of the panel and circuit are required. Press Copy to copy the information. If the function type of the two circuits is different, a requester is presented to confirm the copy.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
34
MR-2900 Programming Manual
2.8 Relate Window
The Relate Window (see Figure
25 ) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs, LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states. Inputs can operate bells/ strobes, LEDs, relays, control modules on any panel in the system and continuous/ momentary releasers on the same panel. Switches can operate relays, LEDs, control modules on any panel in the system and control the day/night sensitivity
Figure 25: Relate Window change of any addressable detector on any panel. The title bar describes the current input point/switch/group and current output panel or annunciator.
Groups is a comma separated list of all the groups that the point is to use for relates. Up to ten groups can be listed. These groups are assigned to the point itself and does not change as the current output panel changes. Relates that are part of the groups are not shown in the Relate
Window but can be shown on the Map Window if so desired.
The Panel List is a list-box located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both
Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The highlighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input. When a different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel.
The Outputs List shows the programmable outputs of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. It lists all outputs, along with their definition and current state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected, act if they are activated by default, and n/a for not available. A blank definition is for unused outputs. Bell and Strobe outputs can only be selected for Fire Alarm type inputs. If
Complex Releasers are enabled, releasers can have three other states: Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in; *A* or *B* which allow for
AND logic. The releaser will not operate until both an A and a B input have been activated. Use the
<space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the
<Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another output.
The Relays List shows the general purpose function relays of the panel. It is not shown for annunciators. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another relay.
The LEDs List shows the LED zones available on the panel or annunciator. This will not be shown if the panel has no LEDs. Each is listed by number and state. The states are *on* for selected, blank for not selected and n/a for not available. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another LED. The actual number of LED zones varies depending upon the panel or annunciator.
The Device List shows the addressable devices that can be related to the current point. For system inputs and groups, it is displayed only if there are any control or relay modules defined for
35
MR-2900 Programming Manual the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors, or any control or relay modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel. circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. If Complex
Releasers are enabled, control modules programmed for releasers can have three other states:
Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in; *A* or *B* which allow for AND logic. The releaser will not operate until both an A and a B input have been activated. Devices that are not available or are invalid are not shown. Use the <space> key or double click on the entry to cycle between available selections.
The Evac check box is an option for Fire Alarm type inputs only. Selecting this option will cause all
Bells and Strobes for this panel to operate in Second Stage (Evacuation) mode. If selected, Bell and Strobe type outputs for this panel will not be selectable. This will not affect the Bell and Strobe selection of other panels.
The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator will receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator will not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.
The push buttons, located on the right side of the window, are:
• Exit: Closes the Relate Window and returns to the previous window.
• Map: Displays and/or updates the Map Window. See section 2.8 Map Window of the
Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor .
• Verify List: Displays the Verify List. If there is no Verify List, a requester will appear asking whether you wish to perform a verification. See section 2.6.5 Verify of the Modul-R
Human Interface Database Editor for a full description of the Verify List and its uses.
• View Groups: Displays the Groups Window. This is for reviewing the defined groups. No editing can be done to the groups. To edit the groups, return to the System Window. See section 2.4 Groups Window .
36
MR-2900 Programming Manual
3.0 LCD Programming
3.1 General Comments
A number of items are programmed through the LCD and keypad. This is called the LCD menu. All options are under the PROGRAM option on the Main Menu of the panel. The Main Menu can be recalled to the LCD by pressing <Home> .
Note: The only item that must be programmed from the LCD menu is the Panel ID. This must be done before the database is downloaded.
There are multiple levels of program access. Privilege Level 0 is the base level of operation.
Privilege Level 1 allows access to privileged Hot Key functions and limited programming. Privilege
Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.
While programming through the LCD menu, the panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid key is pressed. Programming is done through a series of menus and requester screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information (see Figure 26 ). Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item.
Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press <Enter> to select. In Figure 26 , pressing <Enter> will bring up the Program Menu.
Title
Menu Item
Selected Menu Item
Modul-R by Secutron
12:22
>STATUS
>
PROGRAM
HISTORY<
PASSCODE<
Menu Item
Menu Item
Figure 26: Typical Menu
A menu option of more will display further menu options that do not fit on the current screen. All the screens of a menu will loop around continuously. The default option, ie. the option next to the cursor, is the one to the upper left of the screen. Generally, but not always, more is the default option.
Selector screens (see Figure 27 ) are screens where options are toggled on or off. Options that are on are marked by an asterisk(*) while options that are off are marked with a dash (-). Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press <Enter> to change it.
Move the cursor to OK and press <Enter> to save any changes, or press <Clear> to lose any changes. In Figure 27 , the alarm and trouble relays are selected and the supervisory relay is not selected to be disconnected when the Common Disconnect hotkey is pressed. Pressing <Enter> will cause the alarm relay to be not selected.
Title
Options
Selections
COMMON DISCONNECT
A S T
*
- * OK<
Figure 27: Typical Selector
37
MR-2900 Programming Manual
For all screens, <Clear> returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and
<Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.
3.2 Clock
This menu has the following options:
• Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu.
The new date will be sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels will assume this date. The date change will be recorded in the Archive.
• Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time will be sent to all other panels on the Network, if used. All panels will assume this time. If <Enter> is pressed with no time entered, the current time will be sent to all panels on the network. If a change of greater than 5 minutes occurs, the new time will be recorded in the archive.
Notes:
1.
The Master Panel in a network will synchronize all clocks in the network at 03:30 every day, sending both date and time.
2.
Changing the time while the panel is calibrating will abort the calibration.
• Calibrate: Calibrates the clock so that it keeps correct time. Calibration takes 2 to 45 days. Waiting longer will give more accurate results. The panel will function normally while calibrating. When sufficient time has passed, re-selecting this function will ask for the correct time. The calibration will then be reported. In a network, only the master panel needs to be calibrated. Note: Changing the time using the Time option will abort the calibration. If a panel is currently in a calibration, it will ignore time changes sent over the network.
3.3 Common Relays
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. The menu has the following options:
• Disconnect: View or change the relays that can be disconnected by the Common
Disconnect hot key. Selected relays will be marked by an asterisk (*). To change the selection, move the cursor to the desired relay A(larm), S(upervisory) or T(rouble) and press <Enter> to change. Select OK when done. <Clear> will return to Program Menu without making changes.
• Test Inhibit: View or change whether common relays are disconnected during Test Mode or not. <Clear> will return to Program Menu without making changes.
3.4 Switches
This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. View or change the status of any switches.
These switches can be set to On, Off or Auto. The Auto state only applies to switches that have a timer associated with them. The Auto state allows the switch to follow the timer settings. Any changes made are broadcast to the network so that all panels have the same state. Settings are retained by the panel if it is re-booted and the Master Unit will broadcast its settings to the network upon start up. See section 2.3 Switches Window for information on programming what the switch affects.
The menu has the following options:
• Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch will be shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown.
38
MR-2900 Programming Manual
• All Off: Force switches into the Off mode. The number displayed is the number of timers that are switched On. This option is shown only if no switches have timers associated with them.
• All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers will go into the state dictated by the time. The number displayed is the number of switches with timers forced On or Off. This option has no effect on switches without timers. This option is not shown if no timers are associated with the switches.
3.5 Battery
Displays the current battery status and charger calibration. The display shows:
Line 1: Screen Title
Line 2: AC State and Battery Charger Calibration Numbers (diagnostic use only)
Line 3: Current State of the Battery and Menu Option (see below)
Line 4: Menu Options (listed below)
The menu has the following options:
• OK: Return to Program Menu.
• Calibrate: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This calibrates the Battery
Charger. The batteries must be disconnected before beginning calibration. No keypad control is provided during calibration. The calibration display will return when calibration is over. Calibration only needs to be done when the main circuit board/power supply board pair is changed, or when the configuration is erased. All Battery Chargers come calibrated from the factory.
• Test: Force an immediate battery test.
3.6 Conventional
This menu provides for the testing and bypassing of conventional circuits. Each function will present each zone in turn for selection. Press <Clear> to return to this menu without making changes. The menu has the following options:
• Test: Select which zones to test. Test Mode must be on to select zones for testing. All zones selected are automatically deselected when Test Mode is turned off.
• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Select conventional circuits to bypass. A bypassed circuit will be ignored by the panel. Bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble condition.
3.7 Addressable
The menu has the following options
1
:
• Reset Max/Min: Clears the stored values for the maximum and minimum values returned by the addressable devices. These values are automatically cleared when the panel reboots.
• Duplicates Check: This will cause an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address. The panel automatically does this check on the hour.
• LED Mode: This controls how the LEDs on the devices are used. There are three options:
-- OFF/FLASH: The device LEDs are normally off and will flash when an alarm is reported.
The flashing LED will be reset when System Reset is pressed.
-- FLASH/ON: The device LEDs flash each time they are polled. They will latch on in
Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. Note: Due to current
1. Panels with 64K EEPROM will not retain Bypass, Sensitivity or Control Module forced states when restarted.
39
MR-2900 Programming Manual draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors
1
on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.
-- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and will latch on in Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed. This option will not be shown if the addressable coprocessor cannot support this mode. Note: Due to current draw limitations, only the first
5 detectors on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation.
-- RESET: This functions resets the LEDs to their off state.
• Sensitivity: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This allows for the manual adjustment of the sensitivity of addressable detectors. All devices have a default sensitivity assigned in the database. The detector can be set to the database default value or to one of the pre-defined levels replacing the database values. These manual values are retained if the panel is re-booted.
-- SELECT: Change the manual sensitivity of addressable detectors. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector will be displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the detector list.
-- PRINT: Print a list of all detectors that have a sensitivity other than the one selected in the database. This option is not shown if no manual sensitivities have been set.
-- ALL DEFAULT: Change all manual sensitivity settings to the default values set in the database.
• Monitor: Allows you to select between all Class A monitor modules and individually selected ones in MHI.
• Bypass: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This selects devices to be bypassed. A bypassed device will be ignored by the system. Addressable bypasses are retained when the panel is re-booted. Only devices included in the database can be bypassed. Bypasses are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The Bypass menu has the following options:
-- ON: Select devices to be bypassed. Enter the circuit and device number. Press
<Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> will remove any numbers entered. Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.
-- OFF: Select bypassed devices to be returned to normal operation. Each bypassed device is listed in order. Select next to keep the bypass on or select OFF to remove the bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed.
-- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed next to this option.
• Test: Select devices to be tested. Test Mode must be active for this selection to be available. All devices selected for testing are automatically deselected when Test Mode is turned off. The Test Menu has the following options:
-- ON: Select devices for testing. Enter the circuit and device number, or enter the circuit number only to select all devices on the circuit. Press <Enter> to accept the device and to enter the next one. Pressing <Clear> will remove any numbers entered.
Pressing either <Enter> or <Clear> with no numbers displayed will end the input mode.
1. BRK programs dated before 2 April 1999 limit the number of LEDs on to 3 per circuit.
40
MR-2900 Programming Manual
-- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Test Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices selected for testing.
-- ALL OFF: Remove all devices being tested, if any, from the test mode. The number of devices being tested is displayed next to this option.
• Control Modules: This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. Allow for the manual operation of the control and relay modules included in the database. There are three states available: Automatic (controlled by device inputs), Manual On, and Manual Off. This mode is retained if the panel is re-booted. Manually controlled modules are annunciated by a common trouble condition. The menu has the following options:
-- SELECT: Change the Auto/On/Off state of control modules. The first screen asks for a circuit and device number. Enter the circuit and device or press <Enter> without entering any number to view the first control module in the database. Each control module will be displayed in turn, showing the current state and allowing for it to be changed or the next control module to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the control module list.
-- ALL AUTO: Change any control modules that are forced on or off back to automatic mode.
3.8 Archive
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. View and change the settings for the recording of optional entries into the history. The following items can be included or not included in the history:
• Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner. Test signals will be marked as such.
• Non-Reporting: View or change whether non-reporting signals are recorded in the history or not. Non-reporting signals are recorded by default.
• Network: Local causes only the local panel’s events to be stored in its archive. Global causes all panel’s events to be stored in this panel’s archive. This option is shown only for the master panel in a network.
3.9 Relays
This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2. This function allows for the manual operation of the relays. There are three possible states: Automatic (state determined by inputs), Forced On, or
Forced Off. This mode will be retained if the panel is re-booted.
• Individual : Change the Auto/On/Off state of relay. Each relay will show the current state and allow it to be changed or the next relay to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the relay list.
• All Auto : Change any relays that are forced on or off back to automatic mode. The number after All Auto is the number of relays in a forced on or off state.
3.10 Ports
This menu has the following options:
• Network: Allows for the setting of parameters related to the network. If the downloaded database indicates that there is no network, the only option is Panel ID . The Network
Menu has the following options:
-- Panel ID: This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. Set the Network ID number.
This is between 1 and 254.
41
MR-2900 Programming Manual
-- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie. equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the Inner Door. Each panel will record in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command.
-- Global Commands: Sends the selected key to all Control and Annunciator Units on the
Network. Each unit, including the sending unit, will respond as if that key has been pressed.
-- Verify: Enable or disable Network Verify reporting troubles. If disabled, the panel will not report a Network Verify trouble (no common trouble sequence), but will still display the error information in the Misc. Troubles.
-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel or annunciator is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate for Com Port 1. Since each installation is different, this value will need to be chosen by trial and error. If the default rate does not work, chose the next slower rate. Continue this process until a rate that works is chosen. The available baud rates are: 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300. The recommended rates are: 4800, 2400, and 1200.
Baud Rate
9600
4800
2400
1200
Maximum Capacitance
100 nF
220 nF
470 nF
680 nF
• Port 3: The options available vary depending upon the Port 3 setting in the database and the operating program installed:
Digital Protocol 1 (MRZ-7 Programs): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. It has the following options:
-- ID: Select the panel ID number for the central station/city-tie connection communications port. Valid ID numbers are 1 to 16.
-- Mode: Select whether circuits 1 to 24 or LEDs 1 to 24 are transmitted. Transmitting the
LED numbers allows for zone information to be sent when addressable devices are used.
-- Baud: Set the communication baud rate. Select Auto to have the panel automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used. The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The SE
2000 will report the panel as offline.
Digital Protocol 2 (MRZ-7B Programs): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000. The panel will use the Network ID for identification. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence. It has the following options:
-- Master: This option is available only on the master panel of a network. GLOBAL causes the master to transmit all signals in the network. LOCAL causes the master to transmit only its own signals.
-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the SE 2000. There are the following options:
42
MR-2900 Programming Manual
DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation.
ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits.
GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. Enter a value of 0 (zero) to have the panel to automatically choose the SE 2000 baud rate. If required a fixed baud rate can be used.
The available fixed baud rates are 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The SE
2000 will report the panel as offline.
PC Connect (MR2-7G Programs): Allows for the configuration of the communications to a
GRID package. If more than one signal needs to be sent, new alarms take precedence.
-- ON/OFF: Allows for enabling or disabling of the port. The master panel will report for all panels in the network.
-- Baud: Sets the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
-- Delay: Sets the length of time the panel will wait before reporting the GRID package offline. This can be set from 10 to 255 seconds.
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3. The
GRID package will report the panel as offline.
Annunciator Connect (MR2-7A Programs): Allows for the configuration of the communications to MR-2614, MR-2644, MR-2801-MR and Dialler.
-- Baud: Sets the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 4800 and
1200.
1
Voice Evac. System (MR2-7E Programs): Allows for setting parameters related to the connection to the MV2700 voice evacuation panel.
-- Mode: Selects how information is sent to the MV2700. There are the following options:
DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation.
ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits.
GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.
-- Retry: Set the number of times to try to resend a message before giving up. If this number of retries are attempted without success, the other panel is considered to be off-line. The default value is 8. This would be increased only if the communications line cycles between on-line and off-line. (Range: 2 – 99)
-- Disconnect: If enabled, the Common Disconnect hot key will shut down Port 3.
-- Baud: Set the communications baud rate. The available fixed baud rates are 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 and 300.
• -- Terminal: Select ANSI or TeleVideo protocol. Most terminals and terminal emulator programs support ANSI protocol.
• -- Printer: MR1-1 and MRx-2 Programs: Select the baud rate for the printer port. The available rates are 9600 (default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, and 300.
1. Only MR-2614 v2.1 and up support 4800 baud. Previous versions only support 1200 baud.
43
MR-2900 Programming Manual
MRx-3 and MRx-7 Programs: There are two options for configuring the Port 6 serial printer port:
-- Size: Set the width of the lines sent to the Port 6 printer or disable the printer. Options are None, 20 and 80. The default is None, which disables this feature. Use 20 when using an MR-2920 printer.
-- Baud: Select the baud rate for the printer port if the size is 80 columns. The available rates are 9600 (default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, and 300.
3.11 Alarm List
This menu controls the operation of the Alarm List. This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. It has the following options:
• Reset: Select when entries are taken out of the Alarm List. AUTO removes entries as soon as the condition restores. MANUAL requires that Reset be pressed before they are removed. Conditions that have restored will be shown as a restored condition in the Alarm
List.
• Remote: Routes the messages for events from the panel to annunciators. The options are:
-- ALL: All messages are sent to all annunciators.
-- SELECT: Messages are sent as directed in the database.
3.12 Passcode
Allows for the changing of passcodes. The Privilege Level 2 can change both the Level 1 and 2 passcodes, while Level 1 can only change the Level 1 passcode. Passcodes are four digit numbers in the range 1000 to 9999. Type in the new passcode and press <Enter> to accept.
Asterisks will be displayed instead of the numbers. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Program or Passcode Menu.
The default Level 2 passcode is 2222. The default Level 1 passcode is 1111. These passcodes should be changed to prevent unauthorized access.
There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from
Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten.
3.13 Memory
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options:
• Erase Configuration: This will erase all initiating circuit, bell, relay, releaser and privilege values entered from the keypad and LCD menu, and replace them with default values.
With MR2 programs, this has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database. Confirmation is asked before erasure. After the Configuration has been erased, the panel must be reset using the reset button at the top of the Main Circuit Board, if the panel does not do this automatically. The following items are not erased: Serial Number,
Clock Calibration, Level 1 Passcode, Level 2 Passcode, Main Board Type, Terminal Board
Type, Input Circuit Modules. Note: The battery charger will need to be re-calibrated (see
Section 3.5, page 39) after erasing the configuration.
3.14 Buzzer
This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This sets the length of the Trouble Buzzer Inhibit time. This is the length of time that a new trouble will not cause the buzzer to sound after it has been silenced for a trouble. The time can be set to 0 or from 15 to 255 seconds. If 0 is chosen, the buzzer will sound for every trouble.
44
MR-2900 Programming Manual
4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
The Alarm List and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.
Condition Code
T
U
W
P
Q
R
S
I
J
M
N
D
E
G
H
Archive Alarm List
A ALARM
B
C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort halt spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Hot Key Pressed
Illegal Addressable Device
Switch
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Releaser Halt
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
45
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
50
51
52
4
5
6
2
3
0
1
7
Panel
Zone
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Initiating Circuit 3
Initiating Circuit 4
Initiating Circuit 5
Initiating Circuit 6
Initiating Circuit 7
Initiating Circuit 8
Initiating Circuit 9
Initiating Circuit 10
Initiating Circuit 11
Initiating Circuit 12
Initiating Circuit 13
Initiating Circuit 14
Initiating Circuit 15
Initiating Circuit 16
Initiating Circuit 17
Initiating Circuit 18
Initiating Circuit 19
Initiating Circuit 20
Initiating Circuit 21
Initiating Circuit 22
Initiating Circuit 23
Initiating Circuit 24
Network Verify
Comlink 1
Comlink 2
Panel
Zone
80
2
81
82
83
84
85
1
86
3
87
65
1
66
67
69
1
71
53
54
55
59
60
61
64
1
88
1
89
1
90
1
91
1
92
1
93
1
94
1
95
1
Description
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Printer Port
Addressable Modules Comlink
Output (bell/releaser) Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
Program Checksum
Database Checksum
AC Power
Low Battery
Program Restart
Network Ground Fault
Privilege Level
1st Stage Alarm
2nd Stage Alarm
Switch
Test Mode
Erase Configuration
Change Configuration
Passcode Tamper
Database Loaded
Time/Date Change
Hot Key Activation
Memory Overflow
Network Reboot
New Program
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required why
Notes:
1.
These zones do not restore.
2.
Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.
3.
This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit:
Dual End-of-Line Circuit:
000 - Wiring Fault
All Others - Device Number
000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Switch #1
002 - Switch #2
Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit: 000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Smoke Detector
002 - Contact Device
46
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number
Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number
Note: Only MR-2614 Annunciators use IDs other than 000.
Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Auxiliary Power Supervision (Zone 61): Auxiliary Power Circuit Number
Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot
001 - Watchdog
002 - Circuits 9 to 16
003 - Circuits 17 to 24
002 - Clock Monitor
003 - Illegal Instruction
004 - Unused Interrupt
005 - Orphan Interrupt
Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set
Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number
Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed
001 - Fire Drill
002 - Lamp Test
003 - Releaser Disconnect
004 - Relay Disconnect
005 - Test Mode
006 - Signal Disconnect
007 - Acknowledge
008 - Signal Silence
009 - Reset
010 - Common Disconnect
011 - General Alarm
012 - Halt
013 - Abort
014 - 2nd Stage Inhibit
016 - Switch 1 On
017 - Switch 2 On
018 - Switch 3 On
019 - Switch 4 On
020 - Switch 5 On
021 - Switch 6 On
022 - Switch 7 On
023 - Switch 8 On
024 - Switch 9 On
025 - Switch 10 On
026 - Switch 11 On
027 - Switch 12 On
028 - Switch 13 On
029 - Switch 14 On
030 - Switch 15 On
031 - Switch 16 On
032 - Switch 1 Off
033 - Switch 2 Off
034 - Switch 3 Off
035 - Switch 4 Off
036 - Switch 5 Off
037 - Switch 6 Off
038 - Switch 7 Off
47
MR-2900 Programming Manual
039 - Switch 8 Off
040 - Switch 9 Off
041 - Switch 10 Off
042 - Switch 11 Off
043 - Switch 12 Off
044 - Switch 13 Off
045 - Switch 14 Off
046 - Switch 15 Off
047 - Switch 16 Off
051 - Manual Restart
Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2900 panel
001 - CoProcessor for circuits 1..8
002 - CoProcessor for circuits 9..16
003 - CoProcessor for circuits 17..24
Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command
Network Reboot Required Who (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network
Reboot Required trouble
Network Reboot Required Why (Zone 95): 001 - network
002 - network
003 - port 3
006 - negative counter
008 - memory overflow
009 - co-processor memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
48
MR-2900 Programming Manual
5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation
5.1 General
Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10
Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½ A (500 mA) for 20 hours. A car battery is designed to deliver "cranking" power for a short time, (a few hundred Amps for a few minutes). Unfortunately, fire alarm control panels need both of these characteristics, that is, driving a heavy bell load for a relatively short time, at the end of a 24 hour standby current drain. This protection necessitates certain over sizing.
Regardless of the standby calculation and tables, the battery must be at least 150% of the bell load. e.g. A 4 A total bell load necessitates at least 6 A hour battery (in terms of 20 hour rating).
Note: The MR-2900 Control Panel is capable of driving a bell load of 8 A maximum. This restriction must be considered when laying out a bell system.
The standard battery options available for the MR-2900 Control Unit are: a) 4 Ah internal, b) 7 Ah, c) 10 Ah, d) 24 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, e) 38 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet, f) 48 Ah external in a separate battery cabinet (not UL listed).
The components of the MR-2900 Control Panel and other devices have the following typical current draws:
MR-2900
MR-2910
MR-2908
MR-2918
MR-2928
MR-2938
MR-2909
MR-2919
MR-2944LC
74 mA (includes MR-2931, MR-2905 and
MR-2902 boards)
30 mA
14 mA
14 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm
14 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm
10 mA + 80 mA per circuit in alarm
50 mA
50 mA
65 mA
MR-2915 1 mA
MR-2801-MR 20 mA in municipal box mode 250 mA in alarm in reverse polarity mode 25 mA in alarm (+ load)
Dialer 45 mA stand by
60 mA in alarm
MR-D1010R1 100 mA
MR-D1010R2 200 mA
MR-2644 20mA
MR-2690
MR-2614
MR-2622
MRI-1251
MRI-1551
MRI-2251
MRI-2551
MRI-3251
MRI-5551
MRI-M500M
MRI-M501M
MRI-M502M
5 mA
20 mA
5 mA
300 µA
200 µA
300 µA
200 µA
300 µA
200 µA
300 µA
300 µA
200 µA
MRI-M503ME 300 µA
MRI-M500C
MRI-M500X
300 µA
450 µA
49
MR-2900 Programming Manual
5.2 Sample Calculation
The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, will also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be:
Board/Device
Basic MR-2900 Panel
MR-2908 Input Module
MR-2909 Input Module
MR-2910 Network Board
MRI-1251 Smoke Detector
MRI-5551 Heat Detector
MRI-500M Monitor Module
MRI-500C Control Module
Device
MRA-MBG6 Bell
MRL-WST Strobe
30
0.30
0.20
0.30
0.20
Draw (mA)
74
14
50
Draw (mA)
22
50
1
80
80
20
1
1
Quantity
1
33
Sub-Total:
Quantity
73
21
Sub-Total:
Total:
0.72
0.58
0.38
0.15
24 hour (Ah)
1.78
0.34
1.20
0.16
5.21
5 min (Ah)
0.14
0.09
0.23
5.44
50
MR-2900 Programming Manual
6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal
The MR-2900 Control Unit, MR-2909 Addressable Input Module and MR-2919 Addressable Input
Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation. Certain Control Unit commands are available only at certain privilege levels. Units will beep once when a valid character is received and three times if an invalid character is received. If a command is not finished within about 10 seconds, the unit will beep three times and will lose any information sent.
The service terminal program provides the information on a number of different screens. When the terminal is first connected, it will be viewing whatever screen was the last viewed. To view Screen
0, which lists all the screens that are available, press
0
<Tab> . Press <Delete> to refresh the screen. Press the <Tab> key to view the next screen. See below for a complete description on the
<Tab> key commands. Certain Control Unit screens are available only at higher privilege levels.
The service terminal of the addressable modules, if any installed, is available through the Control
Unit's service terminal.
6.1 Control Unit
Screens
The Control Unit uses 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit for communication over the serial port. The default baud rate is 9600 bps.
All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, the current date, the current privilege level, the panel number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below along with any key commands valid only on that screen. To view a particular screen, enter n <Tab> where n is the screen number.
Those screens marked with an asterisk (*) are useful in trouble shooting the panel.
Screen Name
Description
0*
1
2
3
4
Index
LCD
Misc
Battery
AC
A list of all the available screens.
Display and control the panel LCD. This is useful for training sessions since more people can view the terminal screen than can view the LCD directly. All keypad keys are mapped to the equivalent key board key, with the keypad <Clear> being mapped to the key board <End> . Note: The control feature does not work over a network.
A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.
Displays the current battery level, and the current status of the battery and AC power. Also shows the timer for the battery test.
Commands
<Ctrl-B>
0<Ctrl-B>
Print battery calculation
Execute a dynamic battery test once and end continuous testing if on.
9900 <Ctrl-B> Start continuous dynamic battery testing.
Display the current status of the AC power and the delay timer for report AC fail.
51
MR-2900 Programming Manual
6
7
Screen
5*
8
9*
10*
11*
12
13*
14
Name
Description
Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values. See screen 39 for addressable bells.
Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays.
Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits
(if any). See screen 40 for addressable releasers.
Common Relays Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common
Disconnect hot-key.
Alarm List Shows the current alarm list. This is the same list that is displayed on the LCD menu. Each screen in the LCD corresponds to one line on the terminal screen. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
Miscellaneous
Troubles
Output
Supervision
Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the
STATUS/MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.
Shows the current supervision readings and status for the bells and auxiliary power circuits. These values should be in the range
130 to 150 for Vhi, and 10 to 20 for Vlo (low gain) or around 100 for Vlo (high gain). If the numbers are jumping all over the place, there is a hardware fault with the terminal board.
Relay Summary Displays which relays and functions have been activated:
O Bell Circuits 1 to 8, MRx-3 & MRx-7
F Function Relays 1 to 4
A Common Alarm
S Common Supervisory
T Common Trouble
G Ground Fault
W Walk Test
L LCD Back Light
Archive Displays the Archive History List. This is the list of the last 900
(approximate) events that happened. See Appendix A for a description of the condition codes and zone numbers.
Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
Printer A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.
52
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Screen
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
27
29
30
31
32
Name
Description
Printer Status
Network
Port 1
Port 3
Conventional
Database
Conventional
Analog
Conventional
Detail
Misc. Outputs
System Reset
Port 9
(addressable)
Addressable
1..8
Addressable
9..16
Displays the current printer status.
Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages. Orphan message destruction is subject to the timers shown.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays information about the primary network port. Includes the status of the panels that are and should be online.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays information about the secondary network port. A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Shows the current status ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is offline.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays the current alarm and trouble status of each of the installed conventional input circuits.
Displays the current supervision readings of each of the installed conventional input circuits.
Displays the programming and status for a single conventional input circuit. This includes any timers that are connected to smoke detector operation.
Commands
C Display next initiating circuit
(1-24)C Display specified initiating circuit
Displays the status of follow trouble, follow supervisory and aux power output types.
Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that are reset when System Reset is pressed.
Shows the current condition of the three possible addressable boards and the status of the communications to the boards. Also displays information about screens 31 to 33.
Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 1 to 8 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens. This is for a future use.
Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 9 to 16 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens.
53
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Screen Name
Description
33 Addressable
17..24
Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 17 to 24 if it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens.
Notes for Screens 31 to 33:
1.
The keyboard commands (see below) are not available.
2.
The Addressable Module will display “Co-processor Screen #” on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel’s screen.
34 Addressable
Relays
Displays the automatic and force states for all the control modules on a circuit.
Commands
C Display next initiating circuit
(1-24)C Display specified initiating circuit
35 Sensitivity Displays the Day/Night status, the default and manual sensitivities of all sensors on an addressable circuit. Dots will be shown for any value that is not used.
Commands
C Display next initiating circuit
(1-24)C Display specified initiating circuit
36
37
Sensitivity List
Bypass & Test
38
39
40
49
50
Switches
Addressable
Bells
Addressable
Releasers
Clock
Tasks
Displays the value each sensitivity setting represents.
Displays the Bypass and Test status of all devices on an addressable circuit.
Commands
C Display next initiating circuit
(1-24)C Display specified initiating circuit
Show the current on/off status of each switch and list the timer associated with each one.
Displays a grid for one addressable circuit of the modules programmed as a bell or strobe. A B is shown for control modules programmed as a bell and an S for control modules programmed as a strobe. The second character is the current status. See Screen 5 for the panel bell outputs.
Displays 10 consecutive address. Each control module that is programmed as a releaser will have an asterisk shown in either the continuous or momentary line as required. Each column will show the current state at the top and programmed settings at the bottom. See screen 7 for the panel releaser outputs.
Shows the status of the Daylight Savings Time option & clock calibration.
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. This screen is for factory use only.
54
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Screen Name
Description
51*
52
60
68*
FIFO
Memory
Annunciator
Remote
Terminal
This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory
Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating. The task “SPI comlink” is the one that handles the addressable co-processor.
Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in the system.
Displays the states of the 24 LED zones on the front panel.
Displays the service terminal screens for another panel in the network. This allows for the trouble shooting of a system from a single location. This screen automatically disconnects the remote connection if memory gets low or if no communication is received for 15 seconds. The remote panel stops sending data after 15 minutes.
Commands
(id) N Display the service terminal for Panel id
<Esc> Disconnect remote connection
69* Network Verify Displays the current status of the network verify feature.
These keyboard commands are available on all screens except when the service terminal is connected to an Addresable Module (Screens 31 to 33). These keys are also available directly from the Addressable Module.
Command
<Del>
<Tab>
<Backspace>
0<Tab>
0-127<Tab>
0.0<Tab>
0.1<Tab>
A
D
(month).(date) D
Description
Clear and redisplay screen.
View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens.
View Selected Screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.
TeleVideo cursor control mode.
VT100 cursor control mode.
Silence buzzer.
Print the date and time.
Enter the date.
55
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Command
(month).(date).(year) D
(hours).(minutes) T
(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T
<Ctrl-V>
(code)<Ctrl-V>
0 ?
90 ?
99 ?
<Esc>
<Enter>
Description
Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to 99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a fourdigit format.
Set the time.
Set the time.
Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege.)
Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.
Print downloaded database.
Print archive.
Print configuration.
Stop Printout.
Advance printer (paper feed).
6.2 Addressable Module
The Addressable Module's service routines can be accessed through the Control Panel's service terminal using screens 31, 32 and 33. While the service terminal is accessing the Addressable
Module, all Control Panel Commands are unavailable. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel service routines.
All screens have a common status line across the top. It shows, from left to right, the current time, a diagnostic number, the current screen number and name. All available screens are listed and described below. Screens useful for trouble shooting are marked with an asterisk (*).
Note: The Addressable Module will display "Co-processor Screen #" on the status line to distinguish its screens from the Control Panel's screens.
Screen Name
0*
2
10*
15
19*
20*
Index
Misc
Miscellaneous
Troubles
Comlink
Read Me
Totals
Description
A list of all the available screens.
A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.
Display a list of all the troubles currently displayed by the
STATUS/MISC. TROUBLES selection from the LCD.
Displays the status of communications between the panel and the addressable module.
List of all the keyboard commands.
Lists for all circuits the number of devices assigned, on-line, missing, etc. Also lists the total number of devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions. Also lists current wiring supervision status for each loop.
56
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Screen Name
Description
21
22
23
24*
25
26
27
28
Detail
Type On-Line
Type Assigned
Errors
For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands sent.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are actually on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit.
Alarms
Function
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm,
Early Warning, Supervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the circuit.
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the Alarm and
Supervisory initiating devices. Control modules are neither type and are displayed as a dash (-).
Control Modules For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the Control modules.
Bypass For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently bypassed.
29
30
Test Mode
Analog
For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are currently under test.
Displays the analog values of 10 consecutive addresses for a single circuit.
This screen is for factory use only.
50
51
Tasks
FIFO Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a
Memory Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used. For each task, the first number is the current usage and the second is the maximum usage. If a task uses a large amount of FIFO memory, this means that task is having difficulty in operating.
The Addressable Module supports the following key board commands:
<Del>
<Tab>
Command
<Backspace>
Description
Clear and redisplay screen.
View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
57
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Command Description
0<Tab>
0-127<Tab>
A
(0-199)A
C
(1-24)C
0M
View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens.
View selected screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.
Display next address.
Display selected address.
Display next circuit.
Display selected circuit.
Reset minimum/maximum values.
The MR-2919 Class A Addressable Module also supports the following commands:
0P
1P
2P
Command Description
Energize all circuits
Energize odd circuits only
Energize even circuits only
58
MR-2900 Programming Manual
7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes
The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes.
Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:
*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1 where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.
SIA Format – Level 2: The SIA format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the
SIA Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:N
Ri00 FA 01
N = New Event
Ri00 = System Event
FA = Fire Alarm
01 = Zone 1
Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes
Reporting Code Code sent when...
Zone Supv./Rest.
zone goes into supervisory/ restore (2) S/R
Zone Alarms/
Rest.
zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored
A/R
T/R Zone Trouble/
Rest.
AC Fail Trouble/
Rest.
zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored
AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC
Trouble Delay=
MA/R
Battery Trouble/
Rest.
Ground Fault
Trouble/Rest.
NAC Trouble/
Rest.
Dialler Bus
Trouble/
Rest.
Line 1 or 2 TLM
Trouble/Rest.
Phone # 1 or 2
FTC Trouble/
Rest.
control panel battery is low/battery restored
Earth Ground Fault is detected/ restored
NAC circuit is opened/restored
Dialer Bus connection is lost/restored connection via Telephone Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will be sent
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
Dialer
Direction*
Contact
ID Auto
Rep.
Codes
AA
(1) 3A
SIA Auto
Rep.
Codes
See Table 4
See Table 4
(3) 73
(3) A1
(3) A2
(3) 1A
(3) 21
(3) 33
(3) 51
(3) 54
See Table 4
AT-000/
AR-000
YT-000/
YR-000
UT-000/
UJ-000
YA-000/
YH-000
NT-000/
NR-000
LT-XXX/
LR-XXX**
YC-XXX/
YK-XXX**
59
MR-2900 Programming Manual
Reporting Code Code sent when...
Dialer
Direction*
Contact
ID Auto
Rep.
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep.
Codes
Walk Test Start/
Stop
Test
Transmission
Normal/
Off-Normal control panel has entered/exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated test transmission reports system normal or off-normal (alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition
MA/R
T
(6) A7
(6) A2
TS-000/
TE-000
RP-000/
RY-000
* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral; S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission
** Line number/telephone number is identified (XX)
Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes
Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restorals when using the standard (i.e. not automatic)
Contact ID reporting format:
Medical Alarms Alarm
(1)A1 Emergency Panic Alarms
(1)A2 Fail to Report In (1)2A Panic
Fire Alarms
(1)1A Fire Alarm
(1)11 Smoke
(1)12 Combustion
(1)21 Duress
(1)22 Silent
(1)23 Audible
General Alarms
(1)13 Water Flow
(1)14 Heat
(1)15 Pull Station
(1)16 Duct
(1)17 Flame
24 Hour Non Fire
(1)51 Gas Detected
(1)52 Refrigeration
(1)53 Loss of Heat
(1)54 Water Leakage
(1)55 Foil Break
(1)56 Day Trouble
(1)4A General Alarm
(1)4A General Alarm
(1)43 Expansion module failure (1)59 Low Temp
(1)44 Sensor tamper (1)61 Loss of Air Flow
(1)45 Module Tamper
(1)57 Low Bottled Gas Level
(1)58 High Temp
Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restore Codes
Zone
Definition
Fire
Sprinkler
Alarm/Rest Rep.
Codes*
FA-ZZZ/FH-ZZZ
SA-ZZZ/SH-ZZZ
Untyped UA-ZZZ/UH-ZZZ
ZZZ = zones 01-250, 256
Supervisory/Rest. Rep.
Codes*
FS-ZZZ/FR-ZZZ
SS-ZZZ/SR-ZZZ
US-ZZZ/UR-ZZZ
Trouble/Rest. Rep.
Codes*
FT-ZZZ/FJ-ZZZ
ST-ZZZ/SJ-ZZZ
KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ
WT-ZZZ/WJ-ZZZ
UT-ZZZ/UJ-ZZZ
60
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
M R - 2 9 0 0
Fire Alarm Control Unit
O
PERATOR’S
M
ANUAL
Revision D
Document #: LT-2012
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
The installer is to hand over this manual to the owner of the system upon completion of work.
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Unit Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Power Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Types of Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Status Display ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 Zone LEDs ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................ 3
1.7 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 6
1.8 LCD and Keypad............................................................................................................................. 7
1.9 Silent Walk Test .............................................................................................................................. 9
2.0 Supplementary Information ...................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Diagnostic LEDs ............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.............................................................................................. 11
Miscellaneous Troubles ....................................................................................................................... 13 i
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual ii
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
1.0 Unit Operation
The operation of the MR1 and MR2 programs are almost identical. This chapter applies to both programs. Those functions that are different are noted.
1.1 Power Up Sequence
The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the Inner Door is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued; or the panel has a fault that triggers the internal watch-dog.
The LCD will first display "INITIALIZING MEMORY PLEASE WAIT". The panel will not respond to key presses or to zone activity. Once this step is done the panel will start to beep (buzzer does not sound after a Network Reboot). Press Acknowledge to silence the panel.
Panels running the MR2 program will display the message "LOADING DATABASE PLEASE
WAIT". At this time, the panels will respond to key presses, but not to input circuit conditions.
Note: Since the LCD menu is unavailable, any keys requiring a privilege level other than zero to be active will be unavailable.
When the initialization is complete, the Main Menu will be displayed on the LCD. At this time the panel is fully operational.
1.2 Types of Inputs
There are a number of types of inputs that can be used in the system. Each has different uses and limitations. They are:
• Alarm: This type of input is the normal inputs to the system from smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. It displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List.
• Pull Station: This type of input is for pull stations. They are required to activate bells and/ or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type cannot have a retard time. It displays **PULL STATION** in the Alarm List.
• Waterflow: This type of input is for water flow detectors. They are required to activate bells and/or strobes, as well as an LED. They can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, as well as releasers on the same panel. This type displays
**WATERFLOW** in the Alarm List. Through programming, Waterflow type alarms can make the bell circuits they activate to be non-silenceable.
• Supervisory: This type of input is for items such as Shut-Off valves and Pressure sensors for sprinkler systems. They are required to operate an LED. They cannot operate bells/ strobes but can optionally operate relays and control modules in a network, and releasers on the same panel.
• Halt: This type of input can only stop the operation of a releaser type output on the same panel. An LED is required for annunciation of the Halt function. It will use the supervisory
LED. Note: Use of this type of input must be limited access to maintain UL listing.
• Abort: This type of input can only hold the operation of a releaser type output on the same panel. This Abort function maintains the current state of the releaser. The delay timer will continue to run until 10 seconds are left. The releaser will resume normal operation as soon as the input restores. An LED is required for annunciation of the Abort function. It will use the supervisory LED.
• Monitor: This type of input used to monitor the action of items such as dampers, door, fans, etc. The supervisory LED is used. Monitor inputs can operate relays and control modules.
1
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
• Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They are also referred to as Non-Fire.
There is no requirement that these inputs cause any action whatsoever. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The
LEDs, relays and control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by
Fire, Supervisory, Abort or Halt type inputs.
1.3 Status Display
The status display is the top-right section of the front panel. It is visible through the front door. It consists of the common alarm LED, common supervisory LED, common trouble LED, AC power
LED, and the clock.
The common alarm (red) and supervisory (amber or yellow) LEDs will flash with any new alarm or supervisory signal. The common trouble (yellow) LED will flash with any new zone trouble or a new panel trouble, such as low battery, bell trouble, etc. The common LEDs will react to all panel inputs plus to most conditions it displays from other panels. The AC power (green) LED is lit if AC power is on. If the AC power has failed, the common LEDs will blink slowly instead of staying on steady.
The clock shows the current time in 24 hour format. The flashing colon shows that the panel is functioning correctly. If the AC power is off, the time is not displayed but the colon continues to flash. The entire clock display flashes if the time has not been set after a Hard reboot of the panel; also if the time is not set, the panel will show a common trouble. If any memory error occurs
(Program Checksum Error, Database Mismatch, FIFO Overflow, etc.) the clock will display 4 dashes instead of the time. The buzzer will also beep rapidly to indicate the memory error. The clock will also display 4 dashes if any configuration parameter is changed which requires a Hard reboot.
1.4 Zone LEDs
The zone LEDs are along the left side of the front panel. They are visible through the front door.
Each zone has an alarm (red), supervisory (yellow or amber), and trouble (yellow) LED. The alarm and supervisory LEDs will turn on as required by the inputs. The trouble LED will light for either an input trouble condition, a ground fault or if there is a bypass present. Use the LCD and keypad
(see section 1.8 below) to determine the exact condition. A new condition is shown by a flashing
LED. After the Acknowledge button (see section 1.6 below) has been pressed, the LED will be lit steadily.
Note: If the buzzer is sounding on the panel, Acknowledge will silence the buzzer, but not latch the
LEDs. Press Acknowledge again to latch the LEDs.
For panels running the MR1 program, each set of zone LEDs corresponds to the input circuit. For panels running the MR2 program, each set of zone LEDs is programmed via the database to represent whatever logical zoning is required.
1.5 Buzzer
The buzzer gives audible indication of any new conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)
The four buzzer modes are:
• Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.
• Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.
2
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
• Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.
• Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off.
1.6 Operator Keys
These are located below the Status Display. They are not visible through the front door. There are
Figure 1: Default Key Assignments Figure 2: Fixed Key Assignments
12 keys, each with a yellow and green LED (some keys may have red instead of yellow LEDs).
The LEDs are used to display function status. The individual keys are located under the rectangles marked PRESS, not under the key description. The key assignments are fixed for MR1 programs
(see Figure 1 ). For MR2 programs, the keys are assigned by the database. There are fixed placement function keys as shown in Figure 2 . The default layout is the same as for the MR1 program. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed and beep three times if an invalid
(unavailable) key is pressed. The panel will record every key press in the history.
The keys and their functions are as follows:
Key Action
Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady. The green LED will flash when there is something to acknowledge.
Signal
Silence
Silences the bells. The green LED will flash when Signal Silence is available. There may be a silence inhibit before the bells can be silenced if they are activated by an
Alarm condition. The yellow LED flashes when the bells have been silenced. The bells will reactivate if a subsequent Alarm is received by the panel.
3
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Key
System
Reset
Second
Stage Inhibit
Fire Drill
Lamp Test
Releaser
Disconnect
Relay
Disconnect
Action
System Reset resets part or all of the system.
• The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset.
• The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.
Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors. The yellow LED also flashes if the ground fault relay is activated. Press System Reset to deactivate the ground fault relay to check for restores and additional ground faults. If ground faults remain, the relay will be re-activated after 5 to 30 seconds.
Pressing System Reset with no LEDs flashing will operate any relays that are not used by the system and deactivate any Aux Power outputs. The time they remain open is determined by the Duration time programmed. If the Duration is 0, the relay or Aux Power output will not operate.
Notes:
1.
The system cannot be reset until all circuits and devices are reset.
2.
If both LEDs are flashing, the green LED function has precedence.
3.
The green LED will remain flashing after System Reset is pressed until addressable devices have had their LEDs reset.
Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For
STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage. Second
Stage Inhibit has no effect on an EVAC type bell system. The green LED will flash when Second Stage Inhibit is available, and the yellow LED will flash when it has been activated.
Activates all the bell circuits, both regular and coded, in Alert mode. Press a second time to have all bell circuits sound in Evacuation mode. Press a third time to end the
Fire Drill. The yellow LED will flash while the Fire Drill is happening. The Fire Drill cannot be performed if the bells are already activated, or if AC power is off. The
Fire Drill is automatically ended if an alarm condition occurs.
Flashes the panel LEDs in sequence starting with the zone alarm LEDs. Press
Lamp Test repeatedly to cycle through the zone supervisory LEDs zone trouble
LEDs, system LEDs, and Lamp Test Off.
Causes the releaser circuits to ignore any new alarms. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the releasers are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press again to restore normal operation.
The red LED will flash while active. If no releasers can be disconnected, Releaser
Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing.
This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
4
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Key
Test Mode
Signal
Disconnect
Common
Disconnect
General
Alarm
Halt
Switch n On
Action
Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test. The common indicators, bells, relays and releasers are not activated and no commands are sent to other units and no signal is sent out of Port 3. Test signals can be archived or not as required.
Before beginning testing, the circuits/devices to be tested must be selected. All unselected circuits/devices will operate normally. Be sure that the panel is in test mode. To select circuits/devices, select PROGRAM from the Main Menu on the
LCD. The arrow keys move the cursor and the <Enter> key selects the item. Then select INITIATING CIRCUITS for MR1 programs, or ADDRESSABLE or
CONVENTIONAL for MR2 programs. Then select TEST. For conventional circuits, each zone will then be presented in turn for selection. Select either TEST or
NORMAL. For addressable devices, enter the device circuit and address for each device to be tested. <Clear> will return to the previous menu. While in Test Mode, any conventional smoke detectors activated on the test circuits will be automatically reset after 30 seconds.
When test mode is ended, all zones and devices selected for testing automatically return to normal operation.
Note: There is no Ground Fault isolation while Test Mode is active.
Disables sounding of the bells. The buzzer beeps every 2 seconds while the bells are disabled. This beeping is suppressed while a privileged level is entered in the panel. Press Signal Disconnect again to re-enable the bells. The yellow LED will flash while the bells are disabled. Signal Disconnect is not available if the bells are already activated. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Disables the relays or a City Tie Module (MRCTYB). When a MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled. When the relays are disabled, the yellow LED flashes. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
Initiates the general evacuation sequence. All bells are activated in Evacuation mode, selected function relays are activated and selected releaser circuits are activated and municipal alarm relay is activated. The red LED will flash when activated. Press System Reset to cancel the General Alarm. Note: General Alarm is recorded in the panel archive.
Stops the operation of all releaser type outputs on the panel. The green LED flashes when the key is available and the yellow LED flashes when it has been pressed.
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
5
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Key
Switch n Off
Manual
Restart
Action
Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs. This function can be set to Privilege Level 1 or 2.
This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement.
Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect, and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect,
Signal Disconnect, Test Mode, and Common Disconnect all use the same privilege level.
1.7 Alarm List
The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. Each panel can be configured for one of three modes of operation: In Local mode, each panel only logs events generated from devices that are directly connected to it. For example, a trouble generated on
Panel #1 will not be reflected in the alarm list of Panel #2. Each archive only stores locally generated events. In Master mode, the panel defined as the master collects all network data and maintains an alarm list of all events generated in every panel. If set to Global, every panel displays all other panel’s events.
In all modes, the first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the Main Menu, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the
2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The
LCD back light will turn on if any new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in
5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Note: A panel that does not have extended RAM memory will not show an Alarm List.
Each entry in the Alarm List consists of one screen for MR1 programs and one to three screens for
MR2 programs. Each entry will include an event screen giving a short description of the event.
MR2 programs will add device and panel message screens as required.
To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the <Scroll> ( <A> ) key on the keypad. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press <Scroll> again to view the next/previous entry. Use the <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> to rotate between screens of the event. One can also look at the next entry using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the
<Left Arrow> . A summary screen will be shown when all entries have been shown. To view the summary screen directly, press <Clear> at any time.
For more control in viewing the Alarm List, when the summary screen is showing press <Enter> .
Options for viewing All, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Non-Reporting entries are provided.
Display can begin with the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> . <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow> , whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and
<Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.
While viewing entries in the Alarm List, the currently displayed input can be Bypassed by pressing the <Bypass> ( <B> ) key on the keypad. This will cause the panel to consider the input to be in a normal condition.
Note: Bypass is a privileged function. A passcode will have to be entered in the system before a
Bypass will be accepted.
6
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms:
1) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 3: description of event
Line 4: circuit/device type
The device and panel message screens, if any, show:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
See Section 2.2 for a description of Condition Codes and Zone Numbers.
The summary screen shows the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm List.
1.8 LCD and Keypad
The LCD and keypad are located below the Operator
Keys. The display may or may not be visible through the front door. The keypad is not visible through the front door. They are used to view the status of the panel, to view the latest events, to set the date and time and to enter a privilege passcode. The panel will beep once when a valid key is pressed, and three times if an invalid or unavailable key is pressed. The LCD back light will turn on if any key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes (30 seconds if no AC) if there is no activity.
Information is presented to the user through a series of menus and information screens. The menus present options to display other menus, show information, or request information. The panel displays the Main Menu under normal conditions. If a privilege level has been entered, it will be displayed in the Main Menu as well instead of the time. Menus have a ">" or "<" next to the description of each item. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor and press
<Enter> to select. <Clear> returns to the previous menu without changing any information and
<Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information.
The Main Menu has the following selections:
• Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available:
-- More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.
-- Misc. Trouble: Displays any troubles with the bells, releasers, AC power, batteries, etc., that are not shown elsewhere. Only sections in trouble will be displayed. Press
<Enter> to go to the next screen. See section 2.2 for a list of all possible messages.
-- Alarm List: Displays the Alarm List under manual control. See Alarm List above, Using the Keypad.
-- Addressable: This menu has the following options:
Select: Displays the current status of a single device. The device address is entered into the screen saying "circuit or circuit.device". If only a circuit number is entered, the first
7
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.
The display shows the device address in the top left corner and the current condition codes in the top right corner (see section 2.2 for a description of the condition codes).
The second line shows the headings for the third line, which contains the analog values sent from the device. Press <Enter> to view the next device or <Clear> to get the address input screen.
Print Sensors: Prints the analog value for every addressable smoke and thermal detector. This is the value of the detector at the time the command is issued.
-- Conventional or Initiating Circuits: Displays the type, and alarm, trouble and ground fault status of each of the 24 input zones (conventional zones only). Once viewing the initiating circuit status, one can choose to look at the next circuit or the previous circuit.
<Clear> will return to the Status Menu.
The display shows:
Line 1: zone number and zone type
Line 2: factory diagnostic information
Line 4: alarm 1, alarm 2, trouble and ground fault status. Alarm 2 is used by Dual
EOLR circuits and by contact devices on Smoke Detector and Contact Device circuits. Smoke detector circuits that have alarm verification will display the number of failed verifications.
-- Identification: Displays a sequence of screens that provide the program and version, the panel's serial number, database version, etc. Press <Enter> to go to the next screen.
-- Print Database: This function is restricted to Level 1. Print the current configuration
(values entered through the LCD menu) and downloaded database of the panel to a printer connected to the panel's printer port. The printer port is at the bottom of the main assembly and is the one on the right.
-- Print Archive: This function is restricted to Level 1. Prints all or part of the history. A selection menu is presented to select which kinds of events to print. The choices are:
All, Alarms, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, Bypass and Non-reporting.
Each entry consists of one or two lines. The information provided on the first line, from the left, is:
1. Event Number
2. Time (24 Hour Clock)
3. Date (MM/DD/YY Format)
4. Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
5. Description
A second line will be printed for addressable devices if a message exists in the database.
This history is sent to the printer port(s) and to the service terminal port if Screen 1 is active. Screen 1 of the service terminal is a copy of all items sent to the printer port.
• Archive: The archive is a list of the last 900 events (approx.). These include all signals, programming changes, time/date changes, etc., that have occurred. Test signals may or may not be recorded but "Test On" and "Test Off" are. The archive is not lost when there is a loss of both AC and battery power. Each entry includes a short description of the event, and the date and time of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be
8
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow> .
<Enter> will act as the last <Left> or <Right> arrow key pressed. <Up Arrow> and
<Down Arrow> will flip between pages of the event.
The screen of a single screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
The first screen of a two screen event shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Line 2: Condition Code and Zone Number (see section 2.1)
Line 3: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
Line 4: device type
The second screen shows:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and date
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
• Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options:
-- Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed, <Clear> will return to the Clock
Menu. The date change will be recorded in the history.
-- Time: Change the time. The time is entered in HH.MM.SS format. Each section of the time must be separated by a dot. All times are in 24 hour format. Press <Enter> to accept time typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits are displayed,
<Clear> will return to the Clock Menu. The new time entered will be sent to all units on the network, if any. A time change of greater than 5 minutes will be recorded in the history.
• Passcode: Allows access to privileged functions. Enter the four digit passcode. A passcode of zero removes all privileges. Asterisks are displayed instead of the numbers to maintain security of the passcode. <Clear> will remove any digits typed. If no digits have been typed, <Clear> will return to the Main Menu. The panel will beep once if a valid passcode is entered or three times if an invalid passcode is entered. An invalid passcode will not change the current privilege of the panel. Higher level passcodes timeout after two hours and the panel reverts to Level 0.
The number at the end of the top line shows the current privilege level. The number at the beginning of the second line is a sequence number. This number is required if special higher level passcodes are needed. This number will change with each successful special passcode entered. This makes the special passcodes single use only.
9
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
1.9 Silent Walk Test
The Silent Walk Test allows for single person testing of the system. This is done by providing an audio output that can be used by a radio with a microphone input. The system will produce tones through the audio output jack to give the inspector a positive indication of system behaviour. The audio jack should be connected to the Mic In or Line In of a radio. Ensure that the radio is set to automatically broadcast whenever a signal is sent to it. Alarm and supervisory conditions produce a 1500 Hz tone, trouble conditions produce a 1000 Hz tone and ground conditions produce a 500
Hz tone. Two short pulses are given for a new condition and one long pulse for a restore. Tones are generated for input circuits only. The output circuits are not part of the walk test.
To activate the walk test, first connect the radio to the audio output jack. Then activate the walk test by pressing the Test Mode key. The yellow LED next to Test Mode will flash while the Test
Mode is active. Conventional circuits and addressable devices will need to be chosen for testing.
While selected for testing, circuit and devices will not activate relays, control modules, bells, releasers or send signals to monitoring stations on port 3. Any LEDs assigned to the test inputs will follow the circuit or device state. See the section on the Test Mode key on page 5 for more information on Test Mode. All circuits and devices not chosen for testing will operate as normal.
If a printer is attached to the printer port, a print-out of all events received by the Unit can be obtained for cross-referencing with the test procedures. Test signals will be marked as such in the print-out.
10
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
2.0 Supplementary Information
2.1 Diagnostic LEDs
There are 6 LEDs in the middle of the right edge of the Inner Door Assembly for diagnostic purposes. They are used as follows:
1.
extended memory in use
2.
addressable database in use
3.
follows coded bells
4.
not used
5.
not used
6.
database transfer to co-processor.
2.2 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
The Alarm List and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering.
Condition Code
T
U
W
P
Q
R
S
I
J
M
N
D
E
G
H
Archive Alarm List
A ALARM
B
C bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort halt spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Hot Key Pressed
Illegal Addressable Device
Switch
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Releaser Halt
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
11
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
2
3
0
1
4
Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
Panel
Zone
22
23
24
50
51
52
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
5
6
7
18
19
20
21
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Initiating Circuit 3
Initiating Circuit 4
Initiating Circuit 5
Initiating Circuit 6
Initiating Circuit 7
Initiating Circuit 8
Initiating Circuit 9
Initiating Circuit 10
Initiating Circuit 11
Initiating Circuit 12
Initiating Circuit 13
Initiating Circuit 14
Initiating Circuit 15
Initiating Circuit 16
Initiating Circuit 17
Initiating Circuit 18
Initiating Circuit 19
Initiating Circuit 20
Initiating Circuit 21
Initiating Circuit 22
Initiating Circuit 23
Initiating Circuit 24
Network Verify
Comlink 1
Comlink 2
88
1
89
1
90
1
91
1
84
85
1
86
3
87
92
1
93
1
94
1
95
1
69
1
71
80
2
81
82
83
61
64
1
65
1
66
67
Panel
Zone
53
54
55
59
60
Description
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Printer Port
Addressable Modules Comlink
Output (bell/releaser)
Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
Program Checksum
Database Checksum
AC Power
Low Battery
Program Restart
Network Ground Fault
Privilege Level
1st Stage Alarm
2nd Stage Alarm
Switch
Test Mode
Erase Configuration
Change Configuration
Passcode Tamper
Database Loaded
Time/Date Change
Hot Key Activation
Memory Overflow
Network Reboot
New Program
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required why
Notes:
1.
These zones do not restore.
2.
Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal.
3.
This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive.
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit:
Dual End-of-Line Circuit:
000 - Wiring Fault
All Others - Device Number
000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Switch #1
002 - Switch #2
12
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit: 000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Smoke Detector
002 - Contact Device
Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number
Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number
Note: Only MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR and MR-2806-MR use IDs other than 000.
Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Auxiliary Power Supervision (Zone 61): Auxiliary Power Circuit Number
Program Re-start (Zone 69): 000 - Power On/Hard reboot
001 - Watchdog
002 - Circuits 9 to 16
003 - Circuits 17 to 24
002 - Clock Monitor
003 - Illegal Instruction
004 - Unused Interrupt
005 - Orphan Interrupt
Privilege Level (Zone 80): Level Set
Switch (Zone 83): Switch Number
Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): Function Number of the Hot key pressed
Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2900 panel
001 - CoProcessor for circuits 1..8
002 - CoProcessor for circuits 9..16
003 - CoProcessor for circuits 17..24
Network Reboot (Zone 92): Unit ID of panel broadcasting the command
Network Reboot Required (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot
Required trouble
Network Reboot Required Why (Zone 95): 001 - network
002 - network
003 - port 3
006 - negative counter
008 - memory overflow
009 - co-processor memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
2.3 Miscellaneous Troubles
This is a list of all possible messages that can be displayed by Miscellaneous Trouble on the LCD.
Only those conditions that are in trouble will be shown. Some of the messages are always displayed if the panel is in Test Mode.
Message
PROGRAM checksum
EEPROM checksum
DATABASE checksum
Description
The memory chip containing the operating program has an error in it.
Reloading the operating program will correct this problem. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.
The memory chip containing the configuration information has an error in it. Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error keeps reoccurring, the unit will need replacement.
The memory chip containing the downloaded database has an error in it. Reloading the database will correct this problem. If this error keeps occurring, the unit will need replacement.
13
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Message Description
EEPROM failure not enough EEPROM to save addressable settings wrong database version or database mismatch no database for this panel
The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working correctly. It will need to be erased. This requires a Level 9 passcode.
Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the
EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.
The panel has a 64k EEPROM and is running an MR2 program. The addressable device bypasses and the manual operation of control modules requires a 256k EEPROM for the settings to be retained when the panel is rebooted. Note: This will not cause a common trouble on the panel.
program mismatch The version number stored in the EEPROM is different from the version number in the program. Either reload the old program or erase the
EEPROM. Erasing the EEPROM requires Privilege Level 9. Erasing the
EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive. Be sure to record this information before you erase the EEPROM. Contact a service representative for help and a Level 9 passcode.
hardware mismatch The hardware listed in the database does not match the hardware listed in the panel. Correct the database and reload.
no database loaded The panel does not have a database in memory. Load a database into the panel.
The database is the incorrect version for the operating program running.
Download a database with the same version number as the operating program.
The panel contains a valid database, but the database does not contain the information for this panel. Either change the panel ID to the correct value, or load a database that includes the panel's ID.
CoProcessor ?..?
off line
CoProcessor ?..?
memory overflow low battery battery charger not calibrated
This is a major error.
The CoProcessor for the circuits listed (1..8,
9..16, or 17..24) is not communicating with the main CPU. This message will be repeated for each CoProcessor that is off-line. Devices are not being monitored by the system. If a reboot of the MR-2900 does not fix the problem, the addressable input module for those circuits will need to be replaced.
The CoProcessor for the addressable circuits listed (1..8, 9..16, or
17..24) has had a memory overflow. A reboot of the MR-2900 should be done to correct any problems. This message will be repeated for each
CoProcessor that has overflowed.
The battery needs recharging or replacement.
The battery charger needs to be calibrated to provide proper supervision of the batteries. To calibrate the charger, disconnect the batteries and select PROGRAM/BATTERY/CALIBRATE from the LCD menu.
14
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Message
BBBBBBBBAA
1234567812
..........
SE2910 not installed port 1 panel ?
off line port 2 off line port 3 off line wrong port 3 program
BBBBBBBBFFFF
123456781234ASTWGL passcode tamper watchdog disabled
NETWORK REBOOT required network verify ?
missing network verify ?
illegal network verify ?
version
Description
List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits.
Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G indicates a ground. Auxiliary power circuits are not supervised for opens. A bell that has been installed with the polarity the wrong way may appear as a short on the bell circuit. Note: This message will always be shown if the panel is in Test Mode.
The MR-2910 Network Board has not been installed. The network cannot be used unless this board is installed.
This Control or Annunciator Unit is not reporting in over network port 1.
This message will be repeated for each panel that is off line.
The network communications on port 2 have stopped.
The communications on port 3 have stopped.
The port 3 selections in the MHI database do not match the firmware option. Either correct the database or load the correct firmware.
The current status of the relays in the system. Each column represents one relay. A dot (.) will appear under each relay that is off and an asterisk (*) will appear under each relay that is currently switched on.
Note: This message appears in Test Mode only.
B Bell Circuit 1 to 8 T Trouble Relay
F Function Relay 1 to 4 W Walk Test Relay
A Alarm Relay
S Supervisory Relay
G
L
Ground Fault Relay
LCD Back Light Relay
There have been 3 consecutive attempts to enter an invalid passcode.
The watchdog causes the panel to be reset if it fails to operate correctly.
If the watchdog is disabled, the panel will not automatically reboot if it fails to operate correctly.
There has been a loss of communications on the network resulting in lost frames. The panel ID listed is the panel that detected the problem.
This trouble will be sent to all other panels and annunciators on the network., Select PROGRAM/PORTS/NETWORK/REBOOT from the
LCD menu to send the reboot command to all panels.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not reporting in. This is indicative of a communications error.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is not this panel’s database. Update the database in this panel. Remember that it is recommended that all panels be downloaded with the same database for correct operation.
The Network Verify feature has detected that the panel listed is running a different version of the operating program database. Update all panels in the network to use the same operating program and database.
15
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Message negative counters time not set conventional circuit bypassed
Description
This is indicative of a network communications fault. Network Reboot
Required will automatically be generated by the unit.
The time has not been set since the panel has been Rebooted. The time displayed on the clock may be wrong. Enter the correct time.
One or more conventional circuits have been bypassed. To view which circuits have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/CONVENTIONAL/
BYPASS/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
There are addressable devices connected to the panel that are not included in the downloaded database.
illegal addressable devices addressable devices bypassed manual control modules manual function relays manual switches
MEMORY OVERFLOW memory lockout serial printer off-line serial printer out of paper parallel printer off-line parallel printer out of paper
One or more addressable devices have been bypassed. To view which devices have been bypassed, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
BYPASS/OFF from the LCD menu.
One or more control modules have been forced either on or off. To view which control modules are forced, select PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/
CONTROL MODULES/OFF from the LCD menu.
One or more general function relays have been forced either on or off.
To view which relays are forced, select PROGRAM/RELAYS/MODES/
INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
One or more switches with timers have been forced either on or off. This is not shown for switches that do not have timers. To view which switches are forced, select PROGRAM/SWITCHES/INDIVIDUAL from the LCD menu.
An event happened that caused an out of memory condition. This means that an event has been lost by the panel. The printer and Port 3 will discard frames to help relieve the memory problem. The panel will have to have a Hard reboot done.
The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a
Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
The MR-2920 strip printer is not responding to the panel. Ensure that the ribbon cable is not broken. The MR-2920 may need to be replaced.
The MR-2920 is out of paper. Place a new roll of paper (SE1002) into the printer.
The printer connected to the printer port is not responding to the panel.
Ensure that the cable is not broken. If no printer is being used, reboot the panel to clear this trouble.
The printer connected to the printer port is out of paper. Add paper to it.
16
MR-2900 Operator’s Manual
Message coprocessor class changed not enough ram
Description
One or more of the addressable input circuit modules have been changed from either Class A or B to the other. Reboot the panel to clear this trouble.
The operating program requires more extend RAM then the panel actually has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble. This should only appear when upgrading the operating program of panels that have been in the field for a number of years.
17
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
M R - 2 6 0 2
Fire Alarm Control Unit
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision: B
Document #: LT-2015
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2602 Installation& Operator’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit ............................................................................................ 1
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements........................................................................... 1
1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................................................................................... 2
1.4 System Verification ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Standby Power................................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel ............................................................................................ 3
2.1 Unpacking the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 MR-2602 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Planning Your Installation ............................................................................................................... 6
2.5 Electrical Specifications .................................................................................................................. 6
2.6 Module Current Ratings .................................................................................................................. 7
2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart ................................................................................................... 7
2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ................................................................................. 8
3.0 Installing the MR-2602 Fire Panel............................................................................................................ 9
3.1 Environmental Specifications.......................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations ........................................................................................ 9
3.3 Mounting the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................... 10
4.0 Wiring the MR-2602 ................................................................................................................................. 11
4.1 Wiring Specifications....................................................................................................................... 11
5.0 Panel Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 17
5.1 Operating Sequences ..................................................................................................................... 17
5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms............................................................................................................... 17
5.3 Waterflow Alarms............................................................................................................................ 17
5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms................................................................................................................ 18
5.5 Trouble Operation ........................................................................................................................... 18
5.6 System Reset Operation................................................................................................................. 20
5.7 Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................... 20
5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)................................................................................................... 21
5.9 NAC operation ................................................................................................................................ 22
5.10 Relay Function .............................................................................................................................. 22
6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System......................................................................................................... 23
6.1 How to Program the MR-2602 ........................................................................................................ 23
6.2 Programming Section Descriptions................................................................................................. 25
6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer................................................................................................................. 31
7.0 Startup of the MR-2602............................................................................................................................ 33
7.1 Prior to power up............................................................................................................................. 33
7.2 Power up sequence ........................................................................................................................ 33
7.3 Default Operation............................................................................................................................ 33
7.4 Programming the Panel .................................................................................................................. 33
7.5 Final Verification ............................................................................................................................. 33
8.0 Programming Worksheets ....................................................................................................................... 34
8.1 Entering Programming Mode .......................................................................................................... 34
8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)....................................................................................................... 35
8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ........................................................................... 35
8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) ..................................................................... 35
8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)................................................................. 36
8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) ............................................................................................... 36
8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5) ............................................................................................ 36 i
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................................................................................... 37
9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ................................................................................................................... 39
9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.............................................................................................. 39
9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes.............................................................................................................. 40
FCC Compliance Statement .......................................................................................................................... 42
Warranty and Warning Information ................................................................................................................ 43
Warning Please Read Carefully............................................................................................................ 43
Limited Warranty................................................................................................................................... 45 ii
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
1.0 Introduction
1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit
General features
• Two initiating device circuits, class B / style B
• Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited)
[can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z]
• One common alarm-actuated relay, form ‘C’
• One common trouble-actuated relay, form ‘C’
• AUX+ power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited)
• Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns
• Integral battery charger
• Cabinet with dead-front construction
• Transformer, mounted in the cabinet
Applications
The MR-2602 two zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications.
• Protected Premises Fire Alarm System
• And for the following types of service:
A – automatic, M – Manual, SS – Sprinkler Supervisory, WF – Waterflow
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements
Relevant codes and standards
The MR-2602 fire alarm control panel is designed to meet the requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition, UL 864, Control Units for Fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition and in Canada, CAN/ULC-
S527, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, 1999 edition.
Information provided with this unit is intended as a guide. Installation of this equipment, optional system components, alarm initiating devices and notification appliances must follow the manufacturer’s guidelines as contained in their respective installation documents, all applicable codes and the instructions of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
General Installation requirements
Manufacturer’s documents
When installing the MR-2602 control panel, refer to this manual. When installing optional system components refer to the installation documents included with those components. When installing compatible alarm initiating devices or notification appliances, refer to the installation documents included with those products.
Field wiring
Field wiring recommendations in this document are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and in Canada with the standard for installation ULC/S 524, the most current Canadian Electrical Code, with all relevant local codes and standards, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Compatible devices
Use UL or ULC Listed smoke detectors and notification appliances that are compatible with the
MR-2602 Fire alarm control panel from the lists included in this manual.
1
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Smoke detector alarm verification:
The MR-2602 alarm initiating zones can be configured for ‘Alarm Verification’. If this feature is used then do not use smoke detectors with built-in Alarm Verification.
Note: Use of alarm verification may require the approval of the local AHJ.
1.3 Technical Support and General Information
For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email [email protected].
For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
1.4 System Verification
The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when:
• the initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction;
• any system component is added, changed or deleted;
• any programming changes are made;
• system wiring has been altered or repaired;
• system failure due to external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended power outages has occurred.
1.5 Standby Power
The MR-2602 provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within this manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within this manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.
2
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel
2.1 Unpacking the MR-2602
The basic MR-2602 package includes the following components:
• Cabinet with hinged door
• Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board.
• Zone label insert
• Battery compartment dead front plate
• Main control PCB
• Transformer
• Installation manual
• Hardware pack
-- 2 × NAC EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)
-- 2 × Zone EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)
-- 1 × Battery jumper wire
-- 1 × EGND terminal ring
-- 1 × EGND KEP nut
• Door keys (taped to outside of cabinet)
All components described above are factory assembled into the enclosure.
2.2 Optional Accessories
Model Number
MR-2605-R3
Name
MR-2806
MR-2644
MR-2605-T
MR-2605-AT
Programmer
Remote trouble indicator
Remote trouble indicator and alarm annunciator
Description
Provides 3 relays that are jumper programmable to activate on common ‘alarm’,
‘supervisory’ or ‘trouble’. Mounts inside the enclosure and plugs into the main board.
Communicates all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using
Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 BPS communication formats. Programmable using the MR-2644 handheld programmer.
Mounts inside the enclosure and connects to the main panel using a supplied 4-wire cable with connector.
Handheld programmer for the MR-2806 DACT.
Single gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch. Mounts remotely to a single gang electrical box and is connected to the main panel via the 4-wire ‘secur-bus’.
Two gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch and 2 red zone alarm visual indicators and 2 yellow zone supervisory indictors.
Mounts to a standard 2 gang electrical box and is connected to the panel via the 4-wire ‘securbus’.
3
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Model Number
MR-2605-SR
MRD-EOL4.7K
MRD-MP400
Name Description
EOL supervision relay Supervises the extended power wiring typically used for installations that employ 4-wire smoke detectors. Mounts in the field.
EOLR
EOLR plate
End-of-Line resistor for NAC and Initiating circuits. Mounts in the field.
Single gang plate with EOL resistor. Mounts to a single gang electrical backbox.
4
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
2.3 MR-2602 Overview
Figure 1: MR-2602 cabinet with door closed
Figure 2: MR-2602 display and controls
Zone Label Insert
A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area.
Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert. Zone designations can be written directly on the insert or can be created using Word for Windows, printed on Avery label #5167 and applied to the insert.
5
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
2.4 Planning Your Installation
This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals.
As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay.
• Consult with your local AHJ to ensure that the overall system will meet all requirements.
Have your plans reviewed and approved as required.
• Review the electrical specifications, mounting and wiring instructions in this manual and in the manuals of all connected modules and devices.
• Using the chart in this manual, calculate the standby battery size that will meet the standby time required. Include all components that will draw current from the standby battery when the panel is in the ‘standby’ mode.
• Determine the location of the control panel, all initiating and indicating devices and remote modules and mark them on your system layout plan.
• Using the charts in this manual, determine the wire gauge and wire run distances for the connected components. (initiating devices, indicating devices and ‘secur-bus’ connected components.)
• Review the programming section of this manual and determine the operating characteristics required of the initiating zones, indicating zones and common panel features.
2.5 Electrical Specifications
Circuit
Primary AC / MR-2602
Primary AC / MR-2602-240
AUX+
SCOM
COM
Relays (common alarm & trouble)
NAC Outputs
Initiating Zone Inputs
Battery Charging Current
Low Battery Trouble
Rating
120 volts, 60 Hz. 1.5 Amps maximum
240 volts, 50 Hz. 1.0 Amps maximum
500 mA maximum
500 mA maximum (current sink)
500 mA maximum (current sink)
Form ‘C’ contact, 2 Amp, 30 V DC resistive, power limited source
24 volts, full-wave rectified DC, 1.5
Amps max. – Power limited. (3.0 Amps total for both NAC circuits) EOLR –
4.7K ohm, ½ W, 5%
24 V DC , 60 mA max.(in alarm) –
Supervisory current: 6.0 mA – max.
Loop resistance: 100 ohms max. –
EOLR: 4.7 K ohm, ½ W, 5%
350mA maximum
Low Battery Trouble: 22.0 V DC
Low Battery Trouble Restore: 23.0 V DC
Critical Shutdown: 19±0.5 V DC
6
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
2.6 Module Current Ratings
Module
MR-2602 Control panel
MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator
MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and remote
5 zone annunciator
MR-2806 DACT
MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**)
Standby Current
(mA) DC
90
15
15
45
0
Alarm Current
(mA) DC
425(*)
15
Max. Alarm
Current (mA) DC
485
15
20(*)
60
24
40
60
24
* Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm. The “Max. Alarm Current” assumes all zones are in alarm.
** Values shown are for all relays set for activation on ‘Alarm’. Each relay set for activation on
‘trouble’ is normally energized and on ‘AC fail’ will draw 0 mA.
2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart
All components that draw current from the panel while it is in the ‘standby’ mode (AC OFF) must be considered for the standby battery calculation. All components that draw current while in the
‘Alarm’ mode must be considered for the alarm battery calculation.
1.
The control panel will always draw the currents as shown in the chart.
2.
Typically the alarm current is calculated assuming only one initiating zone is in alarm. If it is required that more than one zone be considered, add 60 mA per zone in the Alarm column. Consult the smoke detector manufacture’s installation sheet to determine the standby current of these devices. Write that number in the ‘current per device’ column then multiply that number by the number of devices on the zone. Repeat for each zone.
3.
Consult the Notification Appliance installation sheet to determine the current draw for each device connected to the NAC. For each NAC, calculate the total current in alarm and put that number (mA) in the ‘Alarm’ column. Note: each NAC can supply 1.5 Amps max.
4.
For each added module in the system, multiply the number of modules times the module
‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents and write those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.
5.
Add up all the current drawn from the AUX+ output in the standby and alarm mode and put those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.
6.
Add up all the currents in the ‘standby’ column and the ‘Alarm’ column.
7.
Convert the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents from mA to Amps. (divide mA by 1000)
8.
Write in the ‘standby’ time required. (24 or 60 Hr.)
9.
Multiply the ‘standby’ Amps times the ‘standby’ time to get the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. required.
10. Write in the ‘alarm’ time required in hours. (5 min. = .08 Hr.)
11. Multiply the ‘alarm’ Amps times the ‘alarm’ time to get the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr required.
12. Add the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. to the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr. for the total Amp-Hr. required.
13. Multiply the total Amp-Hr. times 1.20 for the minimum Amp-Hr. battery required to support the system for the selected ‘standby time and the selected ‘alarm’ time.
7
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
Step Device
Current per device
(mA)
MR-2602 Standby:
Zone 1
Alarm:
Standby:
Zone 2
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
Alarm: NAC 1
NAC 2
MR-2605-T
MR-2605-AT
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
Standby:
90
365
60
60
MR-2806
MR-2605-R3
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
Standby:
AUX+
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
Total ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ current:
25
45
60
0
24
15
15
15
Divide ‘standby’ mA and ‘alarm’ mA by 1000:
Select ‘standby’ time required (24 or 60 Hr.):
Standby Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 7 = (Amps × Hr.):
Select ‘alarm’ time required (.08):
Alarm Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 9 = (Amps × Hr.):
Total Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (8) + alarm Amp-Hr. (10):
Multiply the total Amp-Hr. by the safety margin:
Total battery Amp-Hr required to support the system: x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x
Number of device
=
=
=
=
=
= 90
=
=
Total
Standby
Current
(mA)
=
=
= mA
Amp
Hr.
1.20
Total
Alarm
Current
(mA)
365
60 mA
Amp
Amp-Hr.
Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Select a battery with an Amp-Hr. rating that is equal to or larger than the calculated minimum Amp-
Hr. battery required. Note: The maximum battery allowed is 12 Ah.
8
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
3.0 Installing the MR-2602 Fire Panel
3.1 Environmental Specifications
Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2602 panel:
• Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C
• Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing
• Close to a source of unswitched AC power
3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations
The panel comes completely assembled from the factory. Remove the lower dead front for access to the battery compartment. Remove display control panel for access to AC connections.
Do not run power limited wiring into this area
MR-2602 = 120 VAC
MR-2602-240 = 240 VAC
9
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
3.3 Mounting the MR-2602
Mounting Dimensions
Dimensions in inches
Knockout Locations
10
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
4.0 Wiring the MR-2602
4.1 Wiring Specifications
MR-2602 Terminal Descriptions
Terminal
Label
NAC 1
(+, –)
NAC 2
(+, –)
AUX+
COM
SCOM
DAT
CLK
TRB NO
TRB C
TRB NC
ALM NO
ALM C
Description
Notification Appliance Circuit # 1
24 V
DC
, Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.
Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
Supervised for opens, shorts and ground fault.
Power limited.
Notification Appliance Circuit # 2
24 V
DC
, Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.
Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
Supervised for opens, shorts and ground fault.
Power limited
Auxiliary power output
24 V
DC
, filtered and regulated, 500 mA max., 400 mV
P-P ripple, power limited.
Auxiliary common power return, unswitched
24 V
DC
, 500 mA max.
Auxiliary common power return, switched
(open circuit on system reset or on 4-wire smoke detector reset)
24 V
DC
, 500 mA max. (Please refer to Appendix A for compatible 4-wire smoke detectors.)
Data line for remote module communications
Clock line for remote module communications
Common Trouble relay, Normally Open contact
Common Trouble relay, Common contact
Common Trouble relay, Normally Closed contact
The Common Trouble relay is normally energized and is de-energized on trouble.
Contacts are shown in the de-energized state.
Contacts are rated 30 V
DC
, 2 Amps.
Common Alarm relay, Normally Open contact
Common Alarm relay, Common contact
11
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Terminal
Label
ALM NC
Description
Z1+
Z1-
Z2+
Z2 -
Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact
The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized.
Contact is shown in the de-energized state.
Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps max.
Zone 1 positive input
Zone 1 negative input
Zone output is 24 V DC nominal to power 2-wire smoke detectors. Maximum current draw is 60 mA in alarm and is limited by the zone circuitry. Zones may be configured to monitor both 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices that employ dry contacts.
(pullstations & heat detectors)
Same as zone 1 positive
Same as zone 1 negative
Connecting 2-Wire Alarm Initiating Devices
Typical
* See “9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors” on page 37 in this manual for a list of compatible 2-wire smoke detectors.
1.
Maximum 30 smoke detectors per zone (100 µA each standby).
2.
Manual station, heat detector.
3.
Maximum total loop wire resistance = 100 ohms.
4.
Program zone as:
Type 1 - Smoke and contact devices instant alarm (default)
Type 2 - Smoke auto-verify and contact as instant.
12
Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
1.
Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone.
2.
Maximum total loop wire resistance is 100 ohms.
Zone Wiring Chart:
Wire
(Gauge)
18
16
14
Distance
(feet)
7,690
12,195
19,230
Distance
(meters)
2,345
3,717
5,861
Maximum loop resistance is
100 ohms. Maximum current in alarm is 60 mA.
Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’)
Class ‘B’
Class ‘A’
13
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
NAC Wiring Chart
Maximum
Total
Loop
(ohms)
Maximum
Current
(A)
18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire ft m ft m ft m ft m
8.00
5.00
2.70
2.00
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
615
308
205
154
188
94
63
47
978
488
325
244
297
149
99
74
1,538 469
769 235
513
385
156
117
2,500 762
1,250 381
833
625
254
191
1.60
1.30
1.25
1.50
123
103
38
31
195
163
59
50
308
256
94
78
500
417
152
127
Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.
Connecting Batteries
Connecting AC Power
Connecting the Alarm and Trouble Relays
14
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Connecting Optional Devices
See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup.
1.
Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel.
2.
Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel.
Secur-bus Wiring Chart
Current
(mA)*
22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire ft ft ft m ft m ft m
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
2,524
1,262
842
631
505
421
361
315
769
384
256
192
154
128
110
96
6,410 1,954 10,160
3,200 976 5,080
2,135 651
1,600 488
3,385
2,540
1,280 390
1,065 325
915
800
279
244
2,030
1,690
1,450
1,270
3,098
1,549
1,032
774
619
515
442
387
16,000
8,000
5,340
4,000
3,200
2,670
2,285
2,000
135
150
165
180
281
252
229
210
86
77
70
64
710
640
580
530
216
195
177
162
1,125
1,015
920
845
343
309
280
258
1,780
1,600
1,455
1,335
543
488
444
407
195
210
194
180
59
55
490
455
149
139
780
725
238
221
1,230
1,145
375
349
225 168 51 425 130 675 206 1,065 325
*See module current ratings chart for current drawn by each module attached to the securbus.
4,878
2,439
1,628
1,220
976
814
697
610
To calculate the wire run distance for any gauge wire and any maximum current value, use the following formula:
Rmax = 1.25
Imax
Amps ohms
Distance = Rmax × 1,000
2(wire resistance in ohms per 1,000 feet) feet
15
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Secur-bus Capacitance
Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad). Typical wire capacitance for 22 awg quad cable is 20 nF per 1,000 feet. Thus, for 22 awg quad cable, the maximum wire run distance is ((90/20)× 1,000) = 4,500 feet . Other types of wire have different capacitance values. Consult the wire manufacturer’s data sheets for typical capacitance values.
Please note that shielded wire has a much higher capacitance value and distances are severely reduced.
The following devices may be connected to the Secur-bus. All devices are supervised. See section for adding and deleting devices on the Secur-bus.
Devices
MR-2605-T
MR-2605-AT
MR-2806
Description
External to control panel.
Up to 4 of each device may be connected.
Mounted inside control panel. See diagram in “3.3
Mounting the MR-2602” on page 10.
Notes:
1.
Do not run the Secur-bus adjacent to sources of high transient noise such as AC wiring, telephone cable bundles or computer wiring.
2.
If the Secure-bus must go through a high transient area, use shielded cable.
3.
If shielded cable is used, the distances in the chart above are cut in half.
16
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
5.0 Panel Operation
5.1 Operating Sequences
This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the
MR-2602 System” on page 23 for information on how to program the panel, and descriptions of each of the programming options.
5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms
Zone alarms have priority over all other annunciation. When an alarm occurs, the following happens:
• The corresponding zone alarm LED begins flashing, the common alarm LED turns on steady, and the alarm relay turns on.
• If a trouble was present on that zone then the zone trouble LED turns off. If the trouble buzzer is audible then it also turns off.
• The NACs sound in a steady or temporal pattern, depending on the option selected (see
“NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28).
• If enabled, the silence inhibit timer begins counting down (see “Signal Silence Inhibit
Timer” on page 29). If the silence inhibit timer is enabled, the panel cannot be silenced for
60 seconds following the first fire alarm. Subsequent fire alarms do not restart or extend this timer. While the signal silence inhibit timer is counting down, if the Silence Alarm button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second ‘error tone’ on the common trouble buzzer.
• The NACs remain on until silenced with the Silence Alarm button, or if the automatic alarm silence is enabled, until the thirty minute bell timer runs out (see “Automatic Signal
Silence” on page 29). If the automatic silence timer is enabled, the panel will automatically silence the NACs 30 minutes after the last fire alarm. Each zone alarm will restart the timer, giving a full 30 minutes after the last alarm before the NACs are silenced.
• Once the NACs are silenced the signals silenced LED turns on and any flashing zone alarm LEDs turn on steady. The common trouble LED and trouble relay also turn on and, if the NACs have been silenced automatically , the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second
ON/OFF.
Note: A manual signal silence will not initiate the trouble buzzer. Only the common trouble
LED and signals silenced LED are turned on.
• Any additional zone alarms that occur while the panel is in alarm will reset the auto alarm silence timer and turn on the NACs, but the panel will not restart the 60 second silence inhibit timer.
• The zone alarm LEDs, common alarm LED and alarm relay will remain on steady until a system reset is performed.
5.3 Waterflow Alarms
If the Waterflow Silence option is turned off (see “Silence Waterflow Alarms” on page 30), when a waterflow zone (type 03) initiates an alarm the NACs cannot be silenced until all waterflow zones are returned to normal. If all waterflow zones return to normal after the 30 minute automatic signal silence timer has expired, then the panel will silence the NACs.
If the Waterflow Silence option is turned on, then an alarm on a waterflow zone is treated like any other fire alarm.
Waterflow alarms may be delayed by 60 seconds to prevent false alarms from surges in the sprinkler system. The delay is common to all zones programmed as ‘waterflow’, type 03 zones. If the delay is not used, all waterflow alarms will be instant.
17
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms
When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing. The common supervisory LED and supervisory relay (supervisory relay is optional) turn on steady, and the buzzer turns on steady. If there was a trouble on that zone, the zone trouble LED turns off. The buzzer remains on until the trouble silence button is pressed.
Once the buzzer is silenced any flashing zone supervisory LEDs turn on steady. The zone supervisory LEDs, common supervisory LED and supervisory relay remain on steady until a system reset is performed.
Subsequent Fire Supervisory
After silencing a fire supervisory, a subsequent fire supervisory from another zone will resound the trouble/supervisory buzzer and the new zone supervisory LED flashes until the Silence Trouble button is pressed.
Supervisory / Trouble Priority
If a supervisory zone has a trouble and it goes into alarm, the zone trouble LED is extinguished until that zone is restored and the panel has been reset. The common trouble LED will remain on steady until all supervisory alarms have been restored and the panel reset. All other ‘common’ trouble indicators will operate normally.
Supervisory / Fire Alarm Priority
The supervisory zone LED, the common supervisory LED and the buzzer (in the steady supervisory mode) function normally whether there is a fire alarm present or not.
5.5 Trouble Operation
When a trouble occurs, if there is a corresponding trouble LED it turns on steady. The common trouble LED and the trouble relay also turn on. If no alarm is present on the system, the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second ON/OFF. The buzzer and trouble LEDs will remain on until the trouble is restored. If the Silence Trouble button is pressed, the buzzer turns off. Subsequent troubles will resound the trouble buzzer.
If there is no trouble present in the system then pressing the Silence Trouble button will result in a
1 second error tone.
Please see the following table for a list of system faults that will initiate a trouble.
18
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
System Troubles
System faults
Common
Trouble
LED
Alarm zone open circuit – loss of EOLR turns on
NAC open circuit or short circuit
Battery low voltage or disconnected
Signals silenced - automatically
Ground on extended conductor
AC fails completely, or is low for more than 10 seconds
(brownout)
Installer Programming Mode
Active
Loss of Remote Trouble Unit
Loss of Remote Alarm/
Trouble Unit
TLM on one or both telephone lines (Dialer)
Failure to communicate
(Dialer)
Unsuccessful system reset
Loss of Dialer module turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on flashes turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on
Buzzer sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off
Trouble
Relay
Other Indicators deactivates Zone trouble LED turns on steady deactivates NAC1 or NAC2 trouble LED turns on deactivates Battery LED turns on deactivates Signals Silenced
LED turns on deactivates Ground LED turns on deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates
19
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
5.6 System Reset Operation
To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.
The panel can only be reset if:
• the NACs have been silenced
• the supervisory buzzer has been silenced
• and all waterflow zones are restored (only applies if the Silence Waterflow option is turned off - see “Silence Waterflow Alarms” on page 30).
If the panel is not in a condition to be reset, when the ‘Reset System’ button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second error tone on the buzzer.
After the 10 second reset period, the panel will turn off the zone LED for any zones that have been restored. If one or more zones is still in alarm after the reset period, the panel will activate the
NACs as programmed. If there are no alarms but one or more Supervisory zones is still ‘offnormal’ after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer in the Supervisory mode. If there are no alarms or supervisory conditions but a trouble is present in the panel after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer. After the reset period, LEDs for any alarms, supervisory off-normal or trouble conditions will be on.
5.7 Lamp Test
The lamp test will check all of the panel and annunciator LEDs. To do a lamp test, press and hold the Lamp Test button. All the LEDs will flash.
A lamp test will only work if the NACs are not active and the supervisory buzzer is not active. If a lamp test is unsuccessful the buzzer will sound a 1 second error tone. If any trouble or zone has a state change during lamp test, the lamp test will be cancelled and the panel will return to normal operation.
20
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)
To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 29).
1.
To walk test the panel press the Walk Test button. The common trouble LED flashes and the buzzer sounds one short beep. The panel will be in walk test mode for one hour, or until you press the Walk Test button again.
2.
As you test each part of the system, the panel will give the following indications:
Type of activation LEDs NACs*
Trouble
Buzzer
Fire Alarm or Fire
Supervisory
Fire Alarm or Fire
Supervisory Restoral
Zone or System Trouble
Zone or System Trouble
Restoral
Zone alarm/
Supv LED turns on
Zone alarm/
Supv LED turns off
Zone or system trouble LED turns on
Zone or system trouble LED turns off
1 squawk
1 squawk
2 squawks
2 squawks
Sounds
Stops sounding
Ground Fault Ground trouble LED turns on
3 squawks Sounds
Ground Fault Restoral Ground trouble LED turns off
*Only if Walk Test Audible option is turned on.
3 squawks Stops sounding
Zone LEDs operate normally except that alarms do not latch - the alarm LEDs will turn off when the zone is restored and the auto-reset has been successful.
Alarm and trouble relays are NOT activated. If used, any remote connection is not activated.
3.
To return the system to normal operation, press the Walk Test button. If you do not press the Walk Test button, the system will return to normal operation after one hour. If any zones are in alarm at the end of the walk test, the zones will indicate silenced signals.
The Lamp Test button does not work while the panel is in Walk Test mode.
21
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
5.9 NAC operation
See also “NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information.
Class ‘B’ operation selections:
• Steady (default) – On alarm the NAC will turn on steady. It will turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.
• Temporal 3 – On alarm the NAC will turn on with the temporal 3 pattern and turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.
• NAC2 Strobe – On alarm NAC2 will turn on steady. It will not turn off on a manual or automatic signal silence. NAC2 set in this mode will only turn off on system reset if all zone fire alarms are restored. Only NAC2 can be set in this mode.
Class ‘A’ operation selections
If the panel NACs are set for class ‘A’ operation then there is only one NAC. In this configuration the NAC output can only be set for steady or temporal using the NAC1 programming options For class ‘A’, the NAC2 Strobe option is not available.
5.10 Relay Function
Alarm Relay
The panel activates the alarm relay upon any (non-supervisory) zone alarm. The panel deactivates the alarm relay upon a successful system reset.
Trouble Relay
The panel deactivates the trouble relay upon any system trouble. The panel activates the trouble relay upon the restoral of all system troubles.
Supervisory Relay (available with the MR-2602-R3 Relay Expander only)
The panel activates the supervisory relay upon any supervisory zone alarm. The panel deactivates the supervisory relay upon a successful system reset.
22
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System
6.1 How to Program the MR-2602
You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming.
Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.
Entering the Programming mode
All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
1.
Remove the lower front cover and locate the ‘Walk Test Switch’ behind the control panel
PCB, as shown below.
2.
Press and hold the Walk Test Switch for two seconds. The common trouble buzzer and common trouble LED turn on and pulse ½ second on/off.
3.
Press any button. The trouble buzzer is silent, and the zone 1 alarm LED turns on steady.
The common trouble LED continues to flash.
4.
The panel is now ready to program.
Programming the Panel
The control panel has six different programming sections, which are shown in the table below. The
Panel Status LEDs indicate which programming section you are currently in.
23
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices:
1.
Each sub-section in a section will have 2 or more programming settings, indicated by the panel Zone Supervisory and Zone Trouble LEDs. To scroll through the programming settings, press the Silence Alarm button. Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 25 for descriptions of each section and settings, and the LED indications for each setting.
2.
When the LEDs show the setting you want for a sub-section, move to the next programming sub-section by pressing the Silence Trouble button. The panel will save the indicated settings when you exit the programming mode or go to the next programming section.
3.
When you have programmed all the sub-sections in a section, the panel will move to the next programming section when you press the Silence Trouble button.
Pressing Silence Trouble will advance forward through each programming sub-section, and each section.
Example: in the Zone 1 programming sub-section, pressing Silence Alarm will scroll through each zone type setting (null zone, instant zone, auto-verify zone, etc.). When the panel shows the zone type you want for zone 1, press Silence Trouble to move on to Zone 2 programming.
Exiting the Programming Mode
When you come to the end of all the programming sections, press Silence Trouble to exit the programming mode.
To exit programming mode at any other point in the panel programming, press and hold the Walk
Test switch for two seconds.
If 5 minutes elapse without any button presses, the panel will automatically exit the programming mode. During the final 60 seconds before the exit, the panel will sound a warning tone on the buzzer. Press any button to cancel the auto-exit and resume programming.
After you exit the programming mode, the panel performs a system reset for 10 seconds, during which the buzzer sounds double beeps. When the beeping stops the panel returns to normal operating mode and all programming choices are stored in memory.
24
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
6.2 Programming Section Descriptions
Zone Programming (Section 0)
In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows:
Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used)
The zone is not used. The zone is not supervised, alarms and troubles are ignored. The end-of-line resistor is not required.
Zone type 01 – Instant alarm for 2-wire smoke detectors and contact devices
Zone type 01 does not differentiate between 2-wire smoke detectors, contact devices, or 4-wire smoke detectors. When a
2-wire smoke detector, 4 –wire smoke detector or contact device goes into alarm:
1.
The panel goes into alarm without any delay. If an instant zone goes into alarm, any auto-verify sequence in progress on another zone will be immediately cancelled and both zones will indicate an alarm condition.
25
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors
Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure (pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.
When a 2-wire smoke detector on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:
1.
Power is removed from the zone for 25 seconds to reset the smoke detector(s).
2.
After the verification period starts (power removed) if any contact device on that zone is activated, the verification sequence is cancelled, and the panel goes into immediate alarm.
3.
Power is restored to the zone at the end of the 25 second reset period.
4.
For the next 95 seconds, any smoke detector or contact device that goes into alarm will cause the panel to immediately go into alarm, activate the NACs, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.
5.
If during the total verification period (120 sec.), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.
6.
If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.
When a contact alarm initiating device (pullstation) on an autoverify zone goes into alarm:
1.
The panel immediately goes into alarm. Any auto-verification sequence that may be active will be cancelled.
26
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone
This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’ type zone alarms for 60 seconds.
CAUTION: Do not use the waterflow delay timer when:
• The monitored Waterflow alarm actuating devices have a built-in delay of 30 seconds or more. The overall maximum waterflow alarm initiation delay allowed is 90 seconds.
(NFPA A-5-6.2 – 1996 edition)
• The sprinkler system includes ‘ON/OFF’ type sprinkler heads. Such sprinkler heads can cycle on and off within 30 seconds thus preventing an alarm from being registered.
When the contact on a Waterflow alarm initialing device is activated:
1.
If the waterflow delay is not used, the control panel will go into alarm instantly.
2.
If the waterflow delay is used, the waterflow timer will start on the first waterflow alarm. Subsequent waterflow alarms will not restart the 60 second timer.
Once the 60 second time expires, if any waterflow zones are still in alarm, the panel will initiate an immediate alarm. If all waterflow zones have restored at the end of the 60 seconds, an alarm will not be initiated.
Zone type 04 – Supervisory zone
When the contact on a Supervisory device is initiated:
1.
The control panel will immediately indicate the Supervisory
“off-normal” condition.
2.
The zone supervisory LED (yellow) will flash, the common
‘supervisory’ LED will come on steady and the common trouble buzzer will sound steadily. Pressing the ‘trouble silence’ switch will silence the buzzer and the zone supervisory LED will stop flashing and turn on steadily.
3.
Fire supervisory zones are latching and can only be restored when the initiating device is restored and a system reset is performed.
27
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors
This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from
4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to autoverify alarms from those smoke detectors.
CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.
When a 4-wire smoke detector on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:
1.
The panel open circuits the ‘SCOM’ line, removing power from all 4-wire smoke detectors in the system.
2.
At the end of the 25 second reset period, power is restored to the zone and to all 4-wire smoke detectors. For 95 seconds following the reset period, if any smoke detector on that zone is still in alarm, the panel will activate the NACs as programmed, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.
3.
If during the total verification period (120 seconds), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm. If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel goes into alarm without any delay.
NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)
You can individually program both NAC1 and NAC2 to sound in either a temporal or steady pattern. By default, both NAC outputs are programmed as steady.
Temporal
The NAC1 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5
seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds
OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.
The NAC2 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5
seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds
OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.
Steady
The NAC1 will sound continuously.
The NAC2 will sound continuously.
28
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)
Automatic Signal Silence
If Automatic Signal Silence is enabled, 30 minutes after the last fire alarm on the system, the panel restores the NACs to normal
(alarms are silenced).
If another alarm occurs after the NACs are silenced, the panel will restart the timer for another 30 minute period.
If Automatic Signal Silence is disabled, the panel will not silence the NACs automatically.
NAC2 Strobe
If this option is enabled, on alarm, NAC2 turns on steady and does not turn off on automatic signal silence, or when the
Silence Alarm button is pressed. When NAC2 is set to this mode, it can only be turned off when all zone fire alarms are restored, and the system is reset. Only NAC2 can be set to this mode.
If this option is disabled, the panel will restore NAC2 to normal following an automatic signal silence (see Automatic Signal
Silence, above), or following a press of the ‘Silence Alarm’ button.
Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)
Signal Silence Inhibit Timer
If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is enabled, when the first alarm is activated, the panel will begin a 60 second countdown. During this 60 seconds, users will not be able to turn off the NACs by pressing the Silence Alarm button. The timer is started on the first alarm only and is not restarted on subsequent alarms.
If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is disabled, users will be able to turn off the NACs at any time, by pressing the Silence Alarm button.
If NAC2 is set as a strobe, users will never be able to turn off
NAC2 using the Silence Alarm button. See “NAC2 Strobe” on page 28.
Audible Walk Test
You can set the One Man Walk Test to be either audible or silent.
If the One Man Walk Test is set for audible, then the following will occur:
• On a fire or Supervisory alarm/restoral the bells will pulse
ONCE
• On a zone or system trouble/restoral, except ground fault, the bells will pulse TWICE
• On any ground fault/restoral the bells will pulse THREE times.
If the One Man Walk Test is set for silent, the bells will not sound during the walk test.
29
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)
Delay Waterflow Alarms
If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned on, the panel will start a 60 second timer when the first Waterflow zone goes into alarm. The panel will not restart the timer on subsequent
Waterflow zone alarms. When the timer expires, if any waterflow zone is still in alarm, the panel will immediately go into alarm. If any other type of fire zone goes into alarm during the waterflow delay countdown, the panel will immediately go into alarm in response to that zone.
If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned off, alarms on
Waterflow zones will cause an immediate alarm in the panel.
Silence Waterflow Alarms
If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned on, Waterflow zones can be silenced whether the zones are physically restored or not.
If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned off, Waterflow zones cannot be silenced until they are physically restored. This applies to both automatic signal silence, and the Silence Alarm button. If there is a trouble on a Waterflow zone following the alarm and alarm restore, the zone can be silenced.
Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)
If the Auto Verify Fault is Alarm option is turned on, the following will occur:
• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an ALARM condition and assume that the circuit has been forced open by fire. Please see “Zone Programming (Section
0)” on page 25 for more information on auto-verify zones.
If the Auto Verify Fault is Trouble option is turned on, the following will occur:
• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an TROUBLE condition. Please see “Zone Programming
(Section 0)” on page 25 for more information on auto-verify zones.
50/60 Hz Option
30
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Reset Section Programming (All common trouble LEDs flashing)
To Enter this Programming Section
1.
Enter the installer programming mode, section 0
2.
Press and hold the System Reset button for 2 seconds. The Z1 ALM LED and TRB
LED will be ON and all the System Trouble LEDs will flash.
To Remove Module
Physically remove the module from the system and enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z1 SUPV LED is ON. Press the
‘Silence Trouble ’ button to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset the ‘supervision’ field for all the modules currently connected to the ‘secur-bus’.
To Add a Module
Just connect it to the system and it will auto-enroll within one minute.
Do not default (Z2)
(Factory default )
ALARM SUPV
Default to factory program (Z2)
TRB
To Default the System
Enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ button until the Z2 ALM LED is ON and Z2
TRB LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z2
SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ to exit this section.
Upon exit, the system will reset all of the panel programmable parameters to their factory default state. Please note that the
‘supervision’ field will be reset as well.
6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer
1.
Enter the programming mode by pressing and holding the Walk Test switch for 2 seconds.
2.
Press any switch. To silence the trouble buzzer and enter the Section 0 programming.
3.
Press and hold the Lamp Test switch for 2 seconds.
4.
The Common Supervisory LED flashes to indicate the View Buffer mode.
5.
Events are shown from the most recent to the oldest.
6.
See the event table below which indicates the LED patterns used to indicate various events.
7.
To advance to the next event press the Silence Trouble switch.
8.
Once all 20 events have been viewed, the next Silence Trouble keypress will exit the view buffer mode and return to the Section 0 programming. To exit the programming mode, press and hold for 2 seconds the Walk Test switch.
9.
Pressing the Silence Signal switch at any time will cause the system to exit the View
Buffer mode. The buzzer will sound. Press any button to go to the Section 0 programming mode.
Event Buffer Table
Display
Steady Common Alarm LED
Flashing Zone X Alarm LED
Steady Zone X Alarm LED
Event
Null Event
Verified Zone X Alarm
Verified Zone X Alarm
Restore
31
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Display Event
Flashing Zone X Alarm LED and Flashing
Zone X Supervisory LED
Flashing Zone X Supervisory LED
Steady Zone X Supervisory LED
Flashing Zone X Trouble LED
Steady Zone X Trouble LED
Flashing Common Trouble LED
Steady Common Trouble LED
Flashing NAC1 Trouble LED
Steady NAC1 Trouble LED
Flashing NAC2 Trouble LED
Steady NAC2 Trouble LED
Flashing Battery Trouble LED
Steady Battery Trouble LED
Flashing Ground Fault LED
Steady Ground Fault LED
Flashing Signal Silenced Trouble LED
Steady Signal Silenced Trouble LED
Flashing AC On LED
Steady AC On LED
Steady AC On LED and Steady BAT TRB
LED
Flashing AC On LED and Flashing BAT
TRB LED
Flashing (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s
Unverified Zone X Alarm
Zone X Supervisory
Zone X Supervisory Restore
Zone X Trouble
Zone X Trouble Restore
Expansion Module Fault
Expansion Module Fault
Restore
NAC 1 Trouble
NAC 1 Trouble Restore
NAC 2 Trouble
NAC 2 Trouble Restore
Battery Trouble
Battery Trouble Restore
Ground Fault Trouble
Ground Fault Restore
Manual Signal Silence
(Successful) Reset
AC Failure
AC Fail Restore
Cold Start
Warm Start
Steady (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s
Walk Test Start / Installer
Mode Entry
Walk Test End / Installer
Mode Exit
32
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
7.0 Startup of the MR-2602
7.1 Prior to power up
• Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value.
• Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.
• Verify that all metal components are bonded to the incoming ground. Should measure zero ohms between any metal part and the incoming ground wire.
• Verify that the polarity between the panel and connected devices is correct.
7.2 Power up sequence
• Connect the battery FIRST. The panel will not power up on the battery alone.
• Apply AC power. The panel will power up as follows:
• The panel goes into the Reset mode immediately. This lasts for 10 seconds and the trouble buzzer will beep during the reset period.
• After the reset period ends, the buzzer goes silent, the green AC indicator should be ON and all other LEDs should be OFF.
• If any LED other than the AC LED is ON then there is a fault in the system. Troubleshoot and repair the fault before proceeding.
• If the battery is not fully charged, the battery fault LED will come on after about 2 minutes.
Verify that the battery is connected properly and if it is, it may take up to 24 hours to recharge the batteries. Once the battery is charged, the battery fault LED will go OFF.
7.3 Default Operation
• On first power up, all programmable features will be in the default mode.
• Do a ‘Lamp Test’ to verify that all the indicators function.
• It is suggested that an initial verification of operation be done before the panel is programmed. Verify that each zone will go into alarm and that each NAC operates the
Notification Appliances and that the zone alarm indicator(s) function. Each zone is defaulted as an instant ‘fire alarm’ and each NAC is defaulted for ‘steady’ output on alarm.
An Alarm, Silence, Reset cycle will also verify that the push-button function properly.
• Verify that each zone indicates a trouble on a zone open and that a ground fault on the extended conductors is properly indicated.
7.4 Programming the Panel
• Program the panel for the operational features desired. (section 6)
• Record your configuration choices for future reference. (section 8)
• Verify panel operations and feature selections by initiating alarms and troubles as described above.
7.5 Final Verification
• Verify system operation and fault detection as required by the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
• Enable the ‘one-man’ walk test feature to test all the field devices and wiring.
33
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
8.0 Programming Worksheets
8.1 Entering Programming Mode
Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System” on page 23 for complete instructions.
All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
To enter the Programming mode:
1.
Press and hold the Walk Test button for two seconds (located behind the display PCB).
2.
Press any button to turn off the trouble buzzer.
3.
Press Silence Alarm to scroll through the settings for each programming section (e.g. to change the zone type, or to turn an option on or off).
4.
Press Silence Trouble to move to the next programming section (e.g. to move from zone
1 to zone 2).
5.
The panel will indicate the current programming section using the Common Trouble LEDs, as shown below .
34
Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 25 for detailed descriptions of each programming section.
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)
Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 25.) Record your programming choices in the table below.
1
2
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
1
2
Zone
No.
Type
(00 - 05)
Label
8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1)
Please see “NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
NAC1 Temporal / Steady
NAC2 Temporal / Steady
Temporal
‰
*Steady
‰
Temporal
‰
*Steady
‰
* = Factory default
8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2)
Please see “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
NAC Auto-silence
NAC2 Strobe or Bell
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
Strobe
‰
*Bell
‰
* = Factory default
35
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)
Please see “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 29.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
Signal Silence Inhibit Timer
One Man Walk Test
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
*Audible
‰
Silent
‰
* = Factory default
8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4)
Please see “Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)” on page 30.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
Waterflow Alarm Delay
Silencing of Waterflow Alarms
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
*Enabled
‰
Disabled
‰
* = Factory default
8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5)
Please see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 30.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
*Alarms
‰
Troubles
‰
1 Auto-verify faults are alarms or troubles
* = Factory default
36
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors
Panel
CID
Max. #
Detectors
01 25
Manufacturer
System Sensor
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
System Sensor 1451
System Sensor 2400
System Sensor 2400TH
System Sensor 2400AT
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
Model
1400/
1400A
2400AIT
2451
2451TH
1100
2100
2100T
Model
CID
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Base
N/A
B401
B401B
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
N/A
N/A
N/A
Base
CID
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
Ionization type smoke, 2-wire
12/24V DC
Plug-in –
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC
Photoelectric with Thermal, 2wire, 12/24V DC
Photoelectric with Thermal and
Horn, 2-wire,
24V DC
Photoelectric with isolated
Thermal and
Horn, 2-wire,
24V DC
Plug-in –
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Plug-in –
Photoelectric type smoke detector with
Thermal
Ionization, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip
Photoelectric,
2-wire, 12/
24V DC , terminal strip
Photoelectric,
2-wire, 12/
24V DC , thermistor, terminal strip
37
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Panel
CID
Max. #
Detectors
01 25
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
25
25
25
25
25
25
30
30
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
Model
Model
CID
2112/24T A
4451HT
4451HTA
5451
1151
1151A
2151
2151A
2100S
2100TS
2100AT
2100TR
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Base
N/A
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Base
CID
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
Photoelectric,
12/24V DC , terminal strip
Plug-in – High
Temp Heat
88°C (190°F)
Plug-in – Fixed
Temp/Rate of
Rise Detector
Plug-in – Low
Profile Ion
N/A
N/A
N/A
Plug-in – Low
Profile Photo
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Thermal
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Audible
Thermal
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Thermal
Auxiliary Relay
38
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
9.1 Smoke Detector Bases
Max. #
Detectors
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
Model
B401
B401B
B406B
B401BH
B110LP
B116LP
DH400
RMK400
Base
CID
N/A
Description
2-wire standard base, 4”, 12/24V DC
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2-wire standard base, 6”, 12/24V DC
2-wire base, 24V DC , form contact
24V DC sounder base for use with B401
2-wire, flangeless, 12/24V DC
2-wire base, 24V DC , form contact
Duct Detector Mount
Recessed mount kit for Series 400
9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Manufacturer
System Sensor
Detection
Systems
Gentex
Hochiki
DSC
ESL
Models
1124B
2124TR
2424TH
2424AIT
2124B
2124AT
2424AT
6424
2124TB
2124ATR
1151*
1451**
2124S
2124AITR
2151*
2451**
*Detector with B112LP Base **Detector with B402B Base
DS284 DS284TH DS284THS DS284THR
DS284THC DS284THE DS284ES
8240 8240T 8240P
DS284IS
8243P
8240PT
SIJ-24
MN240
MN240SR
741U
8243PT
SLR-24
MN240T
MN240SRT -
MN240R
741UT -
-
SLR-24H
-
-
SLR-835B
-
MN240RT
2124TS
1424
-
22451TH** -
-
2124R
2424
-
DS284THSR DS284THCS
-
-
8240PH
-
8243PH
-
-
-
MN240S
-
-
-
MN240ST
39
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes
System Sensor Type Cd
Voltage
(FWR)
P2415(W)(A)
P241575(W)(A)
P2475(W)(A)
P24110(W)(A)
S2415(W)(A)
S241575(W)(A)
S2475(W)(A)
S24110(W)(A)
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
S
S
S
S
15
15/75
75
110
15
15/75
75
110
H24(W)(A)
MDL(W)(A)
H
Module
-
-
20-30
20-30
No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
Gentex Type
GEH24
GES24-15
GES24-15/75
GES24-30
GES24-60
GES24-75
GES24-110
GEC24-15
GEC24-15/75
GEC24-30
GEC24-60
GEC24-75
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
GEC24-110 H/S
Available in Red and White.
S
S
S
H/S
S
S
H
S
Cd
60
75
110
15
-
15
15/75
30
15/75
30
60
75
110
Voltage
(FWR)
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
40
Wheelock
NS-2415W-FR(W)
NS-241575W-FR(W)
NS-2430W-FR(W)
NS-2475W-FR(W)
NS-24110W-FR(W)
NS4-2415W-FR(W)
H/S
H/S
NS4-241575W-FR(W) H/S
NS4-2430W-FR(W) H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
NS4-2475W-FR(W)
NS4-24110W-FR(W)
NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire
AS-2415W-FR(W) S
H/S
H/S
AS-241575W-FR(W)
AS-2430W-FR(W)
AS-2475W-FR(W)
AS-24110W-FR(W)
S
S
S
S
AS4-2415C-FR(W)
AS4-2430C-FR(W)
AS4-2475C-FR(W)
AS4-24110C-FR(W)
AH-24-R
AH-24-WP-R
MT-24-R
MT4-24-R
MT-24-SL-VFR
MT-24-SLM-VFR
MT-24-MS-VFR
MT-24-IS-VFR
MT-24-WM-VFR
H
H
H
H
S
S
S
S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
Type Cd
15
15/75
30
75
110
15
15/75
30
75
110
Voltage
(FWR)
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
15
15/75
30
75
117
110
15
30
75
15
15/75
30
75
110
-
-
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
41
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
FCC Compliance Statement
CAUTION : Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Re-orient the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Resolve
Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
42
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not
43
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most products contain software. With respect to those products, does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time.
Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the
Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
44
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
45
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Limited Warranty
warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by );
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: ’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
46
MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual
Out of Warranty Repairs
will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING: recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory.
Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
47
Notes
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 6 0 5
Fire Alarm Control Unit
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision A
Document #: LT-2016
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit ............................................................................................ 1
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements........................................................................... 1
1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................................................................................... 2
1.4 System Verification ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Standby Power................................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel ............................................................................................ 3
2.1 Unpacking the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 MR-2605 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Planning Your Installation ............................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Electrical Specifications .................................................................................................................. 6
2.6 Module Current Ratings .................................................................................................................. 7
2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart ................................................................................................... 7
2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ................................................................................. 8
3.0 Installing the MR-2605 Fire Panel............................................................................................................ 10
3.1 Environmental Specifications.......................................................................................................... 10
3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations ........................................................................................ 10
3.3 Mounting the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................... 11
4.0 Wiring the MR-2605 ................................................................................................................................. 12
4.1 Wiring Specifications....................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’) ........................................................................ 14
5.0 Panel Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 18
5.1 Operating Sequences ..................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms............................................................................................................... 18
5.3 Waterflow Alarms............................................................................................................................ 18
5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms................................................................................................................ 19
5.5 Trouble Operation ........................................................................................................................... 19
5.6 System Reset Operation................................................................................................................. 21
5.7 Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................... 21
5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)................................................................................................... 21
5.9 NAC operation ................................................................................................................................ 22
5.10 Relay Function .............................................................................................................................. 23
6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System......................................................................................................... 24
6.1 How to Program the MR-2605 ........................................................................................................ 24
6.2 Programming Section Descriptions................................................................................................. 25
6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer................................................................................................................. 30
7.0 Startup of the MR-2605............................................................................................................................ 33
7.1 Prior to power up............................................................................................................................. 33
7.2 Power up sequence ........................................................................................................................ 33
7.3 Default Operation............................................................................................................................ 33
7.4 Programming the Panel .................................................................................................................. 33
7.5 Final Verification ............................................................................................................................. 33
8.0 Programming Worksheets ....................................................................................................................... 34
8.1 Entering Programming Mode .......................................................................................................... 34
8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)....................................................................................................... 35
8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ........................................................................... 35
8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) ..................................................................... 36
8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)................................................................. 36
8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) ............................................................................................... 36
8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5) ............................................................................................ 37 i
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................................................................................... 38
9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ................................................................................................................... 40
9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.............................................................................................. 40
9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes.............................................................................................................. 41
FCC Compliance Statement .......................................................................................................................... 43
Warranty and Warning Information ................................................................................................................ 44
Warning Please Read Carefully............................................................................................................ 44
Limited Warranty................................................................................................................................... 46 ii
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
1.0 Introduction
1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit
General features
• Five initiating device circuits, class B / style B
• Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited)
[can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z]
• One common alarm-actuated relay, form ‘C’
• One common trouble-actuated relay, form ‘C’
• AUX+ power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited)
• Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns
• Integral battery charger
• Cabinet with dead-front construction
• Transformer, mounted in the cabinet
Applications
The MR-2605 five zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications.
• Protected Premises Fire Alarm System
• And for the following types of service:
A – automatic, M – Manual, SS – Sprinkler Supervisory, WF – Waterflow
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements
Relevant codes and standards
The MR-2605 fire alarm control panel is designed to meet the requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition, UL 864, Control Units for Fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition and in Canada, CAN/ULC-
S527, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, 1999 edition.
Information provided with this unit is intended as a guide. Installation of this equipment, optional system components, alarm initiating devices and notification appliances must follow the manufacturer’s guidelines as contained in their respective installation documents, all applicable codes and the instructions of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
General Installation requirements
Manufacturer’s documents
When installing the MR-2605 control panel, refer to this manual. When installing optional system components refer to the installation documents included with those components. When installing compatible alarm initiating devices or notification appliances, refer to the installation documents included with those products.
Field wiring
Field wiring recommendations in this document are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and in Canada with the standard for installation ULC/S 524, the most current Canadian Electrical Code, with all relevant local codes and standards, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Compatible devices
Use UL or ULC Listed smoke detectors and notification appliances that are compatible with the
MR-2605 Fire alarm control panel from the lists included in this manual.
1
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Smoke detector alarm verification
The MR-2605 alarm initiating zones can be configured for ‘Alarm Verification’. If this feature is used then do not use smoke detectors with built-in Alarm Verification.
Note: Use of alarm verification may require the approval of the local AHJ.
1.3 Technical Support and General Information
For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email [email protected].
For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com
.
1.4 System Verification
The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when:
• the initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction;
• any system component is added, changed or deleted;
• any programming changes are made;
• system wiring has been altered or repaired;
• system failure due to external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended power outages has occurred.
1.5 Standby Power
The MR-2605 provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within this manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within this manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.
2
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel
2.1 Unpacking the MR-2605
The basic MR-2605 package includes the following components:
• Cabinet with hinged door
• Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board.
• Zone label insert
• Battery compartment dead front plate
• Main control PCB
• Transformer
• Installation manual
• Hardware pack
-- 2 × NAC EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)
-- 5 × Zone EOL resistors (4.7 K, 5%, ½ W)
-- 1 × Battery jumper wire
-- 1 × EGND terminal ring
-- 1 × EGND KEP nut
• Door keys (taped to outside of cabinet)
All components described above are factory assembled into the enclosure.
3
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.2 Optional Accessories
Model Number Name Description
MR-2605-R3
MR-2806
MR-2644
MR-2605-T
MR-2605-AT
Relay module
Dual line dialer
Programmer
Remote trouble indicator.
Remote trouble indicator and alarm annunciator
Provides 3 relays that are jumper programmable to activate on common ‘alarm’,
‘supervisory’ or ‘trouble’. Mounts inside the enclosure and plugs into the main board.
Communicates all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using
Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 BPS communication formats. Programmable using the MR-2644 handheld programmer.
Mounts inside the enclosure and connects to the main panel using a supplied 4-wire cable with connector.
Handheld programmer for the MR-2806 DACT.
Single gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch. Mounts remotely to a single gang electrical box and is connected to the main panel via the 4-wire ‘secur-bus’.
Two gang plate complete with common trouble buzzer, trouble visual indicator, ‘AC on’ visual indicator and a trouble silence / lamp test switch and 5 red zone alarm visual indicators and 5 yellow zone supervisory indictors.
Mounts to a standard 2 gang electrical box and is connected to the panel via the 4-wire ‘securbus’.
MR-2605-SR EOL supervision relay Supervises the extended power wiring typically used for installations that employ 4-wire smoke detectors. Mounts in the field.
MRD-EOL4.7K
EOLR
MRD-MP400 EOLR plate
End-of-Line resistor for NAC and Initiating circuits. Mounts in the field.
Single gang plate with EOL resistor. Mounts to a single gang electrical backbox.
4
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.3 MR-2605 Overview
Figure 1: MR-2605 cabinet with door closed
Figure 2: MR-2605 display and controls
Zone Label Insert
A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area. Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert.
Zone designations can be written directly on the insert or can be created using Word for Windows, printed on Avery label #5167 and applied to the insert.
5
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.4 Planning Your Installation
This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals.
As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay.
• Consult with your local AHJ to ensure that the overall system will meet all requirements.
Have your plans reviewed and approved as required.
• Review the electrical specifications, mounting and wiring instructions in this manual and in the manuals of all connected modules and devices.
• Using the chart in this manual, calculate the standby battery size that will meet the standby time required. Include all components that will draw current from the standby battery when the panel is in the ‘standby’ mode.
• Determine the location of the control panel, all initiating and indicating devices and remote modules and mark them on your system layout plan.
• Using the charts in this manual, determine the wire gauge and wire run distances for the connected components. (initiating devices, indicating devices and ‘secur-bus’ connected components.)
• Review the programming section of this manual and determine the operating characteristics required of the initiating zones, indicating zones and common panel features.
2.4 Electrical Specifications
Circuit / Model(s) Rating
Primary AC / MR-2605
Primary AC / MR-2605-240
120 volts, 60 Hz. 1.5 Amps maximum
240 volts, 50 Hz. 1.0 Amps maximum
AUX+ / MR-2605/MR-2605-240 500 mA maximum
SCOM / MR-2605/MR-2605-240 500 mA maximum (current sink)
COM 500 mA maximum (current sink)
Relays (common alarm & trouble) Form ‘C’ contact, 2 Amp, 30 V DC resistive, power limited source
NAC Outputs 24 volts, full-wave rectified DC, 1.5
Amps max. – Power limited. (3.0 Amps total for both NAC circuits) EOLR – 4.7K ohm, ½ W, 5%
Initiating Zone Inputs
Battery Charging Current
Low Battery Trouble
24 V DC , 60 mA max.(in alarm) –
Supervisory current: 6.0 mA – max.
Loop resistance: 100 ohms max. –
EOLR: 4.7 K ohm, ½ W, 5%
350mA maximum
Low Battery Trouble: 22.0 V DC
Low Battery Trouble Restore: 23.0 VDC
Critical Shutdown: 19±0.5 V DC
6
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.6 Module Current Ratings
Module
MR-2605 Control panel
MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator
MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and remote 5 zone annunciator
MR-2806 DACT
MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**)
Standby Current
(mA) DC
130
15
15
45
0
Alarm Current
(mA) DC
475(*)
15
Max. Alarm
Current (mA) DC
715
15
20(*)
60
24
40
60
24
* Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm. The “Max. Alarm Current” assumes all zones are in alarm.
** Values shown are for all relays set for activation on ‘Alarm’. Each relay set for activation on
‘trouble’ is normally energized and on ‘AC fail’ will draw 0 mA.
2.7 Standby Battery calculation chart
All components that draw current from the panel while it is in the ‘standby’ mode (AC OFF) must be considered for the standby battery calculation. All components that draw current while in the
‘Alarm’ mode must be considered for the alarm battery calculation.
1.
The control panel will always draw the currents as shown in the chart.
2.
Typically the alarm current is calculated assuming only one initiating zone is in alarm. If it is required that more than one zone be considered, add 60 mA per zone in the Alarm column. Consult the smoke detector manufacture’s installation sheet to determine the standby current of these devices. Write that number in the ‘current per device’ column then multiply that number by the number of devices on the zone. Repeat for each zone.
3.
Consult the Notification Appliance installation sheet to determine the current draw for each device connected to the NAC. For each NAC, calculate the total current in alarm and put that number (mA) in the ‘Alarm’ column. Note: each NAC can supply 1.5 Amps max.
4.
For each added module in the system, multiply the number of modules times the module
‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents and write those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.
5.
Add up all the current drawn from the AUX+ output in the standby and alarm mode and put those totals in the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ columns.
6.
Add up all the currents in the ‘standby’ column and the ‘Alarm’ column.
7.
Convert the ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ currents from mA to Amps. (divide mA by 1000)
8.
Write in the ‘standby’ time required. (24 or 60 Hr.)
9.
Multiply the ‘standby’ Amps times the ‘standby’ time to get the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. required.
10. Write in the ‘alarm’ time required in hours. (5 min. = .08 Hr.)
11. Multiply the ‘alarm’ Amps times the ‘alarm’ time to get the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr required.
12. Add the ‘standby’ Amp-Hr. to the ‘alarm’ Amp-Hr. for the total Amp-Hr. required.
13. Multiply the total Amp-Hr. times 1.20 for the minimum Amp-Hr. battery required to support the system for the selected ‘standby time and the selected ‘alarm’ time.
7
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement
8
9
6
7
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Device
Current per device
(mA)
MR-2605 Standby: 130
Alarm: 415
Zone 1 Standby:
Alarm: 60
Zone 2
Zone 3
Standby:
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
60
60
Zone 4
Zone 5
NAC 1
NAC 2
MR-2605-T
Standby:
Alarm:
Standby:
Alarm:
60
60
Alarm:
Alarm:
Standby: 15
Alarm: 15
MR-2605-AT
MR-2806
MR-2605-R3
AUX+
Standby: 15
Alarm: 25
Standby: 45
Alarm: 60
Standby: 0
Alarm: 24
Standby:
Alarm:
Total ‘standby’ and ‘alarm’ current:
Divide ‘standby’ mA and ‘alarm’ mA by 1000:
Select ‘standby’ time required (24 or 60 Hr.):
Standby Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 7 = (Amps × Hr.): x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x x 1 x 1 x 1 x x 1
Number of device
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 130
=
Total
Standby
Current
(mA)
= mA
Amp
Hr.
415
60
Total
Alarm
Current
(mA) mA
Amp
Amp-Hr.
8
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
10
11
12
13
14
Step Device
Current per device
(mA)
Number of device
Select ‘alarm’ time required (.08):
Alarm Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 9 = (Amps × Hr.):
Total Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (8) + alarm Amp-Hr. (10):
Multiply the total Amp-Hr. by the safety margin:
Total battery Amp-Hr required to support the system:
1.20
Total
Standby
Current
(mA)
Total
Alarm
Current
(mA)
Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Amp-Hr.
Select a battery with an Amp-Hr. rating that is equal to or larger than the calculated minimum Amp-
Hr. battery required. Note: The maximum battery allowed is 12 Ah.
9
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
3.0 Installing the MR-2605 Fire Panel
3.1 Environmental Specifications
Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2605 panel:
• Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C
• Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing
• Close to a source of unswitched AC power
3.2 Panel Assembly and Modules Locations
The panel comes completely assembled from the factory. Remove the lower dead front for access to the battery compartment. Remove display control panel for access to AC connections.
Do not run power limited wiring into this area
MR-2605 = 120 VAC
MR-2605-240 = 240 VAC
10
3.3 Mounting the MR-2605
Mounting Dimensions
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Knockout Locations
Dimensions in inches
11
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
4.0 Wiring the MR-2605
4.1 Wiring Specifications
MR-2605 Terminal Descriptions
Terminal
Label
NAC 1
(+, –)
NAC 2
(+, –)
AUX+
COM
SCOM
DAT
CLK
TRB NO
TRB C
TRB NC
ALM NO
ALM C
Description
Notification Appliance Circuit # 1
24 V DC , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.
Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
Supervised for opens, shorts and ground fault.
Power limited.
Notification Appliance Circuit # 2
24 V DC , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max.
Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
Supervised for opens, shorts and ground fault.
Power limited
Auxiliary power output
24 V DC , filtered and regulated, 500 mA max., 400 mV
P-P ripple, power limited.
Auxiliary common power return, unswitched
24 V DC , 500 mA max.
Auxiliary common power return, switched
(open circuit on system reset or on 4-wire smoke detector reset)
24 V DC , 500 mA max. (Please refer to Appendix A for compatible 4-wire smoke detectors.)
Data line for remote module communications
Clock line for remote module communications
Common Trouble relay, Normally Open contact
Common Trouble relay, Common contact
Common Trouble relay, Normally Closed contact
The Common Trouble relay is normally energized and is de-energized on trouble.
Contacts are shown in the de-energized state.
Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps.
Common Alarm relay, Normally Open contact
Common Alarm relay, Common contact
12
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Terminal
Label
ALM NC
Description
Z1+
Z1-
Z2+…..Z5+
Z2-…..Z5-
Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact
The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized.
Contact is shown in the de-energized state.
Contacts are rated 30 V DC , 2 Amps max.
Zone 1 positive input
Zone 1 negative input
Zone output is 24 V DC nominal to power 2-wire smoke detectors. Maximum current draw is 60 mA in alarm and is limited by the zone circuitry. Zones may be configured to monitor both 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices that employ dry contacts.
(pullstations & heat detectors)
Same as zone 1 positive
Same as zone 1 negative
Connecting 2-Wire Alarm Initiating Devices
Typical
* See “9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors” on page 39 in this manual for a list of compatible 2-wire smoke detectors.
1.
Maximum 30 smoke detectors per zone (100 µA each standby).
2.
Manual station, heat detector.
3.
Maximum total loop wire resistance = 100 ohms.
4.
Program zone as:
Type 1 - Smoke and contact devices instant alarm (default)
Type 2 - Smoke auto-verify and contact as instant.
13
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
1.
Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone.
2.
Maximum total loop wire resistance is 100 ohms.
Zone Wiring Chart
Wire
(Gauge)
18
16
14
Distance
(feet)
7,690
12,195
19,230
Distance
(meters)
2,345
3,717
5,861
Maximum loop resistance is
100 ohms. Maximum current in alarm is 60 mA.
4.2 Connecting NAC Devices (Class ‘A’ and Class ‘B’)
Class ‘B’
Class ‘A’
14
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
NAC Wiring Chart
Maximum
Total
Loop
(ohms)
Maximum
Current
(A)
18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire ft m ft m ft m ft m
8.00
5.00
2.70
2.00
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
615
308
205
154
188
94
63
47
978
488
325
244
297
149
99
74
1,538 469
769 235
513
385
156
117
2,500 762
1,250 381
833
625
254
191
1.60
1.30
1.25
1.50
123
103
38
31
195
163
59
50
308
256
94
78
500
417
152
127
Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.
Connecting Batteries
Connecting AC Power
Connecting the Alarm and Trouble Relays
15
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Connecting Optional Devices
See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup.
1.
Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel.
2.
Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel.
Secur-bus Wiring Chart
Current
(mA)*
22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire ft ft ft m ft m ft m
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
2,524 769
1,262 384
842 256
631
505
421
361
192
154
128
110
6,410
3,200
2,135
1,600
1,280
1,065
915
1,954
976
651
488
390
325
279
10,160 3,098
5,080
3,385
1,549
1,032
2,540
2,030
1,690
1,450
774
619
515
442
16,000 4,878
8,000
5,340
2,439
1,628
4,000
3,200
2,670
2,285
1,220
976
814
697
120
135
150
165
315
281
252
229
96
86
77
70
800
710
640
580
244
216
195
177
1,270
1,125
1,015
920
387
343
309
280
2,000
1,780
1,600
1,455
610
543
488
444
180
195
210
225
210
194
180
168
64
59
55
51
530
490
455
425
162
149
139
130
845
780
725
675
258
238
221
206
1,335
1,230
1,145
1,065
407
375
349
325
*See module current ratings chart for current drawn by each module attached to the securbus.
16
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
To calculate the wire run distance for any gauge wire and any maximum current value, use the following formula:
Rmax = ohms 1.25
Imax
Amps
Distance = Rmax × 1,000
2(wire resistance in ohms per 1,000 feet) feet
Secur-bus Capacitance
Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad). Typical wire capacitance for 22 awg quad cable is 20 nF per 1,000 feet. Thus, for 22 awg quad cable, the maximum wire run distance is ((90/20)× 1,000) = 4,500 feet . Other types of wire have different capacitance values. Consult the wire manufacturer’s data sheets for typical capacitance values.
Please note that shielded wire has a much higher capacitance value and distances are severely reduced.
The following devices may be connected to the Secur-bus. All devices are supervised. See the section Reset Section Programming on page 31 for information on adding and deleting devices on the Secur-bus.
Devices
MR-2605-T
MR-2605-AT
MR-2806
Description
External to control panel.
Up to 4 of each device may be connected.
Mounted inside control panel. See diagram in “3.3
Mounting the MR-2605” on page 11.
Notes:
1.
Do not run the Secur-bus adjacent to sources of high transient noise such as AC wiring, telephone cable bundles or computer wiring.
2.
If the Secure-bus must go through a high transient area, use shielded cable.
3.
If shielded cable is used, the distances in the chart above are cut in half.
17
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
5.0 Panel Operation
5.1 Operating Sequences
This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the
MR-2605 System” on page 24 for information on how to program the panel, and descriptions of each of the programming options.
5.2 General Zone Fire Alarms
Zone alarms have priority over all other annunciation. When an alarm occurs, the following happens:
• The corresponding zone alarm LED begins flashing, the common alarm LED turns on steady, and the alarm relay turns on.
• If a trouble was present on that zone then the zone trouble LED turns off. If the trouble buzzer is audible then it also turns off.
• The NACs sound in a steady or temporal pattern, depending on the option selected (see
“Steady” on page 29).
• If enabled, the silence inhibit timer begins counting down (see “Silence Inhibit and Walk
Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30). If the silence inhibit timer is enabled, the panel cannot be silenced for 60 seconds following the first fire alarm.
Subsequent fire alarms do not restart or extend this timer. While the signal silence inhibit timer is counting down, if the Silence Alarm button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second ‘error tone’ on the common trouble buzzer.
• The NACs remain on until silenced with the Silence Alarm button, or if the automatic alarm silence is enabled, until the thirty minute bell timer runs out (see “NAC Auto-silence and
Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29). If the automatic silence timer is enabled, the panel will automatically silence the NACs 30 minutes after the last fire alarm. Each zone alarm will restart the timer, giving a full 30 minutes after the last alarm before the NACs are silenced.
• Once the NACs are silenced the signals silenced LED turns on and any flashing zone alarm LEDs turn on steady. The common trouble LED and trouble relay also turn on and, if the NACs have been silenced automatically , the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second
ON/OFF.
Note: A manual signal silence will not initiate the trouble buzzer. Only the common trouble
LED and signals silenced LED are turned on.
• Any additional zone alarms that occur while the panel is in alarm will reset the auto alarm silence timer and turn on the NACs, but the panel will not restart the 60 second silence inhibit timer.
• The zone alarm LEDs, common alarm LED and alarm relay will remain on steady until a system reset is performed.
5.3 Waterflow Alarms
If the Waterflow Silence option is turned off (see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals
Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31), when a waterflow zone (type 03) initiates an alarm the
NACs cannot be silenced until all waterflow zones are returned to normal. If all waterflow zones return to normal after the 30 minute automatic signal silence timer has expired, then the panel will silence the NACs.
If the Waterflow Silence option is turned on, then an alarm on a waterflow zone is treated like any other fire alarm.
18
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Waterflow alarms may be delayed by 60 seconds to prevent false alarms from surges in the sprinkler system. The delay is common to all zones programmed as ‘waterflow’, type 03 zones. If the delay is not used, all waterflow alarms will be instant.
5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms
When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing. The common supervisory LED and supervisory relay (supervisory relay is optional) turn on steady, and the buzzer turns on steady. If there was a trouble on that zone, the zone trouble LED turns off. The buzzer remains on until the trouble silence button is pressed.
Once the buzzer is silenced any flashing zone supervisory LEDs turn on steady. The zone supervisory LEDs, common supervisory LED and supervisory relay remain on steady until a system reset is performed.
Subsequent Fire Supervisory
After silencing a fire supervisory, a subsequent fire supervisory from another zone will resound the trouble/supervisory buzzer and the new zone supervisory LED flashes until the Silence Trouble button is pressed.
Supervisory / Trouble Priority
If a supervisory zone has a trouble and it goes into alarm, the zone trouble LED is extinguished until that zone is restored and the panel has been reset. The common trouble LED will remain on steady until all supervisory alarms have been restored and the panel reset. All other ‘common’ trouble indicators will operate normally.
Supervisory / Fire Alarm Priority
The supervisory zone LED, the common supervisory LED and the buzzer (in the steady supervisory mode) function normally whether there is a fire alarm present or not.
5.5 Trouble Operation
When a trouble occurs, if there is a corresponding trouble LED it turns on steady. The common trouble LED and the trouble relay also turn on. If no alarm is present on the system, the buzzer will sound at a rate of ½ second ON/OFF. The buzzer and trouble LEDs will remain on until the trouble is restored. If the Silence Trouble button is pressed, the buzzer turns off. Subsequent troubles will resound the trouble buzzer.
Note: If there is no trouble present in the system then pressing the Silence Trouble button will result in a 1 second error tone.
Please see the following table for a list of system faults that will initiate a trouble.
19
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
System Troubles
System faults
Common
Trouble
LED
Alarm zone open circuit – loss of EOLR turns on
NAC open circuit or short circuit
Battery low voltage or disconnected
Signals silenced - automatically
Ground on extended conductor
AC fails completely, or is low for more than 10 seconds
(brownout)
Installer Programming Mode
Active
Loss of Remote Trouble Unit
Loss of Remote Alarm/
Trouble Unit
TLM on one or both telephone lines (Dialer)
Failure to communicate
(Dialer)
Unsuccessful system reset
Loss of Dialer module turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on flashes turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on turns on
Buzzer sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off sounds ½ second on/ off
Trouble
Relay
Other Indicators deactivates Zone trouble LED turns on steady deactivates NAC1 or NAC2 trouble LED turns on deactivates Battery LED turns on deactivates Signals Silenced
LED turns on deactivates Ground LED turns on deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates AC LED turns off deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates deactivates
20
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
5.6 System Reset Operation
To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.
The panel can only be reset if:
• the NACs have been silenced
• the supervisory buzzer has been silenced
• and all waterflow zones are restored (only applies if the Silence Waterflow option is turned off - see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31).
If the panel is not in a condition to be reset, when the ‘Reset System’ button is pressed the panel will sound a 1 second error tone on the buzzer.
After the 10 second reset period, the panel will turn off the zone LED for any zones that have been restored. If one or more zones is still in alarm after the reset period, the panel will activate the
NACs as programmed. If there are no alarms but one or more Supervisory zones is still ‘offnormal’ after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer in the Supervisory mode. If there are no alarms or supervisory conditions but a trouble is present in the panel after the reset period, the panel will sound the trouble buzzer. After the reset period, LEDs for any alarms, supervisory off-normal or trouble conditions will be on.
5.7 Lamp Test
The lamp test will check all of the panel and annunciator LEDs. To do a lamp test, press and hold the Lamp Test button. All the LEDs will flash.
A lamp test will only work if the NACs are not active and the supervisory buzzer is not active. If a lamp test is unsuccessful the buzzer will sound a 1 second error tone. If any trouble or zone has a state change during lamp test, the lamp test will be cancelled and the panel will return to normal operation.
21
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only)
To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 30).
1.
To walk test the panel press the Walk Test button. The common trouble LED flashes and the buzzer sounds one short beep. The panel will be in walk test mode for one hour, or until you press the Walk Test button again.
2.
As you test each part of the system, the panel will give the following indications:
Type of activation LEDs NACs*
Trouble
Buzzer
Fire Alarm or Fire
Supervisory
Fire Alarm or Fire
Supervisory Restoral
Zone or System Trouble
Zone or System Trouble
Restoral
Zone alarm/
Supv LED turns on
Zone alarm/
Supv LED turns off
Zone or system trouble LED turns on
Zone or system trouble LED turns off
1 squawk
1 squawk
2 squawks
2 squawks
Sounds
Stops sounding
Ground Fault Ground trouble LED turns on
3 squawks Sounds
Ground Fault Restoral Ground trouble LED turns off
3 squawks Stops sounding
*Only if Walk Test Audible option is turned on.
Zone LEDs operate normally except that alarms do not latch - the alarm LEDs will turn off when the zone is restored and the auto-reset has been successful.
Alarm and trouble relays are NOT activated. If used, any remote connection is not activated.
3.
To return the system to normal operation, press the Walk Test button. If you do not press the Walk Test button, the system will return to normal operation after one hour. If any zones are in alarm at the end of the walk test, the zones will indicate silenced signals.
The Lamp Test button does not work while the panel is in Walk Test mode.
22
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
5.9 NAC operation
See also “Steady” on page 29, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2
(‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information.
Class ‘B’ operation selections:
• Steady (default) – On alarm the NAC will turn on steady. It will turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.
• Temporal 3 – On alarm the NAC will turn on with the temporal 3 pattern and turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.
• NAC2 Strobe – On alarm NAC2 will turn on steady. It will not turn off on a manual or automatic signal silence. NAC2 set in this mode will only turn off on system reset if all zone fire alarms are restored. Only NAC2 can be set in this mode.
Class ‘A’ operation selections
If the panel NACs are set for class ‘A’ operation then there is only one NAC. In this configuration the NAC output can only be set for steady or temporal using the NAC1 programming options For class ‘A’, the NAC2 Strobe option is not available.
5.10 Relay Function
Alarm Relay
The panel activates the alarm relay upon any (non-supervisory) zone alarm. The panel deactivates the alarm relay upon a successful system reset.
Trouble Relay
The panel deactivates the trouble relay upon any system trouble. The panel activates the trouble relay upon the restoral of all system troubles.
Supervisory Relay (available with the MR-2605-R3 Relay Expander only)
The panel activates the supervisory relay upon any supervisory zone alarm. The panel deactivates the supervisory relay upon a successful system reset.
23
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System
6.1 How to Program the MR-2605
You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming.
Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.
Entering the Programming mode
All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
1.
Remove the lower front cover and locate the ‘Walk Test Switch’ behind the control panel
PCB, as shown below.
2.
Press and hold the Walk Test Switch for two seconds. The common trouble buzzer and common trouble LED turn on and pulse ½ second on/off.
3.
Press any button. The trouble buzzer is silent, and the zone 1 alarm LED turns on steady.
The common trouble LED continues to flash.
4.
The panel is now ready to program.
Programming the Panel
The control panel has six different programming sections, which are shown in the table below. The
Panel Status LEDs indicate which programming section you are currently in.
24
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices:
1.
Each sub-section in a section will have 2 or more programming settings, indicated by the panel Zone Supervisory and Zone Trouble LEDs. To scroll through the programming settings, press the Silence Alarm button. Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 26 for descriptions of each section and settings, and the LED indications for each setting.
2.
When the LEDs show the setting you want for a sub-section, move to the next programming sub-section by pressing the Silence Trouble button. The panel will save the indicated settings when you exit the programming mode or go to the next programming section.
3.
When you have programmed all the sub-sections in a section, the panel will move to the next programming section when you press the Silence Trouble button.
Pressing Silence Trouble will advance forward through each programming sub-section, and each section.
Example: in the Zone 1 programming sub-section, pressing Silence Alarm will scroll through each zone type setting (null zone, instant zone, auto-verify zone, etc.). When the panel shows the zone type you want for zone 1, press Silence Trouble to move on to Zone 2 programming.
Exiting the Programming Mode
When you come to the end of all the programming sections, press Silence Trouble to exit the programming mode.
To exit programming mode at any other point in the panel programming, press and hold the Walk
Test switch for two seconds.
If 5 minutes elapse without any button presses, the panel will automatically exit the programming mode. During the final 60 seconds before the exit, the panel will sound a warning tone on the buzzer. Press any button to cancel the auto-exit and resume programming.
After you exit the programming mode, the panel performs a system reset for 10 seconds, during which the buzzer sounds double beeps. When the beeping stops the panel returns to normal operating mode and all programming choices are stored in memory.
25
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
6.2 Programming Section Descriptions
Zone Programming (Section 0)
In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows:
Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used)
The zone is not used. The zone is not supervised, alarms and troubles are ignored. The end-of-line resistor is not required.
Zone type 01 – Instant alarm for 2-wire smoke detectors and contact devices
Zone type 01 does not differentiate between 2-wire smoke detectors, contact devices, or 4-wire smoke detectors. When a 2-wire smoke detector, 4 –wire smoke detector or contact device goes into alarm:
The panel goes into alarm without any delay. If an instant zone goes into alarm, any auto-verify sequence in progress on another zone will be immediately cancelled and both zones will indicate an alarm condition.
26
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors
Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure
(pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.
When a 2-wire smoke detector on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:
1.
Power is removed from the zone for 25 seconds to reset the smoke detector(s).
2.
After the verification period starts (power removed) if any contact device on that zone is activated, the verification sequence is cancelled, and the panel goes into immediate alarm.
3.
Power is restored to the zone at the end of the 25 second reset period.
4.
For the next 95 seconds, any smoke detector or contact device that goes into alarm will cause the panel to immediately go into alarm, activate the NACs, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.
5.
If during the total verification period (120 sec.), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.
6.
If two auto-verify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm.
When a contact alarm initiating device (pullstation) on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:
1.
The panel immediately goes into alarm. Any auto-verification sequence that may be active will be cancelled.
27
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone
This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’ type zone alarms for 60 seconds.
CAUTION: Do not use the waterflow delay timer when:
• The monitored Waterflow alarm actuating devices have a built-in delay of 30 seconds or more. The overall maximum waterflow alarm initiation delay allowed is 90 seconds. (NFPA A-5-6.2 –
1996 edition)
• The sprinkler system includes ‘ON/OFF’ type sprinkler heads.
Such sprinkler heads can cycle on and off within 30 seconds thus preventing an alarm from being registered.
When the contact on a Waterflow alarm initialing device is activated:
1.
If the waterflow delay is not used, the control panel will go into alarm instantly.
If the waterflow delay is used, the waterflow timer will start on the first waterflow alarm. Subsequent waterflow alarms will not restart the 60 second timer.
2.
Once the 60 second time expires, if any waterflow zones are still in alarm, the panel will initiate an immediate alarm. If all waterflow zones have restored at the end of the 60 seconds, an alarm will not be initiated.
Zone type 04 – Supervisory zone
When the contact on a Supervisory device is initiated:
1.
The control panel will immediately indicate the Supervisory “offnormal” condition.
2.
The zone supervisory LED (yellow) will flash, the common
‘supervisory’ LED will come on steady and the common trouble buzzer will sound steadily. Pressing the ‘trouble silence’ switch will silence the buzzer and the zone supervisory LED will stop flashing and turn on steadily.
3.
Fire supervisory zones are latching and can only be restored when the initiating device is restored and a system reset is performed.
28
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors.
This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from 4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to auto-verify alarms from those smoke detectors.
CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.
When a 4-wire smoke detector on an auto-verify zone goes into alarm:
1.
The panel open circuits the ‘SCOM’ line, removing power from all
4-wire smoke detectors in the system.
2.
At the end of the 25 second reset period, power is restored to the zone and to all 4-wire smoke detectors. For 95 seconds following the reset period, if any smoke detector on that zone is still in alarm, the panel will activate the NACs as programmed, the visual indicators and the common alarm relay.
3.
If during the total verification period (120 seconds), any other zone on the panel goes into alarm, the verification sequence is cancelled and the panel immediately goes into alarm. If two autoverify zones activate simultaneously, both verification sequences are cancelled and the panel goes into alarm without any delay.
NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)
You can individually program both NAC1 and NAC2 to sound in either a temporal or steady pattern. By default, both NAC outputs are programmed as steady.
Temporal
The NAC1 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5 seconds ON,
0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON,
1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.
The NAC2 will sound the Temporal/ANSI Fire Pattern: 0.5 seconds ON,
0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds OFF, 0.5 seconds ON,
1.5 seconds OFF, repeat.
Steady
The NAC1 will sound continuously.
The NAC2 will sound continuously.
NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)
Automatic Signal Silence
If Automatic Signal Silence is enabled, 30 minutes after the last fire alarm on the system, the panel restores the NACs to normal (alarms are silenced).
If another alarm occurs after the NACs are silenced, the panel will restart the timer for another 30 minute period.
If Automatic Signal Silence is disabled, the panel will not silence the
NACs automatically.
29
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
NAC2 Strobe
If this option is enabled, on alarm, NAC2 turns on steady and does not turn off on automatic signal silence, or when the Silence Alarm button is pressed. When NAC2 is set to this mode, it can only be turned off when all zone fire alarms are restored, and the system is reset. Only NAC2 can be set to this mode.
If this option is disabled, the panel will restore NAC2 to normal following an automatic signal silence (see Automatic Signal Silence, above), or following a press of the ‘Silence Alarm’ button.
Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)
Signal Silence Inhibit Timer
If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is enabled, when the first alarm is activated, the panel will begin a 60 second countdown. During this 60 seconds, users will not be able to turn off the NACs by pressing the
Silence Alarm button. The timer is started on the first alarm only and is not restarted on subsequent alarms.
If the Signal Silence Inhibit Timer is disabled, users will be able to turn off the NACs at any time, by pressing the Silence Alarm button.
If NAC2 is set as a strobe, users will never be able to turn off NAC2 using the Silence Alarm button. See “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test
Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30.
Audible Walk Test
You can set the One Man Walk Test to be either audible or silent. If the
One Man Walk Test is set for audible, then the following will occur:
• On a fire or Supervisory alarm/restoral the bells will pulse ONCE
• On a zone or system trouble/restoral, except ground fault, the bells will pulse TWICE
• On any ground fault/restoral the bells will pulse THREE times.
If the One Man Walk Test is set for silent, the bells will not sound during the walk test.
Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)
Delay Waterflow Alarms
If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned on, the panel will start a 60 second timer when the first Waterflow zone goes into alarm. The panel will not restart the timer on subsequent Waterflow zone alarms. When the timer expires, if any waterflow zone is still in alarm, the panel will immediately go into alarm. If any other type of fire zone goes into alarm during the waterflow delay countdown, the panel will immediately go into alarm in response to that zone.
If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned off, alarms on Waterflow zones will cause an immediate alarm in the panel.
30
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Silence Waterflow Alarms
If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned on, Waterflow zones can be silenced whether the zones are physically restored or not.
If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned off, Waterflow zones cannot be silenced until they are physically restored. This applies to both automatic signal silence, and the Silence Alarm button. If there is a trouble on a Waterflow zone following the alarm and alarm restore, the zone can be silenced.
Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)
If the Auto Verify Fault is Alarm option is turned on, the following will occur:
• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an
ALARM condition and assume that the circuit has been forced open by fire. Please see “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 26 for more information on auto-verify zones.
If the Auto Verify Fault is Trouble option is turned on, the following will occur:
• if a zone initiates an auto-verify sequence and returns from power down in the trouble state, the system will treat this as an
TROUBLE condition. Please see “Zone Programming (Section
0)” on page 26 for more information on auto-verify zones.
50/60 Hz Option
Reset Section Programming (All common trouble LEDs flashing)
To Enter this Programming Section
1.
Enter the installer programming mode, section 0
2.
Press and hold the System Reset button for 2 seconds. The Z1 ALM LED and TRB LED will be
ON and all the System Trouble LEDs will flash.
To Remove Module
Physically remove the module from the system and enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z1 SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble ’ button to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset the ‘supervision’ field for all the modules currently connected to the ‘secur-bus’.
To Add a Module
Just connect it to the system and it will auto-enroll within one minute.
Do not default (Z2)
(Factory default )
ALARM SUPV
Default to factory program (Z2)
TRB To Default the System
Enter the reset section programming as described above. Press the
‘Silence Trouble’ button until the Z2 ALM LED is ON and Z2 TRB LED is
ON. Press the ‘Silence Alarm’ button until the Z2 SUPV LED is ON. Press the ‘Silence Trouble’ to exit this section. Upon exit, the system will reset all of the panel programmable parameters to their factory default state.
Please note that the ‘supervision’ field will be reset as well.
31
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer
1.
Enter the programming mode by pressing and holding the Walk Test switch for 2 seconds.
2.
Press any switch. To silence the trouble buzzer and enter the Section 0 programming.
3.
Press and hold the Lamp Test switch for 2 seconds.
4.
The Common Supervisory LED flashes to indicate the View Buffer mode.
5.
Events are shown from the most recent to the oldest.
6.
See the event table below which indicates the LED patterns used to indicate various events.
7.
To advance to the next event press the Silence Trouble switch.
8.
Once all 20 events have been viewed, the next Silence Trouble keypress will exit the view buffer mode and return to the Section 0 programming. To exit the programming mode, press and hold for 2 seconds the Walk Test switch.
9.
Pressing the Silence Signal switch at any time will cause the system to exit the View
Buffer mode. The buzzer will sound. Press any button to go to the Section 0 programming mode.
Event Buffer Table
Display Event
Steady Common Alarm LED
Flashing Zone X Alarm LED
Steady Zone X Alarm LED
Flashing Zone X Alarm LED and Flashing
Zone X Supervisory LED
Flashing Zone X Supervisory LED
Steady Zone X Supervisory LED
Flashing Zone X Trouble LED
Steady Zone X Trouble LED
Flashing Common Trouble LED
Steady Common Trouble LED
Flashing NAC1 Trouble LED
Steady NAC1 Trouble LED
Flashing NAC2 Trouble LED
Steady NAC2 Trouble LED
Flashing Battery Trouble LED
Steady Battery Trouble LED
Flashing Ground Fault LED
Steady Ground Fault LED
Null Event
Verified Zone X Alarm
Verified Zone X Alarm
Restore
Unverified Zone X Alarm
Zone X Supervisory
Zone X Supervisory Restore
Zone X Trouble
Zone X Trouble Restore
Expansion Module Fault
Expansion Module Fault
Restore
NAC 1 Trouble
NAC 1 Trouble Restore
NAC 2 Trouble
NAC 2 Trouble Restore
Battery Trouble
Battery Trouble Restore
Ground Fault Trouble
Ground Fault Restore
32
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Display Event
Flashing Signal Silenced Trouble LED
Steady Signal Silenced Trouble LED
Flashing AC On LED
Steady AC On LED
Steady AC On LED and Steady BAT TRB
LED
Flashing AC On LED and Flashing BAT
TRB LED
Flashing (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s
Steady (ALL) Zone Trouble LED’s
Manual Signal Silence
(Successful) Reset
AC Failure
AC Fail Restore
Cold Start
Warm Start
Walk Test Start / Installer
Mode Entry
Walk Test End / Installer
Mode Exit
33
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
7.0 Startup of the MR-2605
7.1 Prior to power up
• Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value.
• Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.
• Verify that all metal components are bonded to the incoming ground. Should measure zero ohms between any metal part and the incoming ground wire.
• Verify that the polarity between the panel and connected devices is correct.
7.2 Power up sequence
• Connect the battery FIRST. The panel will not power up on the battery alone.
• Apply AC power. The panel will power up as follows:
• The panel goes into the Reset mode immediately. This lasts for 10 seconds and the trouble buzzer will beep during the reset period.
• After the reset period ends, the buzzer goes silent, the green AC indicator should be ON and all other LEDs should be OFF.
• If any LED other than the AC LED is ON then there is a fault in the system. Troubleshoot and repair the fault before proceeding.
• If the battery is not fully charged, the battery fault LED will come on after about 2 minutes.
Verify that the battery is connected properly and if it is, it may take up to 24 hours to recharge the batteries. Once the battery is charged, the battery fault LED will go OFF.
7.3 Default Operation
• On first power up, all programmable features will be in the default mode.
• Do a ‘Lamp Test’ to verify that all the indicators function.
• It is suggested that an initial verification of operation be done before the panel is programmed. Verify that each zone will go into alarm and that each NAC operates the
Notification Appliances and that the zone alarm indicator(s) function. Each zone is defaulted as an instant ‘fire alarm’ and each NAC is defaulted for ‘steady’ output on alarm.
An Alarm, Silence, Reset cycle will also verify that the push-button function properly.
• Verify that each zone indicates a trouble on a zone open and that a ground fault on the extended conductors is properly indicated.
7.4 Programming the Panel
• Program the panel for the operational features desired. (section 6)
• Record your configuration choices for future reference. (section 8)
• Verify panel operations and feature selections by initiating alarms and troubles as described above.
7.5 Final Verification
• Verify system operation and fault detection as required by the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
• Enable the ‘one-man’ walk test feature to test all the field devices and wiring.
34
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
8.0 Programming Worksheets
8.1 Entering Programming Mode
Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System” on page 24 for complete instructions.
All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
To enter the Programming mode:
1.
Press and hold the Walk Test button for two seconds (located behind the display PCB).
2.
Press any button to turn off the trouble buzzer.
3.
Press Silence Alarm to scroll through the settings for each programming section (e.g. to change the zone type, or to turn an option on or off).
4.
Press Silence Trouble to move to the next programming section (e.g. to move from zone
1 to zone 2).
5.
The panel will indicate the current programming section using the Common Trouble LEDs, as shown below:
Please see “6.2 Programming Section Descriptions” on page 26 for detailed descriptions of each programming section.
35
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0)
Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 26.) Record your programming choices in the table below.
3
4
1
2
5
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
3
4
1
2
5
Zone
No.
Type
(00 - 05)
Label
8.3 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1)
Please see “Steady” on page 29.
Settings
1
2
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
NAC1 Temporal / Steady
NAC2 Temporal / Steady
* = Factory default
Temporal
Temporal
‰
*Steady
‰
‰
*Steady
‰
36
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2)
Please see “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
NAC Auto-silence
NAC2 Strobe or Bell
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
Strobe
‰
*Bell
‰
* = Factory default
8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3)
Please see “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 30.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
Signal Silence Inhibit Timer
One Man Walk Test
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
*Audible
‰
Silent
‰
* = Factory default
8.6 Waterflow Programming (Section 4)
Please see “Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady)” on page 30.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM
LED On
Programming Section
1
2
Waterflow Alarm Delay
Silencing of Waterflow Alarms
Enabled
‰
*Disabled
‰
*Enabled
‰
Disabled
‰
* = Factory default
37
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5)
Please see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31.
Settings
ZONE
ALARM LED
On
Programming Section
*Alarms
‰
Troubles
‰
1 Auto-verify faults are alarms or troubles
* = Factory default
38
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors
Panel
CID
Max. #
Detectors
01 25
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Manufacturer Model
System Sensor 1400/
1400A
System Sensor 1451
System Sensor 2400
System Sensor 2400TH
System Sensor 2400AT
System Sensor 2400AIT
System Sensor 2451
System Sensor 2451TH
System Sensor 1100
System Sensor 2100
System Sensor 2100T
System Sensor 2112/24T
Model
CID
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Base
N/A
B401
B401B
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
B401
B401B
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Base
CID
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
B401
B401B
DH400
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
Ionization type smoke, 2-wire
12/24V DC
Plug-in –
Ionization type smoke detector
Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC
Photoelectric with Thermal, 2wire, 12/24V DC
Photoelectric with Thermal and Horn, 2wire, 24V DC
Photoelectric with isolated
Thermal and
Horn, 2-wire,
24V DC
Plug-in –
Photoelectric type smoke detector
Plug-in –
Photoelectric type smoke detector with
Thermal
Ionization, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip
Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC , terminal strip
Photoelectric, 2wire, 12/24V DC , thermistor, terminal strip
Photoelectric,
12/24V DC , terminal strip
39
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Panel
CID
Max. #
Detectors
01 25
Manufacturer Model
System Sensor 4451HT
4451HTA
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
25
25
25
25
25
30
30
System Sensor 5451
System Sensor 1151
1151A
System Sensor 2151
2151A
System Sensor 2100S
System Sensor 2100TS
System Sensor 2100AT
System Sensor 2100TR
Model
CID
A
A
A
A
A
Base
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
B401
B401B
DH400
N/A
Base
CID
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
A
A
A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
Plug-in – High
Temp Heat
88°C (190°F)
Plug-in – Fixed
Temp/Rate of
Rise Detector
Plug-in – Low
Profile Ion
Plug-in – Low
Profile Photo
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Thermal
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Audible
Thermal
2-wire direct wire
Photoelectric
Thermal
Auxiliary Relay
40
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
9.1 Smoke Detector Bases
Max. #
Detectors
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
System
Sensor
Model
B401
B401B
B406B
B401BH
B110LP
B116LP
DH400
RMK400
Base
CID
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
2-wire standard base, 4”, 12/24V DC
2-wire standard base, 6”, 12/24V
2-wire base, 24V
24V DC sounder base for use with B401
2-wire base, 24V
DC
DC
, form contact
2-wire, flangeless, 12/24V
, form contact
Duct Detector Mount
DC
DC
Recessed mount kit for Series 400
9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Manufacturer
System
Sensor
Detection
Systems
Gentex
Hochiki
DSC
ESL
Models
1124B
2124TR
2424TH
2124B
2124AT
2424AT
2124TB
2124ATR
1151*
2124S
2124AITR
2151*
2424AIT 6424 1451** 2451**
*Detector with B112LP Base **Detector with B402B Base
DS284 DS284TH DS284THS
DS284THC DS284THE DS284ES
DS284THR
DS284IS
8240
8240PT
SIJ-24
MN240
MN240SR
741U
8240T
8243PT
SLR-24
MN240T
MN240SRT
741UT
-
8240P
SLR-24H
MN240R
-
-
-
8243P
SLR-835B
MN240RT
-
-
2124TS
-
1424
22451TH** -
2124R
-
2424
-
DS284THSR DS284THCS
-
-
8240PH
-
8243PH
-
MN240S
-
-
-
MN240ST
-
-
41
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes
System Sensor Type Cd
Voltage
(FWR)
P2415(W)(A)
P241575(W)(A)
P2475(W)(A)
P24110(W)(A)
S2415(W)(A)
S241575(W)(A)
S2475(W)(A)
S24110(W)(A)
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
S
S
S
S
15
15/75
75
110
15
15/75
75
110
H24(W)(A)
MDL(W)(A)
H
Synch
-
Module
20-30
20-30
No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
20-30
Gentex Type
GEH24
GES24-15
GES24-15/75
GES24-30
GES24-60
GES24-75
GES24-110
GEC24-15
GEC24-15/75
GEC24-30
GEC24-60
GEC24-75
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
GEC24-110 H/S
Available in Red and White.
S
S
S
H/S
S
S
H
S
Cd
60
75
110
15
-
15
15/75
30
15/75
30
60
75
110
Voltage
(FWR)
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
42
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Wheelock
NS-2415W-FR(W)
NS-241575W-FR(W)
NS-2430W-FR(W)
NS-2475W-FR(W)
NS-24110W-FR(W)
NS4-2415W-FR(W)
NS4-241575W-FR(W)
NS4-2430W-FR(W)
NS4-2475W-FR(W)
NS4-24110W-FR(W)
NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire
AS-2415W-FR(W) S
H/S
H/S
AS-241575W-FR(W)
AS-2430W-FR(W)
AS-2475W-FR(W)
AS-24110W-FR(W)
S
S
S
S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
AS4-2415C-FR(W)
AS4-2430C-FR(W)
AS4-2475C-FR(W)
AS4-24110C-FR(W)
AH-24-R
AH-24-WP-R
MT-24-R
MT4-24-R
MT-24-SL-VFR
MT-24-SLM-VFR
MT-24-MS-VFR
MT-24-IS-VFR
MT-24-WM-VFR
H
H
H
H
S
S
S
S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
H/S
Type Cd
15
15/75
30
75
110
15
15/75
30
75
110
Voltage
(FWR)
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
15
15/75
30
75
117
110
15
30
75
15
15/75
30
75
110
-
-
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
20-31
43
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
FCC Compliance Statement
CAUTION : Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Re-orient the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Resolve
Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
44
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not
45
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most products contain software. With respect to those products, does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time.
Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the
Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
46
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
47
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Limited Warranty
warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by );
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: ’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
48
MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Out of Warranty Repairs
will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to must first obtain an authorization number. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING: recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory.
Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
49
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
Limited Warranty
Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product.
The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
In no event shall Secutron be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product.
Important!
Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, Ontario, Canada
L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 695-3545
Fax: (905) 660-4113
E-mail: www.secutron.com
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON
Fax: 888-660-4113
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
MR-2605-R3 Relay Module
The MR-2605-R3 relay module includes three relays with form ‘C’ contacts rated at
30VDC, 2A. Each relay is jumper programmable to activate on ‘Alarm’, ‘Supervisory’ or
‘Trouble’ mode. Refer to MR-2602 or MR-2605 Installation Manual .
Parts List
• Qty 1 MR-2605-R3 module
• Qty 1 #4-40 pan head screw
• Qty 1 spacer
• Qty 3 jumpers
Specifications
• Standby current ... 0 mA
Add 8 mA for each relay programmed for ‘Trouble’
• Alarm current ... 8 mA (for each relay programmed for alarm).
• Relay contacts Vmax ... 30V
DC
• Relay contacts Imax ... 2 A
NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005850) included with the control panel.
Installing the MR-2605-R3 Module
The MR-2065-R3 module mounts on the MR-2602/2605 fire alarm control unit board as indicated below. Refer to Fig 1.
1.
Screw the the 1/2 inch nylon hex spacer (provided) hand-tight onto the center pem stud.
2.
Insert the the MR-2605-R3 header pins into the header on the MR-2602/2605
FACP.
3.
Secure the relay module to the nylon spacer using the #4-40 screw provided.
4.
Configure jumper for desired operating modes. Refer figure 1.
5.
Route 14-18 AWG hookup wire through the panel access holes in accordance with local regulations.
6.
Secure wire connections to relay terminals as required.
7.
Refer to MR2602 or MR2605 Installation Manual for programming details.
LT-2018 Rev. A
MR-2605-R3 RELAY MODULE INSTALLATION
Jumper Configuration
Use #4-40 screw to secure relayboard to nylon spacer.
MR-2602 / MR-2605 main board
Screw nylon spacer onto this stud.
MR-2605-R3 header pins insert into header socket on main PC board
Refer to MR-2602 or MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit
Manual f or fur ther details.
Up
SUPERVISORY
Middle
ALARM
Down
TROUBLE
J1 J2 J3
Rel ay 1 Rela y 2 Rel ay 3
NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
1 2 3
Note:
J1= Relay 1
J2 = Relay 2
J3 = Relay 3
Wire Gauge
14 -18 AW G
Note:
Connect rela y contact s to a po wer limited source
Limited Warranty
Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product.
The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
In no event shall Secutron be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product.
Important!
Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
MR-2602A/2605A
Class A Zone Input Module
The MR-2602A Zone Input module converts the two zones on the MR-2602 fire alarm control panel from Class ‘B’ Style ‘B’ to Class ‘A’ Style ‘D’. The MR-2605A Zone Input module converts the five zones on the MR-2605 fire alarm control panel from Class ‘B’
Style ‘B’ to Class ‘A’ Style ‘D’.
SPECIFICATIONS
• Voltage: 24 V
DC
(nom)
• Standby current: MR-2602A ... 2 mA, MR-2605A ... 5 mA
• Alarm current: 60 mA (max)
• Loop Resistance: 100 W (max)
• Devices per zone: 20 @ 100mA each
NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005850) included with the control panel.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, Ontario, Canada
L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 695-3545
Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON
Fax: 888-660-4113
MR-2602A MR-2605A
LT-2019 Rev. A
INSTALLATION
T he MR-2602A/2605A module mounts in the corresponding MR-2602/2605 fire alarm back box. Refer to Figure 1.
1. Place the supplied spacers (2) on the pem studs.
2. Insert the module header pins into the corresponding Class ‘B’ zone terminals on the main board.
3. Secure the module to the the studs with the nuts provided (2).
4. Connect the electrical common wire on the module to the ‘COM’ terminal on the main panel.
5. Tighten all zone terminal screws to ensure reliable electrical connections between the main panel and the
MR2602A/2605A module.
NOTE
Refer to the MR-2602 or MR-2605 Installation Manual for instructions on zone programming, and mixing smoke detectors and contact alarm initiating devices on the same zone.
M R - 2 9 4 4
LCD Remote Annunciator
I
NSTALLATION &
O
PERATING
M
ANUAL
Revision D
Document #: LT-2020
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED .
Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-1996,
Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software.
Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2944 Installation and Operatotr’s Manual
Contents
1.0 Technical Information............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 MR-2915 LED Driver....................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 MR-2902 Annunciator Strip............................................................................................................. 1
1.4 MR-2622 Annunciator Strip............................................................................................................. 1
1.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.1 LEDs ............................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Buzzer............................................................................................................................................. 6
3.3 Operator Keys................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4 Alarm List ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.0 Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Service Terminal Screens............................................................................................................... 9
4.3 Keyboard Commands ..................................................................................................................... 11
5.0 Parts List .................................................................................................................................................. 13
6.0 Supplementary Information ...................................................................................................................... 14
6.1 Condition Code ............................................................................................................................... 14
6.2 Zone Number .................................................................................................................................. 14 i
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual ii
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
List of Figures
Figure 1: Wiring Diagram................................................................................................................................ 4
Figure 2: MR-2400 Wiring .............................................................................................................................. 4
Figure 3: Operator Key Wiring (Typical) ......................................................................................................... 5
Figure 4: MR-2622.......................................................................................................................................... 5
Figure 5: MR-2915 LED Pin-Outs................................................................................................................... 5
Figure 6: Alarm List Event Screen.................................................................................................................. 8
Figure 7: Alarm List Message Screen ............................................................................................................ 8
Figure 8: Alarm List Summary Screen............................................................................................................ 8 iii
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual iv
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
1.0 Technical Information
1.1 General
The MR-2944 Annunciator Driver is capable of controlling up to 576 LEDs, as 192 zones of 3
LEDs each (Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble), for use with columnar or graphic annunciators. Two optional LCD displays are available, an 80 character (4 x 20) display the same size as the
MR-2900 LCD display and a larger display twice that size. Both can be used to display text messages.
The MR-2944 uses the MR-2910 Network Communications Board for network interface. The
MR-2944 can use all variants of the MR-2910 board. The MR-2944 may also use the MR-D1010R
Fiber Optic Modem for connecting a fiber network between panels.
The MR-2944 uses the AN4 program for connection to MR-2900 and MR-2100/2200 networks and the AN4A program for connection to MR-2400 panels. All programs are nearly identical in operation, but the AN4A program may not be used to create a fiber optic network.
The LEDs are interfaced to the Annunciator Driver using the MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, the
MR-2622 Annunciator Strip or the MR-2915 LED Driver.
Communication to the MR-2900 Control Unit is over a proprietary DCLR (Style 7) network. There are two communications ports (COM1 and COM2). These ports are identical to the network ports on the MR-2900 Control Unit. Wiring for standard network communications is not polarity sensitive. RS-232 network communications is polarity sensitive.
1.2 MR-2915 LED Driver
The MR-2915 LED Driver drives up to 24 LEDs. There is a 50 pin connector for connection to a wire-wrap socket. The LEDs would be connected to the wire-wrap legs of the socket.
1.3 MR-2902 Annunciator Strip
The Annunciator Strip contains 24 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are:
Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow or amber) and Trouble (yellow).
1.4 MR-2622 Annunciator Strip
The Annunciator Strip contains 8 sets of zone indicating LEDs. Individual LEDs are provided to display alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by zone. The LED functions, from the left, are:
Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow or amber) and Trouble (yellow).
1
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
1.5 Technical Specifications
Voltage
Normal Current
Max Current
Operator Key
MR-2944
24 VDC
MR-2622
24 VDC
MR-2915
5 VDC
(Optional)
10 mA
MR-2902
24 VDC
10 mA no LCD: 50 mA
LCD: 75 mA
500 mA
5 mA
125 mA
SPST N/O
Contact
250 mA 250 mA
2
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
2.0 Installation
2.1 Mounting
These mounting instructions apply only to annunciators that come complete with cabinet.
1.
Choose a suitable location for mounting.
2.
Mark placement of mounting screws using template. Make sure that the template is level.
3.
Drill holes, install plugs (if necessary) and top two screws.
4.
Hang the cabinet on screws and pull down to ensure a snug fit. The cabinet should be level.
5.
Install bottom screw(s) and tighten all screws.
6.
Connect network and power wiring. Operator key wiring and LED wiring, if any, is done at the factory. Power can be taken from the MR-2900 or MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit or an external 24VDC source. An external source must be UL/ULC listed for use with fire alarm systems.
Note: For use with MR-D1010R Fiber Optic Modem, power must be supplied by a regulated, power-limited 24 VDC power supply that is UL-listed for Fire Protective Signalling Service.
2.2 Wiring
Note: Operator key and LED wiring is required only for units that do not come complete in a cabinet.
Power
The Annunciator panel requires 24 VDC for operation from a power limited source. This shall be provided from either the AUX 1 or AUX 2 auxiliary power connections on the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. The 24 VDC is connected to the +24 terminal (positive) and the GND terminal (negative).
See Figure 1 for terminal locations. Note: Annunciator must be powered from panel or from a regulated, power-limited power supply listed for Fire Protective Signalling Service (or any other power supply for which compatibility has been verified by UL).
Network to MR-2900
Network wiring for communications to the MR-2900 is connected to the terminal pairs marked
C1+/C1- and C2+/C2- (see Figure 1 ). The wiring is not polarity sensitive. COM1 (C1+/C1-) is connected to COM2 the next panel in the network loop. Ensure that the Annunciator is
3
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual programmed to communicate with the next panel or that COM1 is disabled as required in the downloaded database. COM2 (C2+/C2-) is connected to the previous panel in the network loop.
Figure 1: Wiring Diagram
Notes:
1.
If the annunciator is programmed for two port operation, both communications ports must be connected even if there is only one other unit in the system.
2.
If the annunciator is programmed for single port operation, only COM2 (C2+/C2-) is connected.
3.
COM1 and COM2 are power-limited and supervised.
4.
For information on connecting a fiber optic network, please refer to the MR-D1010R Fiber
Optic Module’s Installation Manual (579-565).
Network to MR-2400
Network wiring for communications to the MR-
2400 is connected to the terminal pairs marked
C2+/C2- (see Figure 2 ). The wiring is polarity sensitive. COM1 (C1+/C1-) is not used.
Notes:
1.
Ensure the MR-2944 is running the
AN4A operating program.
2.
COM2 is power-limited and supervised.
Operator Keys
Figure 2: MR-2400 Wiring
All operator keys are wired between an X and a Y terminal. A key switch may be placed in series with the Y2 terminal to make certain operator
4
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual keys limited access (see Figure 3 ). The figure is typical only; any, all or none of the operator keys can have the key switch used.
LEDs
The MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, MR-2622 Annunciator Strip and the
MR-2915 LED Driver are connected to the Annunciator by ribbon cables (see Figure 1 ). The eight connectors on the Annunciator are labelled P1 to P8. P1 is for zones 1 to 24, P2 for zones 25 to 48, etc.
Each MR-2622 and MR-2915 controls 8 zones. Up to 3 MR-2622s or
MR-2915s can be chained together to provide up to 24 zones per chain. Each MR-2622 will require a jumper for addressing (see below). No jumpers are set on the MR-2915 for addressing purposes.
Note: Do not use P11 for LEDs. This will cause damage to both the
MR-2944 and the LED driver.
The MR-2915 LED Driver has a 50 pin connector for connection to the LEDs. The LEDs are wired to a 50 pin socket which the MR-2915 plugs into. The pin-outs are shown in Figure 4 . Note: All LEDs share a common positive.
MR-2622 Jumper Settings
The jumpers for setting the octet are located just below the ribbon cable connector (see Figure 5 ). There are three pairs of holes.
Figure 3: Operator
Key Wiring (Typical)
Soldering a wire jumper across the required pair will set the MR-2622 to be the first, second or third octet. There is a trace on the board jumpering the pair for the first octet. This will need to be cut if the board is for the second or third octet.
Figure 4: MR-2622
Figure 5: MR-2915 LED
Pin-Outs
5
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
3.0 Operation
3.1 LEDs
There are 192 LED zones available on the Annunciator, each zone consisting of Alarm (red),
Supervisory (amber) and Trouble (yellow) LEDs. The LEDs will flash if a new condition is received.
If the buzzer is sounding, press Acknowledge to silence the buzzer. Press Acknowledge (again) to latch the LEDs. Once the condition is restored, the LED can be turned off by pressing Reset . If global commands are enabled, these operator keys will be broadcast to the network, causing all units to respond to the operator keys. An asterisk will appear at the end of the LCD display line showing the current time if any of the LEDs can be reset. If the Alarm List is being displayed, the current time will not be displayed.
If the MR-2944 has a memory or configuration error, the buzzer will sound every 2 seconds. This also occurs while loading a database.
If LEDs are programmed, the table below shows the meaning for each LED when flashing. The
Power On LED flashes when the annunciator first starts operating and stays steady after the
Acknowledge key is pressed.
LED Meaning LED Meaning
Zone 1 alarm Acknowledge available Zone 3 alarm 2nd Stage Inhibit available
Zone 1 supervisory Reset available (green) Zone 3 supervisory Manual Restart available
Zone 1 trouble
Zone 2 alarm
Reset available (yellow) Zone 3 trouble
Signal Silence active Zone 4 alarm future use future use
Zone 2 supervisory Signal Silence available Zone 4 supervisory future use
Zone 2 trouble 2nd Stage Inhibit active Zone 4 trouble Power On
If a common LED is programmed, it will show the sum of all the Zone LEDs that are on. The common LED will also indicate troubles that are local to the Annunciator only. The Hot LEDs have no effect on the common LED.
Lamp Test flashes the LEDs in sequence. Pressing Lamp Test repeatedly will cycle through: alarm
LEDs, supervisory LEDs, trouble LEDs, and Lamp Test off. The test will automatically end if any new condition is received, or after 5 minutes. The lamp test cannot be performed if AC power is off.
3.2 Buzzer
The buzzer gives audible indication of any conditions in the panel. It may sound in any of four modes. Pressing Acknowledge will silence the buzzer. ( Acknowledge will need to be pressed again to latch flashing LEDs.)
The four buzzer modes are:
Steady: This indicates any new fire alarm conditions. This mode can be disabled in the database.
Fast: This indicates any critical failures that must be attended to. These failures can include, but are not limited to memory overflow, network reboot required, database mismatch, etc. The pattern in 50ms on/off.
Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off.
6
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off. Through programming, a new trouble condition can be made to not sound the buzzer again for a time after it has been silenced. This time can be set from 15 to 255 seconds. By default, the buzzer will sound for all new troubles.
3.3 Operator Keys
There are 16 operator key inputs. The operator keys can be programmed in the database to be either local or global. If the operator keys are local, they affect the MR-2944 Annunciator only. If the operator keys are global, they will be broadcast over the network, causing all units on the network to respond to the operator key. The operator keys are laid out in a 4 by 4 matrix as follows:
X1
Y1 Acknowledge
1
Y2 Signal Silence
2
Y3 Manual Restart
2
X2
System Reset
General Alarm
2
X3
Lamp Test
X4
Second Stage Inhibit
2
System Reset
1
Scroll
Y4
Details
Notes:
1.
These operator keys are both Local and Global.
2.
These operator keys are Global only.
3.
All other operator keys are Local only.
4.
Through the downloaded database, global keys can be programmed to affect only certain panels.
If global commands are enabled, all operator keys that have global ability will be broadcast to the network. All units on the network will respond as if the operator key was pressed at the unit itself, except it will not beep. The annunciator will always send the global commands, even when they are not valid at the Annunciator. The LCD back light will turn on if a operator key is pressed. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes if there is no activity.
3.4 Alarm List
The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles. The Alarm
List will hold entries as requested by other panels in the network. The first/last entry of highest priority will be shown, instead of the time display, if there are any entries in the Alarm List. Alarms are the highest priority, Supervisory Conditions are the 2nd priority and Troubles the 3rd priority,
Monitor Conditions are 4th priority and Non-reporting signals are the lowest priority. The Alarm List will turn on the LCD back light when a new entry is received. The back light will automatically turn off in 5 minutes if there is no activity.
To view additional entries in the Alarm List when an entry is showing, press the Scroll key. This will display the next/previous entry of the highest priority showing the device message, if any, otherwise the event screen is shown. Press Scroll again to view the next/previous entry. Use the
Details key to rotate between screens of the event.
There are two display modes of operation:
• First: Displays the first entry of highest priority and then each next entry as requested.
• Last: Displays the last entry of highest priority and then each previous entry as requested.
7
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
There are two reset modes of operation:
• Automatic: Entries are removed from the Alarm List as soon as the condition restores.
• Manual: Entries that can be removed from the list have the condition code shown with a "-
" instead of a "+". Press Reset to remove these entries from the Alarm List.
The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms:
1) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.)
Figure 6: Alarm List Event Screen
or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Line 2: date and Zone Number
Line 3: description of event
Line 4: circuit/device type
The device and panel message screens, if any, show:
Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition
Code
Lines 2 to 4: description from the database
See the section entitled Supplementary Information for a description of Condition Codes and Zone
Numbers.
The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm
List (shown); or the number of supervisory, trouble, and monitor entries (if there are monitor and no alarm entries); or the number of trouble, monitor and nonreporting entries (if there are non-reporting and no alarm or supervisory entries).
Figure 7: Alarm List Message Screen
Figure 8: Alarm List Summary Screen
8
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
4.0 Programming
4.1 General
The Annunciator Unit's service terminal is accessed through the 9-pin RS-232 serial port located on the bottom of the MR-2944 Driver Board. The programming cable uses pins 2, 3 and 5 straight through from DB9 male to DB9 female plugs. The serial port works at 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity.
When programming the Annunciator for the first time, the only item that MUST BE
PROGRAMMED from the service terminal is the Annunciator's network ID (default value is 101).
The network ID is shown on the top line of every screen to identify the panel being serviced. To change the panel's ID, first go to screen 16 by entering the command 16<Tab>. Set Privilege Level
2 by entering (code)<Ctrl-V> where code is the Level 2 passcode (default 2222). To set the ID enter the command id N, where id is the network ID of the Annunciator, a number between 1 and
254.
All other required programming is taken from the database generated by the Modul-R Human
Interface program (MHI). Downloading the database into the MR-2944 annunciator is automatically handled by MHI. See the Modul-R Human Interface Database Editor for details on downloading databases.
Non-required programming controlling the operation of the Alarm List and the communications parameters of the primary network port (if used) are set using the service terminal.
There are three operating programs for the MR-2944. The AN4 program is used for communications to an MR-2900 network. The AN4A program is used for communications to an
MR-2400. The AN4N program is used for communications to an MR-2900 when there is no database requirement for the annunciator – essentially, this operating program forces the MR-
2944 to behave like it’s predecessor, the MR-2924 (which could not accept a database). The program loaded will be shown on Screen 2 of the service terminal. If the incorrect program is loaded, MHI can be used to send the correct one. See the Modul-R Human Interface Database
Editor for details on sending operating programs.
4.2 Service Terminal Screens
All screens have a common status line showing the current time, a diagnostic number, the annunciator's ID number and the screen number and name. Screens will also list keyboard commands related to the screen's information. Some commands require a privilege level set before they can be used.
The following screens are available:
Screen Name
7
8
0*
2
Index
Miscellaneous
Info
Keypad
Alarm List
Config
Description
A list of all the available screens.
A list of the program version, boards installed in the system and other information not listed elsewhere.
Displays a list of each input operator key function.
Display the current operating modes of the Alarm List, i.e. first or last sequencing, and Auto or Manual restores. See §3.4 Alarm
List for a description of operation.
Level 1 Commands
0 R Set Alarm List to Automatic restore mode
1 R Set Alarm List to Manual restore mode
9
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Screen
9*
10*
11*
14
15
16
17
18
29
38
Name
Alarm List
Description
List the first entries in the Alarm List. Up to 20 entries will be shown.
Level 0 Commands
J Page down
0 J Go to the end of the list
K Page up
0 K Go to the beginning of the list
List of the current troubles.
Miscellaneous
Troubles
LEDs
Printer
Printer Status
Network
Port 1
Port 2
System Reset
Switches
Display a grid showing the status of all LEDs. A dot (.) is off, an F is flashing, an asterisk (*) is on, and an R is on and resettable.
The first row is zones 1 to 24, the second row is zones 25 to 48, etc. The common and hot key zones are identified at the bottom of the screen.
Level 0 Commands
0 A Disable Trouble buzzer inhibit
(15-255) A Set Trouble buzzer inhibit from 15 to 255 seconds
A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen.
Displays the current printer status.
Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages.
Level 0 Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays information about the primary network communication port (COM1).
Level 0 Commands
0 V Clear the network counters.
Level 1 Commands
(1-25) B Set the retry limit for COM1. This is the number of retries attempted before the unit is considered off-line. The default value is 8.
(baud) B Set the baud rate of COM1. This can be any of 9600
(default), 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300 or 150.
Displays information about the secondary network port (COM2).
A question mark appears in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line.
Commands
0 V Clear counters on screen
Displays a list of resettable items. These are the items that are reset when System Reset is pressed.
Show the current on/off status of each switch and list the timer associated with each one.
10
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Screen Name
49
50
51*
Clock
Stacks
FIFOs
52
68*
69*
Extended
Memory
Remote
Terminal
Network Verify
Description
Show the current clock calibration or calibration status.
This screen is for diagnostic purposes.
This screen is for diagnostic purposes.
Level 0 Commands
0 <Ctrl-F> Clear maximum usage counters
Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in the system.
Displays the service terminal screens for another panel in the network. This allows for the trouble shooting of a system from a single location. This screen automatically disconnects the remote connection if memory gets low or if no communication is received for 15 seconds. The remote panel stops sending data after 15 minutes.
Level 0 Commands
(id) N Display the service terminal for Panel id
<Esc> Disconnect remote connection
Displays the current status of the network verify feature.
4.3 Keyboard Commands
These keyboard commands are available on all screens.
Command
<Del>
<Tab>
<Backspace>
0<Tab>
0-127<Tab>
A
D
0.0<Tab>
0.1<Tab>
(month).(date) D
(month).(date).(year) D
Description
Clear and redisplay screen.
View next available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View previous available screen. Unused/unavailable screens are skipped over.
View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens.
View Selected Screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown.
TeleVideo cursor control mode.
VT100 cursor control mode.
Silence buzzer.
Print the date and time.
Enter the date.
Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to 99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a fourdigit format.
11
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
Command
(hours).(minutes) T
(hours).(minutes).(seconds) T
<Ctrl-V>
(code)<Ctrl-V>
Description
Set the time.
Set the time.
Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege.)
Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.
12
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
5.0 Parts List
Model Description
MR-2944
MR-2944LC
MR-2944LCD
MR-2910
Annunciator Driver
Annunciator Driver c/w 4x20 LCD Display
Annunciator Driver c/w Double Size 4x20 LCD Display
Network Communications Board
MR-2910-R1
MR-2910-R2
Network Communications Board, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2
Standard
Network Communications Board, Port 1 Standard, Port 2
RS-232
Network Communications Board, Ports 1 and 2 RS-232 MR-2910-R12
Note:
The MR-2944 requires one of the MR-2910 Network Communications Boards to operate.
MR-D1010R
MR-D1010R2
MR-2915
MR-2902
MR-2622
MR-2944C/S
MR-2944C/F-L
MR-2944C/F-D
Fiber Optic Module, one modem
Fiber Optic Module, two modems
LED Driver
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 24 LEDs
Annunciator Strip, 3 x 8 LEDs
LCD Annunciator c/w Surface Mount Cabinet
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w Double Size LCD display
MR-2944C/F-8
MR-2944C/F-16
MR-2944C/F-24
MR-2944C/F-L-8
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w 8 LED Zones
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w 16 LED Zones
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w 24 LED Zones
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display and 8 LED
Zones
MR-2944C/F-L-16
MR-2944C/F-L-24
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display and 16 LED
Zones
Flush Mount Annunciator c/w LCD display and 24 LED
Zones
Custom Graphic Annunciator Panels are available on request
13
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
6.0 Supplementary Information
The Alarm List uses the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Only those zones that are shown by the Annunciator are listed.
6.1 Condition Code
Alarm List
ALARM bypass com dupl alert ground ilgl msng nofire
M.PULL
abort spv trbl wrong
WFLOW
Description
Alarm
Bypass
Comlink
Duplicate Addressable Device
Maintenance Alert
Ground Fault
Illegal Addressable Device
Missing Addressable Device
Non-Fire/Non-Reporting
Pull Station Alarm
Releaser Abort
Supervisory
Trouble or Parameter Change
Wrong Device Type
Waterflow Alarm
A plus sign (+) refers to a new or on condition, a minus sign (-) refers to a restoral or off condition, and an equal sign (=) refers to a one time event.
6.2 Zone Number
PPP:ZZ.SSS Format:
PPP Control Panel Number
ZZ Panel Zone
Panel
Zone
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
16
17
18
19
Description
General Alarm
Initiating Circuit 1
Initiating Circuit 2
Initiating Circuit 3
Initiating Circuit 4
Initiating Circuit 5
Initiating Circuit 6
Initiating Circuit 7
Initiating Circuit 8
Initiating Circuit 9
Initiating Circuit 10
Initiating Circuit 11
Initiating Circuit 12
Initiating Circuit 13
Initiating Circuit 14
Initiating Circuit 15
Initiating Circuit 16
Initiating Circuit 17
Initiating Circuit 18
Initiating Circuit 19
Panel
Zone
60
61
66
67
53
54
55
59
24
50
51
52
20
21
22
23
84
87
94
1
95
1
Description
Initiating Circuit 20
Initiating Circuit 21
Initiating Circuit 22
Initiating Circuit 23
Initiating Circuit 24
Network Verify
Comlink 1
Comlink 2
Comlink 3
Comlink 6
Printer Port
Addressable Modules Comlink
Output (bell/releaser) Supervision
Auxiliary Power Supervision
AC Power
Low Battery
Test Mode
Passcode Tamper
Network Reboot Required who
Network Reboot Required Why
14
MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual
SSS Sub-Zone Number
Addressable Circuit: Device Number
Dual End-of-Line Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Switch #1
002 - Switch #2
Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault
001 - Smoke Detector
002 - Contact Device
Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number
Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number
Comlink 6 (Zone 54): Unit ID number
Note: Only MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators, MR-2801-MR Reverse Polarity modules and
MR-2806-MR Dialers use IDs other than 000.
Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59):
001 - Circuits 1 to 8
002 - Circuits 9 to 16
003 - Circuits 17 to 24
Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number
Network Reboot Required (Zone 94): Unit ID of panel generating the trouble
Network Reboot Required Why (Zone 95): 001 - network
002 - network
003 - port 3
006 - negative counter
008 - memory overflow
009 - co-processor memory overflow
All Others: Always 000
15
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
M R D L
D u a l L i n e D i a l e r
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision B
Document #: LT-2021
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2005 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED.
Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MRDL Installation Manual
Contents
1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 General Features of the MRDL....................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements........................................................................... 1
1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................................................................................... 1
2.0 Installing and Wiring the MRDL ............................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Unpacking the MRDL...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Mounting & Wiring the MRDL ......................................................................................................... 3
3.0 MRDL Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 4
3.2 Communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel ......................................................................... 4
3.3 Phone Line Communication............................................................................................................ 4
4.0 Programming the MRDL .......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Accessing the Dialer Settings ......................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Dialer Settings................................................................................................................................. 6
5.0 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes.................................................................................................... 11
5.1 Contact ID ....................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2 SIA Format – Level 2 (Hardcoded) ................................................................................................. 11
6.0 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers ........................................................................................... 14
7.0 Warranty and Warning Information .......................................................................................................... 15
7.1 Warning........................................................................................................................................... 15
7.2 Limited Warranty............................................................................................................................. 16
8.0 FCC Compliance Statement .................................................................................................................... 18 i
MRDL Installation Manual ii
MRDL Installation Manual
List of Figures
Figure 1: MRDL Install Location ..................................................................................................................... 3
Figure 2: Initial Programmer Screen............................................................................................................... 5
Figure 3: Panels Screen ................................................................................................................................. 5
Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button...................................................................................................................... 6
Figure 5: Initial Dialer Screen ......................................................................................................................... 6
Figure 6: Dialer Configuration 1...................................................................................................................... 7
Figure 7: Dialer Configuration 2...................................................................................................................... 9
Figure 8: Call Directions ................................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 9: Zone Data........................................................................................................................................ 10
Figure 10: Reporting Codes ........................................................................................................................... 10 iii
MRDL Installation Manual iv
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
1.0 Introduction
The MRDL is a dual line dialer that will communicate all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 bps communication formats. The MRDL will support the MR-2100 and MR-2200 Fire Panels. The MHI_V21 or greater programmer must be used to program the MRDL Dialer.
1.1 General Features of the MRDL
• Supports all zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions
• Supports all panel troubles
• Programmable through MHI_V21 or greater programmer
• Supports 10/20 bps, SIA, Contact ID, and Pager Formats
• Three telephone numbers
• Fully programmable test transmission
• Automatic reporting codes for SIA and Contact ID formats
• 128 Event buffer with date and time stamp
• Communicator call directions by group
• Swinger shutdown options available for all events
• Module current rating: 40mA standby / 65mA when dialing
• Module voltage rating: 19 V DC to 27.5 V DC
1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements
Relevant Codes and Standards
The MRDL Dual-Line Digital Dialer is designed to meet the DACT requirements of NFPA 72, 1996 edition UL 864, Control Units for fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition.
General Installation Requirements
Manufacturer’s Documents
When installing the MRDL, refer to this manual and the manual for the control panel into which this module is being installed. This dialer requires programming. Programming is done using the
MHI_V21 or greater programming.
Field Wiring
Field wiring recommendations in these documents are intended as guidelines. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and with all relevant local codes and standards and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.3 Technical Support and General Information
For technical support from Secutron: Call toll free 1-888-222-1556.
For general product information visit our web site: www.secutronusa.com
System Verification
The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when:
• the initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction;
• any system component is added, changed or deleted;
• any programming changes are made;
• system wiring has been altered or repaired;
• system failure due to external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended power outages has occurred.
1
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
Standby Power
The MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Panel provides standby battery support for lead-acid rechargeable batteries. The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within the MR-2100/MR-2200 Installation Manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within the MR-2100/MR-2200
Installation Manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions. Periodic inspection for damage and the batteries’ ability to support the attached equipment is highly recommended.
2
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
2.0 Installing and Wiring the MRDL
2.1 Unpacking the MRDL
The basic MRDL package includes the following components:
• Dialer
• 4-pin polarized locking cable assembly
• Four #4 mounting screws
• Installation manual
2.2 Mounting & Wiring the MRDL
Note: Ensure that standby calculations are done before installing the dialer. See the MR-2100/
MR-2200 Fire Panel Installation Manual for all power information and calculation charts. The current rating for the MRDL is:
• 40 mA standby current
• 65 mA alarm current (when dialing)
Mounting & Wiring the MRDL
The MRDL is mounted in the upper right corner of the back box, in the main panel. Route the wiring harness under the plastic shield before mounting the DACT. Attach the harness to the connector labeled DACT/CITY on the main board. Orient the dialer so that the mounting hole with the metal plating is located on the upper right. Position the dialer on the back box and secure with four #4 mounting screws (included). Attach the unconnected end of the wiring harness to the
MRDL. The MRDL requires connection of the Secur-bus from the dialer to the main panel using the provided 4-pin polarized locking cable assembly. Two telephone lines are connected to the Tip/
Ring/T1/R1 terminals.
Dialer
Metal plated mounting hole.
The wiring harness for the Dialer is routed under the plastic shield.
Figure 1: MRDL Install Location
3
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
3.0 MRDL Operation
3.1 LED Indicators
The dialer’s operating status is visible from its five LED indicators. These indicators are located on the dialer. Each indicator is described in the following table:
1
#
2
3
4
5
Indicator
Secur-bus
Fault
TLM2
Trouble
TLM1
Trouble
FTC
Trouble
Watchdog
LED Color Activates when...
Yellow
Yellow the Secur-bus connection to the main panel has failed there is a trouble on telephone line #2
Yellow
Yellow
Green there is a trouble on telephone line #1 the dialer is unable to communicate the dialer is functioning normally; LED flashes
½ second on, ½ second off
3.2 Communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel
When connected to the FACP properly, the Watchdog LED will flash at a rate of ½ second on/off when power is applied to the FACP. The dedicated dialer will transmit all events that occur on the
FACP if programmed to do so. Any troubles that occur on the dedicated dialer will be shown on the appropriate LED and communicated (if enabled) as well as causing a common trouble condition on the FACP. If the FACP should lose communication with the dialer a common trouble condition will also be generated.
3.3 Phone Line Communication
The dedicated dialer is equipped with two phone line connections. When an event occurs that initiates communications, the first attempt at dialing will be on the programmed telephone line.
Refer to “Dialer Configuration” later in this manual for dialing attempts and operation.
4
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
4.0 Programming the MRDL
4.1 Accessing the Dialer Settings
1.
At the initial programming screen (Figure 2), do the following: a. Check the Enforce Group Associations Checking box. b. Click on the Alarm List Mode list box and select the Local option. c. Click on the Panels button to access the Panels screen (Figure 3).
Figure 2: Initial Programmer Screen
2.
In the Panels screen (Figure 3), click on the IDs button to access the IDs dialog (Figure4).
ID
Button
Figure 3: Panels Screen
5
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
3.
In the IDs dialog (Figure 4), check the MR-2806-MR check box and click on the Dialer
Settings button.
6
Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button
4.2 Dialer Settings
The Dialer Settings dialog allows for the programming of various communications options.
The 1st, 2nd and 3rd Telephone Numbers can be up to 32 digits. Special digits may be used to perform the following functions:
• HEX (B)-simulates the [*] key
• HEX (C)-simulates the [#] key
• HEX (D)-forces the panel to search for dial tone
• HEX (E)-forces the panel to pause for 2 seconds
• HEX (F)-end of telephone number marker
Note: A Hex D is required before the number, example: D9054704070
The 1st and 2nd Account Codes identify the system to the central station when a communication is sent. The code can be programmed for up to four digits. The first and third telephone number transmit the first account code. The second telephone number transmits the second account code.
The 1st and 2nd Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station.
There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format.
The Dialer Settings window has the following push buttons along the right side:
• Exit: Close the Dialer
Settings window and return to the IDs window.
• Configuration 1: Display the Dialer Configuration 1 screen.
• Configuration 2: Display the Dialer Configuration 2 screen.
Figure 5: Initial Dialer Screen
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
• Zone Data: Display the Zone Data screen.
• Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes screen.
Dialer Configuration 1
The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog contains the First Communicator Options, Second
Communicator Options and International Options. The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed. When Disabled is selected, the dialer will not communicate any events.
The TLM One/Two Check options determine whether the dialer will test for telephone line faults on line one and line two respectively.
The Third Phone # can be programmed for two different modes of operation. When Alternate
Dialing Enabled is selected, the dialer switches between the first and third numbers after each dialing attempt, until the maximum number of dialing attempts have been made to each number.
When Third Number Backup is enabled, the dialer will use the third number only if all attempts to communicate to the first number fail. If all attempts to communicate to the third number also fail, a failure to communicate trouble will be generated. When Disabled is selected, the third telephone number is not used.
The Dialing option has three different options for pulse or
DTMF dialing. If All attempts
Pulse is selected, the dialer will always use pulse (rotary) dialing. If All attempts DTMF
Dialing is selected, the dialer will always use DTMF dialing.
If 4 attempts DTMF then Pulse is selected, the dialer will use
DTMF dialing for the first four attempts. If unsuccessful, the dialer will switch to pulse dialing for the remaining attempts.
The SIA Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer
Figure 6: Dialer Configuration 1 will send automatic reporting codes, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/
Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic SIA Reporting
Codes.
The SIA Max Events option sets the maximum number of events the dialer will send for one SIA transmission. When 20 per Round is selected, SIA sends a maximum of 20 events per round.
When 8 per Round is selected, SIA sends maximum of 8 events per round.
The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send automatic reporting codes, or use the values that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic Contact ID Reporting Codes.
Pager Format.
Events will be communicated to a pager when using this format. When programming a pager telephone number, extra digits must be used in order for the feature to function properly. Program two hexadecimal digits 'E' at the end of the number (4 second pause).
The panel will attempt to call the pager one time. After dialing the digits in the telephone number
7
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual the panel will send the account number and reporting code followed by the [#] key (Hex [C]). There is no ringback when using Pager format. The panel has no way of confirming if the paging attempt was successful. Do not use hexadecimal C in a reporting code when using pager format. In most cases the digit C will be interpreted as a [*], which will terminate the page before it has finished.
Example: D19787319876EE
The Test Transmission Line option determines how the dialer chooses a telephone line to send the automatic test transmission. If Alternate is selected, the dialer will alternate between using lines 1 and 2 for transmissions, regardless of telephone line troubles. If Available is selected, the dialer will use Line 1 for test transmissions. If a trouble exists on Line 1, the dialer will switch to Line 2.
When the Force Dialing option is set to enabled, if the first attempt by the panel to call the monitoring station fails, on every subsequent attempt the panel will dial regardless of the presence of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present.
When the Busy Tone Detection option is enabled, if busy tone is detected, the dialer will disengage the phone line and try to place the call again following the delay between dialing attempts. When
Disabled is selected, the dialer will use the standard dialing procedure for every attempt. The
Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60, and when 33/67 is selected it is 33/67.
The Handshake option determines the handshake used for BPS transmissions. When 1600 Hz is selected, the dialer responds to a 1600 Hz handshake. When Standard is selected, the dialer responds to the handshake designated by the format selected (1400 or 2300 Hz).
The ID Tone can be set to 1300Hz or 2100 Hz. The panel will emit a tone at the selected frequency for 500 ms every 2 seconds when it places a call to indicate that it is a digital equipment call, not voice. When Disabled is selected, this feature will not be used.
D i a l e r Configuration 2
The Dialer Configuration 2 screen contains the Swinger Shutdown Variables, Other Options and
Test Transmission options. The Swinger Shutdown options determine the maximum number of zone and trouble events that the dialer will transmit in one day. The alarm or trouble will still be displayed on the panel and logged in the archive, but the dialer will not transmit the event. There are individual counters for Zone Alarm and Restore, Zone Supervisory and Restore, Zone Trouble and Restore and Maintenance Trouble and Restore. This feature will be reset at midnight. To disable the feature, program 000.
The Test Transmission Time of Day determines when the automatic test transmission will occur.
The entry is four digits, military 24 hour format (HH:MM). To disable the feature, program the time as [9999]. The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions.
8
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals. The Maximum
Dialing Attempts to Each
Phone Number is the number of attempts that the dialer will make to each telephone number before generating a fail to communicate trouble. Post
Dial Wait for Handshake is the amount of time the
Figure 7: Dialer Configuration 2 dialer will wait for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the programmed telephone number.
The Call Directions dialog contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will be used to communicate events. There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two. The event types are
Fire Zone Alarm/Restore,
Supervisory Zone Alarm/
Restore, Zone Trouble/Restore,
Maintenance Trouble/Restore and Test Transmissions.
The Zone Data dialog (Figure 9) contains zone definitions and
Figure 8: Call Directions reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate events.
The Groups List is a list of all currently defined groups. Each line entry includes the Group ID and its message/description. Click on the desired group in order to program it.
The Definition specifies the identifier of the alarm or trouble being sent to the central station. The zone types that are available are Fire, Sprinkler, Heat, Water and Untyped.
9
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are:
• Zone Alarm Reporting
Code
• Zone Alarm Restoral
Reporting Code
• Trouble Reporting
Code
• Trouble Restoral
Reporting Code
• Supervisory Reporting
Code
• Supervisory Restoral
Reporting Code
Figure 9: Zone Data
Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes
The Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog contains maintenance and common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events.
The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes. Select one to program its reporting code. The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are many different reporting codes in this group.
Figure 10: Reporting Codes
10
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
5.0 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes
The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes. For more information on reporting formats.
5.1 Contact ID
The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are programmed to indicate specific information about the signal.
For example, if zone 1 is an fire zone point, you could program the event code as [1A]. The central station would receive the following:
*FIRE* - FIRE ALARM - 1 where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.
5.2 SIA Format – Level 2 (Hardcoded)
The SIA communication format used in this product follows the Level 2 specifications of the SIA
Digital Communication Standard – October 1997. This format will send the account code along with its data transmission. The transmission would look similar to the following at the receiver:
N Ri00 FA 01
N = New Event
Ri00 = System Event
FA = Fire Alarm
01 = Zone 1
11
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes
Reporting
Code
Code Sent When…
Dialer
Direction*
Contact
ID Auto
Rep
Codes
Sia Auto
Rep Codes
Zone Supv./
Rest.
Zone Alarms/
Rest.
Zone Trouble/
Rest.
AC Fail Trouble/
Rest.
zone goes into supervisory/ restore zone goes into alarm/ alarm condition has been restored zone exhibits a trouble condition/ zone trouble condition has been restored
AC power to control panel is disconnected or interrupted/AC power restored; both codes follow the AC Trouble Delay control panel battery is low/battery restored
S/R
A/R
T/R
MA/R
(2) AA
(1) 3A
(3) 73
(3) A1
See Table 3
See Table 3
See Table 3
AT-00/AR-00
Battery Trouble/
Rest.
Ground Fault
Trouble/Rest.
NAC Trouble/
Rest.
General System
Trouble/Rest.
Gen. System
Supervisory/
Rest.
Secur-bus
Trouble/Rest.
Line 1 or 2 TLM
Trouble/Rest.
Phone # 1 or 2
FTC Trouble/
Rest.
Earth Ground Fault is detected/restored
NAC circuit is opened/restored module trouble is detected/restored control panel loses/restores communications to enrolled modules
Secur-bus connection is lost/restored
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
(3) A2
(3) 1A
(3) 21
(3) 3A
(3) 33
(3) 33
YT-00/YR-00
UT-OO/UJ-00
YA-99/YH-99
YX-00/YZ-00
ET-00/ER-00
NT-00/NR-00
Walk Test Start/
Stop
Installer Lead In/
Out
Test
Transmission
Normal/Off-
Normal connection via Telephone Numbers 1 or 2 is lost/restored communication is restored after a failure to communicate trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will also be sent control panel has entered/exited walk test mode; no events will be communicated control panel enters/exits programming mode test transmission reports system normal or off-normal (alarm, supervisory or trouble) control panel condition
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
MA/R
T
(3) 51
(3) 54
(6) A7
(6) 27/28
(6) A2
LT-XX/LR-XX**
YC-XX/YK-XX**
TS-00/TE-00
LB-00/LX-00
RP-00/RY-00
* Call directions: A/R = alarm/restoral; T/R = trouble/restoral; MA/R = maintenance alarm/restoral; S/R = supervisory/restore; T = test transmission
** Line number/telephone number is identified (XX)
12
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes
Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restorals when using the standard (i.e. not automatic)
Contact ID reporting format:
Medical Alarms
(1)A1 Emergency
(1)A2 Fail to Report In
Fire Alarms
(1)1A Fire Alarm
(1)11 Smoke
(1)12 Combustion
(1)13 Water Flow
(1)14 Heat
(1)15 Pull Station
(1)16 Duct
(1)17 Flame
(1)18 Near Alarm
Panic Alarms
(1)2A Panic
(1)21 Duress
(1)22 Silent
(1)23 Audible
General Alarms
(1)4A General Alarm
24 Hour Non-Fire
(1)51 Gas Detected
(1)52 Refrigeration
(1)53 Loss of Heat
(1)54 Water Leakage
(1)55 Foil Break
(1)56 Day Trouble
(1)57 Low Bottled Gas Level
(1)4A General Alarm (1)58 High Temp
(1)43 Expansion module failure (1)59 Low Temp
(1)44 Sensor tamper
(1)45 Module Tamper
(1)61 Loss of Air Flow
Table 3: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes
Zone
Definition
[00] Null Zone
[01] Fire
[02] Fire
Supervisory
[03] Sprinkler
[06] Panic
[07] Emergency
ZZ = zones 01-05
Alarm/Rest.
Rep Codes*
No transm.
FA-ZZ/FH-ZZ
FS-ZZ/FR-ZZ
Trouble/
Rest.
Rep Codes
No transm.
FT-ZZ/FJ-ZZ
FT-ZZ/FJ-ZZ
SA-ZZ/SH-ZZ
PA-ZZ/PH-ZZ
ST-ZZ/SJ-ZZ
PT-ZZ/PJ-ZZ
QA-ZZ/QH/ZZ QT-ZZ/QJ/ZZ
Zone
Definition
[09] Gas
[10] Freeze
[11] Heat
SIA Auto
Rep Codes*
Trouble/
Rest. Rep
Codes
GA-ZZ/GH-ZZ GT-ZZ/GJ-ZZ
ZA-ZZ/ZH-ZZ ZT-ZZ/ZJ-ZZ
KA-ZZ/KH-ZZ KT-ZZ/KJ-ZZ
[12] Water WA-ZZ/WH-ZZ WT-ZZ/WJ-ZZ
[13] Untyped UA-ZZ/UH-ZZ UT-ZZ/UJ-ZZ
13
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
6.0 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers
Format/
Receiver
10 bps (1400Hz handshake)
10 bps (2300Hz handshake)
20 bps (1400Hz handshake)
20 bps (2300Hz handshake)
SIA (level 2)
Contact ID
Pager
Version
Sur-Gard
SLR
Yes
Sur-Gard
MLR
Sur-Gard
MLR200
0
Yes Yes
Osbourne
Hoffman
Quick
Alert II
Yes
Silent
Knight
Yes
Ademco
685
Radionics
6500
Bell
Mobility
Pager
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
V1.00
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
V1.83
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
V1.2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
2/20/96
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
SIA-
9004I-
960626
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Rev4.4d
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
D6500 L/C
1993
Yes
Pager format is to be used for backup troubles only.
14
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
7.0 Warranty and Warning Information
7.1 Warning
Please Read Carefully
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation.
If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
• Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
• Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
• Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
15
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
• Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
• Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
• Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
7.2 Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/ or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
• damage incurred in shipping or handling;
• damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
• damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or water damage;
• damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
• damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
• defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
• damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
• damage from improper maintenance;
• damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty. Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied
(including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
Out of Warranty Repairs
16
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
17
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
8.0 FCC Compliance Statement
CAUTION : Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Re-orient the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Resolve
Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Resolve
Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
important information
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number of this equipment.
NOTIFICATION TO TELEPHONE COMPANY The customer shall notify the telephone company of the particular line to which the connection will be made, and provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence of the protective circuit.
FCC Registration Number: 6OT USA-34879-AL-ERinger Equivalence Number: 0.1BUSOC Jack:
RJ-31X
TELEPHONE CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone company provided ringers, all connections to the telephone network shall be made through standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks, or equivalent, in such a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the terminal equipment. Standard jacks shall be so arranged that, if the plug connected thereto is withdrawn, no interference to the operation of the equipment at the customer’s premises which remains connected to the telephone network shall occur by reason of such withdrawal.
INCIDENCE OF HARM Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company shall, where practicable, notify the customer that temporary disconnection of service may be required; however, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service if such action is deemed reasonable in the circumstances. In the case of such temporary discontinuance, the telephone company shall promptly notify the customer and will be given the opportunity to correct the situation.
18
MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual
ADDITIONAL TELEPHONE COMPANY INFORMATION The security control panel must be properly connected to the telephone line with a USOC RJ-31X telephone jack.
The FCC prohibits customer-provided terminal equipment be connected to party lines or to be used in conjunction with coin telephone service. Interconnect rules may vary from state to state.
CHANGES IN TELEPHONE COMPANY EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such actions are reasonably required and proper in its business. Should any such changes render the customer’s terminal equipment incompatible with the telephone company facilities the customer shall be given adequate notice to the effect modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line, you may want to contact your local telephone company.
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact the facility indicated below for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
19
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (905)-695-3545
Fax: (905)-660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888)-660-4655
Fax:(888) 660-4113
Limited Warranty
Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product.
The foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Secutron neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
In no event shall Secutron be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product.
Important!
Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com
LT-2028 Rev. B
USA
60 Industrial Parkway PMB 278
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON
Fax: 888-660-4113
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/
Municipal Box Module
The MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/Municipal Box Module is jumper programmable for polarity reversal operation or Municipal Box operation, Single or Separate Alarm and
AC Fail delay.
Parts List
• Qty 1 ... MR-2801 Module
• Qty 4 ... Plastic Spacers
• Qty 4 ... KEP Nuts
• Qty 1 ... 4 Pin polarized locking cable assembly
• Qty 6 ... Jumpers
Specifications
Municipal Box Output
• Maximum Voltage ... 28 V DC
• Supervisory Current ... 5.0 mA
• Power Limited Output
• Trip Current ... 1 second momentary @ 0.35 A (subtracted from AUX power)
• Coil Voltage ... 3.65 V DC
• Coil Resistance ... 14.6 ohms
• Total wire resistance between panel and trip coil ... 3 ohms MAX
Reverse Polarity Outputs
• Maximum Voltage ... 28 V DC
• Maximum Current ... 10 mA
• Power Limited ... Yes
NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calculation. Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet included with the control panel.
Installing the MR-2801 Module
The MR-2801 module mounts on 4 threaded studs located in the MR-2602/2605 Fire Alarm
Control Unit panel below the power transformer. Refer to Figures 1, 2 and Table 1.
1. Configure Jumpers for desired operating modes.
2. Position the MR-2801 Module on the 4 threaded studs. Secure the module to the studs with 4 KEP nuts (provided).
3. Insert the 4-wire Secure-Bus connector into the PRMB Dialer connector located on the
MR-2602/2605 Fire Alarm Unit Control board.
4. Route 14-18 AWG Hookup Wire through the panel access holes in accordance with local regulations.
5. Secure wire connections to output terminals as required. Refer to MR2602 or MR2605
Installation Manual for programming details.
MR-2801
Reverse Polarity/
Municipal Box
Module
Fig 1 MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/Municipal Box Module
Watchdog
Trouble LED
Municipal Box
Trouble LED
J1 J2 J3
J7
J6
J5
J4
Disconnect
Switch
4-Wire Secure-bus
Connector to
PRMB/Dialer
Polarity
Reversal
Outputs
Master Box
Output
T 1
-
Alm
Out
+
-
Trb
Out
+
-
Sup
Out
+
-
MB
+
Option
Module
Configuration
J2
On
Jumper Settings
J1 -
Off
J1 - On
J3 J4
Off
Table 1 JUMPER PROGRAMMING
Function
Municipal Box Output enabled - Polarity Reversal disabled
Polarity Reversal enabled - Municipal Box output disabled
Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity
During a Supervisory event the Supervisory output reverses polarity
During a Trouble event the Trouble output reverses polarity
Off Off Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity
During a Supervisory event the Alarm output disconnects
During a Trouble event the Trouble output is disabled.
Polarity
Reversal
Output
Options
Off Off On During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity
During a Supervisory event the Alarm output disconnects
During a Trouble event the Alarm output disconnects
AC Delay
Off On Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity
During a Supervisory event the Supervisory output reverses polarity
During a Trouble event the Trouble output is disabled.
Off
J5
Off
On
Off
On
On
J6
Off
Off
On
On
On During an Alarm event the Alarm Output reverses polarity
During a Supervisory event the Supervisory output reverses polarity
During a Trouble event the Alarm and Supervisory outputs are disconnected.
NO AC fail delay
6 Hr AC fail delay
12 Hr AC fail delay
24 Hr AC fail delay
Fig 2 MR-2602/2605 Fire Panel Layout
120 VAC
GND
Primary
Transformer
4-Wire Secure-bus
Connector
MR-2801
Module
PRMB/Dialer
Connector
KEP Nuts
Front panel display PCB mounted to underside of deadfront.
Cable connected to main PCB
Main PCB
Class A Interface Module
Space for one, 12V
12Ah battery
Space for one, 12V
12Ah battery
MR-2614 Annunciator
Installation Instructions
1.0 General Information
The basic MR-2614 Annunciator has 8 zones consisting of a red alarm
LED and a yellow trouble LED. There are four common LEDs for alarm
(red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow) and power (green). There are four switch inputs that are used as follows: 1) Reset, 2) Signal
Silence (this function is not UL listed), 3) Acknowledge, 4) Local Lamp
Test. There can only be one basic annunciator attached to the FACP.
The enhanced Annunciator, MR-2614EH, has all the features of the basic MR-2614 and also includes yellow supervisory LEDs for each of the 8 zones, connections for off-board LEDs and a service terminal port. The off-board LEDs allow for Zones 1 to 72 or a graphic annunciator; zones 1 to 8 are repeated for convenience of graphic annunciation. The MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, MR-2622 Annunciator
Strip and the MR-2915 LED Driver are connected to the Annunciator by ribbon cables. The three connectors on the Annunciator are labelled
P1 to P3. Each connector handles 24 zones with each zone having 3
LEDs, alarm, supervisory and trouble. P1 is for zones 1 to 24, P2 is for zones 25 to 48 and P3 is for zones 49 to 72. The MR-2902
Annunciator Strip handles 24 zones. Each MR-2622 and MR-2915 controls 8 zones. Up to 3 MR-2622s or MR-2915s can be chained together to provide up to 24 zones per chain. Each MR-2622 will require a jumper for addressing. No jumpers are set on the MR-2915 for addressing purposes. The service terminal allows for addressing the annunciators so that multiple annunciators can be connected to the
FACP. Each annunciator will display the same information. There can be up to 8 MR-2614EHs per FACP, or one basic MR-2614 and up to 7
MR-2614EHs per FACP.
For graphic annunciators, the off-board LEDs are interfaced to the MR-
2614 using the MR-2915 LED Driver, which drives up to 8 zones of 3
LEDs each. There is a 50 pin connector for connection to a wirewrap socket. The LEDs would be connected to the wire-wrap legs of the socket.
1
1.1 Technical Specifications
MR-2614
Voltage 24VDC
Normal Current 20 mA
Max. Current
Switch SPST
MR-2622
N/O momentary contact
Normal Current 5 mA
Maximum Current 125 mA
Data Communications
Maximum Distance 900m (3000 ft), 22 AWG
Communication Wire 18 to 22 AWG Twisted Pair
Power
Power Wire 18 AWG
Maximum distance 300m (1000 ft)
Note: The MR-2614 requires 24 VDC for correct operation.
2
2.0 Installation
2.1 Mounting
These mounting instruction are specifically for the MR-2614S, MR-
2614EHS and the MR-2614EHS+MR-2622S annunciator packages.
1. Choose a suitable place for mounting, considering all applicable codes and standards.
2. Remove the screws from the top and bottom of the annunciator.
3. Remove the section(s) from the backplate.
4. Mount the backplate in the location chosen.
5. Bring the wiring from the control unit through one of the holes provided in the backplate.
6. Attach the wiring from the control unit to the pigtail on the MR-2614 board. See section
2.2 Wiring
below for wiring instructions.
7. Replace the section(s) into the backplate. Remember to reconnect any ribbon cables between the sections.
8. Replace the screws from the top and bottom of the annunciator.
2.2 Wiring
All wiring must be in accordance with applicable codes and standards.
For reliable communications, the MR-2614 must be powered from the fire panel. If an external power supply is used, 1) the negative of the power supply must be connected to the Aux Power negative of the fire panel; 2) it must be UL/ULC listed for use with fire alarm systems.
MR-2400 Control Unit
The MR-2400 Control
Unit is connected to the
MR-2614 Annunciator by
4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is done as shown in
Figure 1.
Figure 1: MR-2400 Wiring
3
MR2900 Control Unit
The MR-2900 control unit is connected to the MR-2614 Annunciator by 4 wires, 2 for power and 2 for communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 2.
The MR-2900 panel requires that the
MR-2109-3 communications board be installed.
MR-2608 Control Unit
The MR-2608 control unit is connected to the MR-2614 annunciator by 4 wires, 2 power and 2 communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 2: MR-2900 Wiring
Figure 3: MR-2608 Wiring
MR-2616
The MR-2616 control unit is connected to the MR-2614
Annunciator by 4 wires, 2 power and 2 communications. The wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 4. Do not use Aux Pwr 1 on the MR-2616 for the
MR-2614 as Aux Pwr
1 is for resetting 4 wire input devices.
Figure 4: MR-2616 Wiring
4
Multiple MR-2614EH
Up to 8 MR-2614EH annunciators can be connected a FACP. If more than one MR-2614EH is used, the wiring is done as a daisy chain starting from the panel and going to each MR-2614EH in turn (see
Figure 5). The 3.9 k resistor across the pigtail terminations must be removed from all MR-2614EH annunciators except the last one.
Figure 5: Wiring Multiple MR-2614EH Annunciators
2.3 LEDs
In addition to eight
LED zones on the MR-
2614 itself, up to 72
LED zones can be connected to the LED expansion ports (P1,
P2, P3 see Figure 6).
P1 is for zones 1 to
24, P2 is for zones 25 to 48 and P3 is for zones 49 to 72. The eight zones on the
MR-2614 are same as the first eight zones of
P1.
Figure 6: LED connections
5
MR-2915
The MR-2915 LED Driver has a 50 pin connector for connection to the LEDs. The
LEDs are wired to a 50 pin socket which the
MR-2915 plugs into. The pin-outs are shown in Figure 7. Note: All LEDs wired to the same
MR-2915 share a common positive. The MR-
2915 is self addressing in terms of the octet it displays. The first one in a chain does zones 1 to 8 (25 to 32, 49 to 56), the second does zones 9 to 16 (33 to 40, 57 to 64) and the third
(last) does zones 17 to 24 (41 to 48, 65 to 72).
Figure 7: MR-2915
LED Pin-Outs
MR-2622 Jumper Settings
The MR-2622 LED strip provides 8 zones of 3 LEDs (alarm, supervisory, trouble) each. These can be used as the first (1 to
8), second (9 to 16) or third (17 to 24) octet of a set of 24 zones. The first octet also does zones 25 to 32 and zones 49 to 56, the second octet also does zones 33 to 40 and zones 57 to 64, and the third octet also does zones 41 to 48 and zones 65 to 72 depending on which set of 24 they are connected to. The jumpers for setting the octet are located just below the ribbon cable connector (see Figure 8). There are three pairs of holes. Soldering a wire jumper across the required pair will set the
MR-2622 to be the first, second or third octet. There is a trace on the board jumpering the pair for the first octet. This will need to be cut if the board is for the second or third octet.
Figure 8: MR-2622
6
3.0 Programming
The MR-2614EH annunciator is programmed through the service terminal connection at the bottom of the board, marked P4. This connection is a special 4 pin connector. The MR-2614EH uses serial communication of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
Normally, programming is required only when there is more than one
MR-2614EH being used.
There are three program settings for the MR-2614EH, the ID number, the use of supervisory LEDs and the flash mode of LEDs. Under normal circumstances, only the unit ID will need to be programmed.
The other two settings are handled by the factory.
The commands available for programming are:
<Del>
(id)N
1 S
0 S
0 F
1 F
Redraw the programming screen. This screen will show the current settings and the programming commands.
Set the ID of the MR-2614EH. This can be from 1 to 8.
The default value is 1. This value will need to be changed only if there are more than one MR-2614EH being used.
The MR-2614EH uses separate alarm and supervisory
LEDs for each zone.
The MR-2614EH will map supervisory signals to the alarm
LED for each zone.
The MR-2614EH will flash LEDs when a new signal is received.
The MR-2614EH will not flash the LEDs when a new signal is received. This is for future usage.
7
8
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 695-3545
Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com
LT-2029 Rev. B
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON
Fax: 888-660-4113
FCC Compliance Statement
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart “B” of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
Re-orient the receiving antenna
Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver
•
•
Move the alarm control away from the receiver
Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits.
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve Radio/
Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-
00345-4.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 660-4655
Fax: (905) 660-4113
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-660-4655
Fax: 888-660-4113
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION
INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN
MR-2844 Programmer
The MR-2844 is an LCD keypad style programmer specifically design to program the
Dual Line Dialer and the 2 and 5 zone Fire Alarm Control Panels. The programmer includes a power/communications cable which plugs into the Dual Line Dialer. Once connected, the programmer will power up and is ready to program the dialer and the panel.
NOTE: Once programming is complete, the programmer must be removed. The dialer will not function while the programmer is connected.
Le MR-2844 est un programmeur ressemblant à un clavier ACL spécialement conçu pour programmer le communicateur à deux lignes et les panneaux de contrôle d’alarme d’incendie de deux et cinq série. Le programmeur comprend un câble d’alimentation et de communication qui se branche sur le communicateur à deux lignes. Une fois branché, le programmeur s’allume et est prêt à être utilisé pour programmer le communicateur et le panneau.
NOTE: Une fois que la programmation est complétée, le programmeur doit être retiré.
Lorsque le programmeur est branché le communicateur ne fonctionne pas.
El MR-2844 es un programador de estilo de teclado LCD específicamente diseñado para programar el marcador de líneas duales y el dos y cinco zona series de paneles de control de alarmas contra incendio. El programador incluye un cable de energía/ comunicaciones lo cual enchufa en el marcador de líneas duales. Una vez conectado, el programador encenderá y está listo para programar el marcador y control.
NOTA: Una vez que la programación esté completada, el programador debe ser removido. El marcador no funcionará mientras el programador esté conectado.
D u a l L i n e D i a l e r
C o m m u n i c a t e u r
M a r c a d o r R J 1 1
C o n n e c t o r o n t h e D i a l e r
P r i s e R J 1 1 s u r e l e c o m m u n i c a t e u r
C o n e c t o r R J 1 1 e n e l m a r c a r o d r
T M 1 C o n n e c t o r a t t a c h e d t o t h e
P r o g r a m m e r
P r i s e T M 1 s u r l e p r o g r a m m e u r
C o n n e c t o r T M 1 c o n e c t a d o a l p r o g r a m a d o r
P a t c h C o r d
C o r d o n d e r a c c o r d e m e n t
C a b l e d e c o n e x i ó n
P r o g r a m m e r
P r o g r a m m e u r
P r o g r a m a d o r
LT-2035 Rev. B
M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S
LED Fire Alarm Control Panel
I
NSTALLATION &
O
PERATION MANUAL
Revision A
Document #: LT-905SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Industry Canada and FCC Notice ........................................................................................... 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2
Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3
Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3
Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3
Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3
System Components ............................................................................................................... 4
Main Fire Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 4
Relay Module: 12 Relays ...................................................................................................... 6
Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 6
Polarity reversal/city tie ......................................................................................................... 6
Remote Annunciator ............................................................................................................. 7
Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 7
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits..................................................................................... 8
Output Class A converter: four circuits ................................................................................. 8
Output Class A converter: two circuits .................................................................................. 8
Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 8
MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator .................................................................................... 9
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories ........................................................................... 9
Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 10
Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 10
Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 12
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules ............................... 13
Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................................................................................... 13
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 14
MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................. 15
Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6) ........................................ 15
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module ................................................................................. 16
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 17
Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 18
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring ...................................................................................... 18
Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 21
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 23
Power supply connection ...................................................................................................... 24
Wiring Tables and Information ............................................................................................. 25
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 25
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 25
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)............................................................................................... 26
System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 27
Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 27
Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................. 27
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 27 i
Contents
Indicators, Controls and Operations ..................................................................................... 28
Common Indicators .............................................................................................................. 29
Alarm Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 31
Supervisory Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 31
Monitor Circuit Indicators ..................................................................................................... 31
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................. 32
Signal Circuit Indicators ....................................................................................................... 32
Common Controls ................................................................................................................ 32
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons......................................................................................... 33
Common Relays................................................................................................................... 34
Circuit Types ........................................................................................................................ 34
Evacuation codes................................................................................................................. 36
Single Stage Operation ........................................................................................................ 37
Two-stage Operation............................................................................................................ 37
Supported Protocols/Devices ................................................................................................ 39
Synchronous Strobes........................................................................................................... 39
System Sensor’s i3 Devices................................................................................................. 39
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool .................................................................... 41
Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 42
Command Menu................................................................................................................... 42
1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) ............................................................................. 43
2. Config Info (Command-Menu........................................................................................... 52
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 53
4. Change password (Command-Menu) .............................................................................. 54
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 54
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 55
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) ........................................................................................... 56
8. i3 Loop Test (Command-Menu) ....................................................................................... 57
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 58
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)........................................................................................ 64
11. Exit (Command-Menu) ................................................................................................... 66
CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation .................................................................................. 66
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 70
Appendix B: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 71
Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 71
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 72
Appendix C: Specifications.................................................................................................... 73
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 74
Warranty................................................................................................................................... 75 ii
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
List of Figures and Tables
Figures
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ............................................................................10
Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring .............................................11
Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules ...............................................................................12
Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings ...............................13
Figure 5: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................................14
Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................15
Figure 7: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module ............................................................15
Figure 8: MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay programming ........................................................16
Figure 9: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module ....................................................................16
Figure 10: Polarity reversal and city tie module ...................................................................17
Figure 11: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring .........................................................18
Figure 12: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring .........................................................19
Figure 13: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .......................................................19
Figure 14: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ........................................................20
Figure 15: Four-wire smoke detector wiring .........................................................................20
Figure 16: Dialer wiring ........................................................................................................21
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection ........................................21
Figure 18: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................22
Figure 19: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...................................23
Figure 20: Power supply connection ....................................................................................24
Figure 21: LED indicators and control buttons......................................................................28
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ...............................................................................36
Figure 22: MR-2300 Configuration .......................................................................................41
Tables
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ........................................14
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings .................................................................................17
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ...........................................................................................25
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring .........................................................................................25
iii
List of Figures and Tables iv
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Industry Canada and FCC Notice
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada
Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada
(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control
Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective Signalling Systems and Services). These
Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial / Local Electrical Code; and/or the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Industry Canada Notice
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.
Note:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard 864 (Control Units for Fire Protective
Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for
DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
FCC Notice
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of siezing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.
Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.
When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the
Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc.. For information contact
Secutron Inc. at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.
1
Introduction
Introduction
Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The MR-
2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and
Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.
Note:
Installation of the MR-2300 series fire alarm control panel should be in accordance with Canadian
Electrical Code Part 1, ULC-S524 installation of Fire Alarm System, National Electrical Code NFPA
70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Overall Features
• Basic unit has 12 Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input
Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow
Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuits. There are two
LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble (amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and
Alarm (red).
• Basic unit has four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits with individual trouble indicators. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non
Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.
• Two Stage operation available.
• A pushbutton associated with each initiating and indicating circuit can individually disconnect the circuit.
• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, Two-Stage Operation, and One-Man Walk Test.
• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation.
• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum.
• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnectable and
Auxiliary Alarm Relay (disconnectable).
• RS-485 Interface for LCD Annunciators, MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay adder.
• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.
• Extensive transient protection.
• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter.)
• Easy configuration of the panel and built-in UDACT using LCD service tool (CFG-300.)
• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing.
• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking.
2
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays.
Zone
Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.
Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
Display Points
There is a display point associated with every initiating and indicating circuit of the MR-2300 LED Series fire panel.
For an initiating circuit there are two LEDs for every display point: one single color (amber) and one dual color (red/ amber). For an indicating circuit there is only one LED: one single color (amber), for every display point.
Wiring Styles
Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an
MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).
This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC4 adder board which will convert FOUR indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z) or an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).
3
System Components
System Components
Main Fire Control Panel
-2&IRE!LARM#ONTROL0ANEL
Model
MR-2312-LDW
MR-2312-LDR
MR-2312-LW
MR-2312-LR
Description
12 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 12 Class B
(Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power
Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter adder modules may be used for Class A (Style
D) wiring of Initiating circuits. One MR-2300-
NC4 Output Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style Z) wiring of the
Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-LDW contains
Common Alarm, Common Supervisory &
Common Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110
(10 amp-hour) (Sota Enertech model SA12120) batteries (two required).
12 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (red door, black box). 12 Class B
(Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power
Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits
(up to1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).
Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder modules may be used for
Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.
One MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A
Converter adder module may be used for
Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-LDR contains Common
Alarm, Common Supervisory & Common
Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110
(10 amp-hour) (Sota Enertech model SA12120) batteries (two required).
12 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (white door, black box). Same as MR-2312-LDW except without dialer.
12 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (red door, black box). Same as MR-2312-LDR except without dialer.
4
MR-2308-LDW
MR-2308-LW
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
8 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 8 Class B
(Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power
Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits
(up to1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).
Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder modules may be used for
Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.
One MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A
Converter adder module may be used for
Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2308-LDW contains Common
Alarm, Common Supervisory & Common
Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110
(10 amp-hour) (Sota Enertech model SA12120) batteries (two required).
8 Zone Fire Alarm with LED display (white door, black box). Same as MR-2308-LDW except without dialer.
5
System Components
Relay Module: 12 Relays
Model Description
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 7
NO/NC C
RELAY 8
NO/NC C
RELAY 9
NO/NC
RELAY 10
C NO/NC C
RELAY 11
NO/NC
RELAY 12
C NO/NC C
Relay Modules: Six Relays
MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay adder module
Model Description
MR-2306-R6 module
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC
C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5
NO/NC C
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
Polarity reversal/city tie
Model Description
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and/or City tie Module
JW4
6
Remote Annunciator
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
TRBL CPU FAIL
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
MR-2300 SERIES Remote Annunciator
Smart Relay Module
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Model
MR-2300-LCDW
Description
Remote Annunciator module, LCD display, white painted box
MR-2300-LCDR
Remote Annunciator
Module, LCD display, red painted box
Model Description
MR-2312-SR12/
MR-2312-SW12
Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red or white enclosure
MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY
7
System Components
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits
Model
MR-2300-A
Description
Input Class A converter Module (six circuits). This module has built in
Active End-of-Line resistors.
Output Class A converter: four circuits
Model Description
MR-2300-NC4
Output Class A converter module (four circuits)
Output Class A converter: two circuits
Model
MR-2300-NC2
Description
Output Class A converter module (two circuits)
Active end-of-line
The MR-2300-X are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.
Model Description
RED
BLACK MR-2300-X Active end-of-line resistor without plate
8
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator
Model Description
A.C.
ON
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
COMMON
TROUBLE
SIGNAL
SILEBCE
SWITCH
ENABLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
FIRE ALARM
ANNUNCIATOR
MR-2312-ATW/
MR-2312-ATR
16 Zone remote annunciator
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories
Model: MR-2306-ATW/MR-2306-ATW/ Eight Zone Remote Annunciator (ULC and ULI Approved)
Model: MR-2605-T Remote Trouble Indicator (ULC and ULI Approved)
9
Mechanical Installation
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Enclosure
Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve and eight-zone models.
Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided.
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount
11"
Mounting Hole
1.5"
Mounting Hole
20.5"
25.9"
Mounting Hole
10
5.4" Mounting Hole
4.5"
14.5"
The backbox may be semi-flush mounted using the trim ring model MR-2312-FT (BLACK), see Figure 2. Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall. Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring
The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.
TRIM RING
WALL
WOOD OR
METAL STUD
BACKBOX
11
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Adder Modules
MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules.
Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.
Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules
MAIN FIRE PANEL BOARD
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300A
(6 circuits)
LED DISPLAY
JW6
JW5
JW4
ZONE-3
DISCONNECT
ZONE-5
DISCONNECT
ZONE-7
DISCONNECT
ZONE-11
DISCONNECT
NAC-3
DISCONNECT
WALK
TEST
CPU FAIL
GROUND
FAULT
SIGNAL
SILENCE
ACK
GENERAL
ALARM
BUZZER
SILENCE
ZONE-4
DISCONNECT
ZONE-6
DISCONNECT
ZONE-8
DISCONNECT
ZONE-12
DISCONNECT
NAC-4
DISCONNECT
COMMON
SUPV
COMMON
TROUBLE
SYSTEM
RESET
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC4
(4 circuits)
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW3
JW2
JW1
Fuse and terminal
AC wiring
Transformer
P
3
BATTERY
P
4
_
SEC. TX
P
1
P
2
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
Mount relay module on the left side using two screws provided .
BATTERY
Relay Module MR-2312-R12 centre under main fire alarm board using three screws provided .
BATTERY
12
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder
Modules
Main Fire Alarm Board
Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings
JW6-Open all the time
For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL-864 or
ULC-S527 listed.
Telephone line #1
JW5-Normally Open
JW4 -Normally open
Telephone line #2
RS-485 for annunciators
For front panel programming use SCFG-200 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.
JW7 -Normally open
JW7
Auxiliary Relay
Alarm Relay
Supervisory
Relay
Trouble Relay
Auxiliary Supply
4-wire Supply
Unfiltered 24V supply connect to Remote trouble indicator
JW2 - ON- when
MR-2306-R6/2312-R12 not connected
Connect to MR-2306-R6/
MR-2312-R12 Relay module
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
Connect to
MR-2300-PR
JW3
JW2
JW1
JW6
JW5
JW4
W ALK
TES T
REMOTE
TROUBLE
CPU FAIL
G ROUN D
FAULT
ZON E-1
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-3
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-5
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-7
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-9
DISCON N ECT
ABORT
N AC-1
DISCON N ECT
RELEASE
CIRCUIT -1
SIG N AL
SILEN CE
FIRE
DRILL
ACK
G EN ERAL
ALARM
JW3- Removed all the time
SYSTEM
RESET
AUX
DISCON N ECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILEN CE
A.C .
ON
COMMON
ALARM
COMMON
SUPV
COMMON
TROUBLE
BATTERY
TROUBLE
ZON E-2
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-4
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-6
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-8
DISCON N ECT
ZON E-10
DISCON N ECT
MAN UAL
RELEASE
N AC-2
DISCON N ECT
RELEASE
CIRCUIT -2
BATTERY
_
P3 P4
SEC. TX
P1 P2
13
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board
P5
P6
JW1
Cable from P1 of the MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module connects here.
Otherwise not used.
Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here. Otherwise not used.
On the Main Fire Alarm Module, this jumper must be removed if a MR-2300-PR Polarity
Reversal and City Tie Module is installed.
JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.
JW3 Removed all the time.
JW4
JW5
Normally open. Place jumper here and power down (AC and Batteries) then power back to revert back to default password. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5. Leave normally open.
Normally open to BLOCK remote configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.
JW6 Not used, open.
JW7 Not used, open.
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 5: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
All these pins comes with red and black wires which are connected to the detection circuit on the main fire alarm board. Red is positive and black is negative mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
14
There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the
Main Fire Alarm Board.
Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.
To convert all 12 initiating circuits of the Fire Alarm Panel, two of these MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter Adder
Modules are required.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
MR-2300-NC2
SOCA-202 mounting hole for
#6-32 screws mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.
The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.
Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6)
MR-2312-R12 Twelve-Relay Adder Module
The ribbon cable from P1 of the MR-2312-R12 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2312-R12 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 7: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module
Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board INDIVIDUAL
GREEN RELAY
STATUS LEDs
Three mounting holes for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 7 RELAY 8
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 9 RELAY 10
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 11 RELAY 12
NO/NC C NO/NC C
P1: Cable from MR-2312-R12 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
Programming the relays
A typical relay circuit is shown in Figure 8 with the jumper locations and descriptions.
Note:
Relay programming should be done before installing the board
15
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Figure 8: MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay programming
ZONE JUMPER
installed: turns ON relay when the zone
(1) is active
removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active
Default: Jumper is installed
SUPV/ALARM SELECTION
S: Relay turns ON when common supervisory is active
A: Relay turns ON when common alarm is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only
A
Z1
S 1&2
LED (GREEN)
LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE
jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2
jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2
chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only
RELAY 1
NO NC
NC/NO CONNECTION
NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts
NO: terminal provides normally open contacts
Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)
Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection then the relay is not connected to the terminals
NO/NC C
RELAY 12
NO/NC C
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module
Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 9: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module
Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board
INDIVIDUAL GREEN
RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
Programming the relays
See explanation in Figure 8.
Note:
Relay programming should be done before installing the board
16
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)
Figure 10: Polarity reversal and city tie module
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
P1 P2
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR.
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings
P1
JW1
JW2
Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or
"open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a
"zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the
City Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration on page for more information.
The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See SYSTEM CONFIGURATION section.
17
Field wiring
Field wiring
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring
Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to
Appendix A for specifications.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring or Style D wiring for the inititating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an
Active-End-of-Line.
Note:
According to Configuration, End-of-Line Resistors on initiating circuits must be all 3.9K ohms or all
Active End-of-Line resistors.
Figure 11: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM ZONE
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION
SUPERVISORY
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE
RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT
THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL THE
INITIATING CIRCUITS.
18
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 12: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring
CONVERTER MODULE
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM
ZONE
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
4 MORE INITIATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO
SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION SUPERVISORY
Note:
When using MR-2300 Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.
Indicating Circuit Wiring
The MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits.
Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line resistor. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.
Note:
An Active End-of-Line resistor CANNOT be used with any indicating circuits. Always use 3.9K End of
Line resistors for indicating circuits.
Figure 13: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 2
BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
19
Field wiring
Figure 14: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring
CONVERTER MODULE
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
-
+
-
+
2 MORE INDICATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 2
BELL
STROBE
HORN
Four Wire Smoke Detector Wiring
Figure 15: Four-wire smoke detector wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LEGEND
+
-
+
-
POWER
+
-
RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
22VDC, 200mA
MAX. CURRENT - 300mA
MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV
(POWER LIMITED)
+
-
+
DETECTION
4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE
TO INITIATING
CIRCUIT
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
6
3
4
5
2
1
END OF LINE RELAY
LISTED S3403
MODEL A77-716B
MANUFACTURED BY
SYSTEM SENSOR
NOTES
ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,
OR FPLP POWER LIMITED
CABLE
20
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Dialer Wiring
If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-LDW, MR-2312-LDR, and MR-2308-LDW there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 16 below.
Figure 16: Dialer wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LINE-1
LINE-2
RED
GREEN
GREY
BROWN
1
RJ31X
2 3
4
8
7 6
5
TIP
RING
Public switch
Telephone company wiring
TIP
RING premise telephone
IF permitted
Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1
Relay Adder Module Wiring
Wire relays on the relay adder modules MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 17 and 18.
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection
21
Field wiring
Figure 18: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection
22
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring
Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 19 , below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.
For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective
Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.
For use in Canada, the Protective Device is not required but still recommended.
Figure 19: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection
MR-2300-PR
23
Field wiring
Power supply connection
The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:
Type
Electrical Input rating
Power supply total current
Battery fuse on Main module
Rating
120VAC, 60Hz, 3A\ 240 VAC 50Hz 1.5A fuse
6A maximum
10A, slow blow micro fuse
Wire the power supply as shown in Figure 20 using the proper wire gauge. See Appendix A for power supply specifications.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Figure 20: Power supply connection
blk
J W1 red red
Battery
P3 red
BATTE RY
_
P4 blk
_ red
_
P1 P2
SEC. TX
Battery
NOTE: TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE
SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON blk
L
G
N green
Connect AC power here: green wire to G
24
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring Tables and Information
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wire gauge
AWG
22
20
18
16
14
12
Maximum wiring run to last device
Feet Meters
2990
4760
7560
12000
19000
30400
910
1450
2300
3600
5800
9200
Notes:
• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.
• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.
• Maximum capacitance of 0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring
Total signal load in amperes
0.06
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
2350
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
47
36
29
24
716
360
143
71
Maximum wiring run to last device
18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
3750
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
1143
567
229
114
76
56
46
38
6000
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
1829
915
366
183
122
91
73
61
Notes:
• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.
• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.
8500
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285
2591
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. loop resistance in ohms
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
30
15
6
3
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)
4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)
Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
25
Field wiring
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)
This unregulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.
26
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
System Checkout
Before turning the power “ON”
To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main
AC supply.
1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.
2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.
3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.
4. Check all jumpers and switches for proper setting.
5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.
6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).
7. Make sure to close the front cover plate before powering the system from main AC supply.
Power-up procedure
After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,
8. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.
9. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).
All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I47.
Note:
Green LED I47 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.
10.Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Circuit
Trouble
Remote Fail
Ground Fault
Battery
Trouble
Possible Cause
Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, its designated trouble indicator will be illuminated, as well as the common trouble indicator and trouble buzzer. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or that the Circuit Disconnect
Switch is in the ON or CLOSED position.
Note: Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).
Remote Fail will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.
This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.
Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.
Walk Test
Mode
If the Walk Test LED is illuminated steadily, the system is in Walk Test Mode.
Common
Trouble
If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above confirming trouble indicators are on, check the following for possible fault:
• Check for any missing interconnection wiring.
• Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.
• Check for improperly secured cabling.
27
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Refer to Figure 21 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations.
Figure 21: LED indicators and control buttons
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
0
0 Q Z
2
2 A B C
4
4 G H I
6
6 M N O
8
8 T U V
ENTER
INFO
WALK
TEST
REMO TE
TRO UBLE
CP U FAIL
GRO UND
FAULT
ZONE-1
DISCO NNECT
ZONE-3
DISCO NNECT
ZO NE-5
DISCO NNECT
ZO NE-7
DISCO NNECT
ZO NE-9
DISCO NNECT
ZO NE-11
DISCO NNECT
NAC-1
DISCO NNECT
NAC-3
DISCO NNECT
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
ACK
GENERAL
ALARM
A.C.
O N
CO MMO N
ALARM
CO MMO N
SUPV
CO MMO N
TROUBLE
BATTERY
TROUBLE
SYSTEM
RESET
AUX
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST (MENU)
BUZZER
SILENCE (MENU)
ZO NE-2
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-4
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-6
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-8
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-10
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-12
DISCONNECT
NAC-2
DISCONNECT
NAC-4
DISCONNECT
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
1
1
3
3 D E F
5
5 J K L
7
7 P R S
9
9 W X Y
#
Forward
CANCEL
28
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
The Main Display Panel on the Main Fire Alarm Control Board consists of:
• 18 common LED Indicators (top half of display)
• Eight Common Buttons (top half of display)
• up to 12 Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and 12 Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators
• Four Indicating Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)
• up to sixteen disconnect buttons (12 for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)
LED Indicators may be Amber, Red, or Green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two Flash
Rates.
• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
• Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is # NP-2005 ; this includes English and French versions.
Note:
There are different labels for Two Stage operation.
Common Indicators
Buzzer
The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events:
Fire Alarm: Steady
Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash
Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate
If the Buzzer is turned on in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned off if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be on.
AC ON LED
The green AC ON Indicator will steadily illuminate as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power-fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby
(battery) power.
Common Alarm LED
The red Common Alarm Indicator steadily illuminates whenever the panel alarms on any initiating circuit. Activation of the manual General Alarm Button will also turn on the Common Alarm Indicator if the panel is set for Two-stage
Operation. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.
Common Supervisory LED
The amber Common Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching
Supervisory Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory
Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.
Common Trouble LED
The amber Common Trouble Indicator turns ON steady when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.
Remote Trouble LED
The amber Remote Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate if there is trouble detected at a City Tie or
DACT, or if there is communication trouble detected with a Remote Annunciator or if a Remote Annunciator reports a local trouble. It is turned off if these conditions go away.
29
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Fire Drill LED
The amber Fire Drill Indicator illuminates steadily while Fire Drill is active.
Acknowledge LED
If the Panel is configured as a two-stage system, the Acknowledge Indicator flashes amber at the Fast Flash Rate while the Auto General Alarm Timer is timing out. The Acknowledge Indicator steadily illuminates when the Alarm
Timer is cancelled by the activation of the Acknowledge or Signal Silence buttons. If the Auto General Alarm Timer times out and puts the Panel into General Alarm, the Indicator turns off.
General Alarm LED
In two-stage operation only, the red General Alarm Indicator illuminates steadily when the General Alarm button is pushed, a General Alarm Initiating Circuit is activated, or the Auto General Alarm Timer times out. Once the General
Alarm Indicator has been turned on it will stay active until the panel is reset.
Walk Test LED
The amber Walk Test Indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in Walk Test Mode. If the Panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.
CPU Fail LED
The amber CPU Fail LED Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.
Auxiliary Disconnect LED
The amber Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns OFF when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When ON flashing, the
Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator signifies that the Auxiliary Alarm Relay is disconnected. Depending on the programming the auxiliary disconnect switch can also disconnect the common alarm and supervisory relay, see
Configuration section. When the Auxiliary Disconnect LED is flashing, the trouble buzzer will also sound.
Signal Silence LED
The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber, at the trouble rate, when indication Circuits are Silenced either by the
Signal Silence button, or by the Auto Signal Silence Timer. It is turned off when the Signals are re-sounded by a subsequent Alarm.
Battery Trouble LED
The amber Battery Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Battery is either low (below 20.4 VDC) or disconnected.
Ground Fault LED
The amber Ground Fault Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Ground Fault Detector detects a Ground
Fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the Ground Fault is cleared.
System Reset LED
This indicator is activated for a short time when the RESET key is pressed.
30
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Alarm Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm,
Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events.
Event Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Circuit in Alarm
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
OFF
Verified Alarm
Non-Verified Alarm
Water flow Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
General Alarm
Event Circuit Status LED Configuration
Circuit in Alarm Steady (red)
Pre-alarm Fast flash rate (red)
Verified Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
Water flow Alarm
Active circuit reconnected Fast flash rate (red)
Supervisory Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Event Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Configuration
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
Circuit in Alarm
Event
Circuit in Alarm
Active circuit reconnected
OFF
Circuit Status LED
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
Monitor Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Monitor
Circuit Active
Event
Circuit Active
Active circuit reconnected
OFF
Circuit Status LED
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Monitor
31
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Disconnected
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Trouble Only
Short Circuit
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Signal Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to indicating circuits of any type. The Circuit Trouble Indicator flashes amber at the Trouble
Rate to indicate short-circuit or open-circuit trouble, or if the circuit is Disconnected.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit
Short Circuit
Disconnected
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Signal
Common Controls
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits. In particular, the system reset button
• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions.
• Resets all Initiating Circuits.
• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply.
• Turns off all Indicating Circuits.
• Turns off Signal Silence, ACK & GA Indicators.
• Turns off Fire Drill.
• Stops and resets all Timers.
• Processes inputs as new events.
• Does not affect Aux Disconnect.
Signal Silence Button
Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period. It also does not function if the Indicating
Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.
In a two-stage system, if the Auto General Alarm Timer has timed out, this button also performs the same function as the Acknowledge button.
32
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Fire Drill Button
The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any Alarms via the
City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.
Fire Drill is cancelled by pressing the button again, or if the Panel goes into a real alarm.
Acknowledge Button (or Buzzer Silence button for single stage system)
If the Panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button becomes Buzzer Silence . If the Panel is configured for two-stage operation, activation of the Acknowledge button while the Auto General Alarm Timer is timing (there is an alarm in the panel, but it is still in the first stage), the timer is cancelled and the amber
Acknowledge Indicator illuminates steady, thereby acknowledging the alarm.
General Alarm Button (or Info button for single stage system)
If the Panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button becomes the Info button. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, activation of the General Alarm button immediately sends the panel into second stage:
General Alarm. It will also re-activate the signals if they have been silenced during General Alarm. The General
Alarm condition remains active until the panel is reset.
Info
This button is pressed for further event information when using a CFG-300 Service Tool with LCD, otherwise it does nothing.
Auxiliary Disconnect Button
Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the Auxiliary Disconnect function. The Auxiliary Alarm Relay is always disconnected with this button. The Common Alarm Relay, the Common Supervisory relay and all correlated alarm relays may be disconnected as selected through configuration. Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button also causes the Common Trouble LED to illuminate steady, the common trouble relay to send a trouble message and the trouble buzzer to flash at the trouble flash rate. Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button again de-activates this function and the system will go back to normal.
Lamp Test Button
Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated.
Buzzer Silence Button (or Menu for single stage system)
Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
Menu Button
This button is used to select the command menu when a CFG-300 Service Tool with LCD is used, otherwise it does nothing.
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.
Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status (alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits. Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will un-bypass (reconnect) the circuit.
Disconnecting an active Latching Initiating Circuit (including Alarms, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, General
Alarm, and Latching Supervisory) does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting an active Non-
Latching Initiating Circuit (including Non-Latching Supervisory and Trouble-Only) causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.
33
Indicators, Controls and Operations
When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not reconnected by then, it will be processed as a new input.
Disconnect pushbuttons are also used during Walk-Test as described in the System Checkout section.
Common Relays
Common Alarm Relay
The Common Alarm Relay activates when the common alarm sequence is activated. On a two-stage system the relay may be configured to operate either on the first stage or both the first and second stage alarm ( see
Configuration section ) . The common alarm relay is disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see
Configuration section). Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset.
Common Supervisory Relay
The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm on any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). The relay will function the same way as an alarm relay if the supervisory relay is disabled ( see Configuration section ).
Common Trouble Relay
The Common Trouble relay is activated when the common trouble sequence is activated as the result of the trouble condition being detected on the system. It is turned off when all troubles are cleared.
Note:
Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.
Auxiliary Alarm Relay
The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect with or without other correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see
Configuration section). When configured ( see Configuration section ), the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is de-activated.
Circuit Types
Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types
Non-Verified Alarm
A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Verified Alarm
Verified Alarms are verified by a reset and timing procedure, and may include smoke detectors, heat detectors or pull stations. Activation of pull stations or heat detectors will result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the
Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
34
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)
Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow
Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common
Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Sprinkler Alarm (for Sprinkler Flow Sensors)
Sprinkler Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms unless Water flow retard operation is enabled. If Water
Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
General Alarm
The General Alarm provides remote general alarm for remote key switches. In a two-stage system these inputs perform exactly the same function as the Front Panel or Remote Annunciator General Alarm button. In a single stage system, these inputs act the same as Non-Verified Alarms; however, if Correlations are enabled, General
Alarm Initiating Circuits are correlated to ALL indicating circuits.
Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear
(as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.
Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.
Monitor
This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (opencircuit).
Trouble-Only
The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device. Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.
Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types
Silenceable Signal
The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm or Two-Stage General Alarm, or the Alert Code during the alert (first) stage of a two-stage alarm.
Non-Silenceable Signal
The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the
35
Indicators, Controls and Operations condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm or Two-Stage
General Alarm, or the Alert Code during the alert (first) stage of a two-stage alarm.
Silenceable Strobe
Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Non-Silenceable Strobes
Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Evacuation codes
Single stage codes
Continuous On 100% of the time
Temporal Code 3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause
March Code 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off
California Code 5 seconds on, 10 seconds off
Two-step codes
Alert Code 0.5 second on, 2.5 seconds off
General Alarm Evacuation Code as selected from above.
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes
0.5s
2.5s
C O N T IN O U S
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
5s 10s
1.5s
TE M P O R A L C O D E
M A R C H C O D E
C A LIFO R N IA C O D E
A LE R T C O D E
36
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Single Stage Operation
In a single stage system all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:
Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Water flow Alarm, and General Alarm Circuits. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:
• The Buzzer sounds steadily.
• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled.
• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on.
• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active.
• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts.
• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts.
• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active.)
• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated.
• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate.
Subsequent alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:
• The alert buzzer sounds steadily.
• If Signals have been silenced as a result of the Signal Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto
Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted.
• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously.
• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate.
Two-stage Operation
In a Two-Stage System Alarm inputs are either First Stage (Alert) inputs or Second Stage (General Alarm) inputs.
First Stage inputs include inputs from the following types of circuits: Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler
Alarm, and Water flow Alarm. Second Stage inputs include Alarms on General Alarm Circuits, activation of the
General Alarm button, or expiration of the Auto General Alarm Timer.
If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:
• The Buzzer sounds steadily.
• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled.
• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on.
• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active.
• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts.
• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts.
• All non-disconnected relays programmed to the input are activated provided that Aux Disconnect is not active.
If the alarm is a Second Stage alarm all connected strobe circuits are activated continuously, all non-disconnected signal circuits are activated at the evacuation rate, and the General Alarm indicator is turned ON. If the alarm is a
First Stage alarm, non-disconnected strobe circuits programmed to that circuit are activated continuously, nondisconnected signal circuits programmed to that circuit are activated with the Alert Code ( see Indicating Circuit
Types section ) the Auto General Alarm Timer, if configured, starts, and the Acknowledge Indicator starts flashing.
Subsequent First Stage alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:
• The Buzzer sounds steadily.
• If Signals have been Silenced as a result of the Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto Signal
Silence timer, if configured, is restarted.
• If the panel is not already in General Alarm, additional non-Disconnected Signals programmed to the new input are activated with the Alert Code (see Indicating Circuit Types, in previous section).
37
Indicators, Controls and Operations
• If the panel is not already in General Alarm and if the Acknowledge Indicator is ON steady, indicating that the
Auto General Alarm Timer has been acknowledged, the timer is restarted and the Acknowledge LED is extinguished.
A Second Stage Alarm (General Alarm) when the panel is already in alarm causes the following:
• The Buzzer is sounded steady.
• All non-disconnected signals are activated at the evacuation rate.
• If the Signal Silence Indicator is ON, it is turned OFF and the Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted.
• The Acknowledge Indicator if ON, is turned off.
Alarm inputs are latching, which means that they remain active until system reset. Note that if the System is configured for Correlations , any Second Stage/General Alarm (caused by the Auto General Alarm Timer, the
General Alarm button on the Front Panel or Remote Annunciator, or by a General Alarm Initiating Circuit) condition activates ALL Indicating Circuits, whether they are Correlated or not.
38
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Supported Protocols/Devices
Synchronous Strobes
The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR2300 panel Secutron models MRL-ST and MRA-HS.
A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models.
Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).
“Signal silence” action on strobes
The “signal silence” action on strobes depends upon the configuration. The following describes the signal silence action on non-silenceable and silenceable strobes.
Non Silenceable strobe
If the output zone is configured as Non-Silenceable Strobe and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel while the strobes are active, the horn should be silenced. If the signal is active again the panel will activate the horn again.
Silenceable strobe
If the output circuit is configured as Silenceable Strobe, and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel, both the horn and strobe are completely turned off by turning off the output circuit. Re-activating the “signal silence” will turn them on again.
Note:
Please see the strobes manufacturer’s data for details.
System Sensor’s i
3
Devices
The MR-2300 fire control panel supports System Sensor’s i
3
devices. Only the two wire smoke detectors are supported on the i
3
zone, which are 2W-B and 2WT-B. Model 2WT-B features a build in fixed temperature (135F /
57.2C) thermal detector and is capable of sensing a freeze condition i.e. if the temperature is below 41F / 5 C.
The zones should be programmed to i
3
devices to be considered as i
3
zone (see configuration section). If the zone is not programmed as i
3
zone and i
3
devices are connected to the zone, it is simply treated as a regular zone. The panel is capable of detecting multiple troubles; if different devices have different troubles on the same zone, all troubles will be reported. The following troubles are reported for the i
3
devices.
i 3 zone Troubles
The following troubles can be reported for a zone configured as i
3
zone:
• Open circuit trouble
• Communication trouble
• Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device
• Freeze trouble
39
Supported Protocols/Devices
Open circuit trouble
If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs.
Z o n e - 1
O p e n T r b . 1 / 1
Communication Trouble
If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices. The panel shows a communication trouble in this case.
Z o n e - 1
C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1
Dirty Device trouble
If any of the devices on the i
3
zone are dirty, the panel shows a Dirty Device trouble. The device needs cleaning or be replaced with a new device.
Z o n e - 1
D i r t y D e v . T r b 1 / 1
Out of sensitivity trouble
If any of the devices on the i
3
zone is out of sensitivity and cannot detect an alarm condition, the panel shows out of sensitivity trouble. In this condition the device is not usable and should be replaced.
Z o n e - 1
O u t o f S e n s T r b 1 / 1
Freeze trouble
If the device has detected a freeze condition, (e.g. the temperature is below 41F / 5 C) then the panel will show a freeze trouble. Only model 2WT-B is capable of thermal detection; model 2W-B does not indicate any freeze trouble.
Z o n e - 1
F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1
The LEDs on the i
3
smoke detectors provide a local visual indication of the detector status.
The smoke detector LED status should be confirmed with the panel, since Out of Sensitivity and a Dirty Device have the same LED indication on the detector and the only way to distinguish between the two is to use the CFG-300
Configuration Tool and check the messages as noted above.
i 3 Detector Condition
Power-up
Normal (Standby)
Out of sensitivity (defective or dirty)
Freeze trouble
Alarm
Green LED
Blinks every 10 sec
Blinks every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
OFF
Blinks every 10 sec
OFF
Blinks every 5 sec
Blinks every 10 sec
Solid
Red LED
40
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels:
1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information).
2. Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.
3. Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).
The following information for configuring an MR-2300 LED Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using CFG-300
LCD service tool for configuration.
To access configuration mode using a CFG-300 tool, connect the CFG-300 and then press the Menu button
(for a single stage system) or simultaneously press the Lamp Test and Buzzer Silence buttons on the front panel display (for a two stage system).
The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 22, below. Figure 22 shows a two stage system.
Figure 22: MR-2300 Configuration
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
0
0 Q Z
2
2 A B C
4
4 G H I
6
6 M N O
8
8 T U V
ENTER
INFO
WALK
TEST
REMO TE
TROUBLE
CPU FAIL
GRO UND
FAULT
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
ACK
GENERAL
ALARM
ZONE-1
DISCO NNECT
ZONE-3
DISCO NNECT
ZONE-5
DISCO NNECT
ZONE-7
DISCO NNECT
ZONE-9
DISCO NNECT
ZO NE-11
DISCO NNECT
NAC-1
DISCO NNECT
NAC-3
DISCO NNECT
A.C.
ON
CO MMON
ALARM
CO MMON
SUPV
CO MMON
TROUBLE
BATTERY
TROUBLE
SYSTEM
RESET
AUX
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST (MENU)
BUZZER
SILENCE (MENU)
ZO NE-2
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-4
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-6
DISCONNECT
ZO NE-8
DISCONNECT
ZONE-10
DISCONNECT
ZONE-12
DISCONNECT
NAC-2
DISCONNECT
NAC-4
DISCONNECT
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
1
1
3
3 D E F
5
5 J K L
7
7 P R S
9
9 W X Y
#
Forward
CANCEL
41
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Entering the Passcode
The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press the
“ENTER” key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is “1111” (without quotes).
E n t e r p a s s c o d e
_
Command Menu
The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show
“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the “ENTER” key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the “CANCEL” or “ENTER” key.
Note:
Command Menu features 1 and 9 can only be accessed if jumper JW5 is placed on the main board, see Table 1.
&RPPDQG0HQX
05&RQILJ
&RQILJ,QIR
6HW7LPH
6HW3DVVZRUG
9LHZ(YHQW/RJ
&OHDU(YHQW/RJ
:DON7HVW
,/RRSWHVW
'LDOHU&RQILJ
7HVW'LDOHU
%\SDVV'HW&NW
%\SDVV1$&&NW
$X['LVF
([LW
Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below.
Version 0.0.4
The first line shows the model number and panel type and the second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as Major.Minor.Revision.
42
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu)
The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features
- Feature Config -
1 Man. Sig. Sil.
2 Fire Drill
3 Opt. Ckt. Corr
4 Wtr/Sprk. Retd
5 Aux Dis Corr
6 Sig-Sil Inh Tm
7 Aux Dis, Alm&Sup
8 Auto Sil. Tmr
9 Rem. Annun.
10 Alm. Xmit-Sil.
11 Pwr Fail Tmr.
12 Com. Supv. Rly
13 Sig-Sil. Isol.
14 Strobe Type
15 Evac. Code
16 Active EOL
17 Two Stage Op.
18 Gen-Alm Tmr
19 Com Alm Rly Op
43
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300
1. Press MENU to enter the command menu.
2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER . The corresponding submenu will display.
3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.
4. Press ENTER to select a submenu option.
5. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different options.
6. Once you have made the correct selection, press ENTER to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.
7. Press CANCEL to return to the previous menu.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
1. Manual Signal Silence
[X] ENABLE->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the SIGNAL SILENCE operation from the front panel.
M a n u a l S i g . S i l e n c e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
2.Fire Drill
F i r e D r i l l
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
3.Output Circuit Correlation
O p t . C k t . C o r r .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the FIRE DRILL operation.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
If disabled, whatever correlation is set in the correlation section is effective. If enabled, all the output circuits are correlated to all the input circuits.
44
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
4.Waterflow/Sprinkler Retard
Operation
W a t e r f l o w / S p r k . R e t d
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABL ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
5.Aux. disconnect, disconnects
Aux Alarm relay and all correlated relays
A u x D i s C o r r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
If disabled, all the initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler.
(See Water flow Alarm and
Sprinkler Alarm description)
In the default mode this function will disconnect the Auxiliary
Alarm Relay when selected by the Aux Disconnect button.
If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm
Relay and all correlated relays by pressing the Aux Disconnect button. Correlated relays include: MR-2312-R12/RM-206 relays, MR-2312-S12 relays.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
6.Signal-Silence Inhibit timer
S i g - S i l . I n h i b i t T m r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
7. Aux. disconnect, disconnects common alarm relay and common supervisory relay
A u x D i s , D i s A l m & S p v
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
8.Auto Signal Silence Timer
A u t o S i g - S i l . T i m e r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
9. Number of Remote
Annunciators or smart relays
N o . o f R e m o t e A n n u n .
[ X ] N O N E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
10.Silence Alarm transmit
A l m . X m i t - S i l .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
11.AC power fail delay timer
A C P w r F a i l D l y T m r .
[ X ] N O N E
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 10 SEC
[ ] 20 SEC
[ ] 30 SEC
[ ] 1 MIN
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[X] NONE ->Default
[ ] 8 HRS
[ ] 18 HRS
Use this function to inhibit the
“SIGNAL SILENCE” switch for a desired length of time. This time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should be set to one minute.
If enabled, this function will disconnect (when the Aux. disconnect switch is pressed) the Common Alarm relay and
Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.
If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the
Common Alarm relay, the
Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR.
Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced. According to the
Canadian National Building
Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 15 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[ ] 5
[ ] 6
Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.
Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to allow the alarm transmits and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL
SILENCE” rather than the
“RESET” switch.
Use this function to delay the
AC power fail trouble for the programmed time period. If disabled, the AC power fail is reported right away.
45
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
12.Common Supervisory Relay
C o m m o n S u p v . R e l a y
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
13.Signal Isolators
S i g - S i l . I s o l a t o r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
14.Strobe Type
S t r o b e T y p e
[ X ] N O R M A L
[ ] ENABLE ->Default
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.
Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only)
[X] NORMAL ->Default
[ ] SECUTRON
[ ] FARADY
[ ] WHEELOCK
[ ] GENTEX
[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR
Use this function to select the manufacturer of the strobes used in the system. The selection is system-wide and applies to all indicating circuits configured as strobes. For
“NORMAL” strobes there is no synchronization, while other strobes are synchronized and use manufacturer’s protocol to synchronize the strobes.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
15.Evacuation Code
E v a c u a t i o n C o d e
[ X ] T E M P O R A L
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
16. Active EOL
A c t i v e E O L
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Features/
17. Two-stage Operation
T w o S t a g e O p e r a t i o n
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] TEMPORAL->Default
[ ] CONTINOUS
[ ] MARCH TIME
[ ] CALIFORNIA
Use this function to set the rate at which the indicating circuits will sound.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] NO
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Enable this function if using an
Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A
Converter has built in Active
EOL resistors.
Use this function to allow the system to perform a two-stage operation. This selection also sets the Auto General Timer to 5 minutes. If the Auto Signal
Silence Timer is greater than the Auto General Alarm Timer, then no error will occur. If the
Auto Signal Silence Timer is equal or less than the Auto
General Alarm Timer, then the
Auto Signal Silence Timer is disabled and the following warning message is displayed:
“Auto Sig. Sil. Has been disabled” The user should set the Auto Signal Silence Timer is always greater than the Auto
General Alarm Timer.
46
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Features/
18. Auto General Alarm Timer
A u t o G e n - A l a r m T i m e r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 15 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Features/
3.Common Alarm Relay Operation [ ] BOTH STAGES-
>Default
C o m m o n A l m R l y . O p e r
[X] SECOND STAGE ONLY
[ X ] S E C O N D S T A G E
This function is used for twostage systems only. This function sets the time period for automatic evacuation.
Use this function to allow
“Common Alarm Relay” to operate in second stage only or to operate in both the stages.
47
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone
I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e
1 Z o n e - 1
2 Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
1 2 Z o n e 1 2
This Inp Zone menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. The maximum number of initiating circuits supported is 12, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone
1.Process Type (Initiating circuit)
12.
Z o n e - 1 T y p e
[ X ] A L A R M
[X] ALARM ->Default
[ ] VERIF ALARM
[ ] SPRKL ALM
[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM
[ ] NON-LATCH SUP
[ ] LATCH SUPV
[ ] GEN ALARM
[ ] MONITOR
[ ] TRB ONLY
Use this function to program the process type of each input zone. ( See CIRCUIT TYPE section for details.)
Z o n e - 1 2 T y p e
[ X ] A L A R M
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
I 3 Zone
I 3 D e t e c t i o n Z o n e s
[ ] Z o n e - 1
[ ] Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
[ ] Z o n e - 1 2
[ ] Zone-1->Default
.
.
.
[ ] Zone-12->Default
Use this function if i
3
devices are present on a zone. ( See i
3 devices section for details).
48
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone
I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e
1 N A C - 1
2 N A C - 2
3 N A C - 3
4 N A C - 4
This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits. The maximum number of indicating circuits is four, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Opt. Zone
1.Process Type (Indicating
Circuits)
N A C - 1 T y p e
[ X ] S I L - A B L E
[X] SIL-ABLE->Default
[ ] NON SIL-ABLE
[ ] SIL-ABLE STR
[ ] NON-SIL STR
Use this function to program the process type of each indicating circuit. See CIRCUIT
TYPE section for details.
4.
N A C - 4 T y p e
[ X ] S I L - A B L E
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Correlation
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Correlation
1.Correlation
Z o n e - 1 C o r r .
[ X ] N A C - 1
[X] NAC-1 ->Default
[X] NAC-2 ->Default
[X] NAC-3 ->Default
[X] NAC-4 ->Default
Use this function to correlate initiating circuits to the indicating circuits. By default all the initiating circuits are correlated to all the indicating circuits.
12.
Z o n e - 1 2 C o r r .
[ X ] N A C - 1
49
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone Msg
I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e
1 Z o n e - 1
2 Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
1 2 Z o n e 1 2
Use the keys described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described following.
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone
Lab
1.Initiating zone label
Z o n e - 1 L a b e l
Z o n e - 1
[Zone-1 ]->Default
[Zone-12 ]->Default
BYPASS SWITCH TRANSLATION
12.
Z o n e - 1 2 L a b e l
Z o n e - 1 2
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Zone-1 0 Q Z Zone-2 1
Zone-3 2 A B C Zone-4 3 D E F
Zone-5 4 G H I Zone-6 5 J K L
Zone-7 6 M N O Zone-8 7 P R S
Zone-9 8 T U V Zone-10 9 W X Y
Zone-11 Back Space Zone-12 Forward
50
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone Label
I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e
1 N A C - 1
2 N A C - 2
3 N A C - 3
4 N A C - 4
Use the keys in described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described below.
Command Menu/ MR-2300 Config/Opt. Zone
Lab
1.Indicating zone messages
[NAC-1 ]->Default
[NAC-4 ]->Default
N A C - 1 L a b e l
N A C - 1
BYPASS SWITCH TRANSLATION
4.
N A C - 4 L a b e l
N A C - 4
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Zone-1 0 Q Z Zone-2 1
Zone-3 2 A B C Zone-4 3 D E F
Zone-5 4 G H I Zone-6 5 J K L
Zone-7 6 M N O Zone-8 7 P R S
Zone-9 8 T U V Zone-10 9 W X Y
Zone-11 Back Space Zone-12 Forward
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Default Configuration
L o a d t h e d e f a u l t s e t t i n g s ? Y
Press “UP” and “DOWN” to select between Y/N. if “ENTER” is pressed the default configuration is restored.
D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s h a v e b e e n l o a d e d
Use this function to load the default configuration in the panel.
Warning: By loading default configuration all the previously programmed configuration is lost permanently.
51
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
2. Config Info (Command-Menu
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n t y p e :
F a c t o r y d e f a u l t
Press down arrow key to see more information.
Configuration type will show how the panel was configured.
“Factory default” means the panel has not been configured, it is as it came from the factory. “Front Panel” means it was configured at the panel. “Serial Port” means the configuration was done from a computer through the serial port. “Modem” means the configuration was completed remotely through a modem.
J o b N a m e :
N o j o b l o a d e d
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the job name will appear on this screen. The job name can be up to a maximum of 20 characters.
T e c h n i c i a n I D :
U n k n o w n
Press down arrow key for further info
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the technician’s name (ID) will appear on this screen. The technician ID can be up to a maximum of 10 characters.
C f g . D a t e a n d T i m e : h h : m m d a y y e a r : m m : d d
Press down arrow key for further info
Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed (if Time and Date have been set at the panel).
C o n f i g u r a t o r V e r s i o n x . x . x . x
This specifies the configuration tool version. It will display
0.0.0.0 if no PC configurator has been used.
52
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1 D a y l i g h t S a v e
2 T i m e C l o c k
3 C o m p e n s a t i o n
Command Menu/Set time Date
1. Daylight saving time
D a y l i g h t S a v i n g
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Set time and date
[X] DISABLE ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to enable daylight savings time.
H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D
0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
Default
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and
“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.
Note: time is in 24hr format
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Compensation
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
0
When value is entered the following message will appear
Compensation value can range from -15 to
+15 seconds.
Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively.
For a slow clock adjust positively. For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
P a n e l C o n f i g U p d a t e d
53
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
4. Change password (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
E n t e r n e w p a s s c o d e
[ ]
R e - e n t e r p a s s c o d e
[ ]
If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu
1 -> Default i n v a l i d p a s s c o d e
Use this function to change the pass-code. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum is 10. Only numeric digits are allowed.
If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu
P a s s c o d e u p d a t e d
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu)
The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG-
300 LCD Configuration tool display.
54
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
E V E N T
01 of 09
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M
D AT E
There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
- S e l e c t L o g -
1 A l a r m L o g
2 G e n e r a l L o g
3 A l l L o g s
Select the type of log to clear. Press the
“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.
Use this function to clear alarm logs, event logs, or both.
C l e a r a l l t h e
s e l e c t e d l o g ( s ) ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the
“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.
L o g ( s ) c l e a r e d
55
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation:
P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to activate the walk test and the “CANCEL” key to cancel the walk test. The next screen will allow zones to be selected for walk test. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the zones and use the
“LEFT” or ‘RIGHT” keys to select a zone. Press the “ENTER” key when you are done with all the selections.
- W A L K T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
The walk test is now active ( see illustration below)
- W a l k t e s t a c t i v e -
A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0
The activation of any initiating circuit that has been selected for a walk test will cause the Audible Indicating Circuits
(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, they would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second on and half a second off. After the sounding pattern has been sent on the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds. Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.
Alarm Verification and Water flow Alarm Retard Operations are disabled on circuits being walk tested. All circuits not selected for the walk test continue to function normally. If a circuit was disconnected before the walk-test mode was entered and is not selected for the walk-test, it remains disconnected while the walk test is active. Walk test operation is disabled if the Fire Alarm Control Panel is in alarm or goes into alarm while the walk test is active.
Notes:
• If a UDACT is used with the system, all walk-test events will be reported to the monitoring agency. The monitoring agency should be instructed to ignore reported events during the walk-test.
• IF THERE IS NO ACTIVITY FOR ONE HOUR, THE SYSTEM WILL RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION.
56
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
8. i
3
Loop Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The i
3
maintenance test is designed to test the devices on i
3
zone. If there is noise on the line or if the device is too far away from the panel, the devices may not respond to the panel inquiries. An i
3
maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu six minutes after power-up or after pressing the reset. If the i
3
maintenance test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:
P e r f o r m t h e i 3
L o o p t e s t ? Y
If you select “yes” by pressing “ENTER”, the display will ask you for which zone you want to perform the i
3
test. Note that only one zone at a time can be in maintenance test. Select the zone by pressing the “UP” and “DOWN” keys and then pressing the “RIGHT” key to select the device. After the device is selected press “ENTER”.
- I 3 T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
If the i
3
maintenance test is selected within six minutes after power-up or reset, the following information message is displayed.
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t r e a d y y e t
If a zone is selected that is not configured as an i
3
zone, the following message is displayed:
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t i 3 t y p e
After the zone goes into the i
3
maintenance test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in walk test.
i 3 Detector Condition
Proper operation
Out of sensitivity
Freeze condition
Green LED
Double blink every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
Red LED
OFF
Double blink every 5 sec
Double blink every10 sec
You can cancel the maintenance test either by pressing the “RESET” key or by going into the configuration section and canceling the test.
57
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.
- D i a l e r C o n f i g -
1 A c c o u n t I n f o
2 T e l e p h o n e l i n e
3 R e p o r t O p t i o n s
4 T i m e P a r a m e t e r
5 E n a b l e / D i s a b l e
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Account Info
- A c c o u n t I n f o -
1 A c c o u n t # 1 I D
2 A c c o u n t # 1 T e l
3 A c c n t # 1 F o r m a t
4 A c c o u n t # 2 I D
5 A c c o u n t # 2 T e l
6 A c c n t # 2 F o r m a t
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
1.Account# 1 Identification
A c c o u n t # 1 I D :
_
123456->Default
Use this function to set the
Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six. For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.
Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits
0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).
To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
58
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
2.Account#1 Telephone Number
A c c o u n t # 1 T e l n u m :
_ [101]->Default
Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is
19 including “,” and numerals.
The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the
INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone
# is 9,,12345678.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
3.Account#1 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 1 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
[X] CONTACT ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
4. Account# 2 Identification
A c c o u n t # 2 I D :
_
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
5.Account# 2 Telephone Number
A c c o u n t # 2 T e l n u m :
_
654321->Default
[ 101 ]->Default
Same as Account#1.
Same as Account#1.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
6.Account# 2 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 2 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
[X] Contact ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Same as Account#1.
59
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Telephone Line
- T e l e p h o n e L i n e -
1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e
2 L i n e 2 D i a l t y p e
3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e
4 L i n e 2 D i a l t o n e
5 N u m o f R e t r i e s
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
1. Line#1 Dialing Type
L i n e # 1 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
2. Line#2 Dialing Type
L i n e # 2 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone
L i n e # 1 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone
L i n e # 2 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
5.Number of retries
N u m b e r o f R e t r i e s :
0 6
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Same as Line#1.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Same as Line#1.
06 ->Default
Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.
60
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Report Options
- R e p o r t O p t i o n s -
1 A l a r m P r i o .
2 T r o u b l e P r i o .
3 S u p v . P r i o .
4 A u x D i s R e p o r t
5 F i r e P a n e l
6 O p e r a t i o n M o d e
7 C h e c k s u m B i t s
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
1.Alarm priority
A l a r m P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
2.Trouble priority
T r o u b l e P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
3.Supervisory priority
S U P V P r i o r i t y
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm
& Supv Reporting Thru dialer
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
A u x D i s A l m / S u p v R p t .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
If this function is enabled, the
Aux Disconnect feature
(obtained by pressing the Aux
Disconnect button) will block the alarm and supervisory events from being reported through the built-in dialer.
61
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
5.Fire Panel type [X] MR-2300 Panel
->Default
Do not change this function; keep it as default.
For factory use only
05
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
6.Dialer operation mode
D i a l e r O p e r . M o d e :
[ X ] ( U ) D A C T
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
7.Checksum Bits
C h e c k s u m B i t s :
[ X ] 8 B i t s
[X] (U)DACT ->Default
[ ] DACT
[X] 8 Bit ->Default
[ ] 16 Bits
Use this function to select the functionality of the dialer. In
DACT mode only common trouble/alarm/supervisory are reported while in UDACT mode all point information is reported
Do not change this function; keep it as default
For factory use only.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Time Parameters
- T i m e P a r a m e t e r -
1 A C - L o s s D e l a y
2 C e l l p h o n e D a t e
3 A u t o - T e s t T i m e
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
1.AC Loss delay
A C - L o s s D e l a y ( H r s )
0
0 ->Default
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period.
62
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
2.Cellular report date
C e l l u l a r R e p o r t D a t e
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
3.Auto test time
A u t o - T e s t T i m e
0 0 : 3 0
0 ->Default
00:30 ->Default
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the phone line is a regular line.
Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2
CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line
#2 should be disabled for cell phone application.
Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means
00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight.
Please do not use the following test times: 00:00,
01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.
63
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Dialer Enable/Disable
D i a l e r E n a / D i s
[ X ] E N A B L E
- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -
D i a l e r D i s a b l e d ! ! !
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
The dialer is enabled by default. When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.
Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Ring Detect
- R i n g D e t ec t N u m b e r -
[ X ] 5
[ ] Disabled
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[X] 5->Default
[ ] 6
[ ] 7
[ ] 8
Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer.
The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.
If you select the “Disabled” option, the modem will be disabled and the panel will not pick up the incoming call.
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)
- D i a l e r T e s t -
1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t
3 . R e s e t D i a l e r
1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t
.
Press Enter to test Line #1. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
Press Enter to test Line #2. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press Cancel to exit this menu.
64
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Dialer Test Messages
The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.
D i a l e r i d l e n o w
The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Maual Test is selected.
N o D C V o l t
No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.
W a i t i n g f o r D i a l t o n e
The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.
F a i l e d : N o D i a l t o n e
D i a l i n g R e c e i v e r N o w
N o D T M F t o n e
W a i t i n g f o r A c k t o n e
F a i l e d N o A c k t o n e
R e p o r t i n g E v e n t N o w
W a i t i n g f o r K i s s o f f
N o K i s s o f f
This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.
The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.
This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.
Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the avialablity by sending an ack tone.
This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.
When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for
Kissoff “ for all events sent.
The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.
No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.
P a s s e d : M a n u a l t e s t
The line passed the test; everything is OK.
65
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
11. Exit (Command-Menu)
Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.
CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation
If an LCD service tool is connected to the panel, you will only be able to view the latest message–you cannot scroll through them. In order to see all of the messages, you must enter the programming menu and see the event logs.
The logs are arranged so that the most recent message is shown first. Listed below are the different kinds of messages that can be displayed on the LCD service tool.
Zone messages
Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,
“SUPERVISORY” and “MONITOR”; instead there is only one queue that indicates all the events. The respective
TROUBLE, ALARM, SUPVISORY and MONITOR LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.
The LCD service tool will only show the first alarm or trouble. If a trouble happens first and then an alarm, the alarm will be displayed. Any further events will change the total number of events, shown in the right hand corner of the
LCD display. The order of priority is alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor.
Example 1 (detection circuit):
Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ”. Press the INFO key to show the process type as “ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4
T IM E D AT E
Example 2 (indicating circuit):
Event “ 02/09 ” 02 of 09, “ SHORT TRB ” on physical “ NAC-01 ” at “ EAST WING LOBBY ” with process type as
“ SILENCEABLE ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/02/02 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
66
E A S T W I N G L O B B Y
S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
02 of 09
"IN FO " Key
S I L E N C E - A B L E N A C - 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2
T IM E
D AT E
Other common messages are listed on the following pages.
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
AC Power Fail
The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
A C P o w e r F a i l
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D AT E
Battery trouble
The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
B a t t e r y T r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A TE
Ground Fault
T rouble Typ e
G r o u n d F a u l t
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
67
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Remote Annunciator
Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an un-configured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:
T roub le Type
R A U n u m m i s m a t c h t r o u b l e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
T rouble info
Trouble code
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3
T IM E
D AT E
Four-wire smoke detector supply
The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T roub le Type
4 W i r e P w r . S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
68
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Supervised Aux-supply
The supervised aux-supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux-supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T rouble Typ e
A u x . P o w e r S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR/ Relay module
The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the
MR-2300-PR
is plugged in. The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.
If any of the modules are not plugged in, the following trouble message is generated:
T rouble Typ e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
If there is an open detected on the city tie output, the following trouble message is displayed:
T rouble Typ e
C i t y T i e t r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
69
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):
DACR Receiver Model Protocols
SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)
Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6600 Receiver (ULI Approved)
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
70
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B: Reporting
Ademco Contact-ID
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS-485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF
NORMAL)
Test
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Trouble
Supervisory
Zone Supervisory restored Supervisory
Waterflow Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Waterflow restored
Indicating Zone Trouble
Indicating Zone Trouble restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Restore 3 113
New event 1 320
Restore 3 320
New event 1 140
Restore 3 140
New event 1 301
Restore 3 301
New event 1 302
Restore 3 302
New event 1 310
Restore 3 310
Qualifier Code
New event 1 351
New event 1 352
Restore
Restore
3 351
3 352
New event 1 354
Restore 3 354
New event 1 350
New event 1 602
New event 1 608
New event 1 601
New event 1 110
Restore 3 110
New event 1 300
Restore 3 300
New event 1 200
Restore 3 200
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Group # Contact #
00
00
00
00
Acct #
Acct #
00
00
000
000
000
000
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
000
000
71
Appendix B: Reporting
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS
SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family Qualifier
SIA Event
Code
Parameter
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow alarm
Waterflow alarm restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
Indicating Zone Trouble (*)
Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
Restore
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
New event
New event
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
UT
UR
AT
AR
WA
WH
QA
QH
YT
YR
YP
YQ
FT
FJ
FS
FR
RY
RX
FA
FH
RT
YK
YS
RP
LT
LT
LR
LR
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
001
002
001
002
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
72
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C: Specifications
MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LED)
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using front panel LCD display with Password Access.
Electrical Ratings
AC line voltage
120 VAC 60 Hz 3 amps\ 240 VAC 50 Hz 1.5 amps (primary)
Power Suppy Rating
6 amps maximum (secondary)
Battery
Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid
Charging capability: 10AH
Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse
Indicating circuits
4 supervised style Z (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG”.
Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit
Max power allowed = 5A
- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)
- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)
- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)
if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A
Current consumption Standby 283mA/Alarm 560mA
Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 22.3Vdc regulated / 500mA max
4-wire smoke supply (resettable)
Power limited/22.3VDC regulated / 300mA max
Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)
MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max
Current consumption standby 0mA / alarm (MR-2312-R12)
160mA / alarm (MR-2306-R6) 80mA
MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO/NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max
Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA
MR-2300-LCD Remote LCD Annunciator
Standby 16mA / alarm 40mA
MR-2306-ATW 8 Zone Remote Annunciator
Standby 35mA / alarm 90mA
Remote Trouble Indicator
Standby 35mA / alarm 35mA
Polarity reversal and city tie module
Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A max at 49C
Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
FormC / 28VDC / 1A max
Initiating circuit
12 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable
(normal or verified). Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility
ID “A”
Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 0.15Vp-p ripple
/ 40mA max (alarm short)
1 RS-485 Connection
For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”.
MR-2300-PR Polarity reversal city tie module (optional)
MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)
City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14Ohms trip coil
Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /
8.5mA max (shorted)
Polarity reversal supv terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)
Polarity reversal alarm terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)
Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use)
System Model: MR-2300 Series LED Version Fire Alarm Control Panel
System Type: Local, Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-
PR or
MR-2312-LDR, MR-2312-LDW, or MR-2308-LDW) Central Station Protected Premises (using
MR-2312-LDR, MR-2312-LDW, or MR-2308-LDW)
Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS
Type of Signalling : Non-Coded
Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-527-99
73
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations
(Selection Guide)
Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.
Refer to Appendix A for specifications.
POWER REQUIREMENTS (ALL CURRENTS ARE IN AMPERES)
Model Number Description Qty Standby Total Standby Alarm
Total
Alarm
MR-2312-LW
MR-2312-LDW
MR-2308-LW
MR-2308-LDW
MR-2300-A
MR-2300-NC4
MR-2300-NC2
Fire Alarm
Control Panel, 12 Det,
FIXED ELR/ ACTIVE ELR
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 12 Det with UDACT
FIXED ELR/ ACTIVE ELR
Fire Alarm
Control Panel, 8 Det
FIXED ELR/ ACTIVE ELR
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 8 Det with UDACT
FIXED ELR/ ACTIVE ELR
Det Class A Converter Adder
Module
Sig Class A Converter Adder
Module--4 Circuits
Sig Class A Converter Adder
Module--2 Circuits
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
X
X
0.164/
0.164/
0.136/
0.136/
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.104
0.104
0.096
0.096
= 0.164/
= 0.164/
= 0.136/
= 0.136/
= 0.000
= 0.000
= 0.000
0.104
0.104
0.096
0.096
0.424/
0.424/
0.366/
0.366/
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.364
0.364
0.326
0.326
= 0.424/
= 0.424/
0.364
0.364
= 0.366/
0.326
= 0.366/
0.326
= 0.000
= 0.000
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and City Tie
Module
1 X 0.050
= 0.050
0.300
= 0.000
= 0.300
(City Tie in Use)
MR-2312-R12/
2306-R6
MR-2312-S12
MR2300-LCD
MR-2306/2312-
ATW
MR-2605-T
12 Relay or 6 Relay Adder
Module
12 Relay Smart Relay Module
Smart Remote Annunciator
Remote Annunciators
Remote Trouble Indicator
X
X
X
X
X
0.000
0.030
0.016
0.035
0.035
= 0.000
=
=
=
=
0.160/
0.140
0.040
0.090
0.035
0.080
=
=
=
=
=
Two-Wire Smoke Detectors X Ò 0.00012
= * 0.090 = 0.090
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors X = =
=
=
Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.) X
Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.
=
ALARM
Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A )
* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.
' Use 0.084
for five minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.
Ò Using the Secutron 1400 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A for other compatible smoke detectors.
Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B )______ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )
Battery Capacity Requirement:
( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] X [(24 or 60 Hours) ___ ] ) + ( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] X [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH
Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less for MR-2300 Series. Indicating Circuits must not to exceed 5 amperes.
Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.
( B )
74
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not
75
Warranty & Warning Information be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
76
MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
77
Warranty & Warning Information
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
78
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S
LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel
I
NSTALLATION &
O
PERATION MANUAL
Document #: LT-906SEC Rev.1
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Industry Canada and FCC Notice ........................................................................................... 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2
Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3
Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3
Events ................................................................................................................................... 3
Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3
System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories........................................................ 4
Main Fire Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 4
Relay Module: 12 Relays ...................................................................................................... 5
Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 5
Polarity reversal/city tie ......................................................................................................... 5
Remote Annunciator ............................................................................................................. 6
Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 6
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits..................................................................................... 6
Output Class A converter: four circuits ................................................................................. 7
Output Class A converter: two circuits .................................................................................. 7
Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 7
MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator........................................................................................ 7
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories ........................................................................... 7
Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 8
Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 8
Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 11
DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules .......................... 13
Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................................................................................... 13
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 15
MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .................................................. 16
Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6) ........................................ 16
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module ................................................................................. 17
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 18
Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 19
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring ...................................................................................... 19
Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 23
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 24
Power supply connection ...................................................................................................... 24
Wiring Tables and Information ............................................................................................. 25
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 26
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 26
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)............................................................................................... 26
System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 27
Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 27
Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................ 27
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 27
Indicators, Controls and Operations...................................................................................... 28
Common Indicators............................................................................................................... 29
Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29
Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30
Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 31
Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 32
Fire Alarm Operation............................................................................................................. 33 i
Contents
Supported Protocols/Devices ................................................................................................ 34
Synchronous Strobes........................................................................................................... 34
System Sensor’s i3 Devices................................................................................................. 34
Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 36
Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 36
Command Menu................................................................................................................... 37
1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) ............................................................................. 38
2. Config Info (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 46
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 47
4. Set Password (Command-Menu)..................................................................................... 48
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 48
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 49
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) ........................................................................................... 50
8. i3 Loop Test (Command-Menu) ....................................................................................... 51
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 52
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)........................................................................................ 57
11. Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu) ................................................................................ 59
12. Bypass NAC Ckt (Command-Menu) .............................................................................. 59
13. Aux. Disconnect (Command-Menu) ............................................................................... 59
14. Exit (Command-Menu) ................................................................................................... 60
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 65
Appendix B: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 66
Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 66
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 67
Appendix C: Specifications.................................................................................................... 68
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 70
Warranty & Warning Information ........................................................................................... 72
Warning Please Read Carefully ........................................................................................... 72
Limited Warranty .................................................................................................................. 74
Warranty Procedure ............................................................................................................. 74
Disclaimer of Warranties ...................................................................................................... 74
Out of Warranty Repairs ...................................................................................................... 75 ii
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
List of Figures & Tables
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount .............................................................................. 8
Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring ...................... 9
Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring ............................. 10
Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2312 LCD Panels ........................................ 11
Figure 4: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2306 LCD Panels ........................................ 12
Figure 5: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2312 LCD Panels 13
Figure 6: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2300 LCD Panels 14
Figure 7: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................... 15
Figure 8: MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .................................... 16
Figure 9: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module .............................................................. 16
Figure 10: MR-2312/06-R12/6 Relay programming ............................................................... 17
Figure 11: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .................................................................... 17
Figure 12: Polarity reversal and city tie module ..................................................................... 18
Figure 13: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring ........................................................... 19
Figure 14: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring ........................................................... 20
Figure 15: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring ......................................................... 20
Figure 16: Indicating circuit – Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................... 21
Figure 17: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................... 21
Figure 18: Dialer wiring .......................................................................................................... 22
Figure 19: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection .......................................... 23
Figure 20: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ............................................ 23
Figure 21: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ..................................... 24
Figure 22: Power supply connection ...................................................................................... 25
Figure 23: LCD Display and control buttons .......................................................................... 28
Figure 24: Evacuation Codes ................................................................................................. 32
Figure 25: MR-2300 Configuration ......................................................................................... 36
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ......................................... 14
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ................................................................................... 18
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................. 25
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................... 26 iii
List of Figures & Tables iv
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Industry Canada and FCC Notice
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada
Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada
(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control
Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective Signalling Systems and Services). These
Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial / Local Electrical Code; and/or the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Industry Canada Notice
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.
Note:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard 864 (Control Units for Fire Protective
Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for
DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
FCC Notice
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of siezing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.
Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.
When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the
Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm System’s or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm System.
For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm System at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.
1
Introduction
Introduction
Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based fire panel. The MR-
2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum of four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and
Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.
Note:
Installation of the MR-2300 series fire alarm control panel should be in accordance with Canadian
Electrical Code Part 1, ULC-S524 installation of Fire Alarm System, National Electrical Code NFPA
70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Overall Features
• Basic unit has six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input
Class A converter adder module. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow
Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuits.
• Basic unit has two Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as
Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.
• Each initiating and indicating circuit can be individually disconnected via the keypad and LCD display with
Password Access.
• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, and One-Man Walk Test.
• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum.
• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnect-able and
Auxiliary Alarm Relay (disconnectable).
• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators, LCD Annunciators and Smart relay adder.
• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.
• Extensive transient protection.
• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter).
• Easy configuration of the panel using front LCD display and keypad.
• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing.
• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking.
2
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays.
Zone
Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.
Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
Events
There are events associated with every initiating, indicating and common circuit of the fire panel displayed via the
LCD.
Wiring Styles
Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an
MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).
This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC4 adder board which will convert FOUR indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z) or an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).
3
System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories
System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories
Main Fire Control Panel
-2&IRE!LARM#ONTROL0ANEL
Model
MR-2312-DDR
MR-2306-DDR
MR-2306-DR
Description
Twelve-Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with
LCD display and dialer (red door, black box).
12 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and four
Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class
A Converter adder modules may be used for
Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.
One MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A
Converter adder module may be used for
Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2312-DDR contains
Common Alarm, Common Supervisory &
Common Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on the main board. Used with BA-
110 (10 ampere-hour) (Sota Enertech model
SA12120) batteries (two are required).
Six-Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display and dialer (Red enclosure). Six Class
B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and two Power
Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits
(up to1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).
One six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder module may be used for
Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.
One MR-2300-NC2 Output Class A
Converter adder module may be used for
Class A (Style Z) wiring of the Indicating circuits. The MR-2306-DDR contains
Common Alarm, Common Supervisory &
Common Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110
(10 ampere-hour) (Sota Enertech model
SA12120) batteries (two required).
Same as the MR-2306-DDR except without dialer.
4
Relay Module: 12 Relays
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Model Description
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5
NO/NC C
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
RELAY 7
NO/NC
RELAY 8
C NO/NC C
RELAY 9
NO/NC C
RELAY 10
NO/NC C
RELAY 11
NO/NC C
RELAY 12
NO/NC C
MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay module
Relay Modules: Six Relays
Model Description
MR-2306-R6 Six-relay adder module
RELAY 1
NO/NC
RELAY 2
C NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC
RELAY 4
C NO/NC C
RELAY 5
NO/NC C
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
Polarity reversal/city tie
Model Description
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and/or City tie Module
JW4
5
System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories
Remote Annunciator
7.7"
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
TRBL CPU FAIL
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
MR-2300 SERIES Remote Annunciator
Smart Relay Module
1.25"
Model Description
7.2"
MR-2300-LCDR
Remote Annunciator Module,
LCD display, red enclosure
Model Description
MR-2312-SR12/
MR-2312-SW12
Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red or white enclosure
MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits
Model
MR-2300-A
Description
Input Class A converter
Module (six circuits). This module has built in Active
End-of-Line resistors
6
Output Class A converter: four circuits
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Model Description
MR-2300-NC4
Output Class A converter module (four circuits)
Output Class A converter: two circuits
Model
MR-2300-NC2
Description
Output Class A converter module (two circuits)
Active end-of-line
The MR-2300-X are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.
Model Description
RED
BLACK MR-2300-X Active end-of-line resistor without plate
MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator
Model Description
A.C.
ON
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
COMMON
TROUBLE
SIGNAL
SILEBCE
SWITCH
ENABLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
FIRE ALARM
ANNUNCIATOR
MR-2312-ATW/
MR-2312-ATR
16 Zone remote annunciator
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories
Model: MR-2306-ATR/MR-2306-ATW Eight Zone Remote Annunciator (ULC and ULI Approved)
Model: MR-2300T Remote Trouble Indicator (ULC and ULI Approved)
7
Mechanical Installation
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Enclosure
Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve zone models. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided. The backbox may be semi-flush mounted using the trim ring model MR-2312-FT (BLACK), see Figure 2. Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front (if supplied) and mount the backbox in between the studs. Place the trim ring around the backbox. The trim ring is glued in place to the wall surface, after the wall is finished. Replace the front door and ground strap.
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount
11"
Mounting Hole
1.5"
Mounting Hole
Mounting Hole
20.5"
5.4"
25.9"
Mounting Hole
4.5"
14.5"
8
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring
11"
1.5"
PLACE MR-2312-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX
17"
20.5"
26"
28.5"
Adhere trim ring to wall surface around
MR-2306 backbox.
5.4"
1"
1" is the minimum depth above the wall required for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
3.5"
14.5"
3.5" is the maximum depth for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
4.5
"
The figure below shoes a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.
TRIM RING
WALL
WOOD OR
METAL STUD
BACKBOX
9
Mechanical Installation
Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring
11"
1.5"
PLACE MR-2306-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX
17"
14.5"
4 Mounting
Holes for
Surface
Mounting
20.0"
22.5"
Adhere trim ring to wall surface around the MR-2306 backbox.
5.425"
1"
1" is the minimum depth above the wall required for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
3.5"
14.5"
3.5" is the maximum depth for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
4.5
"
10
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Installing the Adder Modules
MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder
Modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information section for wiring information.
Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2312 LCD Panels
MAIN FIRE PANEL BOARD
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300A
(6 circuits)
LCD DISPLAY
JW6
JW5
JW4
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENC
E
FIRE
DRILL
SILENC
E
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
TRB L CPU FAIL A.C. ON ALARM SUPV
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
AB C
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC4
(4 circuits)
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW3
JW2
JW1
Fuse and AC wiring terminal
Transformer
P
3
BATTERY
P
4
_
SEC. TX
P
1
P
2
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
Mount relay module on the left side using two screws provided .
BATTERY
Relay Module MR-2312-R12 centre under main fire alarm board using three screws provided .
BATTERY
11
Mechanical Installation
Figure 4: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2306 LCD Panels
MAIN FIRE PANEL BOARD
LCD configuration tool CFG-300 socket shown.
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW7
JW4
JW5
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
A.C. ON TRB L CPU FAIL
1
ALARM SUPV
ENTER
BUZZER
SILENCE
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
AB C
5
J K
L
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC2
(2 circuits)
Fuse and AC wiring terminal
Transformer
JW1
TO PR-300
MO DULE
JW2
TO RM-312/RM-306 RELAY
MO DULE
BATTERY
_
P5 P6
P3 P4
SEC. TX
JW3
P1 P2
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
Mount relay module on the left side using two screws provided .
BATTERY BATTERY
12
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder
Modules
Main Fire Alarm Board
Figure 5: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2312 LCD
Panels
For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL-864 or
ULC-S527 listed.
Telephone line
#1
JW7- Normally Open
Telephone line
#2
RS-485 for annunciators
Auxiliary Relay
Alarm Relay
Supervisory Relay
JW7
JW6
JW5
JW4
SYSTEM
RESET
SIG N AL
SILEN CE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILEN CE
LAMP
TEST
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
S UPV A .C. O N ALARM
1
4
G HI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
J KL
8
TUV
0
Q Z
TRBL CPU FAIL
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
W XY
#
EN TER
MEN U
CAN CEL
IN FO
Trouble Relay
Auxiliary Supply
4-wire Supply
Unfiltered 24V supply
Connect to Remote trouble indicator
JW2 - ON- when
MR-2306-R6/2312-R12 not connected
Connect to MR-2306-R6
MR-2312-R12
Relay Module
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
Connect to
MR-2300-PR
JW3
JW2
JW1
JW6 -Open all the time
JW5 -Normally Open
JW4 -Normally Open
JW3- Removed all the time
BATTERY
_
P3 P4
To Battery
SEC. TX
P1 P2
To secondary of AC transformer
13
DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Figure 6: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2300 LCD
Panels
For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL- 864 or
ULC-S527 listed.
Telephone line
#1
Telephone line
#2
JW7
Normally open
RS-485 for annunciators
Auxiliary Relay
Alarm Relay
Supervisory Relay
Trouble Relay
JW7
SYSTEM
RESET
SIG N AL
SILEN CE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILEN CE
LAMP
TEST
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
S UPV A .C. O N ALARM
1
4
G HI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
J KL
8
TUV
0
Q Z
TRBL CPU FAIL
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
W XY
#
EN TER
MEN U
CAN CEL
IN FO
JW4
JW5
JW4 - Normally Open
JW5 - Normally Open
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
JW1
JW2
TO SPR-200 MO DULE TO SRM-212/SRM-206 RELAY MO DULE
BATTERY
_
P5 P6
P3 P4
To Battery
JW3
Removed all the time
JW2 - ON- when
MR-2313-R12/
MR-2306-R6 not connected
SEC. TX
JW3
P1 P2
To secondary of AC transformer
Signal Circuit-1
Signal Circuit-2
Auxiliary
Supply
4-wire Supply
Unfiltered 24V supply
Connect to
Remote Trouble
Indicator
P5
P6
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board
JW1
Cable from P1 of the MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module connects here. Otherwise not used.
Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.
Otherwise not used.
On the Main Fire Alarm Module, this jumper must be removed if a MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City
Tie Module is installed.
JW2 Remove this jumper if a MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used .
JW3 Removed all the time.
JW4
JW5
Normally open. Place jumper here and power down (AC and Batteries) then power back to revert to default password. After reset remove the jumper. Leave normally open.
Normally open to BLOCK remote configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or using the
LCD and keys at the panel. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.
JW6 Not used, open (not available on MR-2306 LCD panels).
JW7 Not used, open.
14
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 7: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
05$
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
$OOWKHVHSLQVFRPHVZLWK
UHGDQGEODFNZLUHVZKLFK
DUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH
GHWHFWLRQFLUFXLWRQWKH
PDLQILUHDODUPERDUG5HG
LVSRVLWLYHDQGEODFNLV
QHJDWLYH
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the
Main Fire Alarm Board.
Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.
To convert all 12 initiating circuits of the Fire Alarm Panel, two of these MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter Adder
Modules are required.
Note:
This module has built in Active End-of-Line resistors and so the fire alarm system should be configured to enable Active End-of-Line. See Configuration section.
15
DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules
MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 8: MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
051&
051&
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.
The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.
Relay Adder Modules (Models MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6)
MR-2312-R12 Twelve-Relay Adder Module
The ribbon cable from P1 of the MR-2312-R12 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2312-R12 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 9: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module
Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board INDIVIDUAL
GREEN RELAY
STATUS LEDs
Three mounting holes for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 7 RELAY 8
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 9 RELAY 10
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 11 RELAY 12
NO/NC C NO/NC C
P1: Cable from MR-2312-R12 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.
16
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Programming the relays
A typical relay circuit is shown below in Figure 10 with the jumper locations and descriptions.
Note:
Relay programming should be done before installing the board
Figure 10: MR-2312/06-R12/6 Relay programming
ZONE JUMPER
installed: turns ON relay when the zone
(1) is active
removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active
Default: Jumper is installed
SUPV/ALARM SELECTION
S: Relay turns ON when common supervisory is active
A: Relay turns ON when common alarm is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only
A
Z1
S 1&2
LED (GREEN)
LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE
jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2
jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2
chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only
RELAY 1
NO NC
NC/NO CONNECTION
NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts
NO: terminal provides normally open contacts
Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)
Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection then the relay is not connected to the terminals
NO/NC C
RELAY 12
NO/NC C
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module
Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 11: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module
Connect to P6 on the main fire alarm board
INDIVIDUAL GREEN
RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.
Programming the relays
See explanation in Figure 10.
Note:
Relay programming should be done before installing the board
17
DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)
Figure 12: Polarity reversal and city tie module
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
P1 P2
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings
P1
JW1
JW2
Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit.
Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or
"open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
P2 & JW4 Not used with MR-2300 Fire Alarm Panel. Jumper JW4 remains on board.
The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the City
Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration section for more information.
The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Configuration section.
18
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Field wiring
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring
Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to
Appendix A for specifications.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring or Style D wiring for the initiating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an
Active-End-of-Line.
Note:
According to Configuration, End-of-Line Resistors on initiating circuits must be all 3.9K ohms or all
Active End-of-Line resistors.
Figure 13: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM ZONE
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION
SUPERVISORY
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE
RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT
THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL
THE INITIATING CIRCUITS.
19
Field wiring
Figure 14: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring
CONVERTER MODULE
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
-
+
-
+
4 MORE INITIATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM
ZONE
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO
SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION SUPERVISORY
Note:
When using the ICAC Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.
Indicating Circuit Wiring
The MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B (Style Y) and Class A (Style Z) wiring for its indicating circuits.
Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line resistor. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.
Note:
An Active End-of-Line resistor CANNOT be used with any indicating circuits. Always use 3.9K End of
Line resistors for indicating circuits.
Figure 15: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 2
BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
20
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 16: Indicating circuit – Class A or Style Z wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
CONVERTER MODULE STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
-
+
-
+
2 MORE INDICATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 2
BELL
STROBE
HORN
Four Wire Smoke Detector Wiring
Figure 17: Four-wire smoke detector wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LEGEND
+
-
RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
22VDC, 200mA
MAX. CURRENT - 300mA
MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV
(POWER LIMITED)
+
-
+
-
POWER
+
-
DETECTION
+
-
4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE
TO INITIATING
CIRCUIT
6
3
4
5
2
1
END OF LINE RELAY
LISTED S3403
MODEL A77-716B
MANUFACTURED BY
SYSTEM SENSOR
NOTES
ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,
OR FPLP POWER LIMITED
CABLE
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
21
Field wiring
Dialer Wiring
If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 18 below. The dialer circuitry also allows for remote configuration using a PC.
Figure 18: Dialer wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LINE-1
LINE-2
RED
GREEN
GREY
BROWN
1
RJ31X
2 3
4
8
7 6
5
TIP
RING
Public switch
Telephone company wiring
TIP
RING premise telephone
IF permitted
Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1
22
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Relay Adder Module Wiring
Wire relays on the relay adder modules MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 19 and 20.
Figure 19: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection
RM-312 12 RELAY ADDER MODULE
RELAY
CIRCUIT #1
RELAY
CIRCUIT #2
C
NO/NC
C
NO/NC
NORMALLY OPEN
CONNECTION
NORMALLY CLOSE
CONNECTION
ALL RELAY CONTACTS
28V DC, 1 AMP
RESISTIVE LOAD
RELAY
CIRCUIT #12
C
NO/NC
NORMALLY OPEN OR
NORMALLY CLOSED
CONNECTION IS
SELECTED BY JUMPER
ON RELAY BOARD.
NOTE: ALL RELAY CIRCUITS ARE POWER
LIMITED AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or
FPLP POWER LIMITED CABLE.
Figure 20: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection
RM-306 6 RELAY ADDER MODULE
RELAY
CIRCUIT #1
RELAY
CIRCUIT #2
C
NO/NC
C
NO/NC
NORMALLY OPEN
CONNECTION
NORMALLY CLOSE
CONNECTION
NORMALLY OPEN OR
NORMALLY CLOSED
CONNECTION IS
SELECTED BY JUMPER
ON RELAY BOARD.
RELAY
CIRCUIT #6
C
NO/NC
ALL RELAY CONTACTS
28V DC, 1 AMP
RESISTIVE LOAD
NOTE: ALL RELAYS ARE POWER LIMITED
CIRCUITS AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or
FPLP POWER LIMITED CABLE.
23
Field wiring
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring
Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 21 , below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.
For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective
Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.
Figure 21: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection
Power supply connection
The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:
Type
Electrical Input rating
Power supply total current
Battery fuse on Main module
Rating
120VAC, 60Hz, 3A\ 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5A main primary circuit breaker
6A maximum
10A Fuse, slow blow micro fuse
Wire as shown below in Figure 22 using the proper wire gauge. See Appendix A for power supply specifications.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
24
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 22: Power supply connection
blk
J W1 red red
Battery
P3 red
BATTE RY
_
P4 blk
_ red
_
P1 P2
SEC. TX
Battery blk
L
G
N green
Connect AC power here: green wire to G
NOTE: TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE
SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON
Wiring Tables and Information
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wire gauge
AWG
22
20
18
16
14
12
Maximum wiring run to last device
Feet Meters
2990
4760
7560
12000
19000
30400
910
1450
2300
3600
5800
9200
Notes:
• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.
• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.
• Maximum capacitance of 0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.
25
Field wiring
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring
Total signal load in amperes
0.06
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
Maximum wiring run to last device
18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
2350
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
716
360
143
71
47
36
29
24
3750
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
1143
567
229
114
76
56
46
38
6000
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
1829
915
366
183
122
91
73
61
Notes:
• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.
• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.
8500
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285
2591
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. loop resistance in ohms
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
30
15
6
3
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)
4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised, therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/
300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)
Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised, therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)
This unregulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.
26
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
System Checkout
Before turning the power “ON”
To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main
AC supply.
1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.
2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.
3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.
4. Check all jumpers and DIP switches for proper setting.
5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.
6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).
Power-up procedure
After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,
7. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.
8. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).
All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I47.
Note:
Green LED I47 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.
9. Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
(as displayed on the LCD)
Possible Cause
Circuit Trouble
Remote Fail
Ground Fault
Battery Trouble
Common Trouble
Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, the common trouble indicator will illuminate and trouble buzzer will sound. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop (as displayed on the LCD) or that the circuit has not been disconnected (or bypassed).
Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).
Remote Fail will be indicated on the main LCD display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.
This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.
Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.
If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above troubles exist, check the following for a possible fault:
Check for any missing interconnection wiring.
Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.
Check for improperly secured cabling.
27
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Refer to Figure 23 below which shows the LCD Display, the Keypad and Control Button locations.
Figure 23: LCD Display and control buttons
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
S Y S T E M N O R M A L
1 8 : 0 1 M O N 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 5
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
The Main Display Panel on the Main Fire Alarm Control Board consists of:
• 5 common LED Indicators (under the LCD display)
• 5 Common Buttons (column left of key pad)
LED Indicators may be Amber, Red, or Green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two Flash
Rates.
• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
• Trouble Flash (Trouble) - 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
28
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Common Indicators
Buzzer
The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events:
Fire Alarm: Steady
Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash
Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate
If the Buzzer is turned ON in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned OFF if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be ON.
AC ON LED
The green AC ON Indicator will illuminate steadily as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby (battery) power.
Alarm LED
The red Alarm Indicator will illuminate whenever the panel detects an alarm condition on any initiating circuit. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.
Supervisory LED
The amber Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any
Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching Supervisory
Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.
Trouble LED
The amber Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns
OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.
CPU Fail LED
The amber CPU Fail LED Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.
Common Controls
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all circuits. In particular, the system reset button does the following:
• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions
• Resets all Initiating Circuits
• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply
• Turns off all Indicating Circuits
• Turns off Signal Silence
• Turns off Fire Drill
• Stops and resets all Timers
• Processes inputs as new events
• Does not affect Aux Disconnect
29
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Signal Silence Button
Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits.
Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will resound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence
Inhibit Timer period (see Configuration section). It also does not function if the Indicating Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.
Fire Drill Button
The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected (un-bypassed) Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any
Alarms via the City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds,
OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.
Fire Drill is cancelled by pressing the button again, or if the Panel goes into a real alarm.
Lamp Test Button
Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated. The Lamp Test will also show the panel type and software version on the LCD display if the button is held for at least 3 seconds.
Buzzer Silence Button
Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
Common Relays
Common Alarm Relay
The Common Alarm Relay activates when a general alarm sequence is activated. Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. The common alarm can be disconnected by aux disconnect (use Command Menu #12, as switch) if programmed to do so (see
MR-2300 Config/Features 5 and 7).
Common Supervisory Relay
The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm or any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect (use Command Menu as switch) if programmed (see Configuration section). This Common
Supervisory Relay will function the same way as a Common Alarm relay if programmed to (see MR-2300 Config/
Feature 12).
Common Trouble Relay
The Common Trouble relay is activated when the common trouble sequence is activated as the result of the trouble condition being detected on the system. It is turned off when all troubles are cleared.
Note:
Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.
Auxiliary Alarm Relay
The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect (via Command Menu/Item 12 which acts like a switch) with or without correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see Configuration section). When configured (see Configuration section) , the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is deactivated.
30
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Circuit Types
Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types
Non-Verified Alarm
A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Verified Alarm
Verified Alarms are verified by a reset and timing procedure, and may include smoke detectors, heat detectors or pull stations. Activation of pull stations or heat detectors will result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)
Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow
Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Sprinkler Alarm (for Sprinkler Flow Sensors)
Sprinkler Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms unless Water flow retard operation is enabled. If Water
Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the
Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)
An activation on these circuits will cause the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other
Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.
Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)
An activation on these circuits will cause the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.
Monitor
This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (opencircuit).
Trouble-Only
The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device. Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.
Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types
Silenceable Signal
The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced
31
Indicators, Controls and Operations either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during alarm.
Non-Silenceable Signal
The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during alarm.
Silenceable Strobe
Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Non-Silenceable Strobes
Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Evacuation codes
Continuous On 100% of the time
Temporal Code 3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause
March Code 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off
California Code 5 seconds on, 10 seconds off
Figure 24: Evacuation Codes
32
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Fire Alarm Operation
In a basic system set up all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:
Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, and Water flow Alarm. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:
• The Buzzer sounds steadily
• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled
• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on
• The Auxiliary Common Alarm Relay activates if Aux Disconnect is not active
• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts
• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts
• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active)
• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated
• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate
Subsequent alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:
• The alert buzzer sounds steadily
• If Signals have been silenced as a result of the Signal Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto
Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted
• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously
• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate
33
Supported Protocols/Devices
Supported Protocols/Devices
Synchronous Strobes
The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2300 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and
MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models.
Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).
“Signal silence” action on strobes
The “signal silence” action on strobes depends upon the configuration. The following describes the signal silence action on non-silenceable and silenceable strobes.
Non Silenceable strobe
If the output zone is configured as Non-Silenceable Strobe and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel while the strobes are active, the horn should be silenced. If the signal is active again the panel will activate the horn again.
Silenceable strobe
If the output circuit is configured as Silenceable Strobe, and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel, both the horn and strobe are completely turned off by turning off the output circuit. Re-activating the “signal silence” will turn them on again.
Note:
Please see the strobes manufacturer’s data for details.
System Sensor’s i
3
Devices
The MR-2300 fire control panel supports System Sensor’s i
3
devices. Only the two wire smoke detectors are supported on the i
3
zone, which are 2W-B and 2WT-B. Model 2WT-B features a build in fixed temperature (135F /
57.2C) thermal detector and is capable of sensing a freeze condition i.e. if the temperature is below 41F / 5 C.
The zones should be programmed to i
3
devices to be considered as i
3
zone (see configuration section). If the zone is not programmed as i
3
zone and i
3
devices are connected to the zone, it is simply treated as a regular zone. The panel is capable of detecting multiple troubles; if different devices have different troubles on the same zone, all troubles will be reported. The following troubles are reported for the i
3
devices.
i 3 zone Troubles
The following troubles can be reported for a zone configured as i
3
zone:
• Open circuit trouble
• Communication trouble
• Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device
• Freeze trouble
34
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Open circuit trouble
If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs.
Z o n e - 1
O p e n T r b . 1 / 1
Communication Trouble
If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices. The panel shows a communication trouble in this case.
Z o n e - 1
C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1
Dirty Device trouble
If any of the devices on the i
3
zone are dirty, the panel shows a Dirty Device trouble. The device needs cleaning or be replaced with a new device.
Z o n e - 1
D i r t y D e v . T r b 1 / 1
Out of sensitivity trouble
If any of the devices on the i
3
zone is out of sensitivity and cannot detect an alarm condition, the panel shows out of sensitivity trouble. In this condition the device is not usable and should be replaced.
Z o n e - 1
O u t o f S e n s T r b 1 / 1
Freeze trouble
If the device has detected a freeze condition, (e.g. the temperature is below 41F / 5 C) then the panel will show a freeze trouble. Only model 2WT-B is capable of thermal detection; model 2W-B does not indicate any freeze trouble.
Z o n e - 1
F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1
The LEDs on the i
3
smoke detectors provide a local visual indication of the detector status.
i 3 Detector Condition Green LED Red LED
Power-up
Normal (Standby)
Out of sensitivity (defective or dirty)
Freeze trouble
Alarm
Blinks every 10 sec
Blinks every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
OFF
Blinks every 10 sec
OFF
Blinks every 5 sec
Blinks every 10 sec
Solid
35
Configuration
Configuration
There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panels:
Direct configuration using the main LCD display and the menu buttons.
Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.
Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).
The following information for configuring an MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using the front panel main LCD display for configuration.
To access configuration mode press the Menu button on the front panel display . The LCD will display the Main
Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 25, below.
Figure 25: MR-2300 Configuration
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
S Y S T E M N O R M A L
1 8 : 0 1 M O N 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 5
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
Entering the Passcode
The programming section is passcode protected. The following image shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The minimum number of digits allowed is four and the maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long; numerical values only. Press the “ENTER” key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter the passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is “1111” (without quotes).
E n t e r p a s s c o d e
_
36
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu
The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show
“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the “ENTER” key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the “CANCEL” or “ENTER” key.
Note:
Command Menu features 1 and 9 can only be accessed if jumper JW5 is placed on the main board, see Table 1.
&RPPDQG0HQX
05&RQILJ
&RQILJ,QIR
6HW7LPH
6HW3DVVZRUG
9LHZ(YHQW/RJ
&OHDU(YHQW/RJ
:DON7HVW
,/RRSWHVW
'LDOHU&RQILJ
7HVW'LDOHU
%\SDVV'HW&NW
%\SDVV1$&&NW
$X['LVF
([LW
Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show information about the system and the software version as shown below. It will also illuminate all the LEDs across the top of the display except for the CPU Fail LED.
MR-2312-DDR wUDACT
Version 0.0.4
The first line shows the model number and panel type and the second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as Major.Minor.Revision.
37
Configuration
1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu)
The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu.
MR-2300
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features
- F e a t u r e C o n f i g -
1 M a n . S i g . S i l .
2 F i r e D r i l l
3 O p t . C k t . C o r r
4 W t r / S p r k . R e t d
5 A u x D i s C o r r
6 S i g - S i l I n h T m r
7 A u x D i s A l m & S v
8 A u t o S i l . T m r
9 R e m . A n n u n .
1 0 A l m . X m i t - S i l .
1 1 P w r F a i l T m r .
1 2 C o m . S u p v . R l y
1 3 S i g - S i l . I s o l .
1 4 S t r o b e T y p e
1 5 E v a c . C o d e
1 6 A c t i v e E O L
38
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300
1. Press MENU to enter the command menu.
2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER . The corresponding submenu will display.
3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.
4. Press ENTER to select a submenu option.
5. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different options.
6. Once you have made the correct selection, press ENTER to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.
7. Press CANCEL to return to the previous menu.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
1. Manual Signal Silence
[X] ENABLE->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the SIGNAL SILENCE operation from the front panel.
M a n u a l S i g . S i l e n c e
[ X ] E N A B L E
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the FIRE DRILL operation.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
2.Fire Drill
F i r e D r i l l
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
3.Output Circuit Correlation
O p t . C k t . C o r r .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE ->Def
[ ] ENABLE
If disabled, whatever correlation is set in the correlation section is effective. If enabled, all the output circuits are correlated to all the input circuits.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
4.Waterflow/Sprinkler Retard
Operation
W a t e r f l o w / S p r k . R e t d
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE ->Def
[ ] ENABLE
If disabled, all the initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler.
(See Water flow Alarm and
Sprinkler Alarm description)
39
Configuration
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
5.Aux. disconnect, disconnects
Aux Alarm relay and all correlated relays
A u x D i s C o r r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
6.Signal-Silence Inhibit timer
S i g - S i l . I n h i b i t T m r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
In the default mode this function will disconnect the Auxiliary
Alarm Relay when selected by
Command Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch.
If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm relay and all correlated relays when selected by Command
Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch.
Correlated relays include:
MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 relays,
MR-2312-S12 relays.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 10 SEC
[ ] 20 SEC
[ ] 30 SEC
[ ] 1 MIN
Use this function to inhibit the
“SIGNAL SILENCE” switch for a desired length of time. This time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
7. Aux. disconnect, disconnects common alarm relay and common supervisory relay
A u x D i s , D i s A l m & S p v
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
8.Auto Signal Silence Timer
A u t o S i g - S i l . T i m e r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
9. Number of Remote
Annunciators or smart relays
N o . o f R e m o t e A n n u n .
[ X ] N O N E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 15 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[ ] 5
[ ] 6
If enabled, this function will disconnect (when selected by
Command Menu, Item 12 which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch) the Common Alarm relay, the Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.
If disabled, selecting Aux disconnect via the Command
Menu, Item 12 (which acts like an Aux. disconnect switch) will have no effect on the Common
Alarm relay, the Common
Supervisory relay and the MR-
2300-PR.
Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.
Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.
Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.
40
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
10.Silence Alarm transmit
A l m . X m i t - S i l .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
11.AC power fail delay timer
A C P w r F a i l D l y T m r .
[ X ] N O N E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
12.Common Supervisory Relay
C o m m o n S u p v . R e l a y
[ X ] E N A B L E
[X] DISABLE ->Def
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL
SILENCE” rather than the
“RESET” switch.
[X] NONE ->Default
[ ] 8 HRS
[ ] 18 HRS
Use this function to delay the
AC power fail trouble for the programmed time period. If disabled, the AC power fail is reported right away.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
13.Signal Isolators
S i g - S i l . I s o l a t o r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
14.Strobe Type
S t r o b e T y p e
[ X ] N O R M A L
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
15.Evacuation Code
E v a c u a t i o n C o d e
[ X ] T E M P O R A L
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Features/
16. Active EOL
A c t i v e E O L
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Def
Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only)
[X] NORMAL ->Default
[ ] SECUTRON
[ ] FARADY
[ ] WHEELOCK
[ ] GENTEX
[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR
Use this function to select the manufacturer of the strobes used in the system. The selection is system-wide and applies to all indicating circuits configured as strobes. For
“NORMAL” strobes there is no synchronization, while other strobes are synchronized and use manufacturer’s protocol to synchronize the strobes.
[X] TEMPORAL->Def
[ ] CONTINOUS
[ ] MARCH TIME
[ ] CALIFORNIA
Use this function to set the rate at which the indicating circuits will sound.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Enable this function if using an
Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A
Converter has built in Active
EOL resistors.
41
Configuration
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone
I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e
1 Z o n e - 1
2 Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
1 2 Z o n e 1 2
This menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. The maximum number of initiating circuits supported is 12, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone
1. Type (Initiating circuit)
12.
Z o n e - 1 T y p e
[ X ] A L A R M
[X] ALARM ->Default
[ ] VERIF ALARM
[ ] SPRKL ALM
[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM
[ ] NON-LATCH SUP
[ ] LATCH SUPV
[ ] GEN ALARM
[ ] MONITOR
[ ] TRB ONLY
Use this function to program the process type of each input zone. ( See CIRCUIT TYPE section for details.)
Z o n e - 1 2 T y p e
[ X ] A L A R M
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config i 3 Zone
I 3 D e t e c t i o n Z o n e s
[ ] Z o n e - 1
[ ] Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
[ ] Z o n e - 1 2
[ ] Zone-1->Default
.
.
.
[ ] Zone-12->Default
Use this function if i
3
devices are present on a zone. ( See i
3 devices section for details).
42
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone
I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e
1 N A C - 1
2 N A C - 2
3 N A C - 3
4 N A C - 4
This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits. The maximum number of indicating circuits is four, but only those supported by the particular model will be shown.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Opt.
Zone
1. Type (Indicating Circuits)
N A C - 1 T y p e
[ X ] S I L - A B L E
[X] SIL-ABLE->Default
[ ] NON SIL-ABLE
[ ] SIL-ABLE STR
[ ] NON-SIL STR
Use this function to program the process type of each indicating circuit. See CIRCUIT
TYPE section for details.
4.
N A C - 4 T y p e
[ X ] S I L - A B L E
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Correlation
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/
Correlation
1.Correlation
Z o n e - 1 C o r r .
[ X ] N A C - 1
[X] NAC-1 ->Default
[X] NAC-2 ->Default
[X] NAC-3 ->Default
[X] NAC-4 ->Default
Use this function to correlate initiating circuits to the indicating circuits. By default all the initiating circuits are correlated to all the indicating circuits.
12.
Z o n e - 1 2 C o r r .
[ X ] N A C - 1
43
Configuration
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone Label
I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e
1 Z o n e - 1
2 Z o n e - 2
- -
- -
1 2 Z o n e 1 2
Use the keypad described below for entering a message.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Ipt. Zone
Label
1.Initiating zone label
[Zone-1 ]->Default
[Zone-12 ]->Default
Z o n e - 1 L a b e l
Z o n e - 1
12.
Z o n e - 1 2 L a b e l
Z o n e - 1 2
KEYPAD TRANSLATION AS MARKED ON THE KEYS
Sequence refers to the number of times the key must be pressed to achieve the number or letter
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Key #1 1
Key #2 2 A B C Key #3 3 D E F
Key #4 4 G H I Key #5 5 J K L
Key #6 6 M N O Key #7 7 P R S
Key #8 8 T U V Key #9 9 W X Y
Key #0 0 Q Z Key * Backspace
Key # Forward
Press the ENTER key to input the message.
44
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone Label
I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e
1 N A C - 1
2 N A C - 2
3 N A C - 3
4 N A C - 4
Use the keys in described below for entering a message. These letter keys are alternate functions of the numbered keys are physically located in the same position as described below.
Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Opt.
Zone Label
1.Indicating zone label
4.
N A C - 1 L a b e l
N A C - 1
N A C - 4 L a b e l
N A C - 4
[NAC-1 ]->Default
[NAC-4 ]->Default
KEYPAD TRANSLATION AS MARKED ON THE KEYS
Sequence refers to the number of times the key must be pressed to achieve the number or letter
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Key #1 1
Key #2 2 A B C Key #3 3 D E F
Key #4 4 G H I Key #5 5 J K L
Key #6 6 M N O Key #7 7 P R S
Key #8 8 T U V Key #9 9 W X Y
Key #0 0 Q Z Key * Backspace
Key # Forward
Press the ENTER key to input the message.
Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config
Default Configuration
L o a d t h e d e f a u l t s e t t i n g s ? Y
Use this function to load the default configuration in the panel.
Press “UP” and “DOWN” to select between Y/N. if “ENTER” is pressed the default configuration is restored.
Warning: By loading default configuration all the previously programmed configuration is lost permanently.
D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s h a v e b e e n l o a d e d
45
Configuration
2. Config Info (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n t y p e :
F a c t o r y d e f a u l t
Press down arrow key to see more information.
J o b N a m e :
N o j o b l o a d e d
Configuration type will show how the panel was configured.
“Factory default” means the panel has not been configured, it is as it came from the factory. “Front Panel” means it was configured at the panel. “Serial Port” means the configuration was done from a computer through the serial port. “Modem” means the configuration was completed remotely through a modem.
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the job name will appear on this screen. The job name can be up to a maximum of 20 characters.
T e c h n i c i a n I D :
U n k n o w n
Press down arrow key for further info
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the technician’s name (ID) will appear on this screen. The technician ID can be up to a maximum of 10 characters.
C f g . D a t e a n d T i m e : h h : m m d a y y e a r : m m : d d
Press down arrow key for further info
Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed.
C f g . T o o l S / W V e r s . :
V e r s i o n : x . x . x . x
This specifies the configuration tool version. It will display
0.0.0.0 if no PC configurator has been used.
46
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1 D a y l i g h t S a v e
2 T i m e C l o c k
3 C o m p e n s a t i o n
Command Menu/Set Time
1. Daylight saving time
D a y l i g h t S a v i n g
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Set time and date
[X] DISABLE ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to enable daylight savings time.
H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D
0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
Default
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and
“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.
Note: time is in 24hr format
Command Menu/Time Clock
3. Compensation
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
0
Once the compensation value is entered the display will be:
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
P a n e l C o n f i g U p d a t e d
Compensation value can range from -15 to
+15 seconds.
Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively. For a slow clock adjust positively.
For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.
47
Configuration
4. Set Password (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
E n t e r n e w p a s s c o d e
[ ]
R e - e n t e r p a s s c o d e
[ ]
If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu
1111 -> Default i n v a l i d p a s s c o d e
Use this function to change the passcode. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum number is 10.
ONLY numeric digits are allowed.
If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu
P a s s c o d e u p d a t e d
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu)
The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
E V E N T
01 of 09
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M
D AT E
There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.
48
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
- S e l e c t L o g -
1 A l a r m L o g
2 G e n e r a l L o g
3 A l l L o g s
Select the type of log to clear. Press the
“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.
Use this function to clear alarm logs, general logs, or both.
C l e a r a l l t h e
s e l e c t e d l o g ( s ) ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the
“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.
L o g ( s ) c l e a r e d
49
Configuration
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation:
P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to activate the walk test and the “CANCEL” key to cancel the walk test. The next screen will allow zones to be selected for walk test. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the zones and use the
“LEFT” or ‘RIGHT” keys to select a zone. Press the “ENTER” key when you are done with all the selections.
- W A L K T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
The walk test is now active ( see illustration below)
- W a l k t e s t a c t i v e -
A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0
The activation of any initiating circuit that has been selected for a walk test will cause the Audible Indicating Circuits
(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, the indicating circuits would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second ON and half a second OFF. After the sounding pattern has been sent to the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds.
Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.
Alarm Verification and Water flow Alarm Retard Operations are disabled on circuits being walk tested. All circuits not selected for the walk test continue to function normally. If a circuit was disconnected before the walk-test mode was entered and is not selected for the walk-test, it remains disconnected while the walk test is active. Walk test operation is disabled if the Fire Alarm Control Panel is in alarm or goes into alarm while the walk test is active.
Notes:
• If a UDACT is used with the system, all walk-test events will be reported to the monitoring agency. The monitoring agency should be instructed to ignore reported events during the walk-test.
• IF THERE IS NO ACTIVITY FOR ONE HOUR, THE SYSTEM WILL RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION.
50
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
8. i
3
Loop Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The i
3
maintenance test is designed to test the devices on the i
3
zone. If there is noise on the line or if the device is too far away from the panel, the devices may not respond to the panel inquiries. An i
3
maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu. If the fire alarm has just been powered up or reset, wait six minutes before selecting the i
3
loop test. If the i
3
loop test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:
P e r f o r m t h e i 3
L o o p t e s t ? Y
If you select “yes” by pressing “ENTER”, the display will ask you for which zone you want to perform the i
3
test. Note that only one zone at a time can be in maintenance test. Select the zone by pressing the “UP” and “DOWN” keys and then pressing the “RIGHT” key to select the device. After the device is selected press “ENTER”.
- I 3 T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
If the i
3
maintenance test is selected within six minutes after power-up or reset, the following information message is displayed.
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t r e a d y y e t
If a zone is selected that is not configured as an i
3
zone, the following message is displayed:
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t i 3 t y p e
Once the zone goes into the i
3
loop test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in loop test.
Note:
Out of sensitivity can mean the device is dirty.
i 3 Detector Condition
Proper operation
Out of sensitivity
Freeze condition
Green LED
Double blink every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
Red LED
OFF
Double blink every 5 sec
Double blink every10 sec
You can cancel the maintenance test either by pressing the “RESET” key or by going into the configuration section and canceling the test.
51
Configuration
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.
- D i a l e r C o n f i g -
1 A c c o u n t I n f o
2 T e l e p h o n e l i n e
3 R e p o r t O p t i o n s
4 T i m e P a r a m e t e r
5 E n a b l e / D i s a b l e
6 R i n g D e t e c t
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Account Info
- A c c o u n t I n f o -
1 A c c o u n t # 1 I D
2 A c c o u n t # 1 T e l
3 A c c n t # 1 F o r m a t
4 A c c o u n t # 2 I D
5 A c c o u n t # 2 T e l
6 A c c n t # 2 F o r m a t
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
1.Account# 1 Identification
A c c o u n t # 1 I D :
_
123456->Default
Use this function to set the Account
ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six.
For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.
Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the
SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).
To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly.
Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
52
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
2.Account#1 Telephone Number
A c c o u n t # 1 T e l n u m :
_
[ 101 ]->Default
Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is 19 including “,” and numerals. The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the INFO button.
Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
An example of a typical telephone # is 9,,12345678.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
3.Account#1 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 1 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
4. Account# 2 Identification
A c c o u n t # 2 I D :
_
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
5.Account# 2 Telephone Number
A c c o u n t # 2 T e l n u m :
_
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account
Info
6.Account# 2 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 2 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
[X] CONTACT ID-Def
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
654321->Default
[ 101 ]->Default
[X] Contact ID-Def
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.
Same as Account#1.
Same as Account#1.
Same as Account#1.
53
Configuration
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Telephone Line
- T e l e p h o n e L i n e -
1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e
2 L i n e 2 D i a l t y p e
3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e
4 L i n e 2 D i a l t o n e
5 N u m o f R e t r i e s
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
1. Line#1 Dialing Type
[X] DTMF Dial->Def
[ ] Pulse Dial
L i n e # 1 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
2. Line#2 Dialing Type
[X] DTMF Dial->Def
[ ] Pulse Dial
L i n e # 2 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
L i n e # 1 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
L i n e # 2 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
5.Number of retries
06 ->Default
N u m b e r o f R e t r i e s :
0 6
Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.
Same as Line#1.
Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.
Same as Line#1.
Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.
54
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Report Options
- Report Options -
1 Alarm Prio.
2 Trouble Prio.
3 Supv. Priority
4 Aux Dis Report
5 Fire Panel
6 Operation Mode
7 Checksum Bits
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
1.Alarm priority
A l a r m P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
[X] Account 1->Def
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
2.Trouble priority
T r o u b l e P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
[X] Account 1->Def
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
3.Supervisory priority
S U P V P r i o r i t y
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
[X] Account 1->Def
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm &
Supv Reporting Thru dialer
A u x D i s A l m & S u p v R p t .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
If this function is enabled, the
AUX DISCONNECT feature
(Command Menu, Item 12 as a switch) will block the alarm and supervisory events from the being reported through the built-in dialer.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
5.Fire Panel type
[X] MR-2300 Panel->Def
Do not change this function; keep it as default.
For factory use only.
05
55
Configuration
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
6.Dialer operation mode
D i a l e r O p e r . M o d e :
[ X ] ( U ) D A C T
[X] (U)DACT ->Default
[ ] DACT
Use this function to select the functionality of the dialer. In
DACT mode only common trouble/alarm/supervisory are reported while in UDACT mode all point information is reported
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options
7.Checksum Bits
C h e c k s u m B i t s :
[ X ] 8 B i t s
[X] 8 Bit ->Default
[ ] 16 Bits
Do not change this function; keep it as default
For factory use only.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Time Parameters
- T i m e P a r a m e t e r -
1 A C - L o s s D e l a y
2 C e l l p h o n e D a t e
3 A u t o - T e s t T i m e
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time Parameter
1.AC Loss delay
0 ->Default
A C - L o s s D e l a y ( H r s )
0
0 to 20 hours
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time Parameter
2.Cellular report date
C e l l u l a r R e p o r t D a t e
0
0 ->Default
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time Parameter
3.Auto test time
A u t o - T e s t T i m e
0 0 : 3 0
00:30 ->Default
Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, there will be no test reporting for cell phone or regular telephone line. Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2 CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line
#2 should be disabled for cell phone application.
Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means
00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight.
Please avoid the following Test
Times: 00:00, 01:55, 02:00 and
03:00
56
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Dialer Enable/Disable
D i a l e r E n a / D i s
[ X ] E N A B L E
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
The dialer is enabled by default.
When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.
Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.
- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -
D i a l e r D i s a b l e d ! ! !
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Ring Detect
- R i n g D e t ec t N u m b e r -
[ X ] 5
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)
- D i a l e r T e s t -
1 . L # 1 M a n u al t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u al t e s t
3 . R e s e t Di a l e r
[ ] Disabled
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[X] 5->Default
[ ] 6
[ ] 7
[ ] 8
Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer. The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.
If you select the “Disabled” option, the modem will be disabled and the panel will not pick up the incoming call.
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t
.
Press Enter to test Line #1. Press Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer Test Messages on the following page.
Press Enter to test Line #2. Press Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer Test Messages on the following page.
This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press
Cancel to exit this menu.
57
Configuration
Dialer Test Messages
The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.
D i a l e r i d l e n o w
The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Maual Test is selected.
N o D C V o l t
No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.
W a i t i n g f o r D i a l t o n e
The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.
F a i l e d : N o D i a l t o n e
D i a l i n g R e c e i v e r N o w
N o D T M F t o n e
W a i t i n g f o r A c k t o n e
F a i l e d N o A c k t o n e
R e p o r t i n g E v e n t N o w
W a i t i n g f o r K i s s o f f
N o K i s s o f f
This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.
The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.
This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.
Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the avialablity by sending an ack tone.
This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.
When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for
Kissoff “ for all events sent.
The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.
No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.
P a s s e d : M a n u a l t e s t
The line passed the test; everything is OK.
58
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
11. Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
B y p a s s D e t Z o n e
1 . Z o n e - 1
[ ] B y p a s s e d
[ ] U n - B y p a s s e d
Initiating zones may be bypassed individually. This bypass command will allow you to scroll through all initiating zones 1 to a maximum of 12 depending on the size of the panel.
Press Enter to bypass the zone or scroll up or down to un-bypassed (normal connected circuit).
Press Enter to un-bypass the zone or scroll up or down to bypass (off normal unconnected circuit).
12. Bypass NAC Ckt (Command-Menu)
1 . Z o n e - 1
[ ] B y p a s s e d
[ ] U n - B y p a s s e d
Indicating zones may be bypassed individually. This bypass command will allow you to scroll through all indicating zones 1 to a maximum of 4 depending on the size of the panel.
Press Enter to bypass the zone or scroll up or down to un-bypassed (normal connected circuit).
Press Enter to un-bypass the zone or scroll up or down to bypass (off normal unconnected circuit).
13. Aux. Disconnect (Command-Menu)
D i s c o n n e c t A u x
R e l a y ? [ Y ]
Use the up or down keys to change from
YES to NO. This selection work like a switch. If Yes this command disconnects the auxiliary alarm relay and associated relays as long as the Aux disc feature has be enabled.
59
Configuration
14. Exit (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Pressing “ENTER” after selecting “Exit” from the main menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.
Zone messages
Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD display. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,
“SUPERVISORY” and “MONITOR”; instead there is only one queue that indicates all the events. The respective
TROUBLE, ALARM and SUPVISORY LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.
Scroll through the events by using the “UP” and “DOWN” keys. If you need more information about the displayed event, press the “INFO” key.
Example 1 (detection circuit):
Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ” with process type as
“ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4
T IM E D AT E
Example 2 (indicating circuit):
Event “ 02/09 ” 02 of 09, “ SHORT TRB ” on physical “ NAC-01 ” at “ EAST WING LOBBY ” with process type as
“ SILENCEABLE ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/02/02 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
60
E A S T W I N G L O B B Y
S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
02 of 09
"IN FO " Key
S I L E N C E - A B L E N A C - 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2
T IM E
D AT E
Note:
The queue hierarchy is Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor ie, alarm has the highest priority and will always be shown at the beginning of the queue, followed by supervisory alarms, troubles and monitor zone troubles.
Other common messages are listed on the following pages.
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
AC Power Fail
The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
A C P o w e r F a i l
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
"IN FO " Key
T rouble code T rouble Info
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D AT E
Battery trouble
The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified UL value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
B a t t e r y T r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A TE
Ground Fault
T rouble Typ e
G r o u n d F a u l t
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
61
Configuration
Remote Annunciator
Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an unconfigured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:
T roub le Type
R A U n u m m i s m a t c h t r o u b l e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
T rouble info
Trouble code
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3
T IM E
D AT E
Four-wire smoke detector supply
The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on the four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore power to the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T roub le Type
4 W i r e P w r . S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
62
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Supervised auxiliary supply
The supervised auxiliary supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore power to the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
T rouble Typ e
A u x . P o w e r S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR Relay module
The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the MR-2300-PR is plugged in.
The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.
If any of the modules are not plugged in, the following trouble message is generated:
T rouble Typ e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
63
Configuration
If there is an open detected on the city tie output, the following trouble message is displayed:
T roub le Type
C i t y T i e t r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
64
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):
DACR Receiver Model Protocols
SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)
Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6600 Receiver (ULI Approved)
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
65
Appendix B: Reporting
Appendix B: Reporting
Ademco Contact-ID
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS-485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF
NORMAL)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Alarm
Waterflow restored
Indicating Zone Trouble
Indicating Zone Trouble restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Trouble
Trouble
Ground Fault restored Trouble
NNN -Refers to Sensor number for zone causing event.
66
Qualifier Code
New event 1 351
New event 1 352
Restore
Restore
3 351
3 352
New event 1 354
Restore 3 354
New event 1 350
New event 1 602
New event 1 608
New event 1 601
New event 1 110
Restore 3 110
New event 1 300
Restore 3 300
New event 1 200
Restore 3 200
New event 1 113
Restore 3 113
New event 1 320
Restore 3 320
New event 1 140
Restore 3 140
New event 1 301
Restore 3 301
New event 1 302
Restore 3 302
New event 1 310
Restore 3 310
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Group # Contact #
00
00
00
00
Acct #
Acct #
00
00
000
000
000
000
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS
SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family Qualifier
SIA Event
Code
Parameter
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow alarm
Waterflow alarm restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
Indicating Zone Trouble (*)
Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
Restore
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
New event
New event
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
UT
UR
AT
AR
WA
WH
QA
QH
YT
YR
YP
YQ
FT
FJ
FS
FR
RY
RX
FA
FH
RT
YK
YS
RP
LT
LT
LR
LR
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
001
002
001
002
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
67
Appendix C: Specifications
Appendix C: Specifications
MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LCD)
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using front panel LCD display with Password Access.
Electrical Ratings
AC line voltage
120 VAC 60 Hz 3 amps\ 240 VAC 50 Hz 1.5A (primary)
Power Supply Rating
6 amps maximum (secondary)
Battery
Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid
Charging capability : 10AH
Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse
Indicating circuit
4 supervised style Z (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as normal or visual. Terminals are labeled “SIG”.
Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit
Max power allowed = 5A
- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)
- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)
- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)
if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A
Current consumption Standby 283mA/Alarm 560mA
Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 22.3VDC regulated / 500mA max
4-wire smoke supply (resettable)
Power limited/22.3Vdcregulated / 300mA max
Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)
Power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 1.7A max at 49C
Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
FormC / 28VDC / 1A max
Initiating circuit
12 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable
(normal or verified). Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility
ID “A”
Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 0.15Vp-p ripple
/ 40mA max (alarm short)
1 RS-485 Connection
For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”.
MR-2300-PR Polarity reversal city tie module (optional)
MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)
MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max
Current consumption standby 0mA / alarm (MR-2312-R12)
160mA / alarm (MR-2306-R6) 80mA
MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC4 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO/NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max
Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA
MR-2300 Remote LCD Annunciator
Standby 16mA / alarm 40mA
MR-2306-ATW 8 Zone Remote Annunciator
Standby 35mA / alarm 90mA
Remote Trouble Indicator
Standby 35mA / alarm 35mA
Polarity reversal and city tie module
City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14Ohms trip coil
Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /
8.5mA max (shorted)
Polarity reversal supv terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)
Polarity reversal alarm terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)
Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use)
68
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
System Model: MR-2300 Series LCD Version Fire Alarm Control Panel
System Type: Local, Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premise Station (using MR-2300-
PR or
MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR) Central Station Protected Premises (using MR-2312-DDR or
MR-2306-DDR)
Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS
Type of Signalling: Non-Coded
Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9
69
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations
(Selection Guide)
Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.
Refer to Appendix A for specifications.
Model Number
MR-2312-DDR
MR-2312-DDR
MR-2306-DDR
MR-2306-DDR
MR-2306-DR
MR-2306-DR
MR-2300-A
MR-2300-NC4
MR-2300-NC2
MR-2300-PR
MR-2312-R12
Power Requirements (All Currents are in Amperes)
Description Qty Standby
Total
Standby
Fire Alarm Control Panel,
12 Inp, 4Out with UDACT
Using 3K9 resistors
Fire Alarm Control Panel,
12 Inp, 4Out with UDACT
Using active resistors
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 6
Inp, 2 Out with UDACT
Using 3K9 resistors
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 6
Inp, 2 Out with UDACT
Using active resistors
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 6
Inp,2 Out without UDACT
Using 3K9 resistors
Fire Alarm Control Panel, 6
Inp, 2 Out with UDACT
Using active resistors
Det Class A Converter
Adder Module
Sig Class A Converter
Adder Module--4 Circuits
Sig Class A Converter
Adder Module--2 Circuits
Polarity Reversal and City
Tie Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0.174
0.104
0.142
0.112
0.142
0.112
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.050
= 0.444
= 0.394
= 0.312
= 0.282
= 0.312
= 0.282
-0.000
-0.000
-0.000
=
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.300
Alarm
(City Tie in Use)
12 Relay Adder Module X 0.000
= 0.160
=
=
=
=
=
=
Total
Alarm
-0.000
-0.000
-0.000
=
=
MR-2306-R6
MR-2312-S12
MR-2300-LCD
MR-2306/2312-
ATW
MR-2300T
6 Relay Adder Module
Smart Relay Module
Smart Remote Annunciator
Remote Annunciator
Remote Trouble Indicator
Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
X
X
X
X
X
X
0.000
0.030
0.016
0.035
0.035
Ò 0.00012
=
=
=
=
=
=
0.080
0.140
0.040
0.090/0.140
0.035
* 0.090
=
=
=
=
=
= 0.090
= Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.)
X
X
=
=
Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.
= =
( B ) Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A ) ALARM
* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.
' Use 0.084
for five minutes of alarm or 0.5
for thirty minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.
Ò Using the Secutron 1400 2-wire smoke detector.
Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B ) _____ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )
Battery Capacity Requirement:
( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] X [(24 or 60 Hours) ___ ] ) + ( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] X [ ' Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH
Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less for MR-2300 Series. Indicating Circuits must not exceed 5 amperes.
70
Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
71
Warranty & Warning Information
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side
72
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
73
Warranty & Warning Information
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
74
MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
75
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S
Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel
I
NSTALLATION &
G
UIDE
Revision 2
Document #: LT-951SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Industry Canada and FCC Notice .......................................................................................... 1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2
Panel Type............................................................................................................................ 2
Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3
Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3
Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3
Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3
System Components ............................................................................................................... 4
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel.................................................. 4
Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 4
Polarity Reversal/City Tie...................................................................................................... 4
Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 5
Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits.................................................................................... 5
Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits ............................................................................... 5
MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator .................................................................................... 5
Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 6
Additional System Accessories............................................................................................. 6
Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 7
Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 7
Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 9
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules ............................... 10
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board ................................................. 10
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 11
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ..................................................... 12
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 13
Field Wiring............................................................................................................................... 14
Main Board Field Wiring........................................................................................................ 14
Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring............................................................................. 16
Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 18
Dialer Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19
Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 20
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 21
Power Supply Connection..................................................................................................... 22
Wiring Tables and Information ............................................................................................. 23
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 23
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 23
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)............................................................................................... 24
System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 25
Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 25
Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................. 25
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 25
Indicators, Controls and Operations...................................................................................... 26
Common LED indicators ....................................................................................................... 26
Menu Buttons........................................................................................................................ 28
Switches and Common Indicators ........................................................................................ 28
Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons.......................................................................................... 29
Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30
Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 30
Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 31 i
Contents
Configuration........................................................................................................................... 32
Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................................................................................................... 32
Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 33
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320............................................................... 34
Command Menu................................................................................................................... 34
1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 35
2. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 41
3. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................... 42
4. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 43
5. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 43
6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 44
7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 49
8. Exit (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................................... 51
Operating the Panel ................................................................................................................ 52
Panel Operation During Various Hazard States................................................................... 52
General Panel Operation ..................................................................................................... 53
Pre-Programmed Modes......................................................................................................... 54
Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ........................ 54
Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ................. 56
Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release .................................... 58
Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ............................. 60
Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release................... 62
Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............ 63
Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release............................... 64
Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ........................ 66
Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort...................................... 68
Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............... 70
Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ...................... 72
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 74
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices .......................................................................... 75
Appendix C: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 77
Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 77
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 78
Appendix D: Specifications.................................................................................................... 79
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 80
Warranty................................................................................................................................... 81 ii
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
List of Tables & Figures
Tables
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .....................................11
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................................................................................13
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................23
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..........................................................................................23
Figures
Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........................................7
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................................................................................9
Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings .................................10
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................11
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................12
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .....................................................................12
Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module ....................................................................13
Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring ........................................................14
Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring .........................................................15
Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring ..........................16
Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring ............................17
Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .....................................................18
Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................18
Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring ......................................................................................19
Figure 15: Dialer Wiring ..........................................................................................................19
Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................20
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................20
Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...............................21
Figure 19: Power Supply Connection ...................................................................................22
Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons ....................................................................26
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ................................................................................31
Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration .........................................................................................32
iii
List of Tables & Figures iv
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Industry Canada and FCC Notice
Notice for all MR-2320 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada
Secutron's MR-2320 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada
(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed MR-2320 series Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under
Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective
Signalling Systems and Services). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial /
Local Electrical Code; and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Industry Canada Notice
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Notice for all MR-2320 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.
Note: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Secutron's MR-2320 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a listed Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under Standard 864
(Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm
System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
FCC Notice
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of seizing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.
Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.
When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the
Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact
Secutron Inc. at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.
1
Introduction
Introduction
Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning. The panel includes common alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays, and provides regulated and unregulated auxiliary power along with four-wire smoke power. It supports auxiliary relays and a city tie module. The auxiliary relays are based on a hazard area status. The MR-2320 has six input zones and four output zones, allowing for flexibility in most single- and dual-hazard applications for both deluge and agent releasing applications.
Panel Type
The panel can function as an agent release panel or as a pre-action/deluge panel, depending on which of the available fixed configurations are chosen from the main programming menu.
Deluge sprinkler system
In deluge sprinkler system open-valve sprinkler heads terminate to a water supply that is controlled by a single valve. When the system detects fire, it automatically opens the valve via a releasing circuit, allowing the water to flow through all the sprinkler heads. Deluge sprinkler systems are useful for applications in which simultaneous discharge of water through every sprinkler is required.
Pre-action sprinkler system
In a pre-action sprinkler system close-valve sprinkler heads are connected to pipes that are supervised for air pressure. The pipes terminate directly to a water supply. Pre-action systems are useful for applications in which the prevention of an accidental discharge of water is required.
Agent release system
In an agent release system, an extinguishing agent (such as Argon, dry chemical, CO 2 , Halon, etc.) is automatically released upon fire detection. An abort function is added to prevent the false release of the extinguishing agent.
Overall Features
• Basic unit has six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input
Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit is pre-configured as Alarm, Supervisory (Latching or non-latching), water-flow, Manual Release Switch, Abort Switch or Manual Release/Abort combination, depending upon the selected pre-programmed configuration. There are two LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble
(amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and Alarm (red).
• Basic unit has 4 power limited class B (style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are indicating circuits while output circuits 3 & 4 are releasing circuits (circuit 4 can work as an indicating circuit in some situations; check the Pre-Programming Modes section on page for details). Each indicating circuit process type is pre-configured and can be silenceable. The signal rates depend on the selected pre-programmed configuration.
• A pushbutton associated with each initiating, indicating and releasing circuit can individually bypass the circuit.
• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit and Auto Signal Silence Timers.
• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation.
• Four wire reset-able smoke power supply: 22.3V DC regulated, 300mA maximum.
• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory, Common Trouble, and Auxiliary Alarm Relay
(disconnectable).
• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay Module.
• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.
• Extensive transient protection.
• Easy configuration of the panel using LCD service tool (CFG-300).
• Releasing circuit protection from false alarm by disconnecting the battery if the voltage falls below 19V.
2
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing.
Zone
Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.
Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
Display Points
There is a display point associated with every initiating and indicating circuit of the MR-2320 LED Series fire panel.
For an initiating circuit there are two LEDs for every display point: one single color (amber) and one dual color (red/ amber). For an indicating circuit there is only one LED: one single color (amber), for every display point.
Wiring Styles
Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an
MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).
This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board, which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z). Releasing circuits (Z) are Class B (Style B) only.
3
System Components
System Components
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT ACTIVE
AGENT RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
MR-2320 SERIES
Agent Release Control Panel
Model
MR-2320-R
Description
Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release
Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are Class B (Style
B) indicating circuits that can be converted to
Class A (Style Z) using an MR-2300-NC2
Output Class A Converter adder module.
Output circuits 3 & 4 are Class B (Style B) only releasing circuits. Each output circuit can draw
1.7A current, 5A total. A six zone MR-2300-A
Input Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. MR-2320 contains Common Alarm,
Common Supervisory & Common Trouble
Relays, auxiliary alarm relay (disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four Wire Smoke Detector
Power Supply. Two batteries are required.
MR-2320-DR Same as above except with dialer.
Relay Modules: Six Relays
Model Description
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5
NO/NC C
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
MR-2306-
R6
Six-relay adder module
Polarity Reversal/City Tie
Model Description
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and/or City
Tie Module
JW4
4
Smart Relay Module
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Model
MR-2312-SW12
Description
Smart Relay Module
(12 relays) with white enclosure
MR-2312-SR12
Smart Relay Module
(12 relays) with red enclosure
MR-2300 SERIES
REMOTE RELAY
Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits
Model
MR-2300-A
Description
Input Class A converter
Module (six circuits). This module has built-in active
EOL resistors.
Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits
Model
MR-2300-NC2
Description
Output Class A converter module (two circuits)
MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator
Model Description
A.C.
ON
COMMON
TROUBLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
SWITCH
ENABLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
FIRE ALARM
ANNUNCIATOR
MR-2312-ATW 16 Zone remote annunciator
5
System Components
Active end-of-line
The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.
Model Description
ELRX-400
RED
BLACK
ELRX-400R
Active end-of-line resistor without plate
Active end-of-line resistor with end-ofline red plate
Additional System Accessories
Model: MR-2306-ATR/W Eight Zone Remote Annunciator
Model: MR-2300T
Model: MP-400
Model: MP-400R
Model: BC-160
Remote Trouble Indicator
EOL resistor plate, 3.9K
EOL resistor plate, red
External Battery Cabinet
Model: MP-1500R/W Current
Model: MP-320R/W Solenoid Module
Model: MR-2316-AT Remote Annunciator
Ω
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
6
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Enclosure
Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws.
Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring
11"
1.5"
PLACE MR-2320 TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX
17"
14.5"
4 Mounting
Holes for
Surface
Mounting
20.0"
22.5"
Adhere trim ring to wall surface around the MR-2320 backbox.
5.425"
1" 3.5"
14.5"
4.5
"
1" is the minimum depth above the wall required for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
3.5" is the maximum depth for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall.
Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.
7
Mechanical Installation
The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.
TRIM RING
WALL MIN 1”
WOOD OR
METAL STUD
BACKBOX
8
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Installing the Adder Modules
The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules.
Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW1
TO MR-2300-PR MODULE
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
P6
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
P6
BATTERY
P5
SEC TX
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC2
(2 circuits)
Transformer
AC wiring terminal
BATTERY BATTERY
9
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder
Modules
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board
Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings
JW3-Removed all the time
JW3
For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922 for details
JW5-Normally Open
JW6-Normally Open
RS-485 for annunciators
Alarm Relay
Supervisory
Relay
JW4 -Normally Short
Auxiliary Relay
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASE
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
Trouble Relay
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
Connect to
MR-2300-PR
Connect to
MR-2306-R6
Relay module
JW1
TO MR-2300-PR MODULE
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
P3
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
P4
JW2 - ON- when
MR-2306-R6 not connected
Unfiltered 24V supply
Power supply and control interface, including
AC power and battery supplies.
10
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board
JW1 Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected.
P4
Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.
Otherwise not used.
JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.
JW3 Removed all the time.
JW4 Normally short.
JW5
JW6
Normally open. Place jumper here and power down the panel (both AC power and batteries). Then power up the panel again, the password is restored to the default after system startup. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5.
Leave normally open.
Normally open to BLOCK configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a
CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
All these pins comes with red and black wires which are connected to the detection circuit on the main fire alarm board. Red is positive and black is negative mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the
Main Fire Alarm Board.
Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.
11
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
OCAC-302
MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit
1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.
The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.
Relay Adder Module
Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P4 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module main fire alarm board
INDIVIDUAL GREEN
RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P4 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
The correlation of the relays are fixed and is as follows:
Active State
Relay1
Hazard 1
Alert
Relay2
Hazard 1
Alarm
Relay3
Hazard 1
Release
Relay4
Hazard 2
Alert
Relay5
Hazard 2
Alarm
Relay6
Hazard 2
Release
12
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)
Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
P1 P2
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR.
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings
P1
JW1
JW2
Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or
"open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a
"zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the
City Tie Box will be retriggered. See configuration of Alarm Xmit-Sil on page for more information.
The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 1 or 3 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Pwr Fail Dly Tmr configuration on page for more information.
13
Field Wiring
Field Wiring
Main Board Field Wiring
Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications.
CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor or an active EOL module.
Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM ZONE
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION
SUPERVISORY
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE
RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT
THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL THE
INITIATING CIRCUITS.
14
Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
CONVERTER MODULE
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
4 MORE INITIATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM
ZONE
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO
SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION SUPERVISORY
15
Field Wiring
Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring
Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11 . Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit.
When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.
When on the same circuit, DET 5 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 1, while DET6 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 2. When an Abort/Manual release combination is used, ensure that the
Manual release switch is always before the Abort switch. Also ensure that there is a current limiting resistor (MP-
1500R/W) between the Manual release and Abort switch for differentiating between the two switches.
Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring
Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
MANUAL RELEASE
SWITCH
Use MS-403,404
USE ONLY NO
CONTACT
ABORT SWITCH
CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION ACCEPTABLE TO
THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
MAXIMUM IMPEDENCE = 1.4K OHMS
RATED CURRENT = 45mA
RATED VOLTAGE= 24V
Note: Maximum 4 Abort Switches can be connected on each combined Manual Release and
Abort Switch circuit.
Note: For the circuit with the combined Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch, a maximum of four Abort
Switches can be connected.
16
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring
Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
MR-2300-A
CLASS A
CONVERTER
MODULE
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
+
-
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
MR-2300-A
CLASS A
CONVERTER
MODULE
MANUAL RELEASE
SWITCH
USE MS-403,404
USE ONLY NO
CONTACT
ABORT SWITCH
CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION
ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE
FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
MAXIMUM IMPEDENCE = 1.4K OHMS
RATED CURRENT = 45mA
RATED VOLTAGE= 24V
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Note: Maximum 4 Abort
Switches can be connected on each combined Manual
Release and Abort Switch circuit.
17
Field Wiring
Indicating Circuit Wiring
The MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits.
Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7
A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.
Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring
MR-2320 Panel
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 2
BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring
MR-2320 Panel
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 2
BELL STROBE
OCAC-302 CLASS A
CONVERTER MODULE
HORN
18
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Releasing Circuit Wiring
Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14 , below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor is used. The supervisory current passes through the solenoid coil thus confirming the integrity of the solenoid coil for open coil. The wiring is supervised for the open and short conditions.
Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
Releasing circuit #1
Releasing circuit #2
+
-
+
-
Solenoid EOL module
MP-320R/W
Solenoid EOL module
MP-320R/W
Solenoid Coil (See the listing for the approved solenoids)
Dialer Wiring
If you have an MR-2320-DR, there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 15 below.
Figure 15: Dialer Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN
BOARD
LINE-1
LINE-2
GREEN
RED
BROWN
GREY
1
RJ31X
2 3
4
8
7 6
5
TIP
RING
Public switch
Telephone company wiring
TIP
RING premise telephone
IF permitted
Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1
19
Field Wiring
Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LEGEND
+
-
+
-
POWER
+
-
RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
22VDC, 200mA
MAX. CURRENT - 300mA
MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV
(POWER LIMITED)
+
-
+
DETECTION
4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE
TO INITIATING
CIRCUIT
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
6
3
4
5
2
1
END OF LINE RELAY
LISTED S3403
MODEL A77-716B
MANUFACTURED BY
SYSTEM SENSOR
NOTES
ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,
OR FPLP POWER LIMITED
CABLE
Relay Adder Module Wiring
Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection
RELAY
CIRCUIT #1
RELAY
CIRCUIT #2
C
NO/NC
C
NO/NC
RELAY
CIRCUIT #6
C
NO/NC
NORMALLY OPEN
CONNECTION
NORMALLY CLOSE
CONNECTION
NORMALLY OPEN OR
NORMALLY CLOSED
CONNECTION IS
SELECTED BY JUMPER
ON RELAY BOARD.
ALL RELAY CONTACTS
28V DC, 1 AMP
RESISTIVE LOAD
NOTE: ALL RELAYS ARE POWER LIMITED
CIRCUITS AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or
FPLP POWER LIMITED CABLE.
20
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring
Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18 , below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.
For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective
Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.
For use in Canada, the Protective Device is not required but still recommended.
Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection
+
-
+
-
+
CITY TIE LOCAL ENERGY
RATED - 24VDC FILTERED
TRIP COIL - 14 Ohms, 250mA,
5mV RIPPLE
POWER LIMITED
POLARITY REVERSAL ALARM
24VDC OPEN
12VDC AT 3.5mA
8mA MAX. SHORT
POWER LIMITED
POLARITY REVERSAL SUPV.
24VDC OPEN
12VDC AT 3.5mA
8mA MAX. SHORT
-
POWER LIMITED
1
2
S
1
2
S
1
2
S
1
2
S
PROTECTOR
1
2
S
+
-
USE A SHORTING WIRE
WHEN THE CITY TIE IS
NOT USED
1
2
+
-
S
CONFIRMS TO NEMA STANDARD
SB3-1969 INTENDED FOR
CONNECTION TO POLARITY
REVERSAL CIRCUIT OF A REMOTE
STATION RECEIVING UNIT HAVING
COMPATIBLE RATINGS
DIN RAIL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND
PROCTECTOR
1
+
2
-
S
1
2
S
POWER LIMITED CABLE TYPE
FPL, FPLR or FPLP MUST BE
USED FROM PR-300 TO
PROTECTORS.
DIN RAIL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND
21
Field Wiring
Power Supply Connection
The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:
Type
Electrical Input rating
Rating
120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Power supply total current
Battery fuse on Main module
10A, slow blow micro fuse
Wire the power supply as shown below in Figure 19 using the proper wire gauge.
CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Figure 19: Power Supply Connection
Deluge Panel Control Board
BUZZER
SILENCE
SPARE
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
P6
Power Supply Control Board
P6
BATTERY
P5
10A slow blow red
+ red red
+ blk yellow red blk green
240 VAC 50Hz
120 VAC 60Hz
N
GND
BATTERY BATTERY
NOTE:
TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE
SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON
22
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring Tables and Information
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wire gauge
AWG
22
20
18
16
14
12
Maximum wiring run to last device
Feet
2990
4760
7560
12000
19000
30400
Meters
910
1450
2300
3600
5800
9200
Notes:
• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.
• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.
• Maximum capacitance of 0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring
Total signal load in amperes
0.06
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
18 AWG
2350
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
716
360
143
71
47
36
29
24
Maximum wiring run to last device
16 AWG
3750
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
1143
567
229
114
76
56
46
38
14 AWG
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
6000
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
1829
915
366
183
122
91
73
61
Notes:
• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.
• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.
12 AWG
8500
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285
2591
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. loop resistance in ohms
30
15
6
3
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)
Four-wire smoke power is provided for four-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)
Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
23
Field Wiring
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)
This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.
24
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
System Checkout
Before turning the power “ON”
To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main
AC supply.
1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.
2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.
3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.
4. Check all jumpers and switches for proper setting.
5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.
6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).
7. Make sure to close the front cover plate before powering the system from main AC supply.
The best way to check out a panel first is to not connect any field wiring. Power up the panel with an end of line. The panel should be free of trouble. Then connect one circuit at one time. If a trouble occurs, correct the fault then continue the field wiring.
Power-up procedure
After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,
8. Power up the panel. The "AC ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.
9. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).
All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (below the
TROUBLE relay at left bottom of board).
Note: Green LED I4 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.
10.Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Circuit
Trouble
Remote
Trouble
Ground Fault
Battery
Trouble
Common
Trouble
Possible Cause
To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or if the Circuit
Disconnect Button is active. Notes: (1) Bypassing a detection circuit or signal circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal status); (2) Bypassing a releasing circuit will cause a supervisory signal.
Remote Trouble will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.
This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.
Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.
If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above confirming trouble indicators are on, check the following for possible fault:
• Check for any missing interconnection wiring.
• Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.
• Check for improperly secured cabling.
25
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Refer to Figure 20 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations.
Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE M
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
The Main Display Panel on the Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board consists of:
• 16 common LED Indicators (left portion of display)
• Ten Common Buttons (left half portion of display)
• Up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators
• Four Indicating/Releasing Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC for Notifying Appliance Circuit or RAC for Releasing
Appliance Circuit)
• Up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuits & four for indicating/releasing circuits)
LED Indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates.
• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
• Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC.
Common LED indicators
AC ON
The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels. It is turned off when the level falls below the power-fail threshold.
26
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
COMMON ALARM
The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system
COMMON TROUBLE
The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system
BATTERY TROUBLE
Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.
Flashes amber at a fast rate when there is a trouble on the battery charger circuit
REMOTE TROUBLE
Flashes amber at a slow rate as a result of any remote trouble condition
GROUND FAULT
Flashes amber at a slow rate when there is a ground fault detected in the system
CPU FAIL
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the CPU is not working properly
ABORT
Illuminate steady amber when the abort circuit is active
RELEASED
Illuminate steady red when the releasing circuit(s) is active
SYSTEM RESET
Turn on steady amber during the system reset process
SIGNAL SILENCE
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the signal circuits are silenced
AUXILIARY DISCONNECT
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the auxiliary disconnect function is active
LAMP TEST
Illuminate amber steady when the lamp test button is pressed
BUZZER SILENCE
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the buzzer is silenced
PRE RELEASE
Flashes red at a fast rate, when the release timer is started turns off when the release timer expires or the system is reset
27
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Menu Buttons
To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details.
Menu Button
M
Pressing M and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu.
Info Button
?
X
When the system is off-normal, press
?
to display extra information of the event.
Enter Button
Pressing this button to select a menu option or to confirm a menu operation.
Cancel Button
To return to previous menu in the configuration or command mode.
Switches and Common Indicators
The MR-2320 Series panel is a six-zone panel with four output circuits. The circuits are arranged in the following configuration:
Zone 1 Input circuit
Zone 2 Input circuit
Zone 3 Input circuit
Zone 4 Input circuit
Zone 5 Manual Release/Abort switches combination or individual switch
Zone 6 Manual Release/Abort switches combination or individual switch
Out 1
Out 2
NAC1
NAC2
Out 3
Out 4
Releasing circuit 1
Releasing circuit 2 or NAC3 in some applications
Zone 1 to Zone 4
• Alarm LED (red) turns on steady when an alarm is detected
• Supervisory LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is active
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble or bypassed
Zone 5 and Zone 6
• Alarm LED & Trouble LED The zone type and LED behavior varies upon the configuration. Steady when turned on.
Out1 and Out2 (NAC circuits)
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble or bypassed
Out3 and Out4 (Releasing circuits)
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is bypassed turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble
Input Circuits Bypass Switch
These bypass switches are used to bypass the input circuit. Bypass is a toggle switch which will bypass and unbypass in a sequence whenever the switch is pressed. When the input circuit is bypassed a trouble is generated and the system will not respond to any trouble or alarm on the bypassed input circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast rate for 10 seconds.
During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.
28
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Output Circuits Bypass Switch
The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off.
Common Controls
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits. In particular, the system reset button
• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions
• Resets all Initiating and Releasing Circuits
• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply
• Turns off all Indicating Circuits
• Turns off Signal Silence Indicator
• Stops and resets all Timers
• Processes inputs as new events
• Does not affect Aux Disconnect
Signal Silence Button
Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period.
Auxiliary Disconnect Button
Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the Auxiliary Disconnect function. The Auxiliary Alarm Relay is always disconnected with this button. The Common Alarm Relay, the Common Supervisory relay and all correlated alarm relays may be disconnected as selected through configuration. Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button also causes the Common Trouble LED to illuminate steady, the common trouble relay to send a trouble message and the trouble buzzer to flash at the trouble flash rate. Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button again de-activates this function and the system will go back to normal.
Lamp Test Button
Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated.
Buzzer Silence Button
Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating indicating, and releasing circuits on the Fire
Alarm Control Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.
Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. Pressing a releasing circuit disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated releasing circuit and turns on its LED, activating common supervisory. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status
(alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits.
Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will unbypass (reconnect) the circuit.
Disconnecting an active Latching Initiating Circuit (including Alarms, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, General
Alarm, and Latching Supervisory) does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting an active Non-
Latching Initiating Circuit (including Non-Latching Supervisory and Trouble-Only) causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.
29
Indicators, Controls and Operations
When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not re-bypassed by then, it will be processed as a new input.
Common Relays
Relay Type
Trouble Relay
Supervisory Relay
Alarm Relay
Aux Alarm Relay
Single Hazard
Trouble
Supervisory
Alarm
Alarm (Silence-able)
Dual Hazard
Trouble
Supervisory
Hazard1 (Alarm)
Hazard2 (Alarm)
Note: Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.
Circuit Types
Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types
Non-Verified Alarm
A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)
Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm
LED to illuminate red.
Note: Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate.
The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.
Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate.
The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.
Abort Switch
When the hazard area is in alarm (pre-discharge) state and the release timer is running, the activation of the corresponding Abort Switch will pause the releasing timer. The release process is held while the Abort Switch is pressed. Releasing the Abort Switch will resume the releasing timer and the corresponding hazard area goes into
Alarm (pre-discharge) state again. The value of the release timer after Abort Switch is released depends on the type
30
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated.
When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.
Manual Release Switch
Activation of the Manual Release Switch of a hazard area will activate the corresponding releasing circuit. If the corresponding Manual Release Delay is non-zero, the releasing circuit will be activate after the Manual Release
Delay expires.
Combination of Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch
This type of circuit is the combination of both Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. This combination always applies to the same hazard area. A short condition on the circuit is a Manual Release Active and a current limit condition is an Abort Switch Active.
Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types
Silenceable Signal
The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically.
Non-Silenceable Signal
The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the evacuation code pattern that is configured by the user. For more information on evacuation codes, refer to Evacuation Codes on page.
Silenceable Strobe
Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.
Non-Silenceable Strobes
Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.
Evacuation codes
Continuous
Temporal Code
20 BPM
60 BPM
120 BPM
On 100% of the time
3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause
1.5 seconds on, 1.5 seconds off
0.5 second on, 0.5 second off
0.25 second on, 0.25 second off
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes
0.5s
0.5s
1.5s
1.5s
CONTINUOUS
1.5s
TEMPORAL CODE
20 BPM
0.5s
0.5s
0.25s
0.25s
60 BPM
120 BPM
31
Configuration
Configuration
Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with
CFG-300 for configuration information).
Using the CFG-300 Tool
Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press M (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main
Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in Figure 22, below.
Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
M COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
0
QZ
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
*
(left shift)
#
(right shift)
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
6
MNO
7
PRS
8
TUV
9
WXY
32
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Entering the Passcode
The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press
(Enter button) after entering the passcode. If the passcode is correct, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display.
Enter passcode:
_
Three leves of access are defined:
1) Command - Level 0:
The default password is for this level “1111” without quotes. In this level the user can only perform regular testing and operation.
2) Configuration - Level 1:
The default password is for this level “2222” without quotes. User can change configuration and have access to command level.
3) Factory - Level 2:
Currently not used.
When the user presses “MENU” and enters the passsword, they should enter the password of the level intended. If the user is in a lower level of access, attempts to operate functions requiring a higher level of access will be refused.
33
Configuration
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320
1. Press M (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password.
2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue.
3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing . The corresponding submenu will display.
4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.
5. Press to select a submenu option.
6. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different menu options. When entering numerical data, use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number.
7. Once you have made the correct selection, press submenu screen.
8. Press X
to confirm the change. The display will return to the
(Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.
Command Menu
The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show “-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the X or key.
Note: Command Menu Item 1 and 6 can only be accessed if jumper JW6 is placed on the main board.
Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below.
MR-2320 Mode-1 DACT
Version 0.1.17
The first line shows the panel mode number, pre-programmed mode and the information if the panel has a dialer or not. The second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as
Major.Minor.Revision.
-Command Menu-
1. Panel Config
2. Set Time
3. Set Password
4. View EventLog
5. Clear Event Log
6. Dialer Config
7. Test Dialer
8. Exit
Access level Required
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Command
Command
Configuration
Command
Command
34
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
1. Panel Config (Command-Menu)
The following is a detailed description of the MR-2320 configuration menu.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
-P a ne l Co n fig -
1 . C h o o se a m o d e
2 . H a za r d C o nfig
3 . P a ne l Fea tu res
4. Default Config
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Choose a mode
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Choose a mode
1. Choose a mode
Choose a mode:
1
1-->Default
Use this function to choose a pre-programmed panel configuration.
Selections range from modes 1 to 11. Refer to Pre-Programming
Modes on page for details on mode configurations.
Note: changing the fixed configuration of the panel will cause all configuration data set to default for that particular mode.
35
Configuration
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config
-Hazard Param.-
1. Release timer
2. Abort Delay
3. Manual Rls Delay
4. Soak timer
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
1. Release Timer
Release timer(sec):
60
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
2. Abort Delay
Abort Delay Type:
[X] Standard UL
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
3. Man. Rls Delay
Man. Rls Delay(sec):
0
60->Default
Available options:
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,
45,50,55,60 seconds
[X] Standard UL->Default
[ ] IRI
[ ] NYC
[ ] Local Juris.
0->Default
Available options:
0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds
Use this function to set the programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing application circuits.
This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross-zoned hazard area) or a single alarm (noncross-zoned hazard area).
When the timer expires, the releasing circuit activates.
Value: 0 to 60 seconds in fivesecond increments.
Use this function to set how the
Abort Switch operates with the
Release Timer.
Note that if the Release Timer is set to zero, the Abort Switch does not operate.
In Standard UL mode, the release timer will stop and hold when the Abort Switch is pressed. When the switch is released, the Release Timer restarts from whichever is greater: the remaining time on the timer or 10 seconds.
In IRI mode, the switch works in the same way as it does in
Standard UL mode, except that the switch will function only if it is pressed and held before the second alarm comes in.
In NYC mode, pressing the
Abort Switch will reset to the
Release Timer and add 90 seconds to the configured timer duration. After the Abort Switch is released, the Release Timer will restart.
In Local Juris. (Local
Jurisdiction Delay), pressing the
Abort Switch will reset the
Release Timer back to its configured value. After the switch is released, the Release
Timer will restart.
Use this function to set the time delay of activation of corresponding releasing circuit(s) after activation of the manual release switch.
Value: 0 to 30 seconds in fivesecond increments.
36
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
4. Soak timer
Soak timer(sec):
0
0->Default (continuous)
The selectable values are in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, 120(2min),
180(3min), 240(4min),
300(5min), 360(6min),
420(7min), 480(8min),
540(9min), 600(10min),
660(11min), 720(12min),
780(13min), 840(14min),
900(15min)
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
Use this function to set the length of time for which the releasing circuit is active. When the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically shuts off the activated releasing circuit.
0 seconds means that the soak timer is disabled and the releasing circuit is active continuously.
-Panel Features-
1. Man. Sig. Sil
2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd
3. Aux Dis Corr
4. Sig-Sil Inh Tm
5. Aux Dis Alm&Sv
6. Auto Sil. Tmr
7. Rem. Annun.
8. Alm. Xmit. Sil.
9. Pwr Fail Tmr.
10. Com. Supv. Rly
11. Sig. Sil. Isol.
12. 1st Alarm Code
13. 2nd Alarm Code
14. Supv. Latching
15. Supv on NAC-2
16. Sig-Sil NAC
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
1. Manual Sig. Silence
Man. Sig. Sil.
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the Signal Silence operation on the panel.
37
Configuration
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd
Waterflow/Sprk Retd
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
3. Aux Dis Corr
Aux Dis. Dis Corr
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
4. Sig-Sil Inh Tmr
Sig-Sil. Inhibit Timer
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 10sec
[ ] 20sec
[ ] 30sec
[ ] 1min
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
5. Aux. Dis. Dis Alam&Sv
Aux Dis. Dis Alm&Sv
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
6. Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr
Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
7. Rem. Annun.
No. of Remote Annun.
[X] NONE
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
...
[ ] 6
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
8. Alarm Xmit-Sil.
Alm Xmit-Sil.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
By default all the initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, a retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler.
By default this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay when the aux disconnect button is pressed. If enabled, this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay and all correlated relays when the aux disconnect button is pressed.
Correlated relays include:
MR-2306-R6 and MR-2312-
S12.
Use this function to inhibit the signal silence switch for a desired length of time. The time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should be set to one minute.
If enabled the Common Alarm and Common Supervisory relays will be disconnected when Aux. Disconnect is pressed. Also, the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the Common Alarm relay, the
Common Supervisory relay, and the MR-2300-PR.
Use this function to set the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.
Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.
Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.
Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on the
Signal Silence rather than the
Reset switch.
38
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
9. Pwr Fail Tmr
AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr.
[X] None
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1 HRS
[ ] 3 HRS
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
10. Com. Supv. Rly
Common Supv. Relay
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
11. Sig-Sil. Isol.
Sig-Sil. Isol.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
12.1st Alarm NAC Code
1st Alarm NAC Code
[X] Temporal
[X] Temporal ->Default
[ ] 20 BPM
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
13. 2nd Alarm NAC Code
2nd Alarm NAC Code
[X] 120 BPM
[X] 120 BPM->Default
[ ] 60 BPM
[ ] Temporal
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC power fail trouble for a specific time period. If disabled, the AC power fail will be reported immediately.
If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as a common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used as a common supervisory relay.
Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only).
Sets the NAC indicating code when the 1st alarm comes in.
Choose the NAC indicating code when the 2nd alarm comes in.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
14.Supv. Latching
Supervisory Latching
[X] Non-latching
[ ] Latching
[X] Non-latching->Default
Use this function to set the supervisory circuit as either latching or non-latching.
NOTE: For ULC operation the supervisory should be programmed as latching
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
15. Supv on NAC-2
Supv. Alert on NAC-2
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Use this function to enable/ disable the supervisory circuit indication on NAC-2.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
16. Sig-Sil NAC
Silenceable NAC
[X] NAC-1
[X] NAC-1->Default
[X] NAC-2->Default
Use this function to set which
NAC circuits are silenceable or non-silenceable.
39
Configuration
Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/
17. Active EOL
Active EOL
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Enable this function if using an
Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A
Converter has built in Active
EOL resistors.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Default Config
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Default Config
4. Default Config
Y-->Default
Load the default
Settings? Y
Use this function to reset the panel to the default configuration of the chosen programming mode.
40
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
2. Set Time (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1. Daylight Save
2. Time Clock
3. Compensation
Command Menu/Set time Date
1. Daylight saving time
Daylight Saving
[X] DISABLE
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Set time and date
HH:MM WKD YYYY-MM-DD
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
[X] DISABLE ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to enable daylight savings time.
Default
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and
“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.
Note: time is in 24hr format
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Compensation
H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D
0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
When value is entered the following message will appear
Default: 0 seconds
(no compensation)
Compensation values can range from -15 to
+15 seconds.
Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively. For a slow clock adjust positively.
For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.
Daily Compen. (Sec):
Panel Config Updated
41
Configuration
3. Set password (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
First choose the level of password to be changed
Select Access Level
0
Then
Enter new passcode:
Re-enter new passcode:
If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu
0 -> Default invalid passcode
Use this function to change the pass-code. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum is 10. Only numeric digits are allowed.
If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu passcode updated
The user can change the password only for the current access level as well as any lower levels.
42
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
4. View Event Log (Command-Menu)
The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG-
300 LCD Configuration tool display.
ZONE
Message
Process
Type
Physical
Zone No.
Zone-1
OPEN TRB 01/09
EVENT type
EVENT
01 of 09
"INFO" Key
DATE
NVERIF ALARM Z -01
11:45 THU 2005-3-31
TIME
There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.
5. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
-Select Log-
1. Alarm Log
2. General Log
3. All Logs
Select the type of log to clear. Press the
“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.
Clear all the
Selected log(s)? Y
Use this function to clear alarm logs, event logs, or both.
Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the
“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.
Log(s) cleared
43
Configuration
6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.
-Dialer Config-
1. Account Info
2. Telephone line
3. Report Options
4. Time Parameter
5. Enable/Disable
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Account Info
-Account Info-
1. Account#1 ID
2. Account#1 Tel
3. Accnt#1 Format
4. Account#2 ID
5. Account#2 Tel
6. Accnt#2 Format
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
1.Account# 1 Identification
Account#1 ID
123456
123456->Default
Use this function to set the
Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six. For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.
If you are using contact ID the allowed digits for the account
ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the
SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).
To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
44
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
2.Account#1 Telephone Number
Account#1 Telnum:
101
[101]->Default
Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is
19 including “,” and numerals.
The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the
INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone
# is 9,,12345678.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
3.Account#1 Reporting Format
ACCOUNT#1 Format:
[X] CONTACT ID
[X] CONTACT ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
4. Account# 2 Identification
ACCOUNT#2 ID:
654321
654321->Default
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
5.Account# 2 Telephone Number
ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:
101
[ 101 ]->Default
Same as Account#1.
Same as Account#1.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
6.Account# 2 Reporting Format
ACCOUNT#2 Format:
[X] CONTACT ID
[X] Contact ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Same as Account#1.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
45
Configuration
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Telephone Line
-Telephone Line-
1. Line1 Dialtype
2. Line2 Dialtype
3. Line1 Dialtone
4. Line2 Dialtone
5. Num of Retries
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
1. Line#1 Dialing Type
Line#1 Dialing Type:
[X] DTMF Dial
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
2. Line#2 Dialing Type
Line#2 Dialing Type:
[X] DTMF Dial
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone
Line#1 Wait Dialtone
[X] ENABLE
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone
Line#2 Wait Dialtone
[X] ENABLE
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Same as Line#1.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Same as Line#1.
46
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
5.Number of retries
Number of Retries:
06
06 ->Default
Number of retries ranges between 5 to 10
Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Report Options
-Report Options-
1. Alarm Prio.
2. Trouble Prio.
3. Supv. Prio
4. Aux Dis Report
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
1. Alarm Report priority
Alarm Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
2.Trouble priority
Trouble Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
3. Supervisory priority
SUPV Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
47
Configuration
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt.
AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
If this function is enabled, the
Aux Disconnect feature
(obtained by pressing the Aux
Disconnect button) will block the alarm and supervisory events from being reported through the built-in dialer.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Time Parameters
-Time Parameter-
1. AC-Loss Delay
2. Cellphone Date
3. Auto-Test Time
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
1. AC Loss delay
AC-Loss Delay(Hrs)
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
2. Cellular report date
Cellular Report Date
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
3. Auto test time
Auto-Test (HH:MM):
00:30
0 ->Default
The AC loss delay ranges from 0 to 20 hours
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period. Press UP or
DOWN button to increase or decrease the number of hours.
0 ->Default
The cellular report date ranges from 0 to
28
00:30 ->Default
Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the phone line is a regular line.
Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. Press the UP or
DOWN buttons to scroll through the days.
Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means
00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight. Press the UP or DOWN buttons to increase or decrease the time.
Please do not use the following test times: 00:00,
01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.
48
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Dialer Enable/Disable
Dialer Ena/Dis
[X] ENABLE
------WARNING-----
Dialer Disabled!!!
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
The dialer is enabled by default. When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.
Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.
7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)
-Dialer Test-
1. L#1 Manual test
2. L#2 Manual test
3. Reset Dialer
L#1 Manual test
L#2 Manual test
3. Reset Dialer
Press Enter to test Line #1. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
Press Enter to test Line #2. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press Cancel to exit this menu.
49
Configuration
Dialer Test Messages
The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.
Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual
Test is selected.
No DC Volt
No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.
Waiting for Dialtone
The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.
Failed: No Dialtone
Dialing Receiver Now
This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.
The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.
No DTMF tone
Waiting for Acktone
Failed no Acktone
Reporting Event Now
Waiting for Kissoff
This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.
Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the availability by sending an ack tone.
This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.
When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for
Kissoff “ for all events sent.
The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.
50
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
No Kissoff
No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.
Passed: Manual Test
The line passed the test; everything is OK.
8. Exit (Command-Menu)
Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.
51
Operating the Panel
Operating the Panel
Panel Operation During Various Hazard States
The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of
Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch.
Hazard Idle
• No correlated alarm zone active.
• Release Timer is not started.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is not started.
• Abort Switch is off.
• Manual Release Switch is off.
• Corresponding NAC circuit is off.
• Releasing circuit(s) is off.
Hazard Alert (or equivalently first Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)
• The panel enters the Hazard Alert state when
• a single alarm comes in for a cross-zoned hazard. For non cross-zoned hazard area, a single alarm will put hazard into Hazard Alarm state directly.
• the Abort Switch becomes active during Hazard Alarm state, so that the hazard area state downgrades from
Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert.
• Release Timer is not started.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is not started.
• Correlated NAC circuit(s) turns on at alert rate.
Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge, or equivalently second Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)
• The panel enters the Hazard Alarm state when
• it detects the confirming alarm for hazard area (single alarm active for the non cross-zoned system, or 2nd alarm active in the cross-zoned system), or
• Manual Release Switch is active.
• Release Timer (RT) is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state after by detecting the 2nd alarm in cross-zoned hazard or 1st alarm in non cross-zoned hazard.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state by detecting the correlated
Manual Release Switch active.
• Releasing circuit(s) will be activated after the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires.
• Corresponding NAC(s) turns on at alarm rate.
• During Hazard Alarm State, when the release timer is running and the Abort Switch turns on, the hazard area state will change from Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert. Release Timer is held and the corresponding NAC sounds the Alert rate. If the Abort Switch is released, the hazard state will go back to Hazard Alarm and the Release
Timer resumes running. The value of release timer depends on Abort Delay Type. The corresponding NAC sounds Alarm rate again.
Hazard Release
• Panel enters Hazard Release when the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires. The correlated releasing circuit is activated.
• NAC code for Hazard Release state is steady.
52
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
General Panel Operation
• Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release
Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort
Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT).
• When the manual release switch is active and the panel is in the Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge) state, Abort
Switch cannot override the Manual Release Switch. Only the System Reset key can interrupt and reset the panel and hazard area.
• System Reset will reset all circuits, including releasing circuits.
• The supervisory circuit can be optionally indicated on NAC-2 circuit. The NAC code of supervisory circuit should be different from those of Hazard Alert or Hazard Alarm. By default, when the NAC code for Hazard Alert is
Temporal, the NAC code for supervisory circuit is 20 BPM or verse visa. This configuration change is automatically done by the panel. If NAC code for alert is chosen other than 20 BPM and Temporal, Supervisory
NAC code will remain unchanged during the configuration.
• In some pre-programmed modes, the Alert Rate and the Alarm Rate are configured the same. So the action of
Abort Switch does not change the NAC rate.
• AB/MR is the combination of Manual Release Switch and Abort Switch in the Agent Release panel. Short condition means Manual Release active. Current Limit means Abort Switch active.
• To avoid the conflict of different NAC code on the same circuit, the priority of signals are defined as, Water-flow alarm has the highest priority, then hazard cadence. The supervisory signal has the lowest priority.
• Soak Timer sets the time period how long the releasing circuits should be active. Upon the expiration of soak timer, the releasing circuits will be shut off. Setting of 0 second means the releasing circuits will be turned on without timer running. They will be shut off upon system reset.
• Abort function is not applicable in pre-action and deluge application.
53
Pre-Programmed Modes
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Detection Zones Phantom Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Zp1 Zp2
Release Timers
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Alm Alm WF Sup AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Non-latching by default)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release Switch
• NAC-1: Signal, will be on steady if there is any alarm zone or manual release switch active.
• NAC-2: Signal, indicates the cadence of hazard area 1 state or supervisory circuit (optional).
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC-2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
54
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 1
•
• Activation of either Z-1or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change the Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady.
NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 (RT-1) is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 change Hazard Area 1 state to Release. Both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on. NAC-2 sounds steady.
• Activation of Z-6 in any situation changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady, NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. The manual release delay timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, Hazard
Area 1 state changes to Release. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turns on steady.
• When Hazard Area 1 state is in Alarm, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 rate changes from
120BPM to Temporal. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to
120BPM. Release Timer -1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if enabled.
55
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones
Zp1 Zp2
Release Timers
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Alm Alm WF Sup AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Water-flow or pressure switch)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (default non-latching)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC-1: Signal, will be on steady if there is any alarm zone or manual release switch active.
• NAC-2: Signal, indicates the cadence of hazard area 1 state or supervisory circuit (optional).
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC-2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory Signal is 20 BPM.
56
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 2
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 activates both RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual-release Timer 1 (MDT-1) in any situation. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.
• During Hazard Alarm state, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if enabled.
57
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm Alm Alm AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (Hazard Area 1)
• Detection Zone -6: Abort/Manual Release Combination (Hazard Area 2)
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 state
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 state
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
58
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 3
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM.
Release timer-1 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-
1 turns on at 120 BPM while this timer is running. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and
RAC-1 is activated.
• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alarm to Alert. Release
Timer is held and NAC-1 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.
• Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from
Alert to Alarm. Release Timer -1 resumes running and NAC-1 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 turn the Hazard Area 2 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM.
Release timer-2 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-
2 turns on at 120 BPM while this timer is running. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and
RAC-2 is activated
• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alarm to Alert. Release
Timer -2 is held and NAC-2 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.
• Removal of the current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alert to
Alarm. Release Timer -2 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-2 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
59
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm Alm Alm AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X
X X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (hazard 1)
• Detection Zone -6: Abort/Manual Release Combination (hazard 2)
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 state
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 state
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
How the Panel Works in Mode 4
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle to Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
Release Timer-1 is started.
60
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
• Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady.
• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release
Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and RAC-1 is activated.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 turns the Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
Release timer-2 is started.
• Upon expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer -2 is held. Removal of the current limit on Z-6, means releasing Abort Switch. Release Timer -2 resumes running. Release Timer 2 value depends on Abort
Delay Type.
• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release active and Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and RAC-2 is activated.
61
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X X X
(X)
Z6
WF
X
X
Phantom Zones
Zp1
Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4
RT1 Exp
X
X
X
62
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow Alarm.
• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated if there is any alarm zone active.
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 5
• Activation of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state from Idle to Alert. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 sounds Temporal.
• Activations of any two of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-2 turns on at 120 BPM. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.
NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on Steady
• Activation of Z-6 turns on both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.
• Activation of Z-5 is indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X X X
(X)
X X X X
Z6
WF
X
Phantom Zones
Zp1
Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4
RT1 Exp
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Signal, steady on any alarm.
• NAC -2: Supervisory optional.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 6
• Activation of any one among Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, NAC-1 turns on steady. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.
• Activation of Z-6 turns NAC-1 steady.
63
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
WF Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 status
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
64
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 7
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2, if enabled.
65
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X
X X
WF
X
X
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
X X
X X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 status
• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
66
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 8
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2, if enabled.
67
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Releasing
Out4 Strobe Steady
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X
X
X
(X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC-1: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status.
• NAC-2: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• NAC-3: Silenceable Strobe.
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds
• Default Abort Delay Type: NYC
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Steady
• Hazard Alarm: 120BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is 20 BPM
68
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 9
• The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady.
• If Abort Switch Z-5 is active when Release Timer-1 is running, Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alert. NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. Release Timer-1 is held.
• If Abort Switch Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 120BPM. Release Timer resumes running.
Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Timer 1 (MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady. RAC-1 is active.
• Activation of Z-4 is indicated at 20BPM on NAC-2, if configured.
69
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated steady when there is any alarm zone active.
• NAC -2: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: 20BPM
• Hazard Alarm: 60BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is Temporal
70
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 10
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 activates both RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer -1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, both RAC-1 and
RAC-2 are active. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• If Z-5 is active, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 is downgraded from 60BPM to 20 BPM.
• Releasing of Z-5 resumes Release Timer-1 and NAC-2 goes back to 60BPM. Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at Temporal, if configured.
71
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Default non-latching)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC -1: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• NAC -2: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Steady
• Hazard Alarm: 60BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is 20 BPM
72
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 11
• The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 results in the activation of RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• If Z-5 is active, when the Release Timer-1 is running, NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. The Release
Timer is held.
• If Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 60BPM. Release Timer-1 resumes running. Release
Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer-1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and
RAC-2 are active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-3 turns NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if configured.
73
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):
DACR Receiver Model Protocols
SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)
Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6600 Receiver (ULI Approved)
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
74
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed)
Horn/Strobes
Maximum # of Devices
Secutron
MRA-HS3-24ww 8
Amseco/Potter
FHS-240-110 9
System Sensor
P1224MC
Wheelock
NS-24MCW-FW
5
13
MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)
Sync Modules
Secutron
AVS44R
Amseco/Potter
SDM-240
System Sensor
MDL
Wheelock
DSM 12/24
75
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices
MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed)
Make Model/Base
System Sensor
1400A
2400A
1451/B401B
2451/B401B
MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed)
Make Model/Base
System Sensor
1400
2400
1451/B401B
2451/B401B
Compatibility Identifier head/base
A- N/A
A-N/A
A-A
A-A
Rated standby current
(mA)
0.10
0.12
0.12
0.12
MR-2320 series compatible solenoids
ASCO 8210 series
T8210A107 24VDC
R8210A107 24VDC
8210A107 24VDC
76
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C: Reporting
Ademco Contact-ID
MR-2320 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF
NORMAL)
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Trouble
Supervisory
Zone Supervisory restored Supervisory
Waterflow Alarm
Waterflow restored
Indicating Zone Trouble
Indicating Zone Trouble restored
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Restore 3 113
New event 1 320
Restore 3 320
New event 1 301
Restore 3 301
New event 1 302
Restore 3 302
New event 1 310
Restore 3 310
Qualifier Code
New event 1 351
New event 1 352
Restore
Restore
3 351
3 352
New event 1 354
Restore 3 354
New event 1 602
New event 1 608
New event 1 601
New event 1 110
Restore 3 110
New event 1 300
Restore 3 300
New event 1 200
Restore 3 200
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Group # Contact #
00
00
00
00
Acct #
Acct #
00
000
000
000
000
Acct #
Acct #
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
77
Appendix C: Reporting
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS
SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.
MR-2320 Event Codes
Event Description
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow alarm
Waterflow alarm restored
Indicating Zone Trouble (*)
Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Event Family
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Qualifier
SIA Event
Code
FJ
FS
FR
WA
RX
FA
FH
FT
RT
YK
RP
RY
LT
LT
LR
LR
AR
YT
YR
YP
YQ
WH
UT
UR
AT
New event
New event
Restore
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
New event
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
Parameter
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
001
002
001
002
Acct #
Acct #
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
78
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control panel
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using front panel LCD display with Password Access.
Electrical Ratings
AC line voltage
120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
Power Supply Rating
6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer
Battery
Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid - 10AH to 26AH
Charging capability: 10AH to 26AH
Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse
Indicating circuits
2 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2”
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit
Releasing Circuit
Power Limited/Special application 18.18-26.08VRMS/1.7A Max
Terminals are labelled “SIG 3,4”
Max power allowed = 5A
- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)
- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)
- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)
If no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating and the releasing circuits
Current consumption Standby 183mA/Alarm 318mA
Aux supply (non resettable)
Power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max
4-wire smoke supply (resettable)
Power limited/21.1VDC regulated / 300mA max
Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A max at 49C
Minimum Load 5mA
Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
FormC / 28VDC / 1A max
Initiating circuit
6 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable.
Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility ID “A”
Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors /110MVpp AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)
1 RS-485 Connection
For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”. Line impedence is 120 ohms.
MR-2300-PRPolarity reversal city tie module (optional)
MR-2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)
Ground Fault Circuit
Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.
MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max, zoned
Current consumption standby 0mA, alarm 80mA
MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max, zoned
Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA
MR-2306-ATW 8 Zone Remote Annunciator
Standby 35mA / alarm 90mA
Remote Trouble Indicator
Standby 35mA / alarm 35mA
Polarity reversal and city tie module
City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14ohms trip coil
Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /
8.5mA max (shorted)
Polarity reversal supv terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)
Polarity reversal alarm terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)
Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use
System Model: MR-2320 Series Control Unit - Fire
Alarm, for Releasing services
System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR),
Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-
PR or MR-2320-DR/R). Central Station Protected
Premises (using MR-2320-DR/R) For ULC application also use MR-2300-PR for alternate communication path.
Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS
Type of Signalling : Non-Coded
Applicable Standards: NFPA 12, 12A, 12B, 12, 15,
16,70,72,2001, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-
527-99
79
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations
(Selection Guide)
Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.
Refer to Appendix A on page 74 for specifications.
Model
Number
MR-2320-R
MR-2320-DR
MR-2300-A
MR-2300-NC2
MR-2300-PR
MR-2306-R6
MR-2312-S12
POWER REQUIREMENTS (ALL CURRENTS ARE IN AMPERES)
Description Qty Standby
Total
Standby
Pre-Action/Deluge and
Agent Release Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR
Pre-Action/Deluge and
Agent Release Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR with dialer
Det Class A Converter
Adder Module
Sig Class A Converter
Adder Module--2 Circuits
Polarity Reversal and City
Tie Module
X
X
X
X
X
0.123/
0.092
0.123/
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.050
=
=
Alarm
0.316/
0.292
0.318/
0.300
= 0.000
= 0.000
= 0.300
X 0.000
= 0.080
6 Relay Adder Module
12 Relay Smart Relay
Module
X 0.030
= 0.140
MR-2306/12-
ATW
MR-2300T
Remote Annunciators
Remote Trouble Indicator
Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
X
X
X
0.035
0.035
Ò 0.00011
=
=
=
0.090
0.035
* 0.135
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Total
Alarm
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.)
X
X
= =
=
Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.
=
Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A )
* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.
' Use 0.084
for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for 5 minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.
Ò Using the 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A on page 74 for other compatible smoke detectors.
Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B )______ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )
ALARM
Battery Capacity Requirement:
Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24,60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +
( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH
Total System Current in Alarm State: Must be 5.5 amperes or less for MR-2320 Series.
Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.
(
=
B )
80
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not
81
Warranty & Warning Information be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
82
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
83
Warranty & Warning Information
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
84
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S
Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel
I
NSTALLATION &
O
PERATION
G
UIDE
Revision 2
Document #: LT-951SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Industry Canada and FCC Notice .......................................................................................... 1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2
Panel Type............................................................................................................................ 2
Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3
Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3
Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3
Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3
System Components ............................................................................................................... 4
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel.................................................. 4
Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 4
Polarity Reversal/City Tie...................................................................................................... 4
Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 5
Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits.................................................................................... 5
Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits ............................................................................... 5
MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator .................................................................................... 5
Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 6
Additional System Accessories............................................................................................. 6
Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 7
Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 7
Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 9
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules ............................... 10
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board ................................................. 10
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 11
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ..................................................... 12
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 13
Field Wiring............................................................................................................................... 14
Main Board Field Wiring........................................................................................................ 14
Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring............................................................................. 16
Indicating Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 18
Dialer Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 19
Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 20
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 21
Power Supply Connection..................................................................................................... 22
Wiring Tables and Information ............................................................................................. 23
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 23
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 23
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)............................................................................................... 24
System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 25
Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 25
Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................. 25
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 25
Indicators, Controls and Operations...................................................................................... 26
Common LED indicators ....................................................................................................... 26
Menu Buttons........................................................................................................................ 28
Switches and Common Indicators ........................................................................................ 28
Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 29
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons.......................................................................................... 29
Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 30
Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 30
Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 31 i
Contents
Configuration........................................................................................................................... 32
Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................................................................................................... 32
Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 33
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320............................................................... 34
Command Menu................................................................................................................... 34
1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 35
2. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 41
3. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................... 42
4. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 43
5. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 43
6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 44
7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu).......................................................................................... 49
8. Exit (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................................... 51
Operating the Panel ................................................................................................................ 52
Panel Operation During Various Hazard States................................................................... 52
General Panel Operation ..................................................................................................... 53
Pre-Programmed Modes......................................................................................................... 54
Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ........................ 54
Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ................. 56
Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release .................................... 58
Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ............................. 60
Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release................... 62
Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............ 63
Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release............................... 64
Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release ........................ 66
Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort...................................... 68
Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release ............... 70
Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release ...................... 72
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 74
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices .......................................................................... 75
Appendix C: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 77
Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 77
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 78
Appendix D: Specifications.................................................................................................... 79
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 80
Warranty................................................................................................................................... 81 ii
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
List of Tables & Figures
Tables
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .....................................11
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................................................................................13
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ............................................................................................23
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..........................................................................................23
Figures
Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........................................7
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................................................................................9
Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings .................................10
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ............................................11
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................12
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module .....................................................................12
Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module ....................................................................13
Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring ........................................................14
Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring .........................................................15
Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring ..........................16
Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring ............................17
Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .....................................................18
Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ......................................................18
Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring ......................................................................................19
Figure 15: Dialer Wiring ..........................................................................................................19
Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring ........................................................................20
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................20
Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...............................21
Figure 19: Power Supply Connection ...................................................................................22
Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons ....................................................................26
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes ................................................................................31
Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration .........................................................................................32
iii
List of Tables & Figures iv
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Industry Canada and FCC Notice
Notice for all MR-2320 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada
Secutron's MR-2320 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada
(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed MR-2320 series Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under
Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective
Signalling Systems and Services). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial /
Local Electrical Code; and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Industry Canada Notice
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Notice for all MR-2320 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.
Note: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Secutron's MR-2320 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a listed Pre-action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel under Standard 864
(Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm
System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
FCC Notice
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of seizing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.
Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.
When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the
Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact
Secutron Inc. at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.
1
Introduction
Introduction
Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning. The panel includes common alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays, and provides regulated and unregulated auxiliary power along with four-wire smoke power. It supports auxiliary relays and a city tie module. The auxiliary relays are based on a hazard area status. The MR-2320 has six input zones and four output zones, allowing for flexibility in most single- and dual-hazard applications for both deluge and agent releasing applications.
Panel Type
The panel can function as an agent release panel or as a pre-action/deluge panel, depending on which of the available fixed configurations are chosen from the main programming menu.
Deluge sprinkler system
In deluge sprinkler system open-valve sprinkler heads terminate to a water supply that is controlled by a single valve. When the system detects fire, it automatically opens the valve via a releasing circuit, allowing the water to flow through all the sprinkler heads. Deluge sprinkler systems are useful for applications in which simultaneous discharge of water through every sprinkler is required.
Pre-action sprinkler system
In a pre-action sprinkler system close-valve sprinkler heads are connected to pipes that are supervised for air pressure. The pipes terminate directly to a water supply. Pre-action systems are useful for applications in which the prevention of an accidental discharge of water is required.
Agent release system
In an agent release system, an extinguishing agent (such as Argon, dry chemical, CO 2 , Halon, etc.) is automatically released upon fire detection. An abort function is added to prevent the false release of the extinguishing agent.
Overall Features
• Basic unit has six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input
Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit is pre-configured as Alarm, Supervisory (Latching or non-latching), water-flow, Manual Release Switch, Abort Switch or Manual Release/Abort combination, depending upon the selected pre-programmed configuration. There are two LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble
(amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and Alarm (red).
• Basic unit has 4 power limited class B (style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are indicating circuits while output circuits 3 & 4 are releasing circuits (circuit 4 can work as an indicating circuit in some situations; check the Pre-Programming Modes section on page for details). Each indicating circuit process type is pre-configured and can be silenceable. The signal rates depend on the selected pre-programmed configuration.
• A pushbutton associated with each initiating, indicating and releasing circuit can individually bypass the circuit.
• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit and Auto Signal Silence Timers.
• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation.
• Four wire reset-able smoke power supply: 22.3V DC regulated, 300mA maximum.
• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory, Common Trouble, and Auxiliary Alarm Relay
(disconnectable).
• RS-485 Interface for MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay Module.
• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.
• Extensive transient protection.
• Easy configuration of the panel using LCD service tool (CFG-300).
• Releasing circuit protection from false alarm by disconnecting the battery if the voltage falls below 19V.
2
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing.
Zone
Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.
Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
Display Points
There is a display point associated with every initiating and indicating circuit of the MR-2320 LED Series fire panel.
For an initiating circuit there are two LEDs for every display point: one single color (amber) and one dual color (red/ amber). For an indicating circuit there is only one LED: one single color (amber), for every display point.
Wiring Styles
Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an
MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).
This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board, which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z). Releasing circuits (Z) are Class B (Style B) only.
3
System Components
System Components
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT ACTIVE
AGENT RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
MR-2320 SERIES
Agent Release Control Panel
Model
MR-2320-R
Description
Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release
Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits. Output circuits 1 & 2 are Class B (Style
B) indicating circuits that can be converted to
Class A (Style Z) using an MR-2300-NC2
Output Class A Converter adder module.
Output circuits 3 & 4 are Class B (Style B) only releasing circuits. Each output circuit can draw
1.7A current, 5A total. A six zone MR-2300-A
Input Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. MR-2320 contains Common Alarm,
Common Supervisory & Common Trouble
Relays, auxiliary alarm relay (disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four Wire Smoke Detector
Power Supply. Two batteries are required.
MR-2320-DR Same as above except with dialer.
Relay Modules: Six Relays
Model Description
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5
NO/NC C
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
MR-2306-
R6
Six-relay adder module
Polarity Reversal/City Tie
Model Description
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and/or City
Tie Module
JW4
4
Smart Relay Module
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Model
MR-2312-SW12
Description
Smart Relay Module
(12 relays) with white enclosure
MR-2312-SR12
Smart Relay Module
(12 relays) with red enclosure
MR-2300 SERIES
REMOTE RELAY
Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits
Model
MR-2300-A
Description
Input Class A converter
Module (six circuits). This module has built-in active
EOL resistors.
Output Class A Converter: Two Circuits
Model
MR-2300-NC2
Description
Output Class A converter module (two circuits)
MR-2312-ATW Remote Annunciator
Model Description
A.C.
ON
COMMON
TROUBLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
SWITCH
ENABLE
SIGNAL
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
FIRE ALARM
ANNUNCIATOR
MR-2312-ATW 16 Zone remote annunciator
5
System Components
Active end-of-line
The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.
Model Description
ELRX-400
RED
BLACK
ELRX-400R
Active end-of-line resistor without plate
Active end-of-line resistor with end-ofline red plate
Additional System Accessories
Model: MR-2306-ATR/W Eight Zone Remote Annunciator
Model: MR-2300T
Model: MP-400
Model: MP-400R
Model: BC-160
Remote Trouble Indicator
EOL resistor plate, 3.9K
EOL resistor plate, red
External Battery Cabinet
Model: MP-1500R/W Current
Model: MP-320R/W Solenoid Module
Model: MR-2316-AT Remote Annunciator
Ω
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
6
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Enclosure
Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws.
Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring
11"
1.5"
PLACE MR-2320 TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX
17"
14.5"
4 Mounting
Holes for
Surface
Mounting
20.0"
22.5"
Adhere trim ring to wall surface around the MR-2320 backbox.
5.425"
1" 3.5"
14.5"
4.5
"
1" is the minimum depth above the wall required for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
3.5" is the maximum depth for semi-flush mounting using the flush trim ring
Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall.
Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.
7
Mechanical Installation
The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.
TRIM RING
WALL MIN 1”
WOOD OR
METAL STUD
BACKBOX
8
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Installing the Adder Modules
The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules.
Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW1
TO MR-2300-PR MODULE
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
P6
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
P6
BATTERY
P5
SEC TX
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits MR-2300-NC2
(2 circuits)
Transformer
AC wiring terminal
BATTERY BATTERY
9
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder
Modules
Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board
Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings
JW3-Removed all the time
JW3
For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922 for details
JW5-Normally Open
JW6-Normally Open
RS-485 for annunciators
Alarm Relay
Supervisory
Relay
JW4 -Normally Short
Auxiliary Relay
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASE
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
Trouble Relay
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
Connect to
MR-2300-PR
Connect to
MR-2306-R6
Relay module
JW1
TO MR-2300-PR MODULE
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
P3
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
P4
JW2 - ON- when
MR-2306-R6 not connected
Unfiltered 24V supply
Power supply and control interface, including
AC power and battery supplies.
10
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board
JW1 Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected.
P4
Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.
Otherwise not used.
JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.
JW3 Removed all the time.
JW4 Normally short.
JW5
JW6
Normally open. Place jumper here and power down the panel (both AC power and batteries). Then power up the panel again, the password is restored to the default after system startup. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5.
Leave normally open.
Normally open to BLOCK configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a
CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
All these pins comes with red and black wires which are connected to the detection circuit on the main fire alarm board. Red is positive and black is negative mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the
Main Fire Alarm Board.
Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.
11
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
OCAC-302
MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit
1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.
The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.
Relay Adder Module
Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P4 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module main fire alarm board
INDIVIDUAL GREEN
RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
RELAY 2
NO/NC C
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P4 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
The correlation of the relays are fixed and is as follows:
Active State
Relay1
Hazard 1
Alert
Relay2
Hazard 1
Alarm
Relay3
Hazard 1
Release
Relay4
Hazard 2
Alert
Relay5
Hazard 2
Alarm
Relay6
Hazard 2
Release
12
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)
Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
P1 P2
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR.
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings
P1
JW1
JW2
Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or
"open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a
"zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the
City Tie Box will be retriggered. See configuration of Alarm Xmit-Sil on page for more information.
The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 1 or 3 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Pwr Fail Dly Tmr configuration on page for more information.
13
Field Wiring
Field Wiring
Main Board Field Wiring
Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications.
CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor or an active EOL module.
Figure 8: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM ZONE
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION
SUPERVISORY
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE
RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT
THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL THE
INITIATING CIRCUITS.
14
Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
CONVERTER MODULE
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
4 MORE INITIATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM
ZONE
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO
SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION SUPERVISORY
15
Field Wiring
Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring
Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11 . Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit.
When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.
When on the same circuit, DET 5 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 1, while DET6 Abort/Manual release combination is for hazard area 2. When an Abort/Manual release combination is used, ensure that the
Manual release switch is always before the Abort switch. Also ensure that there is a current limiting resistor (MP-
1500R/W) between the Manual release and Abort switch for differentiating between the two switches.
Figure 10: Abort and Manual Release Switch Class B or Style B Wiring
Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
OR ELRX-300/R
MANUAL RELEASE
SWITCH
Use MS-403,404
USE ONLY NO
CONTACT
ABORT SWITCH
CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION ACCEPTABLE TO
THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
MAXIMUM IMPEDENCE = 1.4K OHMS
RATED CURRENT = 45mA
RATED VOLTAGE= 24V
Note: Maximum 4 Abort Switches can be connected on each combined Manual Release and
Abort Switch circuit.
Note: For the circuit with the combined Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch, a maximum of four Abort
Switches can be connected.
16
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring
Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
MR-2300-A
CLASS A
CONVERTER
MODULE
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
+
-
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #5
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #6
+
-
+
-
MR-2300-A
CLASS A
CONVERTER
MODULE
MANUAL RELEASE
SWITCH
USE MS-403,404
USE ONLY NO
CONTACT
ABORT SWITCH
CCONNECT A UL/ULC LISTED ABORT STATION
ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ, COMPLYING WITH THE
FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
MAXIMUM IMPEDENCE = 1.4K OHMS
RATED CURRENT = 45mA
RATED VOLTAGE= 24V
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Current limiter
MP-1500R/W
Note: Maximum 4 Abort
Switches can be connected on each combined Manual
Release and Abort Switch circuit.
17
Field Wiring
Indicating Circuit Wiring
The MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits.
Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7
A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.
Figure 12: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring
MR-2320 Panel
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 2
BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
Figure 13: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring
MR-2320 Panel
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 2
BELL STROBE
OCAC-302 CLASS A
CONVERTER MODULE
HORN
18
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Releasing Circuit Wiring
Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14 , below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9K
Ω EOL resistor is used. The supervisory current passes through the solenoid coil thus confirming the integrity of the solenoid coil for open coil. The wiring is supervised for the open and short conditions.
Figure 14: Releasing Circuit Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
Releasing circuit #1
Releasing circuit #2
+
-
+
-
Solenoid EOL module
MP-320R/W
Solenoid EOL module
MP-320R/W
Solenoid Coil (See the listing for the approved solenoids)
Dialer Wiring
If you have an MR-2320-DR, there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 15 below.
Figure 15: Dialer Wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN
BOARD
LINE-1
LINE-2
GREEN
RED
BROWN
GREY
1
RJ31X
2 3
4
8
7 6
5
TIP
RING
Public switch
Telephone company wiring
TIP
RING premise telephone
IF permitted
Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1
19
Field Wiring
Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LEGEND
+
-
+
-
POWER
+
-
RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
22VDC, 200mA
MAX. CURRENT - 300mA
MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV
(POWER LIMITED)
+
-
+
DETECTION
4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE
TO INITIATING
CIRCUIT
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
6
3
4
5
2
1
END OF LINE RELAY
LISTED S3403
MODEL A77-716B
MANUFACTURED BY
SYSTEM SENSOR
NOTES
ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,
OR FPLP POWER LIMITED
CABLE
Relay Adder Module Wiring
Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection
RELAY
CIRCUIT #1
RELAY
CIRCUIT #2
C
NO/NC
C
NO/NC
RELAY
CIRCUIT #6
C
NO/NC
NORMALLY OPEN
CONNECTION
NORMALLY CLOSE
CONNECTION
NORMALLY OPEN OR
NORMALLY CLOSED
CONNECTION IS
SELECTED BY JUMPER
ON RELAY BOARD.
ALL RELAY CONTACTS
28V DC, 1 AMP
RESISTIVE LOAD
NOTE: ALL RELAYS ARE POWER LIMITED
CIRCUITS AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or
FPLP POWER LIMITED CABLE.
20
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring
Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18 , below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.
For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective
Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.
For use in Canada, the Protective Device is not required but still recommended.
Figure 18: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection
+
-
+
-
+
CITY TIE LOCAL ENERGY
RATED - 24VDC FILTERED
TRIP COIL - 14 Ohms, 250mA,
5mV RIPPLE
POWER LIMITED
POLARITY REVERSAL ALARM
24VDC OPEN
12VDC AT 3.5mA
8mA MAX. SHORT
POWER LIMITED
POLARITY REVERSAL SUPV.
24VDC OPEN
12VDC AT 3.5mA
8mA MAX. SHORT
-
POWER LIMITED
1
2
S
1
2
S
1
2
S
1
2
S
PROTECTOR
1
2
S
+
-
USE A SHORTING WIRE
WHEN THE CITY TIE IS
NOT USED
1
2
+
-
S
CONFIRMS TO NEMA STANDARD
SB3-1969 INTENDED FOR
CONNECTION TO POLARITY
REVERSAL CIRCUIT OF A REMOTE
STATION RECEIVING UNIT HAVING
COMPATIBLE RATINGS
DIN RAIL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND
PROCTECTOR
1
+
2
-
S
1
2
S
POWER LIMITED CABLE TYPE
FPL, FPLR or FPLP MUST BE
USED FROM PR-300 TO
PROTECTORS.
DIN RAIL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND
21
Field Wiring
Power Supply Connection
The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:
Type
Electrical Input rating
Rating
120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Power supply total current
Battery fuse on Main module
10A, slow blow micro fuse
Wire the power supply as shown below in Figure 19 using the proper wire gauge.
CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Figure 19: Power Supply Connection
Deluge Panel Control Board
BUZZER
SILENCE
SPARE
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
P6
Power Supply Control Board
P6
BATTERY
P5
10A slow blow red
+ red red
+ blk yellow red blk green
240 VAC 50Hz
120 VAC 60Hz
N
GND
BATTERY BATTERY
NOTE:
TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE
SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON
22
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring Tables and Information
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wire gauge
AWG
22
20
18
16
14
12
Maximum wiring run to last device
Feet
2990
4760
7560
12000
19000
30400
Meters
910
1450
2300
3600
5800
9200
Notes:
• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.
• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.
• Maximum capacitance of 0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring
Total signal load in amperes
0.06
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
18 AWG
2350
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
716
360
143
71
47
36
29
24
Maximum wiring run to last device
16 AWG
3750
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
1143
567
229
114
76
56
46
38
14 AWG
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
6000
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
1829
915
366
183
122
91
73
61
Notes:
• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.
• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.
12 AWG
8500
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285
2591
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. loop resistance in ohms
30
15
6
3
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)
Four-wire smoke power is provided for four-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)
Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power and the common trouble is active. The power is reconnected after the 'RESET' key is pressed. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
23
Field Wiring
Auxiliary Power (unregulated)
This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.
24
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
System Checkout
Before turning the power “ON”
To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main
AC supply.
1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.
2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.
3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.
4. Check all jumpers and switches for proper setting.
5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.
6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).
7. Make sure to close the front cover plate before powering the system from main AC supply.
The best way to check out a panel first is to not connect any field wiring. Power up the panel with an end of line. The panel should be free of trouble. Then connect one circuit at one time. If a trouble occurs, correct the fault then continue the field wiring.
Power-up procedure
After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,
8. Power up the panel. The "AC ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.
9. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).
All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (below the
TROUBLE relay at left bottom of board).
Note: Green LED I4 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.
10.Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Circuit
Trouble
Remote
Trouble
Ground Fault
Battery
Trouble
Common
Trouble
Possible Cause
To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or if the Circuit
Disconnect Button is active. Notes: (1) Bypassing a detection circuit or signal circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal status); (2) Bypassing a releasing circuit will cause a supervisory signal.
Remote Trouble will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.
This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.
Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.
If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above confirming trouble indicators are on, check the following for possible fault:
• Check for any missing interconnection wiring.
• Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.
• Check for improperly secured cabling.
25
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Refer to Figure 20 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations.
Figure 20: LED indicators and control buttons
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE M
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
The Main Display Panel on the Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board consists of:
• 16 common LED Indicators (left portion of display)
• Ten Common Buttons (left half portion of display)
• Up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators
• Four Indicating/Releasing Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC for Notifying Appliance Circuit or RAC for Releasing
Appliance Circuit)
• Up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuits & four for indicating/releasing circuits)
LED Indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates.
• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
• Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC.
Common LED indicators
AC ON
The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels. It is turned off when the level falls below the power-fail threshold.
26
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
COMMON ALARM
The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system
COMMON TROUBLE
The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system
BATTERY TROUBLE
Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.
Flashes amber at a fast rate when there is a trouble on the battery charger circuit
REMOTE TROUBLE
Flashes amber at a slow rate as a result of any remote trouble condition
GROUND FAULT
Flashes amber at a slow rate when there is a ground fault detected in the system
CPU FAIL
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the CPU is not working properly
ABORT
Illuminate steady amber when the abort circuit is active
RELEASED
Illuminate steady red when the releasing circuit(s) is active
SYSTEM RESET
Turn on steady amber during the system reset process
SIGNAL SILENCE
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the signal circuits are silenced
AUXILIARY DISCONNECT
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the auxiliary disconnect function is active
LAMP TEST
Illuminate amber steady when the lamp test button is pressed
BUZZER SILENCE
Flashes amber at a slow rate when the buzzer is silenced
PRE RELEASE
Flashes red at a fast rate, when the release timer is started turns off when the release timer expires or the system is reset
27
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Menu Buttons
To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details.
Menu Button
M
Pressing M and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu.
Info Button
?
X
When the system is off-normal, press
?
to display extra information of the event.
Enter Button
Pressing this button to select a menu option or to confirm a menu operation.
Cancel Button
To return to previous menu in the configuration or command mode.
Switches and Common Indicators
The MR-2320 Series panel is a six-zone panel with four output circuits. The circuits are arranged in the following configuration:
Zone 1 Input circuit
Zone 2 Input circuit
Zone 3 Input circuit
Zone 4 Input circuit
Zone 5 Manual Release/Abort switches combination or individual switch
Zone 6 Manual Release/Abort switches combination or individual switch
Out 1
Out 2
NAC1
NAC2
Out 3
Out 4
Releasing circuit 1
Releasing circuit 2 or NAC3 in some applications
Zone 1 to Zone 4
• Alarm LED (red) turns on steady when an alarm is detected
• Supervisory LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is active
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble or bypassed
Zone 5 and Zone 6
• Alarm LED & Trouble LED The zone type and LED behavior varies upon the configuration. Steady when turned on.
Out1 and Out2 (NAC circuits)
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble or bypassed
Out3 and Out4 (Releasing circuits)
• Trouble LED (amber) turns on steady when the circuit is bypassed turns on at slow flash rate when in trouble
Input Circuits Bypass Switch
These bypass switches are used to bypass the input circuit. Bypass is a toggle switch which will bypass and unbypass in a sequence whenever the switch is pressed. When the input circuit is bypassed a trouble is generated and the system will not respond to any trouble or alarm on the bypassed input circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast rate for 10 seconds.
During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.
28
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Output Circuits Bypass Switch
The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off.
Common Controls
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits. In particular, the system reset button
• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions
• Resets all Initiating and Releasing Circuits
• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply
• Turns off all Indicating Circuits
• Turns off Signal Silence Indicator
• Stops and resets all Timers
• Processes inputs as new events
• Does not affect Aux Disconnect
Signal Silence Button
Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period.
Auxiliary Disconnect Button
Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the Auxiliary Disconnect function. The Auxiliary Alarm Relay is always disconnected with this button. The Common Alarm Relay, the Common Supervisory relay and all correlated alarm relays may be disconnected as selected through configuration. Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button also causes the Common Trouble LED to illuminate steady, the common trouble relay to send a trouble message and the trouble buzzer to flash at the trouble flash rate. Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button again de-activates this function and the system will go back to normal.
Lamp Test Button
Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated.
Buzzer Silence Button
Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating indicating, and releasing circuits on the Fire
Alarm Control Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.
Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. Pressing a releasing circuit disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated releasing circuit and turns on its LED, activating common supervisory. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status
(alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits.
Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will unbypass (reconnect) the circuit.
Disconnecting an active Latching Initiating Circuit (including Alarms, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, General
Alarm, and Latching Supervisory) does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting an active Non-
Latching Initiating Circuit (including Non-Latching Supervisory and Trouble-Only) causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.
29
Indicators, Controls and Operations
When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input. If the Circuit is not re-bypassed by then, it will be processed as a new input.
Common Relays
Relay Type
Trouble Relay
Supervisory Relay
Alarm Relay
Aux Alarm Relay
Single Hazard
Trouble
Supervisory
Alarm
Alarm (Silence-able)
Dual Hazard
Trouble
Supervisory
Hazard1 (Alarm)
Hazard2 (Alarm)
Note: Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.
Circuit Types
Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types
Non-Verified Alarm
A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)
Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm
LED to illuminate red.
Note: Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate.
The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear (as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.
Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate.
The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.
Abort Switch
When the hazard area is in alarm (pre-discharge) state and the release timer is running, the activation of the corresponding Abort Switch will pause the releasing timer. The release process is held while the Abort Switch is pressed. Releasing the Abort Switch will resume the releasing timer and the corresponding hazard area goes into
Alarm (pre-discharge) state again. The value of the release timer after Abort Switch is released depends on the type
30
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated.
When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.
Manual Release Switch
Activation of the Manual Release Switch of a hazard area will activate the corresponding releasing circuit. If the corresponding Manual Release Delay is non-zero, the releasing circuit will be activate after the Manual Release
Delay expires.
Combination of Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch
This type of circuit is the combination of both Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. This combination always applies to the same hazard area. A short condition on the circuit is a Manual Release Active and a current limit condition is an Abort Switch Active.
Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types
Silenceable Signal
The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically.
Non-Silenceable Signal
The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the evacuation code pattern that is configured by the user. For more information on evacuation codes, refer to Evacuation Codes on page.
Silenceable Strobe
Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.
Non-Silenceable Strobes
Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed.
Evacuation codes
Continuous
Temporal Code
20 BPM
60 BPM
120 BPM
On 100% of the time
3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause
1.5 seconds on, 1.5 seconds off
0.5 second on, 0.5 second off
0.25 second on, 0.25 second off
Figure 21: Evacuation and Alert Codes
0.5s
0.5s
1.5s
1.5s
CONTINUOUS
1.5s
TEMPORAL CODE
20 BPM
0.5s
0.5s
0.25s
0.25s
60 BPM
120 BPM
31
Configuration
Configuration
Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with
CFG-300 for configuration information).
Using the CFG-300 Tool
Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press M (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main
Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in Figure 22, below.
Figure 22: MR-2320 Configuration
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
M COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT
RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
0
QZ
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
*
(left shift)
#
(right shift)
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
PRE
RELEASE
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
RAC1
(ZONE 3)
RAC2
(ZONE 4)
6
MNO
7
PRS
8
TUV
9
WXY
32
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Entering the Passcode
The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press
(Enter button) after entering the passcode. If the passcode is correct, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display.
Enter passcode:
_
Three leves of access are defined:
1) Command - Level 0:
The default password is for this level “1111” without quotes. In this level the user can only perform regular testing and operation.
2) Configuration - Level 1:
The default password is for this level “2222” without quotes. User can change configuration and have access to command level.
3) Factory - Level 2:
Currently not used.
When the user presses “MENU” and enters the passsword, they should enter the password of the level intended. If the user is in a lower level of access, attempts to operate functions requiring a higher level of access will be refused.
33
Configuration
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320
1. Press M (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password.
2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue.
3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing . The corresponding submenu will display.
4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.
5. Press to select a submenu option.
6. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different menu options. When entering numerical data, use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number.
7. Once you have made the correct selection, press submenu screen.
8. Press X
to confirm the change. The display will return to the
(Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.
Command Menu
The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show “-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the key to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the “Exit” menu option and then press either the X or key.
Note: Command Menu Item 1 and 6 can only be accessed if jumper JW6 is placed on the main board.
Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below.
MR-2320 Mode-1 DACT
Version 0.1.17
The first line shows the panel mode number, pre-programmed mode and the information if the panel has a dialer or not. The second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as
Major.Minor.Revision.
-Command Menu-
1. Panel Config
2. Set Time
3. Set Password
4. View EventLog
5. Clear Event Log
6. Dialer Config
7. Test Dialer
8. Exit
Access level Required
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Command
Command
Configuration
Command
Command
34
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
1. Panel Config (Command-Menu)
The following is a detailed description of the MR-2320 configuration menu.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
-P a ne l Co n fig -
1 . C h o o se a m o d e
2 . H a za r d C o nfig
3 . P a ne l Fea tu res
4. Default Config
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Choose a mode
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Choose a mode
1. Choose a mode
Choose a mode:
1
1-->Default
Use this function to choose a pre-programmed panel configuration.
Selections range from modes 1 to 11. Refer to Pre-Programming
Modes on page for details on mode configurations.
Note: changing the fixed configuration of the panel will cause all configuration data set to default for that particular mode.
35
Configuration
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config
-Hazard Param.-
1. Release timer
2. Abort Delay
3. Manual Rls Delay
4. Soak timer
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
1. Release Timer
Release timer(sec):
60
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
2. Abort Delay
Abort Delay Type:
[X] Standard UL
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
3. Man. Rls Delay
Man. Rls Delay(sec):
0
60->Default
Available options:
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,
45,50,55,60 seconds
[X] Standard UL->Default
[ ] IRI
[ ] NYC
[ ] Local Juris.
0->Default
Available options:
0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds
Use this function to set the programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing application circuits.
This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross-zoned hazard area) or a single alarm (noncross-zoned hazard area).
When the timer expires, the releasing circuit activates.
Value: 0 to 60 seconds in fivesecond increments.
Use this function to set how the
Abort Switch operates with the
Release Timer.
Note that if the Release Timer is set to zero, the Abort Switch does not operate.
In Standard UL mode, the release timer will stop and hold when the Abort Switch is pressed. When the switch is released, the Release Timer restarts from whichever is greater: the remaining time on the timer or 10 seconds.
In IRI mode, the switch works in the same way as it does in
Standard UL mode, except that the switch will function only if it is pressed and held before the second alarm comes in.
In NYC mode, pressing the
Abort Switch will reset to the
Release Timer and add 90 seconds to the configured timer duration. After the Abort Switch is released, the Release Timer will restart.
In Local Juris. (Local
Jurisdiction Delay), pressing the
Abort Switch will reset the
Release Timer back to its configured value. After the switch is released, the Release
Timer will restart.
Use this function to set the time delay of activation of corresponding releasing circuit(s) after activation of the manual release switch.
Value: 0 to 30 seconds in fivesecond increments.
36
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Hazard Config
4. Soak timer
Soak timer(sec):
0
0->Default (continuous)
The selectable values are in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, 120(2min),
180(3min), 240(4min),
300(5min), 360(6min),
420(7min), 480(8min),
540(9min), 600(10min),
660(11min), 720(12min),
780(13min), 840(14min),
900(15min)
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
Use this function to set the length of time for which the releasing circuit is active. When the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically shuts off the activated releasing circuit.
0 seconds means that the soak timer is disabled and the releasing circuit is active continuously.
-Panel Features-
1. Man. Sig. Sil
2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd
3. Aux Dis Corr
4. Sig-Sil Inh Tm
5. Aux Dis Alm&Sv
6. Auto Sil. Tmr
7. Rem. Annun.
8. Alm. Xmit. Sil.
9. Pwr Fail Tmr.
10. Com. Supv. Rly
11. Sig. Sil. Isol.
12. 1st Alarm Code
13. 2nd Alarm Code
14. Supv. Latching
15. Supv on NAC-2
16. Sig-Sil NAC
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
1. Manual Sig. Silence
Man. Sig. Sil.
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the Signal Silence operation on the panel.
37
Configuration
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd
Waterflow/Sprk Retd
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
3. Aux Dis Corr
Aux Dis. Dis Corr
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
4. Sig-Sil Inh Tmr
Sig-Sil. Inhibit Timer
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 10sec
[ ] 20sec
[ ] 30sec
[ ] 1min
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
5. Aux. Dis. Dis Alam&Sv
Aux Dis. Dis Alm&Sv
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
6. Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr
Auto Sig-Sil. Tmr
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
7. Rem. Annun.
No. of Remote Annun.
[X] NONE
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
...
[ ] 6
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
8. Alarm Xmit-Sil.
Alm Xmit-Sil.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
By default all the initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, a retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler.
By default this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay when the aux disconnect button is pressed. If enabled, this function will disconnect the auxiliary alarm relay and all correlated relays when the aux disconnect button is pressed.
Correlated relays include:
MR-2306-R6 and MR-2312-
S12.
Use this function to inhibit the signal silence switch for a desired length of time. The time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should be set to one minute.
If enabled the Common Alarm and Common Supervisory relays will be disconnected when Aux. Disconnect is pressed. Also, the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the Common Alarm relay, the
Common Supervisory relay, and the MR-2300-PR.
Use this function to set the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.
Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.
Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.
Use this function to allow the alarm transmit and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on the
Signal Silence rather than the
Reset switch.
38
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
9. Pwr Fail Tmr
AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr.
[X] None
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1 HRS
[ ] 3 HRS
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
10. Com. Supv. Rly
Common Supv. Relay
[X] ENABLE
[X] ENABLE->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
11. Sig-Sil. Isol.
Sig-Sil. Isol.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
12.1st Alarm NAC Code
1st Alarm NAC Code
[X] Temporal
[X] Temporal ->Default
[ ] 20 BPM
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
13. 2nd Alarm NAC Code
2nd Alarm NAC Code
[X] 120 BPM
[X] 120 BPM->Default
[ ] 60 BPM
[ ] Temporal
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC power fail trouble for a specific time period. If disabled, the AC power fail will be reported immediately.
If disabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as a common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If enabled, it is used as a common supervisory relay.
Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only).
Sets the NAC indicating code when the 1st alarm comes in.
Choose the NAC indicating code when the 2nd alarm comes in.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
14.Supv. Latching
Supervisory Latching
[X] Non-latching
[ ] Latching
[X] Non-latching->Default
Use this function to set the supervisory circuit as either latching or non-latching.
NOTE: For ULC operation the supervisory should be programmed as latching
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
15. Supv on NAC-2
Supv. Alert on NAC-2
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Use this function to enable/ disable the supervisory circuit indication on NAC-2.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features
16. Sig-Sil NAC
Silenceable NAC
[X] NAC-1
[X] NAC-1->Default
[X] NAC-2->Default
Use this function to set which
NAC circuits are silenceable or non-silenceable.
39
Configuration
Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/
17. Active EOL
Active EOL
[X] DISABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Enable this function if using an
Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A
Converter has built in Active
EOL resistors.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Default Config
Command Menu-->Panel Config-->
Default Config
4. Default Config
Y-->Default
Load the default
Settings? Y
Use this function to reset the panel to the default configuration of the chosen programming mode.
40
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
2. Set Time (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1. Daylight Save
2. Time Clock
3. Compensation
Command Menu/Set time Date
1. Daylight saving time
Daylight Saving
[X] DISABLE
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Set time and date
HH:MM WKD YYYY-MM-DD
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
[X] DISABLE ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to enable daylight savings time.
Default
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and
“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.
Note: time is in 24hr format
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Compensation
H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D
0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
When value is entered the following message will appear
Default: 0 seconds
(no compensation)
Compensation values can range from -15 to
+15 seconds.
Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively. For a slow clock adjust positively.
For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.
Daily Compen. (Sec):
Panel Config Updated
41
Configuration
3. Set password (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
First choose the level of password to be changed
Select Access Level
0
Then
Enter new passcode:
Re-enter new passcode:
If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu
0 -> Default invalid passcode
Use this function to change the pass-code. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum is 10. Only numeric digits are allowed.
If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu passcode updated
The user can change the password only for the current access level as well as any lower levels.
42
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
4. View Event Log (Command-Menu)
The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG-
300 LCD Configuration tool display.
ZONE
Message
Process
Type
Physical
Zone No.
Zone-1
OPEN TRB 01/09
EVENT type
EVENT
01 of 09
"INFO" Key
DATE
NVERIF ALARM Z -01
11:45 THU 2005-3-31
TIME
There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.
5. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
-Select Log-
1. Alarm Log
2. General Log
3. All Logs
Select the type of log to clear. Press the
“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.
Clear all the
Selected log(s)? Y
Use this function to clear alarm logs, event logs, or both.
Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the
“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.
Log(s) cleared
43
Configuration
6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.
-Dialer Config-
1. Account Info
2. Telephone line
3. Report Options
4. Time Parameter
5. Enable/Disable
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Account Info
-Account Info-
1. Account#1 ID
2. Account#1 Tel
3. Accnt#1 Format
4. Account#2 ID
5. Account#2 Tel
6. Accnt#2 Format
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
1.Account# 1 Identification
Account#1 ID
123456
123456->Default
Use this function to set the
Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six. For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.
If you are using contact ID the allowed digits for the account
ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the
SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).
To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
44
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
2.Account#1 Telephone Number
Account#1 Telnum:
101
[101]->Default
Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is
19 including “,” and numerals.
The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter “,” press the
INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone
# is 9,,12345678.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
3.Account#1 Reporting Format
ACCOUNT#1 Format:
[X] CONTACT ID
[X] CONTACT ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
4. Account# 2 Identification
ACCOUNT#2 ID:
654321
654321->Default
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
5.Account# 2 Telephone Number
ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:
101
[ 101 ]->Default
Same as Account#1.
Same as Account#1.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
6.Account# 2 Reporting Format
ACCOUNT#2 Format:
[X] CONTACT ID
[X] Contact ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Same as Account#1.
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
45
Configuration
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Telephone Line
-Telephone Line-
1. Line1 Dialtype
2. Line2 Dialtype
3. Line1 Dialtone
4. Line2 Dialtone
5. Num of Retries
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
1. Line#1 Dialing Type
Line#1 Dialing Type:
[X] DTMF Dial
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
2. Line#2 Dialing Type
Line#2 Dialing Type:
[X] DTMF Dial
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone
Line#1 Wait Dialtone
[X] ENABLE
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone
Line#2 Wait Dialtone
[X] ENABLE
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Same as Line#1.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Same as Line#1.
46
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
5.Number of retries
Number of Retries:
06
06 ->Default
Number of retries ranges between 5 to 10
Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Report Options
-Report Options-
1. Alarm Prio.
2. Trouble Prio.
3. Supv. Prio
4. Aux Dis Report
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
1. Alarm Report priority
Alarm Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
2.Trouble priority
Trouble Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
3. Supervisory priority
SUPV Report Prio:
[X] Account 1
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
47
Configuration
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt.
AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt.
[X] DISABLE
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
If this function is enabled, the
Aux Disconnect feature
(obtained by pressing the Aux
Disconnect button) will block the alarm and supervisory events from being reported through the built-in dialer.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Time Parameters
-Time Parameter-
1. AC-Loss Delay
2. Cellphone Date
3. Auto-Test Time
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
1. AC Loss delay
AC-Loss Delay(Hrs)
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
2. Cellular report date
Cellular Report Date
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
3. Auto test time
Auto-Test (HH:MM):
00:30
0 ->Default
The AC loss delay ranges from 0 to 20 hours
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period. Press UP or
DOWN button to increase or decrease the number of hours.
0 ->Default
The cellular report date ranges from 0 to
28
00:30 ->Default
Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the phone line is a regular line.
Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. Press the UP or
DOWN buttons to scroll through the days.
Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means
00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight. Press the UP or DOWN buttons to increase or decrease the time.
Please do not use the following test times: 00:00,
01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.
48
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Dialer Enable/Disable
Dialer Ena/Dis
[X] ENABLE
------WARNING-----
Dialer Disabled!!!
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
The dialer is enabled by default. When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.
Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.
7. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)
-Dialer Test-
1. L#1 Manual test
2. L#2 Manual test
3. Reset Dialer
L#1 Manual test
L#2 Manual test
3. Reset Dialer
Press Enter to test Line #1. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
Press Enter to test Line #2. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press Cancel to exit this menu.
49
Configuration
Dialer Test Messages
The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.
Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual
Test is selected.
No DC Volt
No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.
Waiting for Dialtone
The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.
Failed: No Dialtone
Dialing Receiver Now
This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.
The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.
No DTMF tone
Waiting for Acktone
Failed no Acktone
Reporting Event Now
Waiting for Kissoff
This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.
Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the availability by sending an ack tone.
This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.
When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for
Kissoff “ for all events sent.
The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.
50
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
No Kissoff
No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.
Passed: Manual Test
The line passed the test; everything is OK.
8. Exit (Command-Menu)
Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.
51
Operating the Panel
Operating the Panel
Panel Operation During Various Hazard States
The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of
Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch.
Hazard Idle
• No correlated alarm zone active.
• Release Timer is not started.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is not started.
• Abort Switch is off.
• Manual Release Switch is off.
• Corresponding NAC circuit is off.
• Releasing circuit(s) is off.
Hazard Alert (or equivalently first Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)
• The panel enters the Hazard Alert state when
• a single alarm comes in for a cross-zoned hazard. For non cross-zoned hazard area, a single alarm will put hazard into Hazard Alarm state directly.
• the Abort Switch becomes active during Hazard Alarm state, so that the hazard area state downgrades from
Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert.
• Release Timer is not started.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is not started.
• Correlated NAC circuit(s) turns on at alert rate.
Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge, or equivalently second Alarm in Cross-zoned Application)
• The panel enters the Hazard Alarm state when
• it detects the confirming alarm for hazard area (single alarm active for the non cross-zoned system, or 2nd alarm active in the cross-zoned system), or
• Manual Release Switch is active.
• Release Timer (RT) is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state after by detecting the 2nd alarm in cross-zoned hazard or 1st alarm in non cross-zoned hazard.
• Manual Release Delay Timer is started when the panel enters Hazard Alarm state by detecting the correlated
Manual Release Switch active.
• Releasing circuit(s) will be activated after the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires.
• Corresponding NAC(s) turns on at alarm rate.
• During Hazard Alarm State, when the release timer is running and the Abort Switch turns on, the hazard area state will change from Hazard Alarm to Hazard Alert. Release Timer is held and the corresponding NAC sounds the Alert rate. If the Abort Switch is released, the hazard state will go back to Hazard Alarm and the Release
Timer resumes running. The value of release timer depends on Abort Delay Type. The corresponding NAC sounds Alarm rate again.
Hazard Release
• Panel enters Hazard Release when the Release Timer or Manual Release Timer expires. The correlated releasing circuit is activated.
• NAC code for Hazard Release state is steady.
52
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
General Panel Operation
• Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release
Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort
Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT).
• When the manual release switch is active and the panel is in the Hazard Alarm (pre-discharge) state, Abort
Switch cannot override the Manual Release Switch. Only the System Reset key can interrupt and reset the panel and hazard area.
• System Reset will reset all circuits, including releasing circuits.
• The supervisory circuit can be optionally indicated on NAC-2 circuit. The NAC code of supervisory circuit should be different from those of Hazard Alert or Hazard Alarm. By default, when the NAC code for Hazard Alert is
Temporal, the NAC code for supervisory circuit is 20 BPM or verse visa. This configuration change is automatically done by the panel. If NAC code for alert is chosen other than 20 BPM and Temporal, Supervisory
NAC code will remain unchanged during the configuration.
• In some pre-programmed modes, the Alert Rate and the Alarm Rate are configured the same. So the action of
Abort Switch does not change the NAC rate.
• AB/MR is the combination of Manual Release Switch and Abort Switch in the Agent Release panel. Short condition means Manual Release active. Current Limit means Abort Switch active.
• To avoid the conflict of different NAC code on the same circuit, the priority of signals are defined as, Water-flow alarm has the highest priority, then hazard cadence. The supervisory signal has the lowest priority.
• Soak Timer sets the time period how long the releasing circuits should be active. Upon the expiration of soak timer, the releasing circuits will be shut off. Setting of 0 second means the releasing circuits will be turned on without timer running. They will be shut off upon system reset.
• Abort function is not applicable in pre-action and deluge application.
53
Pre-Programmed Modes
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Detection Zones Phantom Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Zp1 Zp2
Release Timers
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Alm Alm WF Sup AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Non-latching by default)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release Switch
• NAC-1: Signal, will be on steady if there is any alarm zone or manual release switch active.
• NAC-2: Signal, indicates the cadence of hazard area 1 state or supervisory circuit (optional).
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC-2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
54
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 1
•
• Activation of either Z-1or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change the Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady.
NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 (RT-1) is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 change Hazard Area 1 state to Release. Both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on. NAC-2 sounds steady.
• Activation of Z-6 in any situation changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on steady, NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM. The manual release delay timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, Hazard
Area 1 state changes to Release. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turns on steady.
• When Hazard Area 1 state is in Alarm, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 rate changes from
120BPM to Temporal. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to
120BPM. Release Timer -1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if enabled.
55
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones
Zp1 Zp2
Release Timers
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Alm Alm WF Sup AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Water-flow or pressure switch)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (default non-latching)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC-1: Signal, will be on steady if there is any alarm zone or manual release switch active.
• NAC-2: Signal, indicates the cadence of hazard area 1 state or supervisory circuit (optional).
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC-2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory Signal is 20 BPM.
56
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 2
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 activates both RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual-release Timer 1 (MDT-1) in any situation. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 turns on Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.
• During Hazard Alarm state, if Z-5 is pressed, Release Timer-1 is held. After releasing of Z-5, Release Timer-1 resumes running and Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if enabled.
57
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm Alm Alm AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, Cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (Hazard Area 1)
• Detection Zone -6: Abort/Manual Release Combination (Hazard Area 2)
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 state
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 state
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
58
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 3
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM.
Release timer-1 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-
1 turns on at 120 BPM while this timer is running. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and
RAC-1 is activated.
• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alarm to Alert. Release
Timer is held and NAC-1 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.
• Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from
Alert to Alarm. Release Timer -1 resumes running and NAC-1 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-1 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 turn the Hazard Area 2 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at 120BPM.
Release timer-2 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release Switch active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-
2 turns on at 120 BPM while this timer is running. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and
RAC-2 is activated
• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alarm to Alert. Release
Timer -2 is held and NAC-2 changes from 120BPM to Temporal.
• Removal of the current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch is released. Hazard Area 1 state changes from Alert to
Alarm. Release Timer -2 resumes running and NAC-2 goes back to 120BPM. Release Timer-2 value depends on Abort Delay Type.
59
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm Alm Alm AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X
X X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort/Manual Release Combination (hazard 1)
• Detection Zone -6: Abort/Manual Release Combination (hazard 2)
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 state
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 state
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds
NAC Configuration
Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
How the Panel Works in Mode 4
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle to Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
Release Timer-1 is started.
60
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
• Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady.
• A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release
Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Short on Z-5 indicates Manual Release active. Manual Release Delay Timer - 1 (MDT-1) is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-1 turns on steady and RAC-1 is activated.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 turns the Hazard Area 2 state from Idle into Alarm. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
Release timer-2 is started.
• Upon expiration of Release Timer-2, RAC-2 is activated. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• A current limit on Z-6 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer -2 is held. Removal of the current limit on Z-6, means releasing Abort Switch. Release Timer -2 resumes running. Release Timer 2 value depends on Abort
Delay Type.
• Short on Z-6 indicates Manual Release active and Manual Release Delay Timer - 2(MDT-2) is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of MDT-2, NAC-2 turns on steady and RAC-2 is activated.
61
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X X X
(X)
Z6
WF
X
X
Phantom Zones
Zp1
Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4
RT1 Exp
X
X
X
62
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow Alarm.
• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated if there is any alarm zone active.
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 5
• Activation of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state from Idle to Alert. NAC-1 turns on steady. NAC-2 sounds Temporal.
• Activations of any two of Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-2 turns on at 120 BPM. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, both RAC-1 and RAC-2 turn on.
NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on Steady
• Activation of Z-6 turns on both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.
• Activation of Z-5 is indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X X X
(X)
X X X X
Z6
WF
X
Phantom Zones
Zp1
Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4
RT1 Exp
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Signal, steady on any alarm.
• NAC -2: Supervisory optional.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
How the Panel Works in Mode 6
• Activation of any one among Z-1, Z-2, Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, NAC-1 turns on steady. RAC-1 and RAC-2 are activated.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20 BPM, if configured.
• Activation of Z-6 turns NAC-1 steady.
63
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
WF Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 status
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: 120BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
64
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 7
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alert. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal.
• Activations of both Z-3 and Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 steady.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2, if enabled.
65
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release
Detection Zones
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Alm Alm Alm Alm Supv
X X
X X
WF
X
X
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
X X
X X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -4: Alarm (Hazard Area 2, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -5: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -6: Water-flow.
• NAC -1: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 1 status
• NAC -2: Escalating Signal, indicates Hazard Area 2 status
• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 2)
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 0 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds (not used)
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL (not used)
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Temporal
• Hazard Alarm: Temporal
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM.
66
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 8
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady.
• Activation of either Z-3 or Z-4 changes Hazard Area 2 state into Alarm. Release Timer 2 is started. NAC-2 turns on at Temporal. Upon expiration of Release Timer 2, RAC-2 is active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-5 can be indicated on NAC-2, if enabled.
67
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Releasing
Out4 Strobe Steady
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X
X
X
(X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area 1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC-1: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status.
• NAC-2: Escalating Signal, indicate Hazard Area 1 status, Supervisory Optional.
• RAC-1: Releasing Circuit (Hazard Area 1)
• NAC-3: Silenceable Strobe.
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds
• Default Abort Delay Type: NYC
• Default Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Steady
• Hazard Alarm: 120BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is 20 BPM
68
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 9
• The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady.
• If Abort Switch Z-5 is active when Release Timer-1 is running, Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alert. NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. Release Timer-1 is held.
• If Abort Switch Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 120BPM. Release Timer resumes running.
Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Timer 1 (MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, NAC-2 and NAC-3 turn on steady. RAC-1 is active.
• Activation of Z-4 is indicated at 20BPM on NAC-2, if configured.
69
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X X X X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, not cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC -1: Signal, will be activated steady when there is any alarm zone active.
• NAC -2: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• RAC 1: Releasing Circuit
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds.
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: 20BPM
• Hazard Alarm: 60BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is Temporal
70
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 10
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 activates both RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer -1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, both RAC-1 and
RAC-2 are active. NAC-1 and NAC-2 turn on steady.
• If Z-5 is active, Release Timer-1 is held and NAC-2 is downgraded from 60BPM to 20 BPM.
• Releasing of Z-5 resumes Release Timer-1 and NAC-2 goes back to 60BPM. Release Timer-1's value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-3 turns both NAC-1 and NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at Temporal, if configured.
71
Pre-Programmed Modes
Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release
Out1 Signal Steady
Out2 Signal Escalating
Out3 Rel.
Out4 Rel.
Releasing
Releasing
RLS TMR 1 Started
RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled
RLS Tmr 2 Started
RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted
RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled
Z1 Z2
Detection Zones
Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
Phantom Zones Release Timers
Zp1 Zp2
RT1
Exp
RT2
Exp
Alm Alm WF Supv AB MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4
X
X (X) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Zone Configuration
• Detection Zone -1: Alarm (Hazard Area1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -2: Alarm (Hazard Area1, cross-zoned)
• Detection Zone -3: Alarm (Pressure Switch or Water-flow)
• Detection Zone -4: Supervisory (Default non-latching)
• Detection Zone -5: Abort Switch
• Detection Zone -6: Manual Release
• NAC -1: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• NAC -2: Signal, indicate the Hazard Area1 status.
• RAC -1: Releasing Circuit
• RAC -2: Releasing Circuit
Hazard Configuration
• Default Release Timer Value: 60 seconds
• Default Manual Release Delay: 0 seconds
• Default Abort Delay Type: Standard UL.
• Soak Timer Value: 0 seconds (continuous)
NAC Configuration
• Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State:
• Hazard Idle: Off
• Hazard Alert: Steady
• Hazard Alarm: 60BPM
• Hazard Release: Steady
• Default NAC code of supervisory is 20 BPM
72
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
How the Panel Works in Mode 11
• The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady.
• The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started.
• Expiration of Release Timer-1 results in the activation of RAC-1 and RAC-2. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• If Z-5 is active, when the Release Timer-1 is running, NAC-2 turns off and NAC-1 turns on Steady. The Release
Timer is held.
• If Z-5 is released, NAC-1 turns off and NAC-2 turns on 60BPM. Release Timer-1 resumes running. Release
Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.
• Activation of Z-6 starts Manual Release Delay Timer-1(MDT-1). Upon the expiration of MDT-1, RAC-1 and
RAC-2 are active. NAC-2 turns on steady.
• Activation of Z-3 turns NAC-2 on steady.
• Activation of Z-4 can be indicated on NAC-2 at 20BPM, if configured.
73
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):
DACR Receiver Model Protocols
SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)
Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6600 Receiver (ULI Approved)
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
74
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed)
Horn/Strobes
Maximum # of Devices
Secutron
MRA-HS3-24ww 8
Amseco/Potter
FHS-240-110 9
System Sensor
P1224MC
Wheelock
NS-24MCW-FW
5
13
MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)
Sync Modules
Secutron
AVS44R
Amseco/Potter
SDM-240
System Sensor
MDL
Wheelock
DSM 12/24
75
Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices
MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed)
Make Model/Base
System Sensor
1400A
2400A
1451/B401B
2451/B401B
MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed)
Make Model/Base
System Sensor
1400
2400
1451/B401B
2451/B401B
Compatibility Identifier head/base
A- N/A
A-N/A
A-A
A-A
Rated standby current
(mA)
0.10
0.12
0.12
0.12
MR-2320 series compatible solenoids
ASCO 8210 series
T8210A107 24VDC
R8210A107 24VDC
8210A107 24VDC
76
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C: Reporting
Ademco Contact-ID
MR-2320 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF
NORMAL)
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Trouble
Supervisory
Zone Supervisory restored Supervisory
Waterflow Alarm
Waterflow restored
Indicating Zone Trouble
Indicating Zone Trouble restored
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Restore 3 113
New event 1 320
Restore 3 320
New event 1 301
Restore 3 301
New event 1 302
Restore 3 302
New event 1 310
Restore 3 310
Qualifier Code
New event 1 351
New event 1 352
Restore
Restore
3 351
3 352
New event 1 354
Restore 3 354
New event 1 602
New event 1 608
New event 1 601
New event 1 110
Restore 3 110
New event 1 300
Restore 3 300
New event 1 200
Restore 3 200
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Group # Contact #
00
00
00
00
Acct #
Acct #
00
000
000
000
000
Acct #
Acct #
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
77
Appendix C: Reporting
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS
SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.
MR-2320 Event Codes
Event Description
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow alarm
Waterflow alarm restored
Indicating Zone Trouble (*)
Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Event Family
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Qualifier
SIA Event
Code
FJ
FS
FR
WA
RX
FA
FH
FT
RT
YK
RP
RY
LT
LT
LR
LR
AR
YT
YR
YP
YQ
WH
UT
UR
AT
New event
New event
Restore
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
New event
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
Parameter
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
001
002
001
002
Acct #
Acct #
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
78
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control panel
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using front panel LCD display with Password Access.
Electrical Ratings
AC line voltage
120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
Power Supply Rating
6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer
Battery
Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid - 10AH to 26AH
Charging capability: 10AH to 26AH
Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse
Indicating circuits
2 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2”
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit
Releasing Circuit
Power Limited/Special application 18.18-26.08VRMS/1.7A Max
Terminals are labelled “SIG 3,4”
Max power allowed = 5A
- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)
- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)
- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)
If no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating and the releasing circuits
Current consumption Standby 183mA/Alarm 318mA
Aux supply (non resettable)
Power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max
4-wire smoke supply (resettable)
Power limited/21.1VDC regulated / 300mA max
Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A max at 49C
Minimum Load 5mA
Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
FormC / 28VDC / 1A max
Initiating circuit
6 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable.
Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility ID “A”
Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors /110MVpp AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)
1 RS-485 Connection
For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”. Line impedence is 120 ohms.
MR-2300-PRPolarity reversal city tie module (optional)
MR-2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)
Ground Fault Circuit
Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.
MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max, zoned
Current consumption standby 0mA, alarm 80mA
MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max, zoned
Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA
MR-2306-ATW 8 Zone Remote Annunciator
Standby 35mA / alarm 90mA
Remote Trouble Indicator
Standby 35mA / alarm 35mA
Polarity reversal and city tie module
City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14ohms trip coil
Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /
8.5mA max (shorted)
Polarity reversal supv terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)
Polarity reversal alarm terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)
Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use
System Model: MR-2320 Series Control Unit - Fire
Alarm, for Releasing services
System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR),
Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-
PR or MR-2320-DR/R). Central Station Protected
Premises (using MR-2320-DR/R) For ULC application also use MR-2300-PR for alternate communication path.
Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS
Type of Signalling : Non-Coded
Applicable Standards: NFPA 12, 12A, 12B, 12, 15,
16,70,72,2001, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-
527-99
79
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)
Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations
(Selection Guide)
Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.
Refer to Appendix A on page 74 for specifications.
Model
Number
MR-2320-R
MR-2320-DR
MR-2300-A
MR-2300-NC2
MR-2300-PR
MR-2306-R6
MR-2312-S12
POWER REQUIREMENTS (ALL CURRENTS ARE IN AMPERES)
Description Qty Standby
Total
Standby
Pre-Action/Deluge and
Agent Release Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR
Pre-Action/Deluge and
Agent Release Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR with dialer
Det Class A Converter
Adder Module
Sig Class A Converter
Adder Module--2 Circuits
Polarity Reversal and City
Tie Module
X
X
X
X
X
0.123/
0.092
0.123/
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.050
=
=
Alarm
0.316/
0.292
0.318/
0.300
= 0.000
= 0.000
= 0.300
X 0.000
= 0.080
6 Relay Adder Module
12 Relay Smart Relay
Module
X 0.030
= 0.140
MR-2306/12-
ATW
MR-2300T
Remote Annunciators
Remote Trouble Indicator
Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
X
X
X
0.035
0.035
Ò 0.00011
=
=
=
0.090
0.035
* 0.135
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Total
Alarm
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.)
X
X
= =
=
Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.
=
Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A )
* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.
' Use 0.084
for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for 5 minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure.
Ò Using the 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A on page 74 for other compatible smoke detectors.
Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B )______ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )
ALARM
Battery Capacity Requirement:
Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24,60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +
( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ ) = ( C ) ______AH
Total System Current in Alarm State: Must be 5.5 amperes or less for MR-2320 Series.
Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.
(
=
B )
80
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not
81
Warranty & Warning Information be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
82
MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
83
Warranty & Warning Information
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
84
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S
LED Fire Alarm Control Panel
U SER
G UIDE
Revision A
Document #: LT-953SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This manual is copyright 1994 - 2006 by Secutron Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron Inc.
Secutron Inc.
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the
Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
Cautions and Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified personnel.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES - To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72-
1996, Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
Contents
Contents.................................................................................................................................... i
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1
About this Manual ................................................................................................................. 1
Technical SupportTechnical Support .................................................................................... 1
Main Display ............................................................................................................................. 2
The Buzzer and LED Indicators .............................................................................................. 3
Common LED Indicators....................................................................................................... 3
Alarm Circuit Indicators......................................................................................................... 5
Supervisory Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................... 5
Monitor Circuit Indicators ...................................................................................................... 5
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 6
Signal Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 6
Main Display Buttons............................................................................................................... 7
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons......................................................................................... 8
Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 9 i
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
Introduction
About this Manual
This user’s guide provides information on the main indicators and controls of the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control
Panel. Specifically, with this manual you will learn about what the LEDs indicate and what the buttons on the main display do.
Refer to the Glossary on page 9 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual.
Technical Support
For all technical support inquiries, please contact Secutron’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5
P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
Local Phone: 1-888-732-8876
Local Fax: (905) 660-4113
Toll-Free Phone: 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876)
Toll-Free Fax:1-888-660-4113
1
Main Display
Main Display
Refer to the diagram below for the LED indicators and control buttons locations.
WALK
TEST
REMOTE
TROUBLE
CPU FAIL
GROUND
FAULT
ZONE-1
DISCONNECT
ZONE-3
DISCONNECT
ZONE-5
DISCONNECT
ZONE-7
DISCONNECT
ZONE-9
DISCONNECT
ABORT
NAC-1
DISCONNECT
RELEASE
CIRCUIT-1
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
ACK
GENERAL
ALARM
A.C.
ON
COMMON
ALARM
COMMON
SUPV
COMMON
TROUBLE
BATTERY
TROUBLE
SYSTEM
RESET
AUX
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
ZONE-2
DISCONNECT
ZONE-4
DISCONNECT
ZONE-6
DISCONNECT
ZONE-8
DISCONNECT
ZONE-10
DISCONNECT
MANUAL
RELEASE
NAC-2
DISCONNECT
RELEASE
CIRCUIT-2
The main display panel on the main fire alarm control board consists of:
• 18 common LED indicators (top half of display)
• Eight common buttons (top half of display)
• Up to 12 Initiating circuit alarm LEDs and 12 initiating circuit trouble LED indicators
• Four indicating circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)
• Up to sixteen disconnect buttons (12 for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)
LED indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates:
• Fast flash (supervisory): 120 flashes per minute
• Trouble flash (trouble): 20 flashes per minute
Paper labels for buttons and indicators
Each display is supplied with laser printable labels. These labels slide into the plastic label templates on the panel.
2
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
The Buzzer and LED Indicators
Common LED Indicators
Buzzer
The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or if the Buzzer Silence Button is pressed.
AC On LED
A.C.
ON
The green AC On LED illuminates steadily as long as the main power is above minimum level. The indicator turns off when the level falls below the minimum level and the panel switches to standby
(battery) power.
Common Alarm LED
COMMON
ALARM
The red Common Alarm LED will illuminate steadily whenever there is a fire alarm. If the panel is set for two stage operation, pressing the red General Alarm button will also turn on the Common
Alarm indicator. This indicator will remain on until the system is reset.
Common Supervisory LED
COMMON
SUPV
The amber Common Supervisory LED illuminates at the fast flash rate when there is a supervisory alarm in the fire alarm system. For non-latching supervisory alarms, the Supervisory LED will turn off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching supervisory alarms, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.
Common Trouble LED
COMMON
TROUBLE
The amber Common Trouble LED flashes at the trouble flash rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. For non-latching trouble conditions, the Common Trouble LED will turns off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching trouble conditions, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.
Remote Trouble LED
REMOTE
TROUBLE
The amber Remote Trouble LED flashes at the trouble flash rate if the panel detects a trouble at the
City Tie or UDACT module, communication trouble with a remote annunciator, or a local trouble at a remote annunciator.
Fire Drill LED
FIRE
DRILL
The amber Fire Drill LED illuminates steadily after you press the Fire Drill button. This LED remains on until you press the Fire Drill button again.
Acknowledge LED
ACK
If the panel is configured as a two-stage system, the amber Acknowledge LED flashes at the fast flash rate while the Auto General Alarm timer is timing out. The Acknowledge indicator illuminates steadily when the General Alarm timer is cancelled by the pressing of the Acknowledge or Signal
Silence buttons. If the Auto General Alarm timer times out and puts the panel into general alarm, this LED turns off.
3
The Buzzer and LED Indicators
General Alarm LED
GENERAL
ALARM
If the panel is configured as a two-stage system, the red General Alarm LED illuminates steadily when the General Alarm button is pushed, a General Alarm Initiating circuit is activated, or the Auto
General Alarm timer times out. Once the General Alarm LED has turned on, it will stay active until the panel is reset.
Walk Test LED
WALK
TEST
The amber Walk Test indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in walk test mode. If the panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.
CPU Fail LED
CPU FAIL
The CPU Fail LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.
Auxiliary Disconnect LED
AUX
DISCONNECT
The amber Auxiliary Disconnect LED flashes at the trouble rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns off when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When on, the Auxiliary Disconnect LED signifies that auxiliary alarm relay and relay adder modules (if disconnect is enabled) are not activated. If installed and enabled, the city tie module and the smart relay annunciator relays are also inactive.
Signal Silence LED
SIGNAL
SILENCE
The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber at the trouble rate when indicating circuits are silenced either by the Signal Silence button or by the Auto Signal Silence timer. It turns off when the signals are re-sounded by a subsequent alarm or when the panel is reset.
Battery Trouble LED
BATTERY
TROUBLE
The amber Battery Trouble LED flashes at the trouble rate when the battery is either low or disconnected.
Ground Fault LED
GROUND
FAULT
The amber Ground Fault LED flashes at the trouble rate when the ground fault detector detects a ground fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the ground fault is cleared.
System Reset LED
SYSTEM
RESET
The amber System Reset LED illuminates for a short time when the System Reset button is pressed.
4
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
Alarm Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm,
Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events:
Event
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Circuit in Alarm
Circuit in Alarm
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
OFF
Steady (red)
Configuration
Verified Alarm
Non-Verified Alarm
Water Flow Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
General Alarm
Pre-alarm Fast flash rate (red)
Verified Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
Water flow Alarm
Active circuit reconnected OFF
Supervisory Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as latching or non-latching supervisory circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:
Event
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Circuit in Alarm
Circuit in Alarm
Active circuit reconnected
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
OFF
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
Monitor Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:
Event
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Circuit Active
Circuit Active
Active circuit reconnected
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
OFF
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Monitor
Monitor
5
The Buzzer and LED Indicators
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events:
Event
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Short Circuit
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Configuration
Trouble Only
Signal Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to indicating circuits of any type. The Circuit Trouble Indicator flashes amber at the Trouble
Rate to indicate short-circuit or open-circuit trouble, or if the circuit is Disconnected.
Open Circuit
Disconnected
Short Circuit
Event Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Configuration
Signal
6
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
Main Display Buttons
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits.
SIGNAL
SILENCE
Signal Silence Button
SIGNAL
SILENCE
Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal devices in the fire alarm system. Non-Silenceable signal devices are unaffected. If you press the
Signal Silence button a second time, or if there is a subsequent alarm, the signals will re-sound. If the panel has been configured with a Signal Silence Inhibit timer, this button will not work until the timer times out. This button also does not work if you have pressed the Fire Drill button.In a two stage system, if the Auto General Alarm timer has timed out, this button also performs the same function as the Acknowledge button.
Fire Drill Button
FIRE
DRILL
Pressing the Fire Drill button will simulate a fire alarm by activating the fire alarm signals without transmitting an alarm to the central station. To cancel the fire drill, press the button again. If the fire alarm system goes into a real alarm while you are performing a fire drill, this button will not turn off the signals or activate any programmed relays.
Acknowledge Button
ACK
If the panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button is not active. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, pressing the Acknowledge button while the Auto General Alarm timer is timing (there is an alarm in the panel, but it is still in the first stage), the timer is cancelled and the amber Acknowledge LED illuminates steadily.
General Alarm Button (or Info button for single stage system)
GENERAL
ALARM
If the panel is not configured for two-stage operation, this button is not active. If the panel is configured for two-stage operation, pressing the General Alarm button immediately sends the panel into second stage general alarm. It will also re-activate the signals if they have been silenced during general alarm. The general alarm condition remains active until the panel is reset.
Auxiliary Disconnect Button
AUX
DISCONNECT
Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the auxiliary disconnect function. Pressing the button again de-activates this function.
Lamp Test Button
LAMP
TEST
Pressing and holding the Lamp Test button causes all front panel LEDs to illuminate and sounds the buzzer. Use this button to test that all LEDs in the main display are working. If you hold the
Lamp Test button for more than ten seconds, the Trouble LED will illuminate.
Buzzer Silence Button
BUZZER
SILENCE
Pressing the Buzzer Silence button while the buzzer is sounding silences the buzzer. The buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
7
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the fire alarm control panel.
These buttons are located beside their respective indicating LEDs.
Pressing a circuit disconnect button disconnects that circuit from the system and turns on its trouble indicator. While a circuit is disconnected, the panel will ignore all changes in the status (alarms and troubles) of that circuit. Circuit disconnect buttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated button a second time will reconnect the circuit.
Disconnecting an active latching initiating circuit such as alarms, water-flow alarm, sprinkler alarm, general alarm, and latching supervisory does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting active non-latching initiating circuits including non-latching supervisory and trouble-only causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.
When an initiating circuit disconnect button is pressed a second time, the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active and will cause a false alarm, the Status LED flashes for ten seconds at the fast flash rate (red for alarm or amber for supervisory) without processing the input. If the circuit is not re-disconnected by then, it will be processed as a new input.
8
MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide
Glossary
Alarm
Condition
Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated.
In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface and can be classified as initiating
(detection), indicating (signal), or relay. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.
Fast Flash Rate
120 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a supervisory alarm.
General Alarm
Timer
In a two stage system, the general alarm timer begins timing when the panel is in the alert stage. When the general alarm timer times out, the system will go into a general alarm, where all signals in the building will sound.
Indicating
Circuit
A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to audible or visual signalling devices.
Initiating
Circuit
A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to detectors, pull stations, or sprinkler flow switches.
Latching Circuit
A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that cannot be cleared until the panel is reset.
LED
The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of the MR-2306 ar colored either amber, red, or green. When lit, LEDs provide information regarding the status of the panel.
Monitor
Condition
Occurs when dampers open or close, when supply and return fans are running, etc.
Non-latching
Circuit
A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that will be cleared once the circuit is deactivated. This term is used to describe supervisory and trouble circuits.
Non-
Silenceable
Circuit
Relay Circuit
A signal circuit that cannot be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.
A circuit in a fire alarm system that connects relay devices (e.g. fan damper relays, etc).
Remote
Annunciator
A device that visually indicates, either by LCD or LEDs, the floor or zone where the alarm originated.
Single Stage
System
A type of fire alarm system that immediately sounds all the signals throughout the building when an alarm is detected in any part of the system.
Silenceable
Circuit
A signal circuit that can be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.
9
Glossary
Supervisory
Condition
Trouble
Condition
Trouble Flash
Rate
Two Stage
System
Walk Test
Zones
Occurs when the system detects open circuits, short circuits, and grounds. A supervisory condition is one that would interfere with the operation of the fire alarm system.
Occurs when an abnormal condition such as a problem in the wiring, battery or power circuits exists in the fire alarm system.
20 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a trouble condition.
A type of fire alarm system that causes an alert signal to sound when an alarm is detected in any part of the system. An alert signal advises designated persons of a fire emergency. If the alert signal is not acknowledged within five minutes of its initiation, an alarm signal will automatically sound throughout the building.
A test performed by a technician to ensure that each detection device is connected to the panel and working properly.
A fire alarm protected area that consists of at least one circuit. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.
10
© 2005 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S
LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel
U SER
G UIDE
Revision A
Document #: LT-954SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Contents
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1
About this Manual ................................................................................................................. 1
Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 1
Main Display ............................................................................................................................. 1
The Buzzer and LED Indicators .............................................................................................. 2
Buzzer................................................................................................................................... 2
AC On LED ........................................................................................................................... 2
Alarm LED............................................................................................................................. 2
Supervisory LED ................................................................................................................... 2
Trouble LED.......................................................................................................................... 2
CPU Fail LED........................................................................................................................ 2
Main Display Buttons............................................................................................................... 3
System Reset Button ............................................................................................................ 3
Signal Silence Button............................................................................................................ 3
Fire Drill Button ..................................................................................................................... 3
Lamp Test Button.................................................................................................................. 3
Buzzer Silence Button........................................................................................................... 3
The Up and Down Arrow Buttons ......................................................................................... 3
The Info Button ..................................................................................................................... 3
The Enter, Menu, and Cancel Buttons.................................................................................. 3
Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone) ...................................................................... 4
Understanding On-screen Messages..................................................................................... 5
Common Messages .............................................................................................................. 6
Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 10 i
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Introduction
About this Manual
This user’s guide provides information on the main indicators and controls of the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control
Panel. Specifically, with this manual you will learn about:
• What the LEDs on the main display indicate
• What the buttons on the main display do
• What certain common LCD screen messages mean
Refer to the Glossary on page 11 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual.
Technical Support
For all technical support inquiries, please contact Mircom’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5
P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
Toll-Free Phone: 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876)
Local Fax: 905-660-4113 Toll-Free Fax: 1-888-660-4113
Main Display
Refer to the diagram below for the LCD display, LED indicators, and control buttons locations.
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
System Normal
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL
1
4
GHI
*
7
PRS
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
The main display panel on the fire alarm control board consists of:
• Five LED indicators (located just below the LCD screen)
• Five buttons (left edge of display)
• 16 program buttons (right part of display)
LED indicators may be amber, red, or green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two flash rates:
• Fast flash (supervisory): 120 flashes per minute
• Trouble flash (trouble): 20 flashes per minutes
1
The Buzzer and LED Indicators
The Buzzer and LED Indicators
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL
Buzzer
The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or the Buzzer Silence button is pressed.
AC On LED
The green AC On LED illuminates steadily as long as the main power is above minimum level. The indicator turns off when the level falls below the minimum level and the panel switches to standby (battery) power.
Alarm LED
The red Alarm LED will illuminate steadily whenever there is a fire alarm. This indicator will remain on until the system is reset.
Supervisory LED
The amber Supervisory LED illuminates at the fast flash rate when there is a supervisory alarm in the fire alarm system. For non-latching supervisory alarms, the Supervisory LED will turn off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching supervisory alarms, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.
Trouble LED
The Trouble LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate when the panel detects any trouble condition. For nonlatching trouble conditions, the Supervisory LED will turns off when the condition causing the alarm goes away. For latching trouble conditions, this LED remains on until the panel is reset.
CPU Fail LED
The CPU Fail LED flashes amber at the trouble flash rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.
2
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Main Display Buttons
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits.
SYSTEM
RESET
Signal Silence Button
SIGNAL
SILENCE
Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal devices in the fire alarm system. Non-silenceable signal devices are unaffected. If you press the
Signal Silence button a second time, or if there is a subsequent alarm, the signals will re-sound. If the panel has been configured with a Signal Silence Inhibit timer, this button will not work until the timer times out. This button also does not work if you have pressed the Fire Drill button.
Fire Drill Button
FIRE
DRILL
Pressing the Fire Drill button will simulate a fire alarm by activating the fire alarm signals without transmitting an alarm to the central station. To cancel the fire drill, press the button again. If the fire alarm system goes into a real alarm while you are performing a fire drill, this button will not turn off the signals or operate any programmed relays.
Lamp Test Button
LAMP
TEST
Pressing and holding the Lamp Test button causes the LCD to display the software version, all the front panel LEDs to illuminate, and sounds the buzzer. Use this button to test that the LCD display and all LEDs on the main display are working. If you hold the Lamp Test button for more than ten seconds, the Trouble LED will illuminate.
Buzzer Silence Button
BUZZER
SILENCE
Pressing the Buzzer Silence button while the buzzer is sounding silences the buzzer. The buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
The Up and Down Arrow Buttons
2
ABC
Use these buttons to scroll through any events listed on the screen. The up arrow moves to the next listed condition and the down arrow moves to the previously listed condition.
8
TUV
The Info Button
INFO
Press the Info button while the there is a message on the LCD screen to view additional information.
The Enter, Menu, and Cancel Buttons
The Enter, Menu, and Cancel buttons are only used by technicians to program the fire alarm control panel.
3
Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone)
Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone)
You can disconnect and reconnect detection and signal circuits (zones) from the panel using the bypass options in the menu.
To select the bypass options, you must be in the Command Menu. To enter the Command Menu, press
MENU
.
Step 1: Enter your passcode
1.
Enter your passcode.
Enter the passcode
2.
ENTER continue.
Step 2: Select the Bypass Menu
- Bypass Det
Zone -
È
1.
Use
2
ABC
and
8
TUV
to scroll the cursor to select the zone you would like to disconnect / reconnect.
2.
ENTER continue.
Step 3: Select “BYPASSED” or “UNBYPASSED”
1.
Use
2
ABC
and
8
TUV
to scroll the cursor to
• “Bypassed” to disconnect a circuit or
• “Unbypassed” to reconnect a circuit
Zone-1
[ ] BYPASSED
È
2.
Use
4
GHI
and
6
MNO
to toggle the selection ON
(“X” appears), or OFF (space is blank).
3.
ENTER continue.
4.
Press
CANCEL
twice to return to the main menu.
If you have disconnected (bypassed) a circuit, a trouble message will display on the main screen until the circuit is reconnected.
4
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Understanding On-screen Messages
The LCD screen of the fire alarm control panel displays messages regarding system events. System events display on the screen in a queue. Events in this queue are listed on the screen in order of priority: alarms are of highest priority, followed by supervisory, trouble, and monitor conditions. If the same type of event happens more than once
(for example, two trouble conditions occur successively) they will be listed in the order of the most recent event to the least recent event. If an alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition occurs, their respective LED will flash.
Scroll through the events by using the
2
ABC
and displayed event, press
INFO
.
8
TUV
arrow buttons. If you need more information about a
Example 1 (detection circuit)
The message below indicates that event 1 of 9 is an open trouble at the East Lobby Entrance. When
INFO
is pressed, the screen shows that the process type is a verified alarm on Z-01 and the event occurred on Tuesday
April 4, 2003 at 18:01.
ZO N E
M essag e
P rocess
T ype
Physical
Zone N o.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V EN T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4
TIM E D AT E
Example 2 (indicating circuit):
The message below indicates that event 2 of 9 is a short trouble at the East Wing Lobby. When
INFO
is pressed, the screen shows that the process type is silenceable on NAC-1 and the event occurred on Tuesday February 2,
2003 at 18:01.
E A S T W I N G L O B B Y
S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9
EV E N T
Message
“INFO” Key
S I L E N C E - A B L E N A C - 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2
5
Understanding On-screen Messages
Common Messages
Common system messages are outlined below.
AC Power Fail
The “AC Power Fail” message indicates that the power has dropped below the minimum level and the system is running on backup battery power. The trouble is removed when the power returns to the normal value.
T roub le Type
A C P o w e r F a i l
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code Trouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Battery Trouble
The “Battery Trouble” message indicates that the battery voltage has dropped below the minimum value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.
T roub le Type
B a t t e r y T r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D A T E
Note:
The trouble code is a reference code for trained service personnel only.
6
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Ground Fault
The “Ground Fault” message indicates that
T rouble Typ e
G r o u n d F a u l t
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
RAU num mismatch
The “RAU num mismatch” message can display for one of two reasons: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other or an unconfigured remote annunciator is communicating with the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:
T rouble Typ e
R A U n u m m i s m a t c h t r o u b l e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
T rouble info
T rouble code
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3
TIM E
D A T E
Note:
The trouble code is a reference code for trained service personnel only.
7
Understanding On-screen Messages
4Wire Pwr. Supply
The “4Wire Pwr. Supply” message indicates that the panel has detected a short on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the SYSTEM
RESET
key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T roub le Type
4 W i r e P w r . S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Supervised Aux-supply
The “Aux. Power Supply” message indicates that the panel has detected a short on the auxiliary power supply
(battery backup) and has cut it off. Press SYSTEM
RESET
to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T roub le Type
A u x . P o w e r S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Note:
The trouble code is a reference code for trained service personnel only.
8
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
City tie Polarity reversal - SPR-200/ Relay module
The “CtyTie/MR2312 missin” message below indicates that the city tie, polarity reversal module or the relay module is not plugged in.
T rouble Typ e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
The “City Tie trouble” message below indicates that the panel detects an open on the city tie output.
T rouble Typ e
C i t y T i e t r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
Note:
The trouble code is a reference code for trained service personnel only.
9
Glossary
Glossary
Alarm Condition
Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated. In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface and can be classified as initiating (detection), indicating (signal), or relay. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.
Fast Flash Rate
120 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a supervisory alarm.
Indicating Circuit
A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to audible or visual signalling devices.
Initiating Circuit
A circuit in a fire alarm system that is connected to detectors, pull stations, or sprinter flow switches.
Latching Circuit
A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that cannot be cleared until the panel is reset.
LED
The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of the MR-2300 are colored either amber, red, or green. When lit, LEDs provide information regarding the status of the panel.
Monitor Condition
Occurs when dampers open or close, when supply and return fans are running, etc.
Non-latching Circuit
A circuit that, when activated, will cause a condition on the panel that will be cleared once the circuit is deactivated.
This term is used to describe supervisory and trouble circuits.
Non-Silenceable Circuit
A signal circuit that cannot be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.
Relay Circuit
A circuit in a fire alarm system that connects relay devices (e.g. fan damper relays, etc).
Remote Annunciator
A device that visually indicates, either by LCD or LEDs, the floor or zone where the alarm originated.
Silenceable Circuit
A signal circuit that can be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button.
Supervisory Condition
Occurs when the system detects open circuits, short critics, and grounds. A supervisory condition is one that would interfere with the operation of the fire alarm system.
Trouble Condition
Occurs when an abnormal condition such as a problem in the wiring, battery or power circuits exists in the fire alarm system.
10
MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide
Trouble Flash Rate
20 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a trouble condition.
Walk Test
A test performed by a technician to ensure that each detection device is connected to the panel and working properly.
Zones
A fire alarm protected area that consists of at least one circuit. The terms “circuit” and “zone” are often used interchangeably in the fire alarm industry.
11
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 0 6 - L D
LED Fire Alarm Control Panel
I
NSTALLATION &
O
PERATION
G
UIDE
Document #: LT-950SEC Rev. 2
February 2007
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Table Of Contents
Industry Canada and FCC Notice ........................................................................................... 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2
Overall Features ................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3
Zone...................................................................................................................................... 3
Display Points ....................................................................................................................... 3
Wiring Styles ......................................................................................................................... 3
System Components ............................................................................................................... 4
Main Fire Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 4
Relay Modules: Six Relays ................................................................................................... 4
Polarity reversal/city tie ......................................................................................................... 4
Remote Annunciator ............................................................................................................. 5
Smart Relay Module ............................................................................................................. 5
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits..................................................................................... 6
Output Class A converter: two circuits .................................................................................. 6
Active end-of-line .................................................................................................................. 6
MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator........................................................................................ 6
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories ........................................................................... 6
Mechanical Installation............................................................................................................ 7
Installing the Enclosure......................................................................................................... 7
Installing the Adder Modules................................................................................................. 8
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules ............................... 9
Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................................................................................... 9
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module............................................................. 10
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ..................................................... 11
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module ................................................................................. 11
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) .............................................. 12
Field wiring ............................................................................................................................... 13
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring ...................................................................................... 13
Relay Adder Module Wiring ................................................................................................. 16
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring .............................................. 17
Power supply connection ...................................................................................................... 18
Wiring Tables and Information .............................................................................................. 19
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated) .................................................................................... 19
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)................................................................................ 19
Auxiliary Power (unfiltered) ................................................................................................... 19
System Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 20
Before turning the power “ON”.............................................................................................. 20
Power-up procedure ............................................................................................................. 20
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 20
Indicators, Controls and Operations...................................................................................... 21
Common Indicators............................................................................................................... 22
Alarm Circuit Indicators......................................................................................................... 23
Supervisory Circuit Indicators ............................................................................................... 23
Monitor Circuit Indicators ...................................................................................................... 24
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators .............................................................................................. 24
Signal Circuit Indicators ........................................................................................................ 24
Common Controls ................................................................................................................. 25
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons.......................................................................................... 26
Common Relays ................................................................................................................... 26
Circuit Types ......................................................................................................................... 27
Evacuation codes.................................................................................................................. 28 i
Table Of Contents
Single Stage Operation ........................................................................................................ 29
Supported Protocols/Devices ................................................................................................ 30
Synchronous Strobes........................................................................................................... 30
System Sensor’s i3 Devices................................................................................................. 30
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool .................................................................... 32
Entering the Passcode ......................................................................................................... 33
Command Menu................................................................................................................... 33
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300............................................................... 34
1. PANEL CONFIG (Command-Menu) ................................................................................ 34
2. Config Info (Command-Menu........................................................................................... 43
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)............................................................................................. 44
4. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................................................................................... 45
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu) .................................................................................. 45
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) ................................................................................. 46
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) ........................................................................................... 47
8. i3 Loop Test (Command-Menu) ....................................................................................... 48
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) ...................................................................................... 49
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)........................................................................................ 54
11. Exit (Command-Menu) ................................................................................................... 56
CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation .................................................................................. 56
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers....................................................................................... 60
Appendix B: Reporting ........................................................................................................... 61
Ademco Contact-ID.............................................................................................................. 61
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS............................................................................. 62
Appendix C: Specifications.................................................................................................... 63
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)........................... 64
Warranty & Warning Information ........................................................................................... 65
Warning Please Read Carefully ........................................................................................... 65
Limited Warranty .................................................................................................................. 67
Warranty Procedure ............................................................................................................. 67
Disclaimer of Warranties ...................................................................................................... 67
Out of Warranty Repairs ...................................................................................................... 68 ii
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
List of Figres & Tables
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ............................................................................7
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ...............................................................................8
Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings ...............................9
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module .............................................10
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module .....................................11
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module ....................................................................11
Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming .........................................................................12
Figure 8: Polarity reversal and city tie module .....................................................................12
Figure 9: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring ...........................................................13
Figure 10: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring .........................................................14
Figure 11: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring .......................................................14
Figure 12: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring ........................................................15
Figure 13: Four-wire smoke detector wiring .........................................................................15
Figure 14: Dialer wiring ........................................................................................................16
Figure 15: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection ..........................................16
Figure 16: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection ...................................17
Figure 17: Power supply connection ....................................................................................18
Figure 18: LED indicators and control buttons .....................................................................21
Figure 19: Evacuation and Alert Codes ...............................................................................29
Figure 20: MR-2306 Configuration .......................................................................................32
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board .......................................10
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings .................................................................................12
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ...........................................................................................19
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring .........................................................................................19
iii
List of Figres & Tables iv
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Industry Canada and FCC Notice
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-In UDACTs Sold in Canada
Secutron's MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Canada
(ULC) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard ULC-S527 (Standard for Control
Units for Fire Alarm Systems) and ULC/ORD-C693-1994 (Central Station Fire Protective Signalling Systems and Services). These
Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the Canadian / Provincial / Local Electrical Code; and/or the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Industry Canada Notice
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the Earth Ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This is necessary both for proper operation and for protection.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Notice for all MR-2300 Series Built-in UDACTs Sold in the U.S.A.
Note:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Secutron’s MR-2300 SERIES BUILT-IN UDACT Digital Communicator described in this manual is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(ULI) for use in slave application in conjunction with a Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel under Standard 864 (Control Units for Fire Protective
Signalling Systems). These Communicators comply with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) performance requirements for
DACTs and should be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 (Supervising Station Fire Alarm System). These Communicators should be installed in accordance with this manual; the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70); and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
FCC Notice
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the telco transformer of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is capable of seizing the line. This capability is provided in the hardware.
Type of Service: The Communicator is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines. It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ-11C (or USOC FJ45S). Connection to telephone company provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Telephone Company Procedures: The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN); both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
If Problems Arise: If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible.
When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the
Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm Systems or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm Systems
For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm Systems at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.
1
Introduction
Introduction
Secutron's MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The
MR-2306 provides six supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and four supervised Class B or A
(Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts. Optional modules include Relay, Polarity Reversal and City Tie and Class A Converters for initiating and indicating circuits. Semi-flush or surface mountable enclosures can be used for retrofits and on new installations.
Note:
Installation of the MR-2300 series fire alarm control panel should be in accordance with Canadian
Electrical Code Part 1, ULC-S524 installation of Fire Alarm System, National Electrical Code NFPA
70 and NFPA 72. Final acceptance subject to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Testing and maintenance as per ULC-S536
Overall Features
• Basic unit has six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, which may be configured as Class A (Style D) using input
Class A converter adder modules. Each initiating circuit can be configured as Alarm, Verified Alarm, Water flow
Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory, Monitor or Trouble-Only circuit. There are two
LEDs per circuit, one for Trouble (amber), and one dual color (amber/red) LED for Supervisory (amber) and
Alarm (red).
• Basic unit has four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) indicating circuits with individual trouble indicators. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Class A (Style Z) using output Class A converter adder module. Each indicating circuit may be configured as Silenceable signal, non Silenceable signal, Silenceable strobe, non
Silenceable strobe. The audible signal may be Steady, Temporal Code, California Code, or March Time.
• A pushbutton associated with each initiating and indicating circuit can individually disconnect the circuit.
• Configurable Signal Silence Inhibit, Auto Signal Silence, and One-Man Walk Test.
• Subsequent Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble operation
• Four-wire resettable smoke power supply 300mA maximum
• Relay Contacts for Common Alarm, Common Supervisory and Common Trouble all non-disconnectable and
Auxiliary Alarm Relay (disconnectable).
• RS-485 Interface for LCD Annunciators, MR-2300 Series Remote Multiplex Annunciators and Smart relay adder.
• Optional Modules for additional Relay Circuits, City Tie and Polarity Reversal Signaling.
• Extensive transient protection
• With or without built-in UDACT (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter)
• Easy configuration of the panel and built-in UDACT using LCD service tool (CFG-300)
• Remote dial up (with built-in UDACT version) for event log checking and/or configuration changing
• Laptop programmer for direct configuration changing and log checking
2
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions
Circuits
Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays.
Zone
Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit.
Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
Display Points
There is a display point associated with every initiating and indicating circuit of the MR-2306 LED Series fire panel.
For an initiating circuit there are two LEDs for every display point: one single color (amber) and one dual color (red/ amber). For an indicating circuit there is only one LED: one single color (amber), for every display point.
Wiring Styles
Initiating and indicating circuits are Class B (Style B and Y). Changing the initiating circuits to Class A requires an
MR-2300-A adder board which will convert SIX initiating zones from Class B (Style B) circuits to Class A (Style D).
This is done without penalizing the number of circuits, which remains the same as in Class B (Style B). Changing the indicating circuits to Class A requires an MR-2300-NC2 adder board which will convert TWO indicating zones from Class B (Style Y) circuits to Class A (Style Z).
3
System Components
System Components
Main Fire Control Panel
-2&IRE!LARM#ONTROL0ANEL
Model
MR-2306-LD(R/W)*
MR-2306-L
Description
6 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 6 Class B (Style
B) Initiating circuits, and two Power Limited
Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). One six zone
MR-2300-A Input Class A Converter adder modules may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits. One MR-2300-NC2
Output Class A Converter adder module may be used for Class A (Style Z) wiring of the
Indicating circuits. The MR-2306-LD contains
Common Alarm, Common Supervisory &
Common Trouble Relays, auxiliary alarm relay
(disconnectable), an RS-485 Interface for
Remote Annunciators and a Resettable Four
Wire Smoke Detector Power Supply. The unit has a dialer on main board. Used with BA-110
(10 amp-hour) (Sota Enertech model SA12120) batteries (two required).
Six-zone Fire Alarm with LED display. Same asMR-2306-LD except without dialer.
*R = red door; W = white door
Relay Modules: Six Relays
Model Description
MR-2306-R6 Six-relay adder module
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY 3
NO/NC C
RELAY 4
NO/NC C
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
NO/NC C NO/NC C
Polarity reversal/city tie
Model Description
MR-2300-PR
Polarity Reversal and/or City tie Module
JW4
4
Remote Annunciator
7.7"
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
TRBL CPU FAIL
SYSTEM
RESET
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV
FIRE
DRILL
LAMP
TEST
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
MR-2300 SERIES Remote Annunciator
Smart Relay Module
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Model
MR-2300-LCDW
Description
Remote Annunciator module, LCD display, white painted box
7.2"
MR-2300-LCDR
Remote Annunciator
Module, LCD display, red painted box
1.25"
Model
MR-2312-SW12
Description
Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with white enclosure
MR-2312-SR12
Smart Relay Module (12 relays) with red enclosure
MR-2300 SERIES
REMOTE RELAY
5
System Components
Input Class A converter: Six Circuits
Model
MR-2300-A
Description
Input Class A converter Module
(six circuits). This module has built in Active End-of-Line resistors.
Output Class A converter: two circuits
Model
MR-2300-NC2
Description
Output Class A converter module (two circuits)
Active end-of-line
The ELRX-300 are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.
Model Description
ELRX-300
RED
BLACK
ELRX-300R
Active end-of-line resistor without plate
Active end-of-line resistor with end-ofline red plate
MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator
Model Description
$&
21
%8==(5
6,/(1&(
/$03
7(67
&20021
7528%/(
6,*1$/
6,/(%&(
6:,7&+
(1$%/(
6,*1$/
6,/(1&(
6<67(0
5(6(7
),5($/$50
$1181&,$725
Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories
Model: MR-2306-ATW Eight Zone Remote Annunciator
Model: MR-2605-T
Model: MP-300
Model: MP-300R
Model: BC-160
Remote Trouble Indicator
End-of-line resistor plate, 3.9K ohm
End-of-line resistor plate, red
External Battery Cabinet
MR-2312-AT 16 Zone remote annunciator
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
(ULC Approved)
(ULC and ULI Approved)
6
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Enclosure
Install the MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided.
Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount
3/$&(05)775,05,1*29(5%$&.%2;
0RXQWLQJ
+ROHVIRU
6XUIDFH
0RXQWLQJ
$GKHUHWULPULQJWR
ZDOOVXUIDFHDURXQG
WKH05EDFNER[
LVWKHPLQLPXPGHSWK
DERYHWKHZDOOUHTXLUHG
IRUVHPLIOXVKPRXQWLQJ
XVLQJWKHIOXVKWULPULQJ
LVWKHPD[LPXPGHSWK
IRUVHPLIOXVKPRXQWLQJ
XVLQJWKHIOXVKWULPULQJ
Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall. Peel the adhesive cover from the trim ring and stick to the wall surface around the backbox, after wall is finished.
The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening.
TRIM RING
WALL MIN 1”
WOOD OR
METAL STUD
BACKBOX
7
Mechanical Installation
Installing the Adder Modules
MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules.
Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.
Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules
JW3
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
ABORT ACTIVE
AGENT RELEASED
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
FIRE DRILL
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
GENERAL
ALARM
ACK
Reverse polarity and city tie module MR-2300-PR.
Mounted on hex spacer with two screws provided
JW1
TO MR-2300-PR MODULE
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
P6
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
P6
BATTERY
P5
SEC TX
Relay Module MR-2306-R6
CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A
(6 circuits)
CLASS-A converter board for indicating circuits ME-2300-NC2
(2 circuits)
Transformer
AC wiring terminal
8
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder
Modules
Main Fire Alarm Board
Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings
JW3-Removed all the time
JW3
For front panel programming use CFG-300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed. Please refer to Document LT-922SEC for details.
JW4 -Normally Short
JW5-Normally Open
JW6-Normally Open
RS-485 for annunciators
Auxiliary Relay
JW4
JW7
JW5
JW6
Alarm Relay
Supervisory
Relay
Trouble Relay
JW1 - ON- when
MR-2300-PR not connected
Connect to
MR-2300-PR
Connect to
MR-2306-R6 relay module
X
M
?
AC ON
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
WALK TEST
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
FIRE DRILL
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
GENERAL
ALARM
ACK
JW1
JW2
TO MR-2306-R6 RELAY MODULE
SIGNAL
POWER
RTI PORT UNFLTD SPLY
TRB TRL COM- COM+
JW2 - ON when
MR-2306-R6 not connected
Unfiltered 24V supply
Power supply and control interface, including
AC power and battery supplies.
9
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board
JW1 Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected.
P4
Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.
Otherwise not used.
JW2 Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used.
JW3 Removed all the time.
JW4 Normally short.
JW5
JW6
Normally open. Place jumper here and power down the panel (both AC power and batteries). Then power up the panel again, the password is restored to the default after system startup. Once the system has reset, REMOVE the jumper from the pins at JW5.
Leave normally open.
Normally open to BLOCK configuration via modem, PC with a UIMA converter module or a
CFG-300 Configuration Tool. Place jumper here to ALLOW any type of configuration.
MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module
05$
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
$OOWKHVHSLQVFRPHVZLWK
UHGDQGEODFNZLUHVZKLFK
DUHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH
GHWHFWLRQFLUFXLWRQWKH
PDLQILUHDODUPERDUG5HG
LVSRVLWLYHDQGEODFNLV
QHJDWLYH
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the
Main Fire Alarm Board.
Initiating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-A module to the Main Fire Alarm board. For example, Initiating circuit 1 positive (red) and negative (black) wires are connected to the positive and negative terminals (respectively) of Initiating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. From the MR-2300-A converter Initiating circuits are wired out to the devices from the positive and negative terminals marked DET OUT and the circuit return wires are brought back to the converter module to positive and negative terminals marked DET RET.
10
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
051&
051&
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
PRXQWLQJKROHIRU
VFUHZV
Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.
The actual indicating zone is wired from the SIGNAL OUT positive and negative to the signaling devices and then wired back to the SIGNAL RET positive and negative.
MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module
Cable from P1 of the MR-2306-R6 is connected to P4 on the Main Fire Alarm Board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts.
Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module
Connect to P4 on the main fire alarm board
INDIVIDUAL GREEN
RELAY STATUS LEDs mounting hole for #6-32 screws
RELAY
1
RELAY
2
NO/ NC C NO/ NC C
RELAY
3
RELAY
4
NO/NC C NO/NC C
RELAY
5
RELAY
6
NO/NC C NO/NC C mounting hole for #6-32 screws
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P4 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
Programming the relays
See explanation in Figure 7.
Note:
Relay programming should be done before installing the board
11
Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules
Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming
ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when the zone
(1) is active removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active
Default: Jumper is installed
SUPV/ALARM SELECTION
S: Relay turns ON when common supervisory is active
A: Relay turns ON when common alarm is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only
A
Z1
S 1&2
LED (GREEN)
LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2 jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2 chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only
RELAY 1
NO NC
NC/NO CONNECTION
NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts
NO: terminal provides normally open contacts
Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)
Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection then the relay is not connected to the terminals
NO/NC C
RELAY 12
NO/NC C
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR)
Figure 8: Polarity reversal and city tie module
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
P1 P2
Mounting hole for
#6-32 screws
12
The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR.
Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings
P1 Cable connects to P3 on the Main Fire Alarm Board
JW1
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission. When this jumper is cut and a system trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
JW2
Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission of supervisory. When this jumper is cut and a supervisory trouble occurs, the designated terminals will transmit a "zero volts" or "open" circuit. Please note that in normal condition, the terminals polarity is read exactly as labeled on the circuit board.
The Alarm Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to turn OFF when signal silence is active. This allows the City Tie Box to be manually reset. On subsequent alarms the silenceable signals will resound and the City
Tie Box will be retriggered. See Configuration and CFG-300 Service Tool on page 32 for more information.
The Trouble Transmit signal to the MR-2300-PR can be programmed to delay AC power fail for 0, 8 or 18 hours if this is the only system trouble. See Configuration and CFG-300 Service Tool on page 32 for more information.
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Field wiring
Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring
Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables on page 19 for wire gauges.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below. The panel supports Style B wiring for the initiating circuits and Style D wiring for the indicating circuits. The initiating circuits are supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line Resistor or for power saving an Active-End-of-Line.
Note:
According to Configuration, End-of-Line Resistors on initiating circuits must be all 3.9K ohms or all
Active End-of-Line resistors.
Figure 9: Initiating circuit – Class B or Style B wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM ZONE
STYLE B
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION
SUPERVISORY
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
NOTE: ACTIVE END OF LINE
RESISTORS MAY BE USED, BUT
THEY MUST BE USED ON ALL THE
INITIATING CIRCUITS.
13
Field wiring
Figure 10: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring
CONVERTER MODULE
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #1
INITIATING
CIRCUIT #2
+
-
+
-
4 MORE INITIATING
CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 1
ALARM
ZONE
STYLE D
WIRING
INITIATING
CIRCUIT - 2
SUPERVISORY
ZONE
ION SMOKE
DETECTOR
PHOTO
SMOKE
DETECTOR
HEAT
DETECTOR
PULL STATION SUPERVISORY
Note:
When using MR-2300-A Class A Converter Adder Modules, always use Active End-of-Line resistors on all initiating circuits including those that are not converted to Class A.
Indicating Circuit Wiring
The MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits.
Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9K End-of-Line resistor. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.
Note:
An Active End-of-Line resistor CANNOT be used with any indicating circuits. Always use 3.9K End of
Line resistors for indicating circuits.
Figure 11: Indicating circuit – Class B or Style Y wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT - 2
BELL STROBE HORN 3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
14
Figure 12: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring
CONVERTER MODULE
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #1
INDICATING
CIRCUIT #2
-
+
-
+
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 1
STYLE Y
WIRING
INDICATING
CIRCUIT 2
BELL
STROBE
HORN
Four Wire Smoke Detector Wiring
Figure 13: Four-wire smoke detector wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD
LEGEND
+
-
+
-
POWER
+
-
RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
22VDC, 200mA
MAX. CURRENT - 300mA
MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV
(POWER LIMITED)
+
-
+
DETECTION
4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE
TO INITIATING
CIRCUIT
3.9K 1/2 WATT ELR
6
3
4
5
2
1
END OF LINE RELAY
LISTED S3403
MODEL A77-716B
MANUFACTURED BY
SYSTEM SENSOR
NOTES
ALL POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR,
OR FPLP POWER LIMITED
CABLE
15
Field wiring
Dialer Wiring
If you have Fire Alarm Panel Model MR-2306-LD there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 14 below.
Figure 14: Dialer wiring
FIRE ALARM MAIN
BOARD
LINE-1
LINE-2
GREEN
RED
BROWN
GREY
1
RJ31X
2 3
4
8
7 6
5
TIP
RING
Public switch
Telephone company wiring
TIP
RING premise telephone
IF permitted
Line 2 is Wired as shown for Line 1
Relay Adder Module Wiring
Wire relays on the relay adder module MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 15.
Figure 15: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection
RELAY
CIRCUIT #1
RELAY
CIRCUIT #2
RELAY
CIRCUIT #6
NORMALLY OPEN
CONNECTION
NORMALLY CLOSE
CONNECTION
NORMALLY OPEN OR
NORMALLY CLOSED
CONNECTION IS
SELECTED BY JUMPER
ON RELAY BOARD.
28V DC, 1 AMP
RESISTIVE LOAD
NOTE: ALL RELAY CIRCUITS ARE POWER
LIMITED AND MUST USE TYPE FPL, FPLR or
16
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring
Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 16 , below. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used.
For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective
Device , or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector , as shown.
For use in Canada, the Protective Device is not required but still recommended.
Figure 16: Polarity reversal and city tie module terminal connection
0535
&,7<7,(/2&$/(1(5*<
5$7('9'&),/7(5('
75,3&2,/2KPVP$
P95,33/(
32:(5/,0,7('
32/$5,7<5(9(56$/$/$50
9'&23(1
9'&$7P$
P$0$;6+257
32:(5/,0,7('
32/$5,7<5(9(56$/6839
9'&23(1
9'&$7P$
P$0$;6+257
32:(5/,0,7('
6
3527(&725
6
86($6+257,1*:,5(
:+(17+(&,7<7,(,6
12786('
6 6
',15$,/&211(&7,21
72($57+*5281'
352&7(&725
&21),50672 1(0$67$1'$5'
6% ,17(1'(')25
&211(&7,217232/$5,7<
5(9(56$/&,5&8,72)$5(027(
67$7,215(&(,9,1*81,7+$9,1*
&203$7,%/(5$7,1*6
6
6
6
6
',15$,/&211(&7,21
72($57+*5281'
32:(5/,0,7('&$%/(7<3(
)3/)3/5RU)3/30867%(
86(')520053572
3527(&7256
17
Field wiring
Power supply connection
The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are:
Type
Electrical Input rating
Rating
120VAC, 60Hz, 1.7A / 240VAC, 50Hz, 85A, 10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
6.35A maximum at secondary of transformer Power supply total current
Battery fuse on Main module
10A, slow blow micro fuse
Wire the power supply as shown in Figure 17 using the proper wire gauge.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed power supply ratings.
Figure 17: Power supply connection
MR-2300 Control Board
BUZZER
SILENCE
GENERAL
ALARM
ACK FIRE DRILL
P6
Power Supply Control Board
P6
BATTERY
P5 red
SEC TX yellow red blk green
240 VAC 50Hz
120 VAC 60Hz
N
GND
+ red red
+ blk
BATTERY BATTERY
NOTE:
TO PREVENT SPARKING, CONNECT BATTERIES AFTER THE
SYSTEM MAIN A.C. POWER IS TURNED ON
18
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring Tables and Information
Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring
Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device
AWG Feet Meters
22
20
18
16
14
12
2990
4760
7560
12000
19000
30400
910
1450
2300
3600
5800
9200
Notes:
• For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two.
• Maximum loop resistance should not exceed 100 ohms.
• Maximum capacitance of
0.5uF total on each initiating circuit.
Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring
Total signal load in amperes
0.06
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
Maximum wiring run to last device
18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
2350
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
716
360
143
71
47
36
29
24
3750
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
1143
567
229
114
76
56
46
38
6000
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
1829
915
366
183
122
91
73
61
Notes:
• For Class A wiring the resistance in ohms is multiplied by two.
• Maximum voltage drop should not exceed 1.8 volts.
8500
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285
2591
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. loop resistance in ohms
30
15
6
3
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
Four-Wire Smoke Power (regulated)
4-wire smoke power is provided for 4-wire smoke detectors. This filtered supply is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. A trouble signal will be generated once there is a short. This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/300mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Supervised Auxiliary Power (regulated)
Supervised auxiliary power is used to power the remote annunciators and smart relay modules. This filtered circuit is supervised therefore a short will disconnect the power through the relay until the “RESET” key is pressed. A trouble signal will be generated once there is a short.This supply is rated at 22.3VDC regulated/500mA max/1V voltage drop maximum.
Auxiliary Power (unfiltered)
This unfiltered supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.
19
System Checkout
System Checkout
Before turning the power “ON”
To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main
AC supply.
1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections.
2. Check all field (external) wiring for opens, shorts, and ground.
3. Check that all interconnection cables are secure, and that all connectors are plugged in properly.
4. Check all jumpers and switches for proper setting.
5. Check the AC power wiring for proper connection.
6. Check that the chassis is connected to EARTH GROUND (cold water pipe).
7. Make sure to close the front cover plate before powering the system from main AC supply.
The best way to set up a panel for the first time is to avoid connecting any field wiring at first. To begin set up, power up the panel with an end of line resistor. The panel should be free of trouble. If the panel is free of trouble, connect one circuit at a time, checking for troubles each time. If a trouble occurs at any point during the setup, correct the fault, then continue the field wiring.
Power-up procedure
After completing the System Checkout procedures outlined above,
8. Power up the panel. The "AC-ON" green LED and the “Common Trouble” LED should illuminate, and the buzzer should sound. Press the “System Reset” button. Since the batteries are not connected, the trouble buzzer should sound intermittently and the common trouble LED should flash.
9. Connect the batteries while observing correct polarity: the red wire is positive (+) and black wire is negative (-).
All indicators should be OFF except for normal power "AC ON" green LED and green LED I4 (located at the left bottom of panel, near the trouble relay).
Note:
Green LED I4 is illuminated when the system is normal. This LED indicates that the trouble relay is in normal standby condition.
10.Configure the Fire Alarm Control Panel as described in the Configuration section.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Circuit Trouble
Remote Trouble
Ground Fault
Battery Trouble
Walk Test Mode
Common Trouble
Possible Cause
Normally when a circuit trouble occurs, its designated trouble indicator will be illuminated, as well as the common trouble indicator and trouble buzzer. To correct the fault, check for open wiring on that particular circuit loop or that the Circuit Disconnect Switch is in the ON or
CLOSED position.
Note: Disconnecting a Circuit will cause a system trouble (off-normal position).
Remote Trouble will be indicated on the main panel display for any failure reported by, or failure to communicate with a remote annunciator or other remote device.
This panel has a common ground fault detector . To correct the fault, check for any external wiring touching the chassis or other Earth Ground connection.
Check for the presence of batteries and their conditions. Low voltage (below 20.4V) will cause a battery trouble. If battery trouble condition persists, replace batteries as soon as possible.
If the Walk Test LED is illuminated steadily, the system is in Walk Test Mode.
If only a common trouble is indicated on the main panel and none of the above confirming trouble indicators are on, check the following for possible fault:
• Check for any missing interconnection wiring.
• Check for any Module missing that was part of the Configuration.
• Check for improperly secured cabling.
20
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Refer to Figure 18 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations.
Figure 18: LED indicators and control buttons
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE M
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
WALK TEST
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
FIRE DRILL
IAC1
(ZONE1)
IAC2
(ZONE2)
IAC3
(ZONE3)
IAC4
(ZONE4)
IAC5
(ZONE5)
IAC6
(ZONE1)
NAC1
(ZONE1)
NAC2
(ZONE2)
NAC3
(ZONE3)
NAC4
(ZONE4)
The Main Display Panel on the Main Fire Alarm Control Board consists of:
• 15 common LED Indicators (left half of the display)
• 10 Common Buttons (left half of the display)
• up to six Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and six Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators
• Four Indicating Circuit LEDs (labeled NAC- Notifying Appliance Circuit)
• up to ten disconnect buttons (six for initiating circuit & four for indicating circuits)
LED Indicators may be Amber, Red, or Green, and may illuminate continuously (steady), or at one of two Flash
Rates.
• Fast Flash (Supervisory) - 120 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
• Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle
Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron# NP-2057 ; this includes English and French versions.
21
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Common Indicators
Buzzer
The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events:
Fire Alarm: Steady
Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash
Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate
If the Buzzer is turned on in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned off if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be on.
AC ON LED
The green AC ON Indicator will steadily illuminate as long as the main AC power is above minimum level. The indicator turns OFF when the level falls below the power-fail threshold and the panel is switched to standby (battery) power.
Common Alarm LED
The red Common Alarm Indicator steadily illuminates whenever the panel alarms on any initiating circuit. Since all alarms are latched until the panel is reset, the Indicator will remain ON until then.
Common Supervisory LED
The amber Common Supervisory Indicator turns ON steady when there is a Supervisory Alarm in the Panel caused by any Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuit. The Indicator is turned OFF when all Non-Latching
Supervisory Circuits are restored and there are no active Latching Supervisory Circuits. Latching Supervisory
Alarms remain active until the Panel is reset.
Common Trouble LED
The amber Common Trouble Indicator turns ON steady when the panel detects any trouble condition. It turns OFF when all Non-Latching Troubles are cleared.
Remote Trouble LED
The amber Remote Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate if there is trouble detected at a City Tie or
DACT, or if there is communication trouble detected with a Remote Annunciator or if a Remote Annunciator reports a local trouble. It is turned off if these conditions go away.
Fire Drill LED
The amber Fire Drill Indicator illuminates steadily while Fire Drill is active.
Walk Test LED
The amber Walk Test Indicator illuminates steadily to indicate that the panel is in Walk Test Mode. If the Panel is left in this mode for over an hour with no operator activity, the panel will return to normal and the Walk Test indicator will turn OFF.
CPU Fail LED
The amber CPU Fail LED Indicator flashes at the Trouble Flash Rate to indicate a microprocessor failure on the main board.
Auxiliary Disconnect LED
The amber Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed. It turns OFF when the Auxiliary Disconnect button is pressed a second time. When ON flashing, the
Auxiliary Disconnect Indicator signifies that the Auxiliary Alarm Relay is disconnected. Depending on the programming the auxiliary disconnect switch can also disconnect the common alarm and supervisory relay, see
Configuration section. When the Auxiliary Disconnect LED is flashing, the trouble buzzer will also sound.
22
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Signal Silence LED
The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber, at the trouble rate, when indication Circuits are Silenced either by the
Signal Silence button, or by the Auto Signal Silence Timer. It is turned off when the Signals are re-sounded by a subsequent Alarm.
Battery Trouble LED
The amber Battery Trouble Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Battery is either low (below 20.4 VDC) or disconnected.
Ground Fault LED
The amber Ground Fault Indicator flashes at the Trouble Rate when the Ground Fault Detector detects a Ground
Fault on any field wiring. It turns off when the Ground Fault is cleared.
System Reset LED
This indicator is activated for a short time when the RESET key is pressed.
Alarm Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm,
Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events.
Event Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Circuit Active
Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
OFF
Verified Alarm
Non-Verified Alarm
Water flow Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
General Alarm
Event Circuit Status LED Configuration
Circuit Active Steady (red)
Pre-alarm Fast flash rate (red)
Verified Alarm
Sprinkler Alarm
Water flow Alarm
Active circuit reconnected Fast flash rate (red)
Supervisory Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Latching or Non-Latching Supervisory Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Event Circuit Trouble LED
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Configuration
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
Circuit Active
Event
Circuit Active
Active circuit reconnected
OFF
Circuit Status LED
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Latching Sup.
Non-Latching Sup.
23
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Monitor Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Disconnected
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Monitor
Circuit Active
Event
Circuit Active
Active circuit reconnected
OFF
Circuit Status LED
Steady (amber)
Fast flash rate (amber)
Configuration
Monitor
Trouble-only Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Disconnected
Short Circuit
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Trouble Only
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Signal Circuit Indicators
This operation applies to indicating circuits of any type. The Circuit Trouble Indicator flashes amber at the Trouble
Rate to indicate short-circuit or open-circuit trouble, or if the circuit is Disconnected.
Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration
Open circuit
Short Circuit
Disconnected
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Flashes at the trouble rate
(amber)
Signal
24
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Common Controls
Menu Buttons
To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Configuration and CFG-300
Tool on page 32 for details.
Menu Button
M
Pressing M and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu.
Info Button
?
X
When the system is off-normal, press ?
to display extra information of the event.
Enter Button
Pressing this button to select a menu option or to confirm a menu operation.
Cancel Button
To return to previous menu in the configuration or command mode.
System Reset Button
The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits. In particular, the system reset button
• Resets all Latching Trouble Conditions
• Resets all Initiating Circuits
• Resets 4-Wire Smoke Supply
• Turns off all Indicating Circuits
• Turns off Signal Silence
• Turns off Fire Drill
• Stops and resets all Timers
• Processes inputs as new events
• Does not affect Aux Disconnect
Signal Silence Button
Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm turns on the Signal Silence indicator and deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will re-sound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period. It also does not function if the Indicating
Circuits are active as the result of a Fire Drill.
Fire Drill Button
The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any Alarms via the
City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed. For example in the Temporal Code, the signals will be pulsed ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for 0.5 seconds in rounds of 3 and then pause for 1.5 seconds and repeat.
Fire Drill is cancelled by pressing the button again, or if the Panel goes into a real alarm.
Auxiliary Disconnect Button
Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button activates the Auxiliary Disconnect function. The Auxiliary Alarm Relay is always disconnected with this button. The Common Alarm Relay, the Common Supervisory relay and all correlated alarm relays may be disconnected as selected through configuration. Activating the Auxiliary Disconnect button also causes the Common Trouble LED to illuminate steady, the common trouble relay to send a trouble message and the trouble buzzer to flash at the trouble flash rate. Pressing the Auxiliary Disconnect button again de-activates this function and the system will go back to normal.
25
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Lamp Test Button
Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated. The lamp test for CPU Fail
LED is during power up.
Buzzer Silence Button
Activation of the Buzzer Silence button while the Buzzer is sounding silences the Buzzer. The Buzzer will resound if there is a subsequent event. Pressing the button when the Buzzer is not sounding has no effect.
Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons
Circuit (Zone) Disconnect pushbuttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. These pushbuttons are located beside their respective indicating LED.
Pressing a Circuit Disconnect pushbutton bypasses the associated circuit and turns on its Trouble Indicator, activating Common Trouble. While a Circuit is disconnected, all changes in status (alarms and troubles) on that circuit are ignored. The panel does not activate disconnected indicating circuits. Circuit Disconnect pushbuttons are toggle switches; therefore, pressing an activated switch a second time will un-bypass (reconnect) the circuit.
Disconnecting an active Latching Initiating Circuit (including Alarms, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, General
Alarm, and Latching Supervisory) does not affect its status until the panel is reset. Disconnecting an active Non-
Latching Initiating Circuit (including Non-Latching Supervisory and Trouble-Only) causes them to behave as if the alarm situation has disappeared. Disconnecting an active indicating circuit immediately deactivates the circuit.
When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to unbypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the bypassed input circuit is active and the Bypass
Switch is pressed for un-bypassing, the Alarm LED will flash at the fast flash rate for 10 seconds. During these 10 seconds, pressing the Bypass Switch can bypass the active input circuit again. After 10 seconds, the bypassed alarm will be processed.
Disconnect pushbuttons are also used during Walk-Test as described in the System Checkout section.
Common Relays
Common Alarm Relay
The Common Alarm Relay activates when the common alarm sequence is activated. The common alarm relay is disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). Since all alarm conditions are latched until system reset, the relay will remain ON until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset.
Common Supervisory Relay
The Common Supervisory Relay activates when the common supervisory sequence is activated as the result of an alarm on any un-bypassed latching or non-latching supervisory circuit. The relay is turned OFF if all non-latching supervisory circuits are restored and there are no latching supervisory circuits active. The relay can be disconnected by aux disconnect if programmed (see Configuration section). The relay will function the same way as an alarm relay if the supervisory relay is disabled ( see Configuration section ).
Common Trouble Relay
The Common Trouble relay is activated when the common trouble sequence is activated as the result of the trouble condition being detected on the system. It is turned off when all troubles are cleared.
Note:
Some troubles are latching once they are detected they remain active until system reset. In this case the common trouble indicator will also remain active until system reset. The common trouble is not bypassed by the auxiliary disconnect function.
26
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Auxiliary Alarm Relay
The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect with or without other correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see
Configuration section). When configured ( see Configuration section ), the relay can also be disconnected if signal silence is active and reconnected if signal silence is de-activated.
Circuit Types
Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types
Non-Verified Alarm
A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Verified Alarm
Verified Alarms are verified by a reset and timing procedure, and may include smoke detectors, heat detectors or pull stations. Activation of pull stations or heat detectors will result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel within four seconds. Smoke detectors will be verified for a real alarm within 60 seconds, depending upon the startup time of the devices being used. If four seconds is too long a response time for pull stations, then wire them separately on a Non-Verified Alarm Circuit. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the
Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors)
Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Water flow
Alarm is confirmed and processed. An alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common
Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Sprinkler Alarm (for Sprinkler Flow Sensors)
Sprinkler Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms unless Water flow retard operation is enabled. If Water
Flow Retard Operation is enabled, then these circuits are sampled every one second. If ten samples are active within any 15-second interval, the Sprinkler Alarm is confirmed and processed. An Alarm condition causes the associated Circuit Status LED and the Common Alarm LED to illuminate red.
Note:
Do not use Retard Operation with any external retarding device; maximum retard may not exceed
120 seconds.
Non-Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Circuits)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will clear
(as long as there are no other Supervisory conditions in the system) and the Circuit Status LED will turn off.
Latching Supervisory (For Supervisory Devices)
Activation on these circuits will cause the Circuit Status LED and the amber Common Supervisory LED to illuminate. The buzzer will sound at fast rate. If the circuit activation is removed, the Supervisory condition will NOT clear.
27
Indicators, Controls and Operations
Monitor
This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (open-circuit).
Trouble-Only
The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device such as an external Audio System.
Both open and short circuits generate a non-latching Trouble condition.
Indicating (Signal) Circuits Types
Silenceable Signal
The Silenceable Signal circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm.
Non-Silenceable Signal
The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm.
Silenceable Strobe
Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Non-Silenceable Strobes
Non-Silenceable Strobes will not be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section. (NB: Strobes do not support any code pattern .
)
Evacuation codes
Single stage codes
Continuous On 100% of the time
Temporal Code 3 of 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off then, 1.5 second pause
March Code 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off
California Code 5 seconds on, 10 seconds off
Two-step codes
Alert Code 0.5 second on, 2.5 seconds off
General Alarm Evacuation Code as selected from above.
28
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 19: Evacuation and Alert Codes
C O N T IN O U S
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
5s 10s
1.5s
TE M P O R A L C O D E
M A R C H C O D E
C A LIFO R N IA C O D E
0.5s
2.5s
A LE R T C O D E
Single Stage Operation
In a single stage system all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following:
Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Water flow Alarm, and General Alarm Circuits. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs:
• The Buzzer sounds steadily
• If Fire Drill is active, it is cancelled
• The Common Alarm Indicator turns on
• The Common Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm and all correlated relays will activate if Aux Disconnect is not active
• The Auto Signal Silence Timer, if configured, starts
• The Signal Silence Inhibit Timer, if configured, starts
• All connected relays programmed to the input are activated (provided that Aux Disconnect is not active)
• Non-disconnected strobes associated with the input are activated
• Non-disconnected signals associated with the input are activated at the evacuation rate
Subsequent alarms when the panel is already in alarm cause the following:
• The alert buzzer sounds steadily
• If Signals have been silenced as a result of the Signal Silence button or the Auto Signal Silence Timer, Signals are resounded as they were before Signal Silence, the Signal Silence Indicator is turned off, and the Auto
Signal Silence Timer, if configured, is restarted
• Any additional non-disconnected strobes associated with the new input are activated continuously
• Any additional non-disconnected signals associated with the new input are activated at the evacuation rate
29
Supported Protocols/Devices
Supported Protocols/Devices
Synchronous Strobes
The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2306 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and
MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models (LT-1007).
Strobes can be configured as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g. whatever is selected applies to all the circuits in the system, configured as strobes).
“Signal silence” action on strobes
The “signal silence” action on strobes depends upon the configuration. The following describes the signal silence action on non-silenceable and silenceable strobes.
Non Silenceable strobe
If the output zone is configured as Non-Silenceable Strobe and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel while the strobes are active, the horn should be silenced. If the signal is active again the panel will activate the horn again.
Silenceable strobe`
If the output circuit is configured as Silenceable Strobe, and if the “signal silence” is active on the panel, both the horn and strobe are completely turned off by turning off the output circuit. Re-activating the “signal silence” will turn them on again.
Note:
Please see the strobes manufacturer’s data for details.
System Sensor’s i
3
Devices
The MR-2306 fire control panels support System Sensor’s i
3
devices. Only the two wire smoke detectors are supported on the i
3
zone, which are 2W-B and 2WT-B. Model 2WT-B features a build in fixed temperature (135F /
57.2C) thermal detector and is capable of sensing a freeze condition i.e. if the temperature is below 41F / 5 C.
The zones should be programmed to i
3
devices to be considered as i
3
zone (see configuration section). If the zone is not programmed as i
3
zone and i
3
devices are connected to the zone, it is simply treated as a regular zone. The panel is capable of detecting multiple troubles; if different devices have different troubles on the same zone, all troubles will be reported. The following troubles are reported for the i
3
devices.
i 3 zone Troubles
The following troubles can be reported for a zone configured as i
3
zone:
• Open circuit trouble
• Communication trouble
• High Maintenance and Low Maintenance (Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty device)
• Freeze trouble
30
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Open circuit trouble
If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs.
Z o n e - 1
T r o u b l e O p e n 1 / 1
Communication Trouble
If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices. The panel shows a communication trouble in this case.
Z o n e - 1
C o m m u n i c . T r b 1 / 1
High Maintenance trouble
A High Maintenance trouble means that one or more units on the i3 zone have exceeded the high sensitivity limit and are vulnerable to false alarms. The unit does not need to be serviced immediately, but should be cleaned out at the earliest possible time.
Z o n e - 1
H - M a i n t T r b 1 / 1
Low Maintenance trouble
A Low Maintenance trouble means that one or more units on the i3 zone have exceeded the low sensitivity limit and their ability to detect smoke is compromised. The unit should be serviced immediately.
Z o n e - 1
L - M a i n t T r b 1 / 1
Freeze trouble
If the device has detected a freeze condition, (e.g. the temperature is below 41F / 5 C) then the panel will show a freeze trouble. Only model 2WT-B is capable of thermal detection; model 2W-B does not indicate any freeze trouble.
Z o n e - 1
F r e e z e T r b . 1 / 1
The LEDs on the i
3
smoke detectors provide a local visual indication of the detector status.
The smoke detector LED status should be confirmed with the panel, since High and Low Maintenance Troubles have the same LED indication on the detector and the only way to distinguish between the two is to use the CFG-
300 Configuration Tool and check the log messages as noted above.
i 3 Detector Condition
Power-up
Normal (Standby)
High or Low Maintenance
(Out of sensitivity: defective or dirty)
Freeze trouble
Alarm
Blinks every 10 sec
Blinks every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
OFF
Green LED
Blinks every 10 sec
OFF
Blinks every 10 sec
Solid
Red LED
Blinks every 5 sec
31
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
There are three methods of configuring the MR-2306 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels:
1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information).
2. Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module.
3. Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT).
The following information for configuring an MR-2306 LED Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using CFG-300 LCD service tool for configuration.
To access configuration mode using a CFG-300 tool, connect the CFG-300 and then press the Menu button.
The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu. The function of different buttons on the front panel display is shown in F igure 20, below.
Figure 20: MR-2306 Configuration
This label removed from this location represents the alternate functions of the corresponding buttons in service mode
IAC1
(ZONE 1)
0
QZ
AC ON
X
COMMON ALARM
M
COMMON SUPV
COMMON TROUBLE
BATTERY TROUBLE
REMOTE TROUBLE
?
GROUND FAULT
CPU FAIL
WALK TEST
IAC2
(ZONE 2)
IAC3
(ZONE 3)
IAC4
(ZONE 4)
1
2
ABC
SYSTEM
RESET
IAC5
(ZONE 5)
IAC6
(ZONE 1)
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
SIGNAL
SILENCE
*
(left shift)
#
(right shift)
AUXILIARY
DISCONNECT
LAMP
TEST
BUZZER
SILENCE
FIRE DRILL
NAC1
(ZONEV 1)
NAC2
(ZONE 2)
NAC3
(ZONE3)
NAC4
(ZONE4)
6
MNO
7
PRS
8
TUV
9
WXY
32
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Entering the Passcode
The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press the (Enter button) key after entering the passcode. If the passcode is right, it will take you to the main command menu. If the passcode is wrong the system will ask you to re-enter passcode. The system will be exhausted after three retries and will then take you back to the Normal message display. The default password is
“1111” (without quotes).
Enter passcode:
_
Command Menu
The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show
“-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press to make a selection. To exit from the main command menu, select the
“Exit” menu option and then press either X or .
Note:
Command Menu features 1 and 9 can only be accessed if jumper JW6 is placed on the main board, see Table 1.
-Command Menu-
1. Panel Config
2. Config Info
3. Set Time
4. Set Password
5. View Event Log
6. Clear Event Log
7. Walk Test
8. i3 Loop Test
9. Dialer Config
10. Test Dialer
11. Exit
33
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below.
MR-2306-6LD wUDACT
Version 0.0.4
The first line shows the model number and panel type and the second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as Major.Minor.Revision.
How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300
1. Press M (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password.
2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue.
3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing . The corresponding submenu will display.
4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu.
5. Press to select a submenu option.
6. Use the left or right arrow buttons to select/unselect an option (selected = “X”). Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the different menu options. When entering numerical data, use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number.
7. Once you have made the correct selection, press to confirm the change. The display will return to the submenu screen.Press X (Cancel button) to return to the previous menu.
1. PANEL CONFIG (Command-Menu)
The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu.
-Panel Config-
1. Features
2. Inp. Zone
3. i3 Zones
4. Opt Zone
5. Correlation
6. Inp Zone Label
7. Opt Zone Label
8. Default Config
34
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Panel Config-->Features
-Feature
Config-
1. Man. Sig. Sil
2. Fire Drill
3. Opt. Ckt. Corr
4. Wtr/Sprk. Retd
5. Aux Dis Corr
6. Sig-Sil Inh Tm
7.Aux Dis, Alm&Sup
8. Auto Sil. Tmr
9. Rem. Annun.
10. Alm. Zmit-Sil.
11. Pwr Fail Tmr.
12. Com. Supv. Rly
13. Sig-Sil. Isol.
14. Strobe Type
15. Evac. Code
16. Active EOL
17. Verify. Alarm
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
1. Manual Signal Silence
M a n u a l S i g . S i l e n c e
[ X ] E N A B L E
[X] ENABLE->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the SIGNAL SILENCE operation from the front panel.
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
2.Fire Drill
F i r e D r i l l
[ X ] E N A B L E
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to enable or disable the FIRE DRILL operation.
35
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
3.Output Circuit Correlation
O p t . C k t . C o r r .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
If disabled, whatever correlation is set in the correlation section is effective. If enabled, all the output circuits are correlated to all the input circuits.
Command MenuPanel Config/Features/
4.Waterflow/Sprinkler Retard
Operation
W a t e r f l o w / S p r k . R e t d
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABL ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
5.Aux. disconnect, disconnects
Aux Alarm relay and all correlated relays
A u x D i s C o r r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
6.Signal-Silence Inhibit timer
S i g - S i l . I n h i b i t T m r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 10 SEC
[ ] 20 SEC
[ ] 30 SEC
[ ] 1 MIN
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
7. Aux. disconnect, disconnects common alarm relay and common supervisory relay
A u x D i s , D i s A l m & S p v
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
8.Auto Signal Silence Timer
A u t o S i g - S i l . T i m e r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] 5 Min
[ ] 10 Min
[ ] 15 Min
[ ] 20 Min
[ ] 30 Min
If disabled, all the initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler act as non-verified alarms. If enabled, retard operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as water flow or sprinkler.
(See Water flow Alarm and
Sprinkler Alarm description)
In the default mode this function will disconnect the Auxiliary
Alarm Relay when selected by the Aux Disconnect button.
If enabled, this function will disconnect the Auxiliary Alarm
Relay and all correlated relays by pressing the Aux Disconnect button. Correlated relays include: MR-2306-R6 relays,
MR2312-S12 relays.
Use this function to inhibit the
“SIGNAL SILENCE” switch for a desired length of time. This time period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
According to the Canadian
National Building Code, this timer should be set to one minute.
If enabled, this function will disconnect (when the Aux. disconnect switch is pressed) the Common Alarm relay and
Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR will not transmit a supervisory or alarm event.
If disabled, the Aux disconnect switch has no effect on the
Common Alarm relay, the
Common Supervisory relay and the MR-2300-PR.
Use this function to determine the time period for which the indicating circuits will sound before they are automatically silenced. According to the
Canadian National Building
Code, this timer should not be set to less than 20 minutes.
36
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
9. Number of Remote
Annunciators or smart relays
N o . o f R e m o t e A n n u n .
[ X ] N O N E
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
10.Silence Alarm transmit
A l m . X m i t - S i l .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
11.AC power fail delay timer
A C P w r F a i l D l y T m r .
[ X ] N O N E
[X] NONE->Default
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[ ] 5
[ ] 6
Use this function to program the number of remote annunciators.
Any combination of remote annunciators or smart relays can be used as long as the number does not exceed 6. The annunciators’ addresses should be linear: without gaps and in sequence.
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] ENABLE
[X] NONE ->Default
[ ] 1 HRS
[ ] 2 HRS
[ ] 3 HRS
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
Use this function to allow the alarm transmits and auxiliary alarm relay to reset on “SIGNAL
SILENCE” rather than the
“RESET” switch.
Use this function to place a timed delay on reporting the AC power fail trouble externally via common trouble relay. If this problem corrects itself within the specified time, the common trouble relay will not be activated If disabled, the trouble relay is activated immediately.
If enabled, the common supervisory relay can be used as common alarm relay. It will act the same way as a common alarm relay. If disabled, it is used a common supervisory relay.
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
12.Common Supervisory Relay
C o m m o n S u p v . R e l a y
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
13.Signal Isolators
S i g - S i l . I s o l a t o r
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command MenuPanel Config/Features/
14.Strobe Type
S t r o b e T y p e
[ X ] N O R M A L
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
15.Evacuation Code
E v a c u a t i o n C o d e
[ X ] T E M P O R A L
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE->Default
Enable this function only when suite isolators are used (Canada only)
[X] NORMAL ->Default
[ ] SECUTRON
[ ] FARADY
[ ] WHEELOCK
[ ] GENTEX
[ ] SYSTEM SENSOR
Use this function to select the manufacturer of the strobes used in the system. The selection is system-wide and applies to all indicating circuits configured as strobes. For
“NORMAL” strobes there is no synchronization, while other strobes are synchronized and use manufacturer’s protocol to synchronize the strobes.
[X] TEMPORAL->Default
[ ] CONTINOUS
[ ] MARCH TIME
[ ] CALIFORNIA
Use this function to set the rate at which the indicating circuits will sound.
37
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
16. Active EOL
A c t i v e E O L
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Panel Config/Features/
17. Verify. Alarm
A l a r m v e r i f i c a t i o n
[ X ] U L C
[X] DISABLE->Default
[ ] NO
[X] ULC->Default
[ ] ULI
Enable this function if using an
Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is used, this function should be enabled since the Class A
Converter has built in Active
EOL resistors.
Select alarm verification timing according to ULI or ULC standard.
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone
-Initiating Zone-
1 Zone-1
2 Zone-2
3 Zone-3
4 Zone-4
5 Zone-5
6 Zone-6
This Inp Zone menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. Only six circuits will be shown for models MR-2306-LD and MR-2306-L.
Command Menu/ Panel Config /Ipt. Zone
1.Process Type (Initiating circuit)
Z o n e - 1 T y p e
[ X ] A L A R M
[X] ALARM ->Default
[ ] VERIF ALARM
[ ] SPRKL ALM
[ ] WTR-FLOW ALM
[ ] NON-LATCH SUP
[ ] LATCH SUPV
[ ] MONITOR
[ ] TRB ONLY
Use this function to program the process type of each input zone. ( See CIRCUIT TYPE section for details.)
6.
Zone-6
[X] ALARM
38
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. i3 Zones
This i3 Zones menu is used to program the process type for the initiating circuits. Select the zone to be an i3 zone, otherwise the panel will treat the zone as a normal detection zone. Only six circuits will be shown for models MR-
2306-LD and MR-2306-L..
-i3 Detection Zones-
1 [ ] Zone-1
2 [ ] Zone-2
3 [ ] Zone-3
4 [ ] Zone-4
5 [ ] Zone-5
6 [ ] Zone-6
[ ] Zone-1 ->Default
-
-
-
-
[ ] Zone-6 ->Default
Use this function if i3 devices are present on a zone. (See i3 devices section for details).
39
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone
Indicating Zone
1 NAC-1
2 NAC-2
3 NAC-3
4 NAC-4
This menu is used to program the process type of the indicating circuits.
Command Menu/ Panel Config /Opt. Zone
1.Process Type (Indicating
Circuits)
N A C - 1 T y p e
[ X ] S I L - A B L E
[X] SIL-ABLE->Default
[ ] NON SIL-ABLE
[ ] SIL-ABLE STR
[ ] NON-SIL STR
Use this function to program the process type of each indicating circuit. See CIRCUIT
TYPE section for details.
4.
NAC-4 Type
[X] Sil-able
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Correlation
Command Menu/ Panel Config /Correlation
1.Correlation
Z o n e - 1 C o r r .
[ X ] N A C - 1
[X] NAC-1 ->Default
[X] NAC-2 ->Default
[X] NAC-3 ->Default
[X] NAC-4 ->Default
Use this function to correlate initiating circuits to the indicating circuits. By default all the initiating circuits are correlated to all the indicating circuits.
6.
Zone-6 Corr.
[X] NAC-1
40
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Inp Zone Label
-Initiating Zone-
1 Zone-1
2 Zone-2
3 Zone-3
4 Zone-4
5 Zone-5
6 Zone-6
Use the keys described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described following.
Command Menu/ Panel Config /Ipt. Zone Lab
1.Initiating zone label
Zone-1 Label
Zone-1
[Zone-1]->Default
[Zone-6]->Default
BYPASS SWITCH TRANSLATION
6.
Zone-6 Label
Zone-6
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Zone-1 0 Q Z Zone-2 1
Zone-3 2 A B C Zone-4 3 D E F
Zone-5 4 G H I Zone-6 5 J K L
NAC-1 6 M N O NAC-2 7 P R S
NAC-4 8 T U V NAC-3 9 W X Y
Aux Disconnect Back Space Lamp Test Forward
41
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Opt Zone Label
Indicating Zone
1 NAC-1
2 NAC-2
3 NAC-3
4 NAC-4
Use the keys in described below for entering message. These keys are alternate functions of bypass switches and are physically located in the same position as described below.
Command Menu/ Panel Config /Opt. Zone
Lab
1.Indicating zone messages
4.
NAC-1 Label
SIGNAL-1
NAC-4 Label
SIGNAL-4
[NAC-1 ]->Default
[NAC-2 ]->Default
[NAC-3 ]->Default
[NAC-4 ]->Default
BYPASS SWITCH TRANSLATION
KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4 KEY SEQ 1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------
Zone-1 0 Q Z Zone-2 1
Zone-3 2 A B C Zone-4 3 D E F
Zone-5 4 G H I Zone-6 5 J K L
NAC-1 6 M N O NAC-2 7 P R S
NAC-4 8 T U V NAC-3 9 W X Y
Aux Disconnect Back Space Lamp Test Forward
Command Menu-->Panel Config
Default Configuration
L o a d t h e d e f a u l t s e t t i n g s ? Y
Press “UP” and “DOWN” to select between Y/N. if “ENTER” is pressed the default configuration is restored.
D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s h a v e b e e n l o a d e d
Use this function to load the default configuration in the panel.
Warning: By loading default configuration all the previously programmed configuration is lost permanently.
42
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
2. Config Info (Command-Menu
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n t y p e :
F a c t o r y d e f a u l t
Press down arrow key to see more information.
Configuration type will show how the panel was configured.
“Factory default” means the panel has not been configured, it is as it came from the factory. “Front Panel” means it was configured at the panel. “Serial Port” means the configuration was done from a computer through the serial port. “Modem” means the configuration was completed remotely through a modem.
J o b N a m e :
N o j o b l o a d e d
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the job name will appear on this screen. The job name can be up to a maximum of 20 characters.
T e c h n i c i a n I D :
U n k n o w n
Press down arrow key for further info
If you upload a job configuration to the panel using the PC configuration utility, the technician’s name (ID) will appear on this screen. The technician ID can be up to a maximum of 10 characters.
C f g . D a t e a n d T i m e : h h : m m d a y y e a r : m m : d d
Press down arrow key for further info
Configuration date and time will appear for all means of configuration, thus revealing date and time configuration was last changed (if Time and Date have been set at the panel).
C o n f i g u r a t o r V e r s i o n x . x . x . x
This specifies the configuration tool version. It will display
0.0.0.0 if no PC configurator has been used.
43
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
3. Set Time (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
1 D a y l i g h t S a v e
2 T i m e C l o c k
3 C o m p e n s a t i o n
Command Menu/Set time Date
1. Daylight saving time
D a y l i g h t S a v i n g
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Set time and date
[X] DISABLE ->Default
[ ] ENABLE
Use this function to enable daylight savings time.
H H : M M W K D Y Y Y Y - M M - D D
0 0 : 0 0 M O N 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
Default
00:00 MON 2000-01-01
Use this function to set the time and date. Use the “LEFT” and
“RIGHT” keys to move the cursor to the desired location in the display and use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to increase or decrease the values. Press the “ENTER” key to accept the changes and the “CANCEL” key to ignore the changes.
Note: time is in 24hr format
Command Menu/Time Clock
2. Compensation
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
0
When value is entered the following message will appear
Compensation value can range from -15 to
+15 seconds.
Use the up down arrow keys to select daily compensation value and press ENTER. For a fast clock adjust negatively.
For a slow clock adjust positively. For example: for a clock which runs 5 minutes a month (based on 30 days) fast select -10 seconds.
D a i l y C o m p e n s a t i o n :
P a n e l C o n f i g U p d a t e d
44
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
4. Set password (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
E n t e r n e w p a s s c o d e
[ ]
R e - e n t e r p a s s c o d e
[ ]
If the passcode does not match, the following message appears and the system exit to the main menu
1111 -> Default i n v a l i d p a s s c o d e
Use this function to change the pass-code. The minimum number of digits is 4 and the maximum is 10. Only numeric digits are allowed.
If the passcode is OK the following message appears and exits to the main menu
P a s s c o d e u p d a t e d
5. View Event Log (Command-Menu)
The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG-
300 LCD Configuration tool display.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
E V EN T
01 of 09
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
2 0 0 2 / 1 0 / 2 2 1 1 : 4 5 . A M
D AT E
There are a maximum of 200 recent events saved in the event log. If the number of events goes beyond 200, the oldest event is overwritten by the most recent one.
45
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
- S e l e c t L o g -
1 A l a r m L o g
2 G e n e r a l L o g
3 A l l L o g s
Select the type of log to clear. Press the
“ENTER” key. The system will then confirm before clearing logs.
Use this function to clear alarm logs, event logs, or both.
C l e a r a l l t h e
s e l e c t e d l o g ( s ) ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to confirm or the
“CANCEL” key to cancel the operation.
L o g ( s ) c l e a r e d
46
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
7. Walk Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation:
P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y
Press the “ENTER” key to activate the walk test and the “CANCEL” key to cancel the walk test. The next screen will allow zones to be selected for walk test. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the zones and use the
“LEFT” or ‘RIGHT” keys to select a zone. Press the “ENTER” key when you are done with all the selections.
- W A L K T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
The walk test is now active ( see illustration below)
- W a l k t e s t a c t i v e -
A l a r m : 0 0 T r b : 0 0
The activation of any initiating circuit that has been selected for a walk test will cause the Audible Indicating Circuits
(not Strobes) to activate briefly for a number of short bursts corresponding to the selected circuit number. If the first selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for one burst. If the second selected circuit is activated, the indication circuits will sound for two bursts, and so on. This means that if, for example, circuits 1, 3 and 5 were selected for the walk test, they would sound with one, two and three bursts respectively. The burst interval is half a second on and half a second off. After the sounding pattern has been sent on the indicating circuits, the initiating circuit is reset and tested again. If it is still active (in alarm) the pattern will be re-sent. Trouble on any initiating circuit selected for the walk test activates the indicating circuits continuously for five seconds. Activation of a circuit will also cause the alarm count to increase while the trouble on the initiating circuit will cause the trouble count to increase.
Alarm Verification and Water flow Alarm Retard Operations are disabled on circuits being walk tested. All circuits not selected for the walk test continue to function normally. If a circuit was disconnected before the walk-test mode was entered and is not selected for the walk-test, it remains disconnected while the walk test is active. Walk test operation is disabled if the Fire Alarm Control Panel is in alarm or goes into alarm while the walk test is active.
Notes:
• If a UDACT is used with the system, all walk-test events will be reported to the monitoring agency. The monitoring agency should be instructed to ignore reported events during the walk-test.
• IF THERE IS NO ACTIVITY FOR ONE HOUR, THE SYSTEM WILL RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION.
47
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
8. i
3
Loop Test (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the FA-300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The i
3
maintenance test is designed to test the devices on i
3
zone. If there is noise on the line or if the device is too far away from the panel, the devices may not respond to the panel inquiries. An i
3
maintenance test can be invoked from the command menu six minutes after power-up or after pressing the reset. If the i
3
maintenance test is selected, the following message appears on the screen:
P e r f o r m t h e i 3
L o o p t e s t ? Y
If you select “yes” by pressing “ENTER”, the display will ask you for which zone you want to perform the i
3
test. Note that only one zone at a time can be in maintenance test. Select the zone by pressing the “UP” and “DOWN” keys and then pressing the “RIGHT” key to select the device. After the device is selected press “ENTER”.
- I 3 T E S T Z O N E S -
[ ] Z o n e - 1
If the i
3
maintenance test is selected within six minutes after power-up or reset, the following information message is displayed.
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t r e a d y y e t
If a zone is selected that is not configured as an i
3
zone, the following message is displayed:
T h e s e l e c t e d z o n e i s n o t i 3 t y p e
After the zone goes into the i
3
maintenance test, no other zone can be put into the test. The maintenance test will take five minutes. During this time you can walk through the device and make sure all the devices are working properly. The following table lists the status of the devices while in walk test.
i 3 Detector Condition
Proper operation
Out of sensitivity
(Low and High Maint)
Freeze condition
Green LED
Double blink every 5 sec
OFF
OFF
OFF
Red LED
Double blink every 5 sec
Double blink every10 sec
You can cancel the maintenance test either by pressing the “RESET” key or by going into the configuration section and canceling the test.
48
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu)
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board. Each item in this menu is described below in detail.
-Dialer Config-
1. Account Info
2. Telephone line
3. Report Options
4. Time Parameter
5. Enable/Disable
6. Ring Detect
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Account Info
-Account Info-
1. Account#1 ID
2. Account#1 Tel
3. Accnt#1 Format
4. Account#2 ID
5. Account#2 Tel
6. Accnt#2 Format
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
1.Account# 1 Identification
Account#1 ID
123456
123456->Default
Use this function to set the Account ID for the monitoring station to which the dialer reports events. The maximum # of digits allowed is six.
For contact ID, only the first four digits are used; the last two are truncated.
Unless you are using the SIA protocol, the allowed digits for the account ID are simple digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F (the
SIA protocol only allows digits 0 to 9).
To enter hexadecimal digits, press the INFO button. The letter “A” will appear. To scroll through the rest of the letters, press INFO repeatedly. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left.
49
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
2.Account#1 Telephone Number
Account#1 Telnum:
101
[101]->Default
Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is 19 including “,” and numerals.
The “,” will be treated as 1 sec delay. To enter
“,” press the INFO button. Press # to move the cursor to the right or press * to move it to the left. An example of a typical telephone # is
9,,12345678.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
3.Account#1 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 1 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
4. Account# 2 Identification
ACCOUNT#2 ID:
654321
[X] CONTACT ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Set the reporting format that is recognized or preferred by the monitoring station.
654321->Default Same as Account#1.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
5.Account# 2 Telephone Number
ACCOUNT#2 Telnum:
101
[ 101 ]->Default Same as Account#1.
Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info
6.Account# 2 Reporting Format
A C C N T # 2 F o r m a t :
[ X ] C o n t a c t I D
[X] Contact ID-Default
[ ] SIA 300 Baud
[ ] SIA 110 Baud
Same as Account#1.
50
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu-->Dialer Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Telephone Line
- T e l e p h o n e L i n e -
1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e
2 L i n e 2 D i a l t y p e
3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e
4 L i n e 2 D i a l t o n e
5 N u m o f R e t r i e s
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
1. Line#1 Dialing Type
L i n e # 1 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Set the dialing type for line #1; this is the type recognized or preferred by the telephone company.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
2. Line#2 Dialing Type
L i n e # 2 D i a l i n g T y p e :
[ X ] D T M F D i a l
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
3. Line#1 wait for Dial tone
L i n e # 1 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
4.Line#2 wait for Dial tone
L i n e # 2 W a i t D i a l t o n e
[ X ] E N A B L E
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone
Line
5.Number of retries
N u m b e r o f R e t r i e s :
0 6
[X] DTMF Dial->Default
[ ] Pulse Dial
Same as Line#1.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Use this function to let the system know whether or not to wait for a dial tone before dialing. Cell phone setup for the dialer requires that the system not wait for dial tone before dialing.
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
Same as Line#1.
06 ->Default
Set the number of retries for both line#1 and line#2. This function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not available. If the retry count expires, the panel reports a line trouble.
51
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Report Options
- R e p o r t O p t i o n s -
1 . A l a r m P r i o .
2 . T r o u b l e P r i o .
3 . S u p v . P r i o .
4 . A u x . D i s R e p o r t
5 . O p e r a t i o n M o d e
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
1.Alarm priority
A l a r m P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
2.Trouble priority
T r o u b l e P r i o r i t y :
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
3.Supervisory priority
S U P V P r i o r i t y
[ X ] A c c o u n t 1
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
[X] Account 1->Default
[ ] Account 2
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
4.Aux Disconnect, Cancels Alarm
& Supv Reporting Through dialer
[ ] ENABLE
[X] DISABLE ->Default
A u x D i s A l m / S u p v R p t .
[ X ] D I S A B L E
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting alarms. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting trouble. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
Use this function to set the account priority for reporting supervisory troubles. If the priority is set for account#1 then the dialer will try account#1 first for reporting.
If this function is enabled, the
Aux Disconnect feature
(obtained by pressing the Aux
Disconnect button) will block the alarm and supervisory events from being reported through the built-in dialer.
52
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report
Options
5.Dialer operation mode
D ia le r O p e r. M o d e
[X ] ( U )D A C T
[ ] D A C T
[X] (U)DACT ->Default
[ ] DACT
Use this function to select the functionality of the dialer. In
DACT mode only common trouble/alarm/supervisory are reported while in UDACT mode all point information is reported
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Time Parameters
- T i m e P a r a m e t e r -
1 A C - L o s s D e l a y
2 C e l l p h o n e D a t e
3 A u t o - T e s t T i m e
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
1.AC Loss delay
A C - L o s s D e l a y ( H r s )
0
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
2.Cellular report date
C e l l u l a r R e p o r t D a t e
0
0 ->Default
Use this function to delay the reporting of AC loss trouble on the dialer for the programmed time period.
Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time
Parameter
3. Auto test time
Auto-Test (HH:MM):
00:30
0 ->Default
00:30 ->Default
Use this function to set the test report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the phone line is a regular line.
Other settings could be anywhere from 01-28, representing which day of the month the test should be performed. When a cell phone service is employed for the panel, it should only be connected to telephone line #2
CO interface. Also, the dial tone detection feature of Line
#2 should be disabled for cell phone application.
Use this function to set the time for auto test. This test has to be performed once a day to send the test report to the monitoring station. The time is in 24hr format, which means
00:30 is 30 minutes after midnight.
Please do not use the following test times: 00:00,
01:55, 02:00 and 03:00.
53
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Note:
Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections.
Dialer Enable/Disable
D i a l e r E n a / D i s
[ X ] E N A B L E
- - - - - - W a r n i n g - - - - - - -
D i a l e r D i s a b l e d ! ! !
[X] ENABLE ->Default
[ ] DISABLE
The dialer is enabled by default. When the dialer is enabled or disabled, a warning message appears.
Warning: The dialer cannot report any event to the monitoring station if it is disabled.
Command Menu-->Dialer-Config
Ring Detect
- R i n g D e t ec t N u m b e r -
[ X ] 5
[ ] Disabled
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
[ ] 3
[ ] 4
[X] 5->Default
[ ] 6
[ ] 7
[ ] 8
Use this menu item to select the number of rings on which the panel’s modem will answer.
The default number of rings is five. The maximum number of rings you can define is eight.
If you select the “Disabled” option, the modem will be disabled and the panel will not pick up the incoming call.
10. Test Dialer (Command-Menu)
- D i a l e r T e s t -
1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t
3 . R e s e t D i a l e r
1 . L # 1 M a n u a l t e s t
2 . L # 2 M a n u a l t e s t
.
Press Enter to test Line #1. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
Press Enter to test Line #2. Press
Cancel to exit this menu. For a description of test messages, see Dialer
Test Messages on the following page.
This feature flushes all reportable events from the buffer. Press Enter to reset the dialer. Press Cancel to exit this menu.
54
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Dialer Test Messages
The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found.
D i a l e r i d l e n o w
The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This message automatically displays when Manual
Test is selected.
N o D C V o l t
No DC line voltage. The line is dead or no phone line is connected.
W a i t i n g f o r D i a l t o n e
The dialer is waiting for a dial tone.
F a i l e d : N o D i a l t o n e
D i a l i n g R e c e i v e r N o w
N o D T M F t o n e
W a i t i n g f o r A c k t o n e
F a i l e d N o A c k t o n e
R e p o r t i n g E v e n t N o w
W a i t i n g f o r K i s s o f f
N o K i s s o f f
This message may indicate a noisy telephone line.
The dial tone was received and telephone number dialing is in process.
This message indicates that the dialer failed to send a DTMF tone.
Waiting for availability of the receiver. The receiver confirms the availability by sending an ack tone.
This message indicates that either the telephone number may be wrong or the receiver is not available.
When sending events to the receiver, the display will toggle between this message and “Waiting for
Kissoff “ for all events sent.
The dialer is waiting for the kissoff tone. The kissoff tone indicates that the receiver has received the event reports.
No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports.
P a s s e d : M a n u a l t e s t
The line passed the test; everything is OK.
55
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
11. Exit (Command-Menu)
Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.
CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation
If an LCD service tool is connected to the panel, you will only be able to view the latest message–you cannot scroll through them. In order to see all of the messages, you must enter the programming menu and see the event logs.
The logs are arranged so that the most recent message is shown first. Listed below are the different kinds of messages that can be displayed on the LCD service tool.
Zone messages
Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD. There are no separate queues for “TROUBLE”, “ALARM”,
“SUPERVISORY” and “MONITOR”; instead there is only one queue that indicates all the events. The respective
TROUBLE, ALARM, SUPVISORY and MONITOR LEDs will be flashing if at least one of the given types is in the queue.
The LCD service tool will only show the first alarm or trouble. If a trouble happens first and then an alarm, the alarm will be displayed. Any further events will change the total number of events, shown in the right hand corner of the
LCD display. The order of priority is alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor.
Example 1 (detection circuit):
Event “ 01/09 ” 01 of 09, “ OPEN TRB ” on physical “ Z-01 ” at “ EAST LOBBY ENTRANCE ”. Press the INFO key to show the process type as “ VERIFIED ALARM ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/04/04 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
E A S T L O B B Y E N T R A N C E
O P E N T R B 0 1 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
V E R I F I E D A L A R M Z - 0 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 4
T IM E D AT E
Example 2 (indicating circuit):
Event “ 02/09 ” 02 of 09, “ SHORT TRB ” on physical “ NAC-01 ” at “ EAST WING LOBBY ” with process type as
“ SILENCEABLE ” and the event occurred on “ 2003/02/02 ” at “ 18:01 TUESDAY ”.
ZO N E
M essage
Process
Type
Physical
Zone N o.
56
E A S T W I N G L O B B Y
S H O R T T R B 0 2 / 0 9
EV E N T type
E V E N T
02 of 09
"IN FO " Key
S I L E N C E - A B L E N A C - 1
1 8 : 0 1 T U E 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 2
T IM E
D AT E
Other common messages are listed on the following pages.
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
AC Power Fail
The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
A C P o w e r F a i l
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 4
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D AT E
Battery trouble
The battery trouble is generated when the battery voltage drops below the specified value. The trouble is restored when the voltage returns to the normal value.
T rouble Typ e
B a t t e r y T r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 8
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A TE
Ground Fault
The “Ground Fault” message indicates that there is a short in the electrical connection between the metal chassis of the panel and the earth.
Trouble Type
G r o u n d F a u l t
A c t i v e 1 / 1
EV E N T
0 1 of 0 1
Trouble code Trouble Info
"IN F O " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A TE
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
57
Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool
Remote Annunciator
Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an un-configured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed:
T roub le Type
R A U n u m m i s m a t c h t r o u b l e 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 09
"IN FO " Key
T rouble info
Trouble code
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
1 1 : 4 5 S A T 2 0 0 3 - 0 2 - 0 3
T IM E
D AT E
Four-wire smoke detector supply
The four-wire smoke detector supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T roub le Type
4 W i r e P w r . S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V E N T
01 of 01
Trouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
T IM E D AT E
Note:
The trouble code and info is for trained service personnel only.
58
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Supervised Aux-supply
The supervised aux-supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux-supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal; otherwise the trouble message will stay.
T rouble Typ e
A u x . P o w e r S u p p l y s h o r t 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
City tie Polarity reversal - MR-2300-PR/ Relay module
The city tie or polarity reversal module is supervised for open and whether or not the PR-300 is plugged in. The relay module is supervised for whether or not it is plugged in.
If any of the modules are not plugged in, the following trouble message is generated:
T rouble Typ e
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
If there is an open detected on the city tie output, the following trouble message is displayed:
T rouble Typ e
C i t y T i e t r o u b l e
A c t i v e 1 / 1
E V EN T
01 of 01
T rouble code T rouble Info
"IN FO " Key
T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1
0 0 : 0 7 S A T 2 0 0 0 - 0 1 - 0 1
TIM E D A T E
59
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
Appendix A: Compatible Receivers
The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR):
DACR Receiver Model Protocols
SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
Osborne-Hoffman Quickalert! II Receiver (ULI approved)
Osborne-Hoffman OH-2000 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Silent Knight Model 9500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6500 Receiver (ULI Approved)
Radionics Model D6600 Receiver (ULI Approved)
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID
60
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B: Reporting
Ademco Contact-ID
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS-485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (NORMAL)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (OFF
NORMAL)
Test
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Trouble
Supervisory
Zone Supervisory restored Supervisory
Waterflow Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Waterflow restored
Indicating Zone Trouble
Indicating Zone Trouble restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Restore 3 113
New event 1 320
Restore 3 320
New event 1 140
Restore 3 140
New event 1 301
Restore 3 301
New event 1 302
Restore 3 302
New event 1 310
Restore 3 310
Qualifier Code
New event 1 351
New event 1 352
Restore
Restore
3 351
3 352
New event 1 354
Restore 3 354
New event 1 350
New event 1 602
New event 1 608
New event 1 601
New event 1 110
Restore 3 110
New event 1 300
Restore 3 300
New event 1 200
Restore 3 200
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Group # Contact #
00
00
00
00
Acct #
Acct #
00
00
000
000
000
000
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
000
000
61
Appendix B: Reporting
Security Industries Association SIA-DCS
SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore.
MR-2300 Event Codes
Event Description Event Family Qualifier
SIA Event
Code
Parameter
Phone Line #1 trouble detected
Phone Line #2 trouble detected
Phone Line #1 trouble restored
Phone Line #2 trouble restored
Failure to report to an Account
Report to an Account successful
RS485 Communication Trouble
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Normal)
Periodic (24 hr) Test Event (Off-normal)
Manually initiated dialer test
Zone Fire Alarm
Zone Fire Alarm restored
Zone Trouble detected
Zone Trouble restored
Zone Supervisory condition
Zone Supervisory restored
Waterflow alarm
Waterflow alarm restored
General Alarm
General Alarm restored
Indicating Zone Trouble (*)
Indicating Zone Trouble restored (*)
AC power lost
AC power restored
Battery Low
Battery Low restored
Ground Fault
Ground Fault restored
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
Test
Alarm
Alarm
Trouble
Trouble
Supervisory
Supervisory
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Trouble
Test
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
Restore
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
New event
New event
New event
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
New event
Restore
UT
UR
AT
AR
WA
WH
QA
QH
YT
YR
YP
YQ
FT
FJ
FS
FR
RY
RX
FA
FH
RT
YK
YS
RP
LT
LT
LR
LR
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
000
000
000
000
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
NNN
001
002
001
002
Acct #
Acct #
485
000
62
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C: Specifications
MR-2306-L series fire alarm control panel MR-2306-R6 adder module
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable using CFG-300 with Password Access.
Electrical Ratings
AC line voltage
120VAC, 60Hz, 1.7A / 240VAC, 50Hz, 0.85A,10A slow blow fuse on secondary of transformer
Power Supply Rating
6.35 amps maximum at secondary of transformer
Battery
Type: 24VDC Gel-Cell/Sealed lead acid - 10AH to 24AH
Charging capability: 10AH to 24AH
Protection: 10A on board (F1) slow blow micro fuse
Indicating circuits
4 supervised style Y (Class B) indicating circuits, configured as strobes or audibles. Terminals are labeled “SIG 1,2,3,4”
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A @ 49C per circuit
Max power allowed = 5A
- 1.7A (aux power unfiltered if used)
- 0.5A (aux power filtered if used)
- 0.3A (4-wire smoke power if used)
if no auxiliaries are used the max power is 5A for the indicating circuits
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max.
Only suitable for DC applications such as visual indicators.
Current consumption standby 0mA, alarm 80mA
MR-2306-R6 Input Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2306-R6 Output Class A Converter module
Standby 0mA / alarm 0mA
MR-2312-S12 Smart Relay Module
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
Contact rating NO/NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load max
Current consumption standby 30mA / alarm 140mA
MR-2306/12-AT 8/16 Zone Remote Annunciator
Standby 35mA / alarm 90mA
Remote Trouble Indicator
Current consumption Standby 123mA/Alarm 316mA
Aux supply (non resettable) power limited / 21.1Vdc regulated / 500mA max
4-wire smoke supply (resettable)
Power limited/21.1VDC regulated / 300mA max
Unfiltered supply (full wave rectified)
Power limited / Regulated 24VDC FWR / 1.7A max at 49C
Auxiliary Relays (Common alarm/supv/trb/ and auxiliary second alarm)
Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply
FormC / 28VDC / 1A resistive load max.
Only suitable for DC applications such as visual indicators.
Initiating circuit
6 supervised style B (Class B) initiating circuits, configurable
(normal or verified). Terminals are labeled “DET”. Compatibility
ID “A”
Power limited / 19VDC reg. / 3mA for detectors / 200mV AC ripple / 45mA max (alarm short)
1 RS-485 Connection
For remote annunciators. Terminals are labeled “RS-485”.
MR-2300-PR Polarity reversal city tie module (optional)
MR-2306-R6 Relay Module (optional)
Standby 35mA / alarm 35mA
Polarity reversal and city tie module
City tie power limited / 24VDC unfiltered / 250mA max / 14Ohms trip coil
Polarity reversal power limited / 24VDC open / 12VDC at 3.5mA /
8.5mA max (shorted)
Polarity reversal supv terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (supervisory) / 0V (trouble)
Polarity reversal alarm terminal
24VDC (normal) / -24VDC (alarm) / 0V (trouble)
Current consumption standby 50mA / alarm 300mA (city tie in use) / alarm 70mA (city tie not in use)
Ground Fault circuit
Less the 3K will generate a ground fault.
System Model: MR-2306-L Series LED Version Fire Alarm Control Panel
System Type: Local Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premises Station (using MR-2300-
PR or
MR-2306-LD). Central Station Protected Premises (using MR-2306-LD)
Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS
Type of Signalling : Non-Coded
Applicable Standards: NFPA 70 and 72, UL-864 Rev. 9, ULC S-524, ULC S-527-99, ULC-S-536
63
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)
Appendix D: Power Supply and Battery Calculations
(Selection Guide)
Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries).
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices. Use #12 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation and proper over-current circuit protection that complies with the local codes.
Model
Number
MR-2306-LD
MR-2306-L
MR-2300-A
MR-2300-NC2
MR-2300-PR
MR-2306-R6
MR-2312-S12
MR-2300-LCD
POWER REQUIREMENTS (ALL CURRENTS ARE IN AMPERES)
Description Qty Standby
Total
Standby
Fire Alarm, 6 Det, Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR
Fire Alarm, 6 Det, Control
Panel FIXED ELR/
ACTIVE ELR
Det Class A Converter
Adder Module
Sig Class A Converter
Adder Module--2 Circuits
Polarity Reversal and City
Tie Module
X
X
X
X
X
0.123/
0.092
0.123/
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.050
=
=
Alarm
0.316/
0.292
0.318/
0.300
= 0.000
= 0.000
= 0.300
6 Relay Adder Module X 0.000
= 0.080
12 Relay Smart Relay
Module
Smart Remote
Annunciator
X
X
0.030
0.016
=
=
0.090
0.040
MR-2306/12-
AT
MR-2605-T
Remote Annunciators
Remote Trouble Indicator
Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
X
X
X
0.035
0.035
Ò 0.00011
=
=
=
0.090
0.035
* 0.135
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors X =
Signal Load (bells, horns, strobes, and etc.) X
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Total
Alarm
Auxiliary Power Supply for Annunciators, etc.
=
Total currents (Add above currents) STANDBY ( A ) ALARM
* Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm.
' Use 0.084
for five minutes, 0.168 for 10 minutes and 0.5 for half hour of alarm as a multiplier figure.
Ò Using the a 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector.
Total Current Requirement: ALARM ( B )______ Amps. (Value obtained from column B )
Battery Capacity Requirement:
Battery (AH) = ( [STANDBY ( A ) ______ ] x [(24, 60 or 90 Hours) ___ ] ) +
( [ALARM ( B ) ______ ] x [Alarm in Hr.] _____ )
= ( C ) ______AH
Total Alarm Current: Must be 6 amperes or less. Indicating Circuits must not to exceed 5 amperes.
Battery Selection: Multiply ( C ) by 1.20 to derate battery.
=
( B )
64
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not
65
Warranty & Warning Information be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
66
MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
67
Warranty & Warning Information
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
68
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
© 2006 Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
Model MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder Module
The MR-2306-R6 provides six programmable relays. It mounts below the FA-300 main fire alarm board using the 2 screws provided. Before mounting the relay adder module, program the relays using the jumpers on the board. The jumpers located above each relay on the MR-2306-R6 are used to configure the relays. The jumpers located below the relays are used to select either normally open contacts or normally closed contacts. The ribbon cable from P1 of the
MR-2306-R6 is connected to P6 on the Main Fire Alarm Board.
Figure 1: MR-2306-R6 Six Relay Adder module
P1 : Cable from MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects to P6 on Main Fire Alarm Board.
Programming the relays
A typical relay circuit is shown below in Figure 2 with the jumper locations and descriptions.
Note: Relay programming should be done before installing the board into the fire alarm backbox.
Figure 2: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming
SUPV/ALARM SELECTION
S: Relay turns ON when common supervisory is active
A: Relay turns ON when common alarm is active
ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when zone
(1) is active removed: does not turn ON the relay when zone (1) is active
Default: Jumper is installed
Default: No jumper installed, connected on center pin only
RELAY 1
Z1
A S
NO NC
1&2
LED (GREEN)
LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2 jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2 chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be ON if any one of relays 1,2 and 3 is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only
NC/NO CONNECTION
NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts
NO: terminal provides normally open contacts
Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)
Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection then the relay is not connected to the terminals
NO/NC C
RELAY 12
NO/NC C
LT-1000SEC Nov 2005 Page 1 of 2
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating:
28V
Normally Open NO, Normally Closed NC per
1A resistive load max
Current Consumption: Standby: 0 mA
Alarm: 80 mA
LT-1000SEC Nov 2005 Page 2 of 2
M R - 2 3 1 2 - S
Fire Alarm Control Unit
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision
2
Document #: LT-1001SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Contents ......................................................................................................................................................... i
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 1
Mechanical Installation................................................................................................................................. 1
Functional Setup........................................................................................................................................... 2
Jumpers ................................................................................................................................................. 2
DIP Switches ......................................................................................................................................... 3
Configuration of the Relays ......................................................................................................................... 4
Wiring............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Specifications & Features ............................................................................................................................ 6
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................................ 7 i
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
The Model MR-2312-S Smart Relay Module provides twelve supervised configurable relays and comes complete with a white MR-2312-SW12 or red enclosure MR-2312-SR12.
Mechanical Installation
To mount the MR-2312-S open the front door, and mount the backbox to the wall using the four screws provided. This enclosure may also be mounted to a standard double gang electrical box. There are two conduit areas provided at the bottom of the enclosure.
8.2"
6.3"
0.75”
9.0
FOUR
MOUNTING
HOLES
2“ KNOCKOUT
7.5"
1.5"
1
Functional Setup
Functional Setup
Place 120 ohm EOL resistor between + and - on the RS-485 on last wired MR-2312-S only.
DIP Switch for relay address
P4 is for factory use only
P4
+ S
RS-485 IN/OUT
C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC
Z7
RLY. 7
A
7&8
S
Z8
RLY. 8
A
8&9
S
RLY. 9
A
Z9
S
9&10
RLY. 10
A
Z10
10&11
S
RLY. 11
A
Z11
11&12
S
RLY. 12
A
Z12
S
12
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DSW1
JW49
JW48
DSCNN
TX/RX
PWR ON
CPU FAIL
24VDC
+IN/OUT-
Z1
1&2
S
A
Z2
2&3 A
S
RLY. 1
C NO/NC
RLY. 2
C NO/NC
Z3
A
S
3&4
RLY. 3
C NO/NC
Z4
4&5
A
S
RLY. 4
C NO/NC
Z5
S
A
5&6
RLY. 5
C NO/NC
Z6
6&7 A
S
RLY. 6
C NO/NC
Relay jumpers for programming
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY STATUS
GREEN LEDS
Leave jumpers JW48,
JW49 and JW50 intact on board.
Wire 24 Volts from filtered Auxiliary
Power at the Fire Alarm Panel.
LEDs:
DSCNN - if enabled (via DIP switch DSW1-4), this LED illuminates steadily (amber) when auxiliary disconnect is activated at the Fire Alarm Panel.
TX/RX - transmit/receive LED flashes (green as long as there is communication with the Fire Alarm Panel.
PWR ON - illuminates steadily (green) as long as there is power to the relay board.
CPU FAIL - will illuminate steadily (amber) when CPU fails at the Fire Alarm Panel.
Jumpers
Jumper
JW48
JW49
JW50
Jumper Function
FACTORY USE ONLY (JUMPER INSTALLED)
FACTORY USE ONLY (JUMPER INSTALLED)
FACTORY USE ONLY (JUMPER INSTALLED)
2
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
DIP Switches
There is one DIP switches to be set. DSW1 is found at the top left hand corner and is used to select the smart relay address. Valid addresses are 1 to 6 inclusive. DIP switches 6 to 8 are not used. Set address as follows:
MR-2312-S Address DIP Switch Setup
Address
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
DSW1-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
DSW1-2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
INVALID
DSW1-3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Dip Switch DSW1-4
DSW1-4 is used to disable the Auxiliary Disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel.
DIP Switch DSW1-4
Position
ON
OFF
Function
Enable auxiliary disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series fire alarm panel.
Disable auxiliary disconnect function from the MR-2300 Series fire alarm panel (Aux. disconnect will not disconnect these twelve relays).
This is the default setting. The DSCNN (Aux Disconnect) LED is not active when Aux Disconnect is active on the MR-2300 Series Fire
Alarm Control Panel in this mode.
Dip Switch DSW1-5 (MR-2320 only)
Used to enable added support for hazard zone message for the MR-2320. This option is enabled by putting DSW1-
5 to the “ON” position.When this option is enabled, relay 1 to 6 will show the status for Hazard Area 1 and Hazard
Area 2 as shown in the table below.
RLY1
Hazard Area 1
RLY2 RLY3
Alert
RLY4
Alarm Release Alert
Hazard Area 2
RLY5
Alarm
RLY6
Release
3
Configuration of the Relays
Configuration of the Relays
The twelve Relays may be configured to operate alone or in combination with other relays on the board. This configuration is accomplished by jumper selection on the Smart Relay module. The following illustration explains how the relays are configured.
ZONE JUMPER
installed: turns on relay when the zone
(1) is active
removed: does not turn on the relay when zone (1) is active
Default: Jumper is installed
LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE
jumper installed: this relay 1 works in conjunction with relay 2
jumper removed: relay 1 does not operate with the adjacent relay 2
chaining example: if jumper is installed on 1&2 and 2&3 then all the three relays will be on if any one of relays 1,2 or 3 is active
Default: No jumper installed, connected on one pin only
LED (GREEN)
RELAY
Z1
1&2
RELAY 1
NO/NC C
SUPV/ALARM SELECTION
S: Relay turns on when common supervisory is active
A: Relay turns on when common alarm is active
Default: Jumper is NOT installed, connected on center pin only
NC/NO CONNECTION
NC: terminal provides normally closed contacts
NO: terminal provides normally open contacts
Default: jumper is installed on normally open (NO)
Note: if the jumper is not installed on any selection, then the relay is not connected to the terminals
RELAY 6
NO/NC C
4
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring
Wire from the last MR-2312-S to the next MR-2312-S and so on; then from the first MR-2312-S to the Fire Alarm
Panel. There are only two connections to be made, one for power and one for the RS-485 loop.
The RS-485 Wiring to the MR-2312-S is recommended to be Twisted Shielded Pair.
The wire gauge may be:
• 22 AWG up to 2000 ft.
• 20 AWG up to 4000 ft.
The 24V DC field wiring needs to be of an appropriate gauge for the number of smart relays and the total wiring run length. See Current Drain for Battery Calculations , page 6 and calculate the Maximum current for all smart relays summed together.
Note:
All circuits are power limited and must use type FPL, FPLR or FPLP Power Limited Cable.
CAUTION: Accidentally connecting any of the 24V DC wires to the RS-485 wiring will result in damage to the Annunciator and/or to the Fire Alarm Control Panel to which it is connected.
Total Maximum
Current for all
Smart Relays
Amperes
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
ft
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
Maximum Wiring Run to Last Smart Relay
18AWG 16AWG 14AWG 12AWG
47
36
29
24 m
360
143
71 ft
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125
76
56
46
38 m
567
229
114 ft
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200
122
91
73
61 m
915
366
183 ft m
4250 1296
1900
850
579
259
570
425
343
285
174
129
105
87
Max. Loop
Resistance
Ohms
15
6
3
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
5
Specifications & Features
Specifications & Features
Enclosure:
Enclosure may be mounted on a standard 4” square Electrical Box or on a wall.
Electrical Specifications:
² 24 VDC nominal voltage.
² Common LEDs DISCNN (Aux. Disconnect), TX/RX (Transmit/Receive), PWR ON, CPU FAIL and individual relay status LED indicators.
² 28V DC, 1A maximum per contact (resistive load)
² 12 programmable relays available.
² Not Expandable.
² Standby 30 mA Max., Alarm 140 mA Max. All LEDs illuminated 140 mA Max.
Current Drain for Battery Calculations:
The maximum normal current drain will be during Lamp Test when all lamps are illuminated on one chassis at a time.
Thus the currents are:
Normal Standby = 30 mA
Maximum = 140mA
The Normal Standby Current is used for Battery Size Calculations (see the MR-2300 or MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm
Control Panel manual for battery calculations) and includes the current drain for the common LEDs. The Maximum
Current is used to calculate the wire size (see Wiring section above).
6
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side
7
Warranty & Warning Information of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
8
MR-2312-S Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
9
Warranty & Warning Information
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
10
© 200
7
Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
M R - 2 3 0 0 - L C D
Remote Annunciator
I
NSTALLATION
M
ANUAL
Revision
2
Document #: LT-1002SEC
WARNING : This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
Contents
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 1
Mechanical Installation...................................................................................................................... 2
Functional Setup ............................................................................................................................... 3
Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3
Potentiometer........................................................................................................................... 3
DIP Switches............................................................................................................................ 4
Wiring ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Specifications & Features ................................................................................................................. 7
Enclosure ................................................................................................................................. 7
Electrical Specifications ........................................................................................................... 7
Current Drain for Battery Calculations ..................................................................................... 7
Operating Instructions ....................................................................................................................... 8
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................... 9 i
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
The MR-2300-LCD is a remote annunciator used for the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panels. It provides remote access to the fire alarm panel.
Note:
Configuration of the MR-2300 series fire alarm panel from this remote annunciator is not allowed.
The MR-2300-LCD has an LCD display, common feature LEDs and pushbuttons, as well as an alpha numeric keypad for the LCD.
The MR-2300-LCD comes complete with an enclosure and can be surface mounted.
7.7"
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2003-04-05
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
LAMP
TEST
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
TRBL CPU FAIL
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
7.2"
MR-2300 SERIES Remote Annunciator
1.25"
Each MR-2300-LCD has its own address. Addresses available are 1 to and including 6. The buttons on the left side may be individually disabled if required, by setting DIP Switch SW31, see Functional Setup section following.
This annunciator may be selected to operate as an ancillary device using DIP Switch SW31-6 to disable all buttons except, Lamp Test, Buzzer Silence, Info and Arrow Buttons.
Note:
This option, if selected takes priority over any other selections made on DIP Switch SW31.
1
Mechanical Installation
Mechanical Installation
To mount the MR-2300-LCD open the front door, remove the dead front plate and mount the backbox to the wall using the four screws provided. This enclosure may also be mounted to a standard double gang electrical box.
There are two conduit areas provided at the bottom center of the enclosure. With the dead front plate removed, you may do the functional setup and wiring before replacing the dead front, see following sections.
7.5"
6.0"
7.0
FOUR
MOUNTING
HOLES
5.9"
1.22"
2
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Setup
POTENTIOMETER FOR
LCD CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT
VR1
JW1, JW2, JW3 ARE
FOR FACTORY USE
LEAVE JUMPERS
JW2 AND JW3 IN
PLACE.
JW1
JW2
JW3
P2
THESE PINS ARE
FOR FACTORY USE
ONLY
24V IN/OUT
- +
CUT JUMPER JW8 TO
MAKE RAM-300LCD AN
ANCILLARY DEVICE.
SYSTEM NORMAL
18:01 MON 2007-04-05
A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL
SYSTEM
RESET
SIGNAL
SILENCE
FIRE
DRILL
BUZZER
SILENCE
LAMP
TEST
JW8
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW31
1
4
GHI
7
PRS
*
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
TUV
0
QZ
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
WXY
#
ENTER
MENU
CANCEL
INFO
SW30
ON
1 2 3 4
SW31 DIP Switch for various system functions
SW30 DIP Switch for annunciator address setting. Valid addresses
1 to 6.
THIS
CONNECTOR IS
FOR FACTORY
USE ONLY
RS-485 IN/OUT
+ S
P1
Place the 120 ohm
EOL resistor between
+ and - terminals of the RS-485 on the last annunciator only.
Jumpers
Jumper
JW1
JW2
JW3
JW8
Jumper Function
FACTORY USE ONLY
FACTORY USE ONLY
FACTORY USE ONLY
CUT jumper to set the MR-2300-LCD as an ancillary device. Use NP-2051 blank labels to cover the System Reset, Signal Silence, Fire Drill, Enter, Menu and Cancel buttons for the
Ancillary Device Feature. Only Buzzer Silence, Lamp Test and Info are used.
Potentiometer
VR1 is a potentiometer used for LCD contrast adjustment and is located in the top left corner of the MR-2300-LCD board.
3
Functional Setup
DIP Switches
There are two DIP switches to be set. SW30 is found at the bottom right corner of the board and is used to select the annunciator address. Valid addresses are 1 to 6 inclusive for MR-2300. Set address as follows:
MR-2300-LCD Address DIP Switch Setup
Address SW30-1
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW30-2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
NOT USED
SW30-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Note:
SW30-4 DIP switch is not used.
DIP switch SW31 is found at the bottom left hand corner and is used to select a number of features. DIP switch
SW31 is set as follows:
DIP Switch SW31
6
7
5
5
7
8
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Position
ON
OFF
NOT USED
ON
OFF
NOT USED
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Function
Disable System Reset Button
Enable System Reset Button
Disable Signal Silence Button
Enable Signal Silence Button
Disable Fire Drill Button
Enable Fire Drill Button
Disable Lamp Test Button
Enable Lamp Test Button
Disable Buzzer Silence Button
Enable Buzzer Silence Button
16 bit checksum (if available)
8 bit checksum (for MR-2300)
4
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Wiring
To wire the MR-2300-LCD, you must first remove the dead front plate. Wire from the last MR-2300-LCD to the next
MR-2300-LCD and so on; then from the first MR-2300-LCD to the MR-2300 Fire Alarm Panel. There are only two connections to be made, one for power and the RS-485 loop. Replace the dead front plate once all functional setup and wiring is complete.
The RS-485 Wiring to the MR-2300-LCD is recommended to be Twisted Shielded Pair.
The wire gauge may be
• 22 AWG up to 2000 ft.
• 20 AWG up to 4000 ft.
The 24V DC field wiring needs to be of an appropriate gauge for the number of annunciators and the total wiring run length. See Current Drain for Battery Calculations on page 7 and calculate the Maximum current for all annunciators summed together.
Note:
All circuits are power limited and must use type FPL, FPLR or FPLP Power Limited Cable.
CAUTION: Accidentally connecting any of the 24V DC wires to the RS-485 wiring will result in damage to the Annunciator and/or to the Fire Alarm Control Panel to which it is connected.
Total Maximum
Current for all
Annunciators
Amperes
0.12
0.30
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.50
1.70
ft
1180
470
235
156
118
94
78
Maximum Wiring Run to Last Annunciator
18AWG 16AWG 14AWG 12AWG m
360
143
71
47
36
29
24 ft
1850
750
375
250
185
150
125 m
567
229
114
76
56
46
38 ft
3000
1200
600
400
300
240
200 m
915
366
183
122
91
73
61 ft
4250
1900
850
570
425
343
285 m
1296
579
259
174
129
105
87
Max. Loop
Resistance
Ohms
15
6
3
2
1.5
1.2
1.0
5
Wiring
The MR-2300-LCD is wired as shown below. Additional MR-2300-LCDs are wired in the same manner, make sure
ONLY the last MR-2300-LCD has the 120 ohm E.O.L. resistor connected to the RS-485 positive and negative terminals.
MAKE SURE
THERE IS A
120 OHM E.O.L.
RESISTOR
BETWEEN + AND -
ON THE LAST
ANNUNCIATOR
ONLY
MR-2300-LCD
ADDRESS 2
MR-2300-LCD
ADDRESS 1
6
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications & Features
Enclosure
Enclosure may be mounted on a standard 4-gang Electrical Box or on a wall.
Electrical Specifications
• 24 VDC nominal voltage.
• LCD Display, Pushbutton Controls and LED indicators.
• Local Buzzer, Indicators (AC-On, Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and CPU Fail), and Controls (System Reset,
Signal Silence, Fire Drill, Buzzer Silence and Lamp Test,).
• Annunciation of up to 16 Points.
• Not Expandable.
• Standby 16 mA Max., Alarm 40mA Max. All LEDs illuminated 40 mA Max.
Current Drain for Battery Calculations
The maximum normal current drain will be during Lamp Test when all lamps are illuminated on one chassis at a time. Thus the currents are:
• Normal Standby = 16 mA
• Maximum = 40 mA
The Normal Standby Current is used for battery size calculations (see the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control
Panel manual for battery calculations) and includes the current drain for the Trouble Buzzer, Trouble LED, and one
Alarm LED. The Maximum Current is used to calculate the wire size (see Wiring section above).
7
Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions
Normal: All indicators are normally OFF except for the green A.C. ON light which illuminates steadily.
Alarm: Operate Alarm Initiating Devices to activate Indicating Appliances. Signals will sound, common alarm will illuminate red.
Silencing of Alarm: Press Signal Silence button momentarily to silence all audible signals.
Note:
The signal silencing function may be inhibited for up to one minute. The Signal silence button will not operate until the inhibit period has expired.
Waterflow: Indicating appliances and other output circuits that are activated in response to an alarm initiated by a designated Waterflow Zone cannot be silenced (manual or automatic).
Supervisory: Activation of any initiating devices for supervisory will sound the buzzer continuously. The Common supervisory indicator will illuminate amber (steady). The Common Supervisory indicator remains "ON" when the buzzer is silenced.
System Reset: Press the Reset button momentarily to restore normal operation. All alarm indicators will extinguish
& all latched functions are restored.
Trouble: Any system trouble will sound the buzzer intermittently and common Trouble indicator will flash amber until the fault is corrected. Specific types of trouble will be indicated by the LCD display by pressing the INFO button. Call for service.
Fire Drill: Press the Fire Drill button momentarily to sound all audible signals without initiating an alarm. Press the button again for normal system operation. Note: Auxiliary relays will not operate when Fire Drill is operated.
Lamp Test: Press the Lamp Test button momentarily to test all indicators. All indicators should be lit and buzzer will sound. Holding down this button will display the firmware version.
CPU Fail LED: Will illuminate amber for an inboard CPU error.
Menu Button: Press the Menu button to access the associated MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel. The Menu button operates as it does on the main MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel, refer to the fire alarm manual for further explanation. Use the keypad arrow keys (2, 4, 6 and 8) to scroll through the menu. Configuration of the fire alarm panel cannot be accessed from the MR-2300-LCD.
Enter, Cancel and Info Buttons: The Enter and Cancel buttons are used to input and erase data for the fire alarm panel and the Info button is used to view the fire alarm panel logs.
Keypad: The numbered keys and/or letter keys function as they do at the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel, refer to the fire alarm manual for further explanation.
8
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Warranty & Warning Information
Warning Please Read Carefully
Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows:
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system endusers of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system. As a result, it is imperative that you properly inform each customer for whom you install the system of the possible forms of failure.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, such as fire or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Alarm systems of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some reasons for system failure include:
• Inadequate Installation
A Fire Alarm system must be installed in accordance with all the applicable codes and standards in order to provide adequate protection. An inspection and approval of the initial installation, or, after any changes to the system, must be conducted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Such inspections ensure installation has been carried out properly.
• Power Failure
Control units, smoke detectors and many other connected devices require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If the system or any device connected to the system operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be fully charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a fire alarm system. After a power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
Systems with wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
•Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference.
•System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices
Smoke detectors, heat detectors and other alarm initiating devices that are a part of this system may not properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side
9
Warranty & Warning Information of closed doors; and, smoke and heat detectors may not detect smoke or heat from fires on another level of the residence or building.
• Software
Most Secutron products contain software. With respect to those products, Secutron does not warranty that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the software will meet any other standard of performance, or that the functions or performance of the software will meet the user’s requirements. Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. Smoke detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector or heat detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to avoid injury or death.
•Alarm Notification Appliances
Alarm Notification Appliances such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an intervening wall or door. If notification appliances are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted or awakened. Audible notification appliances may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliances, or passing traffic. Audible notification appliances, however loud, may not be heard by a hearingimpaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also the telephone lines may be compromised by such things as criminal tampering, local construction, storms or earthquakes.
•Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency due to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time enough to protect the occupants or their belongings.
•Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the failure of a component.
•Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be discovered by regular testing and maintenance. The complete system should be tested as required by national standards and the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and immediately after a fire, storm, earthquake, accident, or any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating devices and any other operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not a substitute for property owners, renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.
10
MR-2300-LCD Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period,
Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly notify Secutron Inc. in writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exception that Secutron Inc. shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
•damage incurred in shipping or handling;
•damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
•damage due to causes beyond the control of Secutron Inc. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or
•water damage;
•damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
•damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Secutron Inc.);
•defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
•damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
•damage from improper maintenance;
•damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty program. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. NOTE: Unless specific pre-authorization in writing is obtained from Secutron management, no credits will be issued for custom fabricated products or parts or for complete fire alarm system. Secutron will at its sole option, repair or replace parts under warranty. Advance replacements for such items must be purchased.
Note: Secutron Inc.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) And of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Secutron Inc. neither assumes nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product.
This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are governed by the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada.
11
Warranty & Warning Information
Out of Warranty Repairs
Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron
Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time. The current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
12
WARNING: Secutron Inc. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall Secutron Inc. be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN.
Notes
© 200
7
Secutron, Inc.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
U.S.A
60 Industrial Parkway, PMB 278
Cheektowaga, New York 14227
Tel: (888) SECUTRON
(888) 732-8876
Fax: (905) 660-4113
In no event shall Secutron be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product.
Important!
Secutron recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis.
However, despite frequent testing and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected.
LT-2025 Rev. 1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main
Board for MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Alarm Control
Panel
Replacement for damaged Main Board.
Parts List
• Qty 1 ... RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board
Installing the RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board
The Main Board has removable terminal blocks which make installing a replacement easy. If possible, upload the panel’s database before beginning.
1. Power down the panel.
2. Disconnect the bridge rectifier harness and battery harness.
3. Disconnect the pluggable portion of TB’s 1-5.
4. Unplug the Expansion Module Harness (CON3), DACT/City Module Harness
(CON4) and Main Display (CON5).
5. Remove all screws and lock washers securing the Main Board to the back plate.
6. Remove the damaged Main Board and replace with the RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-
2200.
7. Secure the new Main Board with the screws and lock washers from the damaged one.
8. Re-connect AC wiring and terminals.
9. Power up the panel.
10. If the MR-2100/MR-2200 is connected to an MV-2700 system, download latest rev.
EVAX firmware.
11. Download the panel database.
NOTE: This is a replacement module for a damaged board. Battery calculations do not have to be updated.
Canada
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3
Tel: (905) 695-3545
Fax: (905) 660-4113 www.secutron.com
USA
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga, NY, 14227
Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON
Fax: 888-660-4113
Dead Front
MR-2100/MR-2200 Panel Layout
Mounting Plate
DISPLAY BD
DISPLAY HARNESS Con 5
DACT BD
OR
CITY BD
MAIN BOARD
Con 3
NAC BD
OR RELAY BD
Com4
NAC BD
OR
RELAY BD
Replace RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Main Board
LED DISPLAY
NAC BD
OR
RELAY BD
TB5
RECTIFIER
XFORMER XFORMER
(optional)
+ +
BATTERY BATTERY
T/B
-
Figure 1. RB-MR-2100/RB-MR-2200 Replacement Main Board Installation
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 9 1.0 Technical Information
- 9 1.1 Introduction
- 9 1.2 Features
- 9 1.3 Codes & Standards
- 9 1.4 Applications & Services
- 10 1.5 General Installation Requirements
- 10 1.6 System Verification
- 11 1.7 System Components
- 16 2.0 Technical Specifications
- 16 2.1 Electrical Specifications
- 19 3.0 Installation
- 19 3.1 Unpacking the MR-2100 or MR
- 19 3.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR
- 22 3.3 Internal Assembly
- 24 3.4 Wiring
- 28 3.5 Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits
- 29 3.6 Maximum Wiring Length for Bell Circuits
- 30 4.0 Appendix A Compatible Addressable Devices
- 32 5.0 Appendix B: Battery Calculations & Compatible Batteries
- 32 5.1 Battery Calculation Worksheet
- 34 5.2 Battery Selection Calculations
- 35 6.0 Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances
- 35 6.1 Wheelock
- 37 6.2 Gentex
- 37 6.3 Space Age Electronics
- 38 6.4 System Sensor
- 50 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts
- 50 1.1 Introduction
- 50 1.2 General Information
- 51 1.3 Addressable Devices
- 54 1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors
- 55 2.0 Editing NP Databases
- 55 2.1 Introduction
- 55 2.2 General Comments
- 56 2.3 System Window
- 60 2.4 Switches Window
- 62 2.5 Groups Window
- 63 2.6 Panel Window
- 66 2.7 Annunciators Window
- 67 2.8 Outputs Dialog
- 69 2.9 Options Dialog
- 78 2.10 Circuits and Devices Windows
- 83 2.11 Internal Circuits Window
- 84 2.12 Relate Window
- 86 2.13 Pushbuttons
- 87 3.0 LCD Programming
- 87 3.1 Introduction
- 87 3.2 General Comments
- 88 3.3 Menus
- 94 4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers
- 94 4.1 Introduction
- 94 4.2 List of Codes and Zone Numbers
- 100 5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation
- 101 6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal
- 101 6.1 General
- 101 6.2 Control Unit